9500 Mpr Webeml Manual 3t1tj
This document was ed by and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this report form. Report 3b7i
Overview 3e4r5l
& View 9500 Mpr Webeml Manual as PDF for free.
More details w3441
- Words: 131,497
- Pages: 986
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 WebEML Manual
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MICROWAVE PACKET RADIO WebEML Manual
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary This document contains proprietary information of Alcatel-Lucent and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements. Copyright 2016 © Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
All specifications, procedures, and information in this document are subject to change and revision at any time without notice. The information contained herein is believed to be accurate as of the date of publication. AlcatelLucent provides no warranty, express or implied, regarding its contents. s are fully responsible for application or use of the documentation. Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Copyright 2016 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved. Disclaimers Alcatel-Lucent products are intended for commercial uses. Without the appropriate network design engineering, they must not be sold, licensed or otherwise distributed for use in any hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life- machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of products could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. The customer hereby agrees that the use, sale, license or other distribution of the products for any such application without the prior written consent of Alcatel-Lucent, shall be at the customer's sole risk. The customer hereby agrees to defend and hold Alcatel-Lucent harmless from any claims for loss, cost, damage, expense or liability that may arise out of or in connection with the use, sale, license or other distribution of the products in such applications. This document may contain information regarding the use and installation of non-Alcatel-Lucent products. Please note that this information is provided as a courtesy to assist you. While Alcatel-Lucent tries to ensure that this information accurately reflects information provided by the supplier, please refer to the materials provided with any non-Alcatel-Lucent product and the supplier for confirmation. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility or liability for incorrect or incomplete information provided about non-Alcatel-Lucent products. However, this does not constitute a representation or warranty. The warranties provided for Alcatel-Lucent products, if any, are set forth in contractual documentation entered into by Alcatel-Lucent and its customers. This document was originally written in English. If there is any conflict or inconsistency between the English version and any other version of a document, the English version shall prevail. THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH D.H.H.S. RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 21 CFR, 1040.10, FOR A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT. DANGER Invisible laser radiation is present when the optic connector is open. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case s will be required to correct the interference at their own expense. Release notes describing revisions to this software may impact operations described in this manual. This transfer of commodities, technology, or software, if from the United States, is an export in accordance with the U.S. Export istration Regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. The export or re-export (further transfer) of such commodities, technology, software or products made from such technology is prohibited without proper authorization(s) from the U.S. Department of Commerce or other appropriate U.S. government agencies.
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Table of Contents Preface ............................................................................................................... 39 9500 MPR documentation ................................................................................................... 39 Related documentation ................................................................................................. 41 Naming conventions in the documentation .......................................................................... 43 Audience ...................................................................................................................... 43 Information symbols ......................................................................................................... 43 information ......................................................................................................... 44 Technical ........................................................................................................ 44 Documentation ............................................................................................... 44
1 — Safety awareness.............................................................................................. 45 1.1 — Safety EMC-EMF-ESD norms and equipment labeling ........................................................... 45 1.2 — Safety rules............................................................................................................ 45 1.2.1 — General rules ................................................................................................... 45 1.2.1.1 — Observe safety rules..................................................................................... 45 1.3 — Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command................................................................ 46 1.3.1 — Dangerous electrical voltages ................................................................................ 47 1.3.1.1 — Labeling: ................................................................................................. 47 1.3.1.2 — Safety instructions: ..................................................................................... 48 1.3.2 — Risks of explosions ............................................................................................. 48 1.3.2.1 — Labeling: ................................................................................................. 48 1.3.2.2 — Safety instructions: ..................................................................................... 48 1.3.3 — Moving mechanical parts ...................................................................................... 49 1.3.3.1 — Labeling: ................................................................................................. 49 1.3.3.2 — Safety instructions: ..................................................................................... 49 1.3.4 — Equipment connection to earth.............................................................................. 49 1.3.4.1 — Labeling: ................................................................................................. 49 1.3.4.2 — Safety instructions: ..................................................................................... 50 1.3.5 — Heat-radiating mechanical parts ............................................................................ 50 1.3.5.1 — Labeling: ................................................................................................. 50 1.3.5.2 — Safety instructions: ..................................................................................... 50 1.3.6 — Microwave radiations (EMF norms) .......................................................................... 51 1.3.6.1 — Safety instructions: ..................................................................................... 51 1.4 — Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms) ..................................................................... 52 1.4.1 — Cables: .......................................................................................................... 53 1.5 — Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges ........................................................ 54 1.6 — Cautions to avoid equipment damage ............................................................................. 54 1.6.1 — Electrostatic-sensitivity ....................................................................................... 54 1.6.1.1 — Handling cards............................................................................................ 55 1.6.2 — Screw fixing ..................................................................................................... 56 1.6.2.1 — MSS-ODU cable disconnection / connection ......................................................... 56 1.7 — Fan, equipment rack, and equipment cabinet precautions.................................................... 56 1.8 — Electrical precautions................................................................................................ 57 1.9 — Harmful optical signals .............................................................................................. 58 1.9.1 — Laser precautions .............................................................................................. 58
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
5
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
High-level procedures .................................................................................. 61 2 — High-level procedure for E1/DS1 provisioning .......................................................... 63 2.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 63 2.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 63
3 — High-level procedure for E1/DS1 deprovisioning ....................................................... 65 3.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 65 3.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 65
4 — High-level procedure for DS3 provisioning .............................................................. 67 4.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 67 4.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 67
5 — High-level procedure for DS3 deprovisioning ........................................................... 69 5.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 69 5.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 69
6 — High-level procedure for Ethernet provisioning ........................................................ 71 6.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 71 6.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 71
7 — High-level procedure for Ethernet deprovisioning ..................................................... 75 7.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 75 7.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 75
8 — High-level procedure for Ethernet LAG provisioning .................................................. 77 8.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 77 8.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 77
9 — High-level procedure for SDH provisioning .............................................................. 79 9.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 79 9.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 79
10 — High-level procedure for STM-1/OC-3 deprovisioning................................................ 81 10.1 — Purpose ............................................................................................................... 81 10.2 — Procedure ............................................................................................................ 81
11 — High-level procedure for Ethernet Ring Protection management ................................. 83 11.1 — Purpose ............................................................................................................... 83 11.2 — Procedure ............................................................................................................ 83
12 — High-level procedure for using Web Server ............................................................ 85 12.1 — Purpose ............................................................................................................... 85 12.2 — Procedure ............................................................................................................ 85
6
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
System istration.................................................................................. 87 13 — to and out of system................................................................................ 89 13.1 — 13.2 — 13.3 — 13.4 —
Purpose ............................................................................................................... 89 Prerequisite .......................................................................................................... 89 Overview ............................................................................................................. 89 Procedures ........................................................................................................... 91
14 — ister community string ........................................................................... 103 14.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................103 14.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................103 14.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................104
15 — ister external alarm points on an Auxiliary card............................................ 107 15.1 — 15.2 — 15.3 — 15.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................107 Prerequisites ........................................................................................................107 General ..............................................................................................................107 Procedures ..........................................................................................................108
16 — ister external alarm points on an MSS-1 or Enhanced Fan card ......................... 113 16.1 — 16.2 — 16.3 — 16.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................113 Prerequisites ........................................................................................................113 Overview ............................................................................................................113 Procedure ...........................................................................................................114
17 — ister In-Band TMN VLAN port.................................................................... 117 17.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................117 17.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................117 17.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................120
18 — ister network configuration ..................................................................... 125 18.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................125 18.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................125 18.2.1 — OSPF area .....................................................................................................126 18.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................128
19 — ister QoS configuration........................................................................... 139 19.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................139 19.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................139 19.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................140
20 — ister software license............................................................................. 151 20.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................151 20.2 — General ..............................................................................................................151 20.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................152
21 — ister system date and time ...................................................................... 155 21.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................155
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
7
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
21.2 — General ..............................................................................................................155 21.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................156
22 — ister system settings .............................................................................. 161 22.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................161 22.2 — General ..............................................................................................................161 22.2.1 — Tributary Port Configuration (ETSI market only) .......................................................161 22.2.2 — DH server ........................................................................................161 22.2.3 — Ethernet LOS criteria........................................................................................162 22.2.4 — Static LAG criteria ...........................................................................................162 22.2.5 — System priority parameter .................................................................................162 22.2.6 — AIS insertion for LOF detection on DS1 (ANSI market only) ...........................................163 22.2.7 — Event and alarm log .........................................................................................163 22.2.8 — NE MAC Address/Bridge Address...........................................................................164 22.2.9 — SNMP Mode....................................................................................................164 22.2.10 — Latitude and Longitude....................................................................................165 22.3 — Procedures .........................................................................................................165
23 — ister VLAN configuration ......................................................................... 171 23.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................171 23.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................171 23.2.1 — 802.1D (MAC address bridge) ..............................................................................171 23.2.2 — 802.1Q (virtual bridge) .....................................................................................172 23.2.3 — 802.1ad (Provider Bridge) ..................................................................................172 23.2.3.1 — Ethernet frames processing..........................................................................173 23.2.3.2 — Cross-connected flows processing ..................................................................173 23.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................174
24 — Local access control management ..................................................................... 183 24.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................183 24.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................183 24.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................183
25 — MIB database management (backup and restore) ................................................... 185 25.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................185 25.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................185 25.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................186
26 — Use the Ethernet Features Shell ....................................................................... 193 26.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................193 26.2 — Introduction.........................................................................................................193 26.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................193
27 — Perform a software reset ................................................................................ 195 27.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................195 27.2 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................195
8
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
28 — Configure EFM OAM ....................................................................................... 197 28.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................197 28.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................197 28.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................197
istration ....................................................................................199 29 — ister NE list ......................................................................................... 201 29.1 — 29.2 — 29.3 — 29.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................201 Prerequisite .........................................................................................................201 General ..............................................................................................................201 Procedures ..........................................................................................................201
30 — ister profiles ................................................................................. 211 30.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................211 30.2 — General ..............................................................................................................211 30.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................213
31 — Change .......................................................................................... 223 31.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................223 31.2 — General ..............................................................................................................223 31.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................224
System information ....................................................................................225 32 — View alarms................................................................................................. 227 32.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................227 32.2 — General ..............................................................................................................227 32.2.1 — Alarm manager ...............................................................................................227 32.2.2 — Web Server ...................................................................................................229 32.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................229
33 — View abnormal condition list............................................................................ 239 33.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................239 33.2 — General ..............................................................................................................239 33.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................239
34 — View NE Inventory data .................................................................................. 241 34.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................241 34.2 — General ..............................................................................................................241 34.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................242
35 — I&C parameter data .......................................................................... 255 35.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................255 35.2 — General ..............................................................................................................255 35.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................255
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
9
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
36 — View Remote Inventory .................................................................................. 257 36.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................257 36.2 — General ..............................................................................................................257 36.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................257
37 — View Event Log............................................................................................. 259 37.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................259 37.2 — General ..............................................................................................................259 37.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................259
38 — Perform debug functions using the Web Server..................................................... 263 38.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................263 38.2 — General ..............................................................................................................263 38.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................265
39 — Retrieve RSL information using the Web Server .................................................... 267 39.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................267 39.2 — General ..............................................................................................................267 39.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................267
Equipment provisioning and deprovisioning ......................................................269 40 — ister Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) .......................................................... 271 40.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................271 40.2 — General ..............................................................................................................271 40.2.1 — Modify ERP provisioning.....................................................................................271 40.2.2 — Delete ring topology.........................................................................................273 40.2.3 — Delete ERP Instance .........................................................................................273 40.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................273
41 — ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports ................................................ 281 41.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................281 41.2 — General ..............................................................................................................281 41.2.1 — Provider bridge parameters ................................................................................281 41.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................283
42 — ister synchronization ............................................................................. 305 42.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................305 42.2 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................305
43 — Provision cross connections ............................................................................. 317 43.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................317 43.2 — General ..............................................................................................................317 43.3 — PDH to radio: .......................................................................................................319 43.3.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................319 43.4 — SDH to radio:........................................................................................................320 43.4.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................320 43.5 — SDH to Ring: ........................................................................................................321
10
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
43.5.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................321 43.6 — SDH to LAG: ........................................................................................................321 43.6.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................322 43.7 — PDH to Ethernet: ...................................................................................................322 43.7.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................322 43.8 — Ethernet to radio:..................................................................................................323 43.8.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................323 43.9 — Radio to radio:......................................................................................................323 43.9.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................323 43.10 — PDH to Ring: .......................................................................................................324 43.10.1 — Prerequisites ................................................................................................324 43.11 — Radio to Ring: .....................................................................................................325 43.11.1 — Prerequisites ................................................................................................325 43.12 — Ethernet to Ring: .................................................................................................326 43.12.1 — Prerequisites ................................................................................................326 43.13 — Ring to Ring:.......................................................................................................326 43.13.1 — Prerequisites ................................................................................................326 43.13.1.1 — Icon shapes............................................................................................327 43.13.2 — Icon colors ...................................................................................................327 43.13.3 — Line colors...................................................................................................328 43.14 — Mouse operation .................................................................................................329 43.14.1 — Single right-click icon......................................................................................329 43.14.2 — Double-click on the line ...................................................................................329 43.14.3 — Double right-click on the line ............................................................................330 43.15 — Procedures .........................................................................................................331
44 — Deprovision cross connections.......................................................................... 349 44.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................349 44.2 — General ..............................................................................................................349 44.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................349
45 — Provision port segregation/connectivity .............................................................. 359 45.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................359 45.2 — General ..............................................................................................................359 45.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................363
46 — Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only) .............................................. 369 46.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................369 46.2 — General ..............................................................................................................369 46.2.1 — Service Channels Cross-connection in -through ...................................................369 46.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................370
47 — Provision Ethernet ports ................................................................................. 373 47.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................373 47.2 — General ..............................................................................................................373 47.2.1 — electrical Ethernet ports .............................................................................373 47.2.2 — optical Ethernet ports ................................................................................374 47.2.3 — Provider bridge parameters ................................................................................374 47.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................375
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
11
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
48 — Provision Ethernet Features ............................................................................ 391 48.1 — Overview ............................................................................................................391 48.1.1 — Access Control List ..........................................................................................391 48.1.2 — Out of Range VLAN swap ...................................................................................391 48.1.3 — VLAN remarking ..............................................................................................392 48.1.4 — VLAN swap ....................................................................................................392
49 — Provision equipment port................................................................................ 393 49.1 — 49.2 — 49.3 — 49.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................393 General ..............................................................................................................393 Prerequisites ........................................................................................................394 Procedures ..........................................................................................................394
50 — Deprovision equipment ports ........................................................................... 421 50.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................421 50.2 — Prerequisites ........................................................................................................421 50.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................421
51 — Enable equipment ......................................................................................... 439 51.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................439 51.2 — Prerequisites ........................................................................................................439 51.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................439
52 — Disable equipment ........................................................................................ 479 52.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................479 52.2 — Prerequisite .........................................................................................................479 52.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................479
53 — Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ............................................................ 515 53.1 — 53.2 — 53.3 — 53.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................515 Prerequisites ........................................................................................................515 General ..............................................................................................................516 Procedures ..........................................................................................................516
54 — Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software .................................................................... 527 54.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................527 54.2 — General ..............................................................................................................527 54.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................528
55 — Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring................................... 537 55.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................537 55.2 — General ..............................................................................................................537 55.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................538
56 — Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool ...................... 683 56.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................683 56.2 — General ..............................................................................................................683 56.2.1 — Ring’s Fiber Chain Description.............................................................................683
12
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
56.2.2 — Aided Cross-connection in Cross-connections ....................................................685 56.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................685
57 — Provision protection scheme parameters ............................................................ 691 57.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................691 57.2 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................691
58 — Provision Protection Type ............................................................................... 699 58.1 — 58.2 — 58.3 — 58.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................699 Prerequisites ........................................................................................................699 General ..............................................................................................................699 Procedure ...........................................................................................................700
59 — Configure radio parameters ............................................................................. 711 59.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................711 59.2 — General ..............................................................................................................711 59.2.1 — Monodirectional links .......................................................................................712 59.3 — Prerequisites ........................................................................................................713 59.4 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................713
60 — Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning .......................................................................... 801 60.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................801 60.2 — General ..............................................................................................................801 60.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................802
61 — Use the Provisioning Tool................................................................................ 807 61.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................807 61.2 — General ..............................................................................................................807 61.2.1 — Provisioning tool screens ...................................................................................807 61.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................808
62 — Apply a configuration using the Web Server ......................................................... 859 62.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................859 62.2 — General ..............................................................................................................859 62.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................859
Equipment functions...................................................................................863 63 — Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback ........................................................... 865 63.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................865 63.2 — General ..............................................................................................................865 63.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................866
64 — Digital Core Facing Loopback ........................................................................... 875 64.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................875 64.2 — General ..............................................................................................................875 64.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................876
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
13
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
65 — Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback............................................................ 879 65.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................879 65.2 — General ..............................................................................................................879 65.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................880
66 — OAM Remote Loopback ................................................................................... 889 66.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................889 66.2 — General ..............................................................................................................889 66.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................889
67 — Open and run performance monitoring ............................................................... 893 67.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................893 67.2 — General ..............................................................................................................893 67.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................894
68 — Perform protection switching........................................................................... 911 68.1 — 68.2 — 68.3 — 68.4 — 68.5 — 68.6 — 68.7 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................911 Equipment Protection Switching.................................................................................911 Rx Radio Protection Switching ...................................................................................912 Hot StandBy protection switching ...............................................................................913 Protection switching schemes per configurations.............................................................913 Protection switching commands .................................................................................914 Procedures ..........................................................................................................915
69 — Perform radio power measurements .................................................................. 935 69.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................935 69.2 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................935
70 — Radio Facing Circuit Loopback.......................................................................... 939 70.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................939 70.1.1 — General ........................................................................................................939 70.2 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................940
71 — RF Core Facing Loopback ................................................................................ 943 71.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................943 71.2 — General ..............................................................................................................943 71.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................945
72 — ister SDH LAG ...................................................................................... 953 72.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................953 72.2 — General ..............................................................................................................953 72.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................954
73 — Upgrade and downgrade protection ................................................................... 955 73.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................955 73.2 — General ..............................................................................................................955 73.2.1 — PDH protection ...............................................................................................955 73.2.2 — Radio protection .............................................................................................955
14
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
73.2.3 — Modulation scheme ..........................................................................................956 73.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................957
74 — Upgrade and downgrade radio profile................................................................. 965 74.1 — 74.2 — 74.3 — 74.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................965 General ..............................................................................................................965 Radio profile ........................................................................................................965 Procedures ..........................................................................................................966
75 — Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port ............................................................. 969 75.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................969 75.2 — General ..............................................................................................................969 75.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................971
76 — Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port ......................................................... 975 76.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................975 76.2 — General ..............................................................................................................975 76.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................976
77 — Perform Tx Diversity Antenna operations ............................................................ 979 77.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................979 77.2 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................979
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
15
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
16
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
List of Tables Preface ............................................................................................................... 39 Table 1 — 9500 MPR documentation ..................................................................................... 39 Table 2 — 9500 MPR related documentation............................................................................ 41 Table 3 — Naming conventions ........................................................................................... 43
30 — ister profiles ................................................................................. 211 Table 30.1 — Default profiles ............................................................................212
38 — Perform debug functions using the Web Server..................................................... 263 Table 38.1 — Association of the GExx in the command output and the NE port .................................264
59 — Configure radio parameters ............................................................................. 711 Table 59.1 — Configurations in monodirectional links ...............................................................712
68 — Perform protection switching........................................................................... 911 Table 68.1 — Command priority list .....................................................................................914
75 — Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port ............................................................. 969 Table 75.1 — MPT-HL L1 LAG bandwidth per service type ...........................................................970
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
17
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
18
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
List of Figures 1 — Safety awareness.............................................................................................. 45 Figure 1.1 — Dangerous voltage ........................................................................................... 47 Figure 1.2 — Ground protection warning ................................................................................. 47 Figure 1.3 — Risk of explosion ............................................................................................. 48 Figure 1.4 — Openings must be covered.................................................................................. 49 Figure 1.5 — Moving mechanical parts.................................................................................... 49 Figure 1.6 — Equipment connection to earth............................................................................ 50 Figure 1.7 — Heat-radiating mechanical parts .......................................................................... 50 Figure 1.8 — EMF emission warning ....................................................................................... 51 Figure 1.9 — Compliance boundaries for 9500 MPR-A transceivers with 1ft (30 cm) antenna ................... 52 Figure 1.10 — EMC norms ................................................................................................... 52 Figure 1.11 — Electrostatic sensitive ..................................................................................... 54 Figure 1.12 — Electrostatic-sensitive sign................................................................................ 55 Figure 1.13 — Electrostatic protection kit ............................................................................... 56 Figure 1.14 — Class 1 laser ................................................................................................. 58
13 — to and out of system................................................................................ 89 Figure 13.1 — WebEML icon ................................................................................................ 92 Figure 13.2 — NEtO Servers Manager window ........................................................................... 92 Figure 13.3 — NEtO overview window .................................................................................... 93 Figure 13.4 — NEtO window ......................................................................................... 94 Figure 13.5 — Acknowledgment of authorization ....................................................................... 94 Figure 13.6 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen MSS-8 shelf ........................................................... 95 Figure 13.7 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen MSS-4 shelf ........................................................... 96 Figure 13.8 — JUSM 9500 MPR main screen MSS-1 shelf................................................................ 97 Figure 13.9 — JUSM 9500 MPR main screen MSS-O shelf ............................................................... 98 Figure 13.10 — Close JUSM 9500 MPR main screen ..................................................................... 98 Figure 13.11 — Close NEtO Servers Manager window................................................................... 99 Figure 13.12 — 9500 MPR web interface webpage .............................................................100 Figure 13.13 — Web server main menu ..................................................................................101
14 — ister community string ........................................................................... 103 Figure 14.1 — Web Server Community Strings setting view ..........................................................104 Figure 14.2 — NEtO Community Strings Request icon .................................................................105 Figure 14.3 — NEtO Community Strings Request window .............................................................105
15 — ister external alarm points on an Auxiliary card............................................ 107 Figure 15.1 Figure 15.2 Figure 15.3 Figure 15.4 Figure 15.5
— — — — —
External Alarm Input Setting tab........................................................................108 External alarm inputs provisioned ......................................................................109 External Alarm Output setting tab ......................................................................110 External Alarm Outputs provisioned ....................................................................111 External Alarm Output Provisioned ON.................................................................112
16 — ister external alarm points on an MSS-1 or Enhanced Fan card ......................... 113 Figure 16.1 — External Alarm Input Setting tab........................................................................114
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
19
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 16.2 — External alarm inputs provisioned ......................................................................115
17 — ister In-Band TMN VLAN port.................................................................... 117 Figure 17.1 Figure 17.2 Figure 17.3 Figure 17.4
— — — —
9500 MPR Equipment tab: Core-E Card selected .....................................................120 TMN In-band Settings tab.................................................................................121 TMN In-band Port Enabled ...............................................................................122 TMN In-band Port Disabled ...............................................................................123
18 — ister network configuration ..................................................................... 125 Figure 18.1 — Local Configuration main menu bar path ..............................................................128 Figure 18.2 — Local Configuration (IP Address) window ..............................................................128 Figure 18.3 — 9500 MPR Equipment tab: Core-E card selected ......................................................129 Figure 18.4 — TMN Ethernet interface: Settings tab ..................................................................130 Figure 18.5 — Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface: Settings tab .........................................................131 Figure 18.6 — IP Static Routing Configuration main menu bar path ................................................132 Figure 18.7 — IP Static Routing Configuration window (IPv4) ........................................................133 Figure 18.8 — IP Static Routing Configuration window (IPv6) ........................................................134 Figure 18.9 — OSPF Area Configuration main menu bar path ........................................................135 Figure 18.10 — OSPF Area Configuration window (IPv4) ..............................................................135 Figure 18.11 — OSPFv3 Area Configuration window (IPv6) ...........................................................136 Figure 18.12 — Activate IPv6 stack main menu bar path .............................................................137 Figure 18.13 — Activate IPv6 stack warning ............................................................................137 Figure 18.14 — Routing Information main menu bar path ............................................................137 Figure 18.15 — IP Routing Information window ........................................................................138
19 — ister QoS configuration........................................................................... 139 Figure 19.1 — QoS Configuration icon ...................................................................................140 Figure 19.2 — QoS Configuration tool....................................................................................141 Figure 19.3 — Provision Queue Scheduler algorithm ..................................................................141 Figure 19.4 — Provisioned Queue Scheduler algorithm ...............................................................142 Figure 19.5 — Restore Queue Scheduler algorithm default values ..................................................142 Figure 19.6 — Provisioned Queue Scheduler algorithm ...............................................................143 Figure 19.7 — Queue Size Configuration Tab ...........................................................................143 Figure 19.8 — Provision Queue Size ......................................................................................144 Figure 19.9 — Provisioned Queue Size ...................................................................................144 Figure 19.10 — Copied Radio Direction queue sizes ...................................................................145 Figure 19.11 — Restore Queue Size default values ....................................................................146 Figure 19.12 — QoS Classification Tab ...................................................................................146 Figure 19.13 — Select QoS Classification Criterion ....................................................................147 Figure 19.14 — Provisioned QoS Classification Criterion ..............................................................147 Figure 19.15 — Provision 802.1p P to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping ......................................148 Figure 19.16 — Provisioned 802.1p P to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping ...................................148 Figure 19.17 — Provision DiffServ DS to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping....................................149 Figure 19.18 — Provisioned DiffServ DS to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping.................................149
20 — ister software license............................................................................. 151 Figure 20.1 — SW License main menu bar path ........................................................................152 Figure 20.2 — SW License window........................................................................................152 Figure 20.3 — 9500 MPR Web Server - License Info ....................................................................153
20
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
21 — ister system date and time ...................................................................... 155 Figure 21.1 Figure 21.2 Figure 21.3 Figure 21.4 Figure 21.5 Figure 21.6
— NE Time main menu bar path............................................................................156 — NE Time Configuration window..........................................................................157 — 9500 MPR Web Server date & time setting window ..................................................158 — NE Time Configuration window..........................................................................158 — NTP Configuration drop-down menu....................................................................159 — NTP Configuration window ...............................................................................160
22 — ister system settings .............................................................................. 161 Figure 22.1 Figure 22.2 Figure 22.3 Figure 22.4
— — — —
System Settings tab (ANSI market)......................................................................166 System Settings menu (ETSI market) ...................................................................167 9500 MPR Web Server - DH Setting ..................................................................168 9500 MPR Web Server - Snmp Version ..................................................................170
23 — ister VLAN configuration ......................................................................... 171 Figure 23.1 — VLAN Configuration icon..................................................................................174 Figure 23.2 — VLAN Configuration window with Core-E card in use ................................................175 Figure 23.3 — VLAN Configuration window with CorEvo card in use ................................................175 Figure 23.4 — VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1D ...............................................................176 Figure 23.5 — VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1Q ...............................................................177 Figure 23.6 — VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1ad ..............................................................177 Figure 23.7 — Create VLAN window ......................................................................................178 Figure 23.8 — New VLAN created.........................................................................................179 Figure 23.9 — Edit VLAN window .........................................................................................179 Figure 23.10 — Filter VLAN configuration table ........................................................................180 Figure 23.11 — VLAN Configuration table filtered .....................................................................181
24 — Local access control management ..................................................................... 183 Figure 24.1 Figure 24.2 Figure 24.3 Figure 24.4
— — — —
Local Access Control - main menu bar path ...........................................................184 Lock (Local Access) Status Denied icon ................................................................184 Local Access Control - main menu bar path ...........................................................184 Lock (Local Access) Status Granted icon...............................................................184
25 — MIB database management (backup and restore) ................................................... 185 Figure 25.1 Figure 25.2 Figure 25.3 Figure 25.4 Figure 25.5
— Backup MIB Management database main menu bar path ............................................187 — Protocol Selection window ...............................................................................187 — Backup MIB Management database dialog box ........................................................187 — Restore / Activate MIB Management Database main menu bar path ..............................189 — Restore MIB Management Database window...........................................................189
27 — Perform a software reset ................................................................................ 195 Figure 27.1 — Restart MPT.................................................................................................196
28 — Configure EFM OAM ....................................................................................... 197 Figure 28.1 — ETH OAM window ..........................................................................................198
29 — ister NE list ......................................................................................... 201 Figure 29.1 — New icon ....................................................................................................202
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
21
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 29.2 — Network Elements List window ..........................................................................202 Figure 29.3 — NE List Save window ......................................................................................203 Figure 29.4 — Network Elements List window ..........................................................................203 Figure 29.5 — Network Elements List window: Current NE added ..................................................204 Figure 29.6 — Network Elements List window ..........................................................................205 Figure 29.7 — Open icon ...................................................................................................206 Figure 29.8 — Open window ...............................................................................................206 Figure 29.9 — Network ElemenT List window ..........................................................................207 Figure 29.10 — NEtO Overview window .................................................................................207 Figure 29.11 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen .......................................................................208 Figure 29.12 — Favorite icon ..............................................................................................208 Figure 29.13 — Network ElemenT List window .........................................................................209 Figure 29.14 — NEtO Overview window .................................................................................209 Figure 29.15 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen .......................................................................210
30 — ister profiles ................................................................................. 211 Figure 30.1 — management main menu bar path ................................................................213 Figure 30.2 — Profile management window ............................................................................213 Figure 30.3 — Create window .......................................................................................214 Figure 30.4 — Profile management window - with added ......................................................215 Figure 30.5 — USM management main menu bar path ..........................................................215 Figure 30.6 — USM s Management window.........................................................................216 Figure 30.7 — USM cloning ...................................................................................217 Figure 30.8 — USM s Management window - with added ..................................................218 Figure 30.9 — Profile management window ............................................................................218 Figure 30.10 — Delete window ......................................................................................219 Figure 30.11 — Profile management window - with deleted ...................................................219 Figure 30.12 — Profile management window ...........................................................................220 Figure 30.13 — Change window .........................................................................221 Figure 30.14 — USM Change .....................................................................222
31 — Change .......................................................................................... 223 Figure 31.1 — Change main menu bar path .................................................................224 Figure 31.2 — Changing window ..............................................................................224
32 — View alarms................................................................................................. 227 Figure 32.1 Figure 32.2 Figure 32.3 Figure 32.4 Figure 32.5 Figure 32.6 Figure 32.7 Figure 32.8
— — — — — — — —
NE Alarms Main Menu Bar path ..........................................................................230 Alarm Monitor window ....................................................................................231 Alarm Manager: Current Alarms major tab ............................................................232 Alarm Manager New Filter window .....................................................................232 Alarm Manager Delete Filters window..................................................................234 Alarm Manager Save Filters As window.................................................................235 Alarm Manager Load Filters From window .............................................................236 Web Server Active Alarms webpage ....................................................................237
33 — View abnormal condition list............................................................................ 239 Figure 33.1 — Abnormal Condition List main menu bar path.........................................................240 Figure 33.2 — Abnormal Condition List window ........................................................................240
22
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
34 — View NE Inventory data .................................................................................. 241 Figure 34.1 Figure 34.2 Figure 34.3 Figure 34.4
— — — —
NE Inventory main menu bar path ......................................................................242 Diagnosis / NE Inventory window .......................................................................243 Web Server main webpage ...............................................................................244 NE Inventory File window....................................................................244
35 — I&C parameter data .......................................................................... 255 Figure 35.1 — I&C Parameters main menu bar path ...................................................................255
36 — View Remote Inventory .................................................................................. 257 Figure 36.1 — Remote Inventory main menu bar path ................................................................258 Figure 36.2 — Remote Inventory View window .........................................................................258
37 — View Event Log............................................................................................. 259 Figure 37.1 — Event Log Main Menu Bar Path...........................................................................260 Figure 37.2 — Event Log Browser Window ..............................................................................260
38 — Perform debug functions using the Web Server..................................................... 263 Figure 38.1 — Debug info ..................................................................................................265
40 — ister Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) .......................................................... 271 Figure 40.1 Figure 40.2 Figure 40.3 Figure 40.4 Figure 40.5 Figure 40.6
— — — — — —
Ethernet Ring Configuration View icon.................................................................274 Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration View .........................................................274 Modify ERP Instance with ERP Instance enabled......................................................275 Modify ERP Instance with ERP Instance disabled .....................................................276 Add VLAN IDs to ERP Instance ...........................................................................278 Delete VLAN IDs from ERP Instance .....................................................................279
41 — ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports ................................................ 281 Figure 41.1 — LAG Configuration icon ...................................................................................283 Figure 41.2 — LAG Configuration tool....................................................................................284 Figure 41.3 — LAG Creation window .....................................................................................288 Figure 41.4 — L2 Ethernet LAG created .................................................................................289 Figure 41.5 — Add radio ports to L1 radio LAG .........................................................................290 Figure 41.6 — Add radio ports to L2 radio LAG .........................................................................291 Figure 41.7 — Add Ethernet ports to Ethernet LAG....................................................................292 Figure 41.8 — Remove L1 radio ports from LAG port..................................................................293 Figure 41.9 — Remove L2 radio ports from LAG port..................................................................294 Figure 41.10 — Remove Ethernet ports from LAG port................................................................295 Figure 41.11 — Enable/disable LAG port ...............................................................................296 Figure 41.12 — Provider bridge tab ......................................................................................297 Figure 41.13 — ister Ethernet LAG VLAN configuration .......................................................298 Figure 41.14 — Enable PPP RF on L1/L2 radio LAG configuration ...................................................300 Figure 41.15 — Provision hashing level for L2 Ethernet/radio LAG port............................................301 Figure 41.16 — L1 radio LAG configuration .............................................................................302
42 — ister synchronization ............................................................................. 305 Figure 42.1 — Synchronization settings tab with Core-E (1588TC license present)...............................306
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
23
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 42.2 — Synchronization settings tab with CorEvo (1588TC license and Sync In/Out SFP not present) ..................................................................................................306 Figure 42.3 — Synchronization Protection tab..........................................................................307 Figure 42.4 — 1588 tab.....................................................................................................308 Figure 42.5 — Sync Ports with Sync-In/Out SFP ........................................................................310 Figure 42.6 — Synchronization - Master / Revertive...................................................................311 Figure 42.7 — Synchronization - Slave / Revertive ....................................................................313 Figure 42.8 — SSM Summary table........................................................................................314 Figure 42.9 — MPT-HL Radio Channel Additional Settings tab .......................................................315
43 — Provision cross connections ............................................................................. 317 Figure 43.1 — MSS-4/8 Cross-Connections screen......................................................................318 Figure 43.2 — MSS-1 Cross-Connections screen.........................................................................319 Figure 43.3 — Cross-Connection port icons .............................................................................327 Figure 43.4 — Cross Connection: Line Color detail ....................................................................328 Figure 43.5 — Cross Connection: single right-click icon detail.......................................................329 Figure 43.6 — Cross Connection: double left-click line detail .......................................................330 Figure 43.7 — Cross Connection: Double right-click line detail......................................................330 Figure 43.8 — Configuration Cross Connection window ...............................................................332 Figure 43.9 — PDH-RADIO Cross Connection ............................................................................333 Figure 43.10 — PDH to Ethernet Cross Connection ....................................................................334 Figure 43.11 — SDH-RADIO Cross Connection ...........................................................................335 Figure 43.12 — SDH-RING Cross Connection ............................................................................336 Figure 43.13 — SDH to LAG configuration dialog .......................................................................337 Figure 43.14 — Completed SDH to LAG cross-connection.............................................................338 Figure 43.15 — Ethernet to Radio Cross Connection...................................................................339 Figure 43.16 — Radio (P8ETH) to Radio (P8ETH) Cross Connection .................................................340 Figure 43.17 — Radio (P8ETH) to Radio (MPTACC) Cross Connection ...............................................341 Figure 43.18 — PDH to RING Cross Connection .........................................................................342 Figure 43.19 — Radio to Ring Cross Connection ........................................................................343 Figure 43.20 — Ethernet to Ring Cross Connection ....................................................................345 Figure 43.21 — Ring to Ring Cross Connection..........................................................................346
44 — Deprovision cross connections.......................................................................... 349 Figure 44.1 — Cross Connection window ................................................................................350 Figure 44.2 — PDH-RADIO cross connection.............................................................................351 Figure 44.3 — PDH to Ethernet cross connection ......................................................................352 Figure 44.4 — STM-1(OC-3)-RADIO cross connection...................................................................353 Figure 44.5 — Ethernet to Radio cross connection.....................................................................354 Figure 44.6 — Radio to Radio cross connection ........................................................................354 Figure 44.7 — PDH to RING cross connection ...........................................................................355 Figure 44.8 — Radio to Ring cross connection ..........................................................................356 Figure 44.9 — Ethernet to Ring cross connection ......................................................................357 Figure 44.10 — Ring to Ring cross connection ..........................................................................358
45 — Provision port segregation/connectivity .............................................................. 359 Figure 45.1 — Port Segregation dialog box, P8ETH port 3.5 .........................................................361 Figure 45.2 — Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel P8ETH MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio ports .................362 Figure 45.3 — Port Segregation dialog box, Core-E port 1.5 .........................................................362
24
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 45.4 — Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel Core-E MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio ports .................363 Figure 45.5 — Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel MPTACC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio ports ...........................................................363 Figure 45.6 — Segregated Ports icon .....................................................................................364 Figure 45.7 — Segregated Ports window.................................................................................364 Figure 45.8 — Segregated Port - Port Provisioning pop-up ...........................................................365 Figure 45.9 — Segregated port - Slot Provisioning dialog box........................................................365 Figure 45.10 — Segregated Port Window W/Slot 3 Port 2 segregated from Slot 4 ports.........................366 Figure 45.11 — Segregated Port Window W/Slot 4 segregated From Core-E port 5 ..............................367
46 — Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only) .............................................. 369 Figure 46.1 — Auxiliary Cross Connections menu ......................................................................370 Figure 46.2 — New AUX Cross Connection...............................................................................371 Figure 46.3 — Delete an AUX Cross Connection ........................................................................371
47 — Provision Ethernet ports ................................................................................. 373 Figure 47.1 — 9500 MPR equipment tab: Core-E card selected .....................................................377 Figure 47.2 — Core-E main view: Ethernet Physical Interface Settings tab (ports 1 to 4).......................378 Figure 47.3 — Enable/disable Core-E/P8ETH/EASv2/MSS-O Ethernet port ........................................379 Figure 47.4 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet physical interface ............................................380 Figure 47.5 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet port VLAN configuration parameters .......................381 Figure 47.6 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O synchronous Ethernet operation mode ...............................382 Figure 47.7 — Provision the Hold Off parameter .......................................................................383 Figure 47.8 — Provision provider bridge ................................................................................384 Figure 47.9 — Provisioned UNI (VLAN-based) port .....................................................................385 Figure 47.10 — Provision Core/EAS rate limiting by port .............................................................386 Figure 47.11 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet port storm control ...........................................387 Figure 47.12 — Provision ingress rate limiting by VLAN ...............................................................388 Figure 47.13 — Provision Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiting ............................................................389 Figure 47.14 — Delete Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiting ...............................................................390
49 — Provision equipment port................................................................................ 393 Figure 49.1 — Resource list area: Core-E SFP slot selected ..........................................................395 Figure 49.2 — Provision Core-E SFP port ................................................................................395 Figure 49.3 — Provisioned Core-E SFP port .............................................................................396 Figure 49.4 — Resource list area: CorEvo SFP slot selected ..........................................................397 Figure 49.5 — Provision CorEvo Sync-In/Out SFP port.................................................................398 Figure 49.6 — Resource list area: MSS-1 selected......................................................................399 Figure 49.7 — Provision MSS-1 Sync-In/Out SFP port ..................................................................399 Figure 49.8 — Resource list area: P8ETH selected .....................................................................400 Figure 49.9 — Provision P8ETH SFP ports................................................................................401 Figure 49.10 — Provision EASv2 SFP ports ...............................................................................401 Figure 49.11 — Provisioned P8ETH SFP port ............................................................................402 Figure 49.12 — PDH main view (ETSI market) ..........................................................................403 Figure 49.13 — Resource list area: P32E1DS1 selected ...............................................................405 Figure 49.14 — Provision P32E1DS1 port ................................................................................406 Figure 49.15 — Provisioned P32E1DS1 TDM2TDM DS1 port............................................................407 Figure 49.16 — Provisioned P32E1DS1 DS1 TDM2ETH port ............................................................408 Figure 49.17 — Resource list area: P2E3DS3 selected .................................................................409
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
25
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 49.18 Figure 49.19 Figure 49.20 Figure 49.21 Figure 49.22 Figure 49.23 Figure 49.24 Figure 49.25 Figure 49.26
— — — — — — — — —
Provision P2E3DS3 DS3 port ............................................................................410 Provisioned P2E3DS3 TDM2TDM DS3 port .............................................................411 Provisioned P2E3DS3 TDM2ETH DS3 port .............................................................412 Resource list area: SDHACC selected .................................................................413 Provisioned SDHACC SFP port ..........................................................................414 Provision SDHACC OC-3 port ............................................................................415 Provisioned SDHACC optical OC-3 port................................................................417 Provisioned SDHACC electrical OC-3 port ............................................................418 SDHCHANN main view ...................................................................................419
50 — Deprovision equipment ports ........................................................................... 421 Figure 50.1 — Resource list area: Core-E SFP slot selected ..........................................................422 Figure 50.2 — Provisioned Core-E SFP Port #5..........................................................................423 Figure 50.3 — Deprovisioned Core-E SFP Port#5 .......................................................................424 Figure 50.4 — Resource list area: P8ETH selected .....................................................................425 Figure 50.5 — Provisioned P8ETH ports..................................................................................425 Figure 50.6 — Provisioned EASv2 ports ..................................................................................426 Figure 50.7 — Deprovisioned P8ETH SFP port...........................................................................427 Figure 50.8 — Resource list area: P32E1DS1 selected .................................................................428 Figure 50.9 — Provisioned P32E1DS1 DS1................................................................................429 Figure 50.10 — Deprovision P32E1DS1 DS1 port ........................................................................430 Figure 50.11 — Deprovisioned P32E1DS1 DS1 port .....................................................................431 Figure 50.12 — Resource list area: P2E3DS3 selected .................................................................432 Figure 50.13 — Provisioned P2E3DS3 .....................................................................................433 Figure 50.14 — Deprovision P2E3DS3 port...............................................................................434 Figure 50.15 — Deprovisioned P2E3DS3 ports...........................................................................435 Figure 50.16 — Resource list area: SDHACC selected .................................................................436 Figure 50.17 — Provisioned SDHACC .....................................................................................437 Figure 50.18 — Deprovisioned SDHACC ports ...........................................................................438
51 — Enable equipment ......................................................................................... 439 Figure 51.1 — Select slot 2 to enable spare Core-E....................................................................440 Figure 51.2 — Select spare Core-E equipment type ...................................................................441 Figure 51.3 — Spare Core-E enabled .....................................................................................442 Figure 51.4 — Select slot to enable P8ETH..............................................................................443 Figure 51.5 — Select P8ETH equipment type ...........................................................................444 Figure 51.6 — P8ETH enabled .............................................................................................444 Figure 51.7 — Select slot to enable EASv2 ..............................................................................445 Figure 51.8 — Select EASv2 equipment type............................................................................446 Figure 51.9 — EASv2 enabled..............................................................................................447 Figure 51.10 — Select slot associated with MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver to enable ............................448 Figure 51.11 — Select MPT-HL/MPT-HLC equipment type ............................................................448 Figure 51.12 — Enabled MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver ...............................................................449 Figure 51.13 — Resource list area: Core-E selected ...................................................................450 Figure 51.14 — Provision Core-E MPT-HL/MPT-HLC ports.............................................................450 Figure 51.15 — Enabled MPT-HL/MPT-HLC on Core-E .................................................................451 Figure 51.16 — Select slot to enable P32E1DS1 ........................................................................452 Figure 51.17 — Select P32EDS1 equipment type .......................................................................453 Figure 51.18 — P32E1DS1 enabled........................................................................................453
26
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 51.19 Figure 51.20 Figure 51.21 Figure 51.22 Figure 51.23 Figure 51.24 Figure 51.25 Figure 51.26 Figure 51.27 Figure 51.28 Figure 51.29 Figure 51.30 Figure 51.31 Figure 51.32 Figure 51.33 Figure 51.34 Figure 51.35 Figure 51.36 Figure 51.37 Figure 51.38 Figure 51.39 Figure 51.40 Figure 51.41 Figure 51.42 Figure 51.43 Figure 51.44
— Select slot to enable P2E3DS3..........................................................................454 — Select P2E3DS3 equipment type .......................................................................455 — P2E3DS3 enabled .........................................................................................456 — Select slot to enable SDHACC or SDHCHANN .........................................................457 — Select SDHACC equipment type........................................................................458 — SDHACC enabled..........................................................................................459 — Select slot to enable MPTACC ..........................................................................460 — Select MPTACC equipment type .......................................................................461 — MPTACC enabled .........................................................................................461 — Resource list area: MPTACC selected .................................................................462 — Provision MPTACC port ..................................................................................463 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on MPTACC .....................................................................464 — Resource list area: Core-E selected ...................................................................465 — Provision Core-E MPT-HC/XP optical SFP Ethernet port............................................466 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port .......................................467 — Provision Core-E MPT-HC electrical Ethernet port ..................................................468 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E electrical Ethernet port .........................................469 — Resource list area: P8ETH selected ...................................................................470 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH optical Ethernet port ............................................471 — Select Slot#8 to enable auxiliary card ................................................................472 — Select AUX equipment type ............................................................................472 — Auxiliary card enabled...................................................................................473 — Enable the subrack for an MPT-HLS radio ............................................................474 — Enable the MPT-HLS radio ..............................................................................475 — Enable the MPT-HLS fan.................................................................................476 — Enabling Fan Unit ........................................................................................477
52 — Disable equipment ........................................................................................ 479 Figure 52.1 — Enabled spare Core-E .....................................................................................480 Figure 52.2 — Disable spare Core-E ......................................................................................481 Figure 52.3 — Spare Core-E disabled.....................................................................................482 Figure 52.4 — Enabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver .............................................................483 Figure 52.5 — Disable MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver ...............................................................483 Figure 52.6 — Disabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver..............................................................484 Figure 52.7 — Enabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver .............................................................485 Figure 52.8 — Disable MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver ...............................................................485 Figure 52.9 — Disabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver..............................................................486 Figure 52.10 — Enabled P8ETH............................................................................................487 Figure 52.11 — Disable P8ETH ............................................................................................487 Figure 52.12 — P8ETH disabled ...........................................................................................488 Figure 52.13 — Enabled EASv2 ...........................................................................................489 Figure 52.14 — Disable EASv2 .............................................................................................490 Figure 52.15 — EASv2 disabled ............................................................................................491 Figure 52.16 — Enabled P32E1DS1........................................................................................492 Figure 52.17 — Disable P32E1DS1.........................................................................................493 Figure 52.18 — Disabled P32E1DS1 .......................................................................................494 Figure 52.19 — Enabled P2E3DS3 .........................................................................................495 Figure 52.20 — Disable P2E3DS3 ..........................................................................................496 Figure 52.21 — Disabled P2E3DS3.........................................................................................497
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
27
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 52.22 Figure 52.23 Figure 52.24 Figure 52.25 Figure 52.26 Figure 52.27 Figure 52.28 Figure 52.29 Figure 52.30 Figure 52.31 Figure 52.32 Figure 52.33 Figure 52.34 Figure 52.35 Figure 52.36 Figure 52.37 Figure 52.38 Figure 52.39 Figure 52.40 Figure 52.41
— Enabled SDHACC..........................................................................................498 — Disable SDHACC...........................................................................................499 — Disabled SDHACC .........................................................................................500 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU ...................................................................................501 — Disable MPT-HC ODU.....................................................................................501 — Disabled MPT-HC ODU ...................................................................................502 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E .......................................................................503 — Disable MPT-HC ODU from Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port .....................................504 — Disabled MPT-HC ODU from Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port ....................................505 — Deprovision MPT-HC from Core-E electrical Ethernet port ........................................505 — Disabled MPT-HC ODU from Core-E electrical Ethernet port ......................................506 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH .......................................................................507 — Disable MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH ........................................................................507 — Disabled MPT ODU from P8ETH ........................................................................508 — Enabled MPTACC .........................................................................................509 — Disable MPTACC ..........................................................................................510 — Disabled MPTACC .........................................................................................511 — Enabled auxiliary card...................................................................................512 — Disable auxiliary card....................................................................................513 — Disabled auxiliary card ..................................................................................514
53 — Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ............................................................ 515 Figure 53.1 Figure 53.2 Figure 53.3 Figure 53.4 Figure 53.5 Figure 53.6 Figure 53.7 Figure 53.8 Figure 53.9
— Ethernet Ring Configuration view icon .................................................................517 — Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration view .........................................................517 — ERP Topology creation ....................................................................................518 — ERP Topology created.....................................................................................519 — ERP Instance creation .....................................................................................520 — ERP Instance created......................................................................................521 — Two ERP Instances created...............................................................................521 — Add PDH VLAN IDs to ERP Instance......................................................................523 — OAM switching criteria ....................................................................................525
54 — Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software .................................................................... 527 Figure 54.1 Figure 54.2 Figure 54.3 Figure 54.4 Figure 54.5 Figure 54.6 Figure 54.7 Figure 54.8 Figure 54.9
— — — — — — — — —
Ring example for upgrade ................................................................................528 Activate Tx mute to Node C .............................................................................529 Activate software on Node B.............................................................................530 Remove Tx mute to Node C ..............................................................................531 Activate Tx mute and activate SW on Node C.........................................................532 Remove Tx mute to Node D ..............................................................................533 Activate Tx mute and activate SW on Node D ........................................................534 Remove Tx mute to Node A ..............................................................................535 Remove Tx mute to Node A ..............................................................................536
55 — Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring................................... 537 Figure 55.1 Figure 55.2 Figure 55.3 Figure 55.4 Figure 55.5
28
— — — — —
Sample mixed fiber/microwave Ring ...................................................................538 Cross-connection between Node J and Node K .......................................................539 Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node A ......................................540 Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node B ......................................541 Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node C ......................................542
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 55.6 — Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node D ......................................543 Figure 55.7 — Cross-connection between Node J and Node D .......................................................544 Figure 55.8 — Node J to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node A ......................................544 Figure 55.9 — Node J to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node B ......................................545 Figure 55.10 — Node J to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node C.....................................546 Figure 55.11 — Node J to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D .......................................547 Figure 55.12 — Node J to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D .........................................547 Figure 55.13 — Cross-connection between Node J and Node D (protected) .......................................548 Figure 55.14 — Node J to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A ......................549 Figure 55.15 — Node J to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B ......................550 Figure 55.16 — Node J to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C ......................551 Figure 55.17 — Node J to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D ........................552 Figure 55.18 — Node J to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D ..........................552 Figure 55.19 — Cross-connection between Node K and Node B......................................................553 Figure 55.20 — Node K to Node B: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B .......................................554 Figure 55.21 — Node K to Node B: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B .........................................554 Figure 55.22 — Node K to Node B: -through cross-connection on Node A.....................................555 Figure 55.23 — Node K to Node B: -through cross-connection on Node C.....................................556 Figure 55.24 — Node K to Node B: -through cross-connection on Node D.....................................557 Figure 55.25 — Cross-connection between Node K and Node B (protected) .......................................558 Figure 55.26 — Node K to Node B (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B ........................558 Figure 55.27 — Node K to Node B (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B ..........................559 Figure 55.28 — Node K to Node B (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A......................560 Figure 55.29 — Node K to Node B (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C......................561 Figure 55.30 — Node K to Node B (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D......................562 Figure 55.31 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE G .........................................................563 Figure 55.32 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G.........................................564 Figure 55.33 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G ..........................................565 Figure 55.34 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C .......................................566 Figure 55.35 — Node I to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node A ........................................567 Figure 55.36 — Node I to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node B ........................................568 Figure 55.37 — Node I to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node D ........................................569 Figure 55.38 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE G (protected) ..........................................570 Figure 55.39 — Node I to NE G (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G..........................571 Figure 55.40 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G ..........................................572 Figure 55.41 — Node I to NE G (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C ........................573 Figure 55.42 — Node I to NE G (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A .........................574 Figure 55.43 — Node I to NE G (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B .........................575 Figure 55.44 — Node I to NE G (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D .........................576 Figure 55.45 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE E..........................................................577 Figure 55.46 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E .........................................578 Figure 55.47 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E...........................................579 Figure 55.48 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A .......................................580 Figure 55.49 — Node I to NE E: -through cross-connection on Node B.........................................581 Figure 55.50 — Node I to NE E: -through cross-connection on Node C ........................................582 Figure 55.51 — Node I to NE E: -through cross-connection on Node D ........................................583 Figure 55.52 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE E (protected)...........................................584 Figure 55.53 — Node I to NE E (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E ..........................585 Figure 55.54 — Node I to NE E (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E ............................586
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
29
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 55.55 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A .......................................587 Figure 55.56 — Node I to NE E (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B..........................588 Figure 55.57 — Node I to NE E (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C..........................589 Figure 55.58 — Node I to NE E (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D..........................590 Figure 55.59 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node D .....................................................591 Figure 55.60 — Node A to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A .......................................591 Figure 55.61 — Node A to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A .........................................592 Figure 55.62 — Node A to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node B ....................................593 Figure 55.63 — Node A to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node C ....................................594 Figure 55.64 — Node A to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D .......................................595 Figure 55.65 — Node A to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D.........................................595 Figure 55.66 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node D (protected).......................................596 Figure 55.67 — Node A to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A ........................597 Figure 55.68 — Node A to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A ..........................597 Figure 55.69 — Node A to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B......................598 Figure 55.70 — Node A to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C......................599 Figure 55.71 — Node A to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D ........................600 Figure 55.72 — Node A to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D ..........................600 Figure 55.73 — Cross-connection between Node A (protected) and Node D (protected) ........................601 Figure 55.74 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A .........602 Figure 55.75 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A ...........602 Figure 55.76 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B ........................................................................................................603 Figure 55.77 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C ........................................................................................................604 Figure 55.78 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D .........605 Figure 55.79 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D ...........605 Figure 55.80 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node C......................................................606 Figure 55.81 — Node A to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A .......................................607 Figure 55.82 — Node A to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A .........................................607 Figure 55.83 — Node A to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node B.....................................608 Figure 55.84 — Node A to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C .......................................609 Figure 55.85 — Node A to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C .........................................609 Figure 55.86 — Node A to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D ....................................610 Figure 55.87 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node C (protected).......................................611 Figure 55.88 — Node A to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A ........................611 Figure 55.89 — Node A to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A ..........................612 Figure 55.90 — Node A to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node B.....................................613 Figure 55.91 — Node A to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C ........................614 Figure 55.92 — Node A to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C ..........................614 Figure 55.93 — Node A to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D......................615 Figure 55.94 — Cross-connection between Node B and Node C......................................................616 Figure 55.95 — Node B to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B .......................................616 Figure 55.96 — Node B to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B .........................................617 Figure 55.97 — Node B to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C .......................................618 Figure 55.98 — Node B to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C .........................................618 Figure 55.99 — Node B to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node A.....................................619 Figure 55.100 — Node B to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D ...................................620 Figure 55.101 — Cross-connection between NE E and Node D .......................................................621
30
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 55.102 — NE E to Node D: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E .......................................621 Figure 55.103 — NE E to Node D: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G ........................................622 Figure 55.104 — NE E to Node D: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A .....................................623 Figure 55.105 — NE E to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node A ......................................624 Figure 55.106 — NE E to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node C ......................................625 Figure 55.107 — NE E to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D.........................................626 Figure 55.108 — NE E to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D ..........................................626 Figure 55.109 — Cross-connection between NE E and Node C .......................................................627 Figure 55.110 — NE E to Node C: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E .......................................628 Figure 55.111 — NE E to Node C: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E ........................................629 Figure 55.112 — NE E to Node C: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A .....................................630 Figure 55.113 — NE E to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node B ......................................631 Figure 55.114 — NE E to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C.........................................632 Figure 55.115 — NE E to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C...........................................632 Figure 55.116 — NE E to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D ......................................633 Figure 55.117 — Cross-connection between NE F and Node C .......................................................634 Figure 55.118 — NE F to Node C: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F .......................................634 Figure 55.119 — NE F to Node C: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F ........................................635 Figure 55.120 — NE F to Node C: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B .....................................636 Figure 55.121 — NE F to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C .........................................637 Figure 55.122 — NE F to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C...........................................637 Figure 55.123 — NE F to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node A ......................................638 Figure 55.124 — NE F to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D ......................................639 Figure 55.125 — Cross-connection between NE F and Node C (protected) ........................................640 Figure 55.126 — NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F ........................641 Figure 55.127 — NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F..........................642 Figure 55.128 — NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B ......................643 Figure 55.129 — NE F to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C ..........................644 Figure 55.130 — NE F to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C............................644 Figure 55.131 — NE F to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A .......................645 Figure 55.132 — NE F to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D .......................646 Figure 55.133 — Cross-connection between NE F (protected) and Node C (protected)..........................647 Figure 55.134 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F .........648 Figure 55.135 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F...........649 Figure 55.136 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B ........................................................................................................650 Figure 55.137 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C ...........651 Figure 55.138 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C .............651 Figure 55.139 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A ........652 Figure 55.140 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D ........653 Figure 55.141 — Cross-connection between NE E and NE H ..........................................................654 Figure 55.142 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E ..........................................655 Figure 55.143 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E ...........................................656 Figure 55.144 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E ..........................................657 Figure 55.145 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E ...........................................658 Figure 55.146 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE H..........................................659 Figure 55.147 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE H ...........................................660 Figure 55.148 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A........................................661 Figure 55.149 — NE E to NE H: -through cross-connection on Node B .........................................662
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
31
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 55.150 — Figure 55.151 — Figure 55.152 — Figure 55.153 — Figure 55.154 — Figure 55.155 — Figure 55.156 — Figure 55.157 — Figure 55.158 — Figure 55.159 — Figure 55.160 — Figure 55.161 — Figure 55.162 — Figure 55.163 — Figure 55.164 — Figure 55.165 — Figure 55.166 — Figure 55.167 — Figure 55.168 — Figure 55.169 —
NE E to NE H: -through cross-connection on Node C .........................................663 NE to NE H: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node D ..........................................664 Cross-connection between NE E and NE G ..........................................................665 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E ..........................................665 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E ...........................................666 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G .........................................667 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G...........................................668 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A........................................669 NE E to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node B .........................................670 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C........................................671 NE E to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node D .........................................672 Cross-connection between NE F and NE G ..........................................................673 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F ..........................................674 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F ...........................................675 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G .........................................676 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G...........................................677 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B ........................................678 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C........................................679 NE F to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node A .........................................680 NE F to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node D .........................................681
56 — Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool ...................... 683 Figure 56.1 — Sample mixed fiber/microwave Ring ...................................................................684 Figure 56.2 — Ring’s Fiber Chain Description...........................................................................685 Figure 56.3 — Ring’s Fiber Chain for Aided Cross-connections window ............................................686 Figure 56.4 — Add&Drop cross-connection: Other end point is outside the fiber chain .........................687 Figure 56.5 — Add&Drop cross-connection: Other end point is inside the fiber chain ...........................687 Figure 56.6 — -through cross-connection: Both end points are inside the fiber chain (1)..................688 Figure 56.7 — -through cross-connection: Both end points are inside the fiber chain (2)..................688 Figure 56.8 — -through cross-connection: One end point is inside the fiber chain (1) .....................689 Figure 56.9 — -through cross-connection: One end point is inside the fiber chain (2) .....................689 Figure 56.10 — -through cross-connection: Both end points are outside the fiber chain...................690
57 — Provision protection scheme parameters ............................................................ 691 Figure 57.1 Figure 57.2 Figure 57.3 Figure 57.4 Figure 57.5 Figure 57.6 Figure 57.7 Figure 57.8
— Protection Schemes resource tree expanded .........................................................692 — Core-E Protection Scheme Parameter tab .............................................................693 — Synchronization Protection Scheme Parameter tab ..................................................694 — Radio Channel Protection Scheme Parameter tab....................................................695 — Equipment Protection Scheme Parameter tab ........................................................696 — HSB Protection Scheme Parameter tab ................................................................697 — Rx Radio Protection Scheme Parameter tab ..........................................................698 — Physical Cable warning example ........................................................................698
58 — Provision Protection Type ............................................................................... 699 Figure 58.1 Figure 58.2 Figure 58.3 Figure 58.4 Figure 58.5
32
— — — — —
MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Transceiver Settings tab .........................................................700 MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Protection Type provisioned ....................................................701 Provision P32E1DS1 Protection Type ...................................................................702 P32E1DS1 Protection Type provisioned ................................................................703 Provision P2E3DS3 Protection Type .....................................................................704
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 58.6 — P2E3DS3 Protection Type provisioned ..................................................................705 Figure 58.7 — Provision SDH Protection Type ..........................................................................706 Figure 58.8 — SDH Protection Type provisioned .......................................................................707 Figure 58.9 — Provision MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Protection Type........................................708 Figure 58.10 — MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Protection Type selection ......................................709 Figure 58.11 — MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Protection Type provisioned ...................................710
59 — Configure radio parameters ............................................................................. 711 Figure 59.1 — MPT-HC radio selected....................................................................................714 Figure 59.2 — MPT ODU Radio Main View Settings tab ................................................................715 Figure 59.3 — MPT-HL transceiver protection type provisioning ....................................................716 Figure 59.4 — MPT-HL Settings tab for fixed modulation .............................................................717 Figure 59.5 — MPT-HL Settings tab for adaptive modulation ........................................................719 Figure 59.6 — MPT-HL 1+1 settings tab ..................................................................................721 Figure 59.7 — MPT-HL settings with ATPC ..............................................................................723 Figure 59.8 — MPT-HL transceiver protection criteria provisioning .................................................724 Figure 59.9 — MPT-HL Additional Settings tab .........................................................................725 Figure 59.10 — XPIC icon...................................................................................................728 Figure 59.11 — XPIC configuration window .............................................................................728 Figure 59.12 — Provision MPT-HLC co-channel XPIC association.....................................................729 Figure 59.13 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel ..........................................730 Figure 59.14 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel ..........................................731 Figure 59.15 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel ..........................................732 Figure 59.16 — Provision MPT-HLC 1+1 XPIC association..............................................................733 Figure 59.17 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel ..........................................734 Figure 59.18 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel .............................................735 Figure 59.19 — MPT-HLC transceiver protection type provisioning .................................................736 Figure 59.20 — MPT-HLC Settings tab for fixed modulation ..........................................................737 Figure 59.21 — MPT-HLC Settings tab for adaptive modulation .....................................................739 Figure 59.22 — MPT-HLC 1+1 settings tab ...............................................................................741 Figure 59.23 — MPT-HLC settings with ATPC ...........................................................................743 Figure 59.24 — MPT-HLC transceiver protection criteria provisioning..............................................744 Figure 59.25 — MPT-HLC Additional Settings tab ......................................................................745 Figure 59.26 — MPT-HLC Maintenance tab .............................................................................748 Figure 59.27 — Measurements tab for MPT-HLC........................................................................749 Figure 59.28 — Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel ..........................................751 Figure 59.29 — Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel ..........................................753 Figure 59.30 — Provision MPT-HLS 1+1 XPIC association ..............................................................754 Figure 59.31 — Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel .............................................755 Figure 59.32 — MPT-HLS transceiver protection type provisioning..................................................756 Figure 59.33 — MPT-HLS Settings tab for fixed modulation ..........................................................757 Figure 59.34 — MPT-HLS Settings tab for adaptive modulation......................................................759 Figure 59.35 — MPT-HLS 1+1 settings tab ...............................................................................761 Figure 59.36 — MPT-HLS settings with ATPC............................................................................763 Figure 59.37 — ATPC warning ............................................................................................763 Figure 59.38 — MPT-HLS transceiver protection criteria provisioning ..............................................764 Figure 59.39 — MPT-HLS Additional Settings tab.......................................................................766 Figure 59.40 — MPT-HLS Maintenance tab .............................................................................768 Figure 59.41 — MPT ODU Power Source Settings tab (MPTACC card) ...............................................771
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
33
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 59.42 Figure 59.43 Figure 59.44 Figure 59.45 Figure 59.46 Figure 59.47 Figure 59.48 Figure 59.49 Figure 59.50 Figure 59.51 Figure 59.52 Figure 59.53 Figure 59.54 Figure 59.55 Figure 59.56 Figure 59.57 Figure 59.58 Figure 59.59 Figure 59.60 Figure 59.61 Figure 59.62 Figure 59.63 Figure 59.64 Figure 59.65
— XPIC icon...................................................................................................772 — XPIC configuration window .............................................................................773 — Provision MPT ODU co-channel XPIC association ....................................................774 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel..........................................775 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel..........................................776 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel..........................................777 — Provision MPT ODU 1+1 XPIC association .............................................................778 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel..........................................779 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel .............................................780 — MPT ODU transceiver Protection Type provisioning.................................................781 — Dialog box with virtual cable and HQAM .............................................................782 — MPT ODU Protection Scheme parameters RPS Cable configuration ..............................782 — MPT-HC Settings tab for fixed modulation ...........................................................783 — MPT-HQAM Settings tab for fixed modulation .......................................................784 — MPT-HC Settings tab for adaptive modulation ......................................................785 — MPT-HQAM Settings tab for adaptive modulation ...................................................786 — MPT-HC 1+1 Settings tab ................................................................................788 — MPT-HC Settings tab with ATPC........................................................................789 — MPT ODU transceiver Protection Criteria provisioning .............................................791 — MPT ODU Protection Restoration Criteria provisioning Rx radio ..................................792 — MPT-HC Additional Settings tab ........................................................................793 — MPT-HQAM Maintenance tab............................................................................795 — MPT ODU Maintenance tab..............................................................................798 — MPT ODU Maintenance tab..............................................................................799
60 — Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning .......................................................................... 801 Figure 60.1 Figure 60.2 Figure 60.3 Figure 60.4 Figure 60.5
— IPv6 Pre-provisioning main menu bar path ............................................................802 — IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 1 of 3 window ....................................................802 — IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 2 of 3 window ....................................................803 — Create IPv6 Static Route window .......................................................................804 — IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 3 of 3 window ....................................................805
61 — Use the Provisioning Tool................................................................................ 807 Figure 61.1 — Provisioning Tool Screen..................................................................................809 Figure 61.2 — Report for opened configuration file ...........................................................810 Figure 61.3 — MSS Configuration screen example .....................................................................811 Figure 61.4 — Core Configuration screen example ....................................................................812 Figure 61.5 — MPTACC configuration with two units in the row.....................................................813 Figure 61.6 — 1+1 configuration with MPTACC units ..................................................................814 Figure 61.7 — XPIC polarization selection ..............................................................................815 Figure 61.8 — MPT configuration showing MPT-HQAM (1+0 with fixed modulation) ..............................816 Figure 61.9 — Data Help window for Profile area (fixed modulation) ..............................................817 Figure 61.10 — MPT configuration screen (1+0 with adaptive modulation)........................................818 Figure 61.11 — Data Help window for Profile area (adaptive modulation) ........................................819 Figure 61.12 — Data Help window for the Channel area..............................................................820 Figure 61.13 — 1+1 HSB Configuration ...................................................................................821 Figure 61.14 — 1+1 FD Configuration ....................................................................................822 Figure 61.15 — DS1 configuration screen................................................................................823 Figure 61.16 — E1 configuration ..........................................................................................825
34
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 61.17 Figure 61.18 Figure 61.19 Figure 61.20 Figure 61.21 Figure 61.22 Figure 61.23 Figure 61.24 Figure 61.25 Figure 61.26 Figure 61.27 Figure 61.28 Figure 61.29 Figure 61.30 Figure 61.31 Figure 61.32 Figure 61.33 Figure 61.34 Figure 61.35 Figure 61.36 Figure 61.37 Figure 61.38 Figure 61.39 Figure 61.40 Figure 61.41 Figure 61.42 Figure 61.43 Figure 61.44 Figure 61.45 Figure 61.46
— SDHACC configuration screen ..........................................................................827 — SDHCHAN configuration screen.........................................................................828 — EASv2 configuration screen: electrical ports ........................................................830 — EASv2 configuration screen: optical ports............................................................831 — EASv2 protection configuration ........................................................................832 — EASv2 protection .........................................................................................833 — LAG configuration screen ...............................................................................834 — LAG creation window ....................................................................................834 — Created L1 Radio LAG ...................................................................................835 — Available ports............................................................................................836 — Lowest index port selected .............................................................................836 — To configure 1+0 XPIC ...................................................................................838 — 1+0 XPIC ...................................................................................................839 — To configure 1+1 XPIC ...................................................................................840 — 1+1 XPIC ...................................................................................................841 — Synchronization Configuration screen ................................................................842 — Scheduler Configuration screen ........................................................................843 — Queue size configuration screen .......................................................................844 — QoS classification screen................................................................................845 — IEEE 802.1p ...............................................................................................846 — DiffServ ....................................................................................................847 — Read-only table...........................................................................................848 — 802.1D VLAN management..............................................................................849 — 802.1Q VLAN management (default VLAN only) .....................................................850 — Example of created VLANs ..............................................................................852 — Port VLAN configuration - Core-E ports ...............................................................853 — Port VLAN configuration - EASv2 ports................................................................854 — Network Configuration screen..........................................................................855 — Trusted Managers screen................................................................................857 — Configuration report ....................................................................................858
62 — Apply a configuration using the Web Server ......................................................... 859 Figure 62.1 — Configuration Settings screen ...........................................................................860 Figure 62.2 — Configuration Setting confirmation summary .........................................................861
63 — Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback ........................................................... 865 Figure 63.1 Figure 63.2 Figure 63.3 Figure 63.4 Figure 63.5 Figure 63.6 Figure 63.7 Figure 63.8 Figure 63.9
— Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback block diagram ................................................866 — Core Facing SDH Tributary Loopback block diagram .................................................866 — Main Equipment Window: PDH E1/DS1 Transponder Card highlighted ............................867 — Main Equipment Window: PDH DS3 Transponder Card highlighted ................................868 — Main Equipment Window: PDH OC-3 Transponder Card highlighted ...............................869 — PDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port selected.....................................................870 — SDH main view, Loopback tab OC-3 Port#3.1 selected ..............................................871 — Core Facing PDH DS1 Tributary Loopback active .....................................................872 — Core Facing SDH Tributary Loopback active...........................................................873
64 — Digital Core Facing Loopback ........................................................................... 875 Figure 64.1 — Main Equipment window: Radio icon highlighted.....................................................876 Figure 64.2 — Radio Maintenance tab ...................................................................................877
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
35
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
65 — Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback............................................................ 879 Figure 65.1 Figure 65.2 Figure 65.3 Figure 65.4 Figure 65.5 Figure 65.6 Figure 65.7 Figure 65.8 Figure 65.9
— Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback block diagram .................................................880 — Line Facing SDH Tributary Loopback block diagram .................................................880 — Main Equipment window: PDH E1/DS1 Transponder Card highlighted ............................881 — Main Equipment window: PDH DS3 Transponder Card highlighted.................................882 — Main Equipment window: SDH Transponder Card highlighted ......................................883 — PDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port selected.....................................................884 — SDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port#07 selected.................................................885 — Line Facing PDH DS1 Tributary Loopback Active......................................................886 — Line Facing SDH Tributary Loopback Active ...........................................................887
66 — OAM Remote Loopback ................................................................................... 889 Figure 66.1 — ETH OAM Configuration window with operational link...............................................890 Figure 66.2 — ETH OAM Configuration window with OAM Remote Loopback ......................................891
67 — Open and run performance monitoring ............................................................... 893 Figure 67.1 — PM Tool icon ................................................................................................894 Figure 67.2 — Acknowledgement of Authorization dialog box .......................................................895 Figure 67.3 — Performance Monitoring Tool window..................................................................895 Figure 67.4 — Ethernet port PM ..........................................................................................896 Figure 67.5 — Compression gain statistics PM ..........................................................................897 Figure 67.6 — Radio QoS Ethernet port PM .............................................................................898 Figure 67.7 — Configure Ethernet counters for L1 radio LAG PM with EASv2 .....................................900 Figure 67.8 — Radio port PM ..............................................................................................901 Figure 67.9 — Adaptive Modulation PM ..................................................................................902 Figure 67.10 — PDH port PM...............................................................................................903 Figure 67.11 — SDH port PM ...............................................................................................904 Figure 67.12 — RSL History PM ............................................................................................905 Figure 67.13 — Threshold Editor window................................................................................906 Figure 67.14 — Assign PM threshold Configuration window ..........................................................908
68 — Perform protection switching........................................................................... 911 Figure 68.1 — Protection Schemes tab ..................................................................................916 Figure 68.2 — Forced Switch Main Core-E to Spare Core-E ...........................................................917 Figure 68.3 — Lockout Spare Core-E Card...............................................................................918 Figure 68.4 — Release Switch Core-E ....................................................................................919 Figure 68.5 — Forced Equipment Switch Main to Spare ...............................................................920 Figure 68.6 — Manual Equipment Switch: Main to Spare..............................................................921 Figure 68.7 — Manual Equipment Switch: Spare to Main..............................................................922 Figure 68.8 — Lockout Equipment Switch: Lockout Switch to Spare................................................923 Figure 68.9 — Release EPS Switch ........................................................................................924 Figure 68.10 — Forced HSB Switch Main Radio Channel...............................................................925 Figure 68.11 — Manual HSB Switch: Main Radio Channel to Spare Radio Channel ................................926 Figure 68.12 — Manual HSB Switch: Spare Radio Channel to Main Radio Channel ................................927 Figure 68.13 — Lockout HSB Switch: Lockout Spare Radio Channel.................................................928 Figure 68.14 — Release HSB Switch ......................................................................................929 Figure 68.15 — Forced Rx Radio Switch: Main Radio Channel........................................................930 Figure 68.16 — Manual Rx Radio Switch: Main Radio Channel to Spare Radio Channel ..........................931 Figure 68.17 — Manual Rx Radio Switch: Spare Radio Channel to Main Radio Channel ..........................932
36
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 68.18 — Lockout Rx Radio Switch Spare Radio Channel ......................................................933 Figure 68.19 — Release Rx Radio Switch ................................................................................934
69 — Perform radio power measurements .................................................................. 935 Figure 69.1 Figure 69.2 Figure 69.3 Figure 69.4
— Radio Power Measurement window .....................................................................936 — Radio Power Measurement window for MPT-HLC .....................................................937 — Radio Power Measurement: graphical view............................................................938 — Radio Power Measurement: tabular view ..............................................................938
70 — Radio Facing Circuit Loopback.......................................................................... 939 Figure 70.1 — Main Equipment Window: Radio icon highlighted ....................................................940 Figure 70.2 — Radio Maintenance tab ...................................................................................941
71 — RF Core Facing Loopback ................................................................................ 943 Figure 71.1 Figure 71.2 Figure 71.3 Figure 71.4
— — — —
RF Filter Port detail .......................................................................................945 Main Equipment Window: Radio icon highlighted ....................................................946 Maintenance tab (MPT-HLC shown) .....................................................................947 Radio Maintenance tab ...................................................................................950
72 — ister SDH LAG ...................................................................................... 953 Figure 72.1 — SDH LAG screen ............................................................................................954
75 — Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port ............................................................. 969 Figure 75.1 — MPT-HL to L1 LAG information message ...............................................................973 Figure 75.2 — MPT-HL to L1 LAG warning message ....................................................................973
77 — Perform Tx Diversity Antenna operations ............................................................ 979 Figure 77.1 Figure 77.2 Figure 77.3 Figure 77.4 Figure 77.5 Figure 77.6
— — — — — —
Tx Diversity Antenna webpage ..........................................................................980 Tx Diversity Antenna enabled ...........................................................................981 Tx Diversity Antenna disabled ...........................................................................981 Tx Diversity Antenna Status..............................................................................982 Tx Diversity: Force Main ..................................................................................982 Tx Diversity: Clear Force .................................................................................983
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
37
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
38
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Preface
9500 MPR documentation Table 1 describes the 9500 MPR documentation. See the current Release Notice for part numbers. Table 1 — 9500 MPR documentation Document
Description
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual
Provides a general description of the 9500 MPR product, solutions available, associated components, applications, and some Engineering specifications This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Software Installation and NE Upgrade Manual
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
•
ANSI Product Information
•
Product Information and Planning chapters from the ETSI MSS-1/4/8 Manual and the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
Provides detailed procedures for the initial installation of the radio and for replacement of hardware components This guide replaces the following from previous releases: •
ANSI Installation Practices
•
Hardware sections of the Installation chapters from the ETSI MSS-O/1/4/8 Manual and the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
•
Hardware replacement procedures from ANSI Maintenance and Trouble Clearing
Provides detailed procedures for the initial installation of the 9500 MPR software, software the current release, and software rollback to a previous release This guide replaces the following from previous releases: •
ANSI Software Installation and Upgrade
•
Software sections of the Installation chapters from the ETSI MSS-O/1/4/8 Manual and the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
39
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 9500 MPR documentation Table 1 — 9500 MPR documentation Document
Description
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR WebCT Manual
Provides procedures for performing system operations using the WebCT interface, including monitoring and maintenance activities. This guide describes, along with the WebEML Guide, how to provision, operate, and monitor a shelf with a CorEvo card.
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Provides procedures for performing system operations using the WebEML interface, including: provisioning, performance monitoring, protection switching, and istration activities. This guide describes how to provision, operate, and monitor a radio in a split-mount configuration. This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR MCT Manual
•
ANSI Operation and istration
•
NE Management by Software Application chapter from the ETSI MSS-O/1/4/8 Manual
•
Provisioning chapter from the ETSI MSS-1/4/8 Manual
Provides procedures for performing system operations using the MCT interface, including: provisioning, performance monitoring, protection switching, and istration activities. This guide describes how to provision, operate, and monitor a radio in MPRe standalone, MSS-1c or Single NE with 7705 SAR configuration. This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Turn-up Manual
•
NE Management by Software Application chapter from the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
•
Provisioning chapter from the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
•
Maintenance and Trouble Clearing chapter from the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
Provides procedures for system installation verification, provisioning, turn-up, and acceptance testing. The guide is to be used only during initial system turn-up. It is not intended to be used after equipment has been formally accepted (that is, for maintenance, system growth, system upgrade, or provisioning activities). This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
40
•
ANSI Turn-up
•
Lineup and Commissioning chapters from the ETSI MSS-O/ 1/4/8 Manual and the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 9500 MPR documentation Table 1 — 9500 MPR documentation Document
Description
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Alarm Clearing Manual
Provides procedures related to the maintenance of the radio including how to clear alarms and abnormal conditions. This guide is intended to be used after the equipment has been installed and tested by the installation and test teams This guide replaces the following from previous releases: •
ANSI Maintenance and Trouble Clearing
•
Maintenance and Trouble Clearing chapter from the ETSI MSS-O/1/4/8 Manual
Related documentation Table 2 describes the 9500 MPR related documentation. See the Release Notice for part numbers. Table 2 — 9500 MPR related documentation Guide
Description
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A Engineering Documentation
Provides engineering drawings for the 9500 MPR-A
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Test Results Data Sheet
Provides space to record measurements, capture screen shots, capture photos, and record other information. TRDS tabs serve as records of completion of indicated steps in a Turn-up procedure. Not all procedures require entries in the TRDS.
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Configuration File Management Manual
Provides information ing the configuration file.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
41
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 9500 MPR documentation Table 2 — (Continued)9500 MPR related documentation Guide
Description
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A MPT-HL/ HLC Engineering Specifications
Provides transmit power specifications
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A MPTHC/MPR-e Engineering Specifications Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A MPTHQAM Engineering Specifications Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A ODU300 Engineering Specifications
42
9500 MPR Frequency Plan for MPT Outdoor Transceivers
Provides part number and tuning information for MPT-MC, HC, XP, HC-HQAM and XP-HQAM radios, for modules and for external diplexers.
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Technical Specifications for Split Mount Applications
Provides technical specifications for MPT Outdoor transceivers, including general specifications such as dimensions, and radio specifications such as system gain or throughput.
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Technical Specifications for Full Indoor Applications
Provides technical specifications for MPT-HLC and HLS.
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR TMN Networking Guide
Describes TMN networking in the 9500 MPR.
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Crossconnections Reference Tables
Provides information about ed cross-connections.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Audience
Naming conventions in the documentation The generic described in Table 3 are used when the topic applies to all of the related items listed. If the topic is specific to one or a subset of the items listed, the specific names will be stated in the guide. Table 3 — Naming conventions Term
Refers to
MPT-HC
MPT-HC V2
EAS
P8ETH and EASv2 cards
Core
Core-E and CorEvo cards MSS/CORE ports of MSS-O and MSS-1
CorEvo
CorEvo-1G and CorEvo-10G cards
PDH
E1, DS1, and DS3
SDH
STM-1 and OC-3
Audience This guide is intended for network installers and system s who are responsible for installing, configuring, or maintaining networks. This guide assumes you are familiar with electronic and networking technologies.
Information symbols Observe the warnings and notes to avoid injury or equipment damage during installation and maintenance. Follow the safety procedures and guidelines when working with and near electrical equipment. Warning statements and notes are provided in each chapter. The following symbols are contained in the 9500 MPR documentation.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
43
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 information
Danger: indicates that the described activity or situation may result in serious personal injury or death; for example, high voltage or electric shock hazards.
Warning: indicates that the described activity or situation may, or will, cause equipment damage or serious performance problems.
Caution: indicates that the described activity or situation may, or will, cause service interruption.
Note: provides information that is, or may be, of special interest.
information Technical If you purchased a service agreement for your 9500 MPR and related products from a distributor or authorized reseller, the technical staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance. If you purchased an Alcatel-Lucent service agreement, check this link for instructions to personnel: Web: http://.alcatel-lucent.com
Documentation If you have questions or comments about this documentation, please : [email protected]
44
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
1 — Safety awareness
1.1 — Safety EMC-EMF-ESD norms and equipment labeling This section describes the equipment labeling and the norms mandatory or suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment. •
Safety rules
•
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms)
•
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
•
Cautions to avoid equipment damage
1.2 — Safety rules 1.2.1 — General rules Before you perform any installation, turn-on, tests or operation and maintenance operations, carefully read the related sections of this manual, specifically: •
Hardware Installation
•
Commissioning
•
Maintenance and Upgrade
1.2.1.1 — Observe safety rules When equipment is operating, do not access the inside of the equipment parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
45
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command
If access is required to the equipment parts when it is operating, only service personnel, where service personnel or technical assistance is meant: •
“personnel which has adequate technical knowledge and experience necessary to be aware of the danger that may occur when performing an operation and of the necessary measurements to reduce the danger to a minimum for themselves and for others”.
•
The service personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
•
The service personnel is not allowed to repair, and therefore, the access to the parts that are not specified is not permitted.
•
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which provide access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong exclusively to the service personnel.
For the cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, do not use any inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings, inscriptions, or other labels. It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth. The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety; for example, do not expose persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged. When the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER. To cut off power, switch off the power supply units and cut off the power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame). The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and statement:
1.3 — Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command Follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
46
•
Dangerous electrical voltages
•
Risks of explosions
•
Moving mechanical parts
•
Equipment connection to earth
•
Heat-radiating mechanical parts
•
Microwave radiations (EMF norms) 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command
•
Harmful optical signals
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed. The symbols presented in following paragraphs are all the possible symbols that could be present on Alcatel-Lucent equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this handbook refers to.
1.3.1 — Dangerous electrical voltages 1.3.1.1 — Labeling: The warning label in Figure 1.1 is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc). Figure 1.1 — Dangerous voltage
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label in Figure 1.2 states that the equipment must be grounded before you connect it to the power supply voltage; for example: Figure 1.2 — Ground protection warning
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
47
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command
1.3.1.2 — Safety instructions: Danger: Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where D.C. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules: • Personal injury can be caused by -48VDC. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body. • Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, DC circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
1.3.2 — Risks of explosions 1.3.2.1 — Labeling: This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signaled by the label in Figure 1.3: Figure 1.3 — Risk of explosion
1.3.2.2 — Safety instructions: Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gases to down flow (battery-emitted hydrogen). A 417-IEC-5641 Norm. compliant label, as shown in Figure 1.4, is affixed next to it indicating that the openings must not be covered up.
48
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command Figure 1.4 — Openings must be covered
1.3.3 — Moving mechanical parts 1.3.3.1 — Labeling: The warning label in Figure 1.5 is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts: Figure 1.5 — Moving mechanical parts
1.3.3.2 — Safety instructions: Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been stopped.
1.3.4 — Equipment connection to earth 1.3.4.1 — Labeling: Terminals for equipment connection to earth, to be done according to international safety standards, are pointed out by the symbol in Figure 1.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
49
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command Figure 1.6 — Equipment connection to earth
1.3.4.2 — Safety instructions: The position of earth connection terminals is specified in the Hardware Installation section.
1.3.5 — Heat-radiating mechanical parts 1.3.5.1 — Labeling: The presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the warning label in Figure 1.7 in compliance with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041: Figure 1.7 — Heat-radiating mechanical parts
1.3.5.2 — Safety instructions: Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where heat-radiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule: Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
50
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command
1.3.6 — Microwave radiations (EMF norms) Equipment emitting RF power (Reminder from site preparation procedure): The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation if more restrictive.
1.3.6.1 — Safety instructions: The following rules should be strictly applied by the customer: •
Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries, if any, for the general public.
•
Compliance RF boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field exposure must be marked.
•
Workers should be allowed to switch-off the power if they have to operate inside compliance boundaries.
•
Assure good cable connection.
•
Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public access (if possible the cylinder delimiting the compliance boundaries, if any, or the cylinder corresponding to the transmission area directly in front of antenna with the same diameter as the antenna, more than 2 meters high).
•
Install the antenna as far as possible from other existing equipment emitting RF power.
Remind persons standing in front of the 9500 MPR antenna may cause traffic shutdown. Place the warning sticker, as shown in Figure 1.8, as follows: Figure 1.8 — EMF emission warning
•
On the site when applicable (when people can cross the compliance boundaries and/ or the transmission area of the antenna; for example, roof top installation): Warning label “Do not stand on the antenna axis”
•
On the mast (front side): EMF emission warning sign (yellow and black) to be placed at bottom of antenna, visible by someone moving in front of the antenna (roof top installation)
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
51
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms)
•
On the antenna (rear side): EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna
Figure 1.9 — Compliance boundaries for 9500 MPR-A transceivers with 1ft (30 cm) antenna
1.4 — Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms) The equipment's EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out, such as cable termination or grounding, and on the operating conditions (such as, equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic units, presence of dummy covers). Before you perform any installation, turn-on, tests & operation, and maintenance operations, carefully read the related sections of this manual. The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this manual by the symbol and term: Figure 1.10 — EMC norms
1.
52
EMC general norms - installation •
All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use only cables and connectors suggested in this manual or in the relevant Plant Documentation, or those specified in the Customer's “Installation Norms” (or similar documents)
•
Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
•
Install filters outside the equipment as required
•
Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with correct diameter and impedance
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms)
2.
3.
•
Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before having cleaned and degrease it.
•
Before you insert the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces (such as springs and connection points).
•
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
•
To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
EMC general norms - turn-on, tests & operation •
Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility
•
Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields correctly positioned (such as dummy covers and ESD connector protections).
•
To correctly use EMC compatible equipment, follow the provided information.
EMC general norms - maintenance •
Before you insert the shielded unit, which replaces the faulty or modified unit, clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces (such as springs and connection points).
•
Clean the dummy covers of the spare units.
•
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
1.4.1 — Cables: The following safety requirements apply to the cable connections for intra-building ports: •
To comply with the GR-1089-CORE requirements for electromagnetic compatibility and safety, all intra-building ports are specified for use with shielded and grounded at both ends.
•
The intra-building ports of the equipment or sub-assembly are suitable for connection to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building ports of the equipment or sub-assembly must not be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
Warning: 9500 MPR equipment must be connected to surge suppressors that meet the power surge requirements of GR-1089-CORE. Non-compliant surge suppressors may not have the required secondary surge protection or current limiting function during specific, valid operating states. Connecting 9500 MPR equipment to non-compliant surge suppressors could result in damage to 9500 MPR equipment.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
53
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
1.5 — Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges Before you remove the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors, or other equipment, observe the stated precautionary measures. Ensure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after terminating the maintenance and monitoring operations. Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, therefore, the warning labels in Figure 1.11 have been affixed, Figure 1.11 — Electrostatic sensitive
Observe the stated precautionary measures when touching the electronic parts during the installation/maintenance phases. Workers are supplied with anti-static protection devices consisting of an elasticized band worn around the wrist and a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack. See Figure 1.13.
1.6 — Cautions to avoid equipment damage 1.6.1 — Electrostatic-sensitivity An Electrostatic-Sensitive Device (ESD) can withstand voltage spikes of only 10 to 100 volts and can be damaged or effectively destroyed by a discharge that might go unnoticed by a technician. Some devices have built-in protection. However, because this protection is effective only against the lower levels of electrostatic charges, a false sense of security often prevails. Warning: Common plastic, white foam, cellophane, and masking adhesive tapes must not come in with ESDs or their packaging.
54
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Cautions to avoid equipment damage
Common plastics (synthetic insulating materials), clothing, and paper or cardboard are the most common sources of static charges. Observe special precautions when the ESD sign is displayed. See Figure 1.12. Figure 1.12 — Electrostatic-sensitive sign
The following items are examples of ESDs: •
MOS (Metal Oxide Semiconductor) capacitors, transistors, Integrated Circuits (ICs)
•
CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) transistors, ICs
•
JFET (Junction Field Effect Transistors)
•
IGFET (Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistors)
1.6.1.1 — Handling cards Although the risk of damage to an ESD is reduced considerably after it is assembled into a circuit designed to protect sensitive components, take the following precautions to reduce static charges to harmless levels: •
Handle all cards as ESDs unless they are known not to contain electrostatic-sensitive parts.
•
Wear wrist ground strap, connected to grounded coiled cord before and while touching or handling cards containing ESS devices. See Figure 1.13 for an illustration of the wrist strap with cord. The wrist strap (PN 1AD 01247 0001) is an elasticized band connected to the coiled cord connected to the rack frame ground.
•
Store (even temporarily), pack, and ship cards in antistatic bags or containers.
•
Do not handle printed circuit board or components unnecessarily. Use plastic handle.
•
Do not use synthetic bristled brushes or acid brushes to clean cards.
•
Handle failed cards with same precautions as good cards.
ESD components are protected when correctly packaged in conductive or antistatic packaging. Acceptable packaging is marked as either conductive or antistatic.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
55
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Fan, equipment rack, and equipment cabinet precautions Figure 1.13 — Electrostatic protection kit
1.6.2 — Screw fixing In normal operation conditions, all screws (such as for unit box closing and cable fixing) must be always tightened to avoid item detachment and to ensure the equipment EMI-EMC performance. •
•
The screw tightening torque must be: •
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) ±10%
•
2.4317 in lb. (0.2026 ft lb.) ±10%
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
1.6.2.1 — MSS-ODU cable disconnection / connection To avoid equipment damage, always unplug the card first before you disconnect the MSSODU cable (at MSS or ODU side).
1.7 — Fan, equipment rack, and equipment cabinet precautions When installing the equipment observe the following:
56
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Electrical precautions
Danger: • Keep your fingers away from the rotating fan blades. Pull the fan-tray card by the thumbscrews only and wait for the fan blades to stop spinning before you attempt to remove the FAN card completely from the MSS-4/8 shelf. • The 9500 MPR may require two people to , align, and attach it to an equipment rack. To prevent equipment damage or personal injury, make sure you have enough help. • To prevent personal injury and equipment damage due to unbalanced loading of the equipment rack or cabinet, make sure the equipment rack or cabinet is correctly secured to the floor, ceiling, or other rigid structure before mounting the 9500 MPR in it. For approved methods of securing the equipment rack, read the equipment-rack installation instructions or the equipment-rack manufacturer.
1.8 — Electrical precautions Take appropriate safety precautions when you perform procedures on electrical equipment. Hazardous electrical potentials are present when system power is on. Some procedures in this manual require working with small conductive objects, such as screwdrivers, fuses, washers, screws, and nuts. When working on a shelf at the top of an equipment rack, a dropped object that falls into a lower shelf can cause physical damage and electrical short circuits. To prevent this, place a piece of paper or other cover over the lower shelf to catch fallen objects. Remove the paper or other cover when work is complete.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
57
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Harmful optical signals
Danger: Remain aware of the following: • Install the 9500 MPR in a restricted-access area only. Entrance to a restricted-access area is intended for qualified or trained personnel and access to it is controlled by a locked barrier. • The MSS-8 shelf does not contain main overcurrent protection devices. The must provide circuit breakers or fuses and disconnects between the power source and the 9500 MPR. Each power feed from a source (-48 V dc and Return) requires a dc-rated fast-trip circuit breaker or fuse and disconnect. Circuit breakers or fuses must meet applicable local and national electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application. Circuit breaker or fuse size is dependent upon site configuration. Refer to site engineering documentation for the correct Circuit breaker or fuse size. • The MPT-HL shelf does not contain main overcurrent protection devices. The must provide circuit breakers or fuses and disconnects between the power source and the 9500 MPR. Each power feed from a source (+ 24 V dc or- 48V dc and Return) requires a dcrated fast-trip circuit breaker or fuse and disconnect. Circuit breakers or fuses must meet applicable local and national electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application. Circuit breaker or fuse size is dependent upon site configuration. See the site engineering documentation for the correct Circuit breaker or fuse size. • Make sure you connect the node to a + 24 V dc or - 48V dc source that is electrically isolated from the ac source and is reliably connected to earth ground. • For personal safety, make sure you connect and secure the installation site’s frameground (earth ground) wire to the frame-ground terminal on the 9500 MPR before you connect any other wires to the node. • A dc-power source provides high energy, which can cause serious injury or equipment damage. Only Alcatel-Lucent qualified personnel should connect the dc power to the 9500 MPR To prevent serious injury or equipment damage, make sure the power source cables are de-energized before you handle or connect them to the node.
1.9 — Harmful optical signals 1.9.1 — Laser precautions The label in Figure 1.14 is applied when the equipment contains Class 1 laser components according to IEC 60825-1 (par. 5). Figure 1.14 — Class 1 laser
58
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Harmful optical signals
The laser source is placed in the optional SFP plug-in, which is installed in the Core-E card, P8ETH card, and EASv2 card. The laser source is placed in the left side of the SFP plug-in. that laser labels on equipment state that the system conforms to all applicable standards of 21 CFR 1040.10. If there are no danger labels, call the Alcatel-Lucent Technical Center (TSC). The invisible infrared radiation emitted by the fiber-optic transmitter can cause eye damage. Observe local office procedures and the following dangers: Danger: • The use of controls and/or adjustments, or the performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous infrared radiation exposure. • Laser infrared radiation is not in the visible spectrum; therefore, it is not visible to the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen, laser radiation may be present. • Never look directly into an unterminated fiber-optic connector unless it is absolutely known that no optical power is being emitted by the connector. • Never look into a broken optical fiber cable unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. • Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable, or connector unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present in the fiber. Laser radiation can come from a fiber-optic transmitter, an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), or other optical test equipment. • Never look directly into an unterminated optical connector or cable with a magnifier/ microscope unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is being emitted from the connector or cable. A magnifier or microscope greatly increases the laser radiation hazard to the eyes. • This system normally operates as a Class I Laser Product (no hazard). However, during servicing operations, when optical connectors are being connected, disconnected, or handled without dust covers, it is possible to be exposed to Class IIIb laser radiation, which can cause eye damage. • Everyone within a 10 ft (3 m) radius of an unterminated optical fiber or connector that is connected to a powered transmitter must wear laser safety goggles or eye shields.
Laser safety goggles or eye shields are not required if the following work rules are strictly followed: 1.
Always remove electrical power from fiber-optic transmitters before disconnecting fiber-optic connectors in the path between the transmitter and the receiver.
2.
Never connect an unterminated optical cable to a fiber-optic transmitter. Always connect fiber-optic cables to fiber-optic receivers, test sets, or some other termination first.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
59
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Harmful optical signals
60
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
High-level procedures
•
High-level procedure for E1/DS1 provisioning
•
High-level procedure for E1/DS1 deprovisioning
•
High-level procedure for DS3 provisioning
•
High-level procedure for DS3 deprovisioning
•
High-level procedure for Ethernet provisioning
•
High-level procedure for Ethernet deprovisioning
•
High-level procedure for Ethernet LAG provisioning
•
High-level procedure for SDH provisioning
•
High-level procedure for STM-1/OC-3 deprovisioning
•
High-level procedure for Ethernet Ring Protection management
•
High-level procedure for using Web Server
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
61
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
62
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
2 — High-level procedure for E1/DS1 provisioning
2.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the high-level procedure for provisioning E1/DS1 facilities and equipment.
2.2 — Procedure 1.
2.
3.
4.
Select action. a.
To provision E1/DS1 cross-connect to new E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 card, go to step 2.
b.
To provision E1/DS1 cross-connect to new E1/DS1 port, go to step 3.
c.
To provision E1/DS1 cross-connect to existing E1/DS1 port, go to step 4.
Provision E1/DS1 cross-connect to new E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 card on an MSS-4/ 8: a.
See Enable equipment to enable P32E1DS1 Card.
b.
See Provision equipment port to provision E1/DS1 ports.
c.
See Provision cross connections to provision E1/DS1 cross-connect.
Provision E1/DS1 cross-connect to new E1/DS1 port on an MSS-1/4/8: a.
See Provision equipment port to provision E1/DS1 ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections to provision E1/DS1 cross-connect.
Provision E1/DS1 cross-connect to existing E1/DS1 port on an MSS-1/4/8: see Provision cross connections.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
63
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
64
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
3 — High-level procedure for E1/DS1 deprovisioning
3.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the high-level procedure for deprovisioning E1/DS1 facilities and equipment.
3.2 — Procedure 1.
Disable performance monitoring on the equipment you need to deprovision.
2.
Select action. a.
To deprovision E1/DS1 cross-connect, go to step 3.
b.
To deprovision E1/DS1 port, go to step 4.
c.
To deprovision P32E1DS1 card, go to step 5.
3.
Deprovision E1/DS1 cross-connect on an MSS-1/4/8: see Deprovision cross connections.
4.
Deprovision E1/DS1 port on an MSS-1/4/8:
5.
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision E1/DS1 cross-connects associated with P32E1DS1 port.
b.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision E1/DS1 port.
Deprovision E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 card on an MSS-4/8: a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision E1/DS1 cross-connects associated with P32E1DS1 card.
b.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision E1/DS1 ports associated with P32E1DS1 card.
c.
See Disable equipment to disable P32E1DS1 card.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
65
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
66
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
4 — High-level procedure for DS3 provisioning
4.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning DS3 facilities and equipment.
4.2 — Procedure 1.
Select action. a.
To provision DS3 cross-connect to existing DS3 port, go to step 2.
b.
To provision DS3 cross-connect to new DS3 port, go to step 3.
c.
To provision DS3 cross-connect to new DS3 P2E3DS3 card, go to step 4.
2.
Provision DS3 cross-connect to existing DS3 port: see Provision cross connections.
3.
Provision DS3 cross-connect to new DS3 port:
4.
a.
See Provision equipment port to provision DS3 ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections to provision DS3 cross-connect.
Provision DS3 cross-connect to new DS3 P2E3DS3 card: a.
See Enable equipment to enable P2E3DS3 Card.
b.
See Provision equipment port to provision DS3 ports.
c.
See Provision cross connections to provision DS3 cross-connect.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
67
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
68
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
5 — High-level procedure for DS3 deprovisioning
5.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for deprovisioning DS3 facilities and equipment.
5.2 — Procedure 1.
Disable performance monitoring on the equipment you need to deprovision.
2.
Select action. a.
To deprovision DS3 cross-connect, go to step 3.
b.
To deprovision DS3 port, go to step 4.
c.
To deprovision DS3 P2E3DS3 card, go to step 5.
3.
Deprovision DS3 cross-connect: see Deprovision cross connections.
4.
Deprovision DS3 port:
5.
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision DS3 cross-connect associated with DS3 port.
b.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision DS3 port.
Deprovision DS3 P2E3DS3 card: a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision DS3 cross-connects associated with P2E3DS3 card.
b.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision DS3 ports associated with P2E3DS3 card.
c.
See Disable equipment to disable P2E3DS3 card.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
69
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
70
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
6 — High-level procedure for Ethernet provisioning
6.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning Ethernet facilities and equipment.
6.2 — Procedure 1.
2.
Select action. a.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to existing Core Ethernet port, go to step 2.
b.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Core Ethernet port, go to step 3.
c.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Core SFP equipment port, go to step 4.
d.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new spare Core-E card, go to step 5.
e.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to existing P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port, go to step 6.
f.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port, go to step 7.
g.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment port, go to step 8.
h.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new P8ETH or EASv2 card, go to step 9.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to existing Core-E Ethernet port: a.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on Core-E electrical Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
71
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
72
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Core Ethernet port: a.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on Core electrical Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision Core Ethernet port.
c.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Core SFP equipment port: a.
See Provision equipment port to provision Core SFP equipment port.
b.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on Core SFP Ethernet port.
c.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision Core Ethernet port.
d.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new spare Core card: a.
See Enable equipment to enable spare Core Card.
b.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on spare Core electrical Ethernet ports.
c.
See Provision equipment port to provision Core SFP equipment port.
d.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on spare Core SFP Ethernet port.
e.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision Core Ethernet port.
f.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to existing P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port: a.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on P8ETH or EASv2 electrical Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port: a.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on P8ETH or EASv2 electrical Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port.
c.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment port: a.
See Provision equipment port to provision P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment port.
b.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on P8ETH or EASv2 SFP Ethernet port.
c.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure d. 9.
10.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new P8ETH or EASv2 card: a.
See Enable equipment to enable P8ETH or EASv2 Card.
b.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on P8ETH or EASv2 electrical Ethernet port.
c.
See Provision equipment port to provision P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment port.
d.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on P8ETH or EASv2 SFP Ethernet ports.
e.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port.
f.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
ister EFM OAM: a.
See Configure EFM OAM to configure EFM OAM.
b.
See OAM Remote Loopback to configure OAM Remote loopbacks.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
73
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
74
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
7 — High-level procedure for Ethernet deprovisioning
7.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning Ethernet facilities and equipment.
7.2 — Procedure 1.
Disable performance monitoring on the equipment you need to deprovision.
2.
Select action. a.
To deprovision Ethernet cross-connect from Core-E Ethernet port, go to step 3.
b.
To deprovision Core-E Ethernet port, go to step 4.
c.
To deprovision Core-E SFP equipment port, go to step 5.
d.
To deprovision spare Core-E card, go to step 6.
e.
To deprovision Ethernet cross-connect from P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port, go to step 7.
f.
To deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port, go to step 8.
g.
To deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment port, go to step 9.
h.
To deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 card, go to step 10.
3.
Deprovision Ethernet cross-connect from Core-E Ethernet port: see Deprovision cross connections.
4.
Deprovision Core-E Ethernet port:
5.
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision Ethernet cross-connects associated with Core-E Ethernet port.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to disable Core-E Ethernet port.
Deprovision Core-E SFP equipment port:
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
75
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
6.
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision Ethernet cross-connects associated with Core-E Ethernet port.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to disable Core-E Ethernet port.
c.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision Core-E SFP equipment port.
Deprovision spare Core-E card: a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision Ethernet cross-connects associated with Core-E Ethernet port.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to disable Core-E Ethernet ports associated with Core-E card.
c.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision Core-E SFP equipment port.
d.
See Disable equipment to disable spare Core-E Card.
7.
Deprovision Ethernet cross-connect from P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port: see Deprovision cross connections.
8.
Deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port:
9.
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision Ethernet cross-connects associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to disable P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port.
Deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment port: a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision Ethernet cross-connects associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet ports associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Card.
c.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment ports associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Card.
10. Deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 card:
76
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision Ethernet cross-connects associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to disable Ethernet ports associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Card.
c.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision SFP equipment ports associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Card.
d.
See Disable equipment to disable P8ETH or EASv2 card.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
8 — High-level procedure for Ethernet LAG provisioning
8.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning Ethernet LAG facilities and equipment.
8.2 — Procedure 1.
2.
3.
4.
Select action. a.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to existing Ethernet LAG port, go to step 2.
b.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Ethernet LAG port, go to step 3.
c.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Ethernet LAG port, go to step 4.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to existing Ethernet LAG port: a.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on Core-E Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Ethernet LAG port: a.
See Provision Ethernet ports to Core-E Ethernet ports are provisioned with desired port parameters.
b.
See ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to provision new Ethernet LAG port.
c.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on new Ethernet LAG port.
d.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet Cross-Connection to new Ethernet LAG port.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Ethernet LAG ports:
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
77
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
78
a.
See Provision equipment port to provision Core-E equipment ports.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision Core-E Ethernet ports.
c.
See ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to provision new Ethernet LAG port.
d.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on new Ethernet LAG port.
e.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet Cross-Connection) to new Ethernet LAG port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
9 — High-level procedure for SDH provisioning
9.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning SDH facilities and equipment.
9.2 — Procedure 1.
Select action. a.
To provision cross-connect to existing SDH port, go to step 2.
b.
To provision cross-connect to new SDH port, go to step 3.
c.
To provision cross-connect to new SDH card, go to step 4.
2.
Provision cross-connect to existing SDH port: see Provision cross connections.
3.
Provision cross-connect to new SDH port:
4.
a.
See Provision equipment port to provision SDH ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections to provision SDH to radio cross-connect.
Provision cross-connect to new SDH card: a.
See Enable equipment to enable SDH Card.
b.
See Provision equipment port to provision SDH ports.
c.
See Provision cross connections to provision SDH to radio cross-connect.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
79
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
80
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
10 — High-level procedure for STM-1/OC3 deprovisioning
10.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for deprovisioning STM-1/OC-3 facilities and equipment.
10.2 — Procedure 1.
Disable performance monitoring on the equipment you need to deprovision.
2.
Select action. a.
To deprovision SDH to radio cross-connect, go to step 3.
b.
To deprovision SDHACC port, go to step 4.
c.
To deprovision SDHACC card, go to step 5.
3.
Deprovision SDH cross-connect: see Deprovision cross connections.
4.
Deprovision STM-1/OC-3 SDHACC port:
5.
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision SDH cross-connects associated with STM-1/OC-3 SDHACC port.
b.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision STM-1/OC-3 SDHACC port.
Deprovision SDHACC card: a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision SDH cross-connects associated with SDHACC card.
b.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision STM-1/OC-3 SDHACC ports associated with SDHACC card.
c.
See Disable equipment to disable SDHACC card.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
81
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
82
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
11 — High-level procedure for Ethernet Ring Protection management
11.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for managing Ethernet Rings.
11.2 — Procedure 1.
Select action. a.
To create an Ethernet Ring, go to step 2.
b.
To create a Fiber Microwave Protection Ring, go to step 3.
c.
To modify or delete an Ethernet Ring topology, go to step 4.
d.
To provision Ring cross-connections, go to step 5.
e.
To upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software, go to step 6.
2.
Create an Ethernet Ring: see Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP).
3.
Create a Fiber Microwave Ring: see Provision Fiber Microwave Protection.
4.
Modify or delete an Ethernet Ring topology: see ister Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP).
5.
Provision Ring cross-connections:
6.
a.
See Provision cross connections to provision cross-connections, including Ring cross-connections when the Ring does not contain Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring to provision Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber-Ethernet Ring.
c.
See Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool to provision Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber-Ethernet Ring using the aided cross-connection tool.
Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software: see Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
83
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
84
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
12 — High-level procedure for using Web Server
12.1 — Purpose Logging in to an NE with a Core-E card in use from a web browser opens Web Server. Logging in from an NE with a CorEvo card opens WebCT. This chapter provides a high-level procedure for performing operations using Web Server. For information about WebCT, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR WebCT Manual.
12.2 — Procedure 1.
2.
Select action. a.
To to Web Server, go to step 2.
b.
To apply a configuration file to the NE, go to step 4.
c.
To configuration information, go to step 5.
d.
To view alarms, go to step 6.
e.
To ister DH settings, go to step 7.
f.
To view license information, go to step 8.
g.
To manage community strings, go to step 9.
h.
To manage SNMP version, go to step 10.
i.
To perform debug operations, go to step 11.
j.
To retrieve RSL information, go to step 12.
k.
To perform an MPT or EAS type conversion, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual.
l.
To perform an MPT or EAS type conversion, see the Alcatel-Lucent Core-E to CorEvo Upgrade Procedure document.
m.
To manage a Tx Diversity Antenna, go to step 13.
to the Web Server: see to and out of system.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
85
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Configuration menu 3.
ister date and time: see ister system date and time.
4.
Apply a configuration file to the NE: see Apply a configuration using the Web Server.
5.
configuration information: see View NE Inventory data.
Alarms menu 6.
View alarms: see View alarms.
DH menu 7.
ister DH settings: see ister system settings.
istration menu 8.
View license information: see ister software license to view RMU serial number and license string information.
9.
Manage community strings: see ister community string.
10. View and set SNMP version information: see ister system settings. 11. Perform debug operations: see Perform debug functions using the Web Server. 12. Retrieve RSL information: see Retrieve RSL information using the Web Server. 13. Manage Tx Diversity Antenna: see Perform Tx Diversity Antenna operations.
86
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
System istration
•
to and out of system
•
ister community string
•
ister external alarm points on an Auxiliary card
•
ister external alarm points on an MSS-1 or Enhanced Fan card
•
ister In-Band TMN VLAN port
•
ister network configuration
•
ister QoS configuration
•
ister software license
•
ister system date and time
•
ister system settings
•
ister VLAN configuration
•
Local access control management
•
MIB database management (backup and restore)
•
Use the Ethernet Features Shell
•
Perform a software reset
•
Configure EFM OAM
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
87
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
88
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
13 — to and out of system
13.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedures to establish a session with the network element (NE) and to and to log out a specific to the 9500 MPR. Additionally This chapter provides the instructions to and log out of a specific 9500 MPR NE using a web browser.
13.2 — Prerequisite To to the system, the must satisfy the following requirements: •
valid name and current
•
9500 MPR CT - craft terminal (CT) software must be installed on the PC
•
IP address of the NE to to the system or be locally connected to a TMN port or the Local Management Port of the Core unit in the MSS
Note: In case of connection to Local Management Port and DH Server functionality enabled on NE, to access the NE the PC must be configured to Get automatically an IP address, because NE works as a DH Server with default IP address 10.0.1.2.
13.3 — Overview The 9500 MPR provides for a craft terminal suite (TCO suite), which contains WebEML, NEtO Servers Manager, NEtO, JUSM function, allowing NE management through a web-enabled PC. The 9500 MPR also provides for a web browser based interface. The NE is accessed using the Network Element Overview (NEtO) application and a web browser. If connecting to the NE using a static IP address, the must know the following: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
89
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
•
IP address reserved for the PC in the radio IP addressing scheme
•
netmask
•
default Gateway
The software version of the 9500 MPR NE must match the software version of the NEtO/ JUSM/CT. If JUSM/CT is logged into an NE with a different software version, the NE/ NEtO/JUSM/CT behavior may not function as expected. The NEtO tool determines the software version of the NE logging in to and will open the correct version of JUSM when available. The NEtO tool may be used to determine the software version of a specific NE in the NE description area. Upon launching the TCO suite for the first time of the session, the TCO suite first launches the NEtO Servers Manager and then the NEtO application. For detailed information regarding , see ister profiles for definitions of s, profiles and responsibilities. For detailed information to configure a PC to connect to an NE, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Software Installation and NE Upgrade Manual. The Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual may also be used as reference. Note: Graphics in this chapter may not match the current release.
90
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
13.4 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To using JUSM
•
To log out of JUSM
•
To to Web Server
•
To log out of Web Server
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
91
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To using JUSM Note: If the software version of the 9500 MPR NE does not match one of the installed software versions of the NEtO/JUSM/CT, the may fail. This failure manifests in the following three failure modes: • After clicking OK on the NEtO NE info area, a warning message displays, ‘Start supervision failed. NE’s type or release is not ed.’ • After entering the name and , an error message displays, ‘SW license not ed: JUSM will be closed.’ • After entering the name and , the progress window hangs up at approximately 40% completed.
1.
2.
Is NEtO currently running? a.
If no, go to step 5.
b.
If yes, go to step 6.
Double-click on the WebEML icon on the desktop to launch NEtO. See Figure 13.1. Figure 13.1 — WebEML icon
The NEtO Servers Manager window opens. See Figure 13.2. Figure 13.2 — NEtO Servers Manager window
Then the NEtO window opens. See Figure 13.3.
92
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.3 — NEtO overview window
3.
From the NEtO window, enter the NE IP Address or DNS name
4.
Click OK.
Note: When logging in to an NE running software version R2.2.x and earlier, the behavior is slightly different. See the documentation for the release of the NE software version for the correct sequence.
The window opens. See Figure 13.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
93
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.4 — NEtO window
5.
In the window, enter Name “name” and “”. Click . Supervision with the NE starts.
6.
Click on the Show button to launch radio application software. An acknowledgment window opens; see Figure 13.5. Figure 13.5 — Acknowledgment of authorization
7.
Click on the Accept button. JUSM 9500 MPR application launches. See Figure 13.6 for an example connected to an MSS-8 shelf. See Figure 13.7 for an example connected to an MSS-4 shelf. See Figure 13.8 for an example connected to an MSS-1 shelf. See Figure 13.9 for an example connected to an MSS-O shelf.
94
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.6 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen MSS-8 shelf
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
95
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.7 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen MSS-4 shelf
96
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.8 — JUSM 9500 MPR main screen MSS-1 shelf
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
97
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.9 — JUSM 9500 MPR main screen MSS-O shelf
To log out of JUSM 1.
In the upper right hand corner of the JUSM window, select the “X”. See Figure 13.10. Figure 13.10 — Close JUSM 9500 MPR main screen
The confirm request window opens. 2.
Click Yes. The JUSM window closes.
3.
98
To close the NEtO application, click Exit. See Figure 13.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The confirm request window opens. 4.
Click Yes. The NEtO window closes. If both FTP/SFTP servers are disabled and no other RMI Registry components are running, the NEtO Servers Manager window will close automatically. If the NEtO Servers Manager detects either FTP/SFTP server enabled or other RMI Registry components running the NEtO server Manager will remain open.
5.
To close NEtO Servers Manager application, in the upper right hand corner of the NEtO Servers Manager window, select the “X”. See Figure 13.11. Figure 13.11 — Close NEtO Servers Manager window
The NEtO Servers Manager close window opens. 6.
Click Yes. The NEtO Servers Manager window closes.
To to Web Server Note: Web Server is available when a Core-E card is in use. When a CorEvo card is in use, logging in from a web browser opens WebCT. For more information about WebCT, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR WebCT Manual.
1.
In a web browser, enter the radio IP address or the URL (shown below). http://radio IP Address The 9500 MPR Web Server webpage appears. See Figure 13.12.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
99
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.12 — 9500 MPR web interface webpage
2.
Enter the NE name and (same as the name and entered on WebEML). The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window. See Figure 13.13.
100
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.13 — Web server main menu
To log out of Web Server 1.
In the lower left-hand corner of the Main Menu pane, select . See Figure 13.13.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
101
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
102
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
14 — ister community string
14.1 — Purpose This chapter provides instructions to provision community strings and to a NE with the community string provisioned for the 9500 MPR.
14.2 — Overview The Community String (CS) acts like a to control access to an NE. It defines what community of people can access the NE. Two community strings are ed: •
•
Get CS •
Default value: public
•
Both Read and Read-Write objects operate in Read mode only
Set CS •
Default value: private
•
Both Read and Read-Write objects operate in their respective modes
Community Strings must meet the following complexity parameters: •
Minimum Length - CS must be at least six characters in length
•
Maximum Length - CS shall not exceed ten characters in length
•
Composition - CS must be composed alphanumeric (Upper and lower case) characters only
NEtO only s the Set CS Community String.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
103
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
14.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To set the community string using the Web Server
•
To set the community string using the NEtO
To set the community string using the Web Server 1.
to the NE using a web browser. See to and out of system for detailed instructions. The 9500MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
From the Main Menu pane, select Community String. The Community Strings Setting view displays. See Figure 14.1. Figure 14.1 — Web Server Community Strings setting view
3.
In the Read-Only Community String field, enter the new value (public is the default value).
4.
In the Read-Write Community String field, enter the new value (private is the default value).
Caution: Provisioning new Community Strings will cause a loss of communication on all NEtO sessions currently active.
5.
Click Apply.
To set the community string using the NEtO 1.
104
Launch NEtO. See to and out of system for detailed instructions.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures NEtO window opens. From the NEtO Overview window, select Community String request icon in the upper right-hand corner. See Figure 14.2. Figure 14.2 — NEtO Community Strings Request icon
The Community Strings Request window displays. See Figure 14.3. Figure 14.3 — NEtO Community Strings Request window
2.
In the Insert NE read-write Community String field, enter the new value.
3.
Click OK.
4.
Close NEtO.
5.
Launch new NEtO session.
6.
to NE. NEtO uses community string value.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
105
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
106
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
15 — ister external alarm points on an Auxiliary card
15.1 — Purpose The procedure s in this chapter provide instructions to ister the external alarm points ed by the Auxiliary card.
15.2 — Prerequisites The Auxiliary card must be enabled in MSS-4 slot 4 or MSS-8 slot 8 before the external alarm points can be provisioned.
15.3 — General The Auxiliary card s six external alarm inputs and seven external alarm outputs. Each external alarm input can be provisioned; alarm active low or active high, and label. Each external alarm output can be provisioned; alarm active low or active high, and label.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
107
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
15.4 — Procedures This chapter includes procedures for the following: •
To provision external alarm inputs
•
To provision external alarm outputs
•
To provision external alarm output state
To provision external alarm inputs 1.
Select MSS-4/AUX slot #4 or MSS-8/AUX slot #8 in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the MSS/AUX card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Double-click on the blue AUX Card. The AUX Main View window opens.
3.
Click the External Points tab.
4.
Click the Settings tab. See Figure 15.1. Figure 15.1 — External Alarm Input Setting tab
108
5.
Select I#[1-6] in the resource tree area.
6.
Select I#[1-6] in the resource tree area.
7.
In the Label field, enter the alarm input label.
8.
Select the External inputs Polarity radio button, Active Low or Active High.
9.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The External Points Resource List Table updates. See Figure 15.2. Figure 15.2 — External alarm inputs provisioned
10. Close the AUX Main View window. To provision external alarm outputs 1.
Select MSS-4/AUX slot #4 or MSS-8/AUX slot #8 in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the MSS/AUX card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Double-click on the blue AUX Card. The AUX Main View window opens.
3.
Click the External Points tab.
4.
Click the Settings tab. See Figure 15.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
109
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 15.3 — External Alarm Output setting tab
5.
Select O#[1-7] in the resource tree area.
6.
In the Label field, enter the alarm input label.
7.
Select the External output Polarity radio button, Active Low or Active High.
8.
Click Apply. The External Points Resource List Table updates. See Figure 15.4.
110
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 15.4 — External Alarm Outputs provisioned
9.
Close the AUX Main View window.
To provision external alarm output state 1.
Select MSS-4/AUX slot #4 or MSS-8/AUX slot #8 in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the MSS/AUX card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Double-click on the blue AUX Card. The AUX Main View window opens.
3.
Click the External Points tab.
4.
Click the Settings tab. See Figure 15.4.
5.
Select External Alarm Point to change alarm state in the resource tree area or Resource List Table.
6.
Select the External Output External State radio button, On or Off.
7.
Click Apply. The External Alarm Point state updates. See Figure 15.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
111
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 15.5 — External Alarm Output Provisioned ON
8.
112
Close the AUX Main View window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
16 — ister external alarm points on an MSS-1 or Enhanced Fan card
16.1 — Purpose The procedure in this chapter provides instructions to ister the external alarm points ed by the MSS-1 unit and the Enhanced Fan card.
16.2 — Prerequisites For MSS-1: The MSS-1 must be active before the external alarm points can be provisioned. For the Enhanced Fan card: The Enhanced Fan card must be enabled in MSS-8 slot 9 before the external alarm points can be provisioned.
16.3 — Overview The MSS-1 and Enhanced Fan card four external alarm inputs and three alarm outputs. Each external alarm input is provisionable; alarm active low or active high, and label. The alarm outputs do not require provisioning by the operator: they operate alarm LEDs on the shelf.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
113
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
16.4 — Procedure 1.
Select action.
2.
To Open MSS External Input Point main view for MSS-1, go to step 4.
3.
To Open MSS FANS Main View for MSS-8, go to step 6.
4.
Open MSS External Input Point main view for MSS-1 Select MSS/HK in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the Housekeeping inputs area in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-1 unit in the resource list area. The MSS External Input Point main view opens, see Figure 16.1.
5.
To Provision external alarm input, go to step 7.
6.
Open MSS FANS Main View for MSS-8 Select Slot #9 MSS/FANS in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the FAN card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area. The MSS A-FANS or E-FANS Main View opens. The view is the same as shown in Figure 16.1.
7.
Provision external alarm input From the MSS FANS main view or MSS External Input Point main view, click the Settings tab. See Figure 16.1.
8.
Select I#[11-14] in the resource tree area. Figure 16.1 — External Alarm Input Setting tab
114
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 9.
In the Label field, enter the alarm input label.
10. Select the External inputs Polarity radio button, Active Low or Active High. 11. Click Apply. 12. The External Points Resource List Table updates. See Figure 16.2. Figure 16.2 — External alarm inputs provisioned
13. Close the Main View window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
115
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
116
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
17 — ister In-Band TMN VLAN port
17.1 — Purpose This chapter provides instructions to enable, disable, and view In-band TMN VLAN port for the 9500 MPR.
17.2 — Overview The TMN In-Band feature allows the extension of the DCN over Ethernet interfaces used to carry traffic. TMN In-Band allows the to manage an 9500 MPR NE using general Ethernet port from a central location (NOC). In-band TMN messages can reach the 9500 MPR over general Ethernet ports. In-band TMN messages are ed on all enabled electrical Ethernet ports and all enabled optical Ethernet ports on the Core-E or CorEvo card. The DS and P values allow a priority to be set for TMN management packets to the Data Communications Network (DCN). Queue mapping for TMN management packets is performed outside the 9500 MPR. TMN packets inside the radio network are in a fixed high-priority queue. In-band TMN provisioning applies to all associated Ethernet ports, electrical and optical. TMN In-band, TMN VLAN port interface, and Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface should not be connected to a network at the same time. Each IPv4 In-band TMN Ethernet interface requires the following: •
•
Unique IP address and sub-network mask •
TMN In-Band #1 default IP address: 10.0.3.2.
•
TMN In-Band #1 default sub-network mask: 255.255.255.0.
•
TMN In-Band #2 default IP address: 10.0.4.2.
•
TMN In-Band #2 default sub-network mask: 255.255.255.0.
Uses the same MAC address as Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
117
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
•
Unique VLAN ID (2-4080).
•
DS value between 0 and 63. Default is 34.
•
P value between 0 and 7. Default is 7.
•
IP Routing Protocol: Static/OSPF •
When OSPF routing protocol is selected: OSPF Area Number must be provisioned.
•
OSPF Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning the In-band TMN Ethernet interface
In-band TMN Ethernet interface IP address must satisfy the following rules: •
IP address can be equal to the local IP address, but must be different from Port#4 TMN interface port IP address
•
IP address 0.0.0.0 is not ed
•
IP addresses 127.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255 are not ed
In-band TMN Ethernet interface sub-network mask must satisfy the following rules: •
Sub-network Mask 0.0.0.0 is not ed
•
Sub-network Mask 255.255.255.255 is not ed
•
Sub-network Mask assigned to the In-band TMN Ethernet interface must be different than the Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface
Each IPv6 In-band TMN Ethernet interface requires the following: •
Unique IP address with FE80::/64 as high-order bits •
TMN In-Band #1 default IP address: FEC0:0:0:3::1/64.
•
TMN In-Band #2 default IP address: FEC0:0:0:4::1/64.
•
Uses the same MAC address as Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface
•
Unique VLAN ID (2-4080).
•
IP Routing Protocol: Static/OSPFv3 •
When OSPFv3 routing protocol is selected: OSPFv3 Area Number must be provisioned.
•
OSPFv3 Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning the In-band TMN Ethernet interface
In-band TMN Ethernet interface IP address must satisfy the following rules:
118
•
IPv6 addresses having the Interface ID portion equal to all 0 are not allowed
•
IPv6 address::/128 (Unspecified address) is not allowed
•
IPv6 address::1/128 (Loopback Address) is not allowed
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
•
IPv6 addresses having FF00::/8 as high-order bits (Multicast addresses) are not allowed
•
IPv6 addresses having FE80::/10 as high-order bits (Link Local Addresses) are not allowed
The TMN In-Band networking interface IPv6 address must belong to a subnet number different than the ones associated with other TMN interfaces including the other TMN InBand interface (the subnet numbers resulting from applying the shortest prefix length must not be the same). Every time the TMN In-Band networking interface is enabled or its IPv6 Global Unicast address is modified, Duplicate Address Detection must be performed prior to asg it to the TMN interface. When a duplicate address is detected, an alarm is raised, one for each TMN In-Band networking interface. You need to change the IPv6 address to remove duplicates. IPv6 addresses FF02::1 (All nodes) and FF02::2 (All Routers) Multicast Group addresses must be ed by an enabled TMN In-Band networking interface. NDP (Neighbor Discovery Protocol) is used to perform Neighbor Address Resolution to retrieve MAC address-IPv6 address association over the VLAN. IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration is not performed over TMN In-Band networking interfaces. In-band TMN Ethernet interface is automatically assigned 802.1p priority 0 on egress traffic. Caution: Enabling and disabling the In-band TMN VLAN port requires an NE reboot. This NE reboot will affect all traffic carried by the system.
Note: An NE reboot occurs automatically when enabling and disabling the In-band TMN VLAN port.
Note: Updating In-band TMN VLAN port provisioning is not ed. To modify In-band TMN VLAN port provisioning the must first disable the port. Then enable the port with the new provisioning parameters. Doing this will affect traffic two times. Once when the port is disabled and once when the port is re-enabled.
For information regarding OSPF and Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface provisioning, refer to ister network configuration.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
119
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
17.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To view In-Band TMN VLAN port provisioning
•
To provision an In-Band TMN VLAN port
•
To disable an In-Band TMN VLAN port
To view In-Band TMN VLAN port provisioning 1.
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the CORE-Main card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area. Double-click on the blue CORE-Main Card. See Figure 17.1. Figure 17.1 — 9500 MPR Equipment tab: Core-E Card selected
The Ethernet Physical Interface Settings tab displays. 2.
Select TMN Interface tab.
3.
Select TMN In-Band#1/2.
4.
Select Settings tab. See Figure 17.2. In-band TMN provisioning is displayed.
120
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 17.2 — TMN In-band Settings tab
To provision an In-Band TMN VLAN port 1.
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the CORE-Main card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area. Double-click on the blue CORE-Main Card. See Figure 17.1. Ethernet Physical Interface Settings tab displays.
2.
Select TMN Interface tab.
3.
Select TMN In-Band#1/2.
4.
Select Settings tab. See Figure 17.2.
5.
Select the Working Mode Enabled check box.
6.
Enter the VLAN ID for the In-band TMN Ethernet interface in the VLAN ID field.
7.
Choose the DS value from the DS drop-down menu.
8.
Choose the P value from the P drop-down menu.
9.
Enter the IP address for the In-band TMN Ethernet interface in the IP address field.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
121
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 10. Enter Sub-Network Mask for the In-band TMN Ethernet interface in the IP Mask field (IPv4 mode) or Network Prefix size in the Prefix Length field (IPv6 mode). 11. From the IP Routing Protocol drop-down menu, Static Routing or OSPF. 12. If OSPF is selected, from the OSPF Area Number drop-down menu, select OSPF Area Number for the In-band TMN Ethernet interface. 13. Select all Ethernet ports which will be a member of TMN In-Band from the Associated Ethernet Ports field. 14. Click Apply. Configuration Update window displays. 15. Click OK. 16. In-band TMN Ethernet interface provisioning. See Figure 17.3. Figure 17.3 — TMN In-band Port Enabled
To disable an In-Band TMN VLAN port 1.
122
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the CORE-Main card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Double-click on the blue CORE-Main (Core-E) Card. See Figure 17.1. Ethernet Physical Interface Settings tab displays. 2.
Select TMN Interface tab.
3.
Select TMN In-Band#1/2.
4.
Select Settings tab. See Figure 17.2.
5.
Select Working Mode Enabled check-box (unchecked). The Inband TMN page displays. See Figure 17.3.
6.
Click Apply. Configuration Update window displays.
7.
Click OK. TMN Ethernet interface is disabled. See Figure 17.4. Figure 17.4 — TMN In-band Port Disabled
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
123
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
124
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
18 — ister network configuration
18.1 — Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to ister network configuration.
18.2 — Overview TMN Ethernet port provisioning requirements depend on how the Ethernet port 4 and MGMT (NMS) port on the Core-E or CorEvo card are to be used. The NMS port is normally reserved for craft terminal interface with the PC. The serial data interface with the PC for the craft terminal on the NMS port is default enabled with IPv4 address 10.0.1.2 and IPv6 address FEC0:0:0:1::1 and requires no special provisioning. For NMS port provisioning other than the default values, provision TMN Ethernet Interface. If Ethernet Port#4 is being used to interface external Ethernet equipment, then the Ethernet Physical Interface Port#4 must be enabled and provisioned and Port#4 TMN Ethernet Interface must be disabled. If Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface is used to connect to a larger TMN network and communicate with other equipment at the site, the following must be configured: •
Ethernet Physical Interface Port#4 must be disabled
•
Port#4 TMN Ethernet Interface must be enabled and provisioned
•
TMN Ethernet Interface must be enabled and provisioned
The TMN In-Band feature allows the extension of the DCN over Ethernet interfaces used to carry traffic. TMN In-Band allows the to manage an 9500 MPR NE using general Ethernet port from a central location (NOC). For information regarding TMN In-Band provisioning, see ister In-Band TMN VLAN port. To perform IPv6 pre-provisioning, go to Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
125
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
TMN traffic is assigned to QoS queue 6 which is a higher priority than Ethernet traffic, but lower than MEF8 (TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH) traffic. TMN bandwidth is not reserved, which allows traffic, up to the maximum capacity of the radio link when the TMN port is idle. TMN traffic must be considered when configuring CIR flows. When deploying external devices using the TMN channel, care must be taken to avoid using more bandwidth than is available on the radio link. It is recommended to use a Ethernet port to attach remote devices for monitoring instead of the TMN port. IP Provisioning is normally performed by the Internet Protocol (IP group). Before starting IP provisioning, the must know IP routing and have the following information available: •
IP Address
•
IP Mask
•
Method of IP routing to be used in network (Static versus OSPF)
•
If OSPF (Open Shortest Path First protocol) is the required routing method, the must know the number of the OSPF Area the radio is in.
•
TMN Ethernet Interface
•
Port#4 TMN Ethernet Interface
The 9500MPR s IPv6 addressing for the NE. An IPv4 or an IPv6 stack can be used for T/IP and to build the DCN. Applications running over the internal NE LAN, such as MAP and FTP, are always bound to the IPv4 stack. If the IPv6 stack has been activated, you will not be able to configure IPv4 parameters using the SNMP interface. Caution: Mixed configuration of IPv4 and IPv6 NEs is not ed. Before activating IPv6, ensure that all NEs in the network are IPv6 capable, that is, running R4.1.0 or higher software. A controlled activation is required; see local guidelines.
18.2.1 — OSPF area The system s up to four OSPF areas. OSPF Area “0” is the default area and is not provisionable. OSPF Areas 1 through 3 are provisionable. The following OSPF Area parameter are the default values for the system and are not provisionable: • 126
Priority: 1 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
•
Retransmit Interval: 5 sec
•
Hello Interval: 10 sec
•
Dead Interval: 40 sec
•
Poll Interval: 120 sec
•
Maximum MTU: 1500 (Broadcast), 1492 (PointToPoint)
If IPv6 is in use, OSPFv3 is used automatically. Note: When the 9500 MPR is used with other equipment, the OSPF interface parameters of the equipment must be the same as those of the related TMN interface on the 9500 MPR.
The 9500 MPR OSPF parameters are: •
Hello Interval: 10 seconds
•
Router Dead Interval: 40 seconds
•
Retransmit Interval: 5 seconds
•
Interface Transit Delay: 1 second
•
MTU: 1500 bytes
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
127
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
18.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To provision NE IP address
•
To ister TMN Ethernet interface
•
To ister Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface
•
To provision IP static routing in IPv4
•
To provision IP static routing in IPv6
•
To provision OSPF Area Configuration
•
To activate the IPv6 stack
•
To view IP routing information
To provision NE IP address 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration> Local Configuration. See Figure 18.1. Figure 18.1 — Local Configuration main menu bar path
The Local Configuration window opens. See Figure 18.2. Figure 18.2 — Local Configuration (IP Address) window
2. 128
Enter the IP address of the NE in the IP Address field. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 3.
Click Apply. Communication with the radio will be lost. The must to the radio using the IP address configured in step 2.
4.
Click Close.
To ister TMN Ethernet interface 1.
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the Main Core card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Double-click on the blue CORE-Main Card. See Figure 18.3. Figure 18.3 — 9500 MPR Equipment tab: Core-E card selected
CORE Main View Slot#1 displays. 3.
Select TMN Interface tab.
4.
Select TMN Ethernet in the resource tree area.
5.
Select Settings tab. See Figure 18.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
129
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 18.4 — TMN Ethernet interface: Settings tab
6.
7.
Select action. a.
To Provision TMN Ethernet interface, go to step 7.
b.
To Deprovision TMN Ethernet interface, go to step 14.
Provision TMN Ethernet interface See Figure 18.4 for the following steps: Select TMN Working Mode Enabled check box (checked).
8.
Enter TMN IP Address in IP Address field for the NMS interface (MGMT Port on Core card).
9.
Enter IP Mask or Netmask in IP Mask field.
10. Select IP Routing Protocol from drop-down menu: Static Routing or OSPF. 11. If the OSPF IP Routing Protocol is selected, from the OSPF Area Number drop-down menu, select OSPF Area Number (0 - 3).? 12. Click Apply. 13. Close CORE Main View window.
130
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 14. Deprovision TMN Ethernet interface See Figure 18.4 for the following steps: 15. Click Apply. 16. Close CORE Main View window. To ister Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface 1.
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the CORE-Main card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Double-click on the blue Core-Main Card. See Figure 18.3. CORE Main View Slot#1 displays.
3.
Select TMN Interface tab.
4.
Select Port#4 TMN Ethernet in the resource tree area.
5.
Select Settings tab. See Figure 18.5. Figure 18.5 — Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface: Settings tab
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
131
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 6.
7.
Select action. a.
To Provision Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface, go to step 7.
b.
To Deprovision Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface, go to step 12.
Provision Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface Select TMN Working Mode Enabled check box (checked).
8.
Enter IP Address for Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface.
9.
Enter IP Mask or Netmask.
10. Static or OSPF TMN interface routing? a.
For static routing, from the IP Routing Protocol drop-down menu, select Static Routing and click apply.
b.
For OSPF, perform the following: a.
From the IP Routing Protocol drop-down menu, select OSPF.
b.
From the OSPF Area Number drop-down menu, select OSPF Area Number (0 - 3).
c.
Click Apply.
11. Close the CORE Main View window. 12. Deprovision Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface Select TMN Working Mode Enabled check box (unchecked). If a static route exists on the interface, an “access denied” error message will display. The static routes must be removed before the interface can be deprovisioned. 13. Click Apply. 14. Close CORE Main View window. To provision IP static routing in IPv4 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration>IP Configuration> IP Static Routing Configuration. See Figure 18.6.
Figure 18.6 — IP Static Routing Configuration main menu bar path
132
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The IP Static Routing Configuration window opens. See Figure 18.7. Figure 18.7 — IP Static Routing Configuration window (IPv4)
2.
Select desired Host or Network Address Choice radio button: Host or Network.
3.
Which IP Static Routing Configuration was selected? a.
If Network, enter the IP Mask of the radio in the IP Mask text field..
b.
If Host, enter the IP Address of the radio in the IP Address text field
4.
Select desired Default Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice radio button: Default Gateway IP Address or Point To Point Interface Index.
5.
Which Default Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice was selected? a.
If Default Gateway IP Address, enter the Default Gateway IP Address in the Default Gateway IP Address text field.
b.
If Point To Point Interface Index, from the Interface Type drop-down menu, select Gateway.
6.
Click Create.
7.
Click Close.
To provision IP static routing in IPv6 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration>IP Configuration> IP Static Routing Configuration. See Figure 18.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
133
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
The IP Static Routing Configuration window opens. See Figure 18.8. Figure 18.8 — IP Static Routing Configuration window (IPv6)
3.
Select desired Host or Network Address Choice radio button: Host or Network.
4.
Which IP Static Routing Configuration was selected? a.
If Network, enter the Subnet prefix length of the radio in the Subnet prefix length text field.
b.
If Host, enter the IP Address of the radio in the IPv6 Address text field.
5.
Select desired Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice radio button: Gateway IPv6 Address or Point To Point Interface Index.
6.
Which Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice was selected? a.
If Default Gateway IP Address, enter the Gateway IP Address in the Gateway IPv6 Address text field.
b.
If Point To Point Interface Index, from the Point to Point Interface drop-down menu, select an interface Id.
7.
Click Create.
8.
Click Close.
To provision OSPF Area Configuration 134
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration>IP Configuration> OSPF Area Configuration. See Figure 18.9. Figure 18.9 — OSPF Area Configuration main menu bar path
The OSPF Area Configuration window opens. See Figure 18.10 and Figure 18.11. Figure 18.10 — OSPF Area Configuration window (IPv4)
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
135
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 18.11 — OSPFv3 Area Configuration window (IPv6)
2.
Select new check box (checked). A maximum of 3 areas can be created.
3.
Enter the OSPF Area Address in the OSPF Area Address text field.
4.
From the OSPF Area Stub Flag drop-down menu, select OSPF Area Stub Flag: True or False.
Note: When the 9500 MPR is used with other equipment, the OSPF interface parameters of the equipment must be the same as those of the related TMN interface on the 9500 MPR.
5.
Click Create.
6.
Click Apply.
7.
Click Close.
To activate the IPv6 stack 1.
2.
136
Select action. a.
To provide parameters for IPv6, perform Perform IPv6 preprovisioning. If you activate IPv6 on the NE without performing preprovisioning, default parameters will be applied.
b.
To activate the IPv6 stack, perform the following steps.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration>IP Configuration>Activate IPv6 stack. See Figure 18.12.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 18.12 — Activate IPv6 stack main menu bar path
A warning window opens. See Figure 18.13. Figure 18.13 — Activate IPv6 stack warning
3.
Click on the Yes button to complete the activation. The menu option changes to Activate IPv4 stack, to return to IPv4.
To view IP routing information 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration> Routing Information. See Figure 18.14. Figure 18.14 — Routing Information main menu bar path
The IP Routing Information window opens. See Figure 18.15. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
137
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 18.15 — IP Routing Information window
2.
138
Click Close.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
19 — ister QoS configuration
19.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to ister the QoS configuration using the craft terminal for the 9500 MPR.
19.2 — Overview The QoS Configuration tool allows the to customize the following QoS parameters: •
•
•
•
QoS Classification Criterion •
Disabled
•
IEEE 802.1p
•
DiffServ
QoS Priority Value to Internal Forwarding Class •
IEEE 802.1p Priority Code Point (P)
•
DiffServ Code Point (D)
Queue Scheduling Algorithm •
Deficit Weighted Round Robin (DWRR)
•
Strict Priority (SP)
Queue Size
The QoS Configuration tool allows the to view the following QoS parameters: •
Internal Forwarding Class to Queue Mapping
For detailed information on QoS configuration parameters, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual General System Description, Features, Ethernet, Quality of Service (QoS).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
139
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
19.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To launch the QoS Configuration tool
•
To provision the Queue Scheduling algorithm
•
To restore Queue Scheduling algorithm default values
•
To restore Saved Queue Scheduling algorithm values
•
To provision Queue Size
•
To restore Queue Size default values
•
To restore saved Queue Size values
•
To open the Qos Classification tool to ister QoS Classification
•
To provision QoS Classification Criterion
•
To provision 802.1p P to Internal Forwarding Class values
•
To provision DiffServ DS to Internal Forwarding Class Values
•
To restore 802.1p or DiffServ to Forwarding Class Default Values
•
To restore Saved Queue Size values
To launch the QoS Configuration tool 1.
Launch QoS Configuration tool from the craft terminal. Click the QoS Configuration Icon, see Figure 19.1, or from the main menu bar, select Configuration > QoS Configuration. Figure 19.1 — QoS Configuration icon
QoS Configuration tool opens. See Figure 19.2.
140
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.2 — QoS Configuration tool
To provision the Queue Scheduling algorithm 1.
Select Scheduler Configuration tab. See Figure 19.2.
2.
From the Mode column, select all Queues to change scheduling algorithm (DWRR or SP). See Figure 19.3.
Note: The background of modified parameters is shown in yellow.
3.
If Mode selection is DWRR, from the Weight column select queue weight (1 to 32). See Figure 19.3. Figure 19.3 — Provision Queue Scheduler algorithm
4.
Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. The Scheduler Configuration tab updates. See Figure 19.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
141
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.4 — Provisioned Queue Scheduler algorithm
b.
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Scheduling algorithm values.
To restore Queue Scheduling algorithm default values 1.
Click Defaults. See Figure 19.5.
Note: The background of modified parameters is shown in yellow.
Figure 19.5 — Restore Queue Scheduler algorithm default values
2.
Save changes to NE? a.
142
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. The Scheduler Configuration tab updates. See Figure 19.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.6 — Provisioned Queue Scheduler algorithm
To restore Saved Queue Scheduling algorithm values 1.
Click Restore. See Figure 19.5. Scheduler Configuration tab restores the saved values.
To provision Queue Size 1.
Select Queue Size Configuration tab. See Figure 19.7. Figure 19.7 — Queue Size Configuration Tab
2.
3.
Queue sizes to provision? a.
If individual queue sizes, go to step 3.
b.
If copy all queue sizes from one radio direction to another radio direction, go to step 7.
For the queue size to provision, double-click on the queue size cell to provision. See Figure 19.8. The queue size selected will display the provisioned queue size in bytes.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
143
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The background of modified parameters is shown in yellow.
4.
Update the queue size value in bytes (ed range: 2480 to 4034836 bytes). See Figure 19.8. Figure 19.8 — Provision Queue Size
5.
Repeat the two previous steps to provision additional queue size values.
6.
Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. Queue Size Configuration tab updates. See Figure 19.9. Figure 19.9 — Provisioned Queue Size
b. 7. 144
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Size values.
Select the Radio Direction to copy queue sizes from. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 8.
Click Copy.
9.
Select the Radio Direction to copy queue sizes to.
10. Click Paste. The queue sizes for radio direction are updated. See Figure 19.10. Figure 19.10 — Copied Radio Direction queue sizes
11. Repeat the two previous steps to provision additional radio direction queue sizes with the copied values. 12. Repeat steps 7 through 11 to provision additional radio direction with a different radio direction’s queue size values. 13. Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window.
b.
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Size values.
To restore Queue Size default values 1.
Click Defaults. See Figure 19.11.
Note: The background of modified parameters is shown in yellow.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
145
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.11 — Restore Queue Size default values
2.
Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. The Queue Size Configuration tab updates. See Figure 19.7.
b.
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Size values.
To restore saved Queue Size values 1.
Click Restore. See Figure 19.11. Queue Size Configuration tab restores the saved values. See Figure 19.7.
To open the Qos Classification tool to ister QoS Classification 1.
Select QoS Classification tab. See Figure 19.12. Figure 19.12 — QoS Classification Tab
To provision QoS Classification Criterion 1.
146
From the QoS Classification Criterion drop-down menu, select: Disabled, 802.1p, or DiffServ. See Figure 19.13. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.13 — Select QoS Classification Criterion
Note: The background of modified QoS Classification Criterion value is displayed in yellow.
2.
Click Apply. Apply Data to NE window displays.
3.
Click Yes. QoS Classification tab updates. See Figure 19.14. Figure 19.14 — Provisioned QoS Classification Criterion
To provision 802.1p P to Internal Forwarding Class values 1.
From the IEEE 802.1p to Forwarding Class Mapping pane, select new P to Forwarding Class value. See Figure 19.15.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
147
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.15 — Provision 802.1p P to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping
Note: The background of modified IEEE 802.1p P to Forwarding Class field is displayed in yellow.
2.
Repeat the previous step to provision additional IEEE 802.1p P to Forwarding Class Mapping.
3.
Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. The QoS Classification tab updates. See Figure 19.16.
Figure 19.16 — Provisioned 802.1p P to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping
b.
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Size values.
To provision DiffServ DS to Internal Forwarding Class Values 1.
148
From the DiffServ to Forwarding Class Mapping pane, select new DS to Forwarding Class value. See Figure 19.17.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.17 — Provision DiffServ DS to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping
Note: The background of modified DiffServ DS to Forwarding Class field is displayed in yellow.
2.
Repeat the previous step to provision additional DiffServ DS to Forwarding Class Mapping.
3.
Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. The QoS Classification tab updates. See Figure 19.18
Figure 19.18 — Provisioned DiffServ DS to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping
b.
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Size values.
To restore 802.1p or DiffServ to Forwarding Class Default Values 1.
Click Defaults. See Figure 19.15 or Figure 19.17.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
149
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The background of modified parameters is shown in yellow.
2.
Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. The QoS Classification tab updates.
b.
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Size values.
To restore Saved Queue Size values 1.
Click Restore. See Figure 19.16 or Figure 19.18. QoS Classification tab restores the saved values.
150
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
20 — ister software license
20.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view and update the Software License for the 9500 MPR.
20.2 — General In the SW License window the following fields are present: •
RMU Serial Number: The Serial Number of the Flash Card is displayed. This is a read-only field.
•
License String: The license string stored in the Flash Card is displayed. The license string displays the set of key features ed by the NE. This is a read-only field.
•
License Key: This field is used to upgrade the license string. To upgrade the license string, copy the code of the new license and click on Apply.
The Refresh button activates a new reading of the read-only fields. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for more information about license key management.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
151
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
20.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To view SW license using JUSM
•
To view SW License using Web Server
•
To update SW License
To view SW license using JUSM 1.
From the main menu bar, select Supervision>SW License. See Figure 20.1. Figure 20.1 — SW License main menu bar path
The SW License window opens. See Figure 20.2. Figure 20.2 — SW License window
2.
View software License Key, License String, and RMU Serial Number.
3.
Click Close.
To view SW License using Web Server 1.
152
to NE to View SW License using web browser. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The 9500MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server page. 2.
From the Main Menu pane, select License Info. The License Info page displays. See Figure 20.3. Figure 20.3 — 9500 MPR Web Server - License Info
3.
View software License String and RMU Serial Number.
To update SW License 1.
From the main menu bar, select Supervision>SW License. See Figure 20.1. The SW License window opens. See Figure 20.2.
2.
Open new software license text file.
3.
Select new software License Key from text file and copy.
4.
Select old software License Key in the SW License window and paste new software License Key.
5.
Click Apply.
6.
Click Close.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
153
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
154
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
21 — ister system date and time
21.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to ister NE Date and Time.
21.2 — General The system NE Time can be provisioned either to the PC/laptop operating system time, manually, or to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. System NE Time is used for time and date stamping functions. It is recommended that NTP be used to maintain consistent NE times within the network. This allows for easy correlation of alarm/event/PM timestamps with actual time and with a NMS. To minimize NTP traffic within the TMN network, each NE should use the next NE toward the NMS as its primary time server. When the NE is configured with NTP, NE time can not be provisioned manually. The date format is yyyy/mm/dd, where yyyy equals the four-digit year, mm equals the twodigit month, and dd equals the two-digit day. The time format is hh:mm:ss, where hh equals the two-digit hour (00 to 23), mm equals the two-digit minute (00 to 59), and ss equals the two-digit second (00 to59). System NE Time can be provisioned from the craft terminal and Web Server. Using the Web Server, System NE Time can be provisioned manually or to the PC/laptop operating system time. The NTP server can only be provisioned through the craft terminal. Only NTP status is available through the Web Server. Note: After an NE time change, PM history data must be cleared to prevent reporting erroneous PM data.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
155
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
21.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To provision NE Time to PC operating system time using JUSM
•
To provision NE Time to PC operating system time using Web Server
•
To provision NE Time manually using JUSM
•
To provision NE time manually using Web Server
•
To provision NE Time to NTP Server using JUSM
•
To view NTP Server Status using Web Server
To provision NE Time to PC operating system time using JUSM 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>NE Time. See Figure 21.1. Figure 21.1 — NE Time main menu bar path
The NE Time Configuration window opens. See Figure 21.2.
156
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 21.2 — NE Time Configuration window
2.
Select Set NE Time with OS Time check box (checked).
3.
Click Apply. The Information ‘Set NE time success!’ window opens.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Close.
To provision NE Time to PC operating system time using Web Server 1.
to NE to view NE alarms. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
From the web server Main Menu pane, select Date & Time Setting. The Date & Time Setting window displays. See Figure 21.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
157
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 21.3 — 9500 MPR Web Server date & time setting window
3.
From the NE Time Setting with OS Time field, click Apply to NE.
To provision NE Time manually using JUSM 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>NE Time. See Figure 21.1. The NE Time Configuration window opens. See Figure 21.4. Figure 21.4 — NE Time Configuration window
2.
158
Select date and time element to set in the Network Element Time field and perform one or more of the following: a.
Select four-digit year yyyy, and enter the new four-digit value.
b.
Select two-digit month mm, and enter the new two-digit value.
c.
Select two-digit day dd, and enter the new two-digit value. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
3.
d.
Select two-digit hour hh, and enter the new two-digit value.
e.
Select two-digit minute mm, and enter the new two-digit value.
f.
Select two-digit second ss, and enter the new two-digit value.
Click Apply. The Information ‘Set NE time success!’ window opens.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Close.
To provision NE time manually using Web Server 1.
to NE to view NE alarms. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
From the web server Main Menu pane, select Date & Time Setting. The Date & Time Setting window displays. See Figure 21.3.
3.
4.
Select date and time element to set in the Network Element Time field and perform one or more of the following: a.
Select four-digit year yyyy, and enter the new four-digit value.
b.
Select two-digit month mm, and enter the new two-digit value.
c.
Select two-digit day dd, and enter the new two-digit value.
d.
Select two-digit hour hh, and enter the new two-digit value.
e.
Select two-digit minute mm, and enter the new two-digit value.
f.
Select two-digit second ss, and enter the new two-digit value.
From the GMT Time Setting field, click Apply to NE.
To provision NE Time to NTP Server using JUSM 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration> NTP Configuration. See Figure 21.5. Figure 21.5 — NTP Configuration drop-down menu
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
159
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The NTP Configuration window opens. See Figure 21.6. Figure 21.6 — NTP Configuration window
2.
Select Enabled check box (checked) in the NTP Protocol area.
3.
Enter IP address of the Main NTP Server in the Main Server address field.
4.
Enter IP address of the Spare Server in the Spare Server address field.
5.
Click Apply. The Information ‘Set NTP Server success!’ window opens.
6.
Click OK.
7.
Click Close.
To view NTP Server Status using Web Server 1.
to NE to view NE alarms. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
From the web server Main Menu pane, select Date & Time Setting. The Date & Time Setting window displays. See Figure 21.3.
3.
160
From Date & Time Setting window, view NTP Status: Enabled or Disabled.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
22 — ister system settings
22.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to ister system settings.
22.2 — General The Systems Settings/NE Configuration screen is used to configure the DH Server , Ethernet LOS Criteria, Static Lag Criteria, System Priority Parameter, event and alarm logging, SNMP mode, and retrieve the NE MAC Address/Bridge Address.
22.2.1 — Tributary Port Configuration (ETSI market only) This field allows to set the suitable impedance of the E1 stream.
22.2.2 — DH server The default setting for DH server is enabled. In most configurations this is the recommended provisioning value. The DH should be disabled when using the local TMN port for a network connection. This enables the alarm reporting on the port. The DH should be enabled when using the local TMN port for a temporary CT port that will be left disconnected during normal operation. This disables the alarm reporting on the port. DH provisioning is ed from both the craft terminal and the Web Server.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
161
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
22.2.3 — Ethernet LOS criteria Ethernet LOS Criteria feature adds the following condition types to the Core protection switching criteria: •
LOS of Optical Ethernet interface
•
Card Fail of SFP optical module
•
Card Missing of SFP optical module
•
LOS of any Electrical Ethernet interfaces, including the LOS of the forth Ethernet interface working as TMN Local Ethernet interface.
Note: The following are the default Core protection switching criteria: • Core Card Missing • Core Card Fail Card Not Ready and Flash Card Realignment In Progress conditions represent inhibition of the Core protection switching with respect to Operator Commands and the additional criteria listed above.
22.2.4 — Static LAG criteria Static LAG Criteria feature is only available when the spare Core unit has been installed. By enabling Static LAG Criteria feature, the Ethernet ports of the Core unit in standby are in the ON state (same as the ports of the Active Core unit), but the Ethernet traffic is not forwarded. This behavior reduces the out of service time of traffic ing through the Ethernet interfaces when Core protection switching occurs. Static LAG Criteria must be provisioned “Disabled” when the NE is connected to equipment performing Link Aggregation and not ing the Active/Standby management of aggregated links.
22.2.5 — System priority parameter The System Priority Parameter is the System Priority (2 bytes) associated to the NE. This parameter, together with the System ID (the NE MAC address), determines the System Aggregation Priority (8 bytes). The range for the System Priority parameter is: 0 to 65,535 (default: 32,768). System Aggregation Priority:
162
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
•
[0 - 1 bytes] System Priority
•
[2 - 7 bytes] NE MAC address
The System Aggregation Priority of each System is an eight octet binary number. The System with the numerically lower value of System Aggregation Priority has the higher priority. A LAG system ing LA, dynamically assigns the member ports of the LAG group. Starting with the highest priority port to the lowest priority ports. At the remote end of the same LAG link, there is another system that wants also to assign the ports to the LAG group according to its own port priorities. And here two systems propose two different port assignments for the same LAG group. And it’s the system with the highest system priority that overrides the link and imposes its port assignment.
22.2.6 — AIS insertion for LOF detection on DS1 (ANSI market only) The AIS insertion for Loss Of Frame (LOF) detection on DS1 provisions NE behavior upon detection of LOF on DS1 inputs and outputs. This provisioning is applicable for all DS1 ports enabled on the MSS-4/8 shelf. By enabling AIS insertion for LOF detection on DS1 feature, AIS is inserted for the following conditions: •
Loss Of Frame detection on DS1 facilities incoming from the demarcation
•
Loss Of CESoETH Frame detection on DS1 facilities from the switch matrix
By disabling AIS insertion for LOF detection on DS1 feature, AIS is not inserted for the following conditions •
Loss Of Frame detection on DS1 facilities incoming from the demarcation
•
Loss Of CESoETH Frame detection on DS1 facilities from the switch matrix
22.2.7 — Event and alarm log To enable event and alarm logging, select enabled in the Event and Alarm Log Logging drop-down menu.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
163
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
22.2.8 — NE MAC Address/Bridge Address The NE MAC Address/Bridge Address value is displayed in the NE MAC Address/Bridge Address field.
22.2.9 — SNMP Mode The 9500 MPR s access from SNMP managers implementing both SNMPv2/v1 and SNMPv3 protocols. The ed SNMP operating modes are the following: •
SNMPv2: This is the default mode. Only SNMPv2/v1 managers are allowed access to the NE for both reading and writing.
•
SNMPv3: Only SNMPv3 managers are allowed access to the NE.
SNMPv3 addresses security problems by adding two new features on top of the existing SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 network management protocols: •
Authentication using hashing and time stamps.
•
Confidentiality using encryption.
SNMPv3 is based on the following: •
The based Security Model (USM), which provides strong authentication, data integrity, privacy (encryption) and time stamp management (timeliness),
•
The View base Access Control Model (VACM), which provides a mechanism for managing what information is available to s.
Authentication is provided using the HMAC-MD5-96 standard authentication protocol. The SNMP operating mode is stored in permanent memory on a Flash card. Caution: Changing the SNMP mode requires the NE to restart in the new mode.
Caution: When the NE has been configured to operate in SNMPv3 mode, the database must be cleared for the NE to be returned to SNMPv2 mode.
164
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
22.2.10 — Latitude and Longitude The Latitude and Longitude values, if available, are displayed in the Latitude and Longitude fields. The fields are read-only.
22.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the System Settings menu
•
To provision Tributary Port Configuration (ETSI market only)
•
To provision DH server using JUSM/CT 9500 MPR
•
To Provision DH server using the Web Server
•
To provision Ethernet LOS Criteria
•
To provision Static LAG Criteria
•
To provision the System Priority parameter
•
To provision AIS Insertion for LOF on DS1
•
To provision the Event and Alarm Log
•
To retrieve the NE MAC Address/Bridge Address
•
To provision SNMP mode using JUSM
•
To provision SNMP mode using the Web Server
•
To retrieve Latitude and Longitude
To open the System Settings menu •
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>System Settings. The System Settings tab opens. See Figure 22.1 for the ANSI market and Figure 22.2 for the ETSI market.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
165
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 22.1 — System Settings tab (ANSI market)
166
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 22.2 — System Settings menu (ETSI market)
To provision Tributary Port Configuration (ETSI market only) 1.
From the Impedance drop-down menu, select a value: Unbalanced 75 ohm or Balanced 120 ohm.
2.
Click on the Apply button.
3.
Click on the Close button.
To provision DH server using JUSM/CT 9500 MPR 1.
From the DH Server drop-down menu, select DH Server provisioning: Disabled or Enabled.
2.
Click on the Apply button.
3.
Click on the Close button.
To Provision DH server using the Web Server 1.
to NE to provision DH Server using web browser. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
167
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The 9500MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window. 2.
On Main Menu pane, select DH Setting. The DH Setting window displays. Figure 22.3 — 9500 MPR Web Server - DH Setting
3.
Click on the Refresh button.
4.
Determine Current DH Status.
5.
To change the DH provisioning, click on the Enable DH/Disable DH button.
To provision Ethernet LOS Criteria 1.
From the Ethernet Criteria drop-down menu, select Ethernet LOS Criteria provisioning: Disabled or Enabled.
2.
Click on the Apply button.
3.
Click on the Close button.
To provision Static LAG Criteria 1.
From the Static Log drop-down menu, select Static Log Criteria provisioning: Disabled or Enabled.
2.
Click on the Apply button.
3.
Click on the Close button.
To provision the System Priority parameter
168
1.
From the System Priority field, enter System Priority Parameter value: 0 to 65535 (default: 32,768).
2.
Click on the Apply button.
3.
Click on the Close button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision AIS Insertion for LOF on DS1 1.
From the AIS Insertion for LOF detection on DS1 drop-down menu, select: Disabled or Enabled.
2.
Click on the Apply button.
3.
Click on the Close button.
To provision the Event and Alarm Log 1.
From the Logging drop-down menu, select Event and Alarm Log provisioning: Disabled or Enabled.
2.
Click Apply.
3.
Click on the Close button.
To retrieve the NE MAC Address/Bridge Address 1.
From the NE MAC Address/Bridge Address field, record the Bridge Address.
2.
Click on the Close button.
To provision SNMP mode using JUSM Caution: Changing the SNMP Mode will cause the NE to restart.
Caution: When the NE has been configured to operate in SNMPv3 mode, it is not possible to return it to SNMPv2 mode without clearing the database.
1.
In the SNMP Mode Migration field, choose SNMPv2 or SNMPv3. SNMPv2 is chosen by default.
2.
Click Apply.
3.
Click on the Close button. The NE restarts.
To provision SNMP mode using the Web Server Caution: Changing the SNMP Mode will cause the NE to restart.
Caution: When the NE has been configured to operate in SNMPv3 mode, it is not possible to return it to SNMPv2 mode without clearing the database.
1.
to NE to provision SNMP Mode using web browser. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
On Main Menu pane, select Snmp Version.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
169
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The Snmp version window displays, showing the current version. Figure 22.4 — 9500 MPR Web Server - Snmp Version
3.
Click Refresh button.
4.
To change SNMP Mode, click on the Set Snmp version 3 or Set Snmp version 2 button. The NE restarts.
To retrieve Latitude and Longitude 1.
Retrieve Latitude and Longitude From the Latitude and Longitude fields, record the information.
2.
170
Click on the Close button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
23 — ister VLAN configuration
23.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to ister the VLAN configuration.
23.2 — Overview When a Core-E card is in use, three protocols are ed to manage Ethernet traffic: 802.1D (MAC Address Bridge), 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge), and 802.1ad (Provider Bridge). When a CorEvo card is in use, 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge), and 802.1ad (Provider Bridge) are ed. The default VLAN configuration is 802.1Q. Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
23.2.1 — 802.1D (MAC address bridge) When the NE is configured with 802.1D, Ethernet traffic is switched according to the destination MAC address without regards to VLAN ID. ed VLAN IDs are 0 and 2-4080. VLAN IDs outside the ed range of 0 and 2-4080 are dropped. VLAN IDs configured for TDM traffic flows are accepted.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
171
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
23.2.2 — 802.1Q (virtual bridge) When the NE is configured with 802.1Q, Ethernet traffic is switched according to VLAN IDs. In 802.1Q mode all Ethernet frames inside the 9500 MPR network are assigned a VLAN ID. VLAN 1 is automatically defined by the NE when 802.1Q is selected. All Ethernet ports (enabled and disabled) and all radio ports are of VLAN 1. VLAN 1 can’t be modified or deleted by the operator. In egress VLAN ID 1 is always removed from the ports. VLAN IDs 2-4080 are configurable. VLAN IDs associated with TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH cross-connections can not be used for 802.1Q VLAN IDs. VLAN IDs associated with future E1/DS1/DS3 tributary cross-connections should not be used for 802.1Q VLAN IDs. The management system prohibits the definition of VLAN IDs already provisioned. Ethernet ports provisioned as ‘Untagged Ports’, remove the VLAN ID from the Ethernet frame on egress. Only Ethernet ports are manageable. VLAN IDs cannot be removed from radio ports. The management system denies an attempt to disable any radio port (MPT-HC/MPT-HCHQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM) which is a member of a static VLAN. To disable the radio port, the must first remove the radio port as a member of a static VLAN. If a VLAN rate limiter is set on a port, the VLAN cannot be modified. The rate limiting must be removed before making any change to the VLAN.
23.2.3 — 802.1ad (Provider Bridge) When the NE is configured in Provider Bridge mode, the forwarding of Ethernet traffic is managed according to Service VLAN. Each Service VLAN (S-VLAN) represents a service instance that Ethernet traffic from a customer network is mapped to. In Provider Bridge mode, an S-VLAN is assigned to all Ethernet frames managed by the NE. The assignment of an S-VLAN to an Ethernet frame ingressing the NE shall be done according to the type of the Provider Bridge port: •
172
NNI: this is an interface internal to the Provider Bridged Network. S-VLAN is assigned based on S-VLAN ID carried by S-VLAN Tag or based on the ingress interface in case of S-VLAN untagged frames 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
•
UNI (port based): this is an interface at the edge of the Provider Bridged Network. SVLAN is assigned based on Ethernet port (Port-based service interface) regardless of the type of customer traffic (C-VLAN tagged or untagged)
•
UNI (VLAN based): this is an interface at the edge of the Provider Bridged Network. S-VLAN is assigned based on C-VLAN ID carried by C-VLAN Tag or based on Ethernet port in case of untagged frames (C-tagged service interface)
You can change the type of a Provider Bridge port. The following rules apply: •
An NNI can be changed to a port-based UNI only if the NNI was in the member set and untagged set of only one S-VLAN.
•
An NNI can be changed to a VLAN-based UNI only if the NNI was in the untagged set of all S-VLANs it belonged to.
•
A port-based UNI can be changed to an NNI or a VLAN-based UNI with no restrictions about its S-VLAN hip. The new port type inherits the S-VLAN hip and untagged set hip from the port-based UNI.
•
A VLAN-based UNI can be changed to an NNI with no restrictions about its S-VLAN hip. The NNI inherits the S-VLAN hip and untagged set hip from the VLAN-based UNI. Any C-VLAN to S-VLAN assignments must be removed from the VLAN-based UNI before changing it to an NNI.
•
A VLAN-based UNI can be changed to a port-based UNI only if it was in the member set and untagged set of only one S-VLAN. Any C-VLAN to S-VLAN assignments must be removed from the VLAN-based UNI before changing it to a port-based UNI.
23.2.3.1 — Ethernet frames processing When the NE is working in Provider Bridge mode, all the switches process Ethernet frames according to S-VLAN Tag. The tag of a single tagged Ethernet frame or the outer tag of a double tagged frame is recognized as an S-VLAN Tag according to the port S-VLAN TPID.
23.2.3.2 — Cross-connected flows processing When the NE is working in Provider Bridge mode, cross-connected flows are managed as single S-VLAN tagged frames. This implies that Ethernet ports being end-point of a cross-connection must be NNIs. The NE does not allow the set of a cross-connection not having a NNI as end-point. You cannot change a NNI to a UNI (port based) when cross-connections are present that use the NNI as an end-point.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
173
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
23.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the VLAN configuration window
•
To provision VLAN Configuration
•
To create a VLAN or S-VLAN
•
To edit a VLAN or S-VLAN
•
To delete a VLAN or S-VLAN
•
To filter by VLAN name
•
To export the VLAN list
To open the VLAN configuration window 1.
Open the VLAN configuration window Select either Configuration/VLAN Configuration from the main menu bar or VLAN Configuration icon from the main toolbar. See Figure 23.1. Figure 23.1 — VLAN Configuration icon
The VLAN Configuration window opens. See Figure 23.2.
174
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 23.2 — VLAN Configuration window with Core-E card in use
Figure 23.3 — VLAN Configuration window with CorEvo card in use
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
175
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision VLAN Configuration 1.
Provision which VLAN management protocol? a.
To provision 802.1D MAC select the 802.1D (MAC bridge) radio button and click on the Apply button. The VLAN Configuration window updates. See Figure 23.4. Figure 23.4 — VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1D
b.
To provision 802.1Q virtual bridge, select the 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge) radio button and click on the Apply button. VLAN Configuration window updates, the default VLAN 1 is displayed. See Figure 23.5.
176
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 23.5 — VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1Q
c.
To provision 802.1ad provider bridge, select the 802.1ad (Provider Bridge) radio button and click on the Apply button. The VLAN Configuration window updates, the default VLAN 1 is displayed. See Figure 23.6.
Figure 23.6 — VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1ad
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
177
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To create a VLAN or S-VLAN 1.
Select New... button. See Figure 23.5. The Create VLAN window opens. See Figure 23.7.
Note: In Provider Bridge mode, the window is called Create S-VLAN.
Figure 23.7 — Create VLAN window
2.
Enter VLAN ID number [2-4080].
3.
Enter VLAN Name (text string up to 32 character).
4.
From the VLAN Ports area, select the VLAN Ports to be of the VLAN.
5.
From the Untagged Ports area, select the Ethernet ports to remove VLAN ID from the egress Ethernet frame.
6.
Click OK. The Create VLAN window closes. Information window opens.
7.
Click OK. The new VLAN is added to the VLAN Configuration table. See Figure 23.8.
178
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 23.8 — New VLAN created
To edit a VLAN or S-VLAN 1.
From the VLAN Configuration window, select the VLAN to edit.
2.
Click Edit. See Figure 23.5. The Edit VLAN window opens. See Figure 23.9.
Note: In Provider Bridge mode, the window is called Edit S-VLAN.
Figure 23.9 — Edit VLAN window
3.
Modify VLAN parameters to update.
4.
Click OK. The Edit VLAN window closes.
5.
Information window opens, Click OK. The VLAN is updated in the VLAN Configuration table.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
179
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To delete a VLAN or S-VLAN 1.
From the VLAN Configuration window, select the VLAN to delete. Click Delete. See Figure 23.5. The Delete VLAN confirmation window opens.
2.
Click Yes to delete selected VLAN or click No to cancel delete VLAN operation. Information window opens.
3.
Click OK. The VLAN is removed from the VLAN Configuration table.
To filter by VLAN name 1.
From the VLAN Configuration window enter the text string to filter VLAN names with in the Filter by Name: field. See Figure 23.10. Figure 23.10 — Filter VLAN configuration table
2.
Click Filter. The VLAN configuration table is filtered using the text string entered in the Filter by Name field. See Figure 23.11.
180
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 23.11 — VLAN Configuration table filtered
3.
To restore full VLAN Configuration table, click Clear Filter.
To export the VLAN list 1.
From the VLAN Configuration window, click Export. See Figure 23.5.
2.
Navigate to the directory to save VLANList.csv file.
3.
Click Save.
4.
Message window opens, click OK.
5.
Close the VLAN Configuration window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
181
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
182
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
24 — Local access control management
24.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to manage Local Access Control (LAC).
24.2 — Overview NE control can be managed by an Operating System (OS) using the LAC feature. LAC management provides a mechanism to prevent multiple s sending write commands to the NE simultaneously. The OS manages the NE until a request to manage the NE is received from a craft terminal (CT) and granted. The request is initiated by the CT . The OS answering yes to the request transfers management of the NE to the CT. The LAC request can be denied by the OS (if for example the OS is in a state of recovery from a temporary loss of communication with the NE). The request to manage starts a timer. If the OS doesn't answer a CT request to manage in a predefined time, the CT automatically becomes the NE manager. The predefined time is provisionable. The manager currently managing the NE is indicated on the CT screen by the Lock control status (Local Access) granted icon. See Figure 24.4. When local access is denied on the CT is indicated by the Lock control status denied icon. See Figure 24.2.
24.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To enable local access control
•
To request local access control
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
183
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To enable local access control 1.
From the main menu bar, select Supervision > Access State > OS. See Figure 24.1. Figure 24.1 — Local Access Control - main menu bar path
LAC is enabled. In the status control area, the lock status icon updates to the access denied icon on CTs without LAC NE manager control. See Figure 24.2. Figure 24.2 — Lock (Local Access) Status Denied icon
To request local access control 1.
From the main menu bar, select Supervision > Access State > Requested. See Figure 24.3. Figure 24.3 — Local Access Control - main menu bar path
When LAC is granted by the OS the status control area lock status icon updates to the access granted icon, indicating the local CT is the NE manager. See Figure 24.4. Figure 24.4 — Lock (Local Access) Status Granted icon
184
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
25 — MIB database management (backup and restore)
25.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to perform MIB Database Management (backup and restore) on the 9500 MPR. A MIB database restore should be performed for catastrophic recovery ONLY.
25.2 — Overview Caution: All traffic will be interrupted during the activate database phase.
The backup operation provides the ability to save a copy of NE configurations parameters stored on the flash memory on the NE Core cards. Database backup file name s a , free-form string name, up to twenty-five characters. Only alphanumeric characters, the hyphen “-” character, and the underscore “_” character are ed. The file name is prefixed with the software version number as follows: “V
<maintenance revision 00-99> for example, “V020200”. The file name also includes the “.bar” extension. The maximum total backup file name length is thirty-six characters: Version (7 characters) free-form string name (25 characters) .bar extension (4 characters), for example,“V020200_Chicago-Pearl_2010-04-30.bar” is an example of the longest backup file name ed. To aid in tracking database backup files, it is recommended to use the NE Name and Date in the backup file name (for example, V020200_Chicago-Pearl_2010-04-30.bar) or follow local practices and procedures to construct backup file names. The restore operation provides the ability to restore a previously saved copy of NE configurations parameters to the flash memory on the NE Core cards.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
185
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
On NE configured with Core protection, the spare Core card must be either disabled or physically unseated from the shelf, prior to Database Restore. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for information about the parameters that are stored and excluded from the backup file. It is recommended that excluded parameters be saved by running an NE Inventory report, so these parameters may be reprovisioned in the event that the system needs to be restored from scratch. After completing the restore operation, the restored database must be activated to apply the ed parameters to the NE. Upon activation of the restored database, the NE will automatically restart. Database backup should be performed with no forced protection switches active. A system restored with a backup database that was saved while forced protection switches are active, may result in the system being restored to an unknown state. If this occurs, communications with the system may be difficult to reestablish and may result in the loss of traffic.
25.3 — Procedure This section provides the following procedures: •
To backup the MIB management database
•
To restore the MIB management database
•
To activate the MIB management database
To backup the MIB management database 1.
Select Protection Schemes tab.
2.
that no forced protection switches are active.
3.
Are forced protection switches active?
4.
a.
If yes, go to step 4.
b.
If no, go to step 5.
Determine if the active forced protection switches can be released. Release all forced protection switches prior to proceeding with this procedure.
Caution: Failure to release all protection switches prior to performing a MIB Management database backup may result in the system being restored to an unknown state. If this occurs, communications with the system may be difficult to reestablish and may result in the loss of traffic.
5.
186
Save NE Inventory data. See View NE Inventory data for detailed instructions to view and save NE Inventory data.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 6.
From the main menu bar, select Supervision>MIB Management>Backup. See Figure 25.1.
Figure 25.1 — Backup MIB Management database main menu bar path
7.
The Protocol Selection window opens, see Figure 25.2. Figure 25.2 — Protocol Selection window
8.
Choose the protocol that you need to use to transfer the data. If you need to use SFTP, enter the name and to access the NE.
9.
Click on the OK button. The Backup dialog box appears. See Figure 25.3. Figure 25.3 — Backup MIB Management database dialog box
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
187
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 10. Navigate to the directory to save the MIB Management Database. Note: Database backup file name s a thirty-six character free-form string name. To aid in tracking database backup files, it is recommended to use the NE Name and Date in the backup file name (ex. V020200_Chicago-1120_2010-04-30.bar) or follow local practices and procedures to construct backup file names.
11. Enter the file name of the MIB Management Database backup file in the File Name field. 12. Click Save. Backup confirmation window opens. 13. Click Yes. MIB Management window opens. 14. Click OK. To restore the MIB management database 1.
Select Protection Schemes tab.
2.
that no forced protection switches are active.
3.
Are forced protection switches active?
4.
a.
If yes, go to step 4.
b.
If no, go to step 5.
Determine if the active forced protection switch(es) can be released. Release all forced protection switch(es) prior to proceeding with this procedure.
Caution: Failure to release all protection switches prior to performing a MIB Management database backup, may result in the system being restored to an unknown state. If this occurs, communications with the system may be difficult to reestablish and may result in the loss of traffic.
5.
6.
188
Perform one of the following: a.
Disable the spare Core card. For detailed instruction, see Disable equipment.
b.
Physically unseat the spare Core card.
From the main menu bar, select Supervision>MIB Management>Restore / Activate. See Figure 25.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 25.4 — Restore / Activate MIB Management Database main menu bar path
The Protocol Selection window opens, see Figure 25.2. 7.
Choose the protocol that you need to use to transfer the data. If you need to use SFTP, enter the name and to access the NE.
8.
Click on the OK button. The Restore window opens. See Figure 25.5. Figure 25.5 — Restore MIB Management Database window
9.
Navigate to the directory where the MIB Management Database backup file is saved.
10. Select MIB Management Database backup file. 11. Click Open. Restore confirmation window opens. 12. Click Yes. MIB Management window opens. 13. Activate restored MIB Management Database? a.
If yes, Click Yes and see the next procedure.
b.
If no, click No.
To activate the MIB management database 1.
The Activate confirmation window opens.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
189
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
Note: All traffic will be interrupted during activate database.
2.
Click Yes. MIB Management window opens.
3.
Click OK.
4.
Close the WebEML window. The NE will activate the restored MIB Management database. There may be a delay of 60 to 90 seconds before the Activate process begins. The NE will automatically restart. A loss of communication with the NE will occur. Do not attempt any WebEML activities until the NE has completed restarting. Once the craft realigns with the NE, it is OK to to the system. Restarting the NE can take up to 10 minutes to complete.
Note: Because MIB database restore affects local IP address provisioning, it will be necessary to connect to the MSS shelf using the same IP address provisioned at the time of the database backup. If no IP address provisioning was performed prior to MIB database restore it will be necessary to connect to the MSS shelf using the default IP address (10.0.1.2) and the main TMN port.
5.
Wait until the NE realigns with the craft, then to the system using the craft terminal.
6.
Communication with the NE has been established and the NE has been restored as expected?
7.
8.
9.
a.
If yes, go to step 8.
b.
If no, go to step 7
Has a minimum of 15 minutes elapsed since the database activation was started? a.
If yes, next level of .
b.
If no, wait at least 15 minutes to allow the NE time to reboot and realign with the craft. Once the NE realigns with the craft, go to step 5.
Is the NE configured with a spare Core card? a.
If yes, go to step 9.
b.
If no, go to step 10.
Perform either a or b: a.
Enable the spare Core card.
b.
Physically seat the spare Core card removed in step 5 b.
10. system provisioning. Refer to the saved NE Inventory, saved during the MIB backup procedure.
190
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 11. Provision any required settings that are not restored as part of the backup/ restore process (for example, IP address).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
191
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
192
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
26 — Use the Ethernet Features Shell
26.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures for using the Ethernet Features Shell from the JUSM interface. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for more information.
26.2 — Introduction Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (ECFM) (IEEE802.1ag) is performed using the Ethernet Features Shell. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for more information about the following types of commands that can be run from the Ethernet Features Shell: •
Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management
•
Ethernet CFM
•
Protocols
•
TACACS+
26.3 — Procedure To open the tool 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration > Ethernet Features Shell.
2.
A warning window opens, advising that starting a CLI session will shut down the CT. Click on the Yes button to continue.
3.
The Protocol Selection window opens. Select the protocol you need to use to transfer data. If you need to use SFTP, enter the name and to connect to the NE.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
193
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
194
4.
Click on the OK button. The Ethernet Features Shell window opens and the CT closes.
5.
Enter the commands as needed. See the Product Information Manual for more information.
6.
Close the Ethernet Features Shell window.
7.
Click on Show in the NEtO to reopen the CT.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
27 — Perform a software reset
27.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures for restarting the NE or an MPT. The Restart operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions.
27.2 — Procedure This section provides the following procedures: •
To restart an NE
•
To restart an MPT
To restart an NE 1.
From the Supervision cascading menu, select the Restart NE option. A dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Yes button to confirm the restart NE operation.
Warning: After the activation of the Restart NE Command (or after the pressing of the HW reset push-button) the supervision of the local NE and the remote NEs is lost.
To restart an MPT 1.
From the Supervision cascading menu, select the Restart MPT option. A dialog box appears.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
195
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 27.1 — Restart MPT
Select the MPT to be restarted and click the Restart button.
196
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
28 — Configure EFM OAM
28.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision Ethernet First Mile Operations, istration, and Maintenance.
28.2 — Overview EFM OAM can be enabled on any Ethernet interface on the Core or EAS cards or the MSS-1 or MSS-O units. The interface must be enabled to enable the EFM OAM. If EFM OAM is enabled, the port cannot be disabled unless the interface is configured as a Ring port. If the interface belongs to an Ethernet LAG, enabling the EFM OAM is on a per interface basis. EFM OAM can be enabled on the Ethernet interfaces of a Core belonging to a TMN In-Band networking interface. EFM OAM must be disabled before performing any of the following: •
provisioning an MPT on the interface
•
provisioning PFoE on EASv2, MSS-1 or MSS-O
•
configuring the TMN Local Ethernet interface on Ethernet Port 4
28.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To enable an OAM link
•
To disable an OAM link
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
197
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To enable an OAM link 1.
From the Main Menu Bar, select Configuration >ETH OAM Configuration. The ETH OAM window opens. See Figure 28.1. Figure 28.1 — ETH OAM window
2.
Choose the Ethernet interface from the list.
3.
Choose the Active or ive radio button in the Link OAM Mode field.
4.
In the Link OAM Parameter pane, choose the Enable radio button in the Link OAM field.
5.
Click on the Apply button. The link is enabled.
To disable an OAM link
198
1.
In the ETH OAM Configuration window, select the interface from the list.
2.
In the Link OAM Parameter pane, choose the Disable radio button in the Link OAM field.
3.
Click on the Apply button. The link is disabled.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
istration
•
ister NE list
•
ister profiles
•
Change
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
199
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
200
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
29 — ister NE list
29.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to create an NE list, add NEs to the NE list, and how to to an NE using the NE list.
29.2 — Prerequisite The name and current must be known before can be accomplished. The 9500 MPR craft terminal (CT) software must be installed on the PC. The must know the IP address of the NE to to the system or be locally connected.
29.3 — General The 9500 MPR provides for the craft terminal (CT) or WebEML (JUSM/CT) function, allowing NE management through a web-enabled PC. The NE is accessed using the Network Element Overview (NEtO) application.
29.4 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To create an NE list
•
To add an NE to a List by first logging in to the NE
•
To add an NE to a list by entering NE IP address
•
To open an NE from a saved list of NEs
•
To open an NE from the current list of NEs
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
201
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To create an NE list 1.
From the NEtO Overview window, select Creates a new list of favorite NEs icon. See Figure 29.1. Figure 29.1 — New icon
The Network Element List window opens. See Figure 29.2. Figure 29.2 — Network Elements List window
2.
Click Save. The Save window opens. See Figure 29.3.
202
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.3 — NE List Save window
3.
In the File Name field, type the desired name for the NE list:
4.
Click Save. The File Saved window opens.
5.
Click OK. The Network Elements List window opens. See Figure 29.4. Figure 29.4 — Network Elements List window
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
203
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To add an NE to a List by first logging in to the NE 1.
From the NEtO Overview window, to the NE to add to the NE list.
2.
From the Network Elements List window, click Get Current. See Figure 29.5. The NE currently logged in to is added to the NEs table. Figure 29.5 — Network Elements List window: Current NE added
3.
Click Save. Save window opens.
4.
Click Save. File already existing. Overwrite? window opens.
5.
Click Yes. File saved window opens.
6.
Click OK.
Note: The NE Table data is not automatically updated. If the NE details are updated (Site Name, Site Location, Version, or IP Address) the NE Table data must be manually updated or deleted and reloaded. The NE Table data is used for reference purposes only, the operator must keep the data current.
To add an NE to a list by entering NE IP address
204
1.
Click New. See Figure 29.6.
2.
In the table row just added, enter the NE IP address in the IP/DNS column.
3.
Press Enter.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.6 — Network Elements List window
4.
Click Save. Save window opens. File already existing. Overwrite? window opens.
5.
Click Yes. File saved window opens.
6.
Click OK.
Note: The NE Table data is not automatically updated. If the NE details are updated (Site Name, Site Location, Version, or IP Address) the NE Table data must be manually updated or deleted and reloaded. The NE Table data is used for reference purposes only, the operator must keep the data current.
To open an NE from a saved list of NEs 1.
From the NEtO Overview window, click the Opens a file containing a list of favorite NEs. icon. See Figure 29.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
205
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.7 — Open icon
Open window opens. See Figure 29.8. Figure 29.8 — Open window
2.
Select NE List file name
, then click Open. Network Elements List window opens. See Figure 29.9.
206
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.9 — Network ElemenT List window
3.
Select NE from the NEs table and click Set Current. The NEtO Overview window opens. See Figure 29.10. Figure 29.10 — NEtO Overview window
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Show.
6.
In the window, enter Name “name” and “”.
7.
Click Apply. JUSM 9500MPR window launches. See Figure 29.11.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
207
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.11 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen
To open an NE from the current list of NEs 1.
From the NEtO Overview window, click the Opens the current list of favorite NEs icon. See Figure 29.12. Figure 29.12 — Favorite icon
Network Elements List window opens. See Figure 29.13.
208
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.13 — Network ElemenT List window
2.
Select NE from the NEs Table and click Set Current. The NEtO Overview window opens. See Figure 29.14. Figure 29.14 — NEtO Overview window
3.
Click OK.
4.
Click Show.
5.
In the window, enter Name “name” and “”.
6.
Click Apply. JUSM 9500MPR window launches. See Figure 29.15.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
209
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.15 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen
210
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
30 — ister profiles
30.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to Create, Delete, and Change of a system for a specified name.
30.2 — General Only a with system privileges can create, delete and change another ’s . The system s up to ten active dynamically ed management sessions (such as NEtO and TSM-8000). The system s up to five Trusted Manager sessions (such as 5620SAM or 3rd party). The system s up to twenty-three provisioned s in addition to the two default s. If the NE is configured in SNMPv3 mode, the NE uses the -based Security Model (USM) for authentication. There are four profile classes, or groups. The responsibilities are as follows: •
- Full access including security parameters
•
CraftPerson - Local access to radio without security parameters at the radio site. Typical is responsible for installation and maintenance at the radio site.
•
Operator - Remote access to radio without security parameters. Typical is responsible for operation at the network level and not at the radio site.
•
Viewer - Only view access allowed.
Name length must not exceed 20 characters. s must meet the following complexity parameters:
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
211
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
•
Minimum Length - must be at least eight characters in length
•
Maximum Length - shall not exceed twenty characters in length
•
Composition - s must be composed of full ASCII characters (UPPER case, lower case, numeric, and special characters).
Two default s are available on the NE. These default s can not be deleted. For security reasons the for the default s should be changed. See Table 30.1 for default details. Table 30.1 — Default profiles Name
Profile
initial
Craftperson
craftcraft
CraftPerson
ed operations by the profiles: •
profile: All the NE parameters are accessible both in writing and reading mode. Also the management of s is allowed (create/delete s and change of all s).
•
Operator profile: Full reading access to NE parameters. For writing mode the following parameters are allowed to change: •
ATPC configuration (enabled, disabled)
•
Performance Monitoring management → start/stop CD → threshold tables configuration → reset → archiving (only for NMS system) ed for all the types of Performance Monitoring (Radio Hop/Link, E1, Received Power Levels, ....)
•
NTP protocol: → Enabled/Disabled → NTP main server address configuration → NTP spare server address configuration
212
•
CraftPerson profile: This operator has the same privileges of the , but cannot manage the s
•
Viewer profile: This operator can only read and can change his own .
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
30.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To add a new in SNMPv2 mode
•
To add a new in SNMPv3 mode
•
To delete a in SNMPv2 mode
•
To delete a in SNMPv3 mode
•
To change a ’s in SNMPv2 mode
•
To change a ’s in SNMPv3 mode
To add a new in SNMPv2 mode 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>s Management. See Figure 30.1. Figure 30.1 — management main menu bar path
The Profiles Management window opens. See Figure 30.2. Figure 30.2 — Profile management window
2.
Click Create.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
213
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The Create window opens. See Figure 30.3. Figure 30.3 — Create window
3.
Enter the .
4.
Enter the new Name.
5.
From the Profile drop-down menu, select new profile: , CraftPerson, Operator, or Viewer.
6.
Enter the new .
7.
Enter the Confirm .
8.
Click Apply. Creation Success window opens.
9.
Click OK. Creation Success window closes. Profile Management window updates with new added. See Figure 30.4.
214
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 30.4 — Profile management window - with added
10. Click Cancel to close the window. To add a new in SNMPv3 mode 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>USM s Management. See Figure 30.5. Figure 30.5 — USM management main menu bar path
The USM s Management window opens. See Figure 30.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
215
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 30.6 — USM s Management window
2.
Click Create. The Usm cloning opens. The Authentication Protocol and Privacy Protocol attributes are read-only. See Figure 30.7.
216
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 30.7 — USM cloning
3.
From the Group drop-down menu, select the group: , craftPerson, operator, or viewer.
4.
Enter the name of the to be cloned in the Cloned field. The new ’s profile will be based on the cloned .
5.
Enter the of the cloned in the Cloned field.
6.
Enter the New Name
7.
Enter the New .
8.
Confirm the New .
9.
Click Apply. The Create New window opens.
10. Click OK. The Create New window closes. The USM s Management window updates with the new added. See Figure 30.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
217
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 30.8 — USM s Management window - with added
11. Click Close to close the window. To delete a in SNMPv2 mode 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>s Management. See Figure 30.1. The Profiles Management window opens. See Figure 30.9. Figure 30.9 — Profile management window
2. 218
Select Name to delete. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 3.
Click Delete. The Deletion Confirm window opens.
4.
Click Yes. The Delete window opens. Figure 30.10 — Delete window
5.
Enter the .
6.
Click Apply. Deletion Success window opens.
7.
Click OK. The Delete window closes. Profile Management window opens with deleted. Figure 30.11 — Profile management window - with deleted
8.
Click Cancel.
To delete a in SNMPv3 mode 1.
To delete a in SNMPv3 mode From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>USM s Management. See Figure 30.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
219
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The USM s Management window opens. See Figure 30.8. 2.
Select Name to delete.
3.
Click Delete. The Deletion Message window opens.
4.
Click Yes. The Operation Completed window opens.
5.
Click OK. The Operation Completed window closes. The USM s Management window opens with the deleted.
6.
Click Close.
To change a ’s in SNMPv2 mode 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>s Management. See Figure 30.1. The Profiles Management window opens. See Figure 30.12. Figure 30.12 — Profile management window
2.
Select Name to change .
3.
Click Change PW. The Change window opens. See Figure 30.13.
220
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 30.13 — Change window
4.
Enter the .
5.
Enter the New .
6.
Enter the Confirm New .
7.
Click Apply. Changing Success window opens.
8.
Click OK.
9.
Click Cancel.
To change a ’s in SNMPv3 mode 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>USM s Management. See Figure 30.5. The USM s Management window opens. See Figure 30.8.
2.
Select Name to change .
3.
Click Change PW. The Usm Change opens. See Figure 30.14.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
221
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 30.14 — USM Change
4.
Enter the ’s Old .
5.
Enter the New .
6.
Confirm the New .
7.
Click Apply. The Change window opens.
222
8.
Click Yes. The Operation Completed window opens.
9.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
31 — Change
31.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure for a to change their own .
31.2 — General The system allows a to change their own . Only a with system privileges can change another person’s . s must meet the following complexity parameters: •
Minimum Length - must be at least eight characters in length
•
Maximum Length - must not exceed twenty characters in length
•
Composition - s must be composed of full ASCII characters (UPPER case, lower case, numeric, and special characters).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
223
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
31.3 — Procedure To change a 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>Change . See Figure 31.1. Figure 31.1 — Change main menu bar path
The Change window opens. See Figure 31.2. Figure 31.2 — Changing window
2.
Enter the Old .
3.
Enter the New .
4.
Confirm the New .
5.
Click Apply. Changing Success window opens.
6.
224
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
System information
•
View alarms
•
View abnormal condition list
•
View NE Inventory data
•
I&C parameter data
•
View Remote Inventory
•
View Event Log
•
Perform debug functions using the Web Server
•
Retrieve RSL information using the Web Server
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
225
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
226
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
32 — View alarms
32.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view alarms for the 9500 MPR.
32.2 — General 32.2.1 — Alarm manager The 9500 MPR Alarm Monitor allows the to view current alarms and a log of alarm activity on multiple NEs at the same time. Both the current alarms and the alarm logs may be sorted by alarm severity. The following is a list of alarm filtering available: •
•
CURRENT ALARMS: •
Global
•
Critical (CRI)
•
Major (MAJ)
•
Minor (MIN)
•
Warning (WRG)
•
Indeterminate (IND) Not operative
ALARM LOG: •
Global
•
Critical (CRI)
•
Major (MAJ)
•
Minor (MIN)
•
Warning (WRG)
•
Indeterminate (IND) Not operative
•
Cleared (CLR)
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
227
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
For each list and for each filter, the number of active alarms is shown inside brackets. The alarms have a different color according to their severity and their state. •
Critical: Red
•
Major: Orange
•
Minor: Yellow
•
Warning: Blue
•
Indeterminate: White
•
Cleared: Green
Within the tab , each alarm is provided with the following information: •
Time & Date: date and time of the alarm. The format of date and time is yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss.
•
Probable cause: name of the probable cause of the alarm.
•
Alarm Type: alarm class (TRS = Transmission Alarm – alarm not created inside the equipment, but generated by a connected equipment or due to transmission/ propagation problems; EQUIPMENT: alarm inside of the equipment).
•
Friendly Name: object of the equipment where the alarm occurred.
•
Severity: alarm severity.
•
Add Text: for some alarms, additional text regarding the alarm.
•
Specific problem: for some alarms, additional information is provided about the involved resource (for instance, when a threshold alarm is raised, it states the specific threshold exceeded)
The Alarm Monitor menu bar has the following options available: •
File
•
Filters
•
Help
The File Menu has the following options available:
228
•
Save Log for selected NE: This option saves a file with one of the two global lists of each NE. Select the global list of a specific NE, open the Save History menu for the selected NE and enter filename and relevant directory in the opening window.
•
Load Log to selected NE: This option displays the global list of a certain NE previously saved.
•
Remove selected NE: This option removes the selected NE from the list of NEs monitor by the Alarm Monitor.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
a.
Export Alarms: This option exports the selected Log to a file. Select the log, select "Export Alarms" menu, choose the file format (CSV, HTML, HML or PDF) and then assign the name of the file.
b.
Exit: This option closes the Alarm Monitor.
The Filters menu has the following options available: •
Close Filter: The Filter, currently open, is closed.
•
Add a Filter: Create customized logs adding new specific filters.
•
Edit Selected Filter: A filter, previously created, can be modified.
•
Delete Selected Filter: A filter, previously created, can be deleted.
•
Delete Filters: The Delete Filters window opens providing the ability to delete multiple filters at one time.
•
Save Filters As: A filter previously created by the Add a Filter menu, can be saved to be used in the future. Unsaved filters are lost when the Alarm manager is closed.
•
Load Filters From: A filter previously saved can be loaded to an NE.
The Help menu displays the Product Version.
32.2.2 — Web Server The 9500 MPR Web Server allows the to view current alarms using a web browser. The Web Server can be refreshed manually or automatically. When the Web Server is configured for automatic refresh the display is refreshed every ten seconds. The Web Server Active Alarms provide the following details for each alarm: •
Perceived Severity: alarm severity.
•
Event Date & Time: date and time of the alarm. The format of date and time is yyyy/ mm/dd hh:mm:ss.
•
Entity: location of the equipment where the alarm is active.
•
Probable cause (name): name of the probable cause of the alarm.
•
Specific problem: for some alarms, additional information is provided about the involved resource (for instance, when a threshold alarm is raised, it states the specific threshold exceeded)
32.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
229
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To view NE alarms using Alarm Monitor
•
To add an Alarm Manager filter
•
To delete Alarm Manager filters
•
To save Alarm Manager Filters
•
To load Alarm Manager Filters
•
To view NE Alarms using Web Server
•
To manually refresh the Web Server
•
To automatically refresh the Web Server
•
To stop automatic refresh of the Web Server
To view NE alarms using Alarm Monitor 1.
From the Main Menu Bar, Select Diagnosis>Alarms>NE Alarms. See Figure 32.1. Figure 32.1 — NE Alarms Main Menu Bar path
The Alarm Monitor window opens. See Figure 32.2.
230
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 32.2 — Alarm Monitor window
The Alarm Monitor allows the to view alarms by severity. 2.
Select desired alarm severity from the Alarm Manager resource tree area. For this example, select CURRENT_ALARMS: MAJ. The Synthesis pane displays the CURRENT_ALARMS: MAJ tab. See Figure 32.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
231
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 32.3 — Alarm Manager: Current Alarms major tab
3.
To select another alarm severity, either select from the Alarm Manager resource tree area or the Synthesis pane alarm severity tabs.
To add an Alarm Manager filter 1.
From the Alarm Manager Main Menu Bar, select Filters>Add a Filter. The New Filter window opens. See Figure 32.4. Figure 32.4 — Alarm Manager New Filter window
232
2.
In the Filter Name field, enter the name of the new filter.
3.
From the scope partition, select the NE to apply the new filter or select the All check box to select all NEs currently being monitored.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 4.
From the scope partition select alarms to filter. •
Current: Select current to filter current alarms only.
•
Log: Select log to filter current and cleared alarms.
Filters can be created selecting one or more of the following parameters: a.
b.
c.
5.
Alarm Type: Select Alarm Type check box to create a filter using alarm type to filter alarms. Select all desired alarm types to include in the filter. •
TRS: Transmission Alarm
•
Equipment: Equipment Alarm
•
EXT: External Alarm
Perceived Severity: Select Perceived Severity check box to create a filter using alarm severities to filter alarms. Select all desired alarm severities to include in the filter. •
Critical
•
Major
•
Minor
•
Warning
•
Cleared
•
Indeterminate
Event Time: Select Event Time check box to create a filter for a specific time period. •
Select From check box and enter the start date (dd/mm/ yyyy:hh:mm:ss)
•
Select To check box and enter the end date (dd/mm/ yyyy:hh:mm:ss)
d.
Probable Cause: Select Probable Cause check box to create a filter for specific alarms. Select one or more probable cause to filter for the selected alarms only.
e.
Resource: Select Resource check box to create a filter for specific friendly name parameters. Example; to filter for all alarms associated with direction #5 channel#1, enter “dir*5*ch*1”. The “*” character is the wildcard for resource string entry.
Click Done to save the filter. Click Cancel to close Add Filter window and discard all selections. Figure 32.4 shows an example of a timed filter for major transmission alarms for slot 5 direction 1 alarms only.
To delete Alarm Manager filters 1.
From the Alarm Manager Main Menu Bar, select Filters>Delete Filters. The Delete Filters window opens. See Figure 32.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
233
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 32.5 — Alarm Manager Delete Filters window
2.
From the scope pane, select one or more NEs to delete their filters.
3.
From the Filters pane, select one or more filters to delete.
4.
Click Done to delete the filters. Click Cancel to close Delete Filters window and discard all selections.
To save Alarm Manager Filters 1.
From the Alarm Manager Main Menu Bar, select Filters>Save Filters As. The Save Filters As window opens. See Figure 32.6.
234
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 32.6 — Alarm Manager Save Filters As window
2.
From the scope pane, select the NE on which the filter to save resides.
3.
From the Filters pane, select the filter to save.
4.
Click Browse and navigate to the folder to save the filter.
5.
Enter file name to save filter.
6.
Click Save.
7.
Click Done to save the filter. Click Cancel to close Save Filters As window and discard the selections.
To load Alarm Manager Filters 1.
From the Alarm Manager Main Menu Bar, select Filters>Load Filters From. The Load Filters From window opens. See Figure 32.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
235
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 32.7 — Alarm Manager Load Filters From window
2.
Click Browse and navigate to the folder where the filter file is located.
3.
Select the filter file to load.
4.
Click Open.
5.
From the scope pane, select NE to load filter.
6.
From the Loaded Filters pane, select filter to load.
7.
Optionally, enter a prefix in the Filters Name Prefix field to prefix the characters to the filter name. Example, enter
, the name of the loaded filter changes from APT to DalAPT.
8.
Click Done to load filter to selected NE. Click Cancel to close Load Filters From window and discard all selections.
To view NE Alarms using Web Server 1.
to NE to view NE alarms. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window. See Figure 32.8.
2.
236
To navigate from another web server window, select Active Alarms from the Main Menu pane.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 32.8 — Web Server Active Alarms webpage
The Active Alarms window has two methods to refresh the display, manual and automatic refresh. To manually refresh the Web Server 1.
Click Refresh button. The Active Alarms window refreshes.
To automatically refresh the Web Server 1.
To automatically refresh the Web Server Click Enable Automatic Refresh button. The Active Alarms window automatically refreshes every ten seconds.
To stop automatic refresh of the Web Server 1.
Click Stop Automatic Refresh button. The Active Alarms window stops automatically refreshing.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
237
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
238
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
33 — View abnormal condition list
33.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view abnormal condition list for the 9500 MPR.
33.2 — General The Abnormal Condition List is a read-only screen that lists non-usual conditions present in the NE. Events that cause an abnormal condition are as follows: •
Forced switch (EPS, RPS, TPS)
•
Lockout (EPS, RPS, TPS)
•
Loopback activation
•
Local radio Tx mute (manual)
•
Local radio Tx mute (automatic)
•
Remote radio Tx mute (manual)
33.3 — Procedure 1.
View abnormal condition list From The Main Menu Bar, select Diagnosis>Abnormal Condition List.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
239
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 33.1 — Abnormal Condition List main menu bar path
The Abnormal Condition List window opens. Figure 33.2 — Abnormal Condition List window
2.
240
Click Close.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
34 — View NE Inventory data
34.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view, save, and print NE Inventory data for the radio.
34.2 — General A report file is created automatically by radio software and available through the craft terminal or on the web for customer approval of provisioning. On the web, the report can be opened by using the following URL: http://Radio IP Address or by entering the rack name. The report is protected. Enter the assigned to the radio at provisioning. On the main web server screen, type in the rack name or the URL (shown below): http://Radio IP Address. screen displays. Enter NE ID and (same as ID and entered on CT). On the Main menu, select Configuration Info.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
241
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
The configuration report includes Remote Inventory data. The Remote Inventory List is a read-only screen that lists remote inventory data present in the NE. Remote inventory data available is as follows: •
Status
•
Company Identifier
•
Mnemonic
•
CLEI Code
•
Part Number
•
Software Part Number
•
Factory Identifier
•
Serial Number
•
Date Identifier
•
Date
•
Customer Field
34.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To provisioning data using JUSM
•
To save NE Inventory data
•
To print NE Inventory data
•
To provisioning data using Web Server
To provisioning data using JUSM 1.
From the main menu bar, select Diagnosis > NE Inventory. See Figure 34.1. Figure 34.1 — NE Inventory main menu bar path
The NE Inventory window opens. See Figure 34.2.
242
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 34.2 — Diagnosis / NE Inventory window
To save NE Inventory data 1.
Select File/Save As.
2.
Navigate to the directory to save 9500 MPR NE Inventory data file.
3.
In the File Name field, enter the file name.
4.
Click Save.
To print NE Inventory data 1.
Select File/Print.
2.
Select Printer to print 9500 MPR NE Inventory data.
3.
Click OK.
4.
Select File/Exit.
To provisioning data using Web Server 1.
to NE to provisioning data using web browser. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default webpage.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
243
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 34.3 — Web Server main webpage
2.
On the Main Menu pane, select Configuration Info. Depending on your browser settings, a dialog box appears. Figure 34.4 — NE Inventory File window
3.
Click Save in the dialog box.
4.
Navigate to the directory to save 9500 MPR NE Inventory data.
5.
In the File Name field, enter the desired file name.
6.
Click Save.
7.
Open the NE Inventory data file just saved
8.
Print NE Inventory data from the web server Print the report. Shortened example Configuration file output: beginning of the file: **********************
244
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures * CONFIGURATION INFO * ********************** Site Name: SVT-169 Site Location: SVT-lab-mickey Latitude: Longitude: QUALITY OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION ================================ Classification Criterion: Disabled Scheduler Configuration ----------------------Queue Mode
Weight
5
DWRR
16
4
DWRR
8
3
DWRR
4
2
DWRR
2
1
DWRR
1
Bridge Address: 00:00:00:00:01:69 Current SNMP Version: V3 IP STACK VERSION: IPv4 MSS Subrack Fans: equipped AIS insertion for LOF detection on incoming DS1: Disabled System Priority: 32768 TRUSTED MANAGERS ================ None CORE CONFIGURATION ================== Type: MSS-8, Enhanced, Not Protected, Not Revertive ETHERNET PORT ------------** Ep 1 - MPT ** Port: 1.1 - MPT Not Protected MPT TYPE: MPT-HC LINK IDENTIFIER: Status: Enabled 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
245
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Value expected: 130 Value transmitted: 169 TMN RF MANAGEMENT: Status: Disabled Preset Mode: Channel Spacing: 50 MHz Modulation: 256 QAM Capacity: 315.101 Mb/s Option: std Channel 1: Shifter
: 1560000
TX Frequency : 17800000 Min TX Freq. : 17700000 Max TX Freq. : 18140000 RX Frequency : 19360000 ------ Preset Mode -----ATPC: Disabled TX Power : 18.0 dBm Power Mode : Standard SSM STATUS: Disabled PKT THROUGHPUT BOOSTER STATUS: Enabled ENCRYPTION STATUS: Disabled PHRASE: NOT CONFIGURED QUEUE SIZES: Queue 1: 4034836 bytes (default value) Queue 2: 4034836 bytes (default value) Queue 3: 4034836 bytes (default value) Queue 4: 4034836 bytes (default value) Queue 5: 4034836 bytes (default value) RADIO LABEL: to 130-1.1 MPT in LAG: false MPT in RING: true XPIC Polarization: Disabled [HOP/ANALOG PM ENABLED] ** Ep 4 ** TMN mode TMN ipAddress: 143.209.225.169 246
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures TMN netMask: 255.255.252.0 Static routing protocol LAGS CONFIGURATION ================== ** LAG ID 1 ** Key:
1
Type:
L1 RADIO
Name: istrative Status: DISABLED istrative Size: 2 LA:
DISABLED
Timeout:
N.A.
Hashing:
Layer1
Wait Time To Restore: 1 sec LAG in RING:
false
SSM STATUS: Disabled TMN RF MANAGEMENT: Status: Disabled SLOTS CONFIGURATION =================== ** Slot 3 Unprotect SDHACC ** Port: 1 - SFP-O Label: loopback ALS: disabled forced on J0 Mode: disable XC-ECIDRx: 161 XC-ECIDTx: 161 XC-FlowID: 161 XC-JitterBuffer: LOW XC-PayLoadSize: 2382 XC-Clock source: Differential Port: 2 - Empty or disabled Label: MPTSUBRACKS CONFIGURATION ========================= ** Top SR-MPT-HLS EMPTY ** ** Bottom SR-MPT-HLS EMPTY ** XPIC ASSOCIATION INTERFACE 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
247
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ========================== NONE OSPF AREAS ========== Ospf Area 0: IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Stub Flag: FALSE NTP Configuration ================= Status: Enabled Main Server: 143.209.225.135 Spare Server: 143.209.225.135 DH Configuration ================== Status: Enabled TMN ETHERNET INTERFACE ====================== Local Ip Address: 143.209.225.169 TMN Ethernet: Status: Enabled ipAddress: 10.0.1.2 netMask: 255.255.255.0 Static Routing TMN INBAND PROFILES =================== TMN InBand Profile: 1 Status: Disabled ipAddress: 10.0.3.2 netMask: 255.255.255.0 vLanId: DS: 34 P: 7 Static Routing Ethernet Member Ports: TMN InBand Profile: 2 Status: Disabled 248
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ipAddress: 10.0.4.2 netMask: 255.255.255.0 vLanId: DS: 34 P: 7 Static Routing Ethernet Member Ports: CROSS CONNECTIONS ================= E1-Radio Connections -------------------DS1-Radio Connections --------------------DS3-Radio Connections -------------------E1-Ethernet Connections ----------------------DS1-Ethernet Connections -----------------------DS3-Ethernet Connections -----------------------Radio-Radio Connections ----------------------Radio-Ethernet Connections -------------------------OC-3 transparent-Radio Connections ---------------------------------E1-SDHCHAN Connections ---------------------SDHCHAN-Radio Connections -----------------------SDHCHAN-Ethernet Connections ---------------------------OC-3 transparent-Ethernet Connections ------------------------------------Radio-Ring Connections 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
249
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ---------------------Ring-Ethernet Connections ------------------------* Ring(1) - Ethernet(3): flowId="2432" serviceProfile="TdmToEth" clockSource="differential" macaddress="00:11:3F:CA:EF:C1" E1-Ring Connections ------------------DS1-Ring Connections -------------------DS3-Ring Connections -------------------* DS3(5) - Ring(1): flowId="182" Ring-Ring Connections --------------------* Radio(11) - Radio(72): flowId="131" serviceProfile="TdmToTdm" clockSource="differential" SDHCHAN-Ring Connections -----------------------RING ==== TOPOLOGY: 'HC Ring’ ------------------eastPort : s1p1 westPort : s7p2 ** INSTANCE: 'Ring 1' ** Enabled : true [R-APS] VLAN Id : 130 MEG level : 7 MEG Id East : 2 MEG Id West : 3 Guard Time : 120 [VLAN ] VLAN Id : 1 VLAN Id : 131 VLAN Id : 161
250
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures [SWITCH CRITERIA] Ethernet Link OAM alarm disabled as switch criteria RING FIBER CHAIN DESCRIPTION: -----------------------------None BRIDGE ====== Type: 802.1ad VLAN ---- Vlan ID: 1 Vlan Name: "Default Vlan" SEGREGATED PORTS ---------------** Segregated ports set ** - MPTACC plugin Slot 7 SYNCHRONIZATION =============== Synchronization Role: Slave Restoration Mode: Revertive Primary Source: MPT-HC Radio Dir 7 Port 2 Ch 1 Secondary Source: Radio Dir 4 Ch 1 External Signal: DISABLED SSM Wait To Restore: 5 min 0 sec SOFTWARE PACKAGE STATUS ======================= Name:
R95M
Version:
V05.02.0K
Operational Status:
Enabled
Current Status:
Committed
Software Unit:
Label
-----
Version
Size
--------- --------
MDPAR
V04.12.03 39835 F
Name:
R95M
Version:
V05.00.0I
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
251
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Operational Status:
Enabled
Current Status:
Standby
Software Unit:
Label
----BOMPT
Version
Size
--------- -------V05.01.01 492956
SECURE SETTINGS =============== |===================| | Protocol | Status | |-------------------| | FTP
| ON |
|-------------------| | Telnet | ON | |-------------------| | SSH
| ON |
|-------------------| | SFTP | ON | |-------------------| | HTTP | ON | |===================| ***************************** * END OF CONFIGURATION INFO * ***************************** ************************* * REMOTE INVENTORY INFO * ************************* NE 9500MPR-A 5.2 Site Name: SVT-169 remoteInventoryStatus: Unavailable MSS-8 remoteInventoryStatus: Available remoteInventoryCompanyIdentifier: CIT remoteInventoryMnemonic: BACK2U remoteInventoryCLEICode: ---------remoteInventoryPartNumber: 3DB18008BAAA01 remoteInventorySoftwarePartNumber: -------------252
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures remoteInventoryFactoryIdentifier: EU remoteInventorySerialNumber: BS0813UE0HB remoteInventoryDateIdentifier: 00 remoteInventoryDate: 080421 remoteInventoryCustomerField: ---------------------------------------------******************************** * END OF REMOTE INVENTORY INFO * ********************************
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
253
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
254
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
35 — I&C parameter data
35.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedures to Installation and Commissioning (I&C) parameter data for the radio.
35.2 — General The I&C Parameters include the following: •
an NE Inventory file
•
a .csv file for each MPT connected to the NE, showing the RSL information
The files can be loaded to the TRDS; see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Turn-up Manual.
35.3 — Procedures This section provides the procedure to the I&C parameters data. To I&C parameters data 1.
From the main menu bar, select Diagnosis > I&C Parameters; see Figure 35.1. Figure 35.1 — I&C Parameters main menu bar path
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
255
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures A Save dialog box appears. 2.
Choose a directory to save the files and click Save. The files are ed.
256
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
36 — View Remote Inventory
36.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view remote inventory list for the 9500 MPR.
36.2 — General The Remote Inventory List is a read-only screen that lists remote inventory data present in the NE. Remote inventory data available is as follows: •
Status
•
Company Identifier
•
Mnemonic
•
CLEI Code
•
Part Number
•
Software Part Number
•
Factory Identifier
•
Serial Number
•
Date Identifier
•
Date
•
Customer Field Note: The Remote Inventory is also included in the NE Inventory; see View NE Inventory data.
36.3 — Procedure To view Remote Inventory 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
257
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 1.
From the Main Menu Bar, select Diagnosis>Remote Inventory. Figure 36.1 — Remote Inventory main menu bar path
The Remote Inventory View window opens. Figure 36.2 — Remote Inventory View window
2.
258
Close view, click x.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
37 — View Event Log
37.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view event log for the 9500 MPR.
37.2 — General The event log allows the to capture a sequence of events which occurred over time, which may be helpful in diagnosing problems occurring within the NE and/or network. The event log browser provides the capability to print the event log. The event log browser provides the capability to export the event HTML, CSV, PDF, or XML formats. Event log browser provides the capability to export the entire log or only selected entries.
37.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Event Log
•
To Export an Event Log
•
To Print an Event Log
To open the Event Log •
From the main menu bar, select Diagnosis>Log Browsing>Event Log. See Figure 37.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
259
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 37.1 — Event Log Main Menu Bar Path
The Event Log Browser window opens. See Figure 37.2. Figure 37.2 — Event Log Browser Window
To Export an Event Log 1.
Select File>Export>Export Event. Export Events window opens.
260
2.
Select Output Format: HTML, CSV, PDF, or XML.
3.
Select which export entries to export: All Entries, or Selection.
4.
Click OK. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The Save window opens. 5.
Navigate to the directory to save the Event Log.
6.
In the File Name field, type the desired name of the Event Log: <Event Log Name>
7.
Click Save. The Message window opens.
8.
Click OK.
To Print an Event Log 1.
Select File>Print. The Print window opens.
2.
Select Printer Name.
3.
Select desired print parameters.
4.
Click Print. The Print window closes.
5.
Select File>Exit.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
261
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
262
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
38 — Perform debug functions using the Web Server
38.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures for performing debug functions using the Web Server interface.
38.2 — General The Debug Info menu allows the operator to analyze Ethernet traffic using a web browser. The following commands are available: •
ping: tries to establish a connection to an IPv4 address. When this command is selected, a window opens: enter the IP address to ping.
•
ping6: tries to establish a connection to an IPv6 address. When this command is selected, a window opens: enter the IP address to ping.
•
Database scratch web page: provides information on scratching the NE database. This command is available with MSS-1 only.
•
General Debug: creates a set of trace logs for the system and displays the location of the log files.
•
General Debug -r: removes the saved log files from the last General Debug.
•
Networking Debug: lists the configured links with IP address and Tx and Rx formation.
•
ConfigFile List: shows the file names of the configuration files that were used to configure the NE.
•
Ring Debug: shows interoperability information, alarm status and BCM STG information for each Ring configured
•
Switch Buffers debug: shows the buffer configuration and utilization per chip, per port and per QoS queue.
•
Bridge debug: provides configuration information for Provider Bridge ports.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
263
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
•
Vlan Show: lists the configured VLANs inside the NE with the ports member of VLAN (VLAN member set) and ports where VLAN Tag is removed in egress (VLAN untagged set).
•
L2 show: lists all the MAC addresses and associated VLANs learned by the NE (the list includes static entries self-defined by NE).
•
active SW package checksum: displays checksum information for each file component of the active software package.
•
standby SW package checksum: displays checksum information for each file component of the standby software package.
•
all SW package checksum: displays checksum information for each file component of both the active and the standby software package.
•
SFP signal level: displays optical received signal level and optical transmitted signal level from the SFPs equipped in the optical Ethernet interfaces of the Core-E and EAS cards.
•
Discovery debug: displays the stored information used for the NE Autodiscovery protocol.
•
MPT Alarms Debug: displays the active alarms for a specified MPT and the active alarms on the board. A window opens: enter the slot and port of the MPT.
•
get MPT Logs: displays the formation for a specified MPT. A window opens: enter the slot and port of the MPT.
•
get EFMOAM port info: displays state machine information for a specified MPT. A window opens: enter the slot and port of the MPT.
•
get EFMOAM port counters: displays state machine statistics for a specified MPT. A window opens: enter the slot and port of the MPT.
•
1588 TC status: displays the status of the 1588 Transparent Clock operation for the NE and for each port and radio.
The following table provides the association of the GExx in the command output and the NE port. Table 38.1 — Association of the GExx in the command output and the NE port
264
GE
Port n°
HW connection
GE05
06
SFP 2 (port #6 of the Core)
GE06
07
SFP 1 (port #5 of the Core)
GE07
08
Internal port
GE10
11
Slot 1
GE11
12
Slot 3
GE12
13
Slot 5
GE13
14
Slot 7 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Table 38.1 — Association of the GExx in the command output and the NE port GE
Port n°
HW connection
GE14
15
Slot 2
GE15
16
Slot 4
GE16
17
Slot 6
GE17
18
Eth. #1
GE18
19
Eth. #2
GE19
20
Eth. #3
GE20
21
Eth. #4
38.3 — Procedure 1.
to NE. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
Select istration → Debug Info and select a command from the pull down list. Figure 38.1 — Debug info
3.
Select either “Run command” or “Run command to File”. “Run command” provides the output on the web page. “Run command to file” provides the output on the web page and also saves the output on a file.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
265
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
266
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
39 — Retrieve RSL information using the Web Server
39.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures for retrieving Radio Signal Level information using the Web Server interface.
39.2 — General You can and save a .csv file of RSL information for any configured MPT.
39.3 — Procedure 1.
to NE. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
Select istration → Retrieve RSL Info. The Radio Signal Level Retrieval screen opens.
3.
Choose an MPT from the Configured MPTs: drop-down menu.
4.
Click on the Save File button. A Microsoft dialog box appears.
5.
Choose to open or save the file and click on the OK button.
6.
A .csv file showing the RSL information is ed.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
267
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
268
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Equipment provisioning and deprovisioning
Note: Performance monitoring on affected equipment should be disabled before making configuration changes.
•
ister Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
•
ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports
•
ister synchronization
•
Provision cross connections
•
Deprovision cross connections
•
Provision port segregation/connectivity
•
Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only)
•
Provision Ethernet ports
•
Provision Ethernet Features
•
Provision equipment port
•
Deprovision equipment ports
•
Enable equipment
•
Disable equipment
•
Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
•
Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software
•
Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring
•
Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool
•
Provision Fiber Microwave Protection
•
Provision protection scheme parameters
•
Provision Protection Type
•
Configure radio parameters
•
Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning
•
Use the Provisioning Tool
•
Apply a configuration using the Web Server
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
269
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
270
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
40 — ister Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
40.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to ister Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP).
40.2 — General Use the procedures in this chapter to modify ERP provisioning parameters. For detailed instruction to provision an Ethernet Ring, see Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP). For detailed instruction to create a Fiber Microwave Protection Ring, see Provision Fiber Microwave Protection.
40.2.1 — Modify ERP provisioning The following ERP parameters can be modified ONLY when the istrative status of the ERP Instance is disabled: •
R-APS VLAN ID: [2 to 4080];R-APS VLAN ID must meet the following requirements: •
must be different from any VLAN ID configured in the network, either 802.1Q, 802.1ad, or PDH Cross-Connections
•
must be different from any R-APS VLAN ID associated to other ERP Instances in the network
•
must be different from any VLAN ID configured for TMN In-Band
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
271
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
•
R-APS MEG Level: [0 to 7], default equals 7; R-APS MEG Level must be provisioned to the same value on all Ethernet Ring Nodes belonging to the ERP Topology on which the ERP Instance is created.
•
R-APS MEG ID East: [1 to 16]; R-APS MEG ID East identifier is the ID of the east end of the ring link and must be configured to the same value as the corresponding RAPS MEG ID West value for the west end of the ring link (ex. Ring Node 1 east port R-APS MEG ID East and Ring Node 2 west port R-APS MEG ID West must be provisioned with the same value).
•
R-APS MEG ID West: [1 to 16]; R-APS MEG ID West identifier is the ID of the west end of the ring link and must be configured to the same value as the corresponding RAPS MEG ID East value for the east end of the ring link (ex. Ring Node 4 west port R-APS MEG ID West and Ring Node 3 east port R-APS MEG ID East must be provisioned with the same value).
•
RPL Owner: Checked (Yes) or unchecked (No); One RPL Owner is required for each ERP Instance belonging to the Ring Topology. Only One RPL Owner is allowed for each ERP Instance belonging to the Ring Topology. If the Ring Node is configured as RPL Owner, the RPL Port (East or West) must also be configured.
•
RPL Port: East or West; (RPL Port is only configured if RPL Owner is yes)
The following ERP parameters can be modified when the istrative status of the ERP Instance is either enabled or disabled:
272
•
ERP Instance Label
•
Add VLAN: VLAN IDs associated to the ERP Instance. VLAN IDs associated to the ERP Instance must satisfy the following system checks: •
must be in the range from 1 to 4080
•
must be different from any VLAN ID associated to any other ERP Instance
•
must be different from R-APS VLAN ID configured in the ERP Instance
•
must be different from R-APS VLAN ID configured in any other ERP Instance
•
must be different from any VLAN ID configured for TMN In-Band
•
Wait-to-Restore Time: [1 to 12]; (Wait-to-Restore Time is only configured if RPL Owner is yes). Time period the RPL Owner waits to restore normal operation after a fault condition on the ring is corrected. Wait-to-restore is configured from 1 to 12 minutes with a default value of 5 minutes. Applicable only if ring’s node is RPL Owner for at least one instance.
•
Guard Timer: [10 to 2000]; (Guard Timer prevents Ethernet Ring Nodes from receiving outdated R-APS messages. During the duration of Guard Timer, all received R-APS messages are ignored by ERPS control process. Guard Timer is configured from 10 to 2000 ms with a default value of 500 ms.)
•
Hold Off timer on Ethernet ports: the hold off timer triggers the Ethernet Loss of Signal alarm. The timer is fixed at 500 ms.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
40.2.2 — Delete ring topology Ring topology can be deleted only when the following conditions exist: •
If no cross-connections are configured on either ERP Instance associated with the Ring Topology.
•
No ERP Instances are associated with the ERP Topology.
40.2.3 — Delete ERP Instance An ERP Instance can be deleted when the ERP Instance is either enabled or disabled. An ERP Instance can be deleted only when no cross-connections are associated with the ERP Instance. ERP Instance deletion automatically removes the VLAN ID associated with the ERP Instance from the VLAN Configuration. This removal does not modify VLAN port hip of VLANs associated to the ERP Instance. To avoid loops, the operator should first remove Ring Ports from the VLAN hip and then delete the ERP Instance. For a detailed description of the Ethernet Ring Protection feature, refer to theAlcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual.
40.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Ethernet Ring Configuration View
•
To enable an ERP Instance
•
To disable an ERP Instance
•
To modify ERP Instance parameters with ERP Instance enabled
•
To modify ERP Instance parameters which require the ERP Instance disabled
•
To delete an ERP Instance
•
To delete a Ring topology
•
To add PDH, Radio, ETH, OR -Through VLAN IDs to an ERP Instance
•
To delete PDH, Radio, ETH, OR -Through VLAN IDs from an ERP Instance
•
To add a VLAN to an ERP Instance
•
To provision the Hold off timer
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
273
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To delete VLAN IDs from an ERP Instance
•
To provision the Hold off timer
•
To force a Ring protection switch
To open the Ethernet Ring Configuration View 1.
Select Ethernet Ring Configuration View icon from the main toolbar. See Figure 40.1. Figure 40.1 — Ethernet Ring Configuration View icon
Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration window displays. See Figure 40.2. Figure 40.2 — Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration View
To enable an ERP Instance
274
1.
From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to enable. See Figure 40.2.
2.
Select ERP Enabled check box (checked).
3.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To disable an ERP Instance 1.
From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to disable. See Figure 40.2.
2.
Select ERP Enabled check box (unchecked).
3.
Click Apply.
To modify ERP Instance parameters with ERP Instance enabled 1.
From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to modify. See Figure 40.2.
2.
Modify one or more of the following ERP Instance parameters using the following procedure: See Figure 40.3 for the following steps: a.
Modify ERP Label in the Label field, if applicable.
b.
Is Ring Node RPL Owner? a.
If yes, go to step c.
b.
If no, go to step d.
c.
From the Wait-to Restore Time drop-down menu, select 1 to 12 minutes, if applicable.
d.
In the Guard Timer field, enter Guard Timer duration; 10 to 2000 ms, if applicable.
e.
Click Apply.
Figure 40.3 — Modify ERP Instance with ERP Instance enabled
To modify ERP Instance parameters which require the ERP Instance disabled 1.
From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to modify. See Figure 40.2.
2.
Disable the ERP instance; see To disable an ERP Instance.
3.
Modify one or more of the following ERP Instance parameters using the following procedure: See Figure 40.4 for the following steps: a.
Modify R-APS VLAN ID in the R-APS VLAN ID field, if applicable.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
275
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: R-APS VLAN ID must be provisioned to the same value on all Ethernet Ring Nodes belonging to the ERP Instance.
b.
From the R-APS MEG Level drop-down menu, modify R-APS MEG Level for the ERP Topology, if applicable.
Note: R-APS MEG Level must be provisioned to the same value on all Ethernet Ring Nodes belonging to the ERP Instance.
c.
From the R-APS MEG ID East drop-down menu, select new ring link east port ID#, if applicable.
d.
From the R-APS MEG ID West drop-down menu, select new ring link west port ID#, if applicable.
e.
For Ring Node which is RPL Owner, select RPL Owner check box (checked), for Ring Nodes which are not RPL Owner, RPL Owner check box (unchecked), if applicable. Is RPL Owner selected? a.
If yes, go to step f.
b.
If no, go to step g.
f.
Select RPL Owner Port, East Port or West Port, if applicable.
g.
Click Apply.
Figure 40.4 — Modify ERP Instance with ERP Instance disabled
Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration window updates. 4.
Enable the ERP instance; see To enable an ERP Instance.
To delete an ERP Instance 1.
276
An ERP Instance can be deleted when the ERP Instance is either enabled or disabled.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures An ERP Instance can be deleted only when no cross-connections are associated with the ERP Instance. ERP Instance deletion automatically removes the VLAN ID associated with the ERP Instance from the VLAN Configuration. This removal does not modify VLAN port hip of VLANs associated to the ERP Instance. To avoid loops, the operator should first remove Ring Ports from the VLAN hip and then delete the ERP Instance. Caution: To avoid loops, the operator must first remove Ring Ports from the VLAN hip of VLANs associated to the ERP Instance and then delete the ERP Instance.
2.
Modify or Delete Ethernet Flow from VLAN Configuration. For detailed steps to modify or delete VLAN Ethernet Flow, see ister VLAN configuration.
3.
Delete VLAN IDs from Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to delete PDH, Radio, Eth, and -Through to Ring cross-connections, see Deprovision cross connections.
4.
From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to delete. See Figure 40.2.
5.
Click Delete. Confirm Operation window opens.
6.
Click Yes.
To delete a Ring topology Note: Ring topology can be deleted only when the following conditions exist: If no cross-connections are configured on either ERP Instance associated with the Ring Topology No ERP Instances are associated with the ERP Topology.
1.
From the Ring Topology area, select Ring Topology to delete. See Figure 40.2.
2.
Click Delete. Confirm Operation window opens.
3.
Click Yes.
To add PDH, Radio, ETH, OR -Through VLAN IDs to an ERP Instance 1.
Add PDH, Radio, Eth, and -Through VLAN IDs to ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 40.5 for the following steps: a.
Select ERP instance to add VLAN IDs.
b.
Enter VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
277
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures e.
Click Apply. Figure 40.5 — Add VLAN IDs to ERP Instance
2.
Add VLAN IDs to Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to add PDH, Radio, Eth, and -Through to Ring cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To delete PDH, Radio, ETH, OR -Through VLAN IDs from an ERP Instance 1.
Delete VLAN IDs from Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to delete PDH, Radio, Eth, and -Through to Ring cross-connections, see Deprovision cross connections.
2.
Delete PDH, Radio, Eth, and -Through VLAN IDs from ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 40.6 for the following steps:
278
a.
Select ERP instance to delete Radio flows.
b.
Select VLAN IDs in VLAN ID table.
c.
Click Delete.
d.
VLAN IDs are removed from the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 40.6 — Delete VLAN IDs from ERP Instance
To add a VLAN to an ERP Instance 1.
Add VLAN Ethernet flows to ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 40.5 for the following steps:
2.
a.
Select ERP instance to add VLAN flows.
b.
Enter VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
Add Ethernet Flow to VLAN Configuration. For detailed steps to add VLAN Ethernet Flow, see ister VLAN configuration.
To delete VLAN IDs from an ERP Instance 1.
Delete or modify Ethernet Flow from VLAN Configuration. For detailed steps to delete or modify VLAN Ethernet Flow, see ister VLAN configuration.
2.
Delete VLAN Ethernet flows from ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 40.6 for the following steps: a.
Select ERP instance to delete VLAN flows.
b.
Select VLAN IDs in VLAN ID table.
c.
Click Delete.
d.
VLAN IDs are removed from the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
To provision the Hold off timer 1.
Provision the Hold Off timer for any Ethernet ports in the ERP Instance. For detailed steps, see Provision Ethernet ports.
To force a Ring protection switch 1.
To force a ring protection switch, perform one of the following:
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
279
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
280
•
Disable the SFP port for an optical Ethernet interface
•
Disable an L1 LAG
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
41 — ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports
41.1 — Purpose This chapter provides detailed procedures to provision and ister L1/L2 Radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports. Note: Some graphics may not match the current release.
Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
41.2 — General L1/L2 Radio and L2 Ethernet LAG port provisioning is performed using the craft terminal. Ethernet and Radio ports must be configured prior to provisioning LAG ports. If the NE is in Provider Bridge mode, the LAG port can be assigned a Provider Bridge port type and added to an S-VLAN. For a detailed description of LAG, including port hip rules, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual.
41.2.1 — Provider bridge parameters If the NE is in Provider Bridge mode, LAG ports can be configured as NNI, UNI (portbased) or UNI (VLAN-based). Parameters apply for each port type: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
281
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
NNI - S-VLAN TPID •
The S-VLAN TPID selects the service instance associated to the port for untagged and C-VLAN priority-tagged frames. The port must be in the untagged set of the SVLAN.
UNI (port-based)- Port Priority or C-VLAN Priority •
The port priority represents the priority assigned to untagged frames ingressing the port.
UNI (VLAN-based)- C-VLAN/S-VLAN mapping and egress settings Ingress settings: •
The list of C-VLAN IDs represents the list of C-VLANs to be managed by the port. By default, the list is empty. 1.
Each C-VLAN ID must be mapped to an S-VLAN which represents the service instance used to carry the C-VLAN in the network. The S-VLAN must have the port in its untagged set. More than one C-VLAN can be associated to the same S-VLAN.
2.
The Remove C-VLAN parameter can be set for each C-VLAN ID. This allows only the S-VLAN tag to be carried over the network when the association between the C-VLAN and the VLAN-based service instance is one-to-one. The Remove C-VLAN parameter can only be set for one C-VLAN mapped to an SVLAN ID.
3.
The S-VLAN priority defines the priority of the tagged Ethernet frames ingressing the port. The priority can be inherited from the P of the C-VLAN tag or configured by the . The default is inherited.
Egress settings:
282
•
The C-VLAN tag of Ethernet frames egressing the port can be removed, which declares the port as untagged. The default Untag C-VLAN parameter is false. When the port is disabled, the parameter returns to the default value.
•
For each S-VLAN ID having the port in its member set, the C-VLAN ID of the CVLAN tag to be added to Ethernet frames egressing the port can be configured. This allows a C-VLAN tag to be added to Ethernet frames carried over the network with only the S-VLAN tag, when the association between the C-VLAN and the VLANbased service instance is one-to-one. The default value is 0, which means that no association to an S-VLAN is in place and no C-VLAN tag will be added. When the port is disabled, the parameter returns to the default value.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
41.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To launch the LAG Configuration tool
•
To provision an L1 Radio LAG port
•
To provision an L2 radio LAG port (not available with a CorEvo card)
•
To create an L1/L2 Radio or L2 Ethernet LAG port
•
To add Ethernet or radio ports to LAG port
•
To remove Ethernet or radio ports from a LAG port
•
To enable a LAG port
•
To destroy an L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG port
•
To ister PPP RF configuration
•
To provision hashing level for L2 Ethernet/radio LAG port
•
To enable SSM for L1 radio LAG port
•
To enable PTB for L1 radio LAG port
•
To provision Wait-To-Restore (WTR) value
To launch the LAG Configuration tool 1.
Launch Link Aggregation L1/L2 Configuration (LAG Configuration) tool from the craft terminal. Click the LAG Configuration Icon, see Figure 41.1, or from the main menu bar, select Configuration > LAG Configuration. Figure 41.1 — LAG Configuration icon
LAG Configuration tool opens. See Figure 41.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
283
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.2 — LAG Configuration tool
To provision an L1 Radio LAG port 1.
Using the craft terminal, all radio ports, to be of the L1 Radio LAG port, are provisioned correctly. Correct any radio port provisioning that does not correspond to the desired radio performance characteristics. the following parameters: •
modulation type (mode)
•
reference channel spacing
•
modulation
•
option (presetting or adaptive modulation)
•
Synchronization SSM disabled
Radio ports with XPIC profiles can be part of the same LAG as radio ports with non-XPIC profiles. All other radio parameters must be the same. 2.
Using the craft terminal, all radio ports, to be of the L1 Radio LAG port, are not associated with the following: a.
284
Cross-Connection
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
3.
b.
VLAN
c.
Port Segregation
d.
PPP RF enabled on the radio channel
e.
Synchronization reference
f.
SSM
g.
Pkt throughput booster enabled (except MPT-HL on EASv2)
h.
MPT-HL radio connected to a Core card
i.
MPT-HLC radio connected to a Core or P8ETH card
Create L1 Radio LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to create L1 Radio LAG port, see To create an L1/L2 Radio or L2 Ethernet LAG port.
4.
Add Radio ports to L1 Radio LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to add radio ports to an L1 Radio LAG port, see To add Ethernet or radio ports to LAG port.
5.
Provision WTR parameter.
Note: For a detailed procedure to provision WTR parameter, see To provision Wait-ToRestore (WTR) value.
6.
Provision PPP RF Configuration.The Remote IP Address field shows the IP address of the remote connected NE.
Note: For a detailed procedure to provision PPP RF Configuration, see To ister PPP RF configuration.
7.
Click Apply.
8.
From the LAG Information pane, select the Enabled check box (checked).
9.
Click Apply.
10. Provision SSM . Note: For a detailed procedure to provision SSM , see To enable SSM for L1 radio LAG port and To disable SSM for L1 radio LAG port.
11. Provision packet throughput booster (PTB) if available. Note: For a detailed procedure to provision PTB, see To enable PTB for L1 radio LAG port and To disable PTB for L1 radio LAG port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
285
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 12. Click Apply. 13. L1 Radio LAG port provisioning. To provision an L2 radio LAG port (not available with a CorEvo card) 1.
2.
3.
Using the craft terminal, all radio ports, to be of the L2 Radio LAG port, are provisioned correctly. Correct any radio port provisioning that does not correspond to the desired radio performance characteristics. the following parameters: •
Tx and Rx Frequency
•
Shifter
•
Synchronization SSM enabled/disabled
Using the craft terminal, all radio ports, to be of the L2 Radio LAG port, are not associated with the following: •
Cross-Connection
•
Port Segregation
•
VLAN
•
PPP RF enabled on the radio channel
•
MPT-HL radio connected to a Core-E card
•
MPT-HLC radio connected to a Core-E or P8ETH card
Create L2 Radio LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to create L2 Radio LAG port, see To create an L1/L2 Radio or L2 Ethernet LAG port.
4.
Add Radio ports to L2 Radio LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to add radio ports to an L2 Radio LAG port, see To add Ethernet or radio ports to LAG port.
5.
Provision PPP RF Configuration. The Remote IP Address field shows the IP address of the remote connected NE.
Note: For a detailed procedure to provision PPP RF Configuration, see To ister PPP RF configuration.
286
6.
From the LAG Information pane Hash drop-down menu, select hashing level: (L2 or L3).
7.
From the LAG Information pane, select Enabled check box (checked).
8.
Click Apply.
9.
L2 Radio LAG port provisioning.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision an L2 Ethernet LAG port 1.
2.
Using the craft terminal, all Ethernet ports to be of the L2 Ethernet LAG port are provisioned the same. Correct any Ethernet provisioning that does not correspond to the desired LAG performance characteristics. the following parameters: •
d Capability (only Full Duplex ed)
•
Auto Negotiation: Enable or Disabled (All either enabled or disabled)
•
Synchronous Ethernet Operation Mode
Using the craft terminal, all Ethernet ports, to be of the LAG port, are not associated with the following: •
Cross-Connection
•
Port Segregation
•
VLAN
3.
If the Ethernet ports that will be of the L2 Ethernet LAG port will be used as TMN in-band interfaces, that the TMN in-band has been configured and that the Ethernet ports that will be included in the LAG have been selected. See ister In-Band TMN VLAN port.
4.
Create L2 Ethernet LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to create L2 Ethernet LAG port, see To create an L1/L2 Radio or L2 Ethernet LAG port.
5.
Add Ethernet ports to L2 Ethernet LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to add Ethernet ports to a LAG port, see To add Ethernet or radio ports to LAG port, step 1.
6.
Provision VLAN Configuration.
Note: For a detailed procedure to provision VLAN Configuration, see ister VLAN configuration, step 5.
7.
From the LAG Information pane Hash drop-down menu, select hashing level: (L2 or L3).
8.
From the LAG Information pane, select Enabled check box (checked).
9.
Click Apply.
10. L2 Ethernet LAG port provisioning. To create an L1/L2 Radio or L2 Ethernet LAG port
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
287
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Caution: Adding the first radio port, which is carrying traffic, to a L1 Radio LAG port has an impact to traffic.
Note: When adding the first radio (Lowest Index Port) to L1 Radio LAG, the following port add restrictions do not apply. For this case, the following parameters will be reassigned to the LAG port. L2 Radio LAG is not available if a CorEvo card is in use.
1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, in the configured LAGs pane, click Create. See Figure 41.2. The LAG Creation window displays. See Figure 41.3. Figure 41.3 — LAG Creation window
L1 Radio LAG Create
L2 Radio LAG Create
L2 Ethernet LAG Create
i ii iii iv
i ii iii iv v
i ii iii iv v vi vii
v
vi
viii 22900
2.
Create a LAG port using the following procedure: See Figure 41.3. i.
From the ID drop-down menu, select LAG ID number (1 - 14 if a CoreE, MSS-1 or MSS-O is in use, or 1-12 if a CorEvo card is in use).
ii.
Enter the LAG name, optional (up to 32 characters).
iii.
From the Type drop-down menu, select (L1 Radio, L2 Radio, or L2 Ethernet).
iv.
From the Size drop-down menu, select LAG size
v.
If Type is provisioned L2 Ethernet/Radio, then from the Key drop-down menu, select the Key value (1 - 32).
vi.
If Type is provisioned L2 Ethernet, then from the LA drop-down menu, select LA (Active, ive, or Disabled).
vii. If LA is provisioned Active or ive, then from the Timeout field, select time-out period (Short or Long). viii. Click Create. The LAG Creation window closes. The L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG is added to the LAG Configuration Tool. See Figure 41.4. 288
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.4 — L2 Ethernet LAG created
To add Ethernet or radio ports to LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, add Ethernet/Radio ports to LAG port using the following procedure: To add L1 Radio port to LAG port, see Figure 41.5. To add L2 Radio port to LAG port, see Figure 41.6. To add L2 Ethernet port to LAG port, see Figure 41.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
289
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.5 — Add radio ports to L1 radio LAG
i
ii
iii 25223
290
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.6 — Add radio ports to L2 radio LAG
i
iii iv
ii
vii 22903
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
291
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.7 — Add Ethernet ports to Ethernet LAG
i
iii iv
vii
v 22901
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to add port.
ii.
If LAG Type is provisioned L2 Radio, then from the Available Ports pane, select Radio port type (MPT).
iii.
From Available Ports pane, select port to add to LAG.
iv.
Click >.
v.
If Type is provisioned L2 Ethernet, then from the Added Ports pane, select priority (0 or 65535). Note: default priority value is 128.
vi.
Repeat steps i through v to add additional ports to the LAG.
vii. Click Apply. To remove Ethernet or radio ports from a LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, remove Ethernet/Radio ports from LAG port using the following procedure: To remove L1 Radio port from LAG port, see Figure 41.8. To remove L2 Radio port from LAG port, see Figure 41.9. To remove L2 Ethernet port from LAG port, see Figure 41.10.
292
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: To remove the last port member of a LAG, the LAG port must first be disabled.
Figure 41.8 — Remove L1 radio ports from LAG port
i
ii
iii iv
v vi
viii 22908
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
293
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.9 — Remove L2 radio ports from LAG port
i
iii iv
ii
vii 22903
294
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.10 — Remove Ethernet ports from LAG port
i
v vi
viii 22909
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to remove ports.
ii.
If last L1/L2 Radio LAG port and PPP RF is enabled, then from the PPP RF pane, select the Enabled check box (unchecked).
iii.
If last L1 Radio LAG port and SSM is enabled, then from the SSM pane, select the Enabled check box (unchecked).
iv.
If last L1 Radio LAG port and PTB is enabled, then from the PTB pane, select the Enabled check box (unchecked).
v.
From the Added Ports pane, select the Port to remove from LAG.
vi.
Click <.
vii. Repeat this procedure to remove additional ports from the LAG. Note: In Provider Bridge mode, a port removed from an L2 Ethernet LAG will be managed as an NNI port.
viii. Click Apply. To enable a LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, enable LAG port using the following procedure: See Figure 41.11.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
295
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.11 — Enable/disable LAG port
i
ii
iii 22905
2.
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select the LAG to enable.
ii.
From the LAG Information pane, select the Enabled check box (checked).
iii.
Click Apply.
Disable LAG port Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, disable LAG port using the following procedure: See Figure 41.11.
Note: To disable a LAG port, all cross-connections, VLANs, and Port segregation, synchronization reference provisioning must be removed from the LAG port. If the L2 Ethernet LAG port is configured as UNI (VLAN-Based) in Provider Bridge mode, to disable a LAG port, Ingress C-VLAN / S-VLAN Mappings must be removed.
3.
296
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to disable.
ii.
From the LAG Information pane, select the Enabled check box (unchecked).
iii.
Click Apply.
Configure Provider Bridge port type of an L2 Ethernet LAG port
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The NE must be in Provider Bridge mode.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, configure the port type using the following procedure: See Figure 41.12. 4.
that the LAG port is enabled. To enable it, go to step 1. i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select the L2 Ethernet LAG.
ii.
Select the Provider Bridge tab.
iii.
Choose the port type: NNI, UNI (port-based), or UNI (VLAN-based). Figure 41.12 — Provider bridge tab
i
ii
iii iv
v 23656
iv.
v.
Configure port type parameters: •
for NNI, choose the S-VLAN TPID from the drop-down menu
•
for UNI (port-based), choose Port Priority or C-VLAN Priority
•
for UNI (VLAN-based), configure C-VLAN/S-VLAN mapping and egress settings
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
297
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 5.
ister VLAN configuration Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, ister VLAN Configuration using the following procedure: See Figure 41.13.
Note: To assign a Port VLAN other than VLAN 1, the Port VLAN must be created and assigned using the VLAN configuration tool. See ister VLAN configuration for detailed instruction to create and assign VLAN. Figure 41.13 — ister Ethernet LAG VLAN configuration
i
ii ii iv
v 22902
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to ister VLAN Configuration.
ii.
From the VLAN Configuration pane, in the Acceptable Frame Types field, select: (it all or it tagged only).
iii.
If it all is selected, then provision Port VLAN ID (1 to 4080). Note: VLAN ID must be provisioned with the VLAN Configuration tool prior to provisioning VLAN Configuration.
298
iv.
If it all is selected, then provision Priority (0 to 7).
v.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To destroy an L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG port 1.
2.
Using the craft terminal, L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG port, to be destroyed, is not associated with any of the following: •
Cross-Connections
•
Port Segregation
•
VLANs
•
If L1 radio LAG port, synchronization reference
•
If L1 radio LAG port, PPP RF enabled
•
If L1 radio LAG port, SSM enabled
To disable an L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to disable L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG port, see Disable LAG port, step 2.
3.
Remove Ethernet or Radio ports from LAG.
Note: For a detailed procedure to remove Ethernet or Radio ports from a LAG port, see To remove Ethernet or radio ports from a LAG port, step 1.
4.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to destroy. See Figure 41.2.
5.
From the Configured LAGs pane, click Destroy. The Confirm operation window displays.
6.
Click Yes. The L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG port is removed from the Configured LAGs pane.
To ister PPP RF configuration 1.
2.
Select action. a.
To Enable PPP RF on radio LAG port, go to step 2.
b.
To Disable PPP RF on radio LAG port, go to step 3.
Enable PPP RF on radio LAG port Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, enable PPP RF configuration using the following procedure: See Figure 41.14.
Note: The PPP RF channel for TMN is managed at LAG level and not at ODU level.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
299
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: In applications with two parallel LAG groups, the PPP rules are the same as for Nx(1+0) and Nx(1+1). The PPP RF option must be disabled on all links except one. The PPP traffic may us the other links for protection, when the enabled link is failed. This protection may require waiting for the destination MAC address to age out of the forwarding table before recovering. Figure 41.14 — Enable PPP RF on L1/L2 radio LAG configuration
i
ii iii iv
v 22904
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to enable PPP RF channel.
ii.
From the PPP RF pane, select Enabled check box (checked).
iii.
Select Routing IP Protocol: (OSPF or None).
iv.
If OSPF is selected, then select OSPF Area: (0 to 4). Note: OSPF Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning PPP RF channel.
v. 3.
Click Apply.
Disable PPP RF on radio LAG port Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, disable PPP RF configuration using the following procedure: See Figure 41.14. i.
300
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to disable PPP RF channel. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ii.
From the PPP RF pane, select Enabled check box (unchecked).
iii.
Click Apply.
To provision hashing level for L2 Ethernet/radio LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, provision Hashing level using the following procedure: See Figure 41.15.
Figure 41.15 — Provision hashing level for L2 Ethernet/radio LAG port
i
ii
iii 22910
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to provision hashing level.
ii.
From the LAG Information pane, in the Hash drop-down menu, select (L2 or L3).
iii.
Click Apply.
To enable SSM for L1 radio LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, enable SSM using the following procedure: See Figure 41.16.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
301
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.16 — L1 radio LAG configuration
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to enable SSM .
ii.
From the SSM pane, select Enabled check box (checked).
iii.
Click Apply.
To disable SSM for L1 radio LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, disable SSM using the following procedure: See Figure 41.16. i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to disable SSM .
ii.
From the SSM pane, select Enabled check box (unchecked).
iii.
Click Apply.
To enable PTB for L1 radio LAG port 1.
302
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, enable PTB using the following procedure: See Figure 41.16. i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select the LAG to enable PTB.
ii.
From the PTB pane, select the Enabled check box (checked).
iii.
Click Apply. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To disable PTB for L1 radio LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, disable PTB using the following procedure: See Figure 41.16. i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select the LAG to disable PTB.
ii.
From the PTB pane, select the Enabled check box (unchecked).
iii.
Click Apply.
To provision Wait-To-Restore (WTR) value 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, provision WTR value using the following procedure: See Figure 41.16. a.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to provision WTR value.
b.
From the WTR drop-down menu, select WTR period (100 ms to 8 sec).
c.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
303
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
304
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
42 — ister synchronization
42.1 — Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to ister NE synchronization.
42.2 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To view synchronization provisioning
•
To view Synchronization Protection Scheme
•
To enable 1588 Transparent Clock
•
To provision Synchronization — Master
•
To provision Synchronization — Slave
•
To view Radio Channel SSM summary
•
To provision Radio Channel SSM
To view synchronization provisioning 1.
To view synchronization provisioning Select Synchronization tab.
2.
Select Synchronization Source in the resource tree area.
3.
Select Settings tab in the resource detail area. Synchronization Settings tab displays. See Figure 42.1 and Figure 42.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
305
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 42.1 — Synchronization settings tab with Core-E (1588TC license present)
Figure 42.2 — Synchronization settings tab with CorEvo (1588TC license and Sync In/Out SFP not present)
306
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To view Synchronization Protection Scheme 1.
Select Protection Schemes tab.
2.
Select Synchronization Protection in the resource tree area. Synchronization Protection tab displays. See Figure 42.3. The Primary/Secondary row displays details regarding the synchronization source. The Status column displays the synchronization source status, either Active or Standby. Figure 42.3 — Synchronization Protection tab
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
307
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To enable 1588 Transparent Clock 1.
Select Synchronization tab.
2.
Select Synchronization Source in the resource tree area.
3.
Select the 1588 tab in the resource detail area. The 1588 tab displays. See Figure 42.4. Figure 42.4 — 1588 tab
4.
Select the Enabled check box.
5.
Click on the Apply button. The 1588 Transparent Clock is enabled.
To provision Synchronization — Master 1.
Select the Synchronization tab.
2.
Select Synchronization Source in the resource tree area.
3.
Select the Settings tab in the resource detail area. Synchronization Settings tab displays. See Figure 42.1.
308
4.
Select the Master radio button in the Role partition.
5.
Select a Restoration mode radio button: Revertive or Not Revertive.
6.
Select a Primary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Sync-In Port, Eth Port, or STM-1/OC-3 Port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: If an MSS-1 is in use, the E1/T1 option is displayed instead of E1/DS1.
7.
8.
Which primary source was selected? a.
If Sync-In Port, go to step 8.
b.
If E1/DS1 Port, go to step 11.
c.
If Eth Port, go to step 14.
d.
If STM-1/OC3 Port, go to step 17.
e.
If Free Run Local Oscillator, go to step 29.
In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync In Port drop-down menu, select Sync In Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs. The Sync In Port appears as NOT USED. The SFP is displayed as Sync In Port #5, #6, #7, #8, depending on where the SFP is placed; see Figure 42.5.
9.
Select Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Eth Port, STM-1/OC-3 port, or None.
10. Go to step 20. 11. From the E1/DS1 Port drop-down menu, select the E1/DS1 Port. 12. Select Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Sync-In Port, Eth Port, STM-1/OC-3 port, or None. 13. Go to step 20. 14. From the Eth Port drop-down menu, select the Eth Port. 15. Select Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Sync-In Port, Eth Port, STM-1/OC-3 port, or None. 16. Go to step 20. 17. From the STM-1/OC-3 Port drop-down menu, select the STM-1OC-3. 18. Select Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Sync-In Port, Eth Port, STM-1/OC-3 port, L1 Radio LAG port, or None. 19. Go to step 20. 20. Which secondary source was selected? a.
If Sync-In Port, go to step 21.
b.
If E1/DS1 Port, go to step 23.
c.
If Eth Port, go to step 25.
d.
If STM-1/OC-3 Port, go to step 27.
e.
If Free Run Local Oscillator, go to step 29.
f.
If None, go to step 29.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
309
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 21. In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync In port drop-down menu, select the Sync In Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs. The Sync In Port appears as NOT USED. The SFP is displayed as Sync In Port #5, #6, #7, #8, depending on where the SFP is placed; see Figure 42.5. Figure 42.5 — Sync Ports with Sync-In/Out SFP
22. Go to step 29. 23. From the E1/DS1 Port drop-down menu, select the E1/DS1 Port. 24. Go to step 29. 25. From the Eth Port drop-down menu, select the Eth Port. 26. Go to step 29. 27. From the STM-1/OC-3 Port drop-down menu, select the STM-1/OC-3 Port. 28. Go to step 29. 29. Provision Sync Out Port? a.
If yes, go to step 30.
b.
If no, go to step 31.
30. In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync Out Port drop-down menu, select the Sync Out Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs. The Sync Out Port appears as NOT USED. The SFP is displayed as Sync Out Port #5, #6, #7, #8, depending on where the SFP is placed; see Figure 42.5.
31. In the Wait-To-Restore time entry boxes select the wait to restore time in minutes (min.) [0-12] and seconds (sec.) [0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50]. 32. Click Apply.
310
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 42.6 — Synchronization - Master / Revertive
To provision Synchronization — Slave 1.
Select the Synchronization tab.
2.
Click the Synchronization Source in the resource tree area.
3.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. Synchronization Settings tab displays. See Figure 42.1.
4.
Select the Slave radio button in the Role partition.
5.
Select a Primary Source radio button: Sync-In Port, Radio/MPT Port, or Eth Port.
6.
Which primary source was selected?
7.
a.
If Sync-In Port, go to step 7.
b.
If Radio/MPT Port, go to step 10.
c.
If Eth Port, go to step 13.
In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync In port drop-down menu, select the Sync-In Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs. The Sync In Port appears as NOT USED. The SFP is displayed as Sync In Port #5, #6, #7, #8, depending on where the SFP is placed; see Figure 42.5.
8.
Select a Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Radio/MPT Port, Eth Port, STM-1/OC-3 port, or None.
9.
Go to step 15.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
311
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 10. From the Radio/MPT Port drop-down menu, select the Radio Port. The port can be a radio channel or an L1 Radio LAG. 11. Select Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Sync-In Port, Radio/MPT Port, Eth Port, OC-3 port, L1 Radio LAG port, or None. 12. Go to step 15. 13. From the Eth Port drop-down menu, select the Eth Port. 14. Select Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Sync-In Port, Radio/MPT Port, Eth Port, STM-1/OC-3 port, or None. 15. Which secondary source was selected? a.
If Sync-In Port, go to step 16.
b.
If E1/DS1 Port, go to step 18.
c.
If Radio Port, go to step 20.
d.
If Eth Port, go to step 22.
e.
If STM-1/OC-3 Port, go to step 24.
f.
If Free Run Local Oscillator, go to step 26.
g.
If None, go to step 26.
16. In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync In port drop-down menu, select the Sync-In Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs. The Sync In Port appears as NOT USED. The SFP is displayed as Sync In Port #5, #6, #7, #8, depending on where the SFP is placed; see Figure 42.5.
17. Go to step 26. 18. From the E1/DS1 Port drop-down menu, select the E1/DS1 Port. 19. Go to step 26. 20. From the Radio/MPT Port drop-down menu, select the Radio Port. The port can be a radio channel or an L1 Radio LAG. 21. Go to step 26. 22. From the Eth Port drop-down menu, select the Eth Port. 23. Go to step 26. 24. From the STM1 (OC-3) Port drop-down menu, select the STM1/OC-3 Port. 25. Go to step 26. 26. Provision Sync Out Port? a.
If yes, go to step 27.
b.
If no, go to step 28.
27. In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync Out port drop-down menu, select the Sync Out Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz.
312
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs. The Sync Out Port appears as NOT USED. The SFP is displayed as Sync Out Port #5, #6, #7, #8, depending on where the SFP is placed; see Figure 42.5.
28. In the Wait-To-Restore time entry boxes select the wait to restore time in minutes (min.) [0-12] and seconds (sec.) [0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50]. 29. Click Apply. Figure 42.7 — Synchronization - Slave / Revertive
To view Radio Channel SSM summary 1.
Select Synchronization tab.
2.
Select Synchronization Source in the resource tree area.
3.
Select Settings tab in the resource detail area. Synchronization Settings tab displays. See Figure 42.1.
4.
Select SSM Summary button in the resource detail area. SSM Summary Table displays. See Figure 42.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
313
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 42.8 — SSM Summary table
5.
View SSM provisioning status.
6.
Close SSM Summary Table.
To provision Radio Channel SSM 1.
Select Equipment tab.
2.
Select Radio Direction to provision SSM in the resource tree area. For MPT-HL radio direction, select MPT-HL Dir#-Ch#. For MPT-HLC radio direction, select MPT-HLC Dir#-Ch#. For MPT-HC/XP radio direction, select MPT-HC Dir#-Ch#. For MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM radio direction, select MPTHQAM Dir#-Ch#. The selected name will be highlighted in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/XP/XP-HQAM icon in blue in the resource list area.
3.
Double click the blue radio icon.
4.
Select the Additional Settings tab in the resource detail area. The radio direction Additional Settings tab displays. See Figure 42.9 for an example.
314
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 42.9 — MPT-HL Radio Channel Additional Settings tab
5.
Provision radio channel SSM? a.
To enable SSM, go to step 6.
b.
To disable SSM, go to step 8.
c.
To leave SSM provisioning unchanged, go to step 10.
6.
Select the SSM check box: Enabled (checked).
7.
Go to step 9.
8.
Select the SSM check box: Enabled (unchecked).
9.
Click Apply.
10. Close the radio channel window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
315
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
316
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
43 — Provision cross connections
43.1 — Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to provision cross connections from the Cross Connections screen. For AUX cross-connections, see Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only).
43.2 — General Cross connection is only required for TDM traffic. Generic Ethernet traffic is handled automatically via MAC Address learning in the Ethernet switch. Cross connections can also be used with point-to-point VLAN Ethernet traffic to direct traffic based on a VLAN tag rather than MAC address. The cross connections screen (MSS-4/8) is used to configure switching of packetized data through the MSS-4/8 Core card. See Figure 43.1 for an example of the MSS-4/8 Cross Connections screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
317
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General Figure 43.1 — MSS-4/8 Cross-Connections screen
The cross connections screen (MSS-1) is used to configure switching of packetized data through the MSS-1 Core ports. See Figure 43.2 for an example of the MSS-1 Cross Connections screen.
318
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 PDH to radio: Figure 43.2 — MSS-1 Cross-Connections screen
43.3 — PDH to radio: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering E1/DS1 cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing E1/DS1 cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision E1/DS1 cross-connections while the main Core card is Active. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.3.1 — Prerequisites Each E1/DS1/DS3 port and radio port must be enabled on the respective E1/DS1/DS3 card and Core/MPTACC/P8ETH/EASv2 card or Radio LAG port provisioning screens. The Service Profile on each E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen must be set to TDM2TDM for each E1/DS1/DS3 cross connect when both termination points of the E1/DS1/DS3 circuit are terminated on 9500 MPR equipment. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
319
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 SDH to radio:
The Service Profile on each E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen must be set to TDM2ETH for each E1/DS1/DS3 cross connect when one of the termination points of the E1/DS1/DS3 circuit are terminated on non-9500 MPR equipment, and the other equipment is MEF-8 compliant. Each E1/DS1/DS3 line to be cross connected must have a unique Flow ID number assigned to it on the respective E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
43.4 — SDH to radio: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering SDH cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing SDH cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision SDH cross-connections while the main Core card is Active. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.4.1 — Prerequisites Each SDH port and radio port must be enabled on the respective SDH card and Core/ MPTACC/P8ETH/EASv2 card or MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Radio L1 LAG port provisioning screens. The Service Profile on all SDH card Settings screen must be set to SDH2SDH for each SDH cross connect. Each SDH line to be cross connected must have a unique Flow ID number assigned to it on the respective SDH card Settings screen. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
320
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 SDH to Ring:
43.5 — SDH to Ring: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering SDH cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing SDH cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision SDH cross-connections while the main Core card is Active. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.5.1 — Prerequisites Each SDH port and Ring port must be enabled on the respective SDH card and Ethernet Ring Protection Configuration provisioning screens. The Service Profile on all SDH card Settings screen must be set to SDH2SDH for each SDH cross connect. Each SDH line to be cross connected must have a unique Flow ID number assigned to it on the respective SDH card Settings screen. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. For information about Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring, see Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring.
43.6 — SDH to LAG: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering SDH cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing SDH cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision SDH cross-connections while the main Core card is Active. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
321
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 PDH to Ethernet:
43.6.1 — Prerequisites Each SDH port and LAG port must be enabled on the respective provisioning screens. The LAG must be a Layer1 LAG on an EASv2 card. In the ANSI market, the LAG must be composed of MPT-HLC radios. The Service Profile on all SDH card Settings screen must be set to SDH2SDH for each SDH cross connect. Each SDH line to be cross connected must have a unique Flow ID number assigned to it on the respective SDH card Settings screen. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
43.7 — PDH to Ethernet: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering E1/DS1 cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing E1/DS1 cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision E1/DS1 cross-connections while the main Core card is Active. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.7.1 — Prerequisites The E1/DS1/DS3 card (source) and Core, P8ETH or EASv2 card (destination) must be enabled on the respective E1/DS1/DS3 card, and Core, P8ETH or EASv2 card or Ethernet LAG port provisioning screens. The Service Profile on the E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen must be set to TDM2ETH for each E1/DS1/DS3 cross connected. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
322
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Ethernet to radio:
43.8 — Ethernet to radio: Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.8.1 — Prerequisites The Ethernet port (source) and radio port (destination) must be enabled on the respective Core, MPTACC, EAS card, or Ethernet/Radio LAG port provisioning screens. Ranging Flow ID entry is ed. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet port and all other parallel radio ports. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet and radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
43.9 — Radio to radio: Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.9.1 — Prerequisites Both radios and/or Radio LAG ports must be enabled on the respective card or Ethernet LAG port provisioning screens. When making a cross connection between two radio cards: •
Use the TDM2TDM service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured TDM2TDM.
•
Use the TDM2ETH service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured TDM2ETH.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
323
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 PDH to Ring:
•
Use the SDH2SDH service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured SDH2SDH.
Ranging Flow ID entry is ed. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and all other parallel radio ports. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
43.10 — PDH to Ring: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering E1/DS1 cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing E1/DS1 cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision E1/DS1 cross-connections while the main Core card is Active. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.10.1 — Prerequisites Each E1/DS1/DS3 port and Ring port must be enabled on the respective E1/DS1/DS3 card and Ethernet Ring Protection Configuration provisioning screens. The Service Profile on each E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen must be set to TDM2TDM for each E1/DS1/DS3 cross connect when both termination points of the E1/DS1/DS3 circuit are terminated on 9500 MPR equipment. The Service Profile on each E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen must be set to TDM2ETH for each E1/DS1/DS3 cross connect when one of the termination points of the E1/DS1/DS3 circuit are terminated on non-9500 MPR equipment, and the other equipment is MEF-8 compliant. Each E1/DS1/DS3 line to be cross connected must have a unique Flow ID number assigned to it on the respective E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen. Each E1/DS1/DS3 Flow ID must be added and applied to the ERP Instance on the Ethernet Ring Protection Configuration provisioning screen.
324
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Radio to Ring:
appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. For information about Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring, see Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring.
43.11 — Radio to Ring: Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.11.1 — Prerequisites Radio interfaces and Ring ports must be enabled on the respective card and Ethernet Ring Protection Configuration provisioning screens. When making a cross connection between radio card and Ethernet Ring port: •
Use the TDM2TDM service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured TDM2TDM.
•
Use the TDM2ETH service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured TDM2ETH.
appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and all other parallel radio ports. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. For information about Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring, see Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
325
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Ethernet to Ring:
43.12 — Ethernet to Ring: Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.12.1 — Prerequisites The Ethernet port (Core) and Ring port (destination) must be enabled on the respective Core card and Ethernet Ring Protection Configuration provisioning screens. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet port and all other parallel radio ports. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet and radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
43.13 — Ring to Ring: Ring to Ring cross-connections are required at all -through Ring nodes. Traffic flows (PDH to Ring, Radio to Ring, and ETH to Ring) which enter and exit the Ring, at nodes other than the node being provisioned, require Ring to Ring cross connection provisioned.
43.13.1 — Prerequisites Ring ports must be enabled on the Ethernet Ring Protection Configuration provisioning screens. When making a cross connection between Ethernet Ring port and Ethernet Ring port:
326
•
Use the TDM2TDM service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured TDM2TDM.
•
Use the TDM2ETH service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured TDM2ETH.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Ring to Ring:
appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and all other parallel radio ports. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. For information about Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring, see Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring.
43.13.1.1 — Icon shapes The shape of the icon identifies the port types available in the slot as follows: RADIO (Core/MPT-HC/MPT-HC-HQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM/ MSS-CORE), PDH (P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 cards), ETH (Ethernet) one of six connectors on the Core-E card, one of eight connectors on the EAS or CorEvo card, ETH LAG (Ethernet LAG), RADIO LAG (Radio LAG), or Ethernet Ring (Ring). Ethernet port involved in an Ethernet LAG are only present in the LAG/RING area (not in the Core, P8ETH or EASv2 area). Radio ports involved in an Ethernet Ring are not available for cross-connection. Crossconnections to these radio ports are made through the Ring icon in the LAG/RING area (not in the Radio area). Figure 43.3 — Cross-Connection port icons
43.13.2 — Icon colors The colors of the icons on the cross connections screen can be used to quickly determine the current state of the source and destination. The icon colors are defined as follows: •
White icon indicates the ports are enabled but are not currently cross connected.
•
Blue icon on RADIO and PDH (P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3) ports indicates the ports are disabled or fully cross connected.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
327
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Ring to Ring:
•
Blue icon on ETH (Ethernet) ports indicates the ports are disabled.
•
Green icon indicates the ports are cross connected.
•
Gray icon indicates the port is a spare port of a protection pair.
43.13.3 — Line colors The drag and drop line, the operator inserts, between icons indicates an electrical connection. The color of the line indicates type of data and direction. The line colors are defined as follows: •
Black Line - PDH (P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3) and SDH (SDHACC) to RADIO (Core/ MPT-HC/MPT-HC-HQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM/ Radio LAG), and SDH to LAG.
•
Blue Line - PDH (P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3) to ETH (Ethernet)
•
Red Line - RADIO (Core/MPT-HC/MPT-HC-HQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/ MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM/Radio LAG) to RADIO (Core/MPT-HC/MPT-HCHQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM/Radio LAG)
•
Green Line - RADIO (Core/MPT-HC/MPT-HC-HQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/ MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM/Radio LAG) to ETH (Ethernet)
•
Cyan Line - Ring cross-connections Figure 43.4 — Cross Connection: Line Color detail
328
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Mouse operation
43.14 — Mouse operation 43.14.1 — Single right-click icon A single right button click on an icon highlights (selects) the resource and opens up an information window. Figure 43.5 — Cross Connection: single right-click icon detail
43.14.2 — Double-click on the line A double-click on a line selects the resource and opens up an information window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
329
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Mouse operation Figure 43.6 — Cross Connection: double left-click line detail
43.14.3 — Double right-click on the line A double right button click on a line selects the resource and opens up an information window. Figure 43.7 — Cross Connection: Double right-click line detail
330
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
43.15 — Procedures Caution: Entering E1/DS1 cross-connections while the spare Core card is Active may affect existing E1/DS1 cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision E1/DS1 cross-connections while the main Core is Active.
This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Cross Connections screen
•
To provision a PDH to Radio Cross connection
•
To provision a PDH to Ethernet Cross Connection
•
To provision an SDH to Radio Cross connection
•
To provision an SDH to Ring Cross connection
•
To provision an SDH to LAG Cross connection
•
To provision an Ethernet to Radio Cross Connection
•
To provision Radio to Radio Cross Connection
•
To provision a PDH to Ring Cross Connection
•
To provision a Radio to Ring Cross Connection
•
To provision an Ethernet to Ring Cross Connection
•
To provision a Ring to Ring Cross Connection
To open the Cross Connections screen 1.
From the Main Menu Bar, select Configuration>Cross Connections. The Cross Connections window opens. See Figure 43.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
331
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.8 — Configuration Cross Connection window
2. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. To provision a PDH to Radio Cross connection 1.
Select PDH port and drag to draw line to RADIO port. PDH-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 43.9.
332
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.9 — PDH-RADIO Cross Connection
2.
On the PDH_RADIO pop-up, select check box for all Flow ID numbers to be cross connected.
3.
On the PDH_RADIO pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
5.
From the Connections tab, the PDH_RADIO cross-connection was entered correctly.
To provision a PDH to Ethernet Cross Connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the Ethernet port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select PDH port and drag to draw line to ETH port. PDH-ETH pop-up displays. See Figure 43.10.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
333
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.10 — PDH to Ethernet Cross Connection
3.
On the PDH-Eth pop-up, select Flow ID number from Flow ID drop-down list.
4.
Enter the destination MAC address where the PDH will be terminated in the MAC Address field.
Note: The first two digits of the destination MAC address for unprotected ports must be set to ‘unicast’ or ‘00’. The first two digits of the destination MAC address for 1+1 protected ports must be set to ‘multicast’ or ‘01’.
5.
On the PDH-ETH pop-up, click OK.
6.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
7.
From the Connections tab, the PDH-ETH cross-connection was entered correctly.
To provision an SDH to Radio Cross connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
1.
334
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
Select SDH port and drag to draw line to RADIO port. SDH-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 43.11. Figure 43.11 — SDH-RADIO Cross Connection
3.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RADIO pop-up, the Flow ID number to be cross connected.
4.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RADIO pop-up, click OK.
5.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
6.
From the Connections tab, the SDH_RADIO cross-connection was entered correctly.
To provision an SDH to Ring Cross connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
335
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select SDH port and drag to draw line to RING port. SDH-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 43.12. Figure 43.12 — SDH-RING Cross Connection
336
3.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RING pop-up, the ERP instance to be cross connected.
4.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RING pop-up, the Flow Id to be cross connected.
5.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RING pop-up, click OK.
6.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
7.
From the Connections tab, the SDH_RING cross-connection was entered correctly.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision an SDH to LAG Cross connection 1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. Select SDH port and drag to draw line to an L1 LAG on an EASv2 card. SDH-RADIO LAG pop-up displays. See Figure 43.13. Figure 43.13 — SDH to LAG configuration dialog
2.
On the STM-1_RADIO LAG pop-up, the Flow Id to be cross connected.
3.
On the STM-1_RADIO LAG pop-up, click OK. The completed cross-connection appears (see Figure 43.14). The priority of the SDH flows must be configured in the LAG; see ister SDH LAG.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
337
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.14 — Completed SDH to LAG cross-connection
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
5.
From the Connections tab, the SDH_RADIO LAG cross-connection was entered correctly.
To provision an Ethernet to Radio Cross Connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet port and all other parallel radio ports. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the Ethernet and radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select ETH port and drag to draw line to Radio port. RADIO-ETH pop-up displays. See Figure 43.15.
338
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.15 — Ethernet to Radio Cross Connection
3.
On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, enter Flow ID number in the Flow ID field.
Note: Ranging is ed for RADIO-ETH cross-connection entry.
4.
From the Profile drop-down menu, select TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH.
5.
Is the Profile configured with TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step 6.
b.
If no, go to step 7.
6.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select ADAPTIVE or DIFFERENTIAL.
7.
Enter the destination MAC address where the RADIO will be terminated in the MAC Address field.
Note: The first two digits of the destination MAC address for unprotected ports must be set to ‘unicast’ or ‘00’. The first two digits of the destination MAC address for 1+1 protected ports must be set to ‘multicast’ or ‘01’.
8.
On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, click OK.
9.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
10. From the Connections tab, the RADIO-ETH cross-connections were entered correctly.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
339
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision Radio to Radio Cross Connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and all other parallel radio ports. Additionally, port segregation should be provisioned between the radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select Radio port and drag and draw line to Radio port. RADIO-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 43.16.
Figure 43.16 — Radio (P8ETH) to Radio (P8ETH) Cross Connection
340
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.17 — Radio (P8ETH) to Radio (MPTACC) Cross Connection
3.
On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, enter Flow ID number for the far-end in the Flow ID field.
Note: Ranging is ed for RADIO-RADIO cross-connection entry.
4.
From the Profile drop-down menu, select TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH.
5.
Is the Profile configured with TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step 6.
b.
If no, go to step 7.
6.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select ADAPTIVE or DIFFERENTIAL.
7.
On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, click OK.
8.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
9.
From the Connections tab, the RADIO-RADIO cross-connections were entered correctly.
To provision a PDH to Ring Cross Connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
341
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select a PDH port and drag to draw a line to the RING port. PDH-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 43.18. Figure 43.18 — PDH to RING Cross Connection
3.
On the PDH-RING pop-up, select the ERP Instance to be cross connected.
4.
On the PDH-RING pop-up, select the check boxes for all Flow ID numbers to be cross-connected.
5.
On the PDH-RING pop-up, click OK.
6.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
7.
From the Connections tab, the PDH-RING cross-connection was entered correctly.
To provision a Radio to Ring Cross Connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
342
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and all other parallel radio ports. Additionally, port segregation should be provisioned between the radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select Radio port and drag and draw line to RING port. RADIO-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 43.19. Figure 43.19 — Radio to Ring Cross Connection
3.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to be cross connected.
4.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, select VLAN ID number from the Available VLANs field.
Note: Ranging is ed for RADIO-RING cross-connection entry.
5.
From the Service Profile drop-down menu, select TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH.
6.
Is the Profile configured with TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step 7.
b.
If no, go to step 8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
343
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 7.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select ADAPTIVE or DIFFERENTIAL.
8.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, click >>.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8 to provision additional Radio to Ring crossconnections on this ERP Instance.
10. Click OK. 11. On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply. 12. From the Connections tab, the RADIO-RING cross-connections were entered correctly. To provision an Ethernet to Ring Cross Connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet port and all other parallel radio ports. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the Ethernet and radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select ETH port and drag to draw line to Ring port. ETH-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 43.20.
344
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.20 — Ethernet to Ring Cross Connection
3.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to be cross connected.
4.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, select VLAN ID number in the Available VLANs field.
Note: Ranging is ed for ETH-RING cross-connection entry.
5.
From the Service Profile drop-down menu, select TDM2ETH.
6.
From the Clock Source drop-down menu, select ADAPTIVE or DIFFERENTIAL.
7.
Enter the destination MAC address where the Ethernet flow will be terminated in the MAC Address field.
Note: The first two digits of the destination MAC address for unprotected ports must be set to ‘unicast’ or ‘00’. The first two digits of the destination MAC address for 1+1 protected ports must be set to ‘multicast’ or ‘01’.
8.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, click >>.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8 to provision additional ETH to Ring crossconnections on this ERP Instance.
10. On the ETH-RING pop-up, click OK. 11. On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
345
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 12. From the Connections tab, the ETH-RING cross-connections were entered correctly. To provision a Ring to Ring Cross Connection 1.
Double left-click Ring port icon. RING-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 43.21. Figure 43.21 — Ring to Ring Cross Connection
2.
On the RING-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to be cross connected.
3.
On the RING-RING pop-up, select Flow ID number in the Available VLANs field.
Note: Ranging is ed for RADIO-RADIO cross-connection entry.
346
4.
From the Service Profile drop-down menu, select TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH.
5.
Is the Profile configured with TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step 6.
b.
If no, go to step 7.
6.
From the Clock Source drop-down menu, select ADAPTIVE or DIFFERENTIAL.
7.
On the RING-RING pop-up, click >>.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 8.
Repeat steps 3 through 7 to provision additional Ring to Ring crossconnections on this ERP Instance.
9.
On the RING-RING pop-up, click OK.
10. On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply. 11. From the Connections tab, the RING-RING cross-connections were entered correctly.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
347
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
348
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
44 — Deprovision cross connections
44.1 — Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to deprovision cross connections. Note: The figures in this chapter show the MSS-8 cross-connection screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
44.2 — General None.
44.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Cross Connections menu
•
To deprovision a PDH to Radio cross connect
•
To deprovision a PDH to Ethernet cross connection
•
To deprovision an SDH to Radio cross connect
•
To deprovision an SDH to LAG cross connection
•
To deprovision an Ethernet to Radio cross connection
•
To deprovision a Radio to Radio cross connection
•
To deprovision PDH to Ring cross connection
•
To deprovision a Radio to Ring cross connection
•
To deprovision an Ethernet to Ring cross connection
•
To deprovision a Ring to Ring cross connection
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
349
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To open the Cross Connections menu •
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Cross Connections. The Cross Connections window opens. See Figure 44.1. Figure 44.1 — Cross Connection window
To deprovision a PDH to Radio cross connect 1.
Double-click on the PDH to RADIO line. PDH-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 44.2.
350
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.2 — PDH-RADIO cross connection
2.
On the PDH_RADIO pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned.
3.
On the PDH_RADIO pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision a PDH to Ethernet cross connection 1.
Double-click on the PDH port to Eth port line. PDH-Eth pop-up displays. See Figure 44.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
351
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.3 — PDH to Ethernet cross connection
2.
On the PDH-Eth pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned.
3.
On the PDH-ETH pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision an SDH to Radio cross connect 1.
Double-click on the SDH to RADIO line. STM-1(OC-3)-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 44.4.
352
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.4 — STM-1(OC-3)-RADIO cross connection
2.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RADIO pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for the cross connect to be deprovisioned.
3.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RADIO pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision an SDH to LAG cross connection 1.
Double-click on the SDH to RADIO LAG line. STM-1-Radio LAG pop-up displays.
2.
On the STM-1-Radio LAG pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for the cross connect to be deprovisioned.
3.
On the STM-1-Radio LAG pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision an Ethernet to Radio cross connection 1.
Double-click on the ETH port to Radio port line. RADIO-ETH pop-up displays. See Figure 44.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
353
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.5 — Ethernet to Radio cross connection
2.
On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned.
3.
On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision a Radio to Radio cross connection 1.
Double-click on the Radio port to Radio port line. RADIO-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 44.6. Figure 44.6 — Radio to Radio cross connection
354
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned.
3.
On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision PDH to Ring cross connection 1.
Double-click on the PDH to RING port line. PDH-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 44.7. Figure 44.7 — PDH to RING cross connection
2.
On the PDH-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to deprovision cross connection.
3.
On the PDH-RING pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned.
4.
On the PDH-RING pop-up, click OK.
5.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision a Radio to Ring cross connection 1.
Double-click on the Radio to RING port line. RADIO-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 44.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
355
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.8 — Radio to Ring cross connection
2.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to deprovision cross connection.
3.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, select Crossconnected VLANs to be deprovisioned.
4.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, click <<.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to deprovision additional Radio to Ring crossconnections on this ERP Instance.
6.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, click OK.
7.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision an Ethernet to Ring cross connection 1.
Double-click on the ETH to RING port line. ETH-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 44.9.
356
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.9 — Ethernet to Ring cross connection
2.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to deprovision cross connection.
3.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, select Crossconnected VLANs to be deprovisioned.
4.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, click <<.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to deprovision additional ETH to Ring crossconnections on this ERP Instance.
6.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, click OK.
7.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision a Ring to Ring cross connection 1.
Double-click on the RING to RING port line. RING-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 44.10.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
357
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.10 — Ring to Ring cross connection
358
2.
On the RING-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to deprovision cross connection.
3.
On the RING-RING pop-up, select Crossconnected VLANs to be deprovisioned.
4.
On the RING-RING pop-up, click <<.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to deprovision additional Ring to Ring crossconnections on this ERP Instance.
6.
On the RING-RING pop-up, click OK.
7.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
45 — Provision port segregation/ connectivity
45.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision port segregation/connectivity and to view segregated ports for the 9500 MPR. Note: The Core graphics in this chapter show the Core-E card. The procedure is similar for a CorEvo card.
45.2 — General Port based VLAN connectivity allows the to manage which Ethernet ports (Core, EAS, MSS-O) and radio ports (EAS, MPTACC, and MSS-O) exchange Ethernet traffic among them. This capability allows the to establish virtual private domains. All port segregation/connectivity is bidirectional. Port segregation is provisioned by deselecting the appropriate connection check box. Default port connectivity is as follows: •
Every Core Ethernet port is connected to every other Core Ethernet port
•
Every Core Ethernet port is connected to all EAS Ethernet/radio ports
•
Every Core Ethernet port is connected to all MPTACC radio ports
•
Every P8ETH Ethernet/radio port is connected to every other P8ETH Ethernet/radio port
•
Every P8ETH Ethernet/radio port is connected to all MPTACC radio ports
•
Every EASv2 Ethernet/radio port is connected to every other EASv2 Ethernet/radio port
•
Every EASv2 Ethernet/radio port is connected to all MPTACC radio ports
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
359
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
•
Every MSS-O Ethernet/radio port is connected to every other MSS-O Ethernet/radio port
•
Every MPTACC radio port is connected to every other MPTACC radio port
Provisioning port segregation/connectivity between a Core card Ethernet port and P8ETH or EASv2 card is limited to all Ethernet ports on the P8ETH or EASv2 card. Provisioning port segregation/connectivity from a specific Core card Ethernet port to a specific P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port is not ed. Provisioning port segregation/connectivity between a P8ETH or EASv2 card Ethernet port is limited to the remaining Ethernet ports on the P8ETH or EASv2 card. Provisioning segregation/connectivity from a specific P8ETH or EASv2 port to a specific Core Ethernet port is not ed. Provisioning port segregation/connectivity between an MSS-O Ethernet port is limited to the remaining Ethernet ports on the MSS-O. When parallel radio paths are ed by the same MSS shelf, provision port segregation between the radio paths at both NEs to prevent traffic from one radio path being transmitted back to the originating site on one of the other parallel radio paths. When parallel radio paths are created using P8ETH MPT-HL/MPT-HLC or EASv2 MPT-HL/MPT-HLC ports, provision port segregation between the parallel MPT-HL/ MPT-HLC radio ports. For an example of the port segregation dialog box provisioned between P8ETH port 3.5 and port 3.8 (connectivity check box unchecked), see Figure 45.1. For an example of port segregation window with P8ETH port 3.5 and port 3.8 provisioned for port segregation, see Figure 45.2. When parallel radio paths are created using Core MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/HLS ports, provision port segregation between the parallel MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio ports. Example of the port segregation dialog box provisioned between Core-E port 1.5 and port 1.6 (connectivity check box unchecked), see Figure 45.3. Example of port segregation window with Core-E port 1.5 and port 1.6 provisioned for port segregation, see Figure 45.4. When parallel radio paths are created using MPTACC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XPHQAM ports, provision port segregation between the parallel MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/ XP-HQAM radio ports. Example of port segregation window with port 6.1 and port 6.2 provisioned for port segregation, see Figure 45.5. When making Ethernet cross connections to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should be provisioned between the Ethernet port and all other parallel radio ports. When making a radio cross connections to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should be provisioned between the radio port and all other parallel radio ports. Port segregation should be provisioned between Ethernet ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
360
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
Port segregation should be provisioned between radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned on both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
Figure 45.1 — Port Segregation dialog box, P8ETH port 3.5
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
361
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General Figure 45.2 — Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel P8ETH MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio ports
Figure 45.3 — Port Segregation dialog box, Core-E port 1.5
362
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 45.4 — Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel Core-E MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio ports
Figure 45.5 — Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel MPTACC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio ports
45.3 — Procedure 1.
Select Segregated Ports Icon. See Figure 45.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
363
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 45.6 — Segregated Ports icon
The Segregated Ports window opens. See Figure 45.7. Figure 45.7 — Segregated Ports window
2.
Port Segregation When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
3.
Double-click on the port icon to provision the port connectivity. Port window displays. See Figure 45.8 and Figure 45.9.
364
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 45.8 — Segregated Port - Port Provisioning pop-up
Figure 45.9 — Segregated port - Slot Provisioning dialog box
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
365
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 4.
Deselect all ports/slots which should be segregated from the selected port/ slot.
5.
Click OK. Segregated ports view updates, a dot-dash line is drawn between all ports/ slots that are segregated from the provisioned port/slot. See Figure 45.10 and Figure 45.11.
6.
Click Apply to save the changes.
Figure 45.10 — Segregated Port Window W/Slot 3 Port 2 segregated from Slot 4 ports
366
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 45.11 — Segregated Port Window W/Slot 4 segregated From Core-E port 5
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
367
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
368
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
46 — Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only)
46.1 — Purpose This chapter provides instructions and sequence for configuring AUX cross connections.
46.2 — General Two types of AUX Cross-Connections can be implemented: •
Local Service Channel Cross-Connection
•
Service Channels Cross-connection in -through
Note: Cross-Connection towards MPT In this release cross-connection of Service Channels towards a radio direction with MPT is not ed. The operator therefore will not have the possibility to select a radio direction with MPT for such cross-connection.
46.2.1 — Service Channels Cross-connection in -through Independently of the presence of the Auxiliary peripheral unit, it is always possible to cross-connect each individual radio Service Channel with a radio Service Channel of another radio direction, without any local termination.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
369
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
46.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To create an AUX Cross connection
•
To delete an AUX Cross connection
To create an AUX Cross connection 1.
Select in the New Cross-Connection area the first Termination Point (this can be a local service channel or a service channel in a radio link). Note: the local service channel must be first enabled in the AUX unit setting menu.
2.
Select the second Termination Point as shown in the example in Figure 46.1.
Note: The cross-connections are bi-directional.
Figure 46.1 — Auxiliary Cross Connections menu
3.
Click on Add. The new cross-connection will appear in the list (upper part of the screen as shown in Figure 46.2).
Note: The Apply button has not been implemented.
370
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 46.2 — New AUX Cross Connection
To delete an AUX Cross connection 1.
Select one Cross-Connection to be deleted from the list (as shown in Figure 46.3). Figure 46.3 — Delete an AUX Cross Connection
2.
Click on Delete.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
371
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The multiple deletion of the Cross-Connection is not possible.
Note: The Apply button has not been implemented.
372
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
47 — Provision Ethernet ports
47.1 — Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to provision physical Ethernet ports to interface external Ethernet equipment.
47.2 — General Core card provisioning requirements depend on how the Ethernet ports on the front of the Core-E, CorEvo, P8ETH, or EASv2 card are to be used. If Core Ethernet port #4 is being used to interface external Ethernet equipment and TMN (SNMP) will not be used to monitor and control the NE, then only the Ethernet Physical Interfaces needs to be provisioned. Port#4 TMN Interface must be disabled. If Core Ethernet port #4 is being used to transport TMN data, then Core Ethernet port #4 must be disabled.
47.2.1 — electrical Ethernet ports Electrical Ethernet ports on Core, P8ETH, and EASv2 cards and MSS-O Auto Negotiation, Flow Control, three data rates (10, 100, 1000 Mb/s), and half and full duplex port capabilities. Half duplex is not ed by CorEvo. Auto Negotiation can be provisioned: either ON (Enabled) or OFF (Disabled). Off is the default value. When Auto Negotiation is provisioned ON (Enabled), up to five speed and capabilities are ed simultaneously depending on the card and SFP in use. When Auto Negotiation is provisioned OFF (Disabled), only ONE speed and capability is ed. When Auto Negotiation is provisioned OFF, 1000 Mb/s full duplex is not ed. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
373
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
Flow Control can be provisioned: either ON (Enabled) or OFF (Disabled). Off is the default value. Only Asymmetric Flow Control (Tx only) is ed. PAUSE frames received on any port will be ignored and will not slow down egress traffic.
47.2.2 — optical Ethernet ports Optical Ethernet ports on Core, P8ETH, and EASv2 cards and MSS-O Auto Negotiation, Flow Control, 1000 Mb/s data rate, and full duplex port capability. Auto Negotiation can be provisioned: either ON (Enabled) or OFF (Disabled). On is the default value. Flow Control can be provisioned: either ON (Enabled) or OFF (Disabled). Off is the default value. Only Asymmetric Flow Control (Tx only) is ed. PAUSE frames received on any port will be ignored and will not slow down egress traffic.
47.2.3 — Provider bridge parameters If the NE is in Provider Bridge mode, Ethernet ports can be configured as NNI, UNI (portbased) or UNI (VLAN-based). Parameters apply for each port type: NNI - S-VLAN TPID •
The S-VLAN TPID selects the service instance associated to the port for untagged and C-VLAN priority-tagged frames. The port must be in the untagged set of the SVLAN.
UNI (port-based)- Port Priority or C-VLAN Priority •
The port priority represents the priority assigned to untagged frames ingressing the port.
UNI (VLAN-based)- C-VLAN/S-VLAN mapping and egress settings Ingress settings: •
374
The list of C-VLAN IDs represents the list of C-VLANs to be managed by the port. By default, the list is empty.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
Each C-VLAN ID must be mapped to an S-VLAN which represents the service instance used to carry the C-VLAN in the network. The S-VLAN must have the port in its untagged set. More than one C-VLAN can be associated to the same S-VLAN.
•
The Remove C-VLAN parameter can be set for each C-VLAN ID. This allows only the S-VLAN tag to be carried over the network when the association between the CVLAN and the VLAN-based service instance is one-to-one. The Remove C-VLAN parameter can only be set for one C-VLAN mapped to an S-VLAN ID.
•
The S-VLAN priority defines the priority of the tagged Ethernet frames ingressing the port. The priority can be inherited from the P of the C-VLAN tag or configured by the . The default is inherited.
Egress settings: •
The C-VLAN tag of Ethernet frames egressing the port can be removed, which declares the port as untagged. This parameter can only be set when the list of CVLAN IDs is not empty. The default Untag C-VLAN parameter is false. When the port is disabled, the parameter returns to the default value.
•
For each S-VLAN ID having the port in its member set, the C-VLAN ID of the CVLAN tag to be added to Ethernet frames egressing the port can be configured. This allows a C-VLAN tag to be added to Ethernet frames carried over the network with only the S-VLAN tag, when the association between the C-VLAN and the VLANbased service instance is one-to-one. The default value is 0, which means that no association to an S-VLAN is in place and no C-VLAN tag will be added. When the port is disabled, the parameter returns to the default value.
Note: Some graphics may not match the current release.
Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
47.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To select the card to provision Ethernet port
•
To enable an Ethernet port
•
To disable an Ethernet port
•
To provision Ethernet port capabilities parameters
•
To provision Ethernet port VLAN configuration parameters
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
375
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To provision synchronous Ethernet operation mode parameters
•
To provision Hold off timer for Core Ethernet ports in a Ring
•
To provision provider bridge parameters
•
To provision rate limiting by port
•
To provision Ethernet port storm control
•
To provision rate limiting by VLAN
•
To provision Per-VLAN Per-CoS (Class of Service) rate limiting
•
To delete Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiting
To select the card to provision Ethernet port 1.
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1, MSS/P8ETH slot #n, MSS/EASv2 slot #n or MSS/CORE slot #1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the card in blue on the graphical representation of the shelf in the resource list area. The radios connected to the card are displayed in the resource list area. For an example of the Core-E card, see Figure 47.1.
376
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.1 — 9500 MPR equipment tab: Core-E card selected
2.
Double-click on the blue CORE-Main (Core-E), P8ETH (EAS) or EASv2 Card or on the MSS-O. The Core-E, EAS, or MSS CORE Main View displays.
3.
Select the Ethernet Physical Settings tab. For an example of the Core-E Main View, see Figure 47.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
377
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.2 — Core-E main view: Ethernet Physical Interface Settings tab (ports 1 to 4)
To enable an Ethernet port 1.
378
Enable Ethernet port (electrical or optical) using the following procedure. See Figure 47.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.3 — Enable/disable Core-E/P8ETH/EASv2/MSS-O Ethernet port
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to enable (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Settings tab.
c.
Enable Port Status, select Enabled check box (checked).
d.
Click on the Port Status Apply button.
To disable an Ethernet port 1.
Disable Ethernet port (electrical or optical) using the following procedure. See Figure 47.3. a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to disable (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Settings tab.
c.
Disable Port Status, select Enabled check box (not checked).
d.
Click on the Port Status Apply button.
To provision Ethernet port capabilities parameters 1.
Provision Ethernet port capabilities parameters to correspond to the link partner using the following procedure. See Figure 47.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
379
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.4 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet physical interface
a
b
c f d e
g 22914
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Settings tab.
c.
Configure a port label if needed.
d.
Select Auto Negotiation Status: enabled (checked) or disabled (unchecked). For 10 Gb/s on CorEvo-10G, Auto Negotiation must be disabled.
e.
Select Flow Control Enabled: enabled (checked) or disabled (unchecked). Note: For electrical Ethernet Ports, available d capabilities for the port are dependent upon the Auto Negotiation Status selected. When Auto Negotiation is disabled, only one speed and capability is allowed. Additionally, only 10 or 100 Mb/s, half or full duplex, speed and capability are ed. Half duplex is not available with the CorEvo card. When Auto Negotiation is enabled, all five speed and capabilities are ed (10 and 100 Mb/s, half or full duplex, and/or 1000 Mb/s full duplex).
380
f.
For electrical Ethernet ports, select all d Capability that apply.
g.
Click on the Apply button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision Ethernet port VLAN configuration parameters 1.
Provision Ethernet port VLAN Configuration parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.5.
Figure 47.5 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet port VLAN configuration parameters
a
b
c
d
f
g
h 22915
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Settings tab.
c.
Configure a port label if needed.
d.
Provision VLAN Configuration, select Acceptable Frame Types: it all or it tagged only.
e.
Acceptable frame type selected? a.
If it all, go to step b.
b.
If it tagged only, go to step h.
f.
From the Port VLAN ID drop-down menu, select Port VLAN ID: 1 - 4080.
g.
From the Priority drop-down menu, select Priority: 0 - 7.
h.
Click on the Apply button.
To provision synchronous Ethernet operation mode parameters 1.
Provision Ethernet port Synchronous Ethernet Operation Mode parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
381
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: Synchronous Ethernet Operation Mode is ed by Ethernet ports configured on the Core-E card, CorEvo card, EASv2 card, or MSS-O.
Figure 47.6 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O synchronous Ethernet operation mode
a
b
c
d f
g
h 22916
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#6).
b.
Select Settings tab.
c.
Configure a port label if needed.
d.
Provision Synchronous Ethernet Operation Mode: select Synchronous or Not-Synchronous.
e.
Synchronous Ethernet Operation Mode selected? a.
If Synchronous and electrical port, go to step f.
b.
If Synchronous and optical port, go to step g.
c.
If Not-Synchronous, go to step h.
f.
Provision Synch-E role, select Synch-E Master or Synch-E Slave.
g.
Provision SSM reception and transmission, select enabled (checked) or disabled (unchecked).
h.
Click on the Apply button.
To provision Hold off timer for Core Ethernet ports in a Ring
382
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
To provision Hold off timer for Core Ethernet ports in a Ring Provision the Hold Off timer parameter using the following procedure. See Figure 47.7.
Note: The Hold Off parameter is ed by optical Ethernet ports configured on the Core card that are part of a Ring. The timer is fixed to 500 ms.
Figure 47.7 — Provision the Hold Off parameter
a b
c
d
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #5/#6).
b.
Select Settings tab.
c.
Select Hold Off Enabled: enabled (checked) or disabled (unchecked).
d.
Click on the Apply button.
To provision provider bridge parameters 1.
Provision Provider Bridge parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
383
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.8 — Provision provider bridge
a
b
c d c d c d
e 23193
384
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#6).
b.
Select Provider Bridge tab.
c.
Choose the port type: NNI, UNI (port-based), or UNI (VLAN-based).
d.
Configure port type parameters: •
for NNI, choose the S-VLAN TPID from the drop-down menu:
•
for UNI (port-based), choose Port Priority or C-VLAN Priority:
•
for UNI (VLAN-based), configure C-VLAN/S-VLAN mapping and egress settings, see Figure 47.9.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.9 — Provisioned UNI (VLAN-based) port
e.
Click on the Apply button.
To provision rate limiting by port 1.
Provision Ethernet Port Rate Limiter parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.10.
Caution: When a Port Rate Limiter is activated in conjunction with a VLAN Rate Limiter, the VLAN Rate Limiter applies to Ethernet frames that meet the Port Rate Limiter parameters. Caution: If the port is involved in a mixed fiber-microwave Ring, the rate limiter may have traffic impact.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
385
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.10 — Provision Core/EAS rate limiting by port
a
b c d e g h i
f
j 22917
386
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Policy & Translation tab.
c.
Provision Ingress Port Rate Limiter mode? a.
To enable, select Ingress Enabled (checked), then go to step d.
b.
To disable, select Ingress Enabled (unchecked), then go to step f.
c.
If no, go to step g.
d.
Select the Ingress CIR value (Kbit/s).
e.
Select the Ingress Max Burst size (Kbytes).
f.
Click on the Apply button.
g.
Provision Egress Port Rate Limiter mode? a.
To enable, select Egress Enabled (checked), then go to step h.
b.
To disable, select Egress Enabled (unchecked), then go to step j.
h.
Select the Egress CIR value (Kbit/s).
i.
Select the Egress Max Burst size (Kbit/s).
j.
Click on the Apply button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision Ethernet port storm control 1.
Provision Ethernet Port Storm Control parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.11.
Figure 47.11 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet port storm control
a
b
c d e f
g 22918
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Policy & Translation tab.
c.
Provision Storm Control Ingress mode? a.
To enable, select Enabled (checked), then go to step d.
b.
To disable, select Enabled (unchecked), then go to step g.
d.
Select maximum Unknown Unicast Rate (Frames/s).
e.
Select maximum Multicast Rate (Frames/s).
f.
Select maximum Broadcast Rate (Frames/s).
g.
Click on the Apply button.
To provision rate limiting by VLAN 1.
Provision Rate Limiting by VLAN parameters using the following procedure.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
387
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Caution: When a VLAN Rate Limiter is activated in conjunction with a Port Rate Limiter, the VLAN Rate Limiter applies to Ethernet frames that meet the Port Rate Limiter parameters. Caution: If the port is involved in a mixed fiber-microwave Ring, the rate limiter may have traffic impact.
See Figure 47.12 for the following procedure: Figure 47.12 — Provision ingress rate limiting by VLAN
a
b
c d
e
f 22919
388
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Policy & Translation tab.
c.
Provision VLAN Rate Limiter - Ingress mode? a.
To enable, select VLAN Enabled (checked), then go to step d.
b.
To disable, select VLAN Enabled (unchecked), then go to step f.
d.
VLAN Select the Ingress CIR value (Kbit/s).
e.
Select the Ingress Max Burst size (Kbit/s).
f.
Click on the Apply button. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision Per-VLAN Per-CoS (Class of Service) rate limiting 1.
Provision Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.13.
Caution: When a Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter is activated in conjunction with a Port Rate Limiter, the Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter must apply to Ethernet frames that meet the Port Rate Limiter parameters. Figure 47.13 — Provision Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiting
a
b
e
f
d
g
c
h 23045
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter tab.
c.
Click on the Create button.
d.
Select the VLAN ID from the VLAN drop-down menu.To identify the rate limiter by the P only, select Any.
e.
Select the P from the P drop-down menu.
f.
Select the Ingress CIR size (Kbit/s) [0 Kbit/s to 1Gbit/s].
Select the Ingress Max Burst (KByte) [4 KBytes to 16 KBytes, in steps of powers of 2]. Click on the Apply button. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
389
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To delete Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiting 1.
Delete Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.14. Figure 47.14 — Delete Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiting
a
b
c
d
e 23044
390
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter tab.
c.
Select a Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiter.
d.
Click on the Delete button. The rate limiter is deleted.
e.
Click on the Apply button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
48 — Provision Ethernet Features
48.1 — Overview To provision Ethernet Features, Alcatel-Lucent. The following Ethernet features are available: •
Access Control List
•
Out of Range VLAN swap
•
VLAN remarking
•
VLAN swap
48.1.1 — Access Control List Access Control List allows a to restrict MAC addresses allowed in the network. Access Control List is configured via configuration file. Enabling Access Control List feature automatically drops all MAC addresses which are not specifically provisioned by the .
48.1.2 — Out of Range VLAN swap Out of Range VLAN swap allows transport of VLANs outside the ed range (40814094). The out of range VLAN ID is swapped to one ed by the system on ingress and vice versa. Out of Range VLAN swap is configured via configuration file. VLAN swapping is ed on all P8ETH, EASv2 and Core Ethernet ports and all radio ports except MPT-HL/HLC radio ports.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
391
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
48.1.3 — VLAN remarking VLAN remarking allows packets to be remarked specifying a different priority level in the packet header. VLAN remarking is configured via configuration file. ed on all P8ETH, EASv2 and Core Ethernet ports and all radio ports except MPT-HL/HLC radio ports.
48.1.4 — VLAN swap VLAN swap allows the inner and outer tags to be swapped on double tagged packets. The inner tag becomes the outer tag and vice versa. VLAN swap is configured via configuration file. VLAN swapping is ed on all P8ETH, EASv2 and Core Ethernet ports and all radio ports except MPT-HL/HLC radio ports.
392
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
49 — Provision equipment port
49.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision equipment ports.
49.2 — General While provisioning PDH circuits (E1, DS1 or DS3) the service profile must be provisioned either TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH. Provision the PDH circuit TDM2TDM when both termination points of the PDH circuit are terminated on 9500 MPR equipment. Provision the PDH circuit TDM2ETH when one of the termination points of the PDH circuit is terminated on non-9500 MPR equipment, and the other equipment is MEF-8 compliant. TDM clock source for E1/DS1 and DS3 ports provisioned TDM2TDM differential clock recovery. TDM clock source for E1/DS1 and DS3 ports provisioned TDM2ETH either adaptive or differential clock recovery. All ports on a E1/DS1 and DS3 card must be provisioned to the same type of clock recovery, either adaptive or differential. While provisioning SDH circuits (SDHACC) the service profile must be provisioned SDH2SDH. 10 G/bit SFPs can be provisioned in CorEvo-10G ports 5 and 6 if a license is present. Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
393
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Prerequisites
49.3 — Prerequisites Core, P32E1DS1, DS3 (P2E3DS3), STM-1/OC-3 (SDHACC), EASv2, or P8ETH cards must be enabled on the MSS shelf slots prior to provisioning equipment ports.
49.4 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To provision Core SFP port
•
To provision Sync-In/Out SFP on CorEvo
•
To provision Sync-In/Out SFP on MSS-1
•
To provision an EAS card SFP port
•
To provision MSS-O SFP port
•
To provision an E1 P32E1DS1 port
•
To provision E1 node timing
•
To provision a DS1 P32E1DS1 port
•
To provision DS3 P2E3DS3 port
•
Provision SDH port
To provision Core SFP port
394
1.
Select Slot #1 MSS/CORE-Main in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MSS/CORE card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 49.1 for Core-E or Figure 49.4 for CorEvo.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.1 — Resource list area: Core-E SFP slot selected
3.
From the Port Usage drop-down menu, select SFP. See Figure 49.2. Figure 49.2 — Provision Core-E SFP port
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
395
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The Core SFP port will populate selected Port #. See Figure 49.3. Note: Core Ports 1-4 and ports selected SFP are ready for provisioning.
Figure 49.3 — Provisioned Core-E SFP port
5.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the Core SFP Ethernet port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/ connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
To provision Sync-In/Out SFP on CorEvo
396
1.
Select Slot #1 MSS/CORE-Main in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MSS/CORE card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 49.4 for an example showing CorEvo.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.4 — Resource list area: CorEvo SFP slot selected
3.
From the Port Usage drop-down menu in port 7 or 8, select SYNC-IO. See Figure 49.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
397
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.5 — Provision CorEvo Sync-In/Out SFP port
4.
Click Apply. The SFP is ready to be configured as Sync-In and Sync-Out ports. See ister synchronization.
To provision Sync-In/Out SFP on MSS-1
398
1.
Select Slot #1 MSS/CORE in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MSS-1 in blue in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 49.6 for an example.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.6 — Resource list area: MSS-1 selected
3.
From the Port Usage drop-down menu in port 5 or 6, select SYNC-IO. See Figure 49.7. Figure 49.7 — Provision MSS-1 Sync-In/Out SFP port
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
399
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The SFP is ready to be configured as Sync-In and Sync-Out ports. See ister synchronization. To provision an EAS card SFP port 1.
Select the slot where the card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the P8ETH or EASv2 card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 49.8. Figure 49.8 — Resource list area: P8ETH selected
3.
400
From the Port # (5-8) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type SFP. See Figure 49.9 for P8ETH and Figure 49.10 for EASv2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.9 — Provision P8ETH SFP ports
Figure 49.10 — Provision EASv2 SFP ports
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
401
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The SFP port will populate the selected port #. See Figure 49.11. Note: Ports 1-4 and ports selected SFP are ready for provisioning.
Figure 49.11 — Provisioned P8ETH SFP port
5.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the SFP Ethernet port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desired. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
To provision MSS-O SFP port 1.
Select the MSS/CORE slot in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Port # 4 Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type SFP.
4.
Click Apply. The SFP port will populate port 4.
5.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the SFP Ethernet port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desired. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
To provision an E1 P32E1DS1 port
402
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
Click on the P32E1DS1 card or MSS/E1 in the resource list area. The PDH Main View displays. See Figure 49.12. Figure 49.12 — PDH main view (ETSI market)
Resource Tree Area: displays the tributary ports sorted by the channel number
Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in the tree area
Resource Detail Area: displays through tab windows, the selected object’s properties in list area. This area performs the available functions for involved resource
22998
2.
Provision E1 port using the following procedure: a.
Select Settings tab. The Settings tab displays.
b.
Select E1 port#n to provision: 01 to 32 for a P32E1DS1 card or 01 to 16 for an MSS-1.
c.
Configure a label if needed.
d.
From the Signal Mode drop-down menu, select signal mode type: Unframed, Framed, or Disabled.
e.
Enter the unique Flow ID number.
f.
From the Service Profile drop-down menu, select service profile type, TDM2TDM or TDM2Eth.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
403
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures g.
E1 port service profile TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step h.
b.
If no, go to step k. All ports on an E1 card must be provisioned to the same method of clock recovery, either adaptive or differential. After the first port on a card is provisioned, all remaining ports on the card will default to the clock recovery method selected on the first port.
h.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select TDM Clock Source: Adaptive or Differential.
i.
Enter the unique ECID Tx value.
j.
Enter the unique ECID Rx value.
k.
Click Apply. The PDH Main View updates adding the provisioned E1 port to the resource list area.
To provision E1 node timing 1.
From the PDH main view, click on the Slot icon (as shown in Figure 0.1) to access the Node Timing menu. Node Timing: timing from the network clock as defined in G.8261. The enabling of the Node Timing is applied to all E1s of the PDH unit. By enabling the Node Timing the E1 streams in Rx side are retimed at the output with the network element clock.
To provision a DS1 P32E1DS1 port 1.
404
Click on the P32E1DS1 DS1 card or MSS/DS1 in the resource list area. See Figure 49.13.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.13 — Resource list area: P32E1DS1 selected
The PDH Main View displays. See Figure 49.14. 2.
Provision DS1 port using the following procedure: a.
Select Settings tab. The Settings tab displays.
b.
Select DS1 port#n to provision: 01 to 32 for a P32E1DS1 card or 01 to 16 for an MSS-1.
c.
Configure a label if needed.
d.
From the Signal Mode drop-down menu, select signal mode type: Unframed, Framed SF, or Framed ESF.
e.
Select appropriate Line Coding radio button: AMI or B8ZS.
f.
Enter the Line Length (distance to cross-connect): 0 to 655.
g.
Enter the unique Flow ID number.
h.
From the Service Profile drop-down menu, select service profile type, TDM2TDM or TDM2Eth.
i.
DS1 port service profile TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step j.
b.
If no, go to step m. All ports on a DS1 card must be provisioned to the same method of clock recovery, either adaptive or differential. After the first port on a card is provisioned, all remaining ports on the card will
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
405
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures default to the clock recovery method selected on the first port. j.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select TDM Clock Source: Adaptive or Differential.
k.
Enter the unique ECID Tx value.
l.
Enter the unique ECID Rx value.
m.
Click Apply. Figure 49.14 — Provision P32E1DS1 port
b
a d c f
j h k
g
l
e
m 23047
The PDH Main View updates adding the provisioned DS1 port to the resource list area. See Figures Figure 49.15 and Figure 49.16.
406
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.15 — Provisioned P32E1DS1 TDM2TDM DS1 port
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
407
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.16 — Provisioned P32E1DS1 DS1 TDM2ETH port
To provision DS3 P2E3DS3 port 1.
408
Click on the P2E3DS3 DS3 card in the resource list area. See Figure 49.17.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.17 — Resource list area: P2E3DS3 selected
The PDH Main View displays. See Figure 49.18. 2.
Provision DS3 port using the following procedure: See Figure 49.18 for the following steps: a.
Select Settings tab. The Settings tab displays.
b.
Select DS3 port#n to provision: 01 to 02.
c.
Configure a label if needed.
d.
From the Signal Mode drop-down menu, select signal mode type: Unframed or Framed.
e.
From the Service Profile drop-down menu, select service profile type, TDM2TDM or TDM2Eth.
f.
Enter the Line Length (distance to cross-connect): 0 to 450.
g.
From the AIS Signal Type drop-down menu, select AIS signal type: AllOnes or BlueSignal.
h.
Enter the unique Flow ID number.
i.
DS3 port service profile TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step j
b.
If no, go to step m All ports on a DS3 card must be provisioned to the same method of clock recovery, either adaptive or differential. After the first
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
409
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures port on a card is provisioned, all remaining ports on the card will default to the clock recovery method selected on the first port. j.
From the Payload Size drop-down menu, select payload size: 1024.
k.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select TDM Clock Source: Adaptive or Differential.
l.
Enter the unique ECID Tx value.
m.
Enter the unique ECID Rx value.
n.
Click Apply. Figure 49.18 — Provision P2E3DS3 DS3 port
b
a d c
j
f g
k e l
h
m
n 23046
The PDH Main View updates adding the provisioned DS3 port to the resource list area. See Figure 49.19 and Figure 49.20.
410
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.19 — Provisioned P2E3DS3 TDM2TDM DS3 port
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
411
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.20 — Provisioned P2E3DS3 TDM2ETH DS3 port
Provision SDH port
412
1.
Click on the SDHACC OC-3 card in the resource list area.
2.
Select the Settings tab. See Figure 49.21.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.21 — Resource list area: SDHACC selected
3.
From the SFP # (1-2) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type SFP-O or SFP-E. See Figure 49.21.
4.
Click Apply. The SDHACC SFP port will populate selected port #. See Figure 49.22.
Note: SDHACC Ports 1-2 and ports selected SFP are ready for provisioning.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
413
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.22 — Provisioned SDHACC SFP port
5.
Click on the SDHACC OC-3 card in the resource detail area. The SDH Main View displays. See Figure 49.23.
414
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.23 — Provision SDHACC OC-3 port
b a e
c d i f
g h
k
j
n
l
m
23063
6.
Provision OC-3 port using the following procedure: See Figure 49.23 for the following steps:
Note: When provisioning OC-3 ports for 1+1 EPS Protection, provision the main ports. Then only enable the spare ports. Then re-provision 1+1 EPS protection.
Note: It is not possible to enable a port while 1+1 EPS protection is enabled. To enable an OC-3 port after 1+1 EPS protection is provisioned, the operator must disable 1+1 EPS protection. Enable the new port. Then re-provision 1+1 EPS protection.
a.
Select the Settings tab. The Settings tab displays.
b.
Select Port#s.n to provision: Port#s.1 or Port#s.2.
c.
From the Port Status, select Enabled check box (checked).
d.
Click on the Apply button.
e.
From the Label field, enter the Label, up to fifteen characters.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
415
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures f.
For optical SFP, From the Auto Laser Shutdown drop-down menu, select Enabled, Disabled Forced On, or Disabled Forced Off.
g.
From the J0 Configuration pane, from the Mode drop-down menu, select Disabled, SixteenBytesFrame, or OneRepeatedByte.
h.
For SixteenBytesFrame, or OneRepeatedByte, from the Expected Receiving Value field, enter the expected J0 value.
i.
Click on the Apply button.
j.
Enter the unique Flow ID number (2-4080).
k.
From the Buffer Depth drop-down menu, select Low or High. Note: If the port will be part of a cross-connection to a LAG, select High buffer depth.
l.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select Differential or Node Timing.
m.
From the Service Profile field, SDH2SDH.
n.
Click on the Apply button.
The SDH Main View updates adding the provisioned OC-3 port to the resource list area. See Figure 49.24 and Figure 49.25.
416
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.24 — Provisioned SDHACC optical OC-3 port
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
417
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.25 — Provisioned SDHACC electrical OC-3 port
7.
Provision STM-1 SDHCHANN port Click on the SDHCHANN OC-3 card in the resource detail area. The SDH Main View displays. See Figure 49.26.
418
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.26 — SDHCHANN main view
8.
Provision the STM-1 port using the following procedure: a.
Put a check mark in the Port Status box to enable the STM-1.
b.
Set the Auto Laser Shutdown: Enabled/Disabled ForcedOn/Disabled ForcedOff. This field will appear only if the Settings tab- of the STM-1 unit the optical SFP has been selected.
c.
Select the Clock Source.
d.
Enable the J0, if required, by selecting one of the two modes (SixteenBytesFrame/OneRepeatedByte) in the Expected Receiving Value field and enter the expected value and in the Sending J0 field select one of the two modes and enter the value to be transmitted. Note: byte J0 is only read, no Regeneration section Termination is done.
e.
Click on Apply.
f.
Enable, if required, the E1 Node Timing Configuration. The Node Timing is the timing from the network clock as defined in G.8261. The enabling of the Node Timing is applied to all E1s of the unit. By enabling the Node Timing the E1 streams in Rx side are retimed at the output with the network element clock.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
419
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures g.
420
Configure all the E1s to be mapped/unmapped in the STM-1. The E1s are identified by a progressive number from #1 to #63, but also by the standard SDH identification (x-y-z).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
50 — Deprovision equipment ports
50.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to deprovision equipment ports. Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves. The Core graphics in this chapter show the Core-E card. The procedure is similar for a CorEvo card.
50.2 — Prerequisites Cross-connections associated with the equipment port must be disabled prior to deprovisioning the equipment port.
50.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To deprovision a Core SFP port
•
To deprovision a P8ETH or EASv2 card SFP port
•
To deprovision an E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 port
•
To deprovision a DS3 P2E3DS3 port
•
To deprovision an SDH port
To deprovision a Core SFP port 1.
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1/2 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MSS/Core card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
421
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 50.1. Figure 50.1 — Resource list area: Core-E SFP slot selected
3.
422
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 50.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.2 — Provisioned Core-E SFP Port #5
4.
Click Apply. The selected Core slot SFP port will display empty. See Figure 50.3.
Note: Core Port will not deprovision if the port has any cross-connections associated with the port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
423
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.3 — Deprovisioned Core-E SFP Port#5
To deprovision a P8ETH or EASv2 card SFP port
424
1.
Select the slot where the card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the P8ETH or EASv2 card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 50.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.4 — Resource list area: P8ETH selected
3.
From the Port # (5-8) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type Empty. See Figure 50.5 for P8ETH and Figure 50.6 for EASv2. Figure 50.5 — Provisioned P8ETH ports
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
425
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.6 — Provisioned EASv2 ports
4.
Click Apply. The SFP port will display Empty. See Figure 50.7.
Note: Ports 5-8 will not deprovision if the port has any cross-connections associated with the port.
426
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.7 — Deprovisioned P8ETH SFP port
5.
Deprovision MSS-O SFP port Select the MSS/CORE slot in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue.
6.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
7.
From the Port # 4 Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type Empty.
8.
Click Apply. The SFP port will display Empty.
To deprovision an E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 port 1.
Click on the P32E1DS1 card in the resource list area. See Figure 50.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
427
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.8 — Resource list area: P32E1DS1 selected
The PDH Main View displays. 2.
428
Select the Settings tab. See Figure 50.9.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.9 — Provisioned P32E1DS1 DS1
See Figure 50.10 for the following steps: 3.
Deprovision E1/DS1 port using the following procedure: a.
Select DS1 port number to deprovision: 01 to 32.
b.
From the Signal Mode drop-down menu, select signal mode type: Disabled.
c.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
429
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.10 — Deprovision P32E1DS1 DS1 port
Deprovisioned port will display Disabled. See Figure 50.11. Note: P32E1DS1 Ports will not deprovision if the port has a cross-connection associated with the port.
430
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.11 — Deprovisioned P32E1DS1 DS1 port
To deprovision a DS3 P2E3DS3 port 1.
Click on the P2E3DS3 DS3 card in the resource list area. See Figure 50.12.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
431
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.12 — Resource list area: P2E3DS3 selected
The Alarms&Settings screen displays. 2.
432
Select Settings tab. See Figure 50.13.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.13 — Provisioned P2E3DS3
3.
Deprovision DS3 port using the following procedure: See Figure 50.14 for the following steps: a.
Select DS3 port number to deprovision, 01 or 02.
b.
From the Signal Mode drop-down menu, select signal mode type: Disabled.
c.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
433
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.14 — Deprovision P2E3DS3 port
Deprovisioned port will display Disabled. See Figure 50.15. Note: P2E3DS3 Ports will not deprovision if the port has a cross-connection associated with the port.
434
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.15 — Deprovisioned P2E3DS3 ports
To deprovision an SDH port Note: When an SDH port with performance monitoring active is disabled, the elapsed time of the performance monitoring will be stopped until the port is enabled again.
1.
Click on the SDHACC OC-3 card in the resource list area. See Figure 50.16.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
435
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.16 — Resource list area: SDHACC selected
The SDH Main View window displays. 2.
436
Select Settings tab. See Figure 50.17.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.17 — Provisioned SDHACC
3.
Deprovision OC-3 port using the following procedure: See Figure 50.17 for the following steps: a.
Select OC-3 port number to deprovision, Port#n.1 or Port#n.2.
b.
From the Port Status field, select Enabled check box (unchecked).
c.
Click on the Apply button.
Deprovisioned port will display Disabled. See Figure 50.18. Note: SDHACC Ports will not deprovision if the port has a cross-connection associated with the port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
437
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.18 — Deprovisioned SDHACC ports
438
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
51 — Enable equipment
51.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to enable cards into the system. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for information about ed equipment. See the Release Notice for information about ed radios by interface type. Note: The Core graphics in this chapter show the Core-E card. The procedure is similar for a CorEvo card.
51.2 — Prerequisites Communication with the MSS shelf using the craft terminal must be established.
51.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To enable a spare Core card
•
To enable a P8ETH card
•
To enable an EASv2 card
•
To enable an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver card on P8ETH or EASv2 card
•
To enable an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver on Core
•
To enable an E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 card
•
To enable a DS3 P2E3DS3 card
•
To enable an SDH card
•
To enable an MPT access card
•
To enable MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on MPTACC card
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
439
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To enable an MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on Core
•
To enable an MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on P8ETH or EASv2 card
•
To enable an auxiliary card
•
To enable an MPT-HLS radio
•
To enable an MPT-HLS fan
•
To enable a Fan Unit
To enable a spare Core card 1.
To enable a spare Core card Select MSS-n/Slot#2 in the resource tree area. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights slot #2 in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.1. Figure 51.1 — Select slot 2 to enable spare Core-E
440
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select CORE-ENH or CorEvo. See Figure 51.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.2 — Select spare Core-E equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The spare Core-E card will populate slot #2. See Figure 51.3. Protection informations updating window opens.
5.
Click OK.
6.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the Core Ethernet ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/ connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
441
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.3 — Spare Core-E enabled
7.
Click on the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
To enable a P8ETH card 1.
442
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P8ETH card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.4 — Select slot to enable P8ETH
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select P8ETH. See Figure 51.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
443
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.5 — Select P8ETH equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The P8ETH card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 51.6. Figure 51.6 — P8ETH enabled
444
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 5.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the P8ETH Ethernet ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/ connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
To enable an EASv2 card 1.
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the EASv2 card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.7. Figure 51.7 — Select slot to enable EASv2
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EASv2. See Figure 51.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
445
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.8 — Select EASv2 equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The EASv2 card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 51.6.
446
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.9 — EASv2 enabled
5.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the EASv2 Ethernet ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/ connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
To enable an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver card on P8ETH or EASv2 card 1.
Select the slot where the card is equipped to MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 51.10.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
447
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.10 — Select slot associated with MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver to enable
3.
From the Port # (5-8) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HL/MPT-HLC. See Figure 51.11. Figure 51.11 — Select MPT-HL/MPT-HLC equipment type
4. 448
Click Apply. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The MPT-HL/MPT-HLC port will populate selected port #. See Figure 51.12. Figure 51.12 — Enabled MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver
5. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should be provisioned between the P8ETH or EASv2 MPT-HL/MPT-HLC port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. To enable an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver on Core 1.
Select the slot where the MSS/CORE card is equipped to the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the Core card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 51.13.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
449
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.13 — Resource list area: Core-E selected
3.
From the Port # (5-6) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HL/MPT-HLC. See Figure 51.14. Figure 51.14 — Provision Core-E MPT-HL/MPT-HLC ports
450
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 4.
Click Apply. The Core MPT-HL/MPT-HLC port will populate the selected port #. See Figure 51.15. Figure 51.15 — Enabled MPT-HL/MPT-HLC on Core-E
5. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should be provisioned between the Core MPT-HL/MPT-HLC port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. To enable an E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 card 1.
To enable an E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 card Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P32E1DS1 card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.16.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
451
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.16 — Select slot to enable P32E1DS1
452
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select P32E1DS1 or P32E1DS1_A. See Figure 51.17.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.17 — Select P32EDS1 equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The P32E1DS1 card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 51.18. Figure 51.18 — P32E1DS1 enabled
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
453
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To enable a DS3 P2E3DS3 card 1.
To enable a DS3 P2E3DS3 card Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P2E3DS3 card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.19. Figure 51.19 — Select slot to enable P2E3DS3
454
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select P2E3DS3_A. See Figure 51.20.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.20 — Select P2E3DS3 equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The P2E3DS3 card will populate selected slot #. See Figure P2E3DS3 enabled.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
455
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.21 — P2E3DS3 enabled
To enable an SDH card 1.
456
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the SDHACC or SDHCHANN card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.22.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.22 — Select slot to enable SDHACC or SDHCHANN
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select SDHACC (shown in the examples) or SDHCHANN (ETSI market only). See Figure 51.23.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
457
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.23 — Select SDHACC equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 51.24.
458
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.24 — SDHACC enabled
To enable an MPT access card 1.
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the MPT Access card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.25.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
459
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.25 — Select slot to enable MPTACC
460
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select MPTACC. See Figure 51.26.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.26 — Select MPTACC equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The MPT Access card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 51.27. Figure 51.27 — MPTACC enabled
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
461
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To enable MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on MPTACC card 1.
Select slot the MSS/MPTACC (MPT Access) card is equipped to MPTHC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPTACC card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Note: MPT-HC and MPT-XP are functionally similar and appear in the GUI as MPT-HC. Likewise, MPT-HC-HQAM and MPT-XP-HQAM are functionally similar and appear in the GUI as MPT-HQAM
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 51.28. Figure 51.28 — Resource list area: MPTACC selected
Note: MPTACC Ports 1 and 2 optical SFP interfaces. Ports 3 and 4 electrical GigE Ethernet Interfaces. Up to two ports are ed. Either one or two optical, one or two electrical, or one electrical and one optical ports are ed simultaneously. Note: MPTACC Ports 1 and 3 are not ed simultaneously. MPTACC Ports 2 and 4 are not ed simultaneously.
3.
462
From the Port # (1-4) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM. See Figure 51.29.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.29 — Provision MPTACC port
4.
Click Apply. The MPTACC MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM port will populate selected port #. See Figure 51.30.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
463
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.30 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on MPTACC
5. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should be provisioned between the MPTACC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM port and other Ethernet and/ or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. To enable an MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on Core
464
1.
Select a slot that is equipped to MSS/CORE card and the MPT-HC/ MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the Core card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 51.28.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.31 — Resource list area: Core-E selected
3.
Provision MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM connected to electrical or optical SFP Ethernet port? a.
If electrical Ethernet port, go to step 7.
b.
If optical SFP Ethernet port, go to step 4. Note: MPTs can be provisioned on optical ports 5 and 6 on a Core-E card or optical ports 7 and 8 on a CorEvo card.
4.
From the Port Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM. See Figure 51.32.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
465
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.32 — Provision Core-E MPT-HC/XP optical SFP Ethernet port
5.
Click Apply. The Core MPT card will populate selected port #. See Figure 51.33.
466
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.33 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port
6.
Go to step 9.
7.
From the Port # (1-4) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HC, MPT-MC or MPT-HQAM. See Figure 51.34.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
467
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.34 — Provision Core-E MPT-HC electrical Ethernet port
8.
Click Apply. The Core MPT card will populate the selected port #. See Figure 51.35.
468
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.35 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E electrical Ethernet port
9. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should be provisioned between the Core MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. To enable an MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on P8ETH or EASv2 card 1.
Select a slot that is equipped to P8ETH or EASv2 card and the MPTHC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 51.36.
3.
From the Port Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HC, MPT-MC, or MPT-HQAM.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
469
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.36 — Resource list area: P8ETH selected
4.
470
Click Apply. The P8ETH card will populate the selected port #. See Figure 51.37.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.37 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH optical Ethernet port
5. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should be provisioned between the MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desired. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. To enable an auxiliary card 1.
Select MSS-8/Slot#8 or MSS-4/Slot#4 in the resource tree area where the Auxiliary card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.38.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
471
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.38 — Select Slot#8 to enable auxiliary card
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select AUX. See Figure 51.39. Figure 51.39 — Select AUX equipment type
472
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 4.
Click Apply. The Auxiliary card will populate slot #8. See Figure 51.40. Figure 51.40 — Auxiliary card enabled
To enable an MPT-HLS radio 1.
See Figure 51.41 and Figure 51.42 and follow the steps to enable the MPTHLS radio card.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
473
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.41 — Enable the subrack for an MPT-HLS radio
1
3 2
23757
To enable the radio card:
474
1.
Click on the top level element in the Equipment view.
2.
In the Settings , choose SR-MPT-HLS from the Top Rack or Bottom Rack drop-down.
3.
Click Apply. The top or bottom subrack appears in the Equipment view.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.42 — Enable the MPT-HLS radio
4
5
6
7 23758
4.
Click on one of the vertical slots of the subrack.
5.
In the Settings , choose MPT-HLS from the Equipment Type dropdown.
6.
Choose one of the ports on the EASv2 card from the Interface dropdown.
7.
Click on the Apply button. An SD check box is displayed.
8.
If the diversity combiner is in use, select the SD check box and click on the Apply button.
9.
The card is enabled. The fan slot is outlined in red.
To enable an MPT-HLS fan 1.
See Figure 51.43 and follow the steps to enable the fan. To enable the fan:
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
475
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.43 — Enable the MPT-HLS fan
1
2
4
3 23759
1.
Click on the horizontal slot above the radio slots.
2.
In the settings , choose SR-FAN4 from the Equipment Type dropdown.
3.
Choose an EAS channel from the Fan Handler MPTs drop-down.
4.
Click Apply.
To enable a Fan Unit 476
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
See Figure 51.44. Follow the steps to enable the Fan, A-FAN, or E-FAN Unit. Figure 51.44 — Enabling Fan Unit
1
3
2
To enable the fan: i.
Click on Slot 9.
ii.
In the settings , choose the fan type from the Equipment Type drop-down.
iii.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
477
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
478
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
52 — Disable equipment
52.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to Disable cards in the system. Note: The Core graphics in this chapter show the Core-E card. The procedure is similar for a CorEvo card.
52.2 — Prerequisite Associated facilities and equipment ports must be deprovisioned before a card may be disabled.
52.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To disable the spare Core card
•
To disable a radio
•
To disable an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver card on Core
•
To disable a P8ETH card
•
To disable an EASv2 card
•
To disable a P32E1DS1 card
•
To disable a DS3 P2E3DS3 card
•
Disable an SDH card
•
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on MPTACC
•
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on Core
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
479
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on P8ETH or EASv2
•
To disable an MPT access card
•
To disable an auxiliary card
To disable the spare Core card 1.
Select MSS-n/Slot#2 in the resource tree area. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights spare Core card in slot #2 in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.1. Figure 52.1 — Enabled spare Core-E
480
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.2 — Disable spare Core-E
4.
Click Apply. The spare Core card is removed from slot #2. See Figure 52.3.
Note: Spare Core Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
481
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.3 — Spare Core-E disabled
To disable a radio 1.
Disable MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver card on P8ETH or EASv2 Select the slot where the card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the P8ETH or EASv2 card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
482
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 52.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.4 — Enabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver
3.
From the Port # (5-8) Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty. See Figure 52.5. Figure 52.5 — Disable MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
483
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The port # will display Empty and the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 52.6. Note: MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver card will not disable if the port has any cross-connections associated with the card.
Figure 52.6 — Disabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver
To disable an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver card on Core
484
1.
Select the slot where the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the main Core-E card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 52.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.7 — Enabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver
3.
From the Port # (5-6) Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty. See Figure 52.8. Figure 52.8 — Disable MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
485
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The Core port # will display Empty and the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC will be removed from the resource list area. See Figure 52.9. Note: MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver card will not disable if the port has any cross-connections associated with the card.
Figure 52.9 — Disabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver
To disable a P8ETH card 1.
486
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P8ETH card is enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.10.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.10 — Enabled P8ETH
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.11. Figure 52.11 — Disable P8ETH
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
487
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 4.
Click Apply. The P8ETH card is removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 52.12.
Note: P8ETH Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects, MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver cards, and/or equipment ports associated.
Figure 52.12 — P8ETH disabled
To disable an EASv2 card 1.
488
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the EASv2 card is enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.13.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.13 — Enabled EASv2
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.14.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
489
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.14 — Disable EASv2
4.
Click Apply. The EASv2 card is removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 52.15.
Note: The EASv2 card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects, MPT-HL/MPTHLC Transceiver cards, and/or equipment ports associated.
490
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.15 — EASv2 disabled
To disable a P32E1DS1 card 1.
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P32E1DS1 card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.16.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
491
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.16 — Enabled P32E1DS1
492
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.17.
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.17 — Disable P32E1DS1
The P32E1DS1 card is removed from selected slot #. See Figure 52.18. Note: P32E1DS1 Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
493
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.18 — Disabled P32E1DS1
To disable a DS3 P2E3DS3 card 1.
494
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P2E3DS3 card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.19.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.19 — Enabled P2E3DS3
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.20.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
495
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.20 — Disable P2E3DS3
4.
Click Apply. The P2E3DS3 card disabled will be removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 52.21.
Note: P2E3DS3 Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
496
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.21 — Disabled P2E3DS3
Disable an SDH card 1.
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the SDH card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.22.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
497
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.22 — Enabled SDHACC
498
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.23.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.23 — Disable SDHACC
4.
Click Apply. The card disabled will be removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 52.24.
Note: The SDH Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
499
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.24 — Disabled SDHACC
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on MPTACC 1.
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on MPTACC Select slot the MSS/MPTACC (MPT Access) card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPTACC (MPT Access) card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area.
2.
500
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 52.25, which shows an enabled MPT-HC.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.25 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU
3.
From the Port # (1-4) Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty. See Figure 52.26. Figure 52.26 — Disable MPT-HC ODU
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
501
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 4.
Click Apply. The MPTACC port # will display Empty and the MPT ODU is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 52.27.
Note: MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU card will not disable if the port has any cross-connections associated with the port.
Figure 52.27 — Disabled MPT-HC ODU
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on Core
502
1.
Select slot the MSS/CORE card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the Core card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 52.28, which shows an enabled MPT-HC.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.28 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E
3.
Deprovision MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM connected to electrical or optical SFP Ethernet port? a.
If electrical Ethernet port, go to step 6.
b.
If optical SFP Ethernet port, go to step 4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
503
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.29 — Disable MPT-HC ODU from Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port
4.
From the Port # (5-6) Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty.
5.
Click Apply. The MPTACC port # will display Empty and the MPT ODU is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 52.30.
Note: MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU card will not disable if the port has any cross-connections associated with the port.
504
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.30 — Disabled MPT-HC ODU from Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port
6.
From the Port # (1-4) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type Empty. See Figure 52.31.
Figure 52.31 — Deprovision MPT-HC from Core-E electrical Ethernet port
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
505
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 7.
Click Apply. The Core MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM port will display empty and the MPT ODU is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 52.32.
Figure 52.32 — Disabled MPT-HC ODU from Core-E electrical Ethernet port
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on P8ETH or EASv2
506
1.
Select slot where the card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the P8ETH or EASv2 card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 52.33.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.33 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH
3.
From the Port Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty. See Figure 52.34. Figure 52.34 — Disable MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
507
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 4.
Click Apply. The port # will display Empty and the MPT ODU is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 52.35. Figure 52.35 — Disabled MPT ODU from P8ETH
To disable an MPT access card 1.
508
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the MPT Access card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.36.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.36 — Enabled MPTACC
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.37.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
509
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.37 — Disable MPTACC
4.
Click Apply. The MPT Access card disabled will be removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 52.38.
Note: MPT Access Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
510
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.38 — Disabled MPTACC
To disable an auxiliary card 1.
Select MSS-n/Slot#8 in the resource tree area where the Auxiliary card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.39.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
511
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.39 — Enabled auxiliary card
512
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.40.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.40 — Disable auxiliary card
4.
Click Apply. The Auxiliary card disabled will be removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 52.41.
Note: Auxiliary Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
513
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.41 — Disabled auxiliary card
514
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
53 — Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
53.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP). See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for information about ed configurations.
53.2 — Prerequisites MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio ports must be provisioned prior to ERP provisioning. For optical Ethernet ports on the Core to be included in a Ring, the SFP must be provisioned. If the NE is in Provider Bridge mode, the Ethernet port must be configured as NNI. The TPID parameter of both ports in the Ring link must be the same. For L1 LAG ports, the LAG must meet the following rules: •
the LAG must be in intra plug-in link configuration on a P8ETH or EASv2 card
•
only one LAG can be present on the card
•
no other optical or electrical ports should be configured or enabled on the card, that is, the LAG must be the only item configured on the card
•
at least one master port must be defined
•
the LAG must be composed of either 1+0 unprotected MPT-HC/MPT-XP, with or without XPIC, or 1+0 MPT-HL radio interfaces
•
LAG size must be between 1 and 4
P2E3DS3 and P32E1DS1 PDH ports must be provisioned prior to provisioning PDH to Ring cross connections.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
515
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
53.3 — General Use the procedures in this chapter to configure ERP on every node in the ring. The procedures are arranged in the sequence to correctly provision ERP Caution: For radios to be associated with a new ERP topology which have existing crossconnections and/or VLAN traffic provisioned, ERP topology provisioning is traffic affecting.
To provision a new ERP topology on ports with existing cross-connections and VLANs, the cross-connections and VLANs must be deleted before creating the ERP topology and re-entered according to this chapter. During this period of time all traffic associated with these cross-connections and VLANs will be lost. Schedule appropriate maintenance window prior to starting ERP provisioning on traffic barring systems. It is recommended to establish correct communication throughout the ring: Protection Status is ‘Idle,’ Port Current statuses are ‘Normal,’ and Port Forward status is Blocked for RPL Owner and Unblocked for all other ports prior to adding traffic flows to the ring. This chapter does not cover all aspects of Ethernet Ring design and assumes the operator has a valid Ethernet Ring design. ERP Switching is implemented according to ITU-T G.8032 recommendations.
53.4 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To provision an Ethernet ring topology
•
To enable an ERP Instance
•
To add a PDH Flow to an ERP Instance
•
To add a radio flow to an ERP instance
•
To add an Ethernet flow to an ERP instance
•
Add VLAN flow to ERP instance
•
To provision ETH OAM switching criteria (optional)
To provision an Ethernet ring topology 1.
516
Select Ethernet Ring Configuration View icon from the main toolbar. See Figure 53.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 53.1 — Ethernet Ring Configuration view icon
Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration window displays. See Figure 53.2. Figure 53.2 — Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration view
2.
For networks with traffic bearing radio ports to be added to the ERP topology, perform the following steps before provisioning ERP topology. For non-traffic bearing radio ports to be added to the ERP topology, go to step 3. cross-connections and VLAN traffic provisioned against radio ports to be provisioned into ERP topology.
Caution: For radios to be associated with a new ERP topology which have existing crossconnections and/or VLAN traffic provisioned, ERP topology provisioning is traffic affecting.
i.
Save the configuration file to be used to re-provision any deleted crossconnections and/or VLANs. For a detailed procedure, see View NE Inventory data.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
517
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ii.
Open the cross-connection window. For a detailed procedure see Deprovision cross connections.
iii.
Delete all existing cross-connections associated with the radio ports to be added to the ERP topology.
iv.
Open the VLAN configuration window. For a detailed procedure, see ister VLAN configuration.
v.
Delete all existing VLANs associated with the radio ports to be added to the ERP topology.
These cross-connections and VLANs will be re-provisioned to the new ERP according to this procedure. 3.
Provision ERP Topology using the following procedure: See Figure 53.3 for the following steps: a.
Enter the ERP Topology Label in the Label field.
b.
From the East Port drop-down menu, select east radio direction
c.
From the West Port drop-down menu, select west radio direction
d.
Click Create. Figure 53.3 — ERP Topology creation
Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration window updates. Ring Topology is added to the Ring Topologies table. See Figure ERP Topology created.
518
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 53.4 — ERP Topology created
4.
Provision Ethernet Ring Instance From the ERP Instance area, click Create. See Figure 53.4.
5.
Provision ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 53.5 for the following steps: a.
Enter ERP Label in the New ERP Label field.
b.
Enter R-APS VLAN ID in the R-APS VLAN ID field.
Note: R-APS VLAN ID must be provisioned to the same value on all Ethernet Ring Nodes belonging to the ERP Instance.
c.
From the R-APS MEG Level drop-down menu, select R-APS MEG Level for the ERP Topology.
Note: R-APS MEG Level must be provisioned to the same value on all Ethernet Ring Nodes belonging to the ERP Instance.
d.
From the R-APS MEG ID East drop-down menu, select ring link east port ID#.
e.
From the R-APS MEG ID West drop-down menu, select ring link west port ID#.
f.
For Ring Node which is RPL Owner, select RPL Owner check box (checked), for Ring Node which is not RPL Owner, RPL Owner check box (unchecked).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
519
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures RPL Owner selected? a.
If yes, go to step g.
b.
If no, go to step h.
g.
Select RPL Owner Port, East Port or West Port.
h.
Click Create. Figure 53.5 — ERP Instance creation
Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration window updates. ERP Instance is added to ERP Instances table. See Figure 53.6.
520
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 53.6 — ERP Instance created
6.
Create second ERP Instance? a.
If yes, repeat steps 4 and 5 to create a second ERP Instance. See Figure 53.6 for an example of two ERP Instances provisioned.
b.
If no, go to step 7. Figure 53.7 — Two ERP Instances created
7.
Select ERP Instance to provision Wait-to-Restore Time and Guard Timer.
8.
Ring Node RPL Owner?
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
521
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
9.
a.
If yes, go to step 9.
b.
If no, go to step 10.
From the Wait-to Restore Time drop-down menu, select 1 to 12 minutes.
10. In the Guard Timer field, enter Guard Timer duration; 10 to 2000 ms. 11. Click Apply. 12. Repeat steps 7 and 11 to provision Wait-to-Restore Time and Guard Timer on second ERP Instance if applicable. Note: To provision an Ethernet Ring, it is recommended to Create Ring Topology and ERP Instances on all ring nodes prior to enabling the ERP Instance. To provision additional Ethernet ring nodes repeat steps 1 through 12 on each ring node.
To enable an ERP Instance 1.
From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to enable. See Figure 53.7.
2.
Select ERP Enabled check box (checked).
3.
Click Apply.
4.
Perform To enable an ERP Instance on all Ring Nodes. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to enable ERP Instance on all Ring Nodes.
5.
Port and Protection Statuses around the ring. i.
East Port Current Status is Normal.
ii.
West Port Current Status is Normal.
iii.
RPL Owner/RPL Port status is Blocked.
iv.
all other East and West Port Forward Statuses are Unblocked.
v.
all Protection Statuses are Idle.
To add a PDH Flow to an ERP Instance 1.
To add a PDH Flow to an ERP Instance
2.
Add PDH flows to ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 53.8 for the following steps:
522
a.
Select ERP instance to add PDH flows.
b.
Enter PHD flow VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 53.8 — Add PDH VLAN IDs to ERP Instance
3.
Add PDH VLAN IDs to Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to add PDH to Ring cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To add a radio flow to an ERP instance 1.
Add Radio flows to ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 53.8 for the following steps:
2.
a.
Select ERP instance to add Radio flows.
b.
Enter Radio flow VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
Add Radio VLAN IDs to Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to add Radio to Ring cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To add an Ethernet flow to an ERP instance 1.
To add an Ethernet flow to an ERP instance Add MEF8 Ethernet flows to ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 53.8 for the following steps:
2.
a.
Select ERP instance to add Ethernet flows.
b.
Enter MEF8 Ethernet flow VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
Add MEF8 Ethernet VLAN IDs to Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to add ETH to Ring cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
523
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 3.
Add -through flow to ERP instance
Note: Ring to Ring cross-connections are required at all -through ring nodes. Traffic flows (PDH to Ring, Radio to Ring, and ETH to Ring) which enter and exit the Ring, at nodes other than the node being provisioned, require Ring to Ring cross connection provisioned.
Add -through flows to ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 53.8 for the following steps:
4.
a.
Select ERP instance to add -through flows.
b.
Enter -through flow VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
Add -through VLAN IDs to Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to add Ring to Ring cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
Add VLAN flow to ERP instance 1.
Add Ethernet flows to ERP Instance using the following procedure:
2.
See Figure 53.8 for the following steps: a.
Select ERP instance to add Ethernet flows.
b.
Enter Ethernet flow VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
3.
Add Ethernet Flow to VLAN Configuration. For detailed steps to add Ethernet Flow, see ister VLAN configuration.
4.
Provision Hold off timer
Note: In Ring configurations, mixed or fiber ring, using optical Ethernet ports configured on node and Core-E protection is also configured. The “Hold Off Timer” must be configured on the NE that is facing the NE with Core-E protection configured.
Provision the Hold Off timer for any Ethernet ports in the ERP Instance. For detailed steps, see Provision Ethernet ports. To provision ETH OAM switching criteria (optional) 1.
To provision ETH OAM switching criteria (optional) To enable ETH OAM switching criteria, select the OAM Switch Criteria check box, see Figure 53.9.
524
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 53.9 — OAM switching criteria
Note: The OAM Switch Criteria check box only appears if Ethernet ports are part of the Ring.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
525
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
526
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
54 — Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software
54.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to activate R5.1.0 software on Ring nodes when ERPS is in use. This procedure must be performed when upgrading from a release earlier than R5.0.0 to ensure that the Ring status is maintained during the software upgrade.
54.2 — General The first node on which the software is activated must be a neighbor to the RPL owner. This procedure will use Node B as an example, as shown in Figure 54.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
527
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.1 — Ring example for upgrade
54.3 — Procedure
528
1.
the R5.1.0 software to all Ring Nodes.
2.
that no fault condition exists on the Ring.
3.
Activate a Tx mute on Ring Node B toward Node C, see Figure 54.2. This will cause the Ring to enter protection state.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.2 — Activate Tx mute to Node C
4.
Activate the R5.1.0 software on Node B, see Figure 54.3. The activation of R5.1.0 on Node B does not impact the Ring status, which prevents any dependency on the time sequence of the upgrade of the East and West radio interfaces. TDM and Ethernet traffic entering Node B is lost when the interface toward Node A goes down due to radio interface upgrade, and is restored when it is back up.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
529
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.3 — Activate software on Node B
5.
530
Remove the Tx mute toward Node C, see Figure 54.4. After the WTR time has expired, the RPL owner puts the Ring in idle state.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.4 — Remove Tx mute to Node C
6.
Activate a Tx mute on Node C toward Node D and activate the R5.1.0 software on Node C, see Figure 54.5. The activation of R5.1.0 on Node C does not impact the Ring status, which prevents any dependency on the time sequence of the upgrade of the East and West radio interfaces. TDM and Ethernet traffic entering Node C is lost when the interface toward Node B goes down due to radio interface upgrade, and is restored when it is back up.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
531
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.5 — Activate Tx mute and activate SW on Node C
7.
532
Remove the Tx mute toward Node D, see Figure 54.6. After the WTR time has expired, the RPL owner puts the Ring in idle state.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.6 — Remove Tx mute to Node D
8.
Activate a Tx mute on Node D toward Node A and activate the R5.1.0 software on Node D, see Figure 54.7. The activation of R5.1.0 on Node B does not impact the Ring status, which prevents any dependency on the time sequence of the upgrade of the East and West radio interfaces. TDM and Ethernet traffic entering Node B is lost when the interface toward Node C goes down due to radio interface upgrade, and is restored when it is back up.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
533
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.7 — Activate Tx mute and activate SW on Node D
9.
534
Remove the Tx mute toward Node A, see Figure 54.8. If the NE MAC Address of Node A (used as Node ID by ERPS) is higher than NE MAC Address of Node D, after the WTR time has expired, the RPL owner puts the Ring in Idle state, otherwise all Ring Nodes other than RPL Owner go in Pending state. Node A remains in Protection state.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.8 — Remove Tx mute to Node A
10. Activate the R5.1.0 software on Node A, the RPL owner, see Figure 54.9. TDM and Ethernet traffic entering Node A is protected by the Ring when the radio interfaces toward Nodes B and D go down. When the upgrade is completed, and after the WTR time has expired, the RPL owner puts the Ring in Idle state.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
535
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.9 — Remove Tx mute to Node A
536
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
55 — Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring
55.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to provision cross connections in an Ethernet Ring that contains both fiber and microwave ports.
55.2 — General Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring require MAC address parameters which depend on the following factors: •
position of the TDM traffic end point nodes in the Ring: member or non-member of the Ring’s fiber chain
•
protection status of the end point NE if it is outside the Ring
The term fiber chain refers to the portion of the Ring where all the Ring nodes are connected using optical fiber. This chapter provides a series of examples of Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring. All examples are based on the sample Ring shown in Figure 55.1. For information on how to create cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
537
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.1 — Sample mixed fiber/microwave Ring
The sample Ring consists of nodes A, B, C, D, I, J and K. Nodes A, B, C and D are of the Ring’s fiber chain. NEs E, F, G, and H connect to the Ring’s fiber chain using Ethernet connections.
55.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures. All examples are based on the sample Ring shown in Figure 55.1.
538
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node J and Node K
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node J and Node D
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node J and Node D (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node K and Node B
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node K and Node B (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE G
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE G (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE E
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE E (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node D 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node D (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node A (protected) and Node D (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node C
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node C (protected)
•
To configure a -through cross-connection on Node D
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE E and Node C
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE F and Node C
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE F and Node C (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE F (protected) and Node C (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE E and NE H
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE E and NE G
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE F and NE G
To provision a cross-connection between Node J and Node K 1.
Neither traffic end point belongs to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.2. Figure 55.2 — Cross-connection between Node J and Node K
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
539
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.3 — Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node A
2.
540
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.4 — Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
541
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.5 — Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
542
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.6 — Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node J and Node D 1.
One traffic end point belongs to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
543
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.7 — Cross-connection between Node J and Node D
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.8. Figure 55.8 — Node J to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node A
a.
544
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.9.
Figure 55.9 — Node J to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.10.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
545
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.10 — Node J to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
546
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.10 and Figure 55.11.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.11 — Node J to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D
Figure 55.12 — Node J to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
547
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node J and Node D (protected) 1.
One traffic end point belongs to the fiber chain. This end point (on Node D) is protected, see Figure 55.13.
Figure 55.13 — Cross-connection between Node J and Node D (protected)
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.14.
548
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.14 — Node J to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A
2.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.15.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
549
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.15 — Node J to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
550
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.16.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.16 — Node J to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.17 and Figure 55.18.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
551
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.17 — Node J to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D
Figure 55.18 — Node J to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a. 552
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node K and Node B 1.
One traffic end point belongs to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.19. Figure 55.19 — Cross-connection between Node K and Node B
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.20 and Figure 55.21.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
553
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.20 — Node K to Node B: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B
Figure 55.21 — Node K to Node B: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B
a. 554
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Note: The Ring Destination MAC address on Node B can be either the Unicast MAC address of Node D or that of Node A. However, the configuration on Node B affects the configuration on other nodes in the fiber chain.
2.
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.22.
Figure 55.22 — Node K to Node B: -through cross-connection on Node A
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node B Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.23.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
555
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.23 — Node K to Node B: -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
556
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node B Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.24.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.24 — Node K to Node B: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node B Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node K and Node B (protected) 1.
One traffic end point belongs to the fiber chain. This end point (on Node B) is protected, see Figure 55.25.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
557
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.25 — Cross-connection between Node K and Node B (protected)
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.10 and Figure 55.11. Figure 55.26 — Node K to Node B (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B
558
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.27 — Node K to Node B (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Note: The Ring Destination MAC address on Node B can be either the Unicast MAC address of Node D or that of Node A. However, the configuration on Node B affects the configuration on other nodes in the fiber chain.
2.
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.28.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
559
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.28 — Node K to Node B (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A
3.
560
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node B Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.29.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.29 — Node K to Node B (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node B Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.30.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
561
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.30 — Node K to Node B (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node B Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE G 1.
562
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.31.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.31 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE G
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G, see Figure 55.32 and Figure 55.33.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
563
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.32 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G
564
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.33 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G
2.
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.34.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
565
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.34 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C
3.
566
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.35.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.35 — Node I to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node A
4.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.36.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
567
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.36 — Node I to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node B
5.
568
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.37.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.37 — Node I to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE G (protected) 1.
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain. This end point (on NE G) is protected, see Figure 55.38.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
569
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.38 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE G (protected)
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G, see Figure 55.39 and Figure 55.40.
570
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.39 — Node I to NE G (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Note: The Destination MAC address on NE G can be either the Unicast MAC address of Node A or that of Node D. However, the configuration on NE G affects the configuration on other nodes in the fiber chain.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
571
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.40 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Note: The Destination MAC address on NE G can be either the Unicast MAC address of Node A or that of Node D. However, the configuration on NE G affects the configuration on other nodes in the fiber chain.
2.
572
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.41.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.41 — Node I to NE G (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE G Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.42.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
573
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.42 — Node I to NE G (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A
4.
574
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.43.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.43 — Node I to NE G (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B
5.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: NE G Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.44.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
575
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.44 — Node I to NE G (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE E 1.
576
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.45.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.45 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE E
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 55.46 and Figure 55.47.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
577
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.46 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
578
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.47 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E
2.
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.48.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
579
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.48 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A
3.
580
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.49.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.49 — Node I to NE E: -through cross-connection on Node B
4.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.50.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
581
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.50 — Node I to NE E: -through cross-connection on Node C
5.
582
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.51.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.51 — Node I to NE E: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE E (protected) •
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain. That end point (on NE E), is protected, see Figure 55.52.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
583
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.52 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE E (protected)
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 55.53 and Figure 55.54.
584
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.53 — Node I to NE E (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
585
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.54 — Node I to NE E (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E
•
586
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.55.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.55 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A
•
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE E Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.56.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
587
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.56 — Node I to NE E (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B
•
588
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.57 — Node I to NE E (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C
•
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
589
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.58 — Node I to NE E (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE E Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node D •
590
Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.59.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.59 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node D
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.60 and Figure 55.61. Figure 55.60 — Node A to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
591
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.61 — Node A to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A
•
592
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.62.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.62 — Node A to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node B
•
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.63.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
593
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.63 — Node A to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node C
•
594
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.64 and Figure 55.65.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.64 — Node A to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D
Figure 55.65 — Node A to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
595
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node D (protected) 1.
Both traffic end points belongs to the fiber chain. The end point at Node D is protected; see Figure 55.66.
Figure 55.66 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node D (protected)
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.67 and Figure 55.68.
596
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.67 — Node A to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A
Figure 55.68 — Node A to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
597
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.69.
Figure 55.69 — Node A to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
598
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.70.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.70 — Node A to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.71 and Figure 55.72.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
599
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.71 — Node A to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D
Figure 55.72 — Node A to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a. 600
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node A (protected) and Node D (protected) 1.
Both traffic end points belongs to the fiber chain. Both end points are protected; see Figure 55.73.
Figure 55.73 — Cross-connection between Node A (protected) and Node D (protected)
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.74 and Figure 55.75.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
601
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.74 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A
Figure 55.75 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A
a. 602
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.76.
Figure 55.76 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.77.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
603
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.77 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
604
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Multicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.78 and Figure 55.79.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.78 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D
Figure 55.79 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
605
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Multicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node C 1.
Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.80. Figure 55.80 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node C
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.81 and Figure 55.82.
606
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.81 — Node A to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A
Figure 55.82 — Node A to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
607
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.83.
Figure 55.83 — Node A to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
608
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.84 and Figure 55.84.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.84 — Node A to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.85 — Node A to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
609
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
4.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.86.
Figure 55.86 — Node A to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node C (protected) 1.
610
Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain. The end point at Node C is protected; see Figure 55.87.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.87 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node C (protected)
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.88 and Figure 55.89. Figure 55.88 — Node A to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
611
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.89 — Node A to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A
2.
612
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.90.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.90 — Node A to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.91 and Figure 55.92.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
613
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.91 — Node A to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.92 — Node A to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a. 614
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To configure a -through cross-connection on Node D 1.
See Figure 55.93.
Figure 55.93 — Node A to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D
2.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Provision a cross-connection between Node B and Node C Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.94.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
615
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.94 — Cross-connection between Node B and Node C
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.95 and Figure 55.96. Figure 55.95 — Node B to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B
616
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.96 — Node B to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.97 and Figure 55.98.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
617
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.97 — Node B to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.98 — Node B to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a. 618
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
4.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node B Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.99.
Figure 55.99 — Node B to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node A
5.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node B Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.100.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
619
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.100 — Node B to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D
6.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node B Unicast MAC address
Provision a cross-connection between NE E and Node D One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.101.
620
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.101 — Cross-connection between NE E and Node D
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 55.102 and Figure 55.103. Figure 55.102 — NE E to Node D: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
621
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Figure 55.103 — NE E to Node D: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G
7.
622
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.104.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.104 — NE E to Node D: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A
8.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.105.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
623
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.105 — NE E to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node A
9.
624
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.106.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.106 — NE E to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node C
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
10. Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.107 and Figure 55.108.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
625
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.107 — NE E to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D
Figure 55.108 — NE E to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a. 626
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE E and Node C •
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.109. Figure 55.109 — Cross-connection between NE E and Node C
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 55.110 and Figure 55.111.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
627
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.110 — NE E to Node C: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
628
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.111 — NE E to Node C: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E
•
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.112.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
629
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.112 — NE E to Node C: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A
•
630
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.113.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.113 — NE E to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node B
•
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.114 and Figure 55.115.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
631
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.114 — NE E to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.115 — NE E to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a. 632
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.116.
Figure 55.116 — NE E to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE F and Node C 1.
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.117.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
633
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.117 — Cross-connection between NE F and Node C
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F, see Figure 55.118 and Figure 55.119. Figure 55.118 — NE F to Node C: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F
634
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Figure 55.119 — NE F to Node C: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F
2.
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.120.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
635
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.120 — NE F to Node C: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B
3.
636
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.121 and Figure 55.122.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.121 — NE F to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.122 — NE F to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
637
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
4.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.123.
Figure 55.123 — NE F to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node A
5.
638
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.124.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.124 — NE F to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE F and Node C (protected) 1.
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain. This end point, at Node C, is protected, see Figure 55.125.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
639
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.125 — Cross-connection between NE F and Node C (protected)
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F, see Figure 55.126 and Figure 55.127.
640
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.126 — NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
641
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.127 — NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F
2.
642
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.128.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.128 — NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.129 and Figure 55.130.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
643
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.129 — NE F to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.130 — NE F to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a. 644
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
4.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.131.
Figure 55.131 — NE F to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A
5.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.132.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
645
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.132 — NE F to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE F (protected) and Node C (protected) 1.
646
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain. Both end points are protected, see Figure 55.133.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.133 — Cross-connection between NE F (protected) and Node C (protected)
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F, see Figure 55.134 and Figure 55.135.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
647
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.134 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F
648
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.135 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F
2.
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.136.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
649
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.136 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B
3.
650
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE F Multicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.137 and Figure 55.138.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.137 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.138 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
651
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
4.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.139.
Figure 55.139 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A
5.
652
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.140.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.140 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE E and NE H 1.
Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.141.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
653
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.141 — Cross-connection between NE E and NE H
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 55.142 and Figure 55.143.
654
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.142 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
655
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.143 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E
2.
656
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE H, see Figure 55.144 and Figure 55.145.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.144 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
657
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.145 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E
3.
658
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE H, see Figure 55.146 and Figure 55.147.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.146 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE H
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
659
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.147 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE H
4.
660
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.148.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.148 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A
5.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.149.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
661
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.149 — NE E to NE H: -through cross-connection on Node B
6.
662
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.150.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.150 — NE E to NE H: -through cross-connection on Node C
7.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.151.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
663
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.151 — NE to NE H: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE E and NE G 1.
664
Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.152.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.152 — Cross-connection between NE E and NE G
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 55.153 and Figure 55.154. Figure 55.153 — NE E to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
665
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Figure 55.154 — NE E to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E
2.
666
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G, see Figure 55.155 and Figure 55.156.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.155 — NE E to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
667
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.156 — NE E to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G
3.
668
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.157.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.157 — NE E to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A
4.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.158.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
669
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.158 — NE E to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node B
5.
670
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.159.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.159 — NE E to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C
6.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.160.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
671
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.160 — NE E to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE F and NE G 1.
672
Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.161.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.161 — Cross-connection between NE F and NE G
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F, see Figure 55.162 and Figure 55.163.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
673
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.162 — NE F to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F
674
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.163 — NE F to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F
2.
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G, see Figure 55.164 and Figure 55.165.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
675
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.164 — NE F to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G
676
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.165 — NE F to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G
3.
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.166.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
677
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.166 — NE F to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B
4.
678
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.166.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.167 — NE F to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C
5.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.168.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
679
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.168 — NE F to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node A
6.
680
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.169.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.169 — NE F to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
681
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
682
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
56 — Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool
56.1 — Purpose The aided cross-connection tool is a smart tool to help the to select the correct MAC address for cross-connections on nodes that are of the fiber chain of a mixed fibermicrowave Ring. The term fiber chain refers to a portion of the Ring where all the Ring nodes are connected using optical fiber.
56.2 — General The procedure is completed in two phases:
56.2.1 — Ring’s Fiber Chain Description The describes the fiber chain, specifying the required information about the nodes of the Ring portion plus the NEs adding traffic to the Ring using Ethernet connections. A specific Pre-provisioning Tool is provided. The data loaded in the tool is stored in the MIB or exported to an XML file. An existing file can also be imported. The maximum number of entries is 32. that an imported file contains no more than 32 entries. This chapter will use the same example ring as Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring, as shown in Figure 56.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
683
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General Figure 56.1 — Sample mixed fiber/microwave Ring
The sample Ring consists of nodes A, B, C, D, I, J and K. Nodes A, B, C and D are of the Ring’s fiber chain. NEs E, F, G, and H connect to the Ring’s fiber chain using Ethernet connections. The list of Ring nodes belonging to the fiber chain in the description tool must follow the exact sequence of nodes along the chain: •
The First Node must be the one which has the Radio interface (L1 LAG) as West Ring Port and the optical Ethernet interface as East Ring Port (Node A).
•
The Last Node must be the one which has the Radio interface (L1 LAG) as East Ring Port and the optical Ethernet interface as West Ring Port (Node D).
The presence of a Cross-connection Gateway, a Ring Node where all TDM flows are aggregated, can be selected as:
684
•
No Gateway, when there is no node in the whole Ring that aggregates TDM flows
•
Outside Ring’s Fiber Chain, when there is a Ring node that aggregates TDM flows but it is outside the Ring’s Fiber Chain
•
Specific Ring node, when there is a Ring Node which aggregates TDM flows and this node is inside the Ring’s Fiber Chain
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
56.2.2 — Aided Cross-connection in Cross-connections At the cross-connection creation, each MAC address parameter requested is automatically selected by the tool, or a short list of MAC address options is provided. Additional information, according to the type of cross-connection, is requested by the GUI to determine the MAC addresses. You can also create cross-connections without using the tool: select the Manual radio button to enter the MAC address.
56.3 — Procedure 1.
Pre-provisioning tool From the Configuration menu, choose Ring’s Fiber Chain Description to launch the pre-provisioning tool, see Figure 56.2. Figure 56.2 — Ring’s Fiber Chain Description
The Ring’s Fiber Chain for Aided Cross-connections window opens, see Figure 56.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
685
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 56.3 — Ring’s Fiber Chain for Aided Cross-connections window
2.
In the Ring Nodes of Fiber Chain , click on the button to add Ring nodes. Enter the label, topology type and NE MAC address for each node in the fiber chain. that the correct nodes are entered as the first and last node.
3.
In the External Network Elements , click on the button to add external NEs. For each external NE, enter the label, NE MAC address, and the label of the Ring Node to which the external NE is connected.
4.
In the Cross-Connection Gateway , select either No Gateway, Outside Ring’s Fiber Chain, or, if applicable, a node inside the fiber chain that aggregates TDM flows.
5.
Click on the Apply button.
6.
Cross-connections window Provision the cross-connections for the nodes in the fiber chain, as outlined in Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring. The Aided radio button is selected in the MAC Address Selection . The correct MAC address is automatically selected, or a list of possible MAC addresses is provided. Figure 56.4 through Figure 56.10 provide examples.
686
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 56.4 — Add&Drop cross-connection: Other end point is outside the fiber chain
Figure 56.5 — Add&Drop cross-connection: Other end point is inside the fiber chain
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
687
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 56.6 — -through cross-connection: Both end points are inside the fiber chain (1)
Figure 56.7 — -through cross-connection: Both end points are inside the fiber chain (2)
688
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 56.8 — -through cross-connection: One end point is inside the fiber chain (1)
Figure 56.9 — -through cross-connection: One end point is inside the fiber chain (2)
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
689
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 56.10 — -through cross-connection: Both end points are outside the fiber chain
7.
690
See Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring to provision the remaining cross-connections in the Ring.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
57 — Provision protection scheme parameters
57.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision Protection Schemes for the 9500 MPR. Note: If an RF loopback is in place with MPT-HLC, you need to remove it before configuring protection.
57.2 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To view protection schemes
•
To provision the Equipment Protection Schemes parameter
•
To provision the Hot StandBy Protection Schemes parameter
•
To provision Rx Radio Protection Schemes parameters
To view protection schemes 1.
Select Protection Schemes Tab. The Protection Schemes tab opens. See Figure 57.1. All the protection schemes provisioned for the 9500 MPR radio are displayed in the main window pane.
2.
Expand Protection Schemes in the resource tree area.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
691
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.1 — Protection Schemes resource tree expanded
3.
Protection scheme Select action.
4.
a.
To View Core Protection Scheme parameters, go to step 4.
b.
To View Synchronization Protection Scheme parameters, go to step 6.
c.
To View Radio Channel Protection Schemes parameters, go to step 7
View Core Protection Scheme parameters Select Protection Schemes/Slot#1-2/Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. The Protection Schemes Parameter tab displays Core protection scheme parameters in the main window. See Figure 57.2.
692
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.2 — Core-E Protection Scheme Parameter tab
5.
6.
From the Restoration Criteria partition, restoration criteria selection and provision if required: a.
Select restoration criteria radio button, Not Revertive or Revertive.
b.
Click Apply.
View Synchronization Protection Scheme parameters Select Protection Schemes/Synchronization Protection in the resource tree area. The synchronization Protection Schemes Parameter tab displays in the main window. See Figure 57.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
693
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.3 — Synchronization Protection Scheme Parameter tab
The Synchronization switching scheme is provisioned on the Synchronization tab. For detailed procedure to provision Synchronization switching parameters see ister synchronization. 7.
View Radio Channel Protection Schemes parameters Select Protection Schemes/Radio channel (Dir#x.y) in the resource tree area. The Protection Scheme Parameters tab displays in the main window. See Figure 57.4.
694
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.4 — Radio Channel Protection Scheme Parameter tab
8.
To view EPS protection scheme parameter, select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area.
9.
To view HSB protection scheme parameter, select HSB Protection in the resource tree area.
10. To view EPS protection scheme parameter, select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. To provision the Equipment Protection Schemes parameter 1.
Select Protection Schemes/Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. The Protection Scheme Parameters tab displays in the main window. See Figure 57.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
695
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.5 — Equipment Protection Scheme Parameter tab
2.
Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area.
Note: For 1+1 HSB/SD protection type, EPS restoration criteria is always dimmed. The restoration criteria selected for HSB protection is applied to EPS automatically.
3.
From the Restoration Criteria partition, restoration criteria selection and provision if required: a.
Select restoration criteria radio button, Not Revertive or Revertive.
b.
Click Apply.
To provision the Hot StandBy Protection Schemes parameter 1.
Select Protection Schemes/HSB Protection in the resource tree area. The HSB Protection Scheme Parameters tab displays in the main window. See Figure 57.6.
696
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.6 — HSB Protection Scheme Parameter tab
2.
Select HSB Protection in the resource tree area.
Note: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available.
3.
From the Restoration Criteria partition, restoration criteria selection and provision if required: a.
Select restoration criteria radio button, Not Revertive or Revertive.
b.
Click Apply.
To provision Rx Radio Protection Schemes parameters 1.
Select Protection Schemes/Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. The Rx Radio Protection Scheme Parameters tab displays in the main window. See Figure 57.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
697
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.7 — Rx Radio Protection Scheme Parameter tab
2.
Select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area.
3.
Select Protection Scheme Parameters Tab.
4.
From the Restoration Criteria partition, restoration criteria selection and provision if required: a.
Select restoration criteria radio button, Not Revertive or Revertive.
b.
Select Physical Cable in the RPS configuration pane if an RPS cable is in use. If the Physical cable check box is not checked, a warning is displayed. Figure 57.8 — Physical Cable warning example
698
c.
Click Yes to proceed, or No to return to the Protection Scheme Parameters Tab
d.
Click Apply in the Protection Scheme Parameters Tab.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
58 — Provision Protection Type
58.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision protection type on a pair of Core-E or CorEvo cards, transponder cards, and radio transceivers in the system.
58.2 — Prerequisites Both Core cards, transponder cards, and radio transceivers must be enabled before 1+1 EPS protection can be provisioned.
58.3 — General Transponder cards MPTACC (MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio), P2E3DS3, P32E1DS1 and/or SDHACC can be installed in any of the universal slots 3 through 8. The MSS-8 can be configured with a maximum of three protected pairs. The MSS-4 can be configured with a maximum of one protected pair. In 1+1 EPS protected configuration, the main transponder card is resident in slots 3, 5, and/ or 7. The spare transponder card is resident in slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively. The main and spare cards must be plugged in side-by-side. MPTACC radio cards 1+1 EPS traffic/services protection switching when main (slots 3, 5, and/or 7) and spare (slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively) are correctly equipped and configured. Up to two 1+1 EPS protection pairs can be configured in this configuration. Two MPTACC radio ports on the same MPTACC card 1+1 EPS traffic/services protection switching when both MPT Access ports are correctly equipped and configured on the same MPTACC radio card. One 1+1 EPS protection pair can be configured per MPTACC card.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
699
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
58.4 — Procedure This section provides the following procedures: •
To provision MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Transceiver Protection Type
•
To provision E1/DS1 Protection Type
•
To provision DS3 Protection Type
•
To provision SDH Protection Type
•
To provision MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU Protection Type
To provision MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Transceiver Protection Type Note: Spare MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver must be enabled prior to provisioning MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver protection type.
1.
Select MPT-HL Dir#-Ch# or MPT-HLC Dir#-Ch# in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver icon in blue in the resource list area.
2.
Select Settings tab. See Figure 58.1. Figure 58.1 — MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Transceiver Settings tab
700
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 3.
From the Protection Type drop-down menu, select: no Protection, 1+1 HSB/SD, or 1+1 FD protection type.
4.
Click Apply. Protection information updating window opens.
5.
Click OK. Figure 58.2 — MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Protection Type provisioned
To provision E1/DS1 Protection Type 1.
Select the MSS/DS1 or MSS/E1 card to provision with protection in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the MSS/P32E1DS1 card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 58.3.
2.
From the Protection Type drop-down menu, select no Protection or 1+1 EPS.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
701
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.3 — Provision P32E1DS1 Protection Type
3.
Click Apply. Protection information updating window opens.
4.
702
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.4 — P32E1DS1 Protection Type provisioned
To provision DS3 Protection Type 1.
Select MSS/DS3 card to provision with protection in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the MSS/P2E3DS3 (DS3) card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 58.5.
2.
From the Protection Type drop-down menu, select no Protection or 1+1 EPS.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
703
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.5 — Provision P2E3DS3 Protection Type
3.
Click Apply. Protection information updating window opens.
4.
704
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.6 — P2E3DS3 Protection Type provisioned
To provision SDH Protection Type Note: When provisioning ports for 1+1 EPS Protection, provision the main ports. Then only enable the spare ports. Then re-provision 1+1 EPS protection.
Note: It is not possible to enable a port while 1+1 EPS protection is enabled. To grow an SDH port after 1+1 EPS protection is provisioned, the operator must disable 1+1 EPS protection. Enable the new port. Then re-provision 1+1 EPS protection.
1.
Select the card to provision with protection in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 58.5.
2.
From the Protection Type drop-down menu, select no Protection or 1+1 EPS.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
705
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.7 — Provision SDH Protection Type
3.
Click Apply. Protection information updating window opens.
4.
706
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.8 — SDH Protection Type provisioned
To provision MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU Protection Type Caution: RPS cable is mandatory with MPT-HC-HQAM or MPT-XP-HQAM in 1+1 configuration when channel spacing is higher than 30 MHz and the HQAM radio is not MPT-HC compatible. A warning dialog box appears when this configuration is set up. Note: Spare MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU must be enabled prior to provisioning MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU protection type.
Note: MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM 1+1 radio protection is not ed on Transceiver enabled on Core-E Ethernet ports.
Note: MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM 1+1 radio protection is ed on Transceivers enabled on MPTACC cards when main (slots 3, 5, and/or 7) and spare (slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively) are correctly equipped and configured. Up to two 1+1 EPS protection pairs can be configured per pair of MPTACC cards in this configuration.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
707
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
Note: MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM 1+1 radio protection is ed on Transceivers enabled on a MPTACC radio card when two MPTACC ports on the same MPTACC card are correctly equipped and configured on the same MPTACC card. One 1+1 EPS protection pair can be configured per MPTACC card.
1.
Select MPT-HC Dir#-Ch# or MPT-HQAM Dir#-Ch# in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU icon in blue in the resource list area. See Figure 58.9.
Figure 58.9 — Provision MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Protection Type
708
2.
From the Protection Type drop-down menu, select: no Protection, 1+1 HSB/SD, or 1+1 FD protection type.
3.
From the Protect Port drop-down menu, select Slot#n Port#m.
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.10 — MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Protection Type selection
Protection information updating window opens. 5.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
709
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.11 — MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Protection Type provisioned
710
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
59 — Configure radio parameters
59.1 — Purpose This chapter describes the radio parameters and provides procedures to configure radio parameters.
59.2 — General To aid in correct provisioning of the radio parameters, establish communication with the radio (MPT-HC, MPT-HC-HQAM, MPT-XP, MPT-XP-HQAM, 9558HC, MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT-HLS). To provision an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM/9558HC (MPT ODU) radio ports, one of the following must be provisioned for each MPT ODU: •
Ethernet port on an enabled Core card
•
Radio ports on an enabled MPTACC (MPT Access) card
•
SFP ports on an enabled P8ETH card
•
SFP ports on an enabled EASv2 card
•
Ethernet ports on an MSS-1 unit: communication with the MSS-1 unit must be established.
•
Ethernet ports on an MSS-O unit: communication with the MSS-O must be established.
To provision the MPT-HL/HLC/HLS radio parameters, one of the following must be provisioned for the MPT-HLx: •
SFP port on an enabled Core card
•
SFP ports on an enabled P8ETH card
•
SFP ports on an enabled EASv2 card
•
SFP ports on an MSS-1 unit: communication with the MSS-1 unit must be established
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
711
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
Provision the radio protection scheme before provisioning MPT-HLx/MPT ODU radio channel parameters. If MPT-HLx/MPT ODU radio parameters are provisioned before the protection scheme, unexpected radio alarms may be reported on the radio channel. To clear these unexpected radio alarms, a system restart is required. Note: Most procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen. However, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
Note: All ed channel plans do not all possible radio profile combinations. For a table of ed profiles per radio channel plan, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual Engineering Specifications section.
59.2.1 — Monodirectional links For the management of monodirectional radio links, different configurations are needed on each side of the link. Table 59.1describes the configuration requirements. Table 59.1 — Configurations in monodirectional links Parameter
Tx only node
Rx only node
ATPC
Should not be enabled; cannot work
Should not be enabled; cannot work
ACM
Should not be enabled; cannot work
Should not be enabled; cannot work
L1 LAG
Should not be enabled; cannot work
Should not be enabled; cannot work
Ring
Should not be enabled; cannot work
Should not be enabled; cannot work
Radio PM
Should not be enabled; it works on the Rx side
Can be enabled
Link identifier
Should not be enabled; it works on the Rx side
Can be enabled
PPP
Must be disabled (otherwise a PPP Failure alarm will be raised)
Must be disabled (otherwise a PPP Failure alarm will be raised)
No Rx Radio Alarms alarm profile
Must be configured in the radio (otherwise all the Rx Radio alarms will be raised)
—
712
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Prerequisites Table 59.1 — Configurations in monodirectional links (Continued) Parameter
Tx only node
Rx only node
No Tx Radio Alarms alarm profile
—
Must be configured in the radio (otherwise all the Tx Radio alarms will be raised)
Tx Mute
—
Transmitter must be muted with Tx Mute command
Space diversity combiner for MPT-HLS
Should not be equipped on the Tx side
Can be equipped only on the receiver side
RF switch for MPT-HLS
Should be mounted and connected
Should be mounted and connected
59.3 — Prerequisites To provision a radio, the ing radio port (card, or card plus port) must be provisioned before beginning the procedures in this chapter.
59.4 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Radio Main View
•
To ister the MPT-HL transceiver
•
To provision the MPT-HLC transceiver
•
To ister the MPT-HLS transceiver
•
To ister the MPT ODU
•
To provision the radio for fixed modulation using data help
•
To provision the radio for adaptive modulation using data help
•
To ister the Tx Mute settings
•
To ister the ACM Manual settings
•
To remove XPIC
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
713
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To open the Radio Main View 1.
From the Equipment tab, select the radio in the resource tree: MSS/RADIO, MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT ODU Dir#-Ch#. The selected radio type in the resource list will be highlighted in blue. See Figure 59.1 for an example of selecting an MPT-HC radio. Figure 59.1 — MPT-HC radio selected
2.
Double-click on the radio type icon. See Figure 59.1 for an example of selecting an MPT-HC radio. The corresponding radio Main View displays:
3.
714
•
MPT Main View (MPT ODU)
•
CORE Main View (MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT ODU)
•
EAS Main View (MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT ODU)
•
MSS CORE Main View (MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT ODU)
Click on the Settings tab; see Figure 59.2 for an example of selecting an MPT ODU radio.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.2 — MPT ODU Radio Main View Settings tab
To ister the MPT-HL transceiver 1.
Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio protection type, go to step 2.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio for fixed modulation, go to step 6.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 9.
d.
To Provision the MPT-HL 1+1 spare radio channel, go to step 12.
e.
To Provision the MPT-HL manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 15
f.
To Provision the spare MPT-HL RTPC, go to step 18.
g.
To Provision the MPT-HL Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 20.
h.
To Provision the spare MPT-HL ATPC, go to step 23
i.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio protection scheme, go to step 25.
j.
To Provision the MPT-HL link identifier, go to step 32
k.
To Provision the MPT-HL Synchronization Status Messaging, go to step 34
l.
To Provision the MPT-HL Point to Point Protocol settings, go to step 35.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
715
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
m.
To Provision the PKT throughput booster setting, go to step 36.
n.
To ister the MPT-HL Alarm Profile settings, go to step 37.
Provision the MPT-HL radio protection type
Note: Any spare MPT-HL transceiver must be enabled prior to provisioning MPT-HL transceiver protection scheme.
From the Equipment tab, select the MPT-HL Dir#-Ch1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will be highlighted in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT-HL transceiver icon in blue in the resource list area. 3. Note: Before changing the protection type provisioning, you must first apply the No Protection option to the protection type. For example: If 1+1 HSB is provisioned and 1+1 FD is needed, first select No Protection and click Apply, then select 1+1 FD and click Apply.
From the Protection Type drop-down menu, choose No Protection, 1+1 HSB/ SD, or 1+1 FD. See Figure 59.3. 4.
Click Apply. Figure 59.3 — MPT-HL transceiver protection type provisioning
716
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 5.
6.
Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio for fixed modulation, go to step 6.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 9.
Provision the MPT-HL radio for fixed modulation Open the appropriate radio main view tab; depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.4. Figure 59.4 — MPT-HL Settings tab for fixed modulation
7.
Provision MPT-HL radio port:
Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one ed by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
i.
In the Mode field, select the Preset radio button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired channel spacing (5 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz, or 40 MHz), modulation scheme (4 QAM, 16 QAM, 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128 QAM, or 256 QAM), and option (Std or High Gain).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
717
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures iv.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The Data Help window opens.
v.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value.
vi.
When the MPT-HL is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq (KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT-HL is not connected, enter the TX Radio Frequency within the allowed range.
vii. If the MPT-HL is not connected, enter the Rx Radio Frequency within the allowed range. Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx Radio Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
viii. Enter the MPT-HL radio channel Label, if applicable. ix.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HL configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HL cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen are the same as the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
8.
9.
Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HL 1+1 spare radio channel, go to step 13.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 16.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HL Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 19.
Provision the MPT-HL radio for adaptive modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.5.
718
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.5 — MPT-HL Settings tab for adaptive modulation
10. Provision MPT-HL radio port: Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one ed by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
i.
In the Mode field, select the Adaptive radio button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired reference modulation scheme (4 QAM, 16 QAM, 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128 QAM, or 256 QAM), and option (Std or High Gain). The reference modulation will be the lowest available modulation scheme in the ed modulation range.
iv.
In 1+1 HSB configurations, from the Driving MSE drop-down menu, choose Lowest or Highest MSE.
v.
In the ed Modulation , choose all the modulation schemes to be used by the adaptive modulation. The schemes must be contiguous.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
719
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures vi.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The MPT-HL Shifter Data Help window opens.
vii. In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value. viii. When the MPT-HL is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT-HL is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range. ix.
If the MPT-HL is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
x.
Enter the MPT-HL radio channel Label, if applicable.
xi.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HL configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HL cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen is a mirror image of the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
11. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HL 1+1 spare radio channel, go to step 13.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 16.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HL Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 19.
d.
To perform additional procedures To ister the MPT-HL transceiver, go to step 1.
12. Provision the MPT-HL 1+1 spare radio channel Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.5.
720
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.6 — MPT-HL 1+1 settings tab
13. Provision the MPT-HL 1+1 spare radio channel: i.
Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range. The Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency +/- Shifter Frequency (based on the high or low channel selected)
ii.
Click Apply.
14. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HL manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 16.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 19.
15. Provision the MPT-HL manual transmit power level (RTPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.4. 16. Provision the MPT-HL radio channel transmit power level: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
721
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Choose the TxPower (dBm) level for the lowest modulation scheme in the range. Power levels for the other modulation schemes will be set automatically.
ii.
Click Apply.
17. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT-HL RTPC, go to step 18.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio protection scheme, go to step 25.
18. Provision the spare MPT-HL RTPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.6. 19. Provision the Spare MPT-HL radio channel transmit power level: i.
Choose the TxPower (dBm) level for the lowest modulation scheme in the range. Power levels for the other modulation schemes will be set automatically.
ii.
Click Apply.
20. Provision the MPT-HL Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.7.
722
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.7 — MPT-HL settings with ATPC
21. Provision the MPT-HL radio channel ATPC: i.
Select ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-min / -max dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
22. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT-HL RTPC, go to step 18.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio protection scheme, go to step 25.
23. Provision the spare MPT-HL ATPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.7 for an example of the ATPC parameters. 24. Provision the spare MPT-HL radio channel ATPC: i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-90.0 / -20.0 dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
723
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 25. Provision the MPT-HL radio protection scheme Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Protection Schemes tab; see Figure 59.8. Note: Revertive restoration criteria is the default value.
Figure 59.8 — MPT-HL transceiver protection criteria provisioning
Note: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available.
26. Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. 27. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
28. Select HSB Protection in the resource tree area. 29. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required:
724
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
30. Select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. 31. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
32. Provision the MPT-HL link identifier Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.9. Figure 59.9 — MPT-HL Additional Settings tab
33. Provision MPT-HL radio link identifier: i.
Select the Link Identifier Configuration Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Expected Identifier value (0 to 255).
iii.
Enter the Sent Identifier value (0 to 255).
iv.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
725
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: If the MPT-HL is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM, PKT throughput booster, or PPP settings on an individual radio. Go to ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to ister LAG ports.
34. Provision the MPT-HL Synchronization Status Messaging i.
Select the Synchronization SSM Enabled check box; see Figure 59.9.
ii.
Click Apply.
35. Provision the MPT-HL Point to Point Protocol settings i.
From the PPP RF , select the Enabled check box; see Figure 59.9.
ii.
Select the Routing IP Protocol radio button: (OSPF or None).
iii.
If OSPF is selected, then select OSPF Area: (0 to 4).
Note: OSPF Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning the PPP RF channel.
iv.
Click Apply.
36. Provision the PKT throughput booster setting See Figure 59.9 for the following steps: i.
From the Pkt Throughput Booster , select the Enabled check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
37. ister the MPT-HL Alarm Profile settings See Figure 59.9 for the following steps: a.
In the Alarm Profile , click on the Alarm Severity Profile icon. The Alarm Severity Profile window opens.
b.
Choose an alarm severity profile. Click on the Show details button for more information if needed.
c.
Click Apply.
To provision the MPT-HLC transceiver 1.
726
Select an action. a.
To Configure the MPT-HLC co-channel XPIC, go to step 2.
b.
To Configure the MPT-HLC 1+1 XPIC, go to step 13.
c.
To Configure the MPT-HLC radio protection type, go to step 24.
d.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29.
e.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 32.
f.
To Provision the MPT-HLC 1+1 spare radio channel, go to step 35.
g.
To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
h.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLC RTPC, go to step 41. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
i.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
j.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLC ATPC, go to step 47.
k.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio protection scheme, go to step 48.
l.
To Provision the MPT-HLC link identifier, go to step 54.
m.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Synchronization Status Messaging, go to step 56.
n.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Point to Point Protocol settings, go to step 58.
o.
To Provision the PKT throughput booster setting, go to step 59.
p.
To ister the MPT-HLC Alarm Profile settings, go to step 61.
q.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio channel encryption, go to step 65.
r.
To ister the RX squelch settings, go to step 68.
s.
To Configure the branching loss, go to step 71.
Configure the MPT-HLC co-channel XPIC Open the appropriate radio main view and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.20.
3.
4.
Provision MPT-HLC 1+0 Horizontal XPIC Configuration: i.
Provision 1+0 Horizontal radio channel. See step 29 or 32 for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
ii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/ XPIC.
iii.
Click Apply.
iv.
Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal.
v.
Click Apply.
Provision MPT-HLC 1+0 Vertical XPIC Configuration: i.
Provision 1+0 Vertical radio channel. Provision the Vertical radio channel using the following radio parameters identical to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 3 i). •
Mode
•
Reference Channel Spacing
•
Modulation
•
Shifter
•
TX Freq
•
Rx Freq
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
727
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
5.
ii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 3 ii).
iii.
Click Apply.
iv.
Provision Vertical radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Vertical.
v.
Click Apply.
Open the XPIC Configuration tool. See Figure 59.10. Figure 59.10 — XPIC icon
XPIC Configuration tool displays. See Figure 59.11. Figure 59.11 — XPIC configuration window
6.
Select Horizontal Radio port and drag to draw line to Vertical RADIO port. XPIC Association pop-up displays. See Figure 59.12.
728
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.12 — Provision MPT-HLC co-channel XPIC association
7.
Click OK.
8.
Click Apply.
9.
Click Close.
10. From the MPT Main View, select the 1+0 Horizontal radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel. See Figure 59.13 for an example of a Provisioned Horizontal XPIC radio channel.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
729
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.13 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
11. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical 1+0 radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel. See Figure 59.14 for an example of a Provisioned Vertical XPIC radio channel.
730
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.14 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
12. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 42.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 44.
13. Configure the MPT-HLC 1+1 XPIC Open the appropriate radio main view. 14. Provision MPT-HLC Horizontal 1+1 HSB Configuration: See Figure 59.15 for the following steps: a.
Provision 1+1 HSB protection group. See step 24 for detailed steps to provision radio channel protection type.
b.
Provision main radio channel. See step 29 or 32 for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
c.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/ XPIC).
d.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
731
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures e.
Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal.
f.
Click Apply.
Figure 59.15 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
15. Configure MPT-HLC Vertical XPIC 1+1 HSB:
732
i.
Provision 1+1 HSB protection group. See step 24 for detailed steps to provision radio channel protection type.
ii.
Provision main Vertical radio channel. Provision the Vertical radio channel using the following radio parameters identical to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 14 i). •
Mode
•
Reference Channel Spacing
•
Modulation
•
Shifter
•
TX Freq
•
Rx Freq
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures iii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 14 iii).
iv.
Click Apply.
v.
Provision Vertical radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Vertical.
vi.
Click Apply.
16. Open XPIC Configuration tool. See Figure 59.10. XPIC Configuration tool displays. See Figure 59.11. 17. Select Horizontal Radio port and drag to draw line to Vertical RADIO port. XPIC Association pop-up displays. See Figure 59.16. Figure 59.16 — Provision MPT-HLC 1+1 XPIC association
18. Click OK. 19. Click Apply. 20. Click Close. 21. From the MPT Main View, select the Horizontal radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel. See Figure 59.17 for an example of a Provisioned Horizontal XPIC radio channel.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
733
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.17 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
22. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel. See Figure 59.18 for an example of a Provisioned Vertical XPIC radio channel.
734
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.18 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel
23. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 42.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 44.
24. Configure the MPT-HLC radio protection type Note: Spare MPT-HLC transceiver must be enabled prior to provisioning MPT-HLC transceiver protection scheme.
From the Equipment tab, select the MPT-HLC Dir#-Ch1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT-HLC transceiver icon in blue in the resource list area. Note: Before changing the protection type provisioning, you must first apply the No Protection option to the protection type. For example: If 1+1 HSB is provisioned and 1+1 FD is needed, first select No Protection and click Apply, then select 1+1 FD and click Apply.
25. From the Protection Type drop-down menu, choose: No Protection, 1+1 HSB (SD), or 1+1 FD protection scheme; see Figure 59.19. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
735
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The diversity receiver is ed on MPT-HLC version equipped with the combiner feature. The diversity receiver is ed on the following radio configurations: 1+0 no protection, 1+1 HSB (SD), 1+1 FD, with and without XPIC.
26. If a diversity receiver is in use, select the SD check box. 27. Click Apply. Figure 59.19 — MPT-HLC transceiver protection type provisioning
28. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 32.
29. Provision the MPT-HLC radio for fixed modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.20.
736
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.20 — MPT-HLC Settings tab for fixed modulation
30. Provision MPT-HLC radio port: Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one ed by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
i.
In the Mode field, select the Preset button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired channel spacing, modulation scheme, and option.
iv.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The Data Help window opens.
v.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value.
vi.
When the MPT-HLC is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT-HLC is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range.
vii. If the MPT-HLC is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
737
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
viii. Enter the MPT-HLC radio channel Label, if applicable. ix.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HLC configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HLC cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen are the same as the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
31. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio for fixed modulation, go to step 36.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 42.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 44.
32. Provision the MPT-HLC radio for adaptive modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.21.
738
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.21 — MPT-HLC Settings tab for adaptive modulation
33. Provision MPT-HLC radio port: Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one ed by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
i.
In the Mode field, select the Adaptive radio button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode drop-down menu. The Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired reference modulation scheme, and option. The reference modulation will be the lowest available modulation scheme in the ed modulation range.
iv.
In 1+1 HSB configurations, from the Driving MSE drop-down menu, choose Lowest or Highest MSE.
v.
In the ed Modulation , choose all the modulation schemes to be used by the adaptive modulation. The schemes must be contiguous.
vi.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The MPT-HLC Shifter Data Help window opens.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
739
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures vii. In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value. viii. When the MPT-HLC is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT-HLC is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range. ix.
If the MPT-HLC is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
x.
Enter the MPT-HLC radio channel Label, if applicable.
xi.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HLC configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HLC cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen is a mirror image of the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
34. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLC 1+1 spare radio channel, go to step 35.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 42.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 44.
35. Provision the MPT-HLC 1+1 spare radio channel Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.22.
740
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.22 — MPT-HLC 1+1 settings tab
36. Provision MPT-HLC 1+1 spare radio channel: a.
Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range.
b.
The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency +/- Shifter Frequency (based on the high or low channel selected)
c.
Click Apply.
37. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 39.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 44.
38. Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.20. 39. Provision MPT-HLC radio channel transmit power level: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
741
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Choose the TxPower (dBm) level for the lowest modulation scheme in the range. Power levels for the other modulation schemes will be set automatically.
ii.
Click Apply.
40. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLC RTPC, go to step 42.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio protection scheme, go to step 48.
41. Provision the spare MPT-HLC RTPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.22. 42. Provision Spare MPT-HLC radio channel transmit power level: i.
Choose the TxPower (dBm) level for the lowest modulation scheme in the range. Power levels for the other modulation schemes will be set automatically.
ii.
Click Apply.
43. Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.23.
742
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.23 — MPT-HLC settings with ATPC
44. Provision MPT-HLC radio channel ATPC: i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-min / -max dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
45. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLC ATPC, go to step 47.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio protection scheme, go to step 48.
46. Provision the spare MPT-HLC ATPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.23 for an example of the ATPC parameters. 47. Provision Spare MPT-HLC radio channel ATPC: i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-90.0 / -20.0 dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
743
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 48. Provision the MPT-HLC radio protection scheme Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select Protection Schemes tab; see Figure 59.24. Note: Revertive restoration criteria is the default value.
Figure 59.24 — MPT-HLC transceiver protection criteria provisioning
Danger: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available.
49. Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. i.
From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required:
ii.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
iii.
Click Apply.
50. Select HSB Protection in the resource tree area. 51. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: 744
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
52. Select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. 53. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
54. Provision the MPT-HLC link identifier Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.25. Figure 59.25 — MPT-HLC Additional Settings tab
55. Provision MPT-HLC radio link identifier: i.
Select Link Identifier Configuration Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Expected Identifier value (0 to 255).
iii.
Enter the Sent Identifier value (0 to 255).
iv.
Click Apply.
56. Provision the MPT-HLC Synchronization Status Messaging
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
745
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: If the MPT-HLC is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM or PPP settings on an individual radio. Go to ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to ister LAG ports.
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.25. 57. Provision MPT-HLC radio channel Synchronization SSM: i.
Select the Synchronization SSM Enabled check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
58. Provision the MPT-HLC Point to Point Protocol settings Note: If the MPT-HLC is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM or PPP settings on an individual radio. Go to ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to ister LAG ports.
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.25. i.
Provision MPT-HLC radio channel PPP:
ii.
From the PPP RF , select the Enabled check box.
iii.
Select the Routing IP Protocol: (OSPF or None).
iv.
If OSPF is selected, then select OSPF Area: (0 to 4).
Note: OSPF Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning the PPP RF channel.
v.
Click Apply.
59. Provision the PKT throughput booster setting Open the appropriate radio main view and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.25. 60. Provision MPT-HLC radio PKT throughput booster: See Figure 59.25 for the following steps: i.
From the Pkt Throughput Booster , select the Enabled check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
61. ister the MPT-HLC Alarm Profile settings Open the appropriate radio main view and click on the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.25. 62. In the Alarm Profile , click on the icon. The Alarm Severity Profile window opens. 63. Choose an alarm severity profile. Select the Show details button for more information if needed. 64. Click Apply. 746
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 65. Provision the MPT-HLC radio channel encryption Note: Before provisioning radio channel encryption, the radio channel is running error free and operating correctly.
If the radio is remotely managed, the encryption should be configured on the remote radio before the local one. The configuration change will cause the remote radio to become temporarily unreachable until the local radio is also configured. Encryption mismatch is not part of the switching criteria for L1 LAG or ERPS. To avoid traffic or supervision interruption if the radio is part of an L1 LAG or ERPS topology, execute a mute procedure of the radio link before configuring encryption. Proceed radio link by radio link. Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.25. 66. If the radio is part of an L1 LAG or ERPS topology, mute the transmitter; see To ister the Tx Mute settings. 67. Provision the radio channel Encryption: i.
Click on the Edit phrase button.The Edit phrase window opens.
ii.
Enter and confirm the new phrase.
iii.
Click Apply in the Edit phrase window.
68. ister the RX squelch settings Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your configuration and select the Maintenance tab.See Figure 59.26.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
747
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.26 — MPT-HLC Maintenance tab
69. Squelch the main or diversity receiver: i.
Select the Rx Main or Rx Diversity check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
70. Release squelch on the main or diversity receiver: i.
Select the Rx Main or Rx Diversity check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
71. Configure the branching loss Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your configuration and select the Measurements tab; see Figure 59.27.
748
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.27 — Measurements tab for MPT-HLC
72. Enter the measured Tx and Rx Branching Loss values. The Diversity Rx Branching Loss can also be configured if the diversity combiner is in use. If measured values are not available, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A MPT-HL/HLC Engineering Specifications for information. 73. Click Apply. To ister the MPT-HLS transceiver 1.
Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS co-channel XPIC configuration, go to step 2.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS 1+1 XPIC configuration, go to step 13.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio protection type, go to step 24.
d.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29.
e.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 32.
f.
To Provision the MPT-HLS 1+1 spare radio channel, go to step 35.
g.
To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
h.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLS RTPC, go to step 41.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
749
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
i.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
j.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLS ATPC, go to step 46.
k.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio protection scheme, go to step 48.
l.
To Provision the MPT-HLS link identifier, go to step 54.
m.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Synchronization Status Messaging, go to step 56.
n.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Point to Point Protocol settings, go to step 58.
o.
To Provision the PKT throughput booster setting, go to step 59.
p.
To ister the MPT-HLS Alarm Profile settings, go to step 61.
q.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio channel encryption, go to step 65.
r.
To ister the RX squelch settings, go to step 68.
Provision the MPT-HLS co-channel XPIC configuration Open the appropriate radio main view click on the Settings tab; see Figure 59.33.
3.
4.
Provision MPT-HLS 1+0 Horizontal XPIC Configuration: i.
Provision 1+0 Horizontal radio channel. See step 29 or 32 for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
ii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/ XPIC.
iii.
Click Apply.
iv.
Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal.
v.
Click Apply.
Provision MPT-HLS 1+0 Vertical XPIC Configuration: i.
ii.
750
Provision 1+0 Vertical radio channel. Provision the Vertical radio channel using the following radio parameters identical to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 3 i). •
Mode
•
Reference Channel Spacing
•
Modulation
•
Shifter
•
TX Freq
•
Rx Freq
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 3 ii).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
5.
iii.
Click Apply.
iv.
Provision Vertical radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Vertical.
v.
Click Apply.
Open the XPIC Configuration tool. See Figure 59.10. XPIC Configuration tool displays. See Figure 59.11.
6.
Select Horizontal Radio port and drag to draw line to Vertical RADIO port. XPIC Association pop-up displays. See Figure 59.12.
7.
Click OK.
8.
Click Apply.
9.
Click Close.
10. From the MPT Main View, select the 1+0 Horizontal radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel. See Figure 59.13 for an example of a Provisioned Horizontal XPIC radio channel. Figure 59.28 — Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
751
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 11. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical 1+0 radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel. 12. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
13. Provision the MPT-HLS 1+1 XPIC configuration Open the appropriate radio main view. 14. Provision MPT-HLS Horizontal 1+1 HSB Configuration: See Figure 59.29 for the following steps:
752
i.
Provision 1+1 HSB protection group. See step 24 for detailed steps to provision radio channel protection type.
ii.
Provision main radio channel. See step 29 or 32 for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
iii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/ XPIC).
iv.
Click Apply.
v.
Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal.
vi.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.29 — Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
15. Provision MPT-HLS Vertical XPIC 1+1 HSB Configuration: i.
Provision 1+1 HSB protection group. See step 24 for detailed steps to provision radio channel protection type.
ii.
Provision main Vertical radio channel. Provision the Vertical radio channel using the following radio parameters identical to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 14 i). •
Mode
•
Reference Channel Spacing
•
Modulation
•
Shifter
•
TX Freq
•
Rx Freq
iii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 14 iii).
iv.
Click Apply.
v.
Provision Vertical radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Vertical.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
753
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures vi.
Click Apply.
16. Open XPIC Configuration tool. XPIC Configuration tool displays. 17. Select Horizontal Radio port and drag to draw line to Vertical RADIO port. XPIC Association pop-up displays. See Figure 59.30. Figure 59.30 — Provision MPT-HLS 1+1 XPIC association
18. Click OK. 19. Click Apply. 20. Click Close. 21. From the MPT Main View, select the Horizontal radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel. See Figure 59.29 for an example of a Provisioned Horizontal XPIC radio channel. 22. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel. See Figure 59.31 for an example of a Provisioned Vertical XPIC radio channel.
754
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.31 — Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel
23. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
24. Provision the MPT-HLS radio protection type Note: Spare MPT-HLS transceiver must be enabled prior to provisioning MPT-HLS transceiver protection scheme.
From the Equipment tab, select the MPT-HLS Dir#-Ch1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT-HLS transceiver icon in blue in the resource list area. Note: Before changing the protection type provisioning, you must first apply the No Protection option to the protection type. For example: If 1+1 HSB is provisioned and 1+1 FD is needed, first select No Protection and click Apply, then select 1+1 FD and click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
755
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 25. From the Protection Type drop-down menu, choose: No Protection, 1+1 HSB (SD), or 1+1 FD protection scheme. Figure 59.3. Note: The diversity receiver is ed on MPT-HLC version equipped with the combiner feature. The diversity receiver is ed on the following radio configurations: 1+0 no protection, 1+1 HSB (SD), 1+1 FD, with and without XPIC.
26. If a diversity receiver is in use, select the SD check box. 27. Click Apply. Figure 59.32 — MPT-HLS transceiver protection type provisioning
28. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 32.
29. Provision the MPT-HLS radio for fixed modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.33.
756
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.33 — MPT-HLS Settings tab for fixed modulation
30. Provision MPT-HLS radio port: Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one ed by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
i.
In the Mode field, select the Preset button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired channel spacing, modulation scheme, and option.
iv.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The Data Help window opens.
v.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value.
vi.
When the MPT-HLS is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT-HLS is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range.
vii. If the MPT-HLS is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
757
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
viii. Enter the MPT-HLS radio channel Label, if applicable. ix.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HLS configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HLS cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen are the same as the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
31. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
32. Provision the MPT-HLS radio for adaptive modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.34.
758
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.34 — MPT-HLS Settings tab for adaptive modulation
33. Provision MPT-HLS radio port: Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one ed by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
i.
In the Mode field, select the Adaptive radio button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode drop-down menu. The Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired reference modulation scheme, and option. The reference modulation will be the lowest available modulation scheme in the ed modulation range.
iv.
In 1+1 HSB or FD configurations, from the Driving MSE drop-down menu, choose Lowest or Highest MSE.
v.
In the ed Modulation , choose all the modulation schemes to be used by the adaptive modulation. The schemes must be contiguous.
vi.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The MPT-HLS Shifter Data Help window opens.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
759
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures vii. In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value. viii. When the MPT-HLS is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT-HLS is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range. ix.
If the MPT-HLS is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
x.
Enter the MPT-HLS radio channel Label, if applicable.
xi.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HLS configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HLS cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen is a mirror image of the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
34. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
35. Provision the MPT-HLS 1+1 spare radio channel Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.35.
760
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.35 — MPT-HLS 1+1 settings tab
36. Provision MPT-HLS 1+1 spare radio channel: a.
Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range.
b.
The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency +/- Shifter Frequency (based on the high or low channel selected)
c.
Click Apply.
37. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
38. Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.33. 39. Provision MPT-HLS radio channel transmit power level: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
761
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Choose the TxPower (dBm) level for the lowest modulation scheme in the range. Power levels for the other modulation schemes will be set automatically.
ii.
Click Apply.
40. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLS RTPC, go to step 41.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio protection scheme, go to step 48.
41. Provision the spare MPT-HLS RTPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.35. 42. Provision Spare MPT-HLS radio channel transmit power level: i.
Choose the TxPower (dBm) level for the lowest modulation scheme in the range. Power levels for the other modulation schemes will be set automatically.
ii.
Click Apply.
43. Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.36.
762
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.36 — MPT-HLS settings with ATPC
44. Provision MPT-HLS radio channel ATPC: i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm). If the ATPC Range is over 15 dBm, a warning window appears; see Figure 59.37. Figure 59.37 — ATPC warning
Click on the OK button in the warning window to proceed. iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-min / -max dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
45. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLS ATPC, go to step 46.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
763
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio protection scheme, go to step 48.
46. Provision the spare MPT-HLS ATPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.36 for an example of the ATPC parameters. 47. Provision Spare MPT-HLS radio channel ATPC: i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold.
iv.
Click Apply.
48. Provision the MPT-HLS radio protection scheme Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select Protection Schemes tab; see Figure 59.38. Note: Revertive restoration criteria is the default value.
Figure 59.38 — MPT-HLS transceiver protection criteria provisioning
Danger: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available.
764
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 49. Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. i.
From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required:
ii.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
iii.
Click Apply.
50. Select HSB Protection in the resource tree area. 51. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
52. Select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. 53. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Select the Physical Cable check box in the RPS Configuration area if an RPS cable is in use.
iii.
Click Apply.
54. Provision the MPT-HLS link identifier Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.39.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
765
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.39 — MPT-HLS Additional Settings tab
55. Provision MPT-HLS radio link identifier: i.
Select the Link Identifier Configuration Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Expected Identifier value (0 to 255).
iii.
Enter the Sent Identifier value (0 to 255).
iv.
Click Apply.
56. Provision the MPT-HLS Synchronization Status Messaging Note: If the MPT-HLS is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM or PPP settings on an individual radio. Go to ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to ister LAG ports.
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.39. 57. Provision MPT-HLS radio channel Synchronization SSM: i.
Select the Synchronization SSM Enabled check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
58. Provision the MPT-HLS Point to Point Protocol settings
766
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: If the MPT-HLS is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM or PPP settings on an individual radio. Go to ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to ister LAG ports.
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.39. Provision MPT-HLS radio channel PPP: i.
From the PPP RF , select the Enabled check box.
ii.
Select the Routing IP Protocol: (OSPF or None).
iii.
If OSPF is selected, then select OSPF Area: (0 to 4).
Note: OSPF Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning the PPP RF channel.
iv.
Click Apply.
59. Provision the PKT throughput booster setting Open the appropriate radio main view and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.39. 60. Provision MPT-HLC radio PKT throughput booster: See Figure 59.39 for the following steps: i.
From the Pkt Throughput Booster , select the Enabled check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
61. ister the MPT-HLS Alarm Profile settings Open the appropriate radio main view and click on the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.39. 62. In the Alarm Profile , click on the icon. The Alarm Severity Profile window opens. 63. Choose an alarm severity profile. Select the Show details button for more information if needed. 64. Click Apply. 65. Provision the MPT-HLS radio channel encryption Note: Before provisioning radio channel encryption, the radio channel is running error free and operating correctly.
If the radio is remotely managed, the encryption should be configured on the remote radio before the local one. The configuration change will cause the remote radio to become temporarily unreachable until the local radio is also configured.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
767
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Encryption mismatch is not part of the switching criteria for L1 LAG or ERPS. To avoid traffic or supervision interruption if the radio is part of an L1 LAG or ERPS topology, execute a mute procedure of the radio link before configuring encryption. Proceed radio link by radio link. Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.39. 66. If the radio is part of an L1 LAG or ERPS topology, mute the transmitter; see To ister the Tx Mute settings. 67. Provision the radio channel Encryption: i.
Click on the Edit phrase button.The Edit phrase window opens.
ii.
Enter and confirm the new phrase.
iii.
Click Apply in the Edit phrase window.
68. ister the RX squelch settings Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your configuration and select the Maintenance tab.See Figure 59.40. Figure 59.40 — MPT-HLS Maintenance tab
69. Squelch the main or diversity receiver:
768
i.
Select the Rx Main or Rx Diversity check box.
ii.
Click Apply. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 70. Release squelch on the main or diversity receiver: i.
Select the Rx Main or Rx Diversity check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
To ister the MPT ODU 1.
2.
Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU power scheme, go to step 2.
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU co-channel XPIC configuration, go to step 7.
c.
To Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 XPIC configuration, go to step 18.
d.
To Provision the MPT ODU radio protection type, go to step 29.
e.
To Provision the radio for fixed modulation, go to step 39.
f.
To Provision the radio for Adaptive Modulation, go to step 42.
g.
To Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 FD spare radio channel, go to step 45.
h.
To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step 48.
i.
To Provision the spare MPT ODU RTPC, go to step 51.
j.
To Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 53.
k.
To Provision the spare MPT ODU ATPC, go to step 56.
l.
To Provision the MPT ODU radio protection scheme, go to step 58.
m.
To Provision the MPT ODU link identifier, go to step 66.
n.
To Provision the MPT ODU Synchronization Status Messaging, go to step 68.
o.
To Provision the MPT ODU Point to Point Protocol settings, go to step 69.
p.
To Provision the PKT throughput booster setting, go to step 70.
q.
To ister the MPT ODU Alarm Profile settings, go to step 71.
r.
To Provision the MPT ODU radio channel encryption, go to step 72.
s.
To Configure the Low Voltage Alarm for the MPT-HQAM, go to step 73.
Provision the MPT ODU power scheme Provision MPT ODU power scheme
Note: MPT ODU power scheme provisioning applies to MPT ODUs enabled on the MPTACC card, MSS-1 Core with PFoE , EASv2 with PFoE , or MSS-O with PFoE .
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
769
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures For MPT ODU enabled on a Core Ethernet port, P8ETH Ethernet port, EASv2 without PFoE , or an MSS-1 Core without PFoE , an external source of power is required. The external source may be either a Power Injector card/Box. MPT Power Unit, MPT Extended Power Unit, or direct connection to an external battery source. In these applications no power scheme provisioning is required. 3.
Which card s MPT ODU radio port? a.
If MPTACC, MSS-1 port with PFoE , EASv2 with PFoE , or MSS-O with PFoE , go to step 4.
b.
If Core-E, CorEvo, P8ETH, EASv2without PFoE , or MSS-1 port without PFoE , MPT ODU power scheme provisioning is not required. Go to step 6.
4.
Open the appropriate radio main view.
5.
Provision MPT ODU power source: See Figure 59.41 for the following steps: i.
Select Power Source.
ii.
Select the Source # in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the Source Number in blue in the resource list area.
iii.
Choose the Settings tab.
iv.
From the Source x area, select Power Source 1/2 Type radio button: QMA, PFoE, or Disabled.
Note: QMA is available with MPTACC only.
v.
770
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.41 — MPT ODU Power Source Settings tab (MPTACC card)
6.
7.
Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU co-channel XPIC configuration, go to step 7.
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 XPIC configuration, go to step 18.
c.
To Provision the MPT ODU radio protection type, go to step 29
d.
To Provision the radio for fixed modulation, go to step 39.
e.
To Provision the radio for Adaptive Modulation, go to step 42.
Provision the MPT ODU co-channel XPIC configuration Open the appropriate radio main view click on the Settings tab; see Figure 59.54.
8.
Provision MPT ODU 1+0 Horizontal XPIC Configuration: i.
Provision 1+0 Horizontal radio channel. See step 39 or 42 detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
ii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/ XPIC.
iii.
Click Apply.
iv.
Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
771
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures v. 9.
Click Apply.
Provision MPT ODU 1+0 Vertical XPIC Configuration: i.
Provision 1+0 Vertical radio channel. Provision the Vertical radio channel using the following radio parameters identical to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 8 i). •
Mode
•
Reference Channel Spacing
•
Modulation
•
Shifter
•
TX Freq
•
Rx Freq
ii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 8 ii).
iii.
Click Apply.
iv.
Provision Vertical radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Vertical.
v.
Click Apply.
10. Open the XPIC Configuration tool. See Figure 59.42. Figure 59.42 — XPIC icon
XPIC Configuration tool displays. See Figure 59.43.
772
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.43 — XPIC configuration window
11. Select Horizontal Radio port and drag to draw line to Vertical RADIO port. XPIC Association pop-up displays. See Figure 59.44.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
773
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.44 — Provision MPT ODU co-channel XPIC association
12. Click OK. 13. Click Apply. 14. Click Close. 15. From the MPT Main View, select the 1+0 Horizontal radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel. See Figure 59.45 for an example of a Provisioned Horizontal XPIC radio channel.
774
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.45 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
16. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical 1+0 radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel. See Figure 59.46 for an example of a Provisioned Vertical XPIC radio channel.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
775
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.46 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
17. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step 48
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 53.
18. Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 XPIC configuration Open the appropriate radio main view. 19. Provision MPT ODU Horizontal 1+1 HSB Configuration: See Figure 59.47 for the following steps:
776
i.
Provision 1+1 HSB protection group. See Provision the MPT ODU radio protection type for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
ii.
Provision main radio channel. See step 39 or 42 for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
iii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/ XPIC).
iv.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures v.
Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal.
vi.
Click Apply.
Figure 59.47 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
20. Provision MPT ODU Vertical XPIC 1+1 HSB Configuration: i.
Provision 1+1 HSB protection group. See step 29 for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
ii.
Provision main Vertical radio channel. Provision the Vertical radio channel using the following radio parameters identical to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 8 i). a.
Mode
b.
Reference Channel Spacing
c.
Modulation
d.
Shifter
e.
TX Freq
f.
Rx Freq
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
777
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures iii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 19 iii).
iv.
Click Apply.
v.
Provision Vertical radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Vertical.
vi.
Click Apply.
21. Open XPIC Configuration tool. See Figure 59.42. XPIC Configuration tool displays. See Figure 59.43. 22. Select Horizontal Radio port and drag to draw line to Vertical RADIO port. XPIC Association pop-up displays. See Figure 59.48. Figure 59.48 — Provision MPT ODU 1+1 XPIC association
23. Click OK. 24. Click Apply. 25. Click Close. 26. From the MPT Main View, select the Horizontal radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel. See Figure 59.49 for an example of a Provisioned Horizontal XPIC radio channel.
778
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.49 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
27. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel. See Figure 59.50 for an example of a Provisioned Vertical XPIC radio channel.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
779
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.50 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel
28. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step 48
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 53.
29. Provision the MPT ODU radio protection type Note: Spare MPT ODU transceiver must be enabled prior to provisioning MPT ODU transceiver protection scheme.
From the Equipment tab, select the MPT ODU Dir#-Ch# in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT ODU transceiver icon in blue in the resource list area. 30. Select the Settings tab. Note: Before changing the protection type provisioning, you must first apply the No Protection option to the protection type. For example: If 1+1 HSB is provisioned and 1+1 FD is needed, first select No Protection and click Apply, then select 1+1 FD and click Apply.
780
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 31. From the Protection Type drop-down menu, choose: No Protection, 1+1 HSB (SD), or 1+1 FD protection scheme. See Figure 59.51. 32. From the Protection Port drop-down menu, choose Slot# Port# of protection port. 33. Click Apply. Figure 59.51 — MPT ODU transceiver Protection Type provisioning
34. Select Protection Schemes tab. 35. Select Protection Scheme Parameters tab. 36. Provision RPS Cable Configuration: •
Select the Physical Cable check box for Physical Cable or leave it unselected for Virtual Cable. Virtual cable is the default. If Virtual Cable is configured with MPT-HQAM and channel spacing is greater than 30 MHz a dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 59.52.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
781
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.52 — Dialog box with virtual cable and HQAM
37. Click Apply. Figure 59.53 — MPT ODU Protection Scheme parameters RPS Cable configuration
38. Select an action. a.
To Provision the radio for fixed modulation, go to step 39.
b.
To Provision the radio for Adaptive Modulation, go to step 42.
39. Provision the radio for fixed modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.54 for MPT-HC and Figure 59.55 for MPT-HQAM.
782
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.54 — MPT-HC Settings tab for fixed modulation
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
783
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.55 — MPT-HQAM Settings tab for fixed modulation
40. Provision the radio port: i.
In the Mode field, select the Preset radio button.
ii.
For MPT-HQAM transceivers only, select the MPT-HC Compatibility check box to configure the MPT-HQAM with a profile that is compatible with an MPT-HC, if required. See Figure 59.55.
iii.
From the Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, choose the desired channel spacing (5 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz, 40 MHz, or 50 MHz).
iv.
From the Modulation drop-down menu, choose modulation scheme (32 QAM, 128 QAM, or 256 QAM).
v.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std or Std/XPIC).
vi.
From the Channel #1 Shifter (MHz) drop-down menu, choose the shifter value.
vii. Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range. viii. The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency. Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
784
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ix.
Enter the MPT-HC/HQAM radio channel Label, if applicable.
x.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected radio configuration, the Main and Protect radio channels use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen are the same as the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1.
41. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 FD spare radio channel, go to step 45.
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step 48.
c.
To Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 53.
42. Provision the radio for Adaptive Modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.56. Figure 59.56 — MPT-HC Settings tab for adaptive modulation
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
785
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.57 — MPT-HQAM Settings tab for adaptive modulation
43. Provision the radio port: i.
In the Mode field, choose the Adaptive radio button.
ii.
For MPT-HQAM transceivers only, select the MPT-HC Compatibility check box to configure the MPT-HQAM with a profile that is compatible with an MPT-HC, if required. See Figure 59.57.
iii.
From the Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, choose the desired channel spacing (30, 40, or 50 MHz).
iv.
From the Modulation drop-down menu, choose lowest ed modulation scheme.
v.
From the ed Modulation , select all the ed modulation schemes.
vi.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose the gain configuration (Std).
vii. Select the Channel #1 shifter frequency, from the channel #1 Shifter (MHz) drop-down menu, choose the TX (Go) and RX (Return) Separation Frequency. viii. When the radio is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the radio is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range.
786
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ix.
The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
x.
Enter the radio channel Label, if applicable.
xi.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HC/HQAM configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HC/HQAM cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen is a mirror image of the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1.
44. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 FD spare radio channel, go to step 45
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step 48.
c.
To Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 53.
45. Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 FD spare radio channel Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.58.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
787
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.58 — MPT-HC 1+1 Settings tab
46. Provision MPT ODU 1+1 spare radio channel: i.
Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range.
ii.
The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency +/- Shifter Frequency (based on the high or low channel selected)
iii.
Click Apply.
47. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step 48.
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 53.
48. Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.54. 49. Provision MPT ODU radio channel transmit power level: 788
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Enter the TxPower (dBm) level (ed power levels are band and modulation specific).
ii.
Click Apply.
50. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT ODU RTPC, go to step 51.
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU radio protection scheme, go to step 58.
51. Provision the spare MPT ODU RTPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.58. 52. Provision Spare MPT ODU radio channel transmit power level: i.
Enter the TxPower (dBm) level (ed power levels are band and modulation specific).
ii.
Click Apply.
53. Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.59. Figure 59.59 — MPT-HC Settings tab with ATPC
54. Provision MPT ODU radio channel ATPC: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
789
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min and Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-min / -max dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
55. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT ODU ATPC, go to step 56.
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU radio protection scheme, go to step 58.
56. Provision the spare MPT ODU ATPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.59 for an example of the ATPC settings. 57. Provision the spare MPT ODU radio channel ATPC: i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-min / -max dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
58. Provision the MPT ODU radio protection scheme Select Protection Schemes tab. Note: Revertive restoration criteria is the default value.
790
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.60 — MPT ODU transceiver Protection Criteria provisioning
Note: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available.
59. Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. 60. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
61. Select HSB Protection in the resource tree area. 62. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
63. Select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. 64. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
791
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ii.
Click Apply.
Figure 59.61 — MPT ODU Protection Restoration Criteria provisioning Rx radio
65. Select the Equipment tab. 66. Provision the MPT ODU link identifier Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.62.
792
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.62 — MPT-HC Additional Settings tab
67. Provision MPT ODU radio link identifier: i.
Select the Link Identifier Configuration Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Expected Identifier value (0 to 255).
iii.
Enter the Sent Identifier value (0 to 255).
iv.
Click Apply.
Note: If the MPT ODU is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM or PPP settings on an individual radio. Go to ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to ister LAG ports.
68. Provision the MPT ODU Synchronization Status Messaging i.
Select the Synchronization SSM Enabled check box see Figure 59.9.
ii.
Click Apply.
69. Provision the MPT ODU Point to Point Protocol settings i.
From the PPP RF , select the Enabled check box; see Figure 59.62.
ii.
Select Routing IP Protocol: (OSPF or None).
iii.
If OSPF is selected, then select OSPF Area: (0 to 4).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
793
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures NOTE: OSPF Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning PPP RF channel. iv.
Click Apply.
70. Provision the PKT throughput booster setting i.
From the Pkt Throughput Booster , select the Enabled check box; see Figure 59.62.
ii.
Click Apply.
71. ister the MPT ODU Alarm Profile settings i.
In the Alarm Profile , click on the icon; see Figure 59.62. The Alarm Severity Profile window opens.
ii.
Choose an alarm severity profile. Select the Show details button for more information if needed.
iii.
Click Apply.
72. Provision the MPT ODU radio channel encryption Note: Before provisioning radio channel encryption, the radio channel is running error free and operating correctly.
If the radio is remotely managed, the encryption should be configured on the remote radio before the local one. The configuration change will cause the remote radio to become temporarily unreachable until the local radio is also configured. Encryption mismatch is not part of the switching criteria for L1 LAG or ERPS. To avoid traffic interruption if the radio is part of an L1 LAG or ERPS topology, mute the transmitter before configuring encryption. Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.62. If the radio is part of an L1 LAG or ERPS topology, mute the transmitter; see To ister the Tx Mute settings. i.
Click on the Edit phrase button.The Edit phrase window opens.
ii.
Enter and confirm the new phrase.
iii.
Click Apply in the Edit phrase window.
73. Configure the Low Voltage Alarm for the MPT-HQAM Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Maintenance tab; see Figure 59.63.
794
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.63 — MPT-HQAM Maintenance tab
74. Configure the Low Voltage alarm: i.
Select the Enabled check box.
ii.
In the Threshold field, configure the threshold voltage for the alarm using the arrows. The threshold can be configured in 0.5 V increments.
iii.
Click Apply.
The clear alarm hysteresis is 3V from the set threshold value. The operator should take care in the configuration of the Low Voltage Alarm Threshold of the nominal voltage of the equipment. When the alarm is raised, the alarm is cleared when the measurement of the voltage, automatically done by the MPT, reaches the threshold value configured plus 3 V. The operator should ensure that this voltage can be operatively reached. Once raised, the alarm can be implicitly cleared by reducing the Low Voltage Alarm Threshold, reducing the voltage needed to clear the alarm. If the Low Voltage Alarm Threshold cannot be decreased (threshold set to 28V), the alarm can be cleared disabling the Low Voltage Alarm. To provision the radio for fixed modulation using data help
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
795
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.54.
Note: When communications have not been established with the radio, the radio parameters may still be provisioned using the data help. The following procedure is written based upon MPT ODUs. The other radio types can be provisioned using a similar procedure.
2.
Provision MPT ODU radio port: i.
In the Mode field, select the Preset radio button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The 9500MPR MPT ODU FCM Modem Profiles Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the 9500MPR MPT ODU FCM Modem Profiles Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired channel spacing (10 MHz, 30 MHz, 40 MHz, or 50MHz), modulation scheme (64 QAM, 128 QAM, or 256 QAM), and option (Std or Std/XPIC).
iv.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The 9500MPR MPT ODU Shifter Data Help window opens.
v.
In the 9500MPR MPT ODU Shifter Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value.
vi.
When the MPT ODU is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT ODU is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range.
vii. If the MPT ODU is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range. Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
viii. Enter the MPT ODU radio channel Label, if applicable. ix.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT ODU configuration, the Main and Protect MPT ODU cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen are the same as the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
To provision the radio for adaptive modulation using data help 1.
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.56.
Note: When communications have not been established with the radio, the radio parameters may be provisioned using the data help. The following procedure is written based upon MPT ODUs. The other radio types can be provisioned using a similar procedure. 796
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
Provision MPT ODU radio port: i.
In the Mode field, choose the Adaptive radio button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The 9500MPR MPT ODU ACM Modem Profiles Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the 9500MPR MPT ODU ACM Modem Profiles Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired channel spacing (5 MHz, 30 MHz, 40 MHz, or 50MHz), reference modulation, and option (Std or Std//XPIC). The reference modulation will be the lowest available modulation scheme in the ed modulation range.
iv.
In 1+1 FD and HSB configurations, from the Driving MSE drop-down menu, choose Lowest or Highest MSE.
v.
In the ed Modulation , choose all the modulation schemes to be used by the adaptive modulation. The schemes must be contiguous.
vi.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The 9500MPR MPT ODU Shifter Data Help window opens.
vii. In the 9500MPR MPT ODU Shifter Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value. viii. When the MPT ODU is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT ODU is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range. 3.
If the MPT ODU is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
4.
Enter the MPT ODU radio channel Label, if applicable.
5.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT ODU configuration, the Main and Protect MPT ODU cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen are the same as the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
To ister the Tx Mute settings 1.
Open the appropriate radio main view and click on the Maintenance tab; see Figure 59.64.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
797
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.64 — MPT ODU Maintenance tab
2.
Select an action. a.
To mute the transmitter indefinitely, choose the On radio button.
b.
To provide a duration that the transmitter will be muted, go to step 3.
Note: It is not possible to configure a timed Tx mute and a non-timed Tx mute at the same time.
3.
Choose the Timed radio button. The default duration is 30 minutes.
4.
Configure the Timeout parameter. The maximum duration is 2 days, 0 hours, 0 minutes.
Note: If the NE is still reachable after the transmitter is muted, you can change the timeout parameter. The new value will overwrite the previous timeout and the timer starts from the current timestamp.
5.
Click Apply.
To ister the ACM Manual settings 1.
798
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your configuration and select the Maintenance tab.See Figure 59.65. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.65 — MPT ODU Maintenance tab
2.
Force a modulation scheme: i.
Select the Manual Operation check box.
ii.
Choose the scheme from the Forced Tx Modulation drop-down.
Note: The modulation scheme must be forced contiguously.For example, if the current Modulation scheme is 4 QAM, it not possible to force to 64 QAM. The modulation first must be forced to 16 QAM and then to 64 QAM. Also, if the current modulation is 64 QAM, to to 4 QAM it first must be forced to 16 QAM and then to 4 QAM.
To remove XPIC 1.
Clear any alarms causing an automatic Tx Mute on the radios; see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Alarm Clearing Manual. Caution: If an XPIC association is removed while an automatic Tx Mute is active, the Tx Mute may remain on the system after the removal.
2.
Remove the XPIC association in the XPIC Configuration screen.
3.
Re-provision the radio parameters; see one of the following: •
To provision the MPT-HLC transceiver
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
799
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
800
•
To ister the MPT-HLS transceiver
•
To ister the MPT ODU
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
60 — Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning
60.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to provision the system to use IPv6. Use this procedure to set IPv6 parameters before activating IPv6 on the NE. If you activate IPv6 without performing pre-provisioning, default IP and OSPFv3 settings will be applied.
60.2 — General The 9500 MPR s IPv6 addressing. The NE Local IPv6 address is a Global Unicast address which identifies the NE in the DCN. The default address is FEC0:0:0:1::1. The prefix length is fixed to 128. The NE Local IPv6 address must be configured according to the following rules: •
IPv6 addresses having the Interface ID portion equal to all 0 are not allowed
•
IPv6 address::/128 (Unspecified address) is not allowed
•
IPv6 address::1/128 (Loopback Address) is not allowed
•
IPv6 addresses having FF00::/8 as high-order bits (Multicast addresses) are not allowed
•
IPv6 addresses having FE80::/10 as high-order bits (Link Local Addresses) are not allowed
Caution: Mixed configuration of IPv4 and IPv6 NEs is not ed. Before activating IPv6, ensure that all NEs in the network are IPv6 capable, that is, running R4.1.0 or higher software. A controlled activation is required; see local guidelines.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
801
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
60.3 — Procedure 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration> IP Configuration>IPv6 Pre-provisioning. See Figure 60.1. Figure 60.1 — IPv6 Pre-provisioning main menu bar path
2.
The first IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting window opens. See Figure 60.2. Figure 60.2 — IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 1 of 3 window
3.
802
In the Local Configuration , enter the local IP address of the NE in the Local IPv6 Address field.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 4.
In the TMN Ethernet Configuration , enter the IPv6 address of the TMN Ethernet port in the IPv6 Address field, and the prefix length in the Prefix Length field.
5.
In the TMN In-Band #1 Configuration , enter the IPv6 address of the TMN In-Band #1 port in the IPv6 Address field, and the prefix length in the Prefix Length field.
6.
In the TMN In-Band #2 Configuration , enter the IPv6 address of the TMN In-Band #2 port in the IPv6 Address field, and the prefix length in the Prefix Length field.
7.
In the Port#4 TMN Ethernet Configuration , enter the IPv6 address of the Port#4 TMN port in the IPv6 Address field, and the prefix length in the Prefix Length field.
8.
Click Next. The second IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting window opens. See Figure 60.3. Figure 60.3 — IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 2 of 3 window
9.
Click on the Add button. The Create IPv6 Static Route window opens. See Figure 60.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
803
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 60.4 — Create IPv6 Static Route window
10. Select desired Host or Network Address Choice radio button: Host or Network. 11. Which IP Static Routing Configuration was selected? a.
If Network, go to step 12.
b.
If Host, go to step 13.
12. Enter the Subnet prefix length of the radio in the Subnet prefix length text field. 13. Enter the IP Address of the radio in the IPv6 Address text field. 14. Select desired Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice radio button: Gateway IPv6 Address or Point To Point Interface Index. 15. Which Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice was selected? a.
If Default Gateway IP Address, go to step 16.
b.
If Point To Point Interface Index, go to step 18.
16. Enter the Gateway IP Address in the Gateway IPv6 Address text field. 17. Go to step 19. 18. From the Point to Point Interface drop-down menu, select an interface Id. 19. Click Ok. Add additional IPv6 static routes as necessary. 20. Click Next. The third IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting window opens, summarizing the settings. See Figure 60.5.
804
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 60.5 — IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 3 of 3 window
21. Click on the Close button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
805
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
806
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
61 — Use the Provisioning Tool
61.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures for provisioning 9500 MPR equipment using the Provisioning Tool. Some equipment and parameters must be provisioned using WebEML. See the Product Information Guide for more information.
61.2 — General The Provisioning can be performed by using the Provisioning Tool or WebEML. The Provisioning Tool provides an option to create and modify a provisioning file and apply it to an NE. The Provisioning Tool allows you to prepare the provisioning in the back office, minimizing time on field and potential for error. Note: Graphics in this chapter are examples.
61.2.1 — Provisioning tool screens The provisioning tool presents screens that reflect the provisioning selections previously made. Different screens will appear as you proceed depending on the selections made. The MSS Subrack appears on every screen, showing the units configured for each slot and the MPTs configured, if any. The slot currently being configured is shaded blue. The screens are presented in slot order: the Core-E configuration screen is always first, followed by the configuration screen for the unit configured in slot 3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
807
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Eight slots will appear in the tool. If you are provisioning an MSS-4, do not provision anything in slots 5 to 8. The following buttons appear on every screen: •
Restore: allows to restore in the screen the initial data without any change
•
Prev: the procedure goes back to the previous screen (the changed data may be lost after the Warning message)
•
Next: the procedure goes on to the next screen (some checks and data storage is done)
•
Cancel: the procedure goes back to the opening screen
•
Help: click on this button to open the help on line.
61.3 — Procedures Warning: The Provisioning Tool does not the CorEvo, MSS-O, MSS-1, P8ETH unit, P2E3DS3, or AUX unit. In the ANSI market the MP-HL and SDHACC are also not ed. In the ETSI market, the MOD300 and ODU300 are ed but not documented. For information, see the documentation from R60.0.0 or an earlier release. These units must be configured with WebEML. To configure an MSS-4 or MSS-8 extract the AUX units, if any.
This section provides the following procedures:
808
•
To open the Provisioning tool
•
To configure the MPT Access peripheral configuration screen
•
To configure the MPT Configuration screen
•
To configure the P32E1DS1 unit configuration screen for the ANSI market
•
To configure the P32E1DS1 unit configuration screen for the ETSI market
•
To configure the SDH unit configuration screen (ETSI market only)
•
To configure the EASv2 unit configuration screen
•
To configure the LAG configuration screen
•
To configure the XPIC configuration screen
•
To configure the Synchronization configuration screen
•
To configure the QoS configuration screen
•
To configure the Bridge configuration screen
•
To configure the Port VLAN configuration screen 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To configure the Network configuration screen
•
To configure the Trusted managers screen
•
To view and save the configuration
•
To open the Provisioning tool
To open the Provisioning tool 1.
Double click on the TCO Provisioning tool icon on the Desktop (for the local copy on the PC see the Software Installation Guide). The screen in Figure 61.1 will display. Figure 61.1 — Provisioning Tool Screen
2.
Perform one of the following: a.
Click on the Open button to open a previously created configuration file. After a configuration file is opened, a Report displays for the existing file, see Figure 61.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
809
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.2 — Report for opened configuration file
If the file is correct, click on the Next button to start the provisioning. b.
Click on the Create button to create a file in R5.2.0. The MSS Configuration screen opens.
3.
Select the card to be configured and protection options for each slot from the drop-down menu. See Figure 61.3 for an example.
Note: Protection can be configured for the Core-E and P32E1DS1 units (the drop-down box is not dimmed), but not for the MPT-ACC or EASv2 units. Protection for MPT-HC, MPT-HQAM, or MPT-XP units on the Core-E must be configured with WebEML.
810
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.3 — MSS Configuration screen example
4.
Click on the Next button. The Core Configuration screen opens.
5.
In the Core Configuration screen, perform the following for each Ethernet port. See Figure 61.4. i.
Choose the working mode from the drop-down menu: •
Transport: to be used as GigaEthernet interface for Ethernet traffic (Note: for port#5 and port#6 the optional SFP must be installed);
•
MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM: to be used to connect an MPT-HC to port#1 to port#4; an MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM to port#5 and port#6.
•
Ethernet port #4, if enabled, has three different Working modes: TMN, Transport or MPT-HC/MPT-HQAM.
ii.
If the working mode is set to Transport, enable or disable autonegotiation and flow control.
iii.
If autonegotiation is disabled, select a fixed speed and direction pair in the “Speed - Duplex” area.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
811
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures iv.
If autonegotiation is enabled, Synch-E can be configured: choose Synchronous and select the operating mode: Master or Slave. The SSM (Synchronization Status Message) message can also be enabled. Note: The Provisioning Tool does not distinguish between MPT-HC or MPT-HCHQAM and their -XP variants. For example, to configure an MPT-XP-HQAM choose MPT-HQAM.
Note: MPT-MC appears in the drop-down menu. The MPT-MC unit is not used in North America.
Figure 61.4 — Core Configuration screen example
6.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the MPT Access peripheral configuration screen
812
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
In the MPT Access area enable the port to be used to interface the MPT. Port#1 and port#2 are electrical Ethernet ports; port#3 and port#4 are optical Ethernet ports. One or two ports can be enabled. See Figure 61.5. Figure 61.5 — MPTACC configuration with two units in the row
2.
Set the power type: •
PFoE (Power Feed over Ethernet) (one cable for Ethernet traffic + power supply) or
•
QMA (one cable for Power Supply and one cable for Ethernet traffic)
MPT-HC and MPT-HQAM can use PFoE or QMA. 3.
Configure the protection if needed: In the MPT Protection Configuration area select the Main port and the MPT Spare port (in the example of the following figure s5p1 means Slot #5 Port #1) and in the Port Type field select the protection configuration: 1+1 HSB or 1+1 FD.
4.
After the selection click on the ADD button. The screen shown in Figure 61.6 will appear.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
813
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.6 — 1+1 configuration with MPTACC units
5.
For the 1+1 configuration the ports must be both electrical or optical (no mixed configuration is allowed). The 1+1 configuration can be set up with two ports on the same unit or on two different units.
6.
Click on the Next button. The MPT configuration screen opens.
To configure the MPT Configuration screen 1.
814
Configure the following parameters as needed: •
Label
•
SSM checkbox
•
PPP RF in band management: choose OSPF or Static Routing
•
RPS Configuration: In a protection configuration, select the Physical Cable check box if a physical RPS cable is in use
•
Revertive Restoration Criteria: enable the checkbox for revertive restoration in a protection configuration.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures •
XPIC: in the Polarization field select the polarization to be used by the radio channel (Vertical or Horizontal). The configuration will be completed on the XPIC configuration screen. Figure 61.7 — XPIC polarization selection
•
2.
Link Identifier: select the checkbox to enable Link Identifier •
Enter a number from 1 to 255 for Expected. The number must match the associated Transmitter ID at the other end of the hop.
•
Enter a number from 1 to 255 for Transmitted. The number must match the associated Receiver ID at the other end of the hop.
See Figure 61.8 for 1+0 configuration with fixed modulation.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
815
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.8 — MPT configuration showing MPT-HQAM (1+0 with fixed modulation)
To perform the configuration:
816
i.
Do not put a check mark in the “Use Adaptive Modulation” check box.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button in the Profile area. The Data Help window opens, see Figure 61.9 for an example.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.9 — Data Help window for Profile area (fixed modulation)
3.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the row showing the correct Channel Spacing, Modulation and Option.
iv.
In the case of MPT-HQAM transceivers, the Profiles area includes an MPT-HC Compatibility checkbox, as shown in Figure 61.8. Select the checkbox to enable the MPT-HCv2 modem profile for the HQAM transceiver.
See Figure 61.10 for 1+0 configuration with adaptive modulation.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
817
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.10 — MPT configuration screen (1+0 with adaptive modulation)
818
i.
Put a check mark in the Use Adaptive Modulation check box.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button in the Profile area. The Data Help window opens, see Figure 61.11 for an example.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.11 — Data Help window for Profile area (adaptive modulation)
4.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double click on the row showing the correct Channel Spacing, Modulation and Option.
iv.
In the ed Modulation field, select all the modulation schemes to be used with the Adaptive Modulation.
v.
If the MPT is protected, in the MSE Driving Criteria field, select Lowest or Highest.
Configure the Channel area: •
Click on the Data Help button to open an information dialog window containing the shifter list according to MPT types. See Figure 61.12 for an example.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
819
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.12 — Data Help window for the Channel area
•
820
In a 1+1 configuration, Channel 0 is also available. In HSB configuration the shifter value is the same for both channels, see Figure 61.13. In FD configuration the two channels can have different shifter values, see Figure 61.14.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.13 — 1+1 HSB Configuration
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
821
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.14 — 1+1 FD Configuration
5.
Configure ATPC or Manual Transmit Power Control.
6.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the P32E1DS1 unit configuration screen for the ANSI market 1.
822
Figure 61.15 shows the DS1 configuration screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.15 — DS1 configuration screen
Configure the tributaries individually, or use the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to configure the following for all tributaries: •
Signal Mode: Disabled, Framed, Unframed, Framed SF or Framed ESF
•
Service Profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2Eth
•
Flow ID: is unique in the network. Enter a flow ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the Flow ID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered.
•
Payload size: the payload size is fixed at 192 bytes.
•
ECID TX: Tx Over-the-hop ID. Must match the Rx ID at the other end. Enter an ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the ECID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered.
•
ECID RX: Rx Over-the-hop ID. Must match the Tx ID at the other end.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
823
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Enter an ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the ECID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered.
2.
3.
•
TDM Clock Source: Adaptive or Differential.
•
Line Length
•
Line Coding
Configure the parameters that apply to all ports: •
AIS Insertion for LOF detection on DS1: select Enabled or Disabled. This setting is applied to all DS1 modules according to the value of the field for the module with the highest slot value: it is not applied on a per tributary basis.
•
Restoration Criteria: for 1+1 EPS are fixed to “Not Revertive” and cannot be changed.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the P32E1DS1 unit configuration screen for the ETSI market 1.
824
Figure 61.16 shows the E1 configuration screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.16 — E1 configuration
Configure the tributaries individually, or use the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to configure the following for all tributaries: •
Signal Mode: Disabled, Framed, Unframed, Framed SF or Framed ESF
•
Service Profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2Eth
•
Flow ID: is unique in the network. Enter a flow ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the Flow ID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered.
•
Payload size: the payload size is fixed at 256 bytes.
•
ECID TX: Tx Over-the-hop ID. Must match the Rx ID at the other end. Enter an ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the ECID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered.
•
ECID RX: Rx Over-the-hop ID. Must match the Tx ID at the other end.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
825
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Enter an ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the ECID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered.
2.
3.
•
TDM Clock Source: Adaptive or Differential.
•
Line Length
•
Line Coding
Configure the parameters that apply to all ports: •
Impedance: select the impedance to be used for the E1 streams (Unbalanced 75 ohm or Balanced 120 ohm).
•
Restoration Criteria: for 1+1 EPS are fixed to “Not Revertive” and cannot be changed.
•
Node Timing: timing from the network element clock as defined in G.8261. The enabling of the Node Timing is applied to all E1s of the PDH unit. By enabling the Node Timing the E1 streams in Rx side are retimed at the output with the network element clock.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the SDH unit configuration screen (ETSI market only) 1. 2.
Perform step 2 to configure SDHACC or step 3 for SDHCHANN. Figure 61.17 shows the configuration screen for SDHACC. Select the Port type: SFP-O (Optical) or SFE-E (Electrical)
826
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.17 — SDHACC configuration screen
i.
Put a check mark in the Port Status box to enable the STM-1.
ii.
Set the Auto Laser Shutdown: Enabled/Disabled ForcedOn/Disabled ForcedOff. This field will appear only if the Settings tab- of the STM-1 unit the optical SFP has been selected.
iii.
Enable the J0, if required, by selecting one of the two modes (SixteenBytesFrame/OneRepeatedByte) and in the Expected Receiving Value field enter the expected value. Note: byte J0 is only read, no Regeneration section Termination is done.
iv.
Enter the Flow ID (range: 2 to 4080). Warning: the flow id must be unique in the MPR network.
v.
Select the Jitter Buffer Depth: High/Low.
vi.
Service profile: fixed to SDH2SDHClock Source: The purpose of TMN Clock Source provisioning is to select the mode, that will be used to sync STM-1 data to the node Synchronization source.
vii. Differential: to sync the output to NE Synchronization source.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
827
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures viii. Node Timing: timing from the network element clock as defined in G.8261. The enabling of the Node Timing is applied to both the STM-1. By enabling the Node Timing the SMT-1 streams in Rx side are retimed at the output with the network element clock. 3.
Figure 61.18 shows the configuration screen for SDHCHAN. Figure 61.18 — SDHCHAN configuration screen
828
i.
Select the Port type: SFP-O (Optical) or SFE-E (Electrical)
ii.
Put a check mark in the Port Status box to enable the STM-1.
iii.
Set the Auto Laser Shutdown: Enabled/Disabled ForcedOn/Disabled ForcedOff. This field will appear only if the Settings tab- of the STM-1 unit the optical SFP has been selected.
iv.
Select the Clock Source.
v.
Enable the J0, if required, by selecting one of the two modes (SixteenBytesFrame/OneRepeatedByte) in the Expected Receiving Value field and enter the expected value and in the Sending J0 field select one of the two modes and enter the value to be transmitted.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: Byte J0 is only read, no Regeneration section Termination is done.
vi.
Enable, if required, the E1 Node Timing Configuration. The Node Timing is the timing from the network clock as defined in G.8261. The enabling of the Node Timing is applied to all E1s of the unit. By enabling the Node Timing the E1 streams in Rx side are retimed at the output with the network element clock.
vii. In the Single Tributary Configuration area configure all the E1s to be mapped/demapped in the STM-1. The E1s are identified by a progressive number from #1 to #63. viii. Use the “One Shot” Tributaries Configuration to configure the following parameters for the E1s: •
Service Profile The available profiles are: TDM2TDM, TDM2Eth
4.
•
Flow Id: To implement cross-connections between line side and radio side each E1 tributary must be associated to an identifier. Enter the Flow identifier value in the relevant field (possible values: 2 to 4080).
•
The ECID Tx, ECID Rx, Payload Size and TDM Clock Source fields can be written only if the Service Profile is TDM2Eth.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the EASv2 unit configuration screen 1.
Perform step 2 to configure ports and step 3 to configure protection.
2.
In the EASv2 Configuration screen, perform the following for each Ethernet port. See Figure 61.19 for electrical ports or Figure 61.20 for optical ports. i.
Choose the working mode from the drop-down menu: •
Transport: to be used as GigaEthernet interface for Ethernet traffic (Note: for port#5 and port#6 the optional SFP must be installed);
•
MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM: to be used to connect an MPT-HC to port#1 to port#4; an MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM to port#5 and port#6.
ii.
If the working mode is set to Transport, enable or disable autonegotiation and flow control.
iii.
If autonegotiation is disabled, select a fixed speed and direction pair in the “Speed - Duplex” area.
iv.
If autonegotiation is enabled, Synch-E can be configured: choose Synchronous and select the operating mode: Master or Slave. The SSM (Synchronization Status Message) message can also be enabled.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
829
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The Provisioning Tool does not distinguish between MPT-HC or MPT-HCHQAM and their -XP variants. For example, to configure an MPT-XP-HQAM choose MPT-HQAM. Note: MPT-MC appears in the drop-down menu. The MPT-MC unit is not used in North America.
Figure 61.19 — EASv2 configuration screen: electrical ports
830
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.20 — EASv2 configuration screen: optical ports
3.
Figure 61.21 shows EASv2 units in slots 7 and 8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
831
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.21 — EASv2 protection configuration
In the MPT Protection Configuration area select the MPT Main port and the MPT Spare port (in the example figure s7p5 means Slot #7 Port #5) and in the Prot Type field select the protection configuration: 1+1 HSB or 1+1 FD. 4.
832
After the selection click on ADD to set up the protection; see Figure 61.22.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.22 — EASv2 protection
After one port is enabled the screen for MPT configuration appears. 5.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the LAG configuration screen 1.
The procedure to configure a LAG using the provisioning tool is the same as the procedure to create a LAG using WebEML. Figure 61.23 shows the LAG configuration screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
833
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.23 — LAG configuration screen
Perform the following to create an L1 Radio LAG: 1.
Press the Create button. The LAG Creation window opens; see Figure 61.24. Figure 61.24 — LAG creation window
834
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
3.
Enter: •
ID: LAG identification (from 1 to 14)
•
Name: optional field (max. 32 characters). You can name the ports in the LAG and the LAG itself separately.
•
Type: L1 Radio
•
Size: number of ports involved in the LAG (max. 4)
•
Key: the key automatically changes according to the ID entered in the ID field.
•
LA (Link Aggregation Control Protocol): fixed to “Disabled” for Radio LAGs
•
Timeout: this field is disabled for Radio LAGs.
Click on Create. The LAG appears in the top of the LAG Configuration screen; see Figure 61.25. Figure 61.25 — Created L1 Radio LAG
4.
Select the new LAG.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
835
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 5.
Select a port in the Available Ports area and click on the Right Arrow button to move the selected port in the Added Ports area. The Available Ports field shows only the ports which can be configured as Lowest index port (MPTs with odd numbers). Figure 61.26 — Available ports
The first selected port inserted in the Added Ports field, on the right side, will be the Lowest index port (Slot #3 - Port #5). The Available Ports field shows all the remaining ports (also the ports with the even number: example Slot #4 - Port #8). Figure 61.27 — Lowest index port selected
Note: The Available Ports field shows only the ports with a number higher than the number of the Lowest index port (as example, if the Lowest index port is 4.7, the port will be only 4.8; if the Lowest index port is 3.5, the ports will be 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7 and 4.8).
836
6.
Add additional ports to the LAG as required.
7.
Choose the suitable WTR (Wait To Restore) time using the WTR toggle switch.
8.
Select the Enabled check box.
9.
If required, enable the PPP RF channel and select the OSPF Area.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The PPP RF channel for TMN is managed here at LAG level and not at radio level. In case of 2 parallel LAG groups, the PPP rules are the same as for Nx(1+0) and Nx(1+1). The TMN RF option must be disabled on all links except one. The TMN PPP traffic may use the other links for protection, when the enabled link is failed. This protection may require waiting for the destination MAC address to age out of the forwarding table before recovering.
10. If required, enable the SSM. Note: The SSM is managed here at LAG level and not at radio level.
11. Click on the Apply button. The Apply button saves the configuration. 12. Repeat the previous steps to configure another LAG or click on the Next button. When the LAG is configured, the radio icons for the radios in the LAG show an L symbol in the MSS Subrack : ( )
2.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the XPIC configuration screen 1.
Perform step 2 to configure 1+0 XPIC or step 3 to configure 1+1 XPIC. Note: The MPT polarization must be configured on the MPT configuration screen.
2.
To configure 1+0 XPIC: i.
Drag with the mouse from an MPT icon to another MPT icon. The letter V means MPT set with Vertical polarization; the letter H means MPT set with Horizontal polarization. The two MPT must have different polarization.
ii.
Put a check mark and click on OK. See Figure 61.28.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
837
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.28 — To configure 1+0 XPIC
Figure 61.29 shows two MPT-HC in XPIC configuration.
838
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.29 — 1+0 XPIC
To remove the association, double click on the connection line, remove the check mark, click on OK and Next. 3.
To configure 1+1 in the TRDS: i.
Drag with the mouse from the icon of the Main of one 1+1 HSB to the Main of another 1+1 HSB. The 1+1 HSB groups must have different polarization.
ii.
Put a check mark and click on OK. See Figure 61.30.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
839
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.30 — To configure 1+1 XPIC
Figure 61.31 shows two MPT-HC in the XPIC configuration.
840
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.31 — 1+1 XPIC
To remove the association, double click on the connection line, remove the check mark, click on OK and Next. 4.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the Synchronization configuration screen 1.
Figure 61.32 shows the synchronization configuration screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
841
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.32 — Synchronization Configuration screen
Perform the following:
2.
842
i.
Select the primary or secondary source from the Sources drop-down menus; for example, Any available DS1. The list of sources in the dropdown menu is pre-defined: it does not change based on the configuration.
ii.
Choose the interface in the Source Configuration drop-down menus. The list of interfaces in the drop-down menu is created based on the interfaces configured. For example, if Any available DS1 has been selected, the menu displays the configured DS1 ports.
Configure a dedicated Sync-Out port configurable according to the following options: •
2.048 MHz, electrical levels according G.703, clause 13
•
5 MHz, + 6 dBm into 50 ohm, sine-wave
•
10 MHz, + 6 dBm into 50 ohm, sine-wave
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures •
1.024 MHz, electrical levels according to G.703, clause 13 with the following exception: timing correctly scaled from 2.048 MHz to 1.024 MHz
3.
Configure a Wait-to-Restore time as needed.
4.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the QoS configuration screen 1.
The QoS Configuration only refers to queues Q1-Q5. The QoS Configuration menu has 3 screens. Perform the following:
2.
•
For Scheduler Configuration, go to step 2.
•
For Queue Size Configuration, go to step 3.
•
For QoS Classification, go to step 4.
Figure 61.33 shows the Scheduler Configuration screen, showing the default configuration. Figure 61.33 — Scheduler Configuration screen
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
843
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures For each queue, click in the cell to change the setting.
3.
i.
Choose the Mode: SP (Strict Priority) or DWRR (Deficit Weighted Round Robin)
ii.
Choose the Weight (in the 1-32 range)
iii.
Click on Restore to go back to the previous configuration or on Defaults to go back to the default settings.
iv.
Click on the Next button to complete the configuration.
Figure 61.34 shows the Queue Size configuration screen. Figure 61.34 — Queue size configuration screen
For each queue and for each radio direction, perform the following as needed:
844
•
Double click on the relevant field to change the buffer size (in Bytes).
•
Click on Restore to go back to the previous saved configuration or on Defaults to clear the settings for the selected radio direction.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures •
Highlight a radio direction and click on Copy to copy the settings in the row. Highlight another radio direction and click on Paste to apply the copied settings to the highlighted radio direction.
•
Click on the Next button to complete the configuration.
For each buffer size the max delay in ms is automatically calculated. 4.
Select the classification in the QoS Classification Criterion field; see Figure 61.35. Figure 61.35 — QoS classification screen
For IEEE 802.1p, see step 5. For DiffServ, see step 6. 5.
Figure 61.36 shows the IEEE 802.1p configuration screen, with default settings.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
845
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.36 — IEEE 802.1p
Perform the following to classify the Priority Code Point to a specific queue: i.
Change the classification on the left area clicking on a radio button. The modification will appear in yellow. Click on Restore to go back to the previous configuration or on Defaults to go back to the default settings.
ii. 6.
846
Click on Next to complete the configuration.
Figure 61.37 shows the DiffServ configuration screen, with the default settings.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.37 — DiffServ
Perform the following to complete the classification of the DiffServ Code Point to a specific queue: i.
Change the classification on the left area by clicking on the radio buttons. The modifications will appear in yellow. Click on Restore to go back to the previous configuration or on Defaults to go back to the default settings.
ii.
Click on the Switch to Per Range view button (
)to open a read-
only table with the current association “DiffServ to Forwarding Class Mapping”, as shown in Figure 61.38.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
847
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.38 — Read-only table
Click on the Table form (per point) button to close the table. iii. 7.
Click on Next to complete the configuration.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the Bridge configuration screen 1.
Choose the way to manage the Ethernet traffic using the provisioning tool: •
802.1D (MAC Address Bridge), see Figure 61.39.
•
802.1Q (Virtual Bridge), see Figure 61.40. This is the default in the ANSI market.
Note: 802.1ad (Provider Bridge) must be configured using WebEML. The MSS Subrack does not appear in the Bridge configuration screen by default. Click on the MSS Summary button to view it.
848
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.39 — 802.1D VLAN management
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
849
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.40 — 802.1Q VLAN management (default VLAN only)
2.
Perform the following to create a VLAN: i.
Click on the ADD VLan button. The Create VLAN window opens.
ii.
In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID (the configurable values must be in the range 2 - 4080) The VLAN IDs already defined to cross-connect internal flows (that is, TDM2TDM, TDM2ETH) cannot be used.
iii.
In the VLAN Name field, enter the VLAN Name: a text string of up to 32 characters. There is no check on whether the name is in use for multiple VLANs.
iv.
850
In the VLAN Ports field, select the ports of this VLAN by putting a check mark on the relevant check box.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures All the Ethernet ports and all the Radio directions can be considered. Both enabled and disabled Ethernet ports (radio ports when declared are implicitly enabled) can be member of a VLAN. This means that a disabled port can be configured as a member of a VLAN and a port already member of a VLAN can be disabled continuing to be a member of the same VLAN. v.
In the Untagged Ports field, select, among the ports belonging to this VLAN (), the untagged ports (in egress the VLAN will be removed from the frames). Only the Ethernet ports, enabled and disabled, are manageable. The VLAN cannot be removed from the radio ports (with the exception of VLAN 1). The VLAN-ID values allowed are in the range 2 - 4080. By default, for the VLAN IDs defined, all the ports are and the Untag flag is set to False, which means all the frames are transmitted with a tag.
Note: If one tagged packet with VLAN-ID X is received on a port which is not member of the VLAN-ID X, the packet is dropped.
3.
In Figure 61.41 two VLANs have been created. Click on the EDIT VLan or DEL VLan buttons to modify or delete a VLAN.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
851
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.41 — Example of created VLANs
Note: When a board on which there is at least one port member of a VLAN is removed from the MSS configuration screen, the management system advises the operator that there are ports on the board that are of a VLAN, asking confirmation of the operation. If confirmed, the ports are automatically removed by the NE from the list of member ports of the VLAN and from the list of the untagged ports in egress.
4.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the Port VLAN configuration screen 1.
Figure 61.42 shows the configuration tab for the six ports of the Core-E card. Figure 61.43 shows the configuration tab for the eight ports of the EASv2 card. Configure the following as needed for each Ethernet port: •
852
Untagged frames on Ethernet ports: Accepted or Discarded.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures •
If the untagged frames are accepted, the VLAN-ID and Priority fields must be configured. Only VLAN-ID values already defined (in the VLAN management menu) can be configured for this purpose. The Priority values allowed are in the range 0 - 7. Figure 61.42 — Port VLAN configuration - Core-E ports
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
853
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.43 — Port VLAN configuration - EASv2 ports
2.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the Network configuration screen 1.
854
Figure 61.44 shows the Network Configuration screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.44 — Network Configuration screen
Configure the following IP addresses: •
Local IP Address: it is the Controller IP address (default IP address = 10.0.1.2 with fixed mask 255.255.255.255) The NE Local IP Address can be reused on one of the other TMN interfaces. These interfaces must have different IP subnets.
•
NMS Ethernet Port IP address: it is the IP address relevant to the Ethernet TMN port (default IP address = 10.0.1.2 with mask 255.255.255.0) The NMS Eth port cannot be disabled.
•
NMS Ethernet Port 4 IP address: the Ethernet Port 4 can be used for traffic or TMN depending on the configuration on the Core Configuration screen. Port 4 area is configurable if ETH4 area in Core configuration screen is set in “TMN” Working Mode. If the area is enabled, it behaves the same as for Ethernet Configuration.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
855
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures •
TMN In-Band interface #1, IP/subnet;TMN In-Band interface #2, IP/ subnet
Warning: If remote NEs have to be reached from this NE, you need to configure the Routing Protocol of the TMN-RF channel, if the remote NE is connected through the radio link or of the NMS Ethernet Port, if the remote NE is connected through the Ethernet cable.
2.
Configure the following parameters for each TMN In-Band interface: •
IP address and subnet: default 10.0.3.2/24 for interface #1 and 10.0.4.2/24 for interface #2
•
VLAN ID: no default ID for interface #1 and interface #2 (Note: if the two interfaces are disabled, the VLAN ID will appear in the final report as undefined).
•
List of Ethernet interfaces where transmit/receive TMN In-Band traffic: default None (multiple selection with the mouse can be done)
•
Routing Protocol: Static Routing or OSPF. The default is Static Routing.
•
Area ID in case of OSPF protocol enabled: from 0 to 3
Configuration of the P and DS fields of the VLAN tag is not ed by the Provisioning Tool. Default values are applied. 3.
Configure the Static Routing. Click on the Add Route button to add a static route.
4.
Configure the OSPF Areas. Click on the Add Area button to add an OSPF area.
5.
Configure NTP servers:
6.
•
Put a check mark in the NTP protocol field to enable the protocol.
•
In the Main Server address field enter the IP address of the server, which is in charge to distribute the time to all the NEs in the network.
•
In the Spare Server address field enter the IP address of the Spare Server, if any.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the Trusted managers screen 1.
856
Figure 61.45 shows the trusted managers screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.45 — Trusted Managers screen
To activate a trusted manager: i.
Click on Add Manager
ii.
Double-click on the IP Address column and enter the IP address of the SNMP manager. The default UDP Port is 5010. Double-click on this column to configure another port. The Manager Type cannot be changed (it is fixed to 5620 SAM).
2.
iii.
To confirm the selection click Enter.
iv.
To remove a manager, select one or more manager from the list and click on Remove Managers.
Click on the Next button.
To view and save the configuration 1.
The Report shows the configuration created; see Figure 61.46.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
857
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.46 — Configuration report
Click on the Save button to save the configuration as shown or click on the Prev button to return to a previous screen. Configuration information is saved in MCML (XML-based) format. Note: Since MCML configuration files are XML-based, they contain simple text characters with specific tags to identify information. This allows the to possibly modify the file manually. However, configuration files not strictly fulfilling XML and MCML grammar and structure cannot be considered correct and used by TCO Tools management. Such manual modification is strongly discouraged.
858
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
62 — Apply a configuration using the Web Server
62.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures for applying a configuration file using the Web Server interface. The configuration file must be created using the Provisioning Tool: see Use the Provisioning Tool.
62.2 — General The Provisioning Tool allows you to prepare a file with the provisioning information in the back office, minimizing time on field and potential for error. The same file can be applied to multiple NEs using the Configuration Setting menu in the Web Server interface.
62.3 — Procedure 1.
to NE. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
Select Configuration → Configuration Setting. The Configuration Setting screen opens.
3.
Select action: a.
To clear an existing database and apply a configuration file, go to step 4.
b.
To apply a configuration file to an unconfigured NE, go to step 7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
859
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
4. Caution: Clearing the NE database will reset the local IP address.
If the NE is already configured, the DB CLEAR and NE RESTART button appears on the Configuration Setting screen. Click on the button to clear the database. A confirmation dialog box appears. 5.
Click on the OK button to proceed. The NE restarts.
6.
Log back in to the Web Server and select Configuration → Configuration Setting. The Configuration Setting screen opens, see Figure 62.1. Figure 62.1 — Configuration Settings screen
7.
Click on the Browse button and navigate to the configuration file. The Configuration button appears.
8.
Click on the Configuration button. The Web Server checks the configuration parameters. When the check is ed the View Parameters and Apply to NE buttons become available.
9.
Click on the View Parameters button if necessary to check the information provided in the configuration file. Click on the Apply to NE button to apply the configuration.
10.
860
When the configuration setting is complete, a summary appears on the screen. Figure 62.2 provides an example.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 62.2 — Configuration Setting confirmation summary
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
861
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
862
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Equipment functions
Note: Performance monitoring on affected equipment should be disabled before making configuration changes.
•
Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
•
Digital Core Facing Loopback
•
IF Cable loopback
•
Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
•
OAM Remote Loopback
•
Open and run performance monitoring
•
Perform protection switching
•
Perform radio power measurements
•
Radio Facing Circuit Loopback
•
RF Core Facing Loopback
•
ister SDH LAG
•
Upgrade and downgrade protection
•
Upgrade and downgrade radio profile
•
Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port
•
Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port
•
Perform Tx Diversity Antenna operations
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
863
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
864
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
63 — Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
63.1 — Purpose This chapter provides instructions to perform Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback for the 9500 MPR.
63.2 — General Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback mode uses the signal from the CORE switch matrix to be transmitted by the PDH/SDH transponder card and replaces the signal received by the PDH/SDH transponder and sends the signal back to the CORE switch matrix. See Figure 63.1 for a block diagram of Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback. See Figure 63.2 for a block diagram of Core Facing SDH Tributary Loopback. Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is an internal loopback. Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is a drop-and-continue loopback. Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback can be activated on a per tributary basis independent of the other PDH/SDH tributaries. Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is ed on E1/DS1 tributaries (P32E1DS1 card), DS3 tributaries (P2E3DS3 card), and STM-1/OC-3 tributaries (SDHACC card).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
865
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.1 — Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback block diagram
Figure 63.2 — Core Facing SDH Tributary Loopback block diagram
63.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To activate a Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
•
To deactivate a Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
To activate a Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
866
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click the PDH/SDH Transponder Card associated with the tributary to perform Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback. For E1/DS1 loopback, see Figure 63.3. For DS3 loopback, see Figure 63.4. For SDH loopback, see Figure 63.5.
Figure 63.3 — Main Equipment Window: PDH E1/DS1 Transponder Card highlighted
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
867
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.4 — Main Equipment Window: PDH DS3 Transponder Card highlighted
868
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.5 — Main Equipment Window: PDH OC-3 Transponder Card highlighted
2.
The PDH/SDH Main View for the selected PDH/SDH transponder opens.
3.
Select Loopback tab. For E1, DS1 or DS3 loopback, see Figure 63.6. For SDH loopback, see Figure 63.7.
4.
For SDH loopback, select Port#s.n. See Figure 63.7.
5.
For PDH loopback, select Port#nn Internal from the resource tree area; DS1 Port#1-32 Internal or DS3 Port#1-2 Internal. See Figure 63.6. For SDH loopback, select COREFACING from the resource tree area. See Figure 63.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
869
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.6 — PDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port selected
870
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.7 — SDH main view, Loopback tab OC-3 Port#3.1 selected
6.
Select the Active radio button in the Activation area.
7.
Enter time out period (days, hours, minutes) in the Timeout Period (max 4 days) fields.
8.
Click Apply. Loopback Setting window opens.
9.
Click Yes.
10. Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is established (Active). For an example of an active DS1 core facing loopback see Figure 63.8. For an example of an active SDH core facing loopback see Figure 63.9.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
871
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.8 — Core Facing PDH DS1 Tributary Loopback active
872
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.9 — Core Facing SDH Tributary Loopback active
To deactivate a Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click the PDH/SDH Transponder Card associated with the tributary to perform Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback. For DS1 loopback, see Figure 63.3. For DS3 loopback, see Figure 63.4. For SDH loopback, see Figure 63.5. The PDH/SDH Main View for the selected PDH/SDH transponder opens.
2.
Select Loopback tab. For DS1 or DS3 loopback, see Figure 63.8. For SDH loopback, see Figure 63.9.
3.
For SDH loopback, select Port#s.n. See Figure 63.9.
4.
For PDH loopback, select Port#nn Internal from the resource tree area; DS1 Port#1-32 Internal or DS3 Port#1-2 Internal. See Figure 63.8.
5.
For SDH loopback, select COREFACING from the resource tree area. See Figure 63.9.
6.
Select Not Active radio-button in the Activation area.
7.
Click Apply. Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is deactivated (Not Active). For PDH loopback, see Figure 63.6. For SDH loopback, see Figure 63.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
873
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
874
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
64 — Digital Core Facing Loopback
64.1 — Purpose This chapter provides instructions to perform Digital Core Facing Loopback for the 9500 MPR.
64.2 — General Digital Core Facing Loopback mode uses the signal to be transmitted by the MPT-HL/ HLC/HC/XP Transceiver and replaces the signal received by the MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver and sends the transmit signal back to the P8ETH/EASv2/MPTACC card. This is an internal loopback. Digital Core Facing Loopback can only be enabled on the aggregate traffic. This loopback is a Loop and Continue. MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver receive traffic will be dropped. When this loopback is activated the expected behavior is as follows: •
•
TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH flows are forwarded back to Core card with source and destination MAC addresses swapped. •
For TDM2ETH flows, where the ECID Tx and ECID Rx are the same value, the loopback works.
•
For TDM2ETH flows, where the ECID Tx is different form ECID Rx, the loopback fails.
Generic Ethernet flows are dropped.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
875
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
64.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To activate a Digital Core Facing Loopback
•
To deactivate a Digital Core Facing Loopback
To activate a Digital Core Facing Loopback 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click on the Transceiver radio icon to perform Digital Core Facing Loopback. See Figure 64.1. Figure 64.1 — Main Equipment window: Radio icon highlighted
The main view for the selected radio direction opens. 2.
876
Select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 64.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 64.2 — Radio Maintenance tab
3.
Select the Core Facing - Internal radio button in the Loopback area.
4.
Select Active radio button in the Activation area.
5.
Enter the Timeout (days, hours, minutes) in the Timeout fields.
6.
Click on the Apply button.
7.
Core facing Loopback is established.
To deactivate a Digital Core Facing Loopback 1.
In the main equipment window, open the appropriate radio main view and select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 64.2.
2.
Select Core Facing - Internal in the Loopback area.
3.
Select the Not Active radio button in the Activation area.
4.
Click on the Apply button.
5.
Core facing Loopback is deactivated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
877
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
878
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
65 — Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
65.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to perform Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback for the 9500 MPR.
65.2 — General Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback mode uses the received line tributary input signal to the PDH/SDH transponder card and sends the signal back to the transmit line tributary output signal. See Figure 65.1 for a block diagram of Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback. See Figure 65.2 for a block diagram of Line Facing SDH Tributary Loopback. Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is a line external loopback. Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is a drop-and-continue loopback. Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback can be activated on a per tributary basis independent of the other PDH/SDH tributaries. Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is ed on E1/DS1 tributaries (P32E1DS1 card) and DS3 tributaries (P2E3DS3 card).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
879
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.1 — Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback block diagram
Figure 65.2 — Line Facing SDH Tributary Loopback block diagram
65.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To activate a Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
•
To deactivate a Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
To activate a Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
880
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click the PDH/SDH Transponder Card associated with the tributary to perform Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback. For E1/DS1 loopback, see Figure 65.3. For DS3 loopback, see Figure 65.4. For SDH loopback, see Figure 65.5.
Figure 65.3 — Main Equipment window: PDH E1/DS1 Transponder Card highlighted
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
881
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.4 — Main Equipment window: PDH DS3 Transponder Card highlighted
882
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.5 — Main Equipment window: SDH Transponder Card highlighted
i.
The PDH/SDH Main View for the selected PDH/SDH transponder opens.
ii.
Select Loopback tab. For E1/DS1 or DS3 loopback, see Figure 65.6. For SDH loopback, see Figure 65.7.
iii.
For SDH loopback, select Port#s.n. See Figure 65.7.
iv.
For PDH loopback, select Port#nn External Line from the resource tree area; DS1 Port#1-32 External Line or DS3 Port#1-2 External Line. See Figure 65.6 For SDH loopback, select LINEFACING from the resource tree area. See Figure 65.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
883
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.6 — PDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port selected
884
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.7 — SDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port#07 selected
v.
Select the Active radio button in the Activation area.
vi.
Enter time out period (days, hours, minutes) in the Timeout Period (max 4 days) fields.
vii. Click Apply. Loopback Setting window opens. viii. Click Yes. Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is established (Active). See Figure 65.8. Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is established (Active). For an example of an active DS1 line facing loopback see Figure 65.8. For an example of an active SDH Line facing loopback see Figure 65.9.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
885
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.8 — Line Facing PDH DS1 Tributary Loopback Active
886
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.9 — Line Facing SDH Tributary Loopback Active
To deactivate a Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click the PDH/SDH Transponder Card associated with the tributary to perform Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback. For E1/DS1 loopback, see Figure 65.3. For DS3 loopback, see Figure 65.4. For SDH loopback, see Figure 65.5. The PDH/SDH Main View for the selected PDH/SDH transponder opens.
2.
Select Loopback tab. For E1/DS1 or DS3 loopback, see Figure 65.8. For SDH loopback, see Figure 65.9.
3.
For SDH loopback, select Port#s.n. See Figure 65.9.
4.
For PDH loopback, select Port#nn External Line from the resource tree area; DS1 Port#1-32 External Line or DS3 Port#1-2 External Line. See Figure 65.8. For SDH loopback, select LINEFACING from the resource tree area. See Figure 65.9.
5.
Select Not Active radio-button in the Activation area.
6.
Click Apply.
7.
Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is deactivated (Not Active). For PDH loopback, see Figure 65.6. For SDH loopback, see Figure 65.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
887
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
888
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
66 — OAM Remote Loopback
66.1 — Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to perform an EFM OAM remote loopback.
66.2 — General A loopback can be performed on an operational EFM OAM link. The following conditions must be satisfied in order to activate remote loopback: •
Local DTE in Active mode
•
Operational Status value is Operational
•
Remote DTE s Remote Loopback function
•
Local DTE not in loopback mode Note: OAM Remote loopbacks do not generate an Abnormal Condition.
66.3 — Procedure This section provides the following procedures: •
To activate OAM Remote Loopback
•
To activate OAM Remote Loopback
To activate OAM Remote Loopback 1.
From the Main Menu Bar, select Configuration >ETH OAM Configuration. The ETH OAM Configuration window opens. See Figure 66.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
889
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 66.1 — ETH OAM Configuration window with operational link
2.
From the list, choose the interface that you need to create the loopback on.
3.
In the Link OAM Loopback pane, choose the Start check box in the OAM Remote Loopback field.
4.
Click on the Apply button. The loopback is enabled. The Link OAM Loopback Status is updated to Remote Loopback, see Figure 66.2.
To deactivate OAM Remote Loopback 1.
From the Main Menu Bar, select Configuration >ETH OAM Configuration. The ETH OAM Configuration window opens. See Figure 66.2.
890
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 66.2 — ETH OAM Configuration window with OAM Remote Loopback
2.
In the Link OAM Loopback pane, choose the Stop check box in the OAM Remote Loopback field.
3.
Click on the Apply button. The loopback is disabled. The Link OAM Loopback Status is updated to No Loopback.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
891
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
892
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
67 — Open and run performance monitoring
67.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedures to open and run performance monitoring (PM) for the 9500 MPR.
67.2 — General The Performance Monitoring Suite provides the ability to gather statistical data on Ethernet or Radio ports and RSL History to determine the quality level of ports over time. PM counters are arranged in the following s: •
Ethernet Statistics
•
Radio PM
•
Adaptive Modulation PM
•
PDH PM
•
SDH PM
•
RSL History
PM data is collected for 15-min and 24-h time periods. One current and ninety-six history reports are available for a 15-min period. One current and eight history reports are available for a 24-h time period. PM data is considered suspect when one or more of the following conditions occurs during the collection period. When data is suspect, it is flagged in the PM view. •
The elapsed time deviates more than 10/900 s from the nominal time for the 15-min or 24-h collection period.
•
There was loss of PM data in equipment, including PDH/SDH Access Board missing.
•
Performance counters were reset during collection period.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
893
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
PM was activated during the collection period.
The 15-min PM data is stored in the History Data report only when errors are recorded. The 24-h PM data is always stored in the History Data report. Default and Elaborated PM counters are available. Default counters are collected on the NE. Elaborated counters are calculated on the PC.
67.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the PM tool
•
To run PM on an Ethernet port
•
To run PM for compression gain statistics
•
To run PM on a radio Ethernet port
•
To run PM on an L1 radio LAG port
•
To run PM on a radio port
•
To run Adaptive Modulation PM on a radio port
•
To run PM on a PDH port
•
To run PM on an SDH port
•
To run RSL History PM
•
To create a TCA threshold
•
To modify a TCA threshold
•
To delete a TCA Threshold
•
To assign TCA Alarm thresholds to Radio Channels/Link
•
To view PM data
•
To export PM history data
To open the PM tool 1.
From the main toolbar, select the PM Tool icon (see Figure 67.1) or from the main menu bar, select Diagnosis>Performance Monitoring. Figure 67.1 — PM Tool icon
The Acknowledgement of Authorization dialog box opens; see Figure 67.2. 894
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 67.2 — Acknowledgement of Authorization dialog box
2.
Click on the Accept button. The Performance Monitoring Tool opens; see Figure 67.3. Figure 67.3 — Performance Monitoring Tool window
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
895
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM on an Ethernet port 1.
From the resource tree area, select the Ethernet Statistics pane.
2.
From the Ethernet Statistics pane, expand the card tree and select the Ethernet port on which to run Ethernet PM.
3.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.4 shows PM on an Ethernet port. Figure 67.4 — Ethernet port PM
896
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM for compression gain statistics 1.
From the resource tree area, select the Ethernet Statistics pane.
2.
Click on the Bird’s Eye View icon in the toolbar to switch to Bird’s Eye View.
3.
From the Ethernet Statistics pane, expand the card tree and select the Ethernet or L1 LAG port on which to run Ethernet PM.
4.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.5 shows compression gain statistics. Figure 67.5 — Compression gain statistics PM
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
897
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM on a radio Ethernet port 1.
From the resource tree area, select the Ethernet Statistics pane.
2.
From the Ethernet Statistics pane, select the radio card on which to run radio Ethernet PM.
3.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.6 shows radio QoS Ethernet port PM. Figure 67.6 — Radio QoS Ethernet port PM
898
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: If the Ethernet throughput percentage over the radio interface (for aggregate and QoS queues) is above 100% and the TDF (Total Discarded Frames) counter is clear, check whether the TDM2TDM/TDM2ETH/SDH2SDH data flows cross-connected to the radio interface are experiencing any of the following: • Loss of CES alarm at both or either side of the TDM2TDM/TDM2ETH/SDH2SDH data flow path • RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing) alarm on PDH, SDHACC, or SDHCHAN card • STM-1/OC3 LOS alarm at both or either side of the SDH2SDH data flow path In these cases, the Ethernet traffic can exploit the radio bandwidth left available by TDM2TDM/TDM2ETH/SDH2SDH data flows, resulting in an Ethernet throughput higher than the available bandwidth computed by the NE, based on the provisioned cross-connections.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
899
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM on an L1 radio LAG port Note: Measured throughput on an L1 LAG includes both TDM2TDM/TDM2ETH/ SDH2SDH data flow and Ethernet traffic.
1.
From the resource tree area, select the Ethernet Statistics pane.
2.
From the Ethernet Statistics pane, select the L1 radio LAG to on which to run radio Ethernet PM.
3.
To configure the Ethernet counters for an L1 radio LAG with EASv2, choose TDM+ETHERNET or ETHERNET from the Aggregation Type drop-down menu in the Configuration . Figure 67.3 shows the configuration.
Figure 67.7 — Configure Ethernet counters for L1 radio LAG PM with EASv2
4.
900
Click Stopped to start the monitoring.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM on a radio port 1.
From the resource tree area, select the Radio PM pane.
2.
From the Radio PM pane, select radio port on which to run radio PM.
3.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.8 shows PM on a radio port. Figure 67.8 — Radio port PM
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
901
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run Adaptive Modulation PM on a radio port Note: In case of usage of analog measurement the maximum suggested number of Analog measurement windows that can be opened at the same time is 12.
1.
From the resource tree area, select the Adaptive Modulation PM pane.
2.
From the Adaptive Modulation pane, select the radio port to on which to run Adaptive Modulation PM.
3.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.9 shows adaptive modulation PM. Figure 67.9 — Adaptive Modulation PM
902
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM on a PDH port 1.
From the resource tree area, select the PDH PM pane.
2.
From the PDH PM pane, expand the PDH card on which to run PDH PM.
3.
From the PDH PM pane, select the PDH ports on which to run PDH PM.
4.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.10 shows PM on a PDH port. Figure 67.10 — PDH port PM
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
903
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM on an SDH port 1.
From the resource tree area, select the SDH PM pane.
2.
From the SDH PM pane, expand the SDHACC card.
3.
Select the SDH ports on which to run SDH PM.
4.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.11 shows PM on an SDH port. Figure 67.11 — SDH port PM
904
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run RSL History PM 1.
From the resource tree area, select RSL History.
2.
From the RSL History pane, select a radio port on which to run RSL History PM.
3.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.12 shows RSL History PM. Figure 67.12 — RSL History PM
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
905
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To create a TCA threshold 1.
From the Toolbar Area, select the Threshold Editor icon. The Threshold Editor window opens; see Figure 67.13. Figure 67.13 — Threshold Editor window
2.
From the Available Thresholds , select the radio PM type tab: SDH PM, PDH PM, Radio PM Hop, or Radio PM Link.
3.
From the Editing Section , select the Measurement Type radio button: 15min (15 min) or 24h (24 h).
4.
From the Editing Section , click Add. A new threshold index is added to the Index Editor .
5.
Update the values for the new threshold index in the Index Editor .
6.
From the NE Commands , click Apply. The new threshold is added to the Available Thresholds .
7.
906
Close the Threshold Editor window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To modify a TCA threshold 1.
Open the Threshold Editor. The Thresholds Editor window opens.
2.
From the Available Thresholds , select the radio PM type tab: SDH PM, PDH PM, Radio PM Hop, or Radio PM Link.
3.
Select the threshold index to modify.
Note: In the SDH PM, E1/DS1 PM and Radio PM Hop threshold tabs, thresholds #1 and #4 are default thresholds. In the Radio PM Link threshold tab, thresholds #1 and #3 are default thresholds. These default thresholds are not editable.
4.
From the Editing Section , click Modify. The threshold index to modify is copied to the Index Editor .
5.
Update the threshold index values in the Index Editor .
6.
From the NE Commands , click Apply. The threshold values are updated in the Available Thresholds .
7.
Close the Thresholds Editor window.
To delete a TCA Threshold 1.
Open the Threshold Editor. The Thresholds Editor window opens.
2.
From the Available Thresholds , select the radio PM tab: Radio PM Hop, or Radio PM Link.
3.
Select the Threshold index to delete.
Note: In the Hop threshold table, thresholds #1 and #4 are default thresholds. In the Link threshold table, thresholds #1 and #3 are default thresholds. These default thresholds cannot be deleted.
4.
From the NE Commands , click Destroy. The threshold is removed from the Available Thresholds .
5.
Close the Threshold Editor window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
907
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To assign TCA Alarm thresholds to Radio Channels/Link 1.
From the resource tree area, select the Radio PM pane.
2.
From the Radio PM pane, select the radio port to assign a TCA threshold.
3.
In the resource tree area Configuration section, select the following settings in the Assign PM threshold Configuration window; see Figure 67.14. Figure 67.14 — Assign PM threshold Configuration window
908
i.
From the Monitor Point drop-down menu, select Hop Channel#0, Hop Channel#1, or Link.
ii.
From the Collection Period drop-down menu, select 15min or 24h.
iii.
From the Threshold instance drop-down menu, select threshold table # [1/6].
iv.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To view PM data 1.
In the resource tree area, select the PM type to view: Ethernet Statistics, Radio PM, Adaptive Modulation PM, PDH PM, SDH PM, or RSL History.
2.
In the resource tree area, select the slot or slot/port for PM to view.
3.
Click Refresh.
To export PM history data 1.
In the resource tree area, select the unit for which to export PM data.
2.
Click Export. The Save dialog box appears.
3.
Navigate to the directory to save PM history data.
4.
Click Open. The Export dialog box appears.
5.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
909
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
910
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
68 — Perform protection switching
68.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the instructions to perform Protection Switching for the 9500 MPR. Protection switching is available for equipment/radio channel entities when correctly equipped and configured.
68.2 — Equipment Protection Switching Equipment Protection Switching (EPS) is used to provide protection for services implemented on equipment. EPS protection is ed on Core card, P32E1DS1 card, P2E3DS3 card, and SDHACC card. Core 1+1 EPS protection s three different types of protection, control platform protection, external synchronization interface protection, and traffic/services protection. Core 1+1 EPS traffic/services protection is ed when the following two conditions are satisfied: •
Both Core cards, main (slot 1) and spare (slot 2), send their signals to all peripherals
•
Each peripheral selects the signal coming from the Active Core card and ignores the signal from the Standby Core card.
P32E1DS1 card, P2E3DS3 card, SDHACC, and P8ETH and EASv2 radio 1+1 EPS traffic/ services protection switching is ed when main (slots 3, 5, and/or 7) and spare (slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively) are correctly equipped and configured. Note: The PDH 1+1 EPS protection type is not-revertive and can’t be changed.
Note: The SDH 1+1 EPS protection type is not-revertive and can’t be changed.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
911
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Rx Radio Protection Switching
Note: For radios configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, EPS protection switching criteria provisioning is not ed. the restoration criteria selected for HSB-TPS is applied to EPS automatically.
MPTACC radio cards 1+1 EPS traffic/services protection switching when main (slots 3, 5, and/or 7) and spare (slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively) are correctly equipped and configured. Up to two 1+1 EPS protection pairs can be configured in this configuration. Two MPTACC radio ports on the same MPTACC card 1+1 EPS traffic/services protection switching when both MPT Access ports are correctly equipped and configured on the same MPTACC radio card. One 1+1 EPS protection pair can be configured per MPTACC card. The system behavior for the Transmit flow (traffic flow from traffic/services cards to Core card) on a local access traffic/services card is as follows: •
Both traffic/services cards (main and spare) receives the signal from patch . The Active traffic/services card sends its own signals to both Core cards (main and spare).
•
The Standby traffic/services card does not send traffic (that is, link is up but active traffic/packets are not carried).
•
Each Core (main and spare) selects the signal coming from the traffic/services card declared Active. Each Core ignores anything coming from the Standby traffic/ services card
The system behavior for the Receive flow (traffic flow from Core card to traffic/services cards) on a local access traffic/services card is as follows: •
Both Core cards (Active and Standby) sends its own signal to the traffic/services cards (main and spare). The Active traffic/services card sends its own signals to both Core cards (main and spare).
•
The traffic/services cards (main and spare) selects the signal declared as Active.
•
Each traffic/services card (main and spare) ignores anything coming from the Standby Core
68.3 — Rx Radio Protection Switching Rx Radio Protection Switching (RPS) provides protection for a working radio channel. This type of protection is performed by switching a working channel to a protection section when the working section fails or when its performance falls below the required level.
912
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Hot StandBy protection switching
RPS is available in all 1+1 radio direction configurations in single-ended mode (the switching is complete when the working channel in the failed direction is switched to the protection section). When the protection type is 1+1 at the source end, the normal traffic signal is transmitted simultaneously on both working and protection channels and the receiving end monitors the condition of the two traffic signals received and selects the better (connected to the appropriate signal). For RPS, the Active Radio Channel signal is sent to both MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceivers frame managers.
68.4 — Hot StandBy protection switching Transmission protection switching (HSB) provides protection to a radio transmission channel where transmission is implemented on two MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceivers. This protection is performed by switching the main radio transmission MPT-HL/HLC/HC/ XP Transceiver cards ing the protected radio transmission channel to spare (protecting) radio transmission MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver cards capable of ing the same service when a failure is present (equipment failure).
68.5 — Protection switching schemes per configurations The following configurations the listed protection switching types: •
1+1 Frequency Diversity: s RPS and EPS protection switching. Radio Protection Configuration, two MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver cards, two different frequencies, no coupler/relay
•
1+1 HSB: s RPS, HSB, and EPS protection switching. Radio Protection Configuration, two MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver cards, same frequency, one coupler/relay
•
1+1 HSB s RPS, HSB and EPS protection switching. Radio Protection Configuration with Space Diversity, two MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver cards, same frequency, one coupler/relay
•
1+0 Unprotected Radio Configuration s no protection switching protection. Radio configuration, single MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver card
•
For the local traffic/services cards P32E1DS1 (DS1), P2E3DS3 (DS3), SDHACC (OC-3), Core-E (Ethernet) s 1+1 EPS protection switching
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
913
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Protection switching commands
68.6 — Protection switching commands To enter the Commands menu, click on either the Spare #0 element in the Tree view or on the Main #1 element. On the Main#1 channel, the available commands are Manual and Forced (only Forced for Core protection). On the Spare#0 channel the available commands are Manual and Lockout (only Lockout for Core protection). See Table 68.1 for a list of protection switch commands and their priority. Table 68.1 — Command priority list Command
Priority
ed Channel
Lockout
1 (highest)
Spare (Channel #0)
Forced
2
Main (Channel #1)
Automatic Switch
3
Main (Channel #1) Spare (Channels #0
Manual
4 (lowest)
Lockout has a higher priority than Forced and automatic switch commands: the activation of this command forces in service Channel 1, independent of the possible active alarms or standing Forced switch command. This command activates signaling ABN. Forced has a higher priority than an automatic switch command: the activation of this command forces in service Channel 0, independent of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN. Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commands generated by the logic. Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling ABN. Table 68.1 Command priority list, The “Forced” command for channel 1 is equivalent to the “Lockout” command for channel 0. In both cases, the result is that the relevant channel protection path is forced to standby status.
914
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Caution: Protection switching traffic will cause a hit to traffic.
68.7 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Protection Schemes tab
•
To perform a Forced Switch on the Main Core card
•
To perform a Lockout on the Spare Core Card
•
To release a Switch on a Core Card
•
To perform a Forced EPS Switch on the Main card
•
To perform a Manual EPS Switch from Main to Spare
•
To perform a Manual EPS Switch from Spare to Main
•
To perform a Lockout on the EPS Spare
•
To release an EPS Switch
•
To perform a Forced HSB Switch on the Main Radio Channel
•
To perform a Manual HSB Switch from the Main to Spare Radio Channel
•
To perform a Manual HSB Switch from the Spare to Main Radio Channel
•
To perform a Lockout on the HSB Spare Radio Channel
•
To Release an HSB Switch
•
To perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch on the Main Radio Channel
•
To perform a Manual Rx Radio Switch from the Main to the Spare Radio Channel
•
To perform a Manual Rx Radio Switch from the Spare to the Main Radio Channel
•
To perform a Lockout on the Rx Radio Spare Radio Channel
•
To release an Rx Radio Switch
To open the Protection Schemes tab 1.
From the Main View, select Protection Schemes Tab. The Protection Schemes tab displays. See Figure 68.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
915
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.1 — Protection Schemes tab
To perform a Forced Switch on the Main Core card Caution: Forced switching the Core will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Main Core card in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.2.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Forced.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
916
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.2 — Forced Switch Main Core-E to Spare Core-E
To perform a Lockout on the Spare Core Card 1.
Select Spare Core card in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.3.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Lockout.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
917
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.3 — Lockout Spare Core-E Card
To release a Switch on a Core Card Caution: Releasing Forced switch Core will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Main or Spare Core card in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.4.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select None.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
918
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.4 — Release Switch Core-E
To perform a Forced EPS Switch on the Main card Caution: Forced EPS switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Equipment Protection/Main#1 in the resource tree area. Figure 68.5.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Forced.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
919
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.5 — Forced Equipment Switch Main to Spare
To perform a Manual EPS Switch from Main to Spare Caution: Manual EPS switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Equipment Protection/Main#1 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.6.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Manual.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
920
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.6 — Manual Equipment Switch: Main to Spare
To perform a Manual EPS Switch from Spare to Main Caution: Manual EPS switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Equipment Protection/Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.7.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Manual.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
921
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.7 — Manual Equipment Switch: Spare to Main
To perform a Lockout on the EPS Spare 1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Equipment Protection/Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.8.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Lockout.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
922
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.8 — Lockout Equipment Switch: Lockout Switch to Spare
To release an EPS Switch Caution: Forced EPS switch equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Equipment Protection/Main#1 or Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.9.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select None.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
923
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.9 — Release EPS Switch
To perform a Forced HSB Switch on the Main Radio Channel Caution: Forced HSB switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/HSB Protection/Main#1 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.10.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Forced.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
924
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.10 — Forced HSB Switch Main Radio Channel
To perform a Manual HSB Switch from the Main to Spare Radio Channel Caution: Forced HSB switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/HSB Protection/Main#1 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.11.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Manual.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
925
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.11 — Manual HSB Switch: Main Radio Channel to Spare Radio Channel
To perform a Manual HSB Switch from the Spare to Main Radio Channel Caution: Manual HSB switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/HSB Protection/Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.12.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Manual.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
926
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.12 — Manual HSB Switch: Spare Radio Channel to Main Radio Channel
To perform a Lockout on the HSB Spare Radio Channel 1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/HSB Protection/Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.13.
2.
On the Commands tab, select Lockout in the New Value drop-down menu.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
927
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.13 — Lockout HSB Switch: Lockout Spare Radio Channel
To Release an HSB Switch Caution: Releasing Forced HSB switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/HSB Protection/Main#1 or Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.14.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select None.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
928
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.14 — Release HSB Switch
To perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch on the Main Radio Channel Caution: Forced Rx Radio switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Rx Radio Protection/Main#1 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.15.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Forced.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
929
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.15 — Forced Rx Radio Switch: Main Radio Channel
To perform a Manual Rx Radio Switch from the Main to the Spare Radio Channel Caution: Manual Rx Radio switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Rx Radio Protection/Main#1 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.16.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Manual.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
930
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.16 — Manual Rx Radio Switch: Main Radio Channel to Spare Radio Channel
To perform a Manual Rx Radio Switch from the Spare to the Main Radio Channel Caution: Manual Rx Radio switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Rx Radio Protection/Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.17.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Manual.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
931
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.17 — Manual Rx Radio Switch: Spare Radio Channel to Main Radio Channel
To perform a Lockout on the Rx Radio Spare Radio Channel 1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Rx Radio Protection/Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.18.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Lockout.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
932
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.18 — Lockout Rx Radio Switch Spare Radio Channel
To release an Rx Radio Switch Caution: Releasing Rx Radio switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Rx Radio Protection/Main#1 or Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.19.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select None.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
933
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.19 — Release Rx Radio Switch
934
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
69 — Perform radio power measurements
69.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to perform Radio Power Measurements for the 9500 MPR.
69.2 — Procedure To perform radio power measurements 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click on the MPT-HC, MPT-MC, MPT-HC-HQAM, MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, MPT-HLS, MPT-XP, or MPT-XPHQAM Transceiver to perform radio power measurements. The main view for the selected radio direction opens.
2.
Select Measurements tab. See Figure 69.1 and Figure 69.2.
3.
Select Channel # to perform radio power measurements.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
935
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 69.1 — Radio Power Measurement window
936
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 69.2 — Radio Power Measurement window for MPT-HLC
4.
In the Measurement Interval area, enter the measurement duration in Days, Hours, and Minutes.
5.
From the Sample Time (sec) drop-down menu, select sample time.
6.
Click Start. The radio power measurement graphical view opens. See Figure 69.3. The radio power measurement tabular view opens. See Figure 69.4. Note: The following figures show an MPT-HLC with a combiner and branching loss values set. Not all fields will be displayed with a different radio or configuration.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
937
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 69.3 — Radio Power Measurement: graphical view
Figure 69.4 — Radio Power Measurement: tabular view
7.
938
Click Close.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
70 — Radio Facing Circuit Loopback
70.1 — Purpose This chapter provides instructions to perform Radio Facing Circuit Loopback for the 9500 MPR.
70.1.1 — General Radio Facing Circuit Loopback mode uses the receive data interface signal on the MPTHC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Transceiver and replaces the signal to be transmitted by the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM or MPT-HLC/HLS Transceiver and sends the receive signal back to the far-end Transceiver. This is an external loopback. Radio Facing Circuit Loopback is only possible to enable on the aggregate traffic. This loopback is a Loop and Continue. Transmit traffic will be dropped. When this loopback is activated the expected behavior is as follows: •
•
TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH flows are forwarded back to Core card with source and destination MAC addresses swapped. •
For TDM2ETH flows, where the ECID Tx and ECID Rx are the same value, the loopback works.
•
For TDM2ETH flows, where the ECID Tx is different form ECID Rx, the loopback fails.
Generic Ethernet flows are dropped.
Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
939
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
70.2 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To activate a Radio Facing Circuit Loopback
•
To deactivate a Radio Facing Circuit Loopback
To activate a Radio Facing Circuit Loopback 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click the Transceiver radio icon to perform Radio Facing Circuit Loopback. See Figure 70.1. Figure 70.1 — Main Equipment Window: Radio icon highlighted
The main view for the selected radio direction opens. 2.
940
Select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 70.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 70.2 — Radio Maintenance tab
3.
Select the Radio Facing - External radio button in the Loopback area.
4.
Select the Active radio button in the Activation area.
5.
Enter the Timeout (days, hours, minutes) in the Timeout fields.
6.
Click on the Apply button. Radio Facing Circuit Loopback is established.
To deactivate a Radio Facing Circuit Loopback 1.
In the main equipment window, open the appropriate radio main view and select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 70.2.
2.
Select Radio Facing - External in the Loopback area.
3.
Select the Not Active radio-button in the Activation area.
4.
Click on the Apply button. Radio Facing Circuit Loopback is deactivated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
941
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
942
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
71 — RF Core Facing Loopback
71.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to perform RF Core Facing Loopback for the MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT-HLS Transceiver.
71.2 — General An RF Core Facing loopback is used to help isolate a problem on the RF path. With the MPT-HL, two methods are available, transmit and receive. The transmit RF Core Facing loopback is used at the transmit site of the path to isolate the transmitter from possible path and receiver problems. The receive RF Core Facing loopback is used at the receive site of the path to isolate the receiver from possible transmitter and path problems. With the MPT-HLC/HLS, only the receive loopback is available. A transmit RF Core Facing loopback is enabled by the configuring the RX frequency to the same value as the TX frequency, allowing the receiver at the transmit site to use the TX RF signal of the path. Transmit RF Core Facing loopback is only ed at TX frequencies that are within the allowed RX frequency range of the transceiver. This loopback routes the TX RF signal to the Rx RF. Receive RF Core Facing loopback is only ed at RX frequencies that are within the allowed TX frequency range of the transceiver. It is possible to enable this loopback only on the aggregate traffic. This loopback will be a Loop and Continue with the MPT-HLC/HLS. It is not a Loop and Continue with the MPTHL. With both radios, the loopback will block the normal receive traffic.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
943
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
A RF Core Facing loopback may require an external connection for some modem profiles. Without an external connection, the RF loopback is dependent on internal leakage in the transceiver. This leakage varies between units and also with operating frequency. The leakage is sufficient that the loopback will work with the lowest capacity profiles without an external connection. It may be sufficient to work with other profiles, but this is not guaranteed. If an external connection is required, an attenuator is required as part of the external connection, typically 60 dB. Due to the unlimited number of combinations of system configurations possible, the basic RF diplexer filter is shown. See Figure 71.1. The RF diplexer filter can be mounted with the antenna port facing up or down. The TX port facing up or down. The main RX port facing up or down. The spare RX port facing up, down, or on the side. The TX port and RX port are always centered on the RF filter. The spare RX port is always off-set. The RF filter shown in Figure 71.1 has the antenna port, TX port, and main RX port facing up and the spare RX port facing down. For additional information on RF filter configurations, refer to Diplexer Filter Positions contained in 9500 MPR-A MSS and MPT-HL Shelf Assembly Manufacturing Drawing, found in Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A Engineering Documentation. To system functionality, insert a test signal (E1, DS1 or DS3) into one of the provisioned ports (for example, slot 5, DS1 port 22) and monitor the same port (for example, slot 5, DS1 port 22) for error-free operation. The following constraints apply to all loopbacks: •
Link Identifier must be disabled before a loopback is activated
•
ECID Tx = ECID Rx for TDM2ETH
The following additional constraints apply to Core Facing @RF - Internal loopbacks for MPT-HLC/HLS: •
The loopback is guaranteed in RTPC only
•
With a diversity combiner active, squelch the diversity receiver
•
With XPIC enabled, mute the remote XPIC transmitter in order to avoid interference on the associated XPIC polarization
•
In 1+1HSB configuration, apply an RPS Lockout/forced switch to the same channel where the loopback will be activated
RF Core Facing loopback is not ed on the 11 GHz Transceivers. The 11 GHz Transceiver variants do not currently an overlap of the TX and RX ranges. This prevents being able to perform an RF Core Facing loopback. •
944
3EM23888AB: Tx Frequency (10,700 - 11,200 MHz), Rx Frequency (11,200 11,700 MHz)
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
•
3EM23888AC: Tx Frequency (11,200 - 11,700 MHz), Rx Frequency (10,700 11,200 MHz)
Caution: Possibility of Service interruption. RF Core Facing loopback is an out of service procedure. Schedule a maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
Figure 71.1 — RF Filter Port detail
71.3 — Procedure This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Radio Maintenance view
•
To activate a Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback
•
To deactivate a Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback
•
To activate a Receive RF Core Facing Loopback
•
To deactivate a Receive RF Core Facing Loopback
•
To activate an MPT-HLC/HLS Core Facing @RF - Internal Loopback
•
To deactivate an MPT-HLC/HLS Core Facing @RF - Internal Loopback Caution: RF Core Facing loopback is an out of service procedure. Schedule a maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
Note: RF Core Facing loopback is not ed on the 11 GHz Transceivers (Alcatel-Lucent P/N: 3EM23888AB and 3EM23888AC).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
945
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure To open the Radio Maintenance view 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click on the radio icon to perform Core Facing Loopback. See Figure 71.2. Figure 71.2 — Main Equipment Window: Radio icon highlighted
The main view for the selected radio direction opens. 2.
946
Select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 71.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 71.3 — Maintenance tab (MPT-HLC shown)
To activate a Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback 1.
Activate Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback using the following procedure. See Figure 71.3. a.
Record the current Shifter (MHz) value.
b.
Record the current RX Freq(KHz) value.
c.
TXMute the local MPT-HL Transceiver cards, position the TXMute switch to the OFF position (PA switch set to ‘0’).
d.
Using the craft terminal, TXMute the far-end MPT-HL Transceiver cards.
e.
Select Custom as the new Shifter (MHz) value.
f.
Click on the Apply button.
g.
Set the RX Freq(KHz) to the same value as the TX Freq(KHz) value.
h.
Click on the Apply button.
i.
Release TXMute on the local MPT-HL Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the ON position (PA switch set to ‘1’).
The loopback should be active. If no loopback is active, error-free operation on the test signal, then an external connection on the filter will be required. 2.
Is RF Core Facing loopback active?
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
947
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
a.
If yes, the procedure is complete.
b.
If no, then go to step 3.
Note: For transceivers ing the 11 GHz channel plan, the RF filter must be removed and the connections must be made directly to the MPT-HL shelf connectors.
3.
TXMute the local MPT-HL Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the OFF position (PA switch set to ‘0’).
4.
Install external RF loopback connection on the RF filter. See Figure 71.1.
5.
a.
Connect a coaxial cable to the main antenna connector.
b.
Connect the other end of the coaxial cable to a 60 dB attenuator.
c.
Connect a second coaxial cable to the other end of the attenuator.
d.
Connect the other end of the second coaxial cable to the main or spare Rx connector.
Release TXMute on the local MPT-HL Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the ON position (PA switch set to ‘1’). The loopback should be active, error-free operation on the test signal. When the loopback is not active is an indication a problem exists on the transmit portion of the path.
To deactivate a Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback 1.
Set the RX Freq(KHz) to the value recorded in To activate a Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback.
2.
Click Apply.
3.
Set the Shifter (MHz) to the value recorded in To activate a Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback.
4.
Click Apply.
5.
Was external RF loopback connection installed? a.
If yes, then go to step 6.
b.
If no, then go to step 9.
6.
TXMute the local MPT-HL Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the OFF position (PA switch set to ‘0’).
7.
Remove external RF loopback connection on the RF filter. See Figure 71.1.
8.
Connect the coaxial connections removed during step 4.
9.
Release TXMute on the local MPT-HL Transceiver cards, position the TXMute switch to the ON position (PA switch set to ‘1’).
10.
Using the craft terminal, release TXMute the far-end MPT-HL Transceiver cards.
To activate a Receive RF Core Facing Loopback 1.
948
Activate Receive RF Core Facing Loopback using the following procedure. See Figure 71.3. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
a.
Record the current Shifter (MHz) value.
b.
Record the current TX Freq(KHz) value.
c.
TXMute the local MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver cards, position the TXMute switch to the OFF position (PA switch set to ‘0’).
d.
Using the craft terminal, TXMute the far-end MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver cards.
e.
Select Custom as the new Shifter (MHz) value.
f.
Click Apply.
g.
Set the TX Freq(KHz) to the same value as the RX Freq(KHz) value.
h.
Click Apply.
i.
Release TXMute on the local MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the ON position (PA switch set to ‘1’).
The loopback should be active. If no loopback is active, error-free operation on the test signal, an external connection on the filter will be required. 2.
Is RF Core Facing loopback active? a.
If yes, the procedure is complete.
b.
If no, then go to step 3.
Note: For transceivers ing the 11 GHz channel plan, the RF filter must be removed and the connections must be made directly to the MPT-HL/HLC/ shelf connectors.
3.
TXMute the local MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the OFF position (PA switch set to ‘0’).
4.
Install external RF loopback connection on the RF filter. See Figure 71.1.
5.
a.
Connect a coaxial cable to the main antenna connector.
b.
Connect the other end of the coaxial cable to a 60 dB attenuator.
c.
Connect a second coaxial cable to the other end of the attenuator.
d.
Connect the other end of the second coaxial cable to the main or spare Tx connector.
Release TXMute on the local MPT-HL/HLC/ Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the ON position (PA switch set to ‘1’). The loopback should be active, error-free operation on the test signal. When the loopback is not active, it is an indication a problem exists on the receive portion of the path.
To deactivate a Receive RF Core Facing Loopback 1.
Set the TX Freq(KHz) to the value recorded in To activate a Receive RF Core Facing Loopback.
2.
Click Apply.
3.
Set the Shifter (MHz) to the value recorded in To activate a Receive RF Core Facing Loopback.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
949
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
4.
Click Apply.
5.
Was external RF loopback connection installed? a.
If yes, then go to step 6.
b.
If no, then go to step 9.
6.
TXMute the local MPT-HL/HLC/ Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the OFF position (PA switch set to ‘0’).
7.
Remove external RF loopback connection on the RF filter. See Figure 71.1.
8.
Connect the coaxial connections removed during step 3.
9.
Release TXMute on the local MPT-HL/HLC/ Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the ON position (PA switch set to ‘1’).
10.
Using the craft terminal, release TXMute the far-end MPT-HL/HLC/ Transceiver cards.
To activate an MPT-HLC/HLS Core Facing @RF - Internal Loopback 1.
Open the appropriate main view for the configuration and select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 71.4. Figure 71.4 — Radio Maintenance tab
2.
Activate Core Facing@RF - Internal Loopback using the following procedure: a.
950
Open the appropriate main view for the configuration and select the Settings tab. See Figure 71.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
b.
Record the current Tx Power value.
c.
Set the Tx Power value to the maximum level.
d.
In 1+1 HSB configuration, apply an RPS Lockout/forced switch to the channel where the loopback will be activated.
e.
If XPIC is active, mute the remote transmitter.
f.
Select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 71.3.
g.
If the diversity combiner is active, squelch the diversity receiver.
h.
Select the Core Facing@RF - Internal radio button.
i.
Select the Active radio-button in the Activation area.
j.
Enter time out period (days, hours, minutes) in the Timeout Period (max 4 days) fields. At the end of this period the loopback will automatically be deactivated.
k.
Click on the Apply button.
The loopback should be active. To deactivate an MPT-HLC/HLS Core Facing @RF - Internal Loopback 1.
Open the appropriate main view for the configuration and select the Settings tab. See Figure 71.4.
2.
Set the Tx Power to the value recorded in step 2 b.
3.
Click on the Apply button.
4.
Select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 71.3.
5.
Select the Not Active radio button in the Activation field.
6.
Click on the Apply button. The Loopback is now deactivated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
951
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
952
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
72 — ister SDH LAG
72.1 — Purpose This chapter provides detailed procedures to ister drop priority of SDH crossconnections on L1 Radio LAG ports. For more information about SDH2SDH flows with L1 LAG on EASv2, see the AlcatelLucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual. For information about configuring crossconnections, see Provision cross connections. In the ANSI market, this feature is only available with the MPT-HLC.
72.2 — General If the LAG rate has dropped to less than the bandwidth required by the SDH flows, all the cross-connected SDH flows could be affected by congestion and frame loss. To avoid this, a subset of the SDH2SDH flows cross-connected to the LAG is dropped. The drop priority value of a flow defines the minimum LAG bandwidth required to the flow. An SDH flow with a drop priority of 255 will be the first to be subject to the selective drop, as soon as the LAG rate is not enough to transmit all the SDH flows connected to the LAG. An SDH flow with a drop priority of 1 will be the last to be subject to the selective drop. When a cross-connection is created, the default drop priority of the flow is 255. It is possible to configure different drop priority values for each flow. This will allow the available LAG bandwidth to be used to transport as many cross-connected SDH flows as possible. If the same drop priority value is assigned to more than one SDH flow, the drop priority defines the minimum LAG bandwidth required to transport all SDH flows with that drop priority. If the same flow is cross-connected on the other side of the LAG or in a forwarding path, the drop priority should be configured the same in each NE.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
953
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
72.3 — Procedure 1.
Click on the SDH LAG button in the LAG Configuration screen. The SDH LAG screen opens; see Figure 72.1. Figure 72.1 — SDH LAG screen
954
2.
Select the LAG from the SDH LAG List .
3.
In the SDH Flows priority management , double click on the Drop Priority cell.
4.
Enter the new value and press Enter. The required bandwidth for the drop priority appears in the SDH Flows Threshold pane.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
73 — Upgrade and downgrade protection
73.1 — Purpose These procedures describe how to upgrade and downgrade protection configuration on the 9500 MPR system.
73.2 — General The protection upgrade and downgrade procedures provide the general steps and sequence required to change protection scheme. The number of possible configuration scenarios prevents covering all upgrade and downgrade possibilities.
73.2.1 — PDH protection PDH protection upgrade applies when converting from 1+0 not protected to 1+1 EPS protection configuration. PDH protection downgrade applies when converting from 1+1 EPS protection to 1+0 not protected configuration.
73.2.2 — Radio protection Radio protection upgrade applies when converting from 1+0 not protected to 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or FD radio protection configuration. Note: With MPT-MC only the 1+1 HSB configuration is available.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
955
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
Radio protection downgrade applies when converting from 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or FD protection to 1+0 not protected radio configuration. Radio protection downgrade requires a power cycle of the NE. There are no steps included to for the required changes to the MPT-HL shelf diplexer configuration or outside plant configuration, such as ODU/antenna configuration, RF coupler, waveguide, and grounding. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual for information about installation and cabling for radio protection.
73.2.3 — Modulation scheme The modulation scheme conversion applies when converting from static to adaptive radio profile and the reverse. To change modulation scheme, ATPC must be disabled, radio configuration must be 1+0 not protected, and license key must adaptive modulation. Converting from static to adaptive radio profile, all existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections must be ed by the lowest adaptive modulation profile (4 QAM). When all existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are ed by the lowest adaptive modulation profile (4 QAM), all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are kept and the residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM and TEM2ETH cross-connections will be recomputed. When all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections can not be ed by the lowest adaptive modulation profile (4 QAM), the request to change modulation scheme is rejected. Some existing TDM2TDM and/or TEM2ETH cross-connections must be deleted to achieve a bandwidth which is ed by the lowest adaptive modulation profile. Converting from adaptive to static radio profile, the new static radio profile is the one that corresponds to the largest ed radio profile configured (16 QAM or 64 QAM). all existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are preserved and the residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM or TEM2ETH cross-connections are recalculated. All cards can be removed and installed with power applied. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual to determine card location and type.
956
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
73.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To upgrade Core 1+0 to 1+1 EPS protection configuration
•
To downgrade Core 1+1 EPS to 1+0 not protected configuration
•
To upgrade PDH 1+0 to 1+1 EPS protection configuration
•
To downgrade PDH 1+1 EPS to 1+0 not protected configuration
•
To upgrade 1+0 to 1+1 protected radio configuration
•
To downgrade 1+1 to 1+0 not protected radio configuration
•
To upgrade fixed modulation to adaptive modulation configuration
•
To downgrade adaptive modulation to fixed modulation configuration Danger: Circuit packs can be installed or removed with bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use extreme care when installing or removing circuit packs with power on. Warning: The following warnings apply: • Circuit packs contain static-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by static discharge. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual for special handling instructions. • When installing a plug-in, ensure its backplane connector is correctly engaged before applying sufficient pressure to bring the plug-in flush with the front . Improper alignment can result in damaged pins on the backplane connector and/or damage to the plug-in connector. • Plug-ins must be withdrawn and inserted using their finger-grip fastener pulls. Never withdraw or insert using attached cables. Pulling on the cables may damage the cable, plug-in connector, and/or plug-in card connector attachment.
To upgrade Core 1+0 to 1+1 EPS protection configuration 1.
If a CorEvo card is in use, that the card has a μSD version with CorEvo protection available. Perform the following for each CorEvo card: •
to WebCT and run the Show Genesys Version command from the Debug Info page. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR WebCT Manual for details.
•
that the version is V1.0.14 or greater. If the version number is not V1.0.14 or greater, the μSD must be replaced with a new R6.1.0 μSD before CorEvo protection can be configured. See the Release Notice for R6.1.0 for μSD card part numbers, and the AlcatelLucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual for the procedure to replace flash cards.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
957
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Caution: If Core protection is set up with a version before V1.0.14, the card may become corrupted after a protection switch.
2.
On the CT settings window, enable the spare Core card in slot 2.
3.
Install the spare Core card in spare slot 2.
4.
Connect the necessary cables to spare the card that you installed in step 3.
5.
Wait 30 minutes for the Core cards to align and for the Status LED on the spare card to turn yellow.
6.
Provision the Equipment Protection Schemes parameter; see Provision protection scheme parameters.
To downgrade Core 1+1 EPS to 1+0 not protected configuration 1.
that the main Core card is active. If needed, perform a forced switch to the main Core card; see Perform protection switching.
2.
On the CT settings window, set the spare Core card equipment type to Empty.
3.
Disconnect the cables from the spare Core card.
4.
Remove the spare Core card from slot 2.
To upgrade PDH 1+0 to 1+1 EPS protection configuration 1.
Install spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card in spare slot 4, 6, or 8 associated with main P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card. An Unconfigured Equipment Present alarm displays.
2.
Connect the DS1 or DS3 cables to spare the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card that you installed in step 1.
3.
On CT settings window, enable the spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card that you installed in step 1.
4.
On CT settings window, configure the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 cards for 1+1 EPS protection type.
Note: To complete the 1+1 EPS protection, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address affected by this system upgrade, must be changed from ‘unicast’ to ‘multicast’ at the remote NEs.
5.
Reprovision all of the TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address from ‘unicast’ to ‘multicast’ at the remote NEs. For more information about how to configure cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To downgrade PDH 1+1 EPS to 1+0 not protected configuration Caution: Downgrading from 1+1 EPS to 1+0 Not protected configuration is an In-Service procedure. all traffic including sync source must be Active on the main PDH card before starting this procedure.
1.
958
On CT settings window, set the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 cards protection type to No Protection. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
On CT settings window, set the spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card equipment type to Empty.
3.
Disconnect the DS1 or DS3 cables from spare the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card.
4.
Remove the spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card in spare slot 4, 6, or 8.
Note: To complete the downgrade to 1+0 Not Protected configuration, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address affected by this system downgrade, must be changed from ‘multicast’ to ‘unicast’ at the remote NEs.
5.
Reprovision all of the affected TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address from ‘multicast’ to ‘unicast’ at the remote NEs. For more information about how to configure cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To upgrade 1+0 to 1+1 protected radio configuration Caution: This is an In-Service but not a hitless procedure.
Caution: RPS cable is mandatory with MPT-HC-HQAM or MPT-XP-HQAM in 1+1 configuration when channel spacing is higher than 30 MHz and the HQAM radio is not MPT-HC compatible. A warning dialog box appears when this configuration is set up. Note: To achieve expected radio operation the upgrade from 1+0 not protected to 1+1 protected radio configuration must be performed at both ends of the radio hop.
1.
For a MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver radio connected to an EASv2 or P8ETH card, a second EASv2 or P8ETH card must be installed in the adjacent slot if not already equipped. Install the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver in slot 2 of the MPT-HL shelf. For a MPT-HLC/HLS transceiver radio connected to a Core-E card port 5 or MSS-1 shelf port 5, port 6 must be available to the spare transceiver. For MPT-HLC, install the spare transceiver in slot 2 of the MPT-HL/HLC shelf. For a MPT-HLC/HLS transceiver radio connected to a CorEvo card port 7, port 8 must be available to the spare transceiver. For MPT-HLC, install the transceiver in slot 2 of the MPT-HL/HLC shelf. For MPT ODU radio that is equipped with a MPTACC card, the spare radio hop is ed on port 2 of the same MPTACC card or from an MPTACC card installed in adjacent slot to the main MPTACC card, slots 4, 6, or 8. Install the MPTACC as required, as described in the site documentation. For MPT ODU radio connected to an EASv2 optical port equipped in slot 3, 5, or 7, a second EASv2 card must be installed in the adjacent slot 4, 6, or 8 if not already equipped.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
959
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
For MPT ODU radio connected to a Core-E card port 5 or MSS-1 shelf port 5, port 6 must be available to the spare MPT ODU radio. For MPT ODU radio connected to a CorEvo card port 7, port 8 must be available to the spare MPT ODU radio. 2.
Install the appropriate radio/transport card in adjacent slot 4, 6, or 8 that is associated with main radio direction. An Unconfigured Equipment Present condition is raised.
3.
On the CT settings window, enable the card as required. Enable the appropriate radio, MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver that you installed in step 2.
4.
On the CT settings window, configure the radio direction protection type as 1+1 HSB(SD) or 1+1 FD. Local station and remote station observes 2 second sync loss.
5.
Connect the new radio direction cables to the spare radio card that you installed in step 2, as described in the site documentation.
6.
a.
For a radio that is equipped with MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver, install the SFP into the appropriate Core-E/EASv2/P8ETH/MSS-1 SFP port and the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver SFP port. Connect the fiber optic cable between the SFP port and MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver SFP port. Connect the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver power cable, as described in the site documentation.
b.
For a MPT ODU radio that is equipped with a Core-E/EASv2/MPTACC/ MSS-1, connect the radio cables, as described in the site documentation (optical Ethernet and power coaxial cable, electrical Ethernet and power coaxial cable, or electrical Ethernet W/PFoE connectivity).
If radio protection is configured as 1+1 FD, configure the spare radio direction.
Caution: If unexpected radio alarms are present on the radio channel associated with protection upgrade, a system restart is required to clear the alarms.
Caution: Performing a system restart to clear unexpected radio alarms causes disruption to traffic.
Note: To complete the 1+1 radio protection, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address affected by this system upgrade, must be changed from ‘unicast’ to ‘multicast’ at the remote NEs.
7.
Reprovision all of the affected TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address from ‘unicast’ to ‘multicast’ at the remote NEs. For more information about how to configure cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To downgrade 1+1 to 1+0 not protected radio configuration Caution: Downgrading from 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or FD to 1+0 configuration is an Out-Of-Service procedure. All traffic including sync source must be Active on the main channel before starting this procedure.
960
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Caution: Downgrading from 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or FD to 1+0 configuration is an Out-Of-Service procedure. To complete the downgrade procedure, the NE must be power cycled off and back on again. The power cycle takes approximately 15 minutes complete. Note: To achieve expected radio operation the downgrade from 1+1 protected to 1+0 not protected radio configuration must be performed at both ends of the radio hop.
1.
On CT settings window for radio channel, enable the Local Tx Mute for channel #1 and #0.
2.
On CT settings window, set the radio channel protection type to No Protection.
3.
On CT settings window for radio channel, disable the Local Tx Mute for channel #1 only.
4.
Disconnect the channel#0 radio direction cables to the spare radio cards. a.
For a radio that is equipped with a MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver, disconnect the fiber optic cable between the SFP port and MPT-HL transceiver, as described in the site documentation.
b.
For a MPT ODU radio that is equipped with a Core-E/EASv2/MPTACC/ MSS-1, disconnect the radio cables, as described in the site documentation (optical Ethernet and power coaxial cable, electrical Ethernet and power coaxial cable, or electrical Ethernet W/PFoE connectivity).
Note: In the case of 1+1 FD configuration, local AIS will remain active throughout remainder of the procedure.
5.
On CT settings window, set the radio direction equipment type to Empty.
6.
Remove the appropriate radio/transport card as described in the site documentation. a.
For an MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver radio, remove the appropriate Core-E/ EASv2/P8ETH/MSS-1 SFP port as described in the site documentation. Remove the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver SFP. Remove the MPT-HL/ MPT-HLC transceiver in slot 2 of the MPT-HL shelf.
b.
For an MPT ODU radio direction that was ed with a EASv2/MPTACC, remove the EASv2/MPTACC ONLY if described in the site documentation.
7. Caution: Downgrading from 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or FD to 1+0 configuration is an Out-Of-Service procedure. To complete the downgrade procedure the NE must be power cycled off and back on again. The power cycle takes approximately 15 minutes complete.
Power down and then power up the NE. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Alarm Clearing Manual for information about the power cycles of the NE.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
961
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: To complete the downgrade to 1+0 radio configuration, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address affected by this system downgrade, must be changed from ‘multicast’ to ‘unicast’ at the remote NEs.
8.
Reprovision all of the affected TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address from ‘multicast’ to ‘unicast’ at the remote NEs. For more information about how configure cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To upgrade fixed modulation to adaptive modulation configuration Caution: This is an Out-of-Service procedure. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
1.
that the system license key s adaptive modulation. For more information about how to display and update the system license key, see the ister software license.
2.
Open the radio channel view. Take a screen capture to save all radio channel provisioning information.
3.
Which type of radio direction configuration? a.
If 1+0 Not protected, go to step 6.
b.
If 1+1 protected, go to step 4.
4.
Mute the spare radio channel (channel #0).
5.
Set the radio direction Protection Type to No Protection.
6.
Is the ATPC enabled? a.
If yes, go to step 7.
b.
If no, go to step 8.
7.
Disable the ATPC (unchecked) and click on the Apply button.
8.
From the radio direction Mode drop-down menu, choose Adaptive Modulation and click on the Apply button. Note: If the sum of all TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections exceed the ed capacity for the reference channel at 4 QAM, the request to change modulation mode is rejected.
9.
Which type of radio direction configuration? a.
If 1+0 Not protected, go to step 10.
b.
If 1+1 protected, go to step 12.
10.
Set the radio direction Protection Type to 1+1 HSB(SD) or 1+1 FD.
11.
Unmute the spare radio channel (channel #0). Note: To complete the upgrade from fixed modulation to adaptive modulation both ends of the radio hop must be upgraded.
962
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
12.
that the radio direction is alarm free.
13.
that the radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
To downgrade adaptive modulation to fixed modulation configuration Caution: This is an Out-of-Service procedure. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
1.
Open the radio channel view. Take a screen capture to save all radio channel provisioning information.
2.
Which type of radio direction configuration? a.
If 1+0 Not protected, go to step 5.
b.
If 1+1 protected, go to step 3.
3.
Mute the spare radio channel (channel #0).
4.
Set the radio direction Protection Type to No Protection.
5.
From the radio direction Mode drop-down menu, choose Presetting and click on the Apply button.
6.
Which type of radio direction configuration? a.
If 1+0 Not protected, go to step 10.
b.
If 1+1 protected, go to step 12.
7.
Set the radio direction Protection Type to 1+1 HSB(SD) or 1+1 FD.
8.
Unmute the spare radio channel (channel #0).
9.
Provision the ATPC? a.
If yes, go to step 10.
b.
If no, go to step 12.
10.
Enable the ATPC (checked) and click on the Apply button.
11.
Configure the local ATPC Tx range, remote ATPC Rx threshold, and click on the Apply button. Note: To complete the upgrade from adaptive modulation to fixed modulation both ends of the radio hop must be downgraded.
12.
that the radio direction is alarm free.
13.
that they radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
963
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
964
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
74 — Upgrade and downgrade radio profile
74.1 — Purpose These procedures describe how to upgrade and downgrade radio profile on the 9500 MPR system.
74.2 — General The radio profile upgrade and downgrade procedures provide the general steps and sequence required to change protection scheme. The number of possible radio profile scenarios prevents covering all upgrade and downgrade possibilities.
74.3 — Radio profile Radio profile upgrade applies when the new radio profile has a capacity which is larger than the existing profile. In this case all the existing TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH cross-connections are kept and the residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM or TEM2ETH cross-connections are calculated. Radio profile downgrade applies when the new radio profile has a capacity which is smaller than the existing profile. When all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are ed by the new profile, all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are kept and the residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM and TEM2ETH cross-connections will be recomputed. When all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections can not be ed by the new profile, the request to change radio profile are rejected. Some existing TDM2TDM and/or TEM2ETH cross-connections must be deleted to achieve a bandwidth which is ed by the new radio profile.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
965
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual to determine card location and type.
74.4 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To upgrade a radio profile
•
To downgrade a radio profile
To upgrade a radio profile Caution: This is an Out-of-Service procedure. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
1.
that the system license key s the new radio profile. For information about how to display and upgrade the system license key, see ister software license.
2.
From the radio direction Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, select new channel bandwidth.
3.
From the radio direction Modulation drop-down menu, select the new modulation value.
4.
Click on the Apply button.
5.
the Tx power provisioning and adjust, as described in the site documentation. Note: To complete an upgrade of a radio profile, both ends of the radio hop must be upgraded.
6.
that the radio direction is alarm free.
7.
that the radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
To downgrade a radio profile Caution: This is an Out-of-Service procedure. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
966
1.
Open the radio channel view. Take a screen capture to save all radio channel provisioning information.
2.
From the radio direction Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, select the new channel bandwidth.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
3.
From the radio direction Modulation drop-down menu, select the new modulation value.
4.
Click on the Apply button. Note: If the sum of all TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections exceed the ed capacity for the new radio channel, the request to change radio profile will be rejected.
5.
the Tx power provisioning and adjust, as described in the site documentation. Note: To complete downgrade of radio profile both ends of the radio hop must be downgraded.
6.
that the radio direction is alarm free.
7.
that the radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
967
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
968
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
75 — Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port
75.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to upgrade an In-Service MPT-HL radio hop to an MPT-HL configured as an L1 LAG Lowest Index Port. This procedure is not available if a CorEvo card is in use.
75.2 — General This upgrade procedure provides general steps and the sequence required to upgrade an MPT-HL radio port In-Service to an MPT-HL configured as an L1 LAG Lowest Index Port. ed configurations are as follows: •
1+0 to 1+0 L1 LAG Port
•
1+1 HSB to 1+1 HSB L1 LAG Port
•
1+1 FD to 1+1 L1 LAG Ports
Upgrade from an 1+1 FD to 2+0 L1 LAG Ports is not ed. To accomplish this upgrade perform the following steps: •
Down grade the 1+1 FD to 1+0 not protected, see Upgrade and downgrade protection for a detailed procedure.
•
Perform this procedure in its entirety
•
Add the second MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port
The MPT-HL radio ports to be upgraded to L1 LAG ports must reside in P8ETH card Ethernet port 5 or 7 to be a candidate for this upgrade procedure. The L1 LAG Lowest Index Port must be located in P8ETH card Ethernet port 5 or 7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
969
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
During this procedure the following parameters are re-provisioned to the L1 LAG port: •
Cross-Connections
•
VLANs
•
Port Segregation
•
PPP-RF
•
Synchronization
The Max Bandwidth available for a radio port configured as an L1 LAG port member is ninety-five percent of the pre-migration MPT-HL radio port capacity. The reduction in Max Bandwidth must be ed for prior to migration to an L1 LAG port. Failure to for this reduction in Max Bandwidth may result in a loss of all cross-connected traffic after the migration to the L1 LAG port. TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH services ed by the L1 LAG port require a different amount of bandwidth then when ed by an MPT-HL radio port. The required bandwidth for cross-connected services must be recalculated to ensure that the cross-connected services do not exceed the Max Bandwidth of the new L1 LAG port. Failure to confirm that all services are ed by the new L1 LAG port may result in a loss of all cross-connected traffic after the migration to the L1 LAG port. For information regarding bandwidth required based upon type of service, see Table 75.1. To calculate the required bandwidth for cross-connected services, use the following equation: Required Bandwidth = (# DS1 TDM2TDM x 2080) + (# DS1 TDM2ETH x 1882) + (# DS3 TDM2TDM x 60264) + (# DS3 TDM2ETH x 46571) Table 75.1 — MPT-HL L1 LAG bandwidth per service type Type of service
L1 LAG bandwidth used [Kbps]
MPT-HL bandwidth used [Kbps]
DS1 TDM2TDM
2080
1683
DS1 TDM2Eth
1882
1694
DS3 TDM2TDM
60264
48756
DS3 TDM2Eth
46571
45574
Caution: Migration to L1 LAG port impacts TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH traffic on a per flowid basis. Typical impact to traffic is less than 10 seconds for each cross-connection. The time required for the system to migrate the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port is dependent upon radio port provisioning (synchronization, PPP RF, number of; port segregations, VLANs, and cross-connections). Typical migration duration is less than two minutes. Allow up to five minutes for the system to migrate all services from the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port. 970
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
The number of possible radio configurations precludes covering all possible radio configurations. A site survey and site documentation must be provided to ensure that facilities that are not associated with the upgrade MPT-HL radio direction are not impacted by this upgrade procedure. To complete the migration to an L1 LAG port, both ends of the MPT-HL radio direction must be migrated. Before starting this procedure, read and fully understand this procedure and all referenced procedures in their entirety. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for a detailed description of the L1 LAG feature and to determine card location and type.
75.3 — Procedure Danger: Circuit packs can be installed or removed with bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use extreme care when installing or removing circuit packs with power on. Warning: The following Warnings apply: • Circuit packs contain static-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by static discharge. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual for special handling instructions. • When installing a plug-in, ensure its backplane connector is correctly engaged before applying sufficient pressure to bring the plug-in flush with the front . Improper alignment can result in damaged pins on the backplane connector and/or damage to the plug-in connector. • Plug-ins must be withdrawn and inserted using their finger-grip fastener pulls. Never withdraw or insert using attached cables. Pulling on the cables may damage the cable, plug-in connector, and/or plug-in card connector attachment. • Failure to start both screws prior to tightening may cause screws to be cross threaded and possibly resulting in broken retaining screws.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
971
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
Caution: The following Cautions apply: • This is an In-Service procedure. • Upgrading an MPT-HL radio port to a L1 LAG port with cross-connections in excess of the ed Max Bandwidth will result in a loss of services on all cross-connected services associated with the L1 LAG port. • Migration to L1 LAG port impacts TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH traffic on a per flow-id basis. Typical impact to traffic is less than 10 seconds for each cross-connection. Note: To complete the MPT-HL L1 LAG Port, this procedure must be performed on both ends of the radio direction.
1.
that the NE is running R3.4.0 or higher software version.
2.
the MPT-HL radio channel is alarm/condition free and error free on both the near and far ends of the radio hop.
3.
there are no unexpected and unexplained alarm/abnormal conditions declared on the MSS-4/8 shelf ing both the near and far ends of the radio direction.
4.
that ninety-five percent of the MPT-HL radio channel bandwidth is sufficient to the existing cross-connected services when configured in an L1 LAG port.
5.
Perform a database backup. See MIB database management (backup and restore) for a detailed procedure to perform a database backup.
6.
If radio channel is configured in 1+1 HSB/FD configuration, that the radio link is active on the main radio hop on both the near and far ends of the radio link for the following:
7.
972
•
Equipment Protection Switching (EPS)
•
Hot StandBy (HSB)
•
Rx Radio (RPS)
If radio channel is configured in 1+1 HSB/FD configuration, perform Lockout protection switch for the following: •
Equipment Protection Switching (EPS)
•
Hot StandBy (HSB)
•
Rx Radio (RPS)
8.
If MPT-HL radio interface is configured for 1+1 FD, and the desired configuration is 2+0 L1 LAG port, downgrade radio protection to 1+0. See Upgrade and downgrade protection for a detailed procedure.
9.
and save the Current Configuration file. See View NE Inventory data for a detailed procedure to and save the current configuration file.
10.
Create L1 LAG port. See ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
11.
Add MPT-HL radio interface to L1 LAG port. See ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port. When you add the radio port to the L1 LAG port, the following message will display. Figure 75.1 — MPT-HL to L1 LAG information message
12.
Click on the OK button. After you click on the OK button, the following warning message will display. Figure 75.2 — MPT-HL to L1 LAG warning message
13.
Click on the Yes button.
14.
Wait for the system to migrate services to the L1 LAG port. The time required for the system to migrate the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port is dependent upon radio port provisioning (synchronization, PPP RF, number of; port segregations, VLANs, and cross-connections provisioned). Typical migration duration is two minutes or less. Allow up to five minutes for the system to migrate all services from the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port. When the system has completed migrating to the L1 LAG port you will be prompted to close the craft terminal.
15.
Close the craft terminal.
16.
Reopen the craft terminal and to the NE.
17.
that the radio direction is alarm free.
18.
that the radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
19.
and save the Current Configuration file.
20.
Using the Current Configuration files ed in steps 9 and 19, that the following provisioning parameters were re-provisioned correctly: •
Cross-Connections
•
VLANs
•
Port Segregation
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
973
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
21.
974
•
PPP-RF
•
Synchronization
If radio channel is configured in 1+1 HSB/FD configuration, release Lockout protection switch for the following: •
Equipment Protection Switching (EPS)
•
Hot StandBy (HSB)
•
Rx Radio (RPS)
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
76 — Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port
76.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to upgrade an Out-of-Service MPT-HC/MPT-XP/ 9558HC (MPT ODU) radio hop to an MPT ODU configured as the L1 LAG Master Port. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual for information about connecting fiber cable and installing SFPs.
76.2 — General This upgrade procedure provides general steps and the sequence required to upgrade an MPT ODU radio interface ed on an MPTACC card to an MPT ODU radio interface ed on an P8ETH card and configured as the L1 LAG Master Port. The L1 LAG Master Port must be located in P8ETH card Ethernet port 5 or 7. The number of possible radio configurations precludes covering all possible radio configurations. MPT ODU connected to an P8ETH card requires power provided by one of the following methods: •
MPT Power Unit
•
MPT Extended Power Unit (required for MPT-XP)
•
Power Injector Card
•
Power Injector Box
•
Direct connection to office power
•
MPTACC card
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
975
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
A site survey and site documentation must be provided to ensure that facilities that are not associated with the upgrade MPT ODU radio direction are not impacted by this upgrade procedure. Before the L1 LAG port is ready to carry traffic, this procedure must be performed at both ends of the radio hop. Before starting this procedure, read and fully understand this procedure and all referenced procedures in their entirety. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual to determine card location and type.
76.3 — Procedure Danger: Circuit packs can be installed or removed with bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use extreme care when installing or removing circuit packs with power on. Warning: The following warnings apply: • Circuit packs contain static-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by static discharge. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual for special handling instructions. • When installing a plug-in, ensure its backplane connector is correctly engaged before applying sufficient pressure to bring the plug-in flush with the front . Improper alignment can result in damaged pins on the backplane connector and/or damage to the plug-in connector. • Plug-ins must be withdrawn and inserted using their finger-grip fastener pulls. Never withdraw or insert using attached cables. Pulling on the cables may damage the cable, plug-in connector, and/or plug-in card connector attachment. • Failure to start both screws prior to tightening may cause screws to be cross threaded and possibly resulting in broken retaining screws. Caution: This is an Out-of-Service procedure. The radio direction being upgraded must be taken Out-of Service to complete this procedure. All remaining facilities that are not associated with the radio direction scheduled for upgrade, should not be impacted by this upgrade procedure. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
976
1.
that the NE is running R3.4.0 or higher software version.
2.
Install power source as required per site documentation including running any new cabling between the power source and the MPT ODU. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
3.
Install optical Ethernet fiber from MSS-4/8 shelf to MPT ODU as required per site documentation.
4.
that the MPT ODU radio interface is not associated with the following: a.
Cross-Connection
b.
VLAN
c.
Port Segregation
d.
PPP RF enabled
e.
Synchronization reference
f.
SSM
5.
Perform a database backup. See MIB database management (backup and restore) for a detailed procedure to perform a database backup.
6.
If MPT ODU radio interface is configured for 1+1 HSB/FD/SD, downgrade radio protection to 1+0. See Upgrade and downgrade protection for a detailed procedure.
7.
Disable MPT ODU radio port from MPTACC card. See Disable equipment for a detailed procedure.
8.
If MPTACC PFoE is the power source for the MPT ODU, the power source is still configured for PFoE.
9.
If MPTACC card is to be replaced with P8ETH card to L1 LAG port. Perform the following actions:
10.
a.
no radio interfaces are ed on the remaining MPTACC radio interface. If there is a radio interface connected to the remaining MPTACC radio port, STOP this procedure immediately and the next level of !
b.
Disable MPTACC card. See Disable equipment for a detailed procedure.
c.
Remove the MPTACC card from the MSS-4/8 shelf.
d.
Install the P8ETH card into the MSS-4/8 shelf.
/enable P8ETH card to L1 LAG port.
Note: Electrical SFPs are not ed for interconnection between P8ETH SFP port and MPT ODU.
11.
Install SFP into the P8ETH radio port and connect fiber cable to SFP. L1 LAG Master port must reside in P8ETH Ethernet port 5 or 7.
12.
Install SFP into the MPT ODU data port and connect the fiber cable to the SFP per site documentation.
13.
Provision MPT ODU radio interface.
14.
If MPTACC PFoE/SMA connector is the power source for the MPT ODU, the Ethernet/coax cable remains connected and will be used to power the MPT ODU.
15.
If MPTACC PFoE is the power source for the MPT ODU, perform one of the following:
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
977
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
a.
Disable the power source. Then provision the power source for PFoE. See Configure radio parameters for a detailed procedure to provision MPT ODU power scheme.
b.
Unplug and reinsert the PFoE Ethernet cable on the MPTACC card.
16.
Create L1 LAG port. See ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port.
17.
Add MPT ODU radio interface to L1 LAG port. See ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port. Note: To complete the MPT ODU L1 LAG Port, this procedure must be performed on both ends of the radio hop.
978
18.
that the radio direction is alarm free.
19.
that the radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
77 — Perform Tx Diversity Antenna operations
77.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedures to perform transmit antenna diversity operations in Web Server. Transmit Diversity Antenna is only available in the ANSI market, with MPTHLC in 1+1 HSB configuration. The Tx Diversity Antenna (TDA) webpage displays a list of configured 1+1 HSB radio directions with MPT-HLC. Note: All MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB radio directions are displayed on the Tx Diversity Antenna webpage, however, the TDA feature is operational only if the radio is equipped with the dual relay switch assembly and connected to a diversity antenna.
The Tx Diversity Antenna webpage allows you to enable or disable TDA, view TDA status, and perform manual force operations.
77.2 — Procedures This section provides the procedures to perform Tx Diversity Antenna operations. 1.
From the istration menu, select Tx Diversity Antenna. The Tx Diversity Antenna webpage appears; see Figure 77.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
979
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 77.1 — Tx Diversity Antenna webpage
2.
Perform any of the following procedures, as required: •
To enable TDA
•
To disable TDA
•
To view TDA status
•
To force transmission to the main antenna
•
To force transmission to the diversity antenna
•
To clear forced transmission
To enable TDA
980
1.
Select a radio direction in the Available MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB .
2.
Click Enable TDA. A confirmation message is displayed; see Figure 77.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 77.2 — Tx Diversity Antenna enabled
TDA is enabled. To disable TDA 1.
Select a radio direction in the Available MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB .
2.
Click Disable TDA. A confirmation message is displayed; see Figure 77.3. Figure 77.3 — Tx Diversity Antenna disabled
TDA is disabled. To view TDA status 1.
Select a radio direction in the Available MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB .
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
981
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
Click Get TDA Status. Information is displayed, showing whether TDA is enabled, the active antenna and whether the antenna has been forced; see Figure 77.4. Figure 77.4 — Tx Diversity Antenna Status
To force transmission to the main antenna 1.
Select a radio direction in the Available MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB .
2.
Click Force Main. A confirmation message is displayed; see Figure 77.5. Figure 77.5 — Tx Diversity: Force Main
982
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures If TDA is disabled, an error message is displayed: Error: cannot apply command. To force transmission to the diversity antenna 1.
Select a radio direction in the Available MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB .
2.
Click Force Diversity. A confirmation message is displayed; see Figure 77.5. If TDA is disabled, an error message is displayed: Error: cannot apply command. If the antenna RF switch is not detected prior to the command, switching is blocked and the TDA status continues to show the main antenna as active.
To clear forced transmission 1.
Select a radio direction in the Available MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB .
2.
Click Clear Force. A confirmation message is displayed; see Figure 77.6. Figure 77.6 — Tx Diversity: Clear Force
If TDA is disabled, an error message is displayed: Error: cannot apply command.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
983
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
984
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Customer documentation and product Customer documentation http://documentation.alcatel-lucent.com
Technical http://.alcatel-lucent.com
Documentation [email protected]
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
© 2016 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MICROWAVE PACKET RADIO WebEML Manual
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary This document contains proprietary information of Alcatel-Lucent and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements. Copyright 2016 © Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
All specifications, procedures, and information in this document are subject to change and revision at any time without notice. The information contained herein is believed to be accurate as of the date of publication. AlcatelLucent provides no warranty, express or implied, regarding its contents. s are fully responsible for application or use of the documentation. Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Copyright 2016 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved. Disclaimers Alcatel-Lucent products are intended for commercial uses. Without the appropriate network design engineering, they must not be sold, licensed or otherwise distributed for use in any hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life- machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of products could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. The customer hereby agrees that the use, sale, license or other distribution of the products for any such application without the prior written consent of Alcatel-Lucent, shall be at the customer's sole risk. The customer hereby agrees to defend and hold Alcatel-Lucent harmless from any claims for loss, cost, damage, expense or liability that may arise out of or in connection with the use, sale, license or other distribution of the products in such applications. This document may contain information regarding the use and installation of non-Alcatel-Lucent products. Please note that this information is provided as a courtesy to assist you. While Alcatel-Lucent tries to ensure that this information accurately reflects information provided by the supplier, please refer to the materials provided with any non-Alcatel-Lucent product and the supplier for confirmation. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility or liability for incorrect or incomplete information provided about non-Alcatel-Lucent products. However, this does not constitute a representation or warranty. The warranties provided for Alcatel-Lucent products, if any, are set forth in contractual documentation entered into by Alcatel-Lucent and its customers. This document was originally written in English. If there is any conflict or inconsistency between the English version and any other version of a document, the English version shall prevail. THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH D.H.H.S. RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 21 CFR, 1040.10, FOR A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT. DANGER Invisible laser radiation is present when the optic connector is open. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case s will be required to correct the interference at their own expense. Release notes describing revisions to this software may impact operations described in this manual. This transfer of commodities, technology, or software, if from the United States, is an export in accordance with the U.S. Export istration Regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. The export or re-export (further transfer) of such commodities, technology, software or products made from such technology is prohibited without proper authorization(s) from the U.S. Department of Commerce or other appropriate U.S. government agencies.
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Table of Contents Preface ............................................................................................................... 39 9500 MPR documentation ................................................................................................... 39 Related documentation ................................................................................................. 41 Naming conventions in the documentation .......................................................................... 43 Audience ...................................................................................................................... 43 Information symbols ......................................................................................................... 43 information ......................................................................................................... 44 Technical ........................................................................................................ 44 Documentation ............................................................................................... 44
1 — Safety awareness.............................................................................................. 45 1.1 — Safety EMC-EMF-ESD norms and equipment labeling ........................................................... 45 1.2 — Safety rules............................................................................................................ 45 1.2.1 — General rules ................................................................................................... 45 1.2.1.1 — Observe safety rules..................................................................................... 45 1.3 — Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command................................................................ 46 1.3.1 — Dangerous electrical voltages ................................................................................ 47 1.3.1.1 — Labeling: ................................................................................................. 47 1.3.1.2 — Safety instructions: ..................................................................................... 48 1.3.2 — Risks of explosions ............................................................................................. 48 1.3.2.1 — Labeling: ................................................................................................. 48 1.3.2.2 — Safety instructions: ..................................................................................... 48 1.3.3 — Moving mechanical parts ...................................................................................... 49 1.3.3.1 — Labeling: ................................................................................................. 49 1.3.3.2 — Safety instructions: ..................................................................................... 49 1.3.4 — Equipment connection to earth.............................................................................. 49 1.3.4.1 — Labeling: ................................................................................................. 49 1.3.4.2 — Safety instructions: ..................................................................................... 50 1.3.5 — Heat-radiating mechanical parts ............................................................................ 50 1.3.5.1 — Labeling: ................................................................................................. 50 1.3.5.2 — Safety instructions: ..................................................................................... 50 1.3.6 — Microwave radiations (EMF norms) .......................................................................... 51 1.3.6.1 — Safety instructions: ..................................................................................... 51 1.4 — Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms) ..................................................................... 52 1.4.1 — Cables: .......................................................................................................... 53 1.5 — Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges ........................................................ 54 1.6 — Cautions to avoid equipment damage ............................................................................. 54 1.6.1 — Electrostatic-sensitivity ....................................................................................... 54 1.6.1.1 — Handling cards............................................................................................ 55 1.6.2 — Screw fixing ..................................................................................................... 56 1.6.2.1 — MSS-ODU cable disconnection / connection ......................................................... 56 1.7 — Fan, equipment rack, and equipment cabinet precautions.................................................... 56 1.8 — Electrical precautions................................................................................................ 57 1.9 — Harmful optical signals .............................................................................................. 58 1.9.1 — Laser precautions .............................................................................................. 58
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
5
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
High-level procedures .................................................................................. 61 2 — High-level procedure for E1/DS1 provisioning .......................................................... 63 2.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 63 2.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 63
3 — High-level procedure for E1/DS1 deprovisioning ....................................................... 65 3.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 65 3.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 65
4 — High-level procedure for DS3 provisioning .............................................................. 67 4.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 67 4.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 67
5 — High-level procedure for DS3 deprovisioning ........................................................... 69 5.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 69 5.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 69
6 — High-level procedure for Ethernet provisioning ........................................................ 71 6.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 71 6.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 71
7 — High-level procedure for Ethernet deprovisioning ..................................................... 75 7.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 75 7.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 75
8 — High-level procedure for Ethernet LAG provisioning .................................................. 77 8.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 77 8.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 77
9 — High-level procedure for SDH provisioning .............................................................. 79 9.1 — Purpose................................................................................................................. 79 9.2 — Procedure.............................................................................................................. 79
10 — High-level procedure for STM-1/OC-3 deprovisioning................................................ 81 10.1 — Purpose ............................................................................................................... 81 10.2 — Procedure ............................................................................................................ 81
11 — High-level procedure for Ethernet Ring Protection management ................................. 83 11.1 — Purpose ............................................................................................................... 83 11.2 — Procedure ............................................................................................................ 83
12 — High-level procedure for using Web Server ............................................................ 85 12.1 — Purpose ............................................................................................................... 85 12.2 — Procedure ............................................................................................................ 85
6
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
System istration.................................................................................. 87 13 — to and out of system................................................................................ 89 13.1 — 13.2 — 13.3 — 13.4 —
Purpose ............................................................................................................... 89 Prerequisite .......................................................................................................... 89 Overview ............................................................................................................. 89 Procedures ........................................................................................................... 91
14 — ister community string ........................................................................... 103 14.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................103 14.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................103 14.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................104
15 — ister external alarm points on an Auxiliary card............................................ 107 15.1 — 15.2 — 15.3 — 15.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................107 Prerequisites ........................................................................................................107 General ..............................................................................................................107 Procedures ..........................................................................................................108
16 — ister external alarm points on an MSS-1 or Enhanced Fan card ......................... 113 16.1 — 16.2 — 16.3 — 16.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................113 Prerequisites ........................................................................................................113 Overview ............................................................................................................113 Procedure ...........................................................................................................114
17 — ister In-Band TMN VLAN port.................................................................... 117 17.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................117 17.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................117 17.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................120
18 — ister network configuration ..................................................................... 125 18.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................125 18.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................125 18.2.1 — OSPF area .....................................................................................................126 18.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................128
19 — ister QoS configuration........................................................................... 139 19.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................139 19.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................139 19.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................140
20 — ister software license............................................................................. 151 20.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................151 20.2 — General ..............................................................................................................151 20.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................152
21 — ister system date and time ...................................................................... 155 21.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................155
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
7
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
21.2 — General ..............................................................................................................155 21.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................156
22 — ister system settings .............................................................................. 161 22.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................161 22.2 — General ..............................................................................................................161 22.2.1 — Tributary Port Configuration (ETSI market only) .......................................................161 22.2.2 — DH server ........................................................................................161 22.2.3 — Ethernet LOS criteria........................................................................................162 22.2.4 — Static LAG criteria ...........................................................................................162 22.2.5 — System priority parameter .................................................................................162 22.2.6 — AIS insertion for LOF detection on DS1 (ANSI market only) ...........................................163 22.2.7 — Event and alarm log .........................................................................................163 22.2.8 — NE MAC Address/Bridge Address...........................................................................164 22.2.9 — SNMP Mode....................................................................................................164 22.2.10 — Latitude and Longitude....................................................................................165 22.3 — Procedures .........................................................................................................165
23 — ister VLAN configuration ......................................................................... 171 23.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................171 23.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................171 23.2.1 — 802.1D (MAC address bridge) ..............................................................................171 23.2.2 — 802.1Q (virtual bridge) .....................................................................................172 23.2.3 — 802.1ad (Provider Bridge) ..................................................................................172 23.2.3.1 — Ethernet frames processing..........................................................................173 23.2.3.2 — Cross-connected flows processing ..................................................................173 23.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................174
24 — Local access control management ..................................................................... 183 24.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................183 24.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................183 24.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................183
25 — MIB database management (backup and restore) ................................................... 185 25.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................185 25.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................185 25.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................186
26 — Use the Ethernet Features Shell ....................................................................... 193 26.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................193 26.2 — Introduction.........................................................................................................193 26.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................193
27 — Perform a software reset ................................................................................ 195 27.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................195 27.2 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................195
8
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
28 — Configure EFM OAM ....................................................................................... 197 28.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................197 28.2 — Overview ............................................................................................................197 28.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................197
istration ....................................................................................199 29 — ister NE list ......................................................................................... 201 29.1 — 29.2 — 29.3 — 29.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................201 Prerequisite .........................................................................................................201 General ..............................................................................................................201 Procedures ..........................................................................................................201
30 — ister profiles ................................................................................. 211 30.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................211 30.2 — General ..............................................................................................................211 30.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................213
31 — Change .......................................................................................... 223 31.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................223 31.2 — General ..............................................................................................................223 31.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................224
System information ....................................................................................225 32 — View alarms................................................................................................. 227 32.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................227 32.2 — General ..............................................................................................................227 32.2.1 — Alarm manager ...............................................................................................227 32.2.2 — Web Server ...................................................................................................229 32.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................229
33 — View abnormal condition list............................................................................ 239 33.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................239 33.2 — General ..............................................................................................................239 33.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................239
34 — View NE Inventory data .................................................................................. 241 34.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................241 34.2 — General ..............................................................................................................241 34.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................242
35 — I&C parameter data .......................................................................... 255 35.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................255 35.2 — General ..............................................................................................................255 35.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................255
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
9
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
36 — View Remote Inventory .................................................................................. 257 36.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................257 36.2 — General ..............................................................................................................257 36.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................257
37 — View Event Log............................................................................................. 259 37.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................259 37.2 — General ..............................................................................................................259 37.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................259
38 — Perform debug functions using the Web Server..................................................... 263 38.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................263 38.2 — General ..............................................................................................................263 38.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................265
39 — Retrieve RSL information using the Web Server .................................................... 267 39.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................267 39.2 — General ..............................................................................................................267 39.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................267
Equipment provisioning and deprovisioning ......................................................269 40 — ister Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) .......................................................... 271 40.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................271 40.2 — General ..............................................................................................................271 40.2.1 — Modify ERP provisioning.....................................................................................271 40.2.2 — Delete ring topology.........................................................................................273 40.2.3 — Delete ERP Instance .........................................................................................273 40.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................273
41 — ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports ................................................ 281 41.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................281 41.2 — General ..............................................................................................................281 41.2.1 — Provider bridge parameters ................................................................................281 41.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................283
42 — ister synchronization ............................................................................. 305 42.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................305 42.2 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................305
43 — Provision cross connections ............................................................................. 317 43.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................317 43.2 — General ..............................................................................................................317 43.3 — PDH to radio: .......................................................................................................319 43.3.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................319 43.4 — SDH to radio:........................................................................................................320 43.4.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................320 43.5 — SDH to Ring: ........................................................................................................321
10
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
43.5.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................321 43.6 — SDH to LAG: ........................................................................................................321 43.6.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................322 43.7 — PDH to Ethernet: ...................................................................................................322 43.7.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................322 43.8 — Ethernet to radio:..................................................................................................323 43.8.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................323 43.9 — Radio to radio:......................................................................................................323 43.9.1 — Prerequisites .................................................................................................323 43.10 — PDH to Ring: .......................................................................................................324 43.10.1 — Prerequisites ................................................................................................324 43.11 — Radio to Ring: .....................................................................................................325 43.11.1 — Prerequisites ................................................................................................325 43.12 — Ethernet to Ring: .................................................................................................326 43.12.1 — Prerequisites ................................................................................................326 43.13 — Ring to Ring:.......................................................................................................326 43.13.1 — Prerequisites ................................................................................................326 43.13.1.1 — Icon shapes............................................................................................327 43.13.2 — Icon colors ...................................................................................................327 43.13.3 — Line colors...................................................................................................328 43.14 — Mouse operation .................................................................................................329 43.14.1 — Single right-click icon......................................................................................329 43.14.2 — Double-click on the line ...................................................................................329 43.14.3 — Double right-click on the line ............................................................................330 43.15 — Procedures .........................................................................................................331
44 — Deprovision cross connections.......................................................................... 349 44.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................349 44.2 — General ..............................................................................................................349 44.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................349
45 — Provision port segregation/connectivity .............................................................. 359 45.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................359 45.2 — General ..............................................................................................................359 45.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................363
46 — Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only) .............................................. 369 46.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................369 46.2 — General ..............................................................................................................369 46.2.1 — Service Channels Cross-connection in -through ...................................................369 46.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................370
47 — Provision Ethernet ports ................................................................................. 373 47.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................373 47.2 — General ..............................................................................................................373 47.2.1 — electrical Ethernet ports .............................................................................373 47.2.2 — optical Ethernet ports ................................................................................374 47.2.3 — Provider bridge parameters ................................................................................374 47.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................375
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
11
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
48 — Provision Ethernet Features ............................................................................ 391 48.1 — Overview ............................................................................................................391 48.1.1 — Access Control List ..........................................................................................391 48.1.2 — Out of Range VLAN swap ...................................................................................391 48.1.3 — VLAN remarking ..............................................................................................392 48.1.4 — VLAN swap ....................................................................................................392
49 — Provision equipment port................................................................................ 393 49.1 — 49.2 — 49.3 — 49.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................393 General ..............................................................................................................393 Prerequisites ........................................................................................................394 Procedures ..........................................................................................................394
50 — Deprovision equipment ports ........................................................................... 421 50.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................421 50.2 — Prerequisites ........................................................................................................421 50.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................421
51 — Enable equipment ......................................................................................... 439 51.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................439 51.2 — Prerequisites ........................................................................................................439 51.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................439
52 — Disable equipment ........................................................................................ 479 52.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................479 52.2 — Prerequisite .........................................................................................................479 52.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................479
53 — Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ............................................................ 515 53.1 — 53.2 — 53.3 — 53.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................515 Prerequisites ........................................................................................................515 General ..............................................................................................................516 Procedures ..........................................................................................................516
54 — Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software .................................................................... 527 54.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................527 54.2 — General ..............................................................................................................527 54.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................528
55 — Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring................................... 537 55.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................537 55.2 — General ..............................................................................................................537 55.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................538
56 — Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool ...................... 683 56.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................683 56.2 — General ..............................................................................................................683 56.2.1 — Ring’s Fiber Chain Description.............................................................................683
12
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
56.2.2 — Aided Cross-connection in Cross-connections ....................................................685 56.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................685
57 — Provision protection scheme parameters ............................................................ 691 57.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................691 57.2 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................691
58 — Provision Protection Type ............................................................................... 699 58.1 — 58.2 — 58.3 — 58.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................699 Prerequisites ........................................................................................................699 General ..............................................................................................................699 Procedure ...........................................................................................................700
59 — Configure radio parameters ............................................................................. 711 59.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................711 59.2 — General ..............................................................................................................711 59.2.1 — Monodirectional links .......................................................................................712 59.3 — Prerequisites ........................................................................................................713 59.4 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................713
60 — Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning .......................................................................... 801 60.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................801 60.2 — General ..............................................................................................................801 60.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................802
61 — Use the Provisioning Tool................................................................................ 807 61.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................807 61.2 — General ..............................................................................................................807 61.2.1 — Provisioning tool screens ...................................................................................807 61.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................808
62 — Apply a configuration using the Web Server ......................................................... 859 62.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................859 62.2 — General ..............................................................................................................859 62.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................859
Equipment functions...................................................................................863 63 — Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback ........................................................... 865 63.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................865 63.2 — General ..............................................................................................................865 63.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................866
64 — Digital Core Facing Loopback ........................................................................... 875 64.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................875 64.2 — General ..............................................................................................................875 64.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................876
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
13
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
65 — Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback............................................................ 879 65.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................879 65.2 — General ..............................................................................................................879 65.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................880
66 — OAM Remote Loopback ................................................................................... 889 66.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................889 66.2 — General ..............................................................................................................889 66.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................889
67 — Open and run performance monitoring ............................................................... 893 67.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................893 67.2 — General ..............................................................................................................893 67.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................894
68 — Perform protection switching........................................................................... 911 68.1 — 68.2 — 68.3 — 68.4 — 68.5 — 68.6 — 68.7 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................911 Equipment Protection Switching.................................................................................911 Rx Radio Protection Switching ...................................................................................912 Hot StandBy protection switching ...............................................................................913 Protection switching schemes per configurations.............................................................913 Protection switching commands .................................................................................914 Procedures ..........................................................................................................915
69 — Perform radio power measurements .................................................................. 935 69.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................935 69.2 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................935
70 — Radio Facing Circuit Loopback.......................................................................... 939 70.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................939 70.1.1 — General ........................................................................................................939 70.2 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................940
71 — RF Core Facing Loopback ................................................................................ 943 71.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................943 71.2 — General ..............................................................................................................943 71.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................945
72 — ister SDH LAG ...................................................................................... 953 72.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................953 72.2 — General ..............................................................................................................953 72.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................954
73 — Upgrade and downgrade protection ................................................................... 955 73.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................955 73.2 — General ..............................................................................................................955 73.2.1 — PDH protection ...............................................................................................955 73.2.2 — Radio protection .............................................................................................955
14
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
73.2.3 — Modulation scheme ..........................................................................................956 73.3 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................957
74 — Upgrade and downgrade radio profile................................................................. 965 74.1 — 74.2 — 74.3 — 74.4 —
Purpose ..............................................................................................................965 General ..............................................................................................................965 Radio profile ........................................................................................................965 Procedures ..........................................................................................................966
75 — Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port ............................................................. 969 75.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................969 75.2 — General ..............................................................................................................969 75.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................971
76 — Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port ......................................................... 975 76.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................975 76.2 — General ..............................................................................................................975 76.3 — Procedure ...........................................................................................................976
77 — Perform Tx Diversity Antenna operations ............................................................ 979 77.1 — Purpose ..............................................................................................................979 77.2 — Procedures ..........................................................................................................979
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
15
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
16
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
List of Tables Preface ............................................................................................................... 39 Table 1 — 9500 MPR documentation ..................................................................................... 39 Table 2 — 9500 MPR related documentation............................................................................ 41 Table 3 — Naming conventions ........................................................................................... 43
30 — ister profiles ................................................................................. 211 Table 30.1 — Default profiles ............................................................................212
38 — Perform debug functions using the Web Server..................................................... 263 Table 38.1 — Association of the GExx in the command output and the NE port .................................264
59 — Configure radio parameters ............................................................................. 711 Table 59.1 — Configurations in monodirectional links ...............................................................712
68 — Perform protection switching........................................................................... 911 Table 68.1 — Command priority list .....................................................................................914
75 — Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port ............................................................. 969 Table 75.1 — MPT-HL L1 LAG bandwidth per service type ...........................................................970
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
17
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
18
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
List of Figures 1 — Safety awareness.............................................................................................. 45 Figure 1.1 — Dangerous voltage ........................................................................................... 47 Figure 1.2 — Ground protection warning ................................................................................. 47 Figure 1.3 — Risk of explosion ............................................................................................. 48 Figure 1.4 — Openings must be covered.................................................................................. 49 Figure 1.5 — Moving mechanical parts.................................................................................... 49 Figure 1.6 — Equipment connection to earth............................................................................ 50 Figure 1.7 — Heat-radiating mechanical parts .......................................................................... 50 Figure 1.8 — EMF emission warning ....................................................................................... 51 Figure 1.9 — Compliance boundaries for 9500 MPR-A transceivers with 1ft (30 cm) antenna ................... 52 Figure 1.10 — EMC norms ................................................................................................... 52 Figure 1.11 — Electrostatic sensitive ..................................................................................... 54 Figure 1.12 — Electrostatic-sensitive sign................................................................................ 55 Figure 1.13 — Electrostatic protection kit ............................................................................... 56 Figure 1.14 — Class 1 laser ................................................................................................. 58
13 — to and out of system................................................................................ 89 Figure 13.1 — WebEML icon ................................................................................................ 92 Figure 13.2 — NEtO Servers Manager window ........................................................................... 92 Figure 13.3 — NEtO overview window .................................................................................... 93 Figure 13.4 — NEtO window ......................................................................................... 94 Figure 13.5 — Acknowledgment of authorization ....................................................................... 94 Figure 13.6 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen MSS-8 shelf ........................................................... 95 Figure 13.7 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen MSS-4 shelf ........................................................... 96 Figure 13.8 — JUSM 9500 MPR main screen MSS-1 shelf................................................................ 97 Figure 13.9 — JUSM 9500 MPR main screen MSS-O shelf ............................................................... 98 Figure 13.10 — Close JUSM 9500 MPR main screen ..................................................................... 98 Figure 13.11 — Close NEtO Servers Manager window................................................................... 99 Figure 13.12 — 9500 MPR web interface webpage .............................................................100 Figure 13.13 — Web server main menu ..................................................................................101
14 — ister community string ........................................................................... 103 Figure 14.1 — Web Server Community Strings setting view ..........................................................104 Figure 14.2 — NEtO Community Strings Request icon .................................................................105 Figure 14.3 — NEtO Community Strings Request window .............................................................105
15 — ister external alarm points on an Auxiliary card............................................ 107 Figure 15.1 Figure 15.2 Figure 15.3 Figure 15.4 Figure 15.5
— — — — —
External Alarm Input Setting tab........................................................................108 External alarm inputs provisioned ......................................................................109 External Alarm Output setting tab ......................................................................110 External Alarm Outputs provisioned ....................................................................111 External Alarm Output Provisioned ON.................................................................112
16 — ister external alarm points on an MSS-1 or Enhanced Fan card ......................... 113 Figure 16.1 — External Alarm Input Setting tab........................................................................114
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
19
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 16.2 — External alarm inputs provisioned ......................................................................115
17 — ister In-Band TMN VLAN port.................................................................... 117 Figure 17.1 Figure 17.2 Figure 17.3 Figure 17.4
— — — —
9500 MPR Equipment tab: Core-E Card selected .....................................................120 TMN In-band Settings tab.................................................................................121 TMN In-band Port Enabled ...............................................................................122 TMN In-band Port Disabled ...............................................................................123
18 — ister network configuration ..................................................................... 125 Figure 18.1 — Local Configuration main menu bar path ..............................................................128 Figure 18.2 — Local Configuration (IP Address) window ..............................................................128 Figure 18.3 — 9500 MPR Equipment tab: Core-E card selected ......................................................129 Figure 18.4 — TMN Ethernet interface: Settings tab ..................................................................130 Figure 18.5 — Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface: Settings tab .........................................................131 Figure 18.6 — IP Static Routing Configuration main menu bar path ................................................132 Figure 18.7 — IP Static Routing Configuration window (IPv4) ........................................................133 Figure 18.8 — IP Static Routing Configuration window (IPv6) ........................................................134 Figure 18.9 — OSPF Area Configuration main menu bar path ........................................................135 Figure 18.10 — OSPF Area Configuration window (IPv4) ..............................................................135 Figure 18.11 — OSPFv3 Area Configuration window (IPv6) ...........................................................136 Figure 18.12 — Activate IPv6 stack main menu bar path .............................................................137 Figure 18.13 — Activate IPv6 stack warning ............................................................................137 Figure 18.14 — Routing Information main menu bar path ............................................................137 Figure 18.15 — IP Routing Information window ........................................................................138
19 — ister QoS configuration........................................................................... 139 Figure 19.1 — QoS Configuration icon ...................................................................................140 Figure 19.2 — QoS Configuration tool....................................................................................141 Figure 19.3 — Provision Queue Scheduler algorithm ..................................................................141 Figure 19.4 — Provisioned Queue Scheduler algorithm ...............................................................142 Figure 19.5 — Restore Queue Scheduler algorithm default values ..................................................142 Figure 19.6 — Provisioned Queue Scheduler algorithm ...............................................................143 Figure 19.7 — Queue Size Configuration Tab ...........................................................................143 Figure 19.8 — Provision Queue Size ......................................................................................144 Figure 19.9 — Provisioned Queue Size ...................................................................................144 Figure 19.10 — Copied Radio Direction queue sizes ...................................................................145 Figure 19.11 — Restore Queue Size default values ....................................................................146 Figure 19.12 — QoS Classification Tab ...................................................................................146 Figure 19.13 — Select QoS Classification Criterion ....................................................................147 Figure 19.14 — Provisioned QoS Classification Criterion ..............................................................147 Figure 19.15 — Provision 802.1p P to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping ......................................148 Figure 19.16 — Provisioned 802.1p P to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping ...................................148 Figure 19.17 — Provision DiffServ DS to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping....................................149 Figure 19.18 — Provisioned DiffServ DS to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping.................................149
20 — ister software license............................................................................. 151 Figure 20.1 — SW License main menu bar path ........................................................................152 Figure 20.2 — SW License window........................................................................................152 Figure 20.3 — 9500 MPR Web Server - License Info ....................................................................153
20
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
21 — ister system date and time ...................................................................... 155 Figure 21.1 Figure 21.2 Figure 21.3 Figure 21.4 Figure 21.5 Figure 21.6
— NE Time main menu bar path............................................................................156 — NE Time Configuration window..........................................................................157 — 9500 MPR Web Server date & time setting window ..................................................158 — NE Time Configuration window..........................................................................158 — NTP Configuration drop-down menu....................................................................159 — NTP Configuration window ...............................................................................160
22 — ister system settings .............................................................................. 161 Figure 22.1 Figure 22.2 Figure 22.3 Figure 22.4
— — — —
System Settings tab (ANSI market)......................................................................166 System Settings menu (ETSI market) ...................................................................167 9500 MPR Web Server - DH Setting ..................................................................168 9500 MPR Web Server - Snmp Version ..................................................................170
23 — ister VLAN configuration ......................................................................... 171 Figure 23.1 — VLAN Configuration icon..................................................................................174 Figure 23.2 — VLAN Configuration window with Core-E card in use ................................................175 Figure 23.3 — VLAN Configuration window with CorEvo card in use ................................................175 Figure 23.4 — VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1D ...............................................................176 Figure 23.5 — VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1Q ...............................................................177 Figure 23.6 — VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1ad ..............................................................177 Figure 23.7 — Create VLAN window ......................................................................................178 Figure 23.8 — New VLAN created.........................................................................................179 Figure 23.9 — Edit VLAN window .........................................................................................179 Figure 23.10 — Filter VLAN configuration table ........................................................................180 Figure 23.11 — VLAN Configuration table filtered .....................................................................181
24 — Local access control management ..................................................................... 183 Figure 24.1 Figure 24.2 Figure 24.3 Figure 24.4
— — — —
Local Access Control - main menu bar path ...........................................................184 Lock (Local Access) Status Denied icon ................................................................184 Local Access Control - main menu bar path ...........................................................184 Lock (Local Access) Status Granted icon...............................................................184
25 — MIB database management (backup and restore) ................................................... 185 Figure 25.1 Figure 25.2 Figure 25.3 Figure 25.4 Figure 25.5
— Backup MIB Management database main menu bar path ............................................187 — Protocol Selection window ...............................................................................187 — Backup MIB Management database dialog box ........................................................187 — Restore / Activate MIB Management Database main menu bar path ..............................189 — Restore MIB Management Database window...........................................................189
27 — Perform a software reset ................................................................................ 195 Figure 27.1 — Restart MPT.................................................................................................196
28 — Configure EFM OAM ....................................................................................... 197 Figure 28.1 — ETH OAM window ..........................................................................................198
29 — ister NE list ......................................................................................... 201 Figure 29.1 — New icon ....................................................................................................202
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
21
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 29.2 — Network Elements List window ..........................................................................202 Figure 29.3 — NE List Save window ......................................................................................203 Figure 29.4 — Network Elements List window ..........................................................................203 Figure 29.5 — Network Elements List window: Current NE added ..................................................204 Figure 29.6 — Network Elements List window ..........................................................................205 Figure 29.7 — Open icon ...................................................................................................206 Figure 29.8 — Open window ...............................................................................................206 Figure 29.9 — Network ElemenT List window ..........................................................................207 Figure 29.10 — NEtO Overview window .................................................................................207 Figure 29.11 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen .......................................................................208 Figure 29.12 — Favorite icon ..............................................................................................208 Figure 29.13 — Network ElemenT List window .........................................................................209 Figure 29.14 — NEtO Overview window .................................................................................209 Figure 29.15 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen .......................................................................210
30 — ister profiles ................................................................................. 211 Figure 30.1 — management main menu bar path ................................................................213 Figure 30.2 — Profile management window ............................................................................213 Figure 30.3 — Create window .......................................................................................214 Figure 30.4 — Profile management window - with added ......................................................215 Figure 30.5 — USM management main menu bar path ..........................................................215 Figure 30.6 — USM s Management window.........................................................................216 Figure 30.7 — USM cloning ...................................................................................217 Figure 30.8 — USM s Management window - with added ..................................................218 Figure 30.9 — Profile management window ............................................................................218 Figure 30.10 — Delete window ......................................................................................219 Figure 30.11 — Profile management window - with deleted ...................................................219 Figure 30.12 — Profile management window ...........................................................................220 Figure 30.13 — Change window .........................................................................221 Figure 30.14 — USM Change .....................................................................222
31 — Change .......................................................................................... 223 Figure 31.1 — Change main menu bar path .................................................................224 Figure 31.2 — Changing window ..............................................................................224
32 — View alarms................................................................................................. 227 Figure 32.1 Figure 32.2 Figure 32.3 Figure 32.4 Figure 32.5 Figure 32.6 Figure 32.7 Figure 32.8
— — — — — — — —
NE Alarms Main Menu Bar path ..........................................................................230 Alarm Monitor window ....................................................................................231 Alarm Manager: Current Alarms major tab ............................................................232 Alarm Manager New Filter window .....................................................................232 Alarm Manager Delete Filters window..................................................................234 Alarm Manager Save Filters As window.................................................................235 Alarm Manager Load Filters From window .............................................................236 Web Server Active Alarms webpage ....................................................................237
33 — View abnormal condition list............................................................................ 239 Figure 33.1 — Abnormal Condition List main menu bar path.........................................................240 Figure 33.2 — Abnormal Condition List window ........................................................................240
22
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
34 — View NE Inventory data .................................................................................. 241 Figure 34.1 Figure 34.2 Figure 34.3 Figure 34.4
— — — —
NE Inventory main menu bar path ......................................................................242 Diagnosis / NE Inventory window .......................................................................243 Web Server main webpage ...............................................................................244 NE Inventory File window....................................................................244
35 — I&C parameter data .......................................................................... 255 Figure 35.1 — I&C Parameters main menu bar path ...................................................................255
36 — View Remote Inventory .................................................................................. 257 Figure 36.1 — Remote Inventory main menu bar path ................................................................258 Figure 36.2 — Remote Inventory View window .........................................................................258
37 — View Event Log............................................................................................. 259 Figure 37.1 — Event Log Main Menu Bar Path...........................................................................260 Figure 37.2 — Event Log Browser Window ..............................................................................260
38 — Perform debug functions using the Web Server..................................................... 263 Figure 38.1 — Debug info ..................................................................................................265
40 — ister Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) .......................................................... 271 Figure 40.1 Figure 40.2 Figure 40.3 Figure 40.4 Figure 40.5 Figure 40.6
— — — — — —
Ethernet Ring Configuration View icon.................................................................274 Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration View .........................................................274 Modify ERP Instance with ERP Instance enabled......................................................275 Modify ERP Instance with ERP Instance disabled .....................................................276 Add VLAN IDs to ERP Instance ...........................................................................278 Delete VLAN IDs from ERP Instance .....................................................................279
41 — ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports ................................................ 281 Figure 41.1 — LAG Configuration icon ...................................................................................283 Figure 41.2 — LAG Configuration tool....................................................................................284 Figure 41.3 — LAG Creation window .....................................................................................288 Figure 41.4 — L2 Ethernet LAG created .................................................................................289 Figure 41.5 — Add radio ports to L1 radio LAG .........................................................................290 Figure 41.6 — Add radio ports to L2 radio LAG .........................................................................291 Figure 41.7 — Add Ethernet ports to Ethernet LAG....................................................................292 Figure 41.8 — Remove L1 radio ports from LAG port..................................................................293 Figure 41.9 — Remove L2 radio ports from LAG port..................................................................294 Figure 41.10 — Remove Ethernet ports from LAG port................................................................295 Figure 41.11 — Enable/disable LAG port ...............................................................................296 Figure 41.12 — Provider bridge tab ......................................................................................297 Figure 41.13 — ister Ethernet LAG VLAN configuration .......................................................298 Figure 41.14 — Enable PPP RF on L1/L2 radio LAG configuration ...................................................300 Figure 41.15 — Provision hashing level for L2 Ethernet/radio LAG port............................................301 Figure 41.16 — L1 radio LAG configuration .............................................................................302
42 — ister synchronization ............................................................................. 305 Figure 42.1 — Synchronization settings tab with Core-E (1588TC license present)...............................306
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
23
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 42.2 — Synchronization settings tab with CorEvo (1588TC license and Sync In/Out SFP not present) ..................................................................................................306 Figure 42.3 — Synchronization Protection tab..........................................................................307 Figure 42.4 — 1588 tab.....................................................................................................308 Figure 42.5 — Sync Ports with Sync-In/Out SFP ........................................................................310 Figure 42.6 — Synchronization - Master / Revertive...................................................................311 Figure 42.7 — Synchronization - Slave / Revertive ....................................................................313 Figure 42.8 — SSM Summary table........................................................................................314 Figure 42.9 — MPT-HL Radio Channel Additional Settings tab .......................................................315
43 — Provision cross connections ............................................................................. 317 Figure 43.1 — MSS-4/8 Cross-Connections screen......................................................................318 Figure 43.2 — MSS-1 Cross-Connections screen.........................................................................319 Figure 43.3 — Cross-Connection port icons .............................................................................327 Figure 43.4 — Cross Connection: Line Color detail ....................................................................328 Figure 43.5 — Cross Connection: single right-click icon detail.......................................................329 Figure 43.6 — Cross Connection: double left-click line detail .......................................................330 Figure 43.7 — Cross Connection: Double right-click line detail......................................................330 Figure 43.8 — Configuration Cross Connection window ...............................................................332 Figure 43.9 — PDH-RADIO Cross Connection ............................................................................333 Figure 43.10 — PDH to Ethernet Cross Connection ....................................................................334 Figure 43.11 — SDH-RADIO Cross Connection ...........................................................................335 Figure 43.12 — SDH-RING Cross Connection ............................................................................336 Figure 43.13 — SDH to LAG configuration dialog .......................................................................337 Figure 43.14 — Completed SDH to LAG cross-connection.............................................................338 Figure 43.15 — Ethernet to Radio Cross Connection...................................................................339 Figure 43.16 — Radio (P8ETH) to Radio (P8ETH) Cross Connection .................................................340 Figure 43.17 — Radio (P8ETH) to Radio (MPTACC) Cross Connection ...............................................341 Figure 43.18 — PDH to RING Cross Connection .........................................................................342 Figure 43.19 — Radio to Ring Cross Connection ........................................................................343 Figure 43.20 — Ethernet to Ring Cross Connection ....................................................................345 Figure 43.21 — Ring to Ring Cross Connection..........................................................................346
44 — Deprovision cross connections.......................................................................... 349 Figure 44.1 — Cross Connection window ................................................................................350 Figure 44.2 — PDH-RADIO cross connection.............................................................................351 Figure 44.3 — PDH to Ethernet cross connection ......................................................................352 Figure 44.4 — STM-1(OC-3)-RADIO cross connection...................................................................353 Figure 44.5 — Ethernet to Radio cross connection.....................................................................354 Figure 44.6 — Radio to Radio cross connection ........................................................................354 Figure 44.7 — PDH to RING cross connection ...........................................................................355 Figure 44.8 — Radio to Ring cross connection ..........................................................................356 Figure 44.9 — Ethernet to Ring cross connection ......................................................................357 Figure 44.10 — Ring to Ring cross connection ..........................................................................358
45 — Provision port segregation/connectivity .............................................................. 359 Figure 45.1 — Port Segregation dialog box, P8ETH port 3.5 .........................................................361 Figure 45.2 — Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel P8ETH MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio ports .................362 Figure 45.3 — Port Segregation dialog box, Core-E port 1.5 .........................................................362
24
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 45.4 — Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel Core-E MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio ports .................363 Figure 45.5 — Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel MPTACC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio ports ...........................................................363 Figure 45.6 — Segregated Ports icon .....................................................................................364 Figure 45.7 — Segregated Ports window.................................................................................364 Figure 45.8 — Segregated Port - Port Provisioning pop-up ...........................................................365 Figure 45.9 — Segregated port - Slot Provisioning dialog box........................................................365 Figure 45.10 — Segregated Port Window W/Slot 3 Port 2 segregated from Slot 4 ports.........................366 Figure 45.11 — Segregated Port Window W/Slot 4 segregated From Core-E port 5 ..............................367
46 — Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only) .............................................. 369 Figure 46.1 — Auxiliary Cross Connections menu ......................................................................370 Figure 46.2 — New AUX Cross Connection...............................................................................371 Figure 46.3 — Delete an AUX Cross Connection ........................................................................371
47 — Provision Ethernet ports ................................................................................. 373 Figure 47.1 — 9500 MPR equipment tab: Core-E card selected .....................................................377 Figure 47.2 — Core-E main view: Ethernet Physical Interface Settings tab (ports 1 to 4).......................378 Figure 47.3 — Enable/disable Core-E/P8ETH/EASv2/MSS-O Ethernet port ........................................379 Figure 47.4 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet physical interface ............................................380 Figure 47.5 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet port VLAN configuration parameters .......................381 Figure 47.6 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O synchronous Ethernet operation mode ...............................382 Figure 47.7 — Provision the Hold Off parameter .......................................................................383 Figure 47.8 — Provision provider bridge ................................................................................384 Figure 47.9 — Provisioned UNI (VLAN-based) port .....................................................................385 Figure 47.10 — Provision Core/EAS rate limiting by port .............................................................386 Figure 47.11 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet port storm control ...........................................387 Figure 47.12 — Provision ingress rate limiting by VLAN ...............................................................388 Figure 47.13 — Provision Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiting ............................................................389 Figure 47.14 — Delete Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiting ...............................................................390
49 — Provision equipment port................................................................................ 393 Figure 49.1 — Resource list area: Core-E SFP slot selected ..........................................................395 Figure 49.2 — Provision Core-E SFP port ................................................................................395 Figure 49.3 — Provisioned Core-E SFP port .............................................................................396 Figure 49.4 — Resource list area: CorEvo SFP slot selected ..........................................................397 Figure 49.5 — Provision CorEvo Sync-In/Out SFP port.................................................................398 Figure 49.6 — Resource list area: MSS-1 selected......................................................................399 Figure 49.7 — Provision MSS-1 Sync-In/Out SFP port ..................................................................399 Figure 49.8 — Resource list area: P8ETH selected .....................................................................400 Figure 49.9 — Provision P8ETH SFP ports................................................................................401 Figure 49.10 — Provision EASv2 SFP ports ...............................................................................401 Figure 49.11 — Provisioned P8ETH SFP port ............................................................................402 Figure 49.12 — PDH main view (ETSI market) ..........................................................................403 Figure 49.13 — Resource list area: P32E1DS1 selected ...............................................................405 Figure 49.14 — Provision P32E1DS1 port ................................................................................406 Figure 49.15 — Provisioned P32E1DS1 TDM2TDM DS1 port............................................................407 Figure 49.16 — Provisioned P32E1DS1 DS1 TDM2ETH port ............................................................408 Figure 49.17 — Resource list area: P2E3DS3 selected .................................................................409
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
25
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 49.18 Figure 49.19 Figure 49.20 Figure 49.21 Figure 49.22 Figure 49.23 Figure 49.24 Figure 49.25 Figure 49.26
— — — — — — — — —
Provision P2E3DS3 DS3 port ............................................................................410 Provisioned P2E3DS3 TDM2TDM DS3 port .............................................................411 Provisioned P2E3DS3 TDM2ETH DS3 port .............................................................412 Resource list area: SDHACC selected .................................................................413 Provisioned SDHACC SFP port ..........................................................................414 Provision SDHACC OC-3 port ............................................................................415 Provisioned SDHACC optical OC-3 port................................................................417 Provisioned SDHACC electrical OC-3 port ............................................................418 SDHCHANN main view ...................................................................................419
50 — Deprovision equipment ports ........................................................................... 421 Figure 50.1 — Resource list area: Core-E SFP slot selected ..........................................................422 Figure 50.2 — Provisioned Core-E SFP Port #5..........................................................................423 Figure 50.3 — Deprovisioned Core-E SFP Port#5 .......................................................................424 Figure 50.4 — Resource list area: P8ETH selected .....................................................................425 Figure 50.5 — Provisioned P8ETH ports..................................................................................425 Figure 50.6 — Provisioned EASv2 ports ..................................................................................426 Figure 50.7 — Deprovisioned P8ETH SFP port...........................................................................427 Figure 50.8 — Resource list area: P32E1DS1 selected .................................................................428 Figure 50.9 — Provisioned P32E1DS1 DS1................................................................................429 Figure 50.10 — Deprovision P32E1DS1 DS1 port ........................................................................430 Figure 50.11 — Deprovisioned P32E1DS1 DS1 port .....................................................................431 Figure 50.12 — Resource list area: P2E3DS3 selected .................................................................432 Figure 50.13 — Provisioned P2E3DS3 .....................................................................................433 Figure 50.14 — Deprovision P2E3DS3 port...............................................................................434 Figure 50.15 — Deprovisioned P2E3DS3 ports...........................................................................435 Figure 50.16 — Resource list area: SDHACC selected .................................................................436 Figure 50.17 — Provisioned SDHACC .....................................................................................437 Figure 50.18 — Deprovisioned SDHACC ports ...........................................................................438
51 — Enable equipment ......................................................................................... 439 Figure 51.1 — Select slot 2 to enable spare Core-E....................................................................440 Figure 51.2 — Select spare Core-E equipment type ...................................................................441 Figure 51.3 — Spare Core-E enabled .....................................................................................442 Figure 51.4 — Select slot to enable P8ETH..............................................................................443 Figure 51.5 — Select P8ETH equipment type ...........................................................................444 Figure 51.6 — P8ETH enabled .............................................................................................444 Figure 51.7 — Select slot to enable EASv2 ..............................................................................445 Figure 51.8 — Select EASv2 equipment type............................................................................446 Figure 51.9 — EASv2 enabled..............................................................................................447 Figure 51.10 — Select slot associated with MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver to enable ............................448 Figure 51.11 — Select MPT-HL/MPT-HLC equipment type ............................................................448 Figure 51.12 — Enabled MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver ...............................................................449 Figure 51.13 — Resource list area: Core-E selected ...................................................................450 Figure 51.14 — Provision Core-E MPT-HL/MPT-HLC ports.............................................................450 Figure 51.15 — Enabled MPT-HL/MPT-HLC on Core-E .................................................................451 Figure 51.16 — Select slot to enable P32E1DS1 ........................................................................452 Figure 51.17 — Select P32EDS1 equipment type .......................................................................453 Figure 51.18 — P32E1DS1 enabled........................................................................................453
26
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 51.19 Figure 51.20 Figure 51.21 Figure 51.22 Figure 51.23 Figure 51.24 Figure 51.25 Figure 51.26 Figure 51.27 Figure 51.28 Figure 51.29 Figure 51.30 Figure 51.31 Figure 51.32 Figure 51.33 Figure 51.34 Figure 51.35 Figure 51.36 Figure 51.37 Figure 51.38 Figure 51.39 Figure 51.40 Figure 51.41 Figure 51.42 Figure 51.43 Figure 51.44
— Select slot to enable P2E3DS3..........................................................................454 — Select P2E3DS3 equipment type .......................................................................455 — P2E3DS3 enabled .........................................................................................456 — Select slot to enable SDHACC or SDHCHANN .........................................................457 — Select SDHACC equipment type........................................................................458 — SDHACC enabled..........................................................................................459 — Select slot to enable MPTACC ..........................................................................460 — Select MPTACC equipment type .......................................................................461 — MPTACC enabled .........................................................................................461 — Resource list area: MPTACC selected .................................................................462 — Provision MPTACC port ..................................................................................463 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on MPTACC .....................................................................464 — Resource list area: Core-E selected ...................................................................465 — Provision Core-E MPT-HC/XP optical SFP Ethernet port............................................466 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port .......................................467 — Provision Core-E MPT-HC electrical Ethernet port ..................................................468 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E electrical Ethernet port .........................................469 — Resource list area: P8ETH selected ...................................................................470 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH optical Ethernet port ............................................471 — Select Slot#8 to enable auxiliary card ................................................................472 — Select AUX equipment type ............................................................................472 — Auxiliary card enabled...................................................................................473 — Enable the subrack for an MPT-HLS radio ............................................................474 — Enable the MPT-HLS radio ..............................................................................475 — Enable the MPT-HLS fan.................................................................................476 — Enabling Fan Unit ........................................................................................477
52 — Disable equipment ........................................................................................ 479 Figure 52.1 — Enabled spare Core-E .....................................................................................480 Figure 52.2 — Disable spare Core-E ......................................................................................481 Figure 52.3 — Spare Core-E disabled.....................................................................................482 Figure 52.4 — Enabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver .............................................................483 Figure 52.5 — Disable MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver ...............................................................483 Figure 52.6 — Disabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver..............................................................484 Figure 52.7 — Enabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver .............................................................485 Figure 52.8 — Disable MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver ...............................................................485 Figure 52.9 — Disabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver..............................................................486 Figure 52.10 — Enabled P8ETH............................................................................................487 Figure 52.11 — Disable P8ETH ............................................................................................487 Figure 52.12 — P8ETH disabled ...........................................................................................488 Figure 52.13 — Enabled EASv2 ...........................................................................................489 Figure 52.14 — Disable EASv2 .............................................................................................490 Figure 52.15 — EASv2 disabled ............................................................................................491 Figure 52.16 — Enabled P32E1DS1........................................................................................492 Figure 52.17 — Disable P32E1DS1.........................................................................................493 Figure 52.18 — Disabled P32E1DS1 .......................................................................................494 Figure 52.19 — Enabled P2E3DS3 .........................................................................................495 Figure 52.20 — Disable P2E3DS3 ..........................................................................................496 Figure 52.21 — Disabled P2E3DS3.........................................................................................497
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
27
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 52.22 Figure 52.23 Figure 52.24 Figure 52.25 Figure 52.26 Figure 52.27 Figure 52.28 Figure 52.29 Figure 52.30 Figure 52.31 Figure 52.32 Figure 52.33 Figure 52.34 Figure 52.35 Figure 52.36 Figure 52.37 Figure 52.38 Figure 52.39 Figure 52.40 Figure 52.41
— Enabled SDHACC..........................................................................................498 — Disable SDHACC...........................................................................................499 — Disabled SDHACC .........................................................................................500 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU ...................................................................................501 — Disable MPT-HC ODU.....................................................................................501 — Disabled MPT-HC ODU ...................................................................................502 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E .......................................................................503 — Disable MPT-HC ODU from Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port .....................................504 — Disabled MPT-HC ODU from Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port ....................................505 — Deprovision MPT-HC from Core-E electrical Ethernet port ........................................505 — Disabled MPT-HC ODU from Core-E electrical Ethernet port ......................................506 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH .......................................................................507 — Disable MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH ........................................................................507 — Disabled MPT ODU from P8ETH ........................................................................508 — Enabled MPTACC .........................................................................................509 — Disable MPTACC ..........................................................................................510 — Disabled MPTACC .........................................................................................511 — Enabled auxiliary card...................................................................................512 — Disable auxiliary card....................................................................................513 — Disabled auxiliary card ..................................................................................514
53 — Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ............................................................ 515 Figure 53.1 Figure 53.2 Figure 53.3 Figure 53.4 Figure 53.5 Figure 53.6 Figure 53.7 Figure 53.8 Figure 53.9
— Ethernet Ring Configuration view icon .................................................................517 — Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration view .........................................................517 — ERP Topology creation ....................................................................................518 — ERP Topology created.....................................................................................519 — ERP Instance creation .....................................................................................520 — ERP Instance created......................................................................................521 — Two ERP Instances created...............................................................................521 — Add PDH VLAN IDs to ERP Instance......................................................................523 — OAM switching criteria ....................................................................................525
54 — Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software .................................................................... 527 Figure 54.1 Figure 54.2 Figure 54.3 Figure 54.4 Figure 54.5 Figure 54.6 Figure 54.7 Figure 54.8 Figure 54.9
— — — — — — — — —
Ring example for upgrade ................................................................................528 Activate Tx mute to Node C .............................................................................529 Activate software on Node B.............................................................................530 Remove Tx mute to Node C ..............................................................................531 Activate Tx mute and activate SW on Node C.........................................................532 Remove Tx mute to Node D ..............................................................................533 Activate Tx mute and activate SW on Node D ........................................................534 Remove Tx mute to Node A ..............................................................................535 Remove Tx mute to Node A ..............................................................................536
55 — Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring................................... 537 Figure 55.1 Figure 55.2 Figure 55.3 Figure 55.4 Figure 55.5
28
— — — — —
Sample mixed fiber/microwave Ring ...................................................................538 Cross-connection between Node J and Node K .......................................................539 Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node A ......................................540 Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node B ......................................541 Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node C ......................................542
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 55.6 — Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node D ......................................543 Figure 55.7 — Cross-connection between Node J and Node D .......................................................544 Figure 55.8 — Node J to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node A ......................................544 Figure 55.9 — Node J to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node B ......................................545 Figure 55.10 — Node J to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node C.....................................546 Figure 55.11 — Node J to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D .......................................547 Figure 55.12 — Node J to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D .........................................547 Figure 55.13 — Cross-connection between Node J and Node D (protected) .......................................548 Figure 55.14 — Node J to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A ......................549 Figure 55.15 — Node J to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B ......................550 Figure 55.16 — Node J to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C ......................551 Figure 55.17 — Node J to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D ........................552 Figure 55.18 — Node J to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D ..........................552 Figure 55.19 — Cross-connection between Node K and Node B......................................................553 Figure 55.20 — Node K to Node B: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B .......................................554 Figure 55.21 — Node K to Node B: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B .........................................554 Figure 55.22 — Node K to Node B: -through cross-connection on Node A.....................................555 Figure 55.23 — Node K to Node B: -through cross-connection on Node C.....................................556 Figure 55.24 — Node K to Node B: -through cross-connection on Node D.....................................557 Figure 55.25 — Cross-connection between Node K and Node B (protected) .......................................558 Figure 55.26 — Node K to Node B (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B ........................558 Figure 55.27 — Node K to Node B (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B ..........................559 Figure 55.28 — Node K to Node B (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A......................560 Figure 55.29 — Node K to Node B (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C......................561 Figure 55.30 — Node K to Node B (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D......................562 Figure 55.31 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE G .........................................................563 Figure 55.32 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G.........................................564 Figure 55.33 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G ..........................................565 Figure 55.34 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C .......................................566 Figure 55.35 — Node I to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node A ........................................567 Figure 55.36 — Node I to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node B ........................................568 Figure 55.37 — Node I to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node D ........................................569 Figure 55.38 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE G (protected) ..........................................570 Figure 55.39 — Node I to NE G (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G..........................571 Figure 55.40 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G ..........................................572 Figure 55.41 — Node I to NE G (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C ........................573 Figure 55.42 — Node I to NE G (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A .........................574 Figure 55.43 — Node I to NE G (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B .........................575 Figure 55.44 — Node I to NE G (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D .........................576 Figure 55.45 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE E..........................................................577 Figure 55.46 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E .........................................578 Figure 55.47 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E...........................................579 Figure 55.48 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A .......................................580 Figure 55.49 — Node I to NE E: -through cross-connection on Node B.........................................581 Figure 55.50 — Node I to NE E: -through cross-connection on Node C ........................................582 Figure 55.51 — Node I to NE E: -through cross-connection on Node D ........................................583 Figure 55.52 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE E (protected)...........................................584 Figure 55.53 — Node I to NE E (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E ..........................585 Figure 55.54 — Node I to NE E (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E ............................586
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
29
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 55.55 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A .......................................587 Figure 55.56 — Node I to NE E (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B..........................588 Figure 55.57 — Node I to NE E (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C..........................589 Figure 55.58 — Node I to NE E (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D..........................590 Figure 55.59 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node D .....................................................591 Figure 55.60 — Node A to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A .......................................591 Figure 55.61 — Node A to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A .........................................592 Figure 55.62 — Node A to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node B ....................................593 Figure 55.63 — Node A to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node C ....................................594 Figure 55.64 — Node A to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D .......................................595 Figure 55.65 — Node A to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D.........................................595 Figure 55.66 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node D (protected).......................................596 Figure 55.67 — Node A to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A ........................597 Figure 55.68 — Node A to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A ..........................597 Figure 55.69 — Node A to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B......................598 Figure 55.70 — Node A to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C......................599 Figure 55.71 — Node A to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D ........................600 Figure 55.72 — Node A to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D ..........................600 Figure 55.73 — Cross-connection between Node A (protected) and Node D (protected) ........................601 Figure 55.74 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A .........602 Figure 55.75 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A ...........602 Figure 55.76 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B ........................................................................................................603 Figure 55.77 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C ........................................................................................................604 Figure 55.78 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D .........605 Figure 55.79 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D ...........605 Figure 55.80 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node C......................................................606 Figure 55.81 — Node A to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A .......................................607 Figure 55.82 — Node A to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A .........................................607 Figure 55.83 — Node A to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node B.....................................608 Figure 55.84 — Node A to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C .......................................609 Figure 55.85 — Node A to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C .........................................609 Figure 55.86 — Node A to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D ....................................610 Figure 55.87 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node C (protected).......................................611 Figure 55.88 — Node A to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A ........................611 Figure 55.89 — Node A to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A ..........................612 Figure 55.90 — Node A to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node B.....................................613 Figure 55.91 — Node A to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C ........................614 Figure 55.92 — Node A to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C ..........................614 Figure 55.93 — Node A to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D......................615 Figure 55.94 — Cross-connection between Node B and Node C......................................................616 Figure 55.95 — Node B to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B .......................................616 Figure 55.96 — Node B to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B .........................................617 Figure 55.97 — Node B to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C .......................................618 Figure 55.98 — Node B to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C .........................................618 Figure 55.99 — Node B to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node A.....................................619 Figure 55.100 — Node B to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D ...................................620 Figure 55.101 — Cross-connection between NE E and Node D .......................................................621
30
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 55.102 — NE E to Node D: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E .......................................621 Figure 55.103 — NE E to Node D: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G ........................................622 Figure 55.104 — NE E to Node D: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A .....................................623 Figure 55.105 — NE E to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node A ......................................624 Figure 55.106 — NE E to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node C ......................................625 Figure 55.107 — NE E to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D.........................................626 Figure 55.108 — NE E to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D ..........................................626 Figure 55.109 — Cross-connection between NE E and Node C .......................................................627 Figure 55.110 — NE E to Node C: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E .......................................628 Figure 55.111 — NE E to Node C: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E ........................................629 Figure 55.112 — NE E to Node C: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A .....................................630 Figure 55.113 — NE E to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node B ......................................631 Figure 55.114 — NE E to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C.........................................632 Figure 55.115 — NE E to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C...........................................632 Figure 55.116 — NE E to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D ......................................633 Figure 55.117 — Cross-connection between NE F and Node C .......................................................634 Figure 55.118 — NE F to Node C: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F .......................................634 Figure 55.119 — NE F to Node C: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F ........................................635 Figure 55.120 — NE F to Node C: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B .....................................636 Figure 55.121 — NE F to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C .........................................637 Figure 55.122 — NE F to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C...........................................637 Figure 55.123 — NE F to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node A ......................................638 Figure 55.124 — NE F to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D ......................................639 Figure 55.125 — Cross-connection between NE F and Node C (protected) ........................................640 Figure 55.126 — NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F ........................641 Figure 55.127 — NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F..........................642 Figure 55.128 — NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B ......................643 Figure 55.129 — NE F to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C ..........................644 Figure 55.130 — NE F to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C............................644 Figure 55.131 — NE F to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A .......................645 Figure 55.132 — NE F to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D .......................646 Figure 55.133 — Cross-connection between NE F (protected) and Node C (protected)..........................647 Figure 55.134 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F .........648 Figure 55.135 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F...........649 Figure 55.136 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B ........................................................................................................650 Figure 55.137 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C ...........651 Figure 55.138 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C .............651 Figure 55.139 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A ........652 Figure 55.140 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D ........653 Figure 55.141 — Cross-connection between NE E and NE H ..........................................................654 Figure 55.142 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E ..........................................655 Figure 55.143 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E ...........................................656 Figure 55.144 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E ..........................................657 Figure 55.145 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E ...........................................658 Figure 55.146 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE H..........................................659 Figure 55.147 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE H ...........................................660 Figure 55.148 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A........................................661 Figure 55.149 — NE E to NE H: -through cross-connection on Node B .........................................662
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
31
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 55.150 — Figure 55.151 — Figure 55.152 — Figure 55.153 — Figure 55.154 — Figure 55.155 — Figure 55.156 — Figure 55.157 — Figure 55.158 — Figure 55.159 — Figure 55.160 — Figure 55.161 — Figure 55.162 — Figure 55.163 — Figure 55.164 — Figure 55.165 — Figure 55.166 — Figure 55.167 — Figure 55.168 — Figure 55.169 —
NE E to NE H: -through cross-connection on Node C .........................................663 NE to NE H: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node D ..........................................664 Cross-connection between NE E and NE G ..........................................................665 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E ..........................................665 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E ...........................................666 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G .........................................667 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G...........................................668 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A........................................669 NE E to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node B .........................................670 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C........................................671 NE E to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node D .........................................672 Cross-connection between NE F and NE G ..........................................................673 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F ..........................................674 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F ...........................................675 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G .........................................676 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G...........................................677 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B ........................................678 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C........................................679 NE F to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node A .........................................680 NE F to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node D .........................................681
56 — Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool ...................... 683 Figure 56.1 — Sample mixed fiber/microwave Ring ...................................................................684 Figure 56.2 — Ring’s Fiber Chain Description...........................................................................685 Figure 56.3 — Ring’s Fiber Chain for Aided Cross-connections window ............................................686 Figure 56.4 — Add&Drop cross-connection: Other end point is outside the fiber chain .........................687 Figure 56.5 — Add&Drop cross-connection: Other end point is inside the fiber chain ...........................687 Figure 56.6 — -through cross-connection: Both end points are inside the fiber chain (1)..................688 Figure 56.7 — -through cross-connection: Both end points are inside the fiber chain (2)..................688 Figure 56.8 — -through cross-connection: One end point is inside the fiber chain (1) .....................689 Figure 56.9 — -through cross-connection: One end point is inside the fiber chain (2) .....................689 Figure 56.10 — -through cross-connection: Both end points are outside the fiber chain...................690
57 — Provision protection scheme parameters ............................................................ 691 Figure 57.1 Figure 57.2 Figure 57.3 Figure 57.4 Figure 57.5 Figure 57.6 Figure 57.7 Figure 57.8
— Protection Schemes resource tree expanded .........................................................692 — Core-E Protection Scheme Parameter tab .............................................................693 — Synchronization Protection Scheme Parameter tab ..................................................694 — Radio Channel Protection Scheme Parameter tab....................................................695 — Equipment Protection Scheme Parameter tab ........................................................696 — HSB Protection Scheme Parameter tab ................................................................697 — Rx Radio Protection Scheme Parameter tab ..........................................................698 — Physical Cable warning example ........................................................................698
58 — Provision Protection Type ............................................................................... 699 Figure 58.1 Figure 58.2 Figure 58.3 Figure 58.4 Figure 58.5
32
— — — — —
MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Transceiver Settings tab .........................................................700 MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Protection Type provisioned ....................................................701 Provision P32E1DS1 Protection Type ...................................................................702 P32E1DS1 Protection Type provisioned ................................................................703 Provision P2E3DS3 Protection Type .....................................................................704
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 58.6 — P2E3DS3 Protection Type provisioned ..................................................................705 Figure 58.7 — Provision SDH Protection Type ..........................................................................706 Figure 58.8 — SDH Protection Type provisioned .......................................................................707 Figure 58.9 — Provision MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Protection Type........................................708 Figure 58.10 — MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Protection Type selection ......................................709 Figure 58.11 — MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Protection Type provisioned ...................................710
59 — Configure radio parameters ............................................................................. 711 Figure 59.1 — MPT-HC radio selected....................................................................................714 Figure 59.2 — MPT ODU Radio Main View Settings tab ................................................................715 Figure 59.3 — MPT-HL transceiver protection type provisioning ....................................................716 Figure 59.4 — MPT-HL Settings tab for fixed modulation .............................................................717 Figure 59.5 — MPT-HL Settings tab for adaptive modulation ........................................................719 Figure 59.6 — MPT-HL 1+1 settings tab ..................................................................................721 Figure 59.7 — MPT-HL settings with ATPC ..............................................................................723 Figure 59.8 — MPT-HL transceiver protection criteria provisioning .................................................724 Figure 59.9 — MPT-HL Additional Settings tab .........................................................................725 Figure 59.10 — XPIC icon...................................................................................................728 Figure 59.11 — XPIC configuration window .............................................................................728 Figure 59.12 — Provision MPT-HLC co-channel XPIC association.....................................................729 Figure 59.13 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel ..........................................730 Figure 59.14 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel ..........................................731 Figure 59.15 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel ..........................................732 Figure 59.16 — Provision MPT-HLC 1+1 XPIC association..............................................................733 Figure 59.17 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel ..........................................734 Figure 59.18 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel .............................................735 Figure 59.19 — MPT-HLC transceiver protection type provisioning .................................................736 Figure 59.20 — MPT-HLC Settings tab for fixed modulation ..........................................................737 Figure 59.21 — MPT-HLC Settings tab for adaptive modulation .....................................................739 Figure 59.22 — MPT-HLC 1+1 settings tab ...............................................................................741 Figure 59.23 — MPT-HLC settings with ATPC ...........................................................................743 Figure 59.24 — MPT-HLC transceiver protection criteria provisioning..............................................744 Figure 59.25 — MPT-HLC Additional Settings tab ......................................................................745 Figure 59.26 — MPT-HLC Maintenance tab .............................................................................748 Figure 59.27 — Measurements tab for MPT-HLC........................................................................749 Figure 59.28 — Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel ..........................................751 Figure 59.29 — Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel ..........................................753 Figure 59.30 — Provision MPT-HLS 1+1 XPIC association ..............................................................754 Figure 59.31 — Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel .............................................755 Figure 59.32 — MPT-HLS transceiver protection type provisioning..................................................756 Figure 59.33 — MPT-HLS Settings tab for fixed modulation ..........................................................757 Figure 59.34 — MPT-HLS Settings tab for adaptive modulation......................................................759 Figure 59.35 — MPT-HLS 1+1 settings tab ...............................................................................761 Figure 59.36 — MPT-HLS settings with ATPC............................................................................763 Figure 59.37 — ATPC warning ............................................................................................763 Figure 59.38 — MPT-HLS transceiver protection criteria provisioning ..............................................764 Figure 59.39 — MPT-HLS Additional Settings tab.......................................................................766 Figure 59.40 — MPT-HLS Maintenance tab .............................................................................768 Figure 59.41 — MPT ODU Power Source Settings tab (MPTACC card) ...............................................771
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
33
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 59.42 Figure 59.43 Figure 59.44 Figure 59.45 Figure 59.46 Figure 59.47 Figure 59.48 Figure 59.49 Figure 59.50 Figure 59.51 Figure 59.52 Figure 59.53 Figure 59.54 Figure 59.55 Figure 59.56 Figure 59.57 Figure 59.58 Figure 59.59 Figure 59.60 Figure 59.61 Figure 59.62 Figure 59.63 Figure 59.64 Figure 59.65
— XPIC icon...................................................................................................772 — XPIC configuration window .............................................................................773 — Provision MPT ODU co-channel XPIC association ....................................................774 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel..........................................775 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel..........................................776 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel..........................................777 — Provision MPT ODU 1+1 XPIC association .............................................................778 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel..........................................779 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel .............................................780 — MPT ODU transceiver Protection Type provisioning.................................................781 — Dialog box with virtual cable and HQAM .............................................................782 — MPT ODU Protection Scheme parameters RPS Cable configuration ..............................782 — MPT-HC Settings tab for fixed modulation ...........................................................783 — MPT-HQAM Settings tab for fixed modulation .......................................................784 — MPT-HC Settings tab for adaptive modulation ......................................................785 — MPT-HQAM Settings tab for adaptive modulation ...................................................786 — MPT-HC 1+1 Settings tab ................................................................................788 — MPT-HC Settings tab with ATPC........................................................................789 — MPT ODU transceiver Protection Criteria provisioning .............................................791 — MPT ODU Protection Restoration Criteria provisioning Rx radio ..................................792 — MPT-HC Additional Settings tab ........................................................................793 — MPT-HQAM Maintenance tab............................................................................795 — MPT ODU Maintenance tab..............................................................................798 — MPT ODU Maintenance tab..............................................................................799
60 — Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning .......................................................................... 801 Figure 60.1 Figure 60.2 Figure 60.3 Figure 60.4 Figure 60.5
— IPv6 Pre-provisioning main menu bar path ............................................................802 — IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 1 of 3 window ....................................................802 — IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 2 of 3 window ....................................................803 — Create IPv6 Static Route window .......................................................................804 — IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 3 of 3 window ....................................................805
61 — Use the Provisioning Tool................................................................................ 807 Figure 61.1 — Provisioning Tool Screen..................................................................................809 Figure 61.2 — Report for opened configuration file ...........................................................810 Figure 61.3 — MSS Configuration screen example .....................................................................811 Figure 61.4 — Core Configuration screen example ....................................................................812 Figure 61.5 — MPTACC configuration with two units in the row.....................................................813 Figure 61.6 — 1+1 configuration with MPTACC units ..................................................................814 Figure 61.7 — XPIC polarization selection ..............................................................................815 Figure 61.8 — MPT configuration showing MPT-HQAM (1+0 with fixed modulation) ..............................816 Figure 61.9 — Data Help window for Profile area (fixed modulation) ..............................................817 Figure 61.10 — MPT configuration screen (1+0 with adaptive modulation)........................................818 Figure 61.11 — Data Help window for Profile area (adaptive modulation) ........................................819 Figure 61.12 — Data Help window for the Channel area..............................................................820 Figure 61.13 — 1+1 HSB Configuration ...................................................................................821 Figure 61.14 — 1+1 FD Configuration ....................................................................................822 Figure 61.15 — DS1 configuration screen................................................................................823 Figure 61.16 — E1 configuration ..........................................................................................825
34
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 61.17 Figure 61.18 Figure 61.19 Figure 61.20 Figure 61.21 Figure 61.22 Figure 61.23 Figure 61.24 Figure 61.25 Figure 61.26 Figure 61.27 Figure 61.28 Figure 61.29 Figure 61.30 Figure 61.31 Figure 61.32 Figure 61.33 Figure 61.34 Figure 61.35 Figure 61.36 Figure 61.37 Figure 61.38 Figure 61.39 Figure 61.40 Figure 61.41 Figure 61.42 Figure 61.43 Figure 61.44 Figure 61.45 Figure 61.46
— SDHACC configuration screen ..........................................................................827 — SDHCHAN configuration screen.........................................................................828 — EASv2 configuration screen: electrical ports ........................................................830 — EASv2 configuration screen: optical ports............................................................831 — EASv2 protection configuration ........................................................................832 — EASv2 protection .........................................................................................833 — LAG configuration screen ...............................................................................834 — LAG creation window ....................................................................................834 — Created L1 Radio LAG ...................................................................................835 — Available ports............................................................................................836 — Lowest index port selected .............................................................................836 — To configure 1+0 XPIC ...................................................................................838 — 1+0 XPIC ...................................................................................................839 — To configure 1+1 XPIC ...................................................................................840 — 1+1 XPIC ...................................................................................................841 — Synchronization Configuration screen ................................................................842 — Scheduler Configuration screen ........................................................................843 — Queue size configuration screen .......................................................................844 — QoS classification screen................................................................................845 — IEEE 802.1p ...............................................................................................846 — DiffServ ....................................................................................................847 — Read-only table...........................................................................................848 — 802.1D VLAN management..............................................................................849 — 802.1Q VLAN management (default VLAN only) .....................................................850 — Example of created VLANs ..............................................................................852 — Port VLAN configuration - Core-E ports ...............................................................853 — Port VLAN configuration - EASv2 ports................................................................854 — Network Configuration screen..........................................................................855 — Trusted Managers screen................................................................................857 — Configuration report ....................................................................................858
62 — Apply a configuration using the Web Server ......................................................... 859 Figure 62.1 — Configuration Settings screen ...........................................................................860 Figure 62.2 — Configuration Setting confirmation summary .........................................................861
63 — Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback ........................................................... 865 Figure 63.1 Figure 63.2 Figure 63.3 Figure 63.4 Figure 63.5 Figure 63.6 Figure 63.7 Figure 63.8 Figure 63.9
— Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback block diagram ................................................866 — Core Facing SDH Tributary Loopback block diagram .................................................866 — Main Equipment Window: PDH E1/DS1 Transponder Card highlighted ............................867 — Main Equipment Window: PDH DS3 Transponder Card highlighted ................................868 — Main Equipment Window: PDH OC-3 Transponder Card highlighted ...............................869 — PDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port selected.....................................................870 — SDH main view, Loopback tab OC-3 Port#3.1 selected ..............................................871 — Core Facing PDH DS1 Tributary Loopback active .....................................................872 — Core Facing SDH Tributary Loopback active...........................................................873
64 — Digital Core Facing Loopback ........................................................................... 875 Figure 64.1 — Main Equipment window: Radio icon highlighted.....................................................876 Figure 64.2 — Radio Maintenance tab ...................................................................................877
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
35
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
65 — Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback............................................................ 879 Figure 65.1 Figure 65.2 Figure 65.3 Figure 65.4 Figure 65.5 Figure 65.6 Figure 65.7 Figure 65.8 Figure 65.9
— Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback block diagram .................................................880 — Line Facing SDH Tributary Loopback block diagram .................................................880 — Main Equipment window: PDH E1/DS1 Transponder Card highlighted ............................881 — Main Equipment window: PDH DS3 Transponder Card highlighted.................................882 — Main Equipment window: SDH Transponder Card highlighted ......................................883 — PDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port selected.....................................................884 — SDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port#07 selected.................................................885 — Line Facing PDH DS1 Tributary Loopback Active......................................................886 — Line Facing SDH Tributary Loopback Active ...........................................................887
66 — OAM Remote Loopback ................................................................................... 889 Figure 66.1 — ETH OAM Configuration window with operational link...............................................890 Figure 66.2 — ETH OAM Configuration window with OAM Remote Loopback ......................................891
67 — Open and run performance monitoring ............................................................... 893 Figure 67.1 — PM Tool icon ................................................................................................894 Figure 67.2 — Acknowledgement of Authorization dialog box .......................................................895 Figure 67.3 — Performance Monitoring Tool window..................................................................895 Figure 67.4 — Ethernet port PM ..........................................................................................896 Figure 67.5 — Compression gain statistics PM ..........................................................................897 Figure 67.6 — Radio QoS Ethernet port PM .............................................................................898 Figure 67.7 — Configure Ethernet counters for L1 radio LAG PM with EASv2 .....................................900 Figure 67.8 — Radio port PM ..............................................................................................901 Figure 67.9 — Adaptive Modulation PM ..................................................................................902 Figure 67.10 — PDH port PM...............................................................................................903 Figure 67.11 — SDH port PM ...............................................................................................904 Figure 67.12 — RSL History PM ............................................................................................905 Figure 67.13 — Threshold Editor window................................................................................906 Figure 67.14 — Assign PM threshold Configuration window ..........................................................908
68 — Perform protection switching........................................................................... 911 Figure 68.1 — Protection Schemes tab ..................................................................................916 Figure 68.2 — Forced Switch Main Core-E to Spare Core-E ...........................................................917 Figure 68.3 — Lockout Spare Core-E Card...............................................................................918 Figure 68.4 — Release Switch Core-E ....................................................................................919 Figure 68.5 — Forced Equipment Switch Main to Spare ...............................................................920 Figure 68.6 — Manual Equipment Switch: Main to Spare..............................................................921 Figure 68.7 — Manual Equipment Switch: Spare to Main..............................................................922 Figure 68.8 — Lockout Equipment Switch: Lockout Switch to Spare................................................923 Figure 68.9 — Release EPS Switch ........................................................................................924 Figure 68.10 — Forced HSB Switch Main Radio Channel...............................................................925 Figure 68.11 — Manual HSB Switch: Main Radio Channel to Spare Radio Channel ................................926 Figure 68.12 — Manual HSB Switch: Spare Radio Channel to Main Radio Channel ................................927 Figure 68.13 — Lockout HSB Switch: Lockout Spare Radio Channel.................................................928 Figure 68.14 — Release HSB Switch ......................................................................................929 Figure 68.15 — Forced Rx Radio Switch: Main Radio Channel........................................................930 Figure 68.16 — Manual Rx Radio Switch: Main Radio Channel to Spare Radio Channel ..........................931 Figure 68.17 — Manual Rx Radio Switch: Spare Radio Channel to Main Radio Channel ..........................932
36
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Figure 68.18 — Lockout Rx Radio Switch Spare Radio Channel ......................................................933 Figure 68.19 — Release Rx Radio Switch ................................................................................934
69 — Perform radio power measurements .................................................................. 935 Figure 69.1 Figure 69.2 Figure 69.3 Figure 69.4
— Radio Power Measurement window .....................................................................936 — Radio Power Measurement window for MPT-HLC .....................................................937 — Radio Power Measurement: graphical view............................................................938 — Radio Power Measurement: tabular view ..............................................................938
70 — Radio Facing Circuit Loopback.......................................................................... 939 Figure 70.1 — Main Equipment Window: Radio icon highlighted ....................................................940 Figure 70.2 — Radio Maintenance tab ...................................................................................941
71 — RF Core Facing Loopback ................................................................................ 943 Figure 71.1 Figure 71.2 Figure 71.3 Figure 71.4
— — — —
RF Filter Port detail .......................................................................................945 Main Equipment Window: Radio icon highlighted ....................................................946 Maintenance tab (MPT-HLC shown) .....................................................................947 Radio Maintenance tab ...................................................................................950
72 — ister SDH LAG ...................................................................................... 953 Figure 72.1 — SDH LAG screen ............................................................................................954
75 — Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port ............................................................. 969 Figure 75.1 — MPT-HL to L1 LAG information message ...............................................................973 Figure 75.2 — MPT-HL to L1 LAG warning message ....................................................................973
77 — Perform Tx Diversity Antenna operations ............................................................ 979 Figure 77.1 Figure 77.2 Figure 77.3 Figure 77.4 Figure 77.5 Figure 77.6
— — — — — —
Tx Diversity Antenna webpage ..........................................................................980 Tx Diversity Antenna enabled ...........................................................................981 Tx Diversity Antenna disabled ...........................................................................981 Tx Diversity Antenna Status..............................................................................982 Tx Diversity: Force Main ..................................................................................982 Tx Diversity: Clear Force .................................................................................983
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
37
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
38
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Preface
9500 MPR documentation Table 1 describes the 9500 MPR documentation. See the current Release Notice for part numbers. Table 1 — 9500 MPR documentation Document
Description
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual
Provides a general description of the 9500 MPR product, solutions available, associated components, applications, and some Engineering specifications This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Software Installation and NE Upgrade Manual
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
•
ANSI Product Information
•
Product Information and Planning chapters from the ETSI MSS-1/4/8 Manual and the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
Provides detailed procedures for the initial installation of the radio and for replacement of hardware components This guide replaces the following from previous releases: •
ANSI Installation Practices
•
Hardware sections of the Installation chapters from the ETSI MSS-O/1/4/8 Manual and the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
•
Hardware replacement procedures from ANSI Maintenance and Trouble Clearing
Provides detailed procedures for the initial installation of the 9500 MPR software, software the current release, and software rollback to a previous release This guide replaces the following from previous releases: •
ANSI Software Installation and Upgrade
•
Software sections of the Installation chapters from the ETSI MSS-O/1/4/8 Manual and the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
39
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 9500 MPR documentation Table 1 — 9500 MPR documentation Document
Description
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR WebCT Manual
Provides procedures for performing system operations using the WebCT interface, including monitoring and maintenance activities. This guide describes, along with the WebEML Guide, how to provision, operate, and monitor a shelf with a CorEvo card.
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Provides procedures for performing system operations using the WebEML interface, including: provisioning, performance monitoring, protection switching, and istration activities. This guide describes how to provision, operate, and monitor a radio in a split-mount configuration. This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR MCT Manual
•
ANSI Operation and istration
•
NE Management by Software Application chapter from the ETSI MSS-O/1/4/8 Manual
•
Provisioning chapter from the ETSI MSS-1/4/8 Manual
Provides procedures for performing system operations using the MCT interface, including: provisioning, performance monitoring, protection switching, and istration activities. This guide describes how to provision, operate, and monitor a radio in MPRe standalone, MSS-1c or Single NE with 7705 SAR configuration. This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Turn-up Manual
•
NE Management by Software Application chapter from the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
•
Provisioning chapter from the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
•
Maintenance and Trouble Clearing chapter from the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
Provides procedures for system installation verification, provisioning, turn-up, and acceptance testing. The guide is to be used only during initial system turn-up. It is not intended to be used after equipment has been formally accepted (that is, for maintenance, system growth, system upgrade, or provisioning activities). This guide replaces the following from previous releases:
40
•
ANSI Turn-up
•
Lineup and Commissioning chapters from the ETSI MSS-O/ 1/4/8 Manual and the MPR-e and MSS-1c Manual
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 9500 MPR documentation Table 1 — 9500 MPR documentation Document
Description
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Alarm Clearing Manual
Provides procedures related to the maintenance of the radio including how to clear alarms and abnormal conditions. This guide is intended to be used after the equipment has been installed and tested by the installation and test teams This guide replaces the following from previous releases: •
ANSI Maintenance and Trouble Clearing
•
Maintenance and Trouble Clearing chapter from the ETSI MSS-O/1/4/8 Manual
Related documentation Table 2 describes the 9500 MPR related documentation. See the Release Notice for part numbers. Table 2 — 9500 MPR related documentation Guide
Description
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A Engineering Documentation
Provides engineering drawings for the 9500 MPR-A
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Test Results Data Sheet
Provides space to record measurements, capture screen shots, capture photos, and record other information. TRDS tabs serve as records of completion of indicated steps in a Turn-up procedure. Not all procedures require entries in the TRDS.
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Configuration File Management Manual
Provides information ing the configuration file.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
41
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 9500 MPR documentation Table 2 — (Continued)9500 MPR related documentation Guide
Description
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A MPT-HL/ HLC Engineering Specifications
Provides transmit power specifications
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A MPTHC/MPR-e Engineering Specifications Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A MPTHQAM Engineering Specifications Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A ODU300 Engineering Specifications
42
9500 MPR Frequency Plan for MPT Outdoor Transceivers
Provides part number and tuning information for MPT-MC, HC, XP, HC-HQAM and XP-HQAM radios, for modules and for external diplexers.
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Technical Specifications for Split Mount Applications
Provides technical specifications for MPT Outdoor transceivers, including general specifications such as dimensions, and radio specifications such as system gain or throughput.
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Technical Specifications for Full Indoor Applications
Provides technical specifications for MPT-HLC and HLS.
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR TMN Networking Guide
Describes TMN networking in the 9500 MPR.
Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Crossconnections Reference Tables
Provides information about ed cross-connections.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Audience
Naming conventions in the documentation The generic described in Table 3 are used when the topic applies to all of the related items listed. If the topic is specific to one or a subset of the items listed, the specific names will be stated in the guide. Table 3 — Naming conventions Term
Refers to
MPT-HC
MPT-HC V2
EAS
P8ETH and EASv2 cards
Core
Core-E and CorEvo cards MSS/CORE ports of MSS-O and MSS-1
CorEvo
CorEvo-1G and CorEvo-10G cards
PDH
E1, DS1, and DS3
SDH
STM-1 and OC-3
Audience This guide is intended for network installers and system s who are responsible for installing, configuring, or maintaining networks. This guide assumes you are familiar with electronic and networking technologies.
Information symbols Observe the warnings and notes to avoid injury or equipment damage during installation and maintenance. Follow the safety procedures and guidelines when working with and near electrical equipment. Warning statements and notes are provided in each chapter. The following symbols are contained in the 9500 MPR documentation.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
43
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 information
Danger: indicates that the described activity or situation may result in serious personal injury or death; for example, high voltage or electric shock hazards.
Warning: indicates that the described activity or situation may, or will, cause equipment damage or serious performance problems.
Caution: indicates that the described activity or situation may, or will, cause service interruption.
Note: provides information that is, or may be, of special interest.
information Technical If you purchased a service agreement for your 9500 MPR and related products from a distributor or authorized reseller, the technical staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance. If you purchased an Alcatel-Lucent service agreement, check this link for instructions to personnel: Web: http://.alcatel-lucent.com
Documentation If you have questions or comments about this documentation, please : [email protected]
44
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
1 — Safety awareness
1.1 — Safety EMC-EMF-ESD norms and equipment labeling This section describes the equipment labeling and the norms mandatory or suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment. •
Safety rules
•
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms)
•
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
•
Cautions to avoid equipment damage
1.2 — Safety rules 1.2.1 — General rules Before you perform any installation, turn-on, tests or operation and maintenance operations, carefully read the related sections of this manual, specifically: •
Hardware Installation
•
Commissioning
•
Maintenance and Upgrade
1.2.1.1 — Observe safety rules When equipment is operating, do not access the inside of the equipment parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
45
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command
If access is required to the equipment parts when it is operating, only service personnel, where service personnel or technical assistance is meant: •
“personnel which has adequate technical knowledge and experience necessary to be aware of the danger that may occur when performing an operation and of the necessary measurements to reduce the danger to a minimum for themselves and for others”.
•
The service personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
•
The service personnel is not allowed to repair, and therefore, the access to the parts that are not specified is not permitted.
•
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which provide access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong exclusively to the service personnel.
For the cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, do not use any inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings, inscriptions, or other labels. It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth. The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety; for example, do not expose persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged. When the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER. To cut off power, switch off the power supply units and cut off the power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame). The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and statement:
1.3 — Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command Follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
46
•
Dangerous electrical voltages
•
Risks of explosions
•
Moving mechanical parts
•
Equipment connection to earth
•
Heat-radiating mechanical parts
•
Microwave radiations (EMF norms) 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command
•
Harmful optical signals
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed. The symbols presented in following paragraphs are all the possible symbols that could be present on Alcatel-Lucent equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this handbook refers to.
1.3.1 — Dangerous electrical voltages 1.3.1.1 — Labeling: The warning label in Figure 1.1 is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc). Figure 1.1 — Dangerous voltage
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label in Figure 1.2 states that the equipment must be grounded before you connect it to the power supply voltage; for example: Figure 1.2 — Ground protection warning
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
47
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command
1.3.1.2 — Safety instructions: Danger: Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where D.C. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules: • Personal injury can be caused by -48VDC. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body. • Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, DC circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
1.3.2 — Risks of explosions 1.3.2.1 — Labeling: This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signaled by the label in Figure 1.3: Figure 1.3 — Risk of explosion
1.3.2.2 — Safety instructions: Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gases to down flow (battery-emitted hydrogen). A 417-IEC-5641 Norm. compliant label, as shown in Figure 1.4, is affixed next to it indicating that the openings must not be covered up.
48
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command Figure 1.4 — Openings must be covered
1.3.3 — Moving mechanical parts 1.3.3.1 — Labeling: The warning label in Figure 1.5 is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts: Figure 1.5 — Moving mechanical parts
1.3.3.2 — Safety instructions: Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been stopped.
1.3.4 — Equipment connection to earth 1.3.4.1 — Labeling: Terminals for equipment connection to earth, to be done according to international safety standards, are pointed out by the symbol in Figure 1.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
49
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command Figure 1.6 — Equipment connection to earth
1.3.4.2 — Safety instructions: The position of earth connection terminals is specified in the Hardware Installation section.
1.3.5 — Heat-radiating mechanical parts 1.3.5.1 — Labeling: The presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the warning label in Figure 1.7 in compliance with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041: Figure 1.7 — Heat-radiating mechanical parts
1.3.5.2 — Safety instructions: Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where heat-radiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule: Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
50
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Labels indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command
1.3.6 — Microwave radiations (EMF norms) Equipment emitting RF power (Reminder from site preparation procedure): The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation if more restrictive.
1.3.6.1 — Safety instructions: The following rules should be strictly applied by the customer: •
Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries, if any, for the general public.
•
Compliance RF boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field exposure must be marked.
•
Workers should be allowed to switch-off the power if they have to operate inside compliance boundaries.
•
Assure good cable connection.
•
Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public access (if possible the cylinder delimiting the compliance boundaries, if any, or the cylinder corresponding to the transmission area directly in front of antenna with the same diameter as the antenna, more than 2 meters high).
•
Install the antenna as far as possible from other existing equipment emitting RF power.
Remind persons standing in front of the 9500 MPR antenna may cause traffic shutdown. Place the warning sticker, as shown in Figure 1.8, as follows: Figure 1.8 — EMF emission warning
•
On the site when applicable (when people can cross the compliance boundaries and/ or the transmission area of the antenna; for example, roof top installation): Warning label “Do not stand on the antenna axis”
•
On the mast (front side): EMF emission warning sign (yellow and black) to be placed at bottom of antenna, visible by someone moving in front of the antenna (roof top installation)
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
51
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms)
•
On the antenna (rear side): EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna
Figure 1.9 — Compliance boundaries for 9500 MPR-A transceivers with 1ft (30 cm) antenna
1.4 — Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms) The equipment's EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out, such as cable termination or grounding, and on the operating conditions (such as, equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic units, presence of dummy covers). Before you perform any installation, turn-on, tests & operation, and maintenance operations, carefully read the related sections of this manual. The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this manual by the symbol and term: Figure 1.10 — EMC norms
1.
52
EMC general norms - installation •
All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use only cables and connectors suggested in this manual or in the relevant Plant Documentation, or those specified in the Customer's “Installation Norms” (or similar documents)
•
Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
•
Install filters outside the equipment as required
•
Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with correct diameter and impedance
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms)
2.
3.
•
Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before having cleaned and degrease it.
•
Before you insert the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces (such as springs and connection points).
•
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
•
To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
EMC general norms - turn-on, tests & operation •
Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility
•
Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields correctly positioned (such as dummy covers and ESD connector protections).
•
To correctly use EMC compatible equipment, follow the provided information.
EMC general norms - maintenance •
Before you insert the shielded unit, which replaces the faulty or modified unit, clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces (such as springs and connection points).
•
Clean the dummy covers of the spare units.
•
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
1.4.1 — Cables: The following safety requirements apply to the cable connections for intra-building ports: •
To comply with the GR-1089-CORE requirements for electromagnetic compatibility and safety, all intra-building ports are specified for use with shielded and grounded at both ends.
•
The intra-building ports of the equipment or sub-assembly are suitable for connection to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building ports of the equipment or sub-assembly must not be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
Warning: 9500 MPR equipment must be connected to surge suppressors that meet the power surge requirements of GR-1089-CORE. Non-compliant surge suppressors may not have the required secondary surge protection or current limiting function during specific, valid operating states. Connecting 9500 MPR equipment to non-compliant surge suppressors could result in damage to 9500 MPR equipment.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
53
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
1.5 — Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges Before you remove the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors, or other equipment, observe the stated precautionary measures. Ensure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after terminating the maintenance and monitoring operations. Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, therefore, the warning labels in Figure 1.11 have been affixed, Figure 1.11 — Electrostatic sensitive
Observe the stated precautionary measures when touching the electronic parts during the installation/maintenance phases. Workers are supplied with anti-static protection devices consisting of an elasticized band worn around the wrist and a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack. See Figure 1.13.
1.6 — Cautions to avoid equipment damage 1.6.1 — Electrostatic-sensitivity An Electrostatic-Sensitive Device (ESD) can withstand voltage spikes of only 10 to 100 volts and can be damaged or effectively destroyed by a discharge that might go unnoticed by a technician. Some devices have built-in protection. However, because this protection is effective only against the lower levels of electrostatic charges, a false sense of security often prevails. Warning: Common plastic, white foam, cellophane, and masking adhesive tapes must not come in with ESDs or their packaging.
54
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Cautions to avoid equipment damage
Common plastics (synthetic insulating materials), clothing, and paper or cardboard are the most common sources of static charges. Observe special precautions when the ESD sign is displayed. See Figure 1.12. Figure 1.12 — Electrostatic-sensitive sign
The following items are examples of ESDs: •
MOS (Metal Oxide Semiconductor) capacitors, transistors, Integrated Circuits (ICs)
•
CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) transistors, ICs
•
JFET (Junction Field Effect Transistors)
•
IGFET (Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistors)
1.6.1.1 — Handling cards Although the risk of damage to an ESD is reduced considerably after it is assembled into a circuit designed to protect sensitive components, take the following precautions to reduce static charges to harmless levels: •
Handle all cards as ESDs unless they are known not to contain electrostatic-sensitive parts.
•
Wear wrist ground strap, connected to grounded coiled cord before and while touching or handling cards containing ESS devices. See Figure 1.13 for an illustration of the wrist strap with cord. The wrist strap (PN 1AD 01247 0001) is an elasticized band connected to the coiled cord connected to the rack frame ground.
•
Store (even temporarily), pack, and ship cards in antistatic bags or containers.
•
Do not handle printed circuit board or components unnecessarily. Use plastic handle.
•
Do not use synthetic bristled brushes or acid brushes to clean cards.
•
Handle failed cards with same precautions as good cards.
ESD components are protected when correctly packaged in conductive or antistatic packaging. Acceptable packaging is marked as either conductive or antistatic.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
55
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Fan, equipment rack, and equipment cabinet precautions Figure 1.13 — Electrostatic protection kit
1.6.2 — Screw fixing In normal operation conditions, all screws (such as for unit box closing and cable fixing) must be always tightened to avoid item detachment and to ensure the equipment EMI-EMC performance. •
•
The screw tightening torque must be: •
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) ±10%
•
2.4317 in lb. (0.2026 ft lb.) ±10%
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
1.6.2.1 — MSS-ODU cable disconnection / connection To avoid equipment damage, always unplug the card first before you disconnect the MSSODU cable (at MSS or ODU side).
1.7 — Fan, equipment rack, and equipment cabinet precautions When installing the equipment observe the following:
56
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Electrical precautions
Danger: • Keep your fingers away from the rotating fan blades. Pull the fan-tray card by the thumbscrews only and wait for the fan blades to stop spinning before you attempt to remove the FAN card completely from the MSS-4/8 shelf. • The 9500 MPR may require two people to , align, and attach it to an equipment rack. To prevent equipment damage or personal injury, make sure you have enough help. • To prevent personal injury and equipment damage due to unbalanced loading of the equipment rack or cabinet, make sure the equipment rack or cabinet is correctly secured to the floor, ceiling, or other rigid structure before mounting the 9500 MPR in it. For approved methods of securing the equipment rack, read the equipment-rack installation instructions or the equipment-rack manufacturer.
1.8 — Electrical precautions Take appropriate safety precautions when you perform procedures on electrical equipment. Hazardous electrical potentials are present when system power is on. Some procedures in this manual require working with small conductive objects, such as screwdrivers, fuses, washers, screws, and nuts. When working on a shelf at the top of an equipment rack, a dropped object that falls into a lower shelf can cause physical damage and electrical short circuits. To prevent this, place a piece of paper or other cover over the lower shelf to catch fallen objects. Remove the paper or other cover when work is complete.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
57
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Harmful optical signals
Danger: Remain aware of the following: • Install the 9500 MPR in a restricted-access area only. Entrance to a restricted-access area is intended for qualified or trained personnel and access to it is controlled by a locked barrier. • The MSS-8 shelf does not contain main overcurrent protection devices. The must provide circuit breakers or fuses and disconnects between the power source and the 9500 MPR. Each power feed from a source (-48 V dc and Return) requires a dc-rated fast-trip circuit breaker or fuse and disconnect. Circuit breakers or fuses must meet applicable local and national electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application. Circuit breaker or fuse size is dependent upon site configuration. Refer to site engineering documentation for the correct Circuit breaker or fuse size. • The MPT-HL shelf does not contain main overcurrent protection devices. The must provide circuit breakers or fuses and disconnects between the power source and the 9500 MPR. Each power feed from a source (+ 24 V dc or- 48V dc and Return) requires a dcrated fast-trip circuit breaker or fuse and disconnect. Circuit breakers or fuses must meet applicable local and national electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended application. Circuit breaker or fuse size is dependent upon site configuration. See the site engineering documentation for the correct Circuit breaker or fuse size. • Make sure you connect the node to a + 24 V dc or - 48V dc source that is electrically isolated from the ac source and is reliably connected to earth ground. • For personal safety, make sure you connect and secure the installation site’s frameground (earth ground) wire to the frame-ground terminal on the 9500 MPR before you connect any other wires to the node. • A dc-power source provides high energy, which can cause serious injury or equipment damage. Only Alcatel-Lucent qualified personnel should connect the dc power to the 9500 MPR To prevent serious injury or equipment damage, make sure the power source cables are de-energized before you handle or connect them to the node.
1.9 — Harmful optical signals 1.9.1 — Laser precautions The label in Figure 1.14 is applied when the equipment contains Class 1 laser components according to IEC 60825-1 (par. 5). Figure 1.14 — Class 1 laser
58
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Harmful optical signals
The laser source is placed in the optional SFP plug-in, which is installed in the Core-E card, P8ETH card, and EASv2 card. The laser source is placed in the left side of the SFP plug-in. that laser labels on equipment state that the system conforms to all applicable standards of 21 CFR 1040.10. If there are no danger labels, call the Alcatel-Lucent Technical Center (TSC). The invisible infrared radiation emitted by the fiber-optic transmitter can cause eye damage. Observe local office procedures and the following dangers: Danger: • The use of controls and/or adjustments, or the performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous infrared radiation exposure. • Laser infrared radiation is not in the visible spectrum; therefore, it is not visible to the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen, laser radiation may be present. • Never look directly into an unterminated fiber-optic connector unless it is absolutely known that no optical power is being emitted by the connector. • Never look into a broken optical fiber cable unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. • Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable, or connector unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present in the fiber. Laser radiation can come from a fiber-optic transmitter, an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), or other optical test equipment. • Never look directly into an unterminated optical connector or cable with a magnifier/ microscope unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is being emitted from the connector or cable. A magnifier or microscope greatly increases the laser radiation hazard to the eyes. • This system normally operates as a Class I Laser Product (no hazard). However, during servicing operations, when optical connectors are being connected, disconnected, or handled without dust covers, it is possible to be exposed to Class IIIb laser radiation, which can cause eye damage. • Everyone within a 10 ft (3 m) radius of an unterminated optical fiber or connector that is connected to a powered transmitter must wear laser safety goggles or eye shields.
Laser safety goggles or eye shields are not required if the following work rules are strictly followed: 1.
Always remove electrical power from fiber-optic transmitters before disconnecting fiber-optic connectors in the path between the transmitter and the receiver.
2.
Never connect an unterminated optical cable to a fiber-optic transmitter. Always connect fiber-optic cables to fiber-optic receivers, test sets, or some other termination first.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
59
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Harmful optical signals
60
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
High-level procedures
•
High-level procedure for E1/DS1 provisioning
•
High-level procedure for E1/DS1 deprovisioning
•
High-level procedure for DS3 provisioning
•
High-level procedure for DS3 deprovisioning
•
High-level procedure for Ethernet provisioning
•
High-level procedure for Ethernet deprovisioning
•
High-level procedure for Ethernet LAG provisioning
•
High-level procedure for SDH provisioning
•
High-level procedure for STM-1/OC-3 deprovisioning
•
High-level procedure for Ethernet Ring Protection management
•
High-level procedure for using Web Server
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
61
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
62
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
2 — High-level procedure for E1/DS1 provisioning
2.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the high-level procedure for provisioning E1/DS1 facilities and equipment.
2.2 — Procedure 1.
2.
3.
4.
Select action. a.
To provision E1/DS1 cross-connect to new E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 card, go to step 2.
b.
To provision E1/DS1 cross-connect to new E1/DS1 port, go to step 3.
c.
To provision E1/DS1 cross-connect to existing E1/DS1 port, go to step 4.
Provision E1/DS1 cross-connect to new E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 card on an MSS-4/ 8: a.
See Enable equipment to enable P32E1DS1 Card.
b.
See Provision equipment port to provision E1/DS1 ports.
c.
See Provision cross connections to provision E1/DS1 cross-connect.
Provision E1/DS1 cross-connect to new E1/DS1 port on an MSS-1/4/8: a.
See Provision equipment port to provision E1/DS1 ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections to provision E1/DS1 cross-connect.
Provision E1/DS1 cross-connect to existing E1/DS1 port on an MSS-1/4/8: see Provision cross connections.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
63
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
64
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
3 — High-level procedure for E1/DS1 deprovisioning
3.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the high-level procedure for deprovisioning E1/DS1 facilities and equipment.
3.2 — Procedure 1.
Disable performance monitoring on the equipment you need to deprovision.
2.
Select action. a.
To deprovision E1/DS1 cross-connect, go to step 3.
b.
To deprovision E1/DS1 port, go to step 4.
c.
To deprovision P32E1DS1 card, go to step 5.
3.
Deprovision E1/DS1 cross-connect on an MSS-1/4/8: see Deprovision cross connections.
4.
Deprovision E1/DS1 port on an MSS-1/4/8:
5.
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision E1/DS1 cross-connects associated with P32E1DS1 port.
b.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision E1/DS1 port.
Deprovision E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 card on an MSS-4/8: a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision E1/DS1 cross-connects associated with P32E1DS1 card.
b.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision E1/DS1 ports associated with P32E1DS1 card.
c.
See Disable equipment to disable P32E1DS1 card.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
65
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
66
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
4 — High-level procedure for DS3 provisioning
4.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning DS3 facilities and equipment.
4.2 — Procedure 1.
Select action. a.
To provision DS3 cross-connect to existing DS3 port, go to step 2.
b.
To provision DS3 cross-connect to new DS3 port, go to step 3.
c.
To provision DS3 cross-connect to new DS3 P2E3DS3 card, go to step 4.
2.
Provision DS3 cross-connect to existing DS3 port: see Provision cross connections.
3.
Provision DS3 cross-connect to new DS3 port:
4.
a.
See Provision equipment port to provision DS3 ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections to provision DS3 cross-connect.
Provision DS3 cross-connect to new DS3 P2E3DS3 card: a.
See Enable equipment to enable P2E3DS3 Card.
b.
See Provision equipment port to provision DS3 ports.
c.
See Provision cross connections to provision DS3 cross-connect.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
67
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
68
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
5 — High-level procedure for DS3 deprovisioning
5.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for deprovisioning DS3 facilities and equipment.
5.2 — Procedure 1.
Disable performance monitoring on the equipment you need to deprovision.
2.
Select action. a.
To deprovision DS3 cross-connect, go to step 3.
b.
To deprovision DS3 port, go to step 4.
c.
To deprovision DS3 P2E3DS3 card, go to step 5.
3.
Deprovision DS3 cross-connect: see Deprovision cross connections.
4.
Deprovision DS3 port:
5.
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision DS3 cross-connect associated with DS3 port.
b.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision DS3 port.
Deprovision DS3 P2E3DS3 card: a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision DS3 cross-connects associated with P2E3DS3 card.
b.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision DS3 ports associated with P2E3DS3 card.
c.
See Disable equipment to disable P2E3DS3 card.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
69
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
70
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
6 — High-level procedure for Ethernet provisioning
6.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning Ethernet facilities and equipment.
6.2 — Procedure 1.
2.
Select action. a.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to existing Core Ethernet port, go to step 2.
b.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Core Ethernet port, go to step 3.
c.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Core SFP equipment port, go to step 4.
d.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new spare Core-E card, go to step 5.
e.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to existing P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port, go to step 6.
f.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port, go to step 7.
g.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment port, go to step 8.
h.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new P8ETH or EASv2 card, go to step 9.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to existing Core-E Ethernet port: a.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on Core-E electrical Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
71
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
72
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Core Ethernet port: a.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on Core electrical Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision Core Ethernet port.
c.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Core SFP equipment port: a.
See Provision equipment port to provision Core SFP equipment port.
b.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on Core SFP Ethernet port.
c.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision Core Ethernet port.
d.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new spare Core card: a.
See Enable equipment to enable spare Core Card.
b.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on spare Core electrical Ethernet ports.
c.
See Provision equipment port to provision Core SFP equipment port.
d.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on spare Core SFP Ethernet port.
e.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision Core Ethernet port.
f.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to existing P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port: a.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on P8ETH or EASv2 electrical Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port: a.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on P8ETH or EASv2 electrical Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port.
c.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment port: a.
See Provision equipment port to provision P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment port.
b.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on P8ETH or EASv2 SFP Ethernet port.
c.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure d. 9.
10.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new P8ETH or EASv2 card: a.
See Enable equipment to enable P8ETH or EASv2 Card.
b.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on P8ETH or EASv2 electrical Ethernet port.
c.
See Provision equipment port to provision P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment port.
d.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on P8ETH or EASv2 SFP Ethernet ports.
e.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port.
f.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
ister EFM OAM: a.
See Configure EFM OAM to configure EFM OAM.
b.
See OAM Remote Loopback to configure OAM Remote loopbacks.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
73
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
74
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
7 — High-level procedure for Ethernet deprovisioning
7.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning Ethernet facilities and equipment.
7.2 — Procedure 1.
Disable performance monitoring on the equipment you need to deprovision.
2.
Select action. a.
To deprovision Ethernet cross-connect from Core-E Ethernet port, go to step 3.
b.
To deprovision Core-E Ethernet port, go to step 4.
c.
To deprovision Core-E SFP equipment port, go to step 5.
d.
To deprovision spare Core-E card, go to step 6.
e.
To deprovision Ethernet cross-connect from P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port, go to step 7.
f.
To deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port, go to step 8.
g.
To deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment port, go to step 9.
h.
To deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 card, go to step 10.
3.
Deprovision Ethernet cross-connect from Core-E Ethernet port: see Deprovision cross connections.
4.
Deprovision Core-E Ethernet port:
5.
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision Ethernet cross-connects associated with Core-E Ethernet port.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to disable Core-E Ethernet port.
Deprovision Core-E SFP equipment port:
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
75
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
6.
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision Ethernet cross-connects associated with Core-E Ethernet port.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to disable Core-E Ethernet port.
c.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision Core-E SFP equipment port.
Deprovision spare Core-E card: a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision Ethernet cross-connects associated with Core-E Ethernet port.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to disable Core-E Ethernet ports associated with Core-E card.
c.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision Core-E SFP equipment port.
d.
See Disable equipment to disable spare Core-E Card.
7.
Deprovision Ethernet cross-connect from P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port: see Deprovision cross connections.
8.
Deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port:
9.
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision Ethernet cross-connects associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to disable P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port.
Deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment port: a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision Ethernet cross-connects associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet ports associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Card.
c.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment ports associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Card.
10. Deprovision P8ETH or EASv2 card:
76
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision Ethernet cross-connects associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to disable Ethernet ports associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Card.
c.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision SFP equipment ports associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Card.
d.
See Disable equipment to disable P8ETH or EASv2 card.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
8 — High-level procedure for Ethernet LAG provisioning
8.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning Ethernet LAG facilities and equipment.
8.2 — Procedure 1.
2.
3.
4.
Select action. a.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to existing Ethernet LAG port, go to step 2.
b.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Ethernet LAG port, go to step 3.
c.
To provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Ethernet LAG port, go to step 4.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to existing Ethernet LAG port: a.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on Core-E Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet cross-connect.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Ethernet LAG port: a.
See Provision Ethernet ports to Core-E Ethernet ports are provisioned with desired port parameters.
b.
See ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to provision new Ethernet LAG port.
c.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on new Ethernet LAG port.
d.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet Cross-Connection to new Ethernet LAG port.
Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Ethernet LAG ports:
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
77
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
78
a.
See Provision equipment port to provision Core-E equipment ports.
b.
See Provision Ethernet ports to provision Core-E Ethernet ports.
c.
See ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to provision new Ethernet LAG port.
d.
See Provision port segregation/connectivity to /provision port segregation on new Ethernet LAG port.
e.
See Provision cross connections to provision Ethernet Cross-Connection) to new Ethernet LAG port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
9 — High-level procedure for SDH provisioning
9.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning SDH facilities and equipment.
9.2 — Procedure 1.
Select action. a.
To provision cross-connect to existing SDH port, go to step 2.
b.
To provision cross-connect to new SDH port, go to step 3.
c.
To provision cross-connect to new SDH card, go to step 4.
2.
Provision cross-connect to existing SDH port: see Provision cross connections.
3.
Provision cross-connect to new SDH port:
4.
a.
See Provision equipment port to provision SDH ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections to provision SDH to radio cross-connect.
Provision cross-connect to new SDH card: a.
See Enable equipment to enable SDH Card.
b.
See Provision equipment port to provision SDH ports.
c.
See Provision cross connections to provision SDH to radio cross-connect.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
79
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
80
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
10 — High-level procedure for STM-1/OC3 deprovisioning
10.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for deprovisioning STM-1/OC-3 facilities and equipment.
10.2 — Procedure 1.
Disable performance monitoring on the equipment you need to deprovision.
2.
Select action. a.
To deprovision SDH to radio cross-connect, go to step 3.
b.
To deprovision SDHACC port, go to step 4.
c.
To deprovision SDHACC card, go to step 5.
3.
Deprovision SDH cross-connect: see Deprovision cross connections.
4.
Deprovision STM-1/OC-3 SDHACC port:
5.
a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision SDH cross-connects associated with STM-1/OC-3 SDHACC port.
b.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision STM-1/OC-3 SDHACC port.
Deprovision SDHACC card: a.
See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision SDH cross-connects associated with SDHACC card.
b.
See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision STM-1/OC-3 SDHACC ports associated with SDHACC card.
c.
See Disable equipment to disable SDHACC card.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
81
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
82
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
11 — High-level procedure for Ethernet Ring Protection management
11.1 — Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for managing Ethernet Rings.
11.2 — Procedure 1.
Select action. a.
To create an Ethernet Ring, go to step 2.
b.
To create a Fiber Microwave Protection Ring, go to step 3.
c.
To modify or delete an Ethernet Ring topology, go to step 4.
d.
To provision Ring cross-connections, go to step 5.
e.
To upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software, go to step 6.
2.
Create an Ethernet Ring: see Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP).
3.
Create a Fiber Microwave Ring: see Provision Fiber Microwave Protection.
4.
Modify or delete an Ethernet Ring topology: see ister Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP).
5.
Provision Ring cross-connections:
6.
a.
See Provision cross connections to provision cross-connections, including Ring cross-connections when the Ring does not contain Ethernet ports.
b.
See Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring to provision Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber-Ethernet Ring.
c.
See Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool to provision Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber-Ethernet Ring using the aided cross-connection tool.
Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software: see Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
83
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
84
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
12 — High-level procedure for using Web Server
12.1 — Purpose Logging in to an NE with a Core-E card in use from a web browser opens Web Server. Logging in from an NE with a CorEvo card opens WebCT. This chapter provides a high-level procedure for performing operations using Web Server. For information about WebCT, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR WebCT Manual.
12.2 — Procedure 1.
2.
Select action. a.
To to Web Server, go to step 2.
b.
To apply a configuration file to the NE, go to step 4.
c.
To configuration information, go to step 5.
d.
To view alarms, go to step 6.
e.
To ister DH settings, go to step 7.
f.
To view license information, go to step 8.
g.
To manage community strings, go to step 9.
h.
To manage SNMP version, go to step 10.
i.
To perform debug operations, go to step 11.
j.
To retrieve RSL information, go to step 12.
k.
To perform an MPT or EAS type conversion, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual.
l.
To perform an MPT or EAS type conversion, see the Alcatel-Lucent Core-E to CorEvo Upgrade Procedure document.
m.
To manage a Tx Diversity Antenna, go to step 13.
to the Web Server: see to and out of system.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
85
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Configuration menu 3.
ister date and time: see ister system date and time.
4.
Apply a configuration file to the NE: see Apply a configuration using the Web Server.
5.
configuration information: see View NE Inventory data.
Alarms menu 6.
View alarms: see View alarms.
DH menu 7.
ister DH settings: see ister system settings.
istration menu 8.
View license information: see ister software license to view RMU serial number and license string information.
9.
Manage community strings: see ister community string.
10. View and set SNMP version information: see ister system settings. 11. Perform debug operations: see Perform debug functions using the Web Server. 12. Retrieve RSL information: see Retrieve RSL information using the Web Server. 13. Manage Tx Diversity Antenna: see Perform Tx Diversity Antenna operations.
86
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
System istration
•
to and out of system
•
ister community string
•
ister external alarm points on an Auxiliary card
•
ister external alarm points on an MSS-1 or Enhanced Fan card
•
ister In-Band TMN VLAN port
•
ister network configuration
•
ister QoS configuration
•
ister software license
•
ister system date and time
•
ister system settings
•
ister VLAN configuration
•
Local access control management
•
MIB database management (backup and restore)
•
Use the Ethernet Features Shell
•
Perform a software reset
•
Configure EFM OAM
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
87
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
88
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
13 — to and out of system
13.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedures to establish a session with the network element (NE) and to and to log out a specific to the 9500 MPR. Additionally This chapter provides the instructions to and log out of a specific 9500 MPR NE using a web browser.
13.2 — Prerequisite To to the system, the must satisfy the following requirements: •
valid name and current
•
9500 MPR CT - craft terminal (CT) software must be installed on the PC
•
IP address of the NE to to the system or be locally connected to a TMN port or the Local Management Port of the Core unit in the MSS
Note: In case of connection to Local Management Port and DH Server functionality enabled on NE, to access the NE the PC must be configured to Get automatically an IP address, because NE works as a DH Server with default IP address 10.0.1.2.
13.3 — Overview The 9500 MPR provides for a craft terminal suite (TCO suite), which contains WebEML, NEtO Servers Manager, NEtO, JUSM function, allowing NE management through a web-enabled PC. The 9500 MPR also provides for a web browser based interface. The NE is accessed using the Network Element Overview (NEtO) application and a web browser. If connecting to the NE using a static IP address, the must know the following: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
89
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
•
IP address reserved for the PC in the radio IP addressing scheme
•
netmask
•
default Gateway
The software version of the 9500 MPR NE must match the software version of the NEtO/ JUSM/CT. If JUSM/CT is logged into an NE with a different software version, the NE/ NEtO/JUSM/CT behavior may not function as expected. The NEtO tool determines the software version of the NE logging in to and will open the correct version of JUSM when available. The NEtO tool may be used to determine the software version of a specific NE in the NE description area. Upon launching the TCO suite for the first time of the session, the TCO suite first launches the NEtO Servers Manager and then the NEtO application. For detailed information regarding , see ister profiles for definitions of s, profiles and responsibilities. For detailed information to configure a PC to connect to an NE, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Software Installation and NE Upgrade Manual. The Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual may also be used as reference. Note: Graphics in this chapter may not match the current release.
90
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
13.4 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To using JUSM
•
To log out of JUSM
•
To to Web Server
•
To log out of Web Server
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
91
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To using JUSM Note: If the software version of the 9500 MPR NE does not match one of the installed software versions of the NEtO/JUSM/CT, the may fail. This failure manifests in the following three failure modes: • After clicking OK on the NEtO NE info area, a warning message displays, ‘Start supervision failed. NE’s type or release is not ed.’ • After entering the name and , an error message displays, ‘SW license not ed: JUSM will be closed.’ • After entering the name and , the progress window hangs up at approximately 40% completed.
1.
2.
Is NEtO currently running? a.
If no, go to step 5.
b.
If yes, go to step 6.
Double-click on the WebEML icon on the desktop to launch NEtO. See Figure 13.1. Figure 13.1 — WebEML icon
The NEtO Servers Manager window opens. See Figure 13.2. Figure 13.2 — NEtO Servers Manager window
Then the NEtO window opens. See Figure 13.3.
92
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.3 — NEtO overview window
3.
From the NEtO window, enter the NE IP Address or DNS name
4.
Click OK.
Note: When logging in to an NE running software version R2.2.x and earlier, the behavior is slightly different. See the documentation for the release of the NE software version for the correct sequence.
The window opens. See Figure 13.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
93
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.4 — NEtO window
5.
In the window, enter Name “name” and “”. Click . Supervision with the NE starts.
6.
Click on the Show button to launch radio application software. An acknowledgment window opens; see Figure 13.5. Figure 13.5 — Acknowledgment of authorization
7.
Click on the Accept button. JUSM 9500 MPR application launches. See Figure 13.6 for an example connected to an MSS-8 shelf. See Figure 13.7 for an example connected to an MSS-4 shelf. See Figure 13.8 for an example connected to an MSS-1 shelf. See Figure 13.9 for an example connected to an MSS-O shelf.
94
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.6 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen MSS-8 shelf
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
95
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.7 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen MSS-4 shelf
96
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.8 — JUSM 9500 MPR main screen MSS-1 shelf
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
97
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.9 — JUSM 9500 MPR main screen MSS-O shelf
To log out of JUSM 1.
In the upper right hand corner of the JUSM window, select the “X”. See Figure 13.10. Figure 13.10 — Close JUSM 9500 MPR main screen
The confirm request window opens. 2.
Click Yes. The JUSM window closes.
3.
98
To close the NEtO application, click Exit. See Figure 13.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The confirm request window opens. 4.
Click Yes. The NEtO window closes. If both FTP/SFTP servers are disabled and no other RMI Registry components are running, the NEtO Servers Manager window will close automatically. If the NEtO Servers Manager detects either FTP/SFTP server enabled or other RMI Registry components running the NEtO server Manager will remain open.
5.
To close NEtO Servers Manager application, in the upper right hand corner of the NEtO Servers Manager window, select the “X”. See Figure 13.11. Figure 13.11 — Close NEtO Servers Manager window
The NEtO Servers Manager close window opens. 6.
Click Yes. The NEtO Servers Manager window closes.
To to Web Server Note: Web Server is available when a Core-E card is in use. When a CorEvo card is in use, logging in from a web browser opens WebCT. For more information about WebCT, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR WebCT Manual.
1.
In a web browser, enter the radio IP address or the URL (shown below). http://radio IP Address The 9500 MPR Web Server webpage appears. See Figure 13.12.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
99
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.12 — 9500 MPR web interface webpage
2.
Enter the NE name and (same as the name and entered on WebEML). The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window. See Figure 13.13.
100
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 13.13 — Web server main menu
To log out of Web Server 1.
In the lower left-hand corner of the Main Menu pane, select . See Figure 13.13.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
101
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
102
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
14 — ister community string
14.1 — Purpose This chapter provides instructions to provision community strings and to a NE with the community string provisioned for the 9500 MPR.
14.2 — Overview The Community String (CS) acts like a to control access to an NE. It defines what community of people can access the NE. Two community strings are ed: •
•
Get CS •
Default value: public
•
Both Read and Read-Write objects operate in Read mode only
Set CS •
Default value: private
•
Both Read and Read-Write objects operate in their respective modes
Community Strings must meet the following complexity parameters: •
Minimum Length - CS must be at least six characters in length
•
Maximum Length - CS shall not exceed ten characters in length
•
Composition - CS must be composed alphanumeric (Upper and lower case) characters only
NEtO only s the Set CS Community String.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
103
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
14.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To set the community string using the Web Server
•
To set the community string using the NEtO
To set the community string using the Web Server 1.
to the NE using a web browser. See to and out of system for detailed instructions. The 9500MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
From the Main Menu pane, select Community String. The Community Strings Setting view displays. See Figure 14.1. Figure 14.1 — Web Server Community Strings setting view
3.
In the Read-Only Community String field, enter the new value (public is the default value).
4.
In the Read-Write Community String field, enter the new value (private is the default value).
Caution: Provisioning new Community Strings will cause a loss of communication on all NEtO sessions currently active.
5.
Click Apply.
To set the community string using the NEtO 1.
104
Launch NEtO. See to and out of system for detailed instructions.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures NEtO window opens. From the NEtO Overview window, select Community String request icon in the upper right-hand corner. See Figure 14.2. Figure 14.2 — NEtO Community Strings Request icon
The Community Strings Request window displays. See Figure 14.3. Figure 14.3 — NEtO Community Strings Request window
2.
In the Insert NE read-write Community String field, enter the new value.
3.
Click OK.
4.
Close NEtO.
5.
Launch new NEtO session.
6.
to NE. NEtO uses community string value.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
105
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
106
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
15 — ister external alarm points on an Auxiliary card
15.1 — Purpose The procedure s in this chapter provide instructions to ister the external alarm points ed by the Auxiliary card.
15.2 — Prerequisites The Auxiliary card must be enabled in MSS-4 slot 4 or MSS-8 slot 8 before the external alarm points can be provisioned.
15.3 — General The Auxiliary card s six external alarm inputs and seven external alarm outputs. Each external alarm input can be provisioned; alarm active low or active high, and label. Each external alarm output can be provisioned; alarm active low or active high, and label.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
107
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
15.4 — Procedures This chapter includes procedures for the following: •
To provision external alarm inputs
•
To provision external alarm outputs
•
To provision external alarm output state
To provision external alarm inputs 1.
Select MSS-4/AUX slot #4 or MSS-8/AUX slot #8 in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the MSS/AUX card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Double-click on the blue AUX Card. The AUX Main View window opens.
3.
Click the External Points tab.
4.
Click the Settings tab. See Figure 15.1. Figure 15.1 — External Alarm Input Setting tab
108
5.
Select I#[1-6] in the resource tree area.
6.
Select I#[1-6] in the resource tree area.
7.
In the Label field, enter the alarm input label.
8.
Select the External inputs Polarity radio button, Active Low or Active High.
9.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The External Points Resource List Table updates. See Figure 15.2. Figure 15.2 — External alarm inputs provisioned
10. Close the AUX Main View window. To provision external alarm outputs 1.
Select MSS-4/AUX slot #4 or MSS-8/AUX slot #8 in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the MSS/AUX card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Double-click on the blue AUX Card. The AUX Main View window opens.
3.
Click the External Points tab.
4.
Click the Settings tab. See Figure 15.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
109
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 15.3 — External Alarm Output setting tab
5.
Select O#[1-7] in the resource tree area.
6.
In the Label field, enter the alarm input label.
7.
Select the External output Polarity radio button, Active Low or Active High.
8.
Click Apply. The External Points Resource List Table updates. See Figure 15.4.
110
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 15.4 — External Alarm Outputs provisioned
9.
Close the AUX Main View window.
To provision external alarm output state 1.
Select MSS-4/AUX slot #4 or MSS-8/AUX slot #8 in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the MSS/AUX card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Double-click on the blue AUX Card. The AUX Main View window opens.
3.
Click the External Points tab.
4.
Click the Settings tab. See Figure 15.4.
5.
Select External Alarm Point to change alarm state in the resource tree area or Resource List Table.
6.
Select the External Output External State radio button, On or Off.
7.
Click Apply. The External Alarm Point state updates. See Figure 15.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
111
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 15.5 — External Alarm Output Provisioned ON
8.
112
Close the AUX Main View window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
16 — ister external alarm points on an MSS-1 or Enhanced Fan card
16.1 — Purpose The procedure in this chapter provides instructions to ister the external alarm points ed by the MSS-1 unit and the Enhanced Fan card.
16.2 — Prerequisites For MSS-1: The MSS-1 must be active before the external alarm points can be provisioned. For the Enhanced Fan card: The Enhanced Fan card must be enabled in MSS-8 slot 9 before the external alarm points can be provisioned.
16.3 — Overview The MSS-1 and Enhanced Fan card four external alarm inputs and three alarm outputs. Each external alarm input is provisionable; alarm active low or active high, and label. The alarm outputs do not require provisioning by the operator: they operate alarm LEDs on the shelf.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
113
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
16.4 — Procedure 1.
Select action.
2.
To Open MSS External Input Point main view for MSS-1, go to step 4.
3.
To Open MSS FANS Main View for MSS-8, go to step 6.
4.
Open MSS External Input Point main view for MSS-1 Select MSS/HK in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the Housekeeping inputs area in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-1 unit in the resource list area. The MSS External Input Point main view opens, see Figure 16.1.
5.
To Provision external alarm input, go to step 7.
6.
Open MSS FANS Main View for MSS-8 Select Slot #9 MSS/FANS in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the FAN card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area. The MSS A-FANS or E-FANS Main View opens. The view is the same as shown in Figure 16.1.
7.
Provision external alarm input From the MSS FANS main view or MSS External Input Point main view, click the Settings tab. See Figure 16.1.
8.
Select I#[11-14] in the resource tree area. Figure 16.1 — External Alarm Input Setting tab
114
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 9.
In the Label field, enter the alarm input label.
10. Select the External inputs Polarity radio button, Active Low or Active High. 11. Click Apply. 12. The External Points Resource List Table updates. See Figure 16.2. Figure 16.2 — External alarm inputs provisioned
13. Close the Main View window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
115
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
116
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
17 — ister In-Band TMN VLAN port
17.1 — Purpose This chapter provides instructions to enable, disable, and view In-band TMN VLAN port for the 9500 MPR.
17.2 — Overview The TMN In-Band feature allows the extension of the DCN over Ethernet interfaces used to carry traffic. TMN In-Band allows the to manage an 9500 MPR NE using general Ethernet port from a central location (NOC). In-band TMN messages can reach the 9500 MPR over general Ethernet ports. In-band TMN messages are ed on all enabled electrical Ethernet ports and all enabled optical Ethernet ports on the Core-E or CorEvo card. The DS and P values allow a priority to be set for TMN management packets to the Data Communications Network (DCN). Queue mapping for TMN management packets is performed outside the 9500 MPR. TMN packets inside the radio network are in a fixed high-priority queue. In-band TMN provisioning applies to all associated Ethernet ports, electrical and optical. TMN In-band, TMN VLAN port interface, and Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface should not be connected to a network at the same time. Each IPv4 In-band TMN Ethernet interface requires the following: •
•
Unique IP address and sub-network mask •
TMN In-Band #1 default IP address: 10.0.3.2.
•
TMN In-Band #1 default sub-network mask: 255.255.255.0.
•
TMN In-Band #2 default IP address: 10.0.4.2.
•
TMN In-Band #2 default sub-network mask: 255.255.255.0.
Uses the same MAC address as Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
117
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
•
Unique VLAN ID (2-4080).
•
DS value between 0 and 63. Default is 34.
•
P value between 0 and 7. Default is 7.
•
IP Routing Protocol: Static/OSPF •
When OSPF routing protocol is selected: OSPF Area Number must be provisioned.
•
OSPF Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning the In-band TMN Ethernet interface
In-band TMN Ethernet interface IP address must satisfy the following rules: •
IP address can be equal to the local IP address, but must be different from Port#4 TMN interface port IP address
•
IP address 0.0.0.0 is not ed
•
IP addresses 127.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255 are not ed
In-band TMN Ethernet interface sub-network mask must satisfy the following rules: •
Sub-network Mask 0.0.0.0 is not ed
•
Sub-network Mask 255.255.255.255 is not ed
•
Sub-network Mask assigned to the In-band TMN Ethernet interface must be different than the Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface
Each IPv6 In-band TMN Ethernet interface requires the following: •
Unique IP address with FE80::/64 as high-order bits •
TMN In-Band #1 default IP address: FEC0:0:0:3::1/64.
•
TMN In-Band #2 default IP address: FEC0:0:0:4::1/64.
•
Uses the same MAC address as Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface
•
Unique VLAN ID (2-4080).
•
IP Routing Protocol: Static/OSPFv3 •
When OSPFv3 routing protocol is selected: OSPFv3 Area Number must be provisioned.
•
OSPFv3 Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning the In-band TMN Ethernet interface
In-band TMN Ethernet interface IP address must satisfy the following rules:
118
•
IPv6 addresses having the Interface ID portion equal to all 0 are not allowed
•
IPv6 address::/128 (Unspecified address) is not allowed
•
IPv6 address::1/128 (Loopback Address) is not allowed
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
•
IPv6 addresses having FF00::/8 as high-order bits (Multicast addresses) are not allowed
•
IPv6 addresses having FE80::/10 as high-order bits (Link Local Addresses) are not allowed
The TMN In-Band networking interface IPv6 address must belong to a subnet number different than the ones associated with other TMN interfaces including the other TMN InBand interface (the subnet numbers resulting from applying the shortest prefix length must not be the same). Every time the TMN In-Band networking interface is enabled or its IPv6 Global Unicast address is modified, Duplicate Address Detection must be performed prior to asg it to the TMN interface. When a duplicate address is detected, an alarm is raised, one for each TMN In-Band networking interface. You need to change the IPv6 address to remove duplicates. IPv6 addresses FF02::1 (All nodes) and FF02::2 (All Routers) Multicast Group addresses must be ed by an enabled TMN In-Band networking interface. NDP (Neighbor Discovery Protocol) is used to perform Neighbor Address Resolution to retrieve MAC address-IPv6 address association over the VLAN. IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration is not performed over TMN In-Band networking interfaces. In-band TMN Ethernet interface is automatically assigned 802.1p priority 0 on egress traffic. Caution: Enabling and disabling the In-band TMN VLAN port requires an NE reboot. This NE reboot will affect all traffic carried by the system.
Note: An NE reboot occurs automatically when enabling and disabling the In-band TMN VLAN port.
Note: Updating In-band TMN VLAN port provisioning is not ed. To modify In-band TMN VLAN port provisioning the must first disable the port. Then enable the port with the new provisioning parameters. Doing this will affect traffic two times. Once when the port is disabled and once when the port is re-enabled.
For information regarding OSPF and Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface provisioning, refer to ister network configuration.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
119
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
17.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To view In-Band TMN VLAN port provisioning
•
To provision an In-Band TMN VLAN port
•
To disable an In-Band TMN VLAN port
To view In-Band TMN VLAN port provisioning 1.
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the CORE-Main card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area. Double-click on the blue CORE-Main Card. See Figure 17.1. Figure 17.1 — 9500 MPR Equipment tab: Core-E Card selected
The Ethernet Physical Interface Settings tab displays. 2.
Select TMN Interface tab.
3.
Select TMN In-Band#1/2.
4.
Select Settings tab. See Figure 17.2. In-band TMN provisioning is displayed.
120
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 17.2 — TMN In-band Settings tab
To provision an In-Band TMN VLAN port 1.
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the CORE-Main card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area. Double-click on the blue CORE-Main Card. See Figure 17.1. Ethernet Physical Interface Settings tab displays.
2.
Select TMN Interface tab.
3.
Select TMN In-Band#1/2.
4.
Select Settings tab. See Figure 17.2.
5.
Select the Working Mode Enabled check box.
6.
Enter the VLAN ID for the In-band TMN Ethernet interface in the VLAN ID field.
7.
Choose the DS value from the DS drop-down menu.
8.
Choose the P value from the P drop-down menu.
9.
Enter the IP address for the In-band TMN Ethernet interface in the IP address field.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
121
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 10. Enter Sub-Network Mask for the In-band TMN Ethernet interface in the IP Mask field (IPv4 mode) or Network Prefix size in the Prefix Length field (IPv6 mode). 11. From the IP Routing Protocol drop-down menu, Static Routing or OSPF. 12. If OSPF is selected, from the OSPF Area Number drop-down menu, select OSPF Area Number for the In-band TMN Ethernet interface. 13. Select all Ethernet ports which will be a member of TMN In-Band from the Associated Ethernet Ports field. 14. Click Apply. Configuration Update window displays. 15. Click OK. 16. In-band TMN Ethernet interface provisioning. See Figure 17.3. Figure 17.3 — TMN In-band Port Enabled
To disable an In-Band TMN VLAN port 1.
122
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the CORE-Main card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Double-click on the blue CORE-Main (Core-E) Card. See Figure 17.1. Ethernet Physical Interface Settings tab displays. 2.
Select TMN Interface tab.
3.
Select TMN In-Band#1/2.
4.
Select Settings tab. See Figure 17.2.
5.
Select Working Mode Enabled check-box (unchecked). The Inband TMN page displays. See Figure 17.3.
6.
Click Apply. Configuration Update window displays.
7.
Click OK. TMN Ethernet interface is disabled. See Figure 17.4. Figure 17.4 — TMN In-band Port Disabled
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
123
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
124
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
18 — ister network configuration
18.1 — Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to ister network configuration.
18.2 — Overview TMN Ethernet port provisioning requirements depend on how the Ethernet port 4 and MGMT (NMS) port on the Core-E or CorEvo card are to be used. The NMS port is normally reserved for craft terminal interface with the PC. The serial data interface with the PC for the craft terminal on the NMS port is default enabled with IPv4 address 10.0.1.2 and IPv6 address FEC0:0:0:1::1 and requires no special provisioning. For NMS port provisioning other than the default values, provision TMN Ethernet Interface. If Ethernet Port#4 is being used to interface external Ethernet equipment, then the Ethernet Physical Interface Port#4 must be enabled and provisioned and Port#4 TMN Ethernet Interface must be disabled. If Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface is used to connect to a larger TMN network and communicate with other equipment at the site, the following must be configured: •
Ethernet Physical Interface Port#4 must be disabled
•
Port#4 TMN Ethernet Interface must be enabled and provisioned
•
TMN Ethernet Interface must be enabled and provisioned
The TMN In-Band feature allows the extension of the DCN over Ethernet interfaces used to carry traffic. TMN In-Band allows the to manage an 9500 MPR NE using general Ethernet port from a central location (NOC). For information regarding TMN In-Band provisioning, see ister In-Band TMN VLAN port. To perform IPv6 pre-provisioning, go to Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
125
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
TMN traffic is assigned to QoS queue 6 which is a higher priority than Ethernet traffic, but lower than MEF8 (TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH) traffic. TMN bandwidth is not reserved, which allows traffic, up to the maximum capacity of the radio link when the TMN port is idle. TMN traffic must be considered when configuring CIR flows. When deploying external devices using the TMN channel, care must be taken to avoid using more bandwidth than is available on the radio link. It is recommended to use a Ethernet port to attach remote devices for monitoring instead of the TMN port. IP Provisioning is normally performed by the Internet Protocol (IP group). Before starting IP provisioning, the must know IP routing and have the following information available: •
IP Address
•
IP Mask
•
Method of IP routing to be used in network (Static versus OSPF)
•
If OSPF (Open Shortest Path First protocol) is the required routing method, the must know the number of the OSPF Area the radio is in.
•
TMN Ethernet Interface
•
Port#4 TMN Ethernet Interface
The 9500MPR s IPv6 addressing for the NE. An IPv4 or an IPv6 stack can be used for T/IP and to build the DCN. Applications running over the internal NE LAN, such as MAP and FTP, are always bound to the IPv4 stack. If the IPv6 stack has been activated, you will not be able to configure IPv4 parameters using the SNMP interface. Caution: Mixed configuration of IPv4 and IPv6 NEs is not ed. Before activating IPv6, ensure that all NEs in the network are IPv6 capable, that is, running R4.1.0 or higher software. A controlled activation is required; see local guidelines.
18.2.1 — OSPF area The system s up to four OSPF areas. OSPF Area “0” is the default area and is not provisionable. OSPF Areas 1 through 3 are provisionable. The following OSPF Area parameter are the default values for the system and are not provisionable: • 126
Priority: 1 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
•
Retransmit Interval: 5 sec
•
Hello Interval: 10 sec
•
Dead Interval: 40 sec
•
Poll Interval: 120 sec
•
Maximum MTU: 1500 (Broadcast), 1492 (PointToPoint)
If IPv6 is in use, OSPFv3 is used automatically. Note: When the 9500 MPR is used with other equipment, the OSPF interface parameters of the equipment must be the same as those of the related TMN interface on the 9500 MPR.
The 9500 MPR OSPF parameters are: •
Hello Interval: 10 seconds
•
Router Dead Interval: 40 seconds
•
Retransmit Interval: 5 seconds
•
Interface Transit Delay: 1 second
•
MTU: 1500 bytes
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
127
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
18.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To provision NE IP address
•
To ister TMN Ethernet interface
•
To ister Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface
•
To provision IP static routing in IPv4
•
To provision IP static routing in IPv6
•
To provision OSPF Area Configuration
•
To activate the IPv6 stack
•
To view IP routing information
To provision NE IP address 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration> Local Configuration. See Figure 18.1. Figure 18.1 — Local Configuration main menu bar path
The Local Configuration window opens. See Figure 18.2. Figure 18.2 — Local Configuration (IP Address) window
2. 128
Enter the IP address of the NE in the IP Address field. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 3.
Click Apply. Communication with the radio will be lost. The must to the radio using the IP address configured in step 2.
4.
Click Close.
To ister TMN Ethernet interface 1.
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the Main Core card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Double-click on the blue CORE-Main Card. See Figure 18.3. Figure 18.3 — 9500 MPR Equipment tab: Core-E card selected
CORE Main View Slot#1 displays. 3.
Select TMN Interface tab.
4.
Select TMN Ethernet in the resource tree area.
5.
Select Settings tab. See Figure 18.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
129
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 18.4 — TMN Ethernet interface: Settings tab
6.
7.
Select action. a.
To Provision TMN Ethernet interface, go to step 7.
b.
To Deprovision TMN Ethernet interface, go to step 14.
Provision TMN Ethernet interface See Figure 18.4 for the following steps: Select TMN Working Mode Enabled check box (checked).
8.
Enter TMN IP Address in IP Address field for the NMS interface (MGMT Port on Core card).
9.
Enter IP Mask or Netmask in IP Mask field.
10. Select IP Routing Protocol from drop-down menu: Static Routing or OSPF. 11. If the OSPF IP Routing Protocol is selected, from the OSPF Area Number drop-down menu, select OSPF Area Number (0 - 3).? 12. Click Apply. 13. Close CORE Main View window.
130
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 14. Deprovision TMN Ethernet interface See Figure 18.4 for the following steps: 15. Click Apply. 16. Close CORE Main View window. To ister Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface 1.
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the CORE-Main card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Double-click on the blue Core-Main Card. See Figure 18.3. CORE Main View Slot#1 displays.
3.
Select TMN Interface tab.
4.
Select Port#4 TMN Ethernet in the resource tree area.
5.
Select Settings tab. See Figure 18.5. Figure 18.5 — Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface: Settings tab
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
131
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 6.
7.
Select action. a.
To Provision Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface, go to step 7.
b.
To Deprovision Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface, go to step 12.
Provision Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface Select TMN Working Mode Enabled check box (checked).
8.
Enter IP Address for Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface.
9.
Enter IP Mask or Netmask.
10. Static or OSPF TMN interface routing? a.
For static routing, from the IP Routing Protocol drop-down menu, select Static Routing and click apply.
b.
For OSPF, perform the following: a.
From the IP Routing Protocol drop-down menu, select OSPF.
b.
From the OSPF Area Number drop-down menu, select OSPF Area Number (0 - 3).
c.
Click Apply.
11. Close the CORE Main View window. 12. Deprovision Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface Select TMN Working Mode Enabled check box (unchecked). If a static route exists on the interface, an “access denied” error message will display. The static routes must be removed before the interface can be deprovisioned. 13. Click Apply. 14. Close CORE Main View window. To provision IP static routing in IPv4 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration>IP Configuration> IP Static Routing Configuration. See Figure 18.6.
Figure 18.6 — IP Static Routing Configuration main menu bar path
132
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The IP Static Routing Configuration window opens. See Figure 18.7. Figure 18.7 — IP Static Routing Configuration window (IPv4)
2.
Select desired Host or Network Address Choice radio button: Host or Network.
3.
Which IP Static Routing Configuration was selected? a.
If Network, enter the IP Mask of the radio in the IP Mask text field..
b.
If Host, enter the IP Address of the radio in the IP Address text field
4.
Select desired Default Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice radio button: Default Gateway IP Address or Point To Point Interface Index.
5.
Which Default Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice was selected? a.
If Default Gateway IP Address, enter the Default Gateway IP Address in the Default Gateway IP Address text field.
b.
If Point To Point Interface Index, from the Interface Type drop-down menu, select Gateway.
6.
Click Create.
7.
Click Close.
To provision IP static routing in IPv6 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration>IP Configuration> IP Static Routing Configuration. See Figure 18.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
133
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
The IP Static Routing Configuration window opens. See Figure 18.8. Figure 18.8 — IP Static Routing Configuration window (IPv6)
3.
Select desired Host or Network Address Choice radio button: Host or Network.
4.
Which IP Static Routing Configuration was selected? a.
If Network, enter the Subnet prefix length of the radio in the Subnet prefix length text field.
b.
If Host, enter the IP Address of the radio in the IPv6 Address text field.
5.
Select desired Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice radio button: Gateway IPv6 Address or Point To Point Interface Index.
6.
Which Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice was selected? a.
If Default Gateway IP Address, enter the Gateway IP Address in the Gateway IPv6 Address text field.
b.
If Point To Point Interface Index, from the Point to Point Interface drop-down menu, select an interface Id.
7.
Click Create.
8.
Click Close.
To provision OSPF Area Configuration 134
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration>IP Configuration> OSPF Area Configuration. See Figure 18.9. Figure 18.9 — OSPF Area Configuration main menu bar path
The OSPF Area Configuration window opens. See Figure 18.10 and Figure 18.11. Figure 18.10 — OSPF Area Configuration window (IPv4)
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
135
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 18.11 — OSPFv3 Area Configuration window (IPv6)
2.
Select new check box (checked). A maximum of 3 areas can be created.
3.
Enter the OSPF Area Address in the OSPF Area Address text field.
4.
From the OSPF Area Stub Flag drop-down menu, select OSPF Area Stub Flag: True or False.
Note: When the 9500 MPR is used with other equipment, the OSPF interface parameters of the equipment must be the same as those of the related TMN interface on the 9500 MPR.
5.
Click Create.
6.
Click Apply.
7.
Click Close.
To activate the IPv6 stack 1.
2.
136
Select action. a.
To provide parameters for IPv6, perform Perform IPv6 preprovisioning. If you activate IPv6 on the NE without performing preprovisioning, default parameters will be applied.
b.
To activate the IPv6 stack, perform the following steps.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration>IP Configuration>Activate IPv6 stack. See Figure 18.12.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 18.12 — Activate IPv6 stack main menu bar path
A warning window opens. See Figure 18.13. Figure 18.13 — Activate IPv6 stack warning
3.
Click on the Yes button to complete the activation. The menu option changes to Activate IPv4 stack, to return to IPv4.
To view IP routing information 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration> Routing Information. See Figure 18.14. Figure 18.14 — Routing Information main menu bar path
The IP Routing Information window opens. See Figure 18.15. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
137
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 18.15 — IP Routing Information window
2.
138
Click Close.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
19 — ister QoS configuration
19.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to ister the QoS configuration using the craft terminal for the 9500 MPR.
19.2 — Overview The QoS Configuration tool allows the to customize the following QoS parameters: •
•
•
•
QoS Classification Criterion •
Disabled
•
IEEE 802.1p
•
DiffServ
QoS Priority Value to Internal Forwarding Class •
IEEE 802.1p Priority Code Point (P)
•
DiffServ Code Point (D)
Queue Scheduling Algorithm •
Deficit Weighted Round Robin (DWRR)
•
Strict Priority (SP)
Queue Size
The QoS Configuration tool allows the to view the following QoS parameters: •
Internal Forwarding Class to Queue Mapping
For detailed information on QoS configuration parameters, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual General System Description, Features, Ethernet, Quality of Service (QoS).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
139
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
19.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To launch the QoS Configuration tool
•
To provision the Queue Scheduling algorithm
•
To restore Queue Scheduling algorithm default values
•
To restore Saved Queue Scheduling algorithm values
•
To provision Queue Size
•
To restore Queue Size default values
•
To restore saved Queue Size values
•
To open the Qos Classification tool to ister QoS Classification
•
To provision QoS Classification Criterion
•
To provision 802.1p P to Internal Forwarding Class values
•
To provision DiffServ DS to Internal Forwarding Class Values
•
To restore 802.1p or DiffServ to Forwarding Class Default Values
•
To restore Saved Queue Size values
To launch the QoS Configuration tool 1.
Launch QoS Configuration tool from the craft terminal. Click the QoS Configuration Icon, see Figure 19.1, or from the main menu bar, select Configuration > QoS Configuration. Figure 19.1 — QoS Configuration icon
QoS Configuration tool opens. See Figure 19.2.
140
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.2 — QoS Configuration tool
To provision the Queue Scheduling algorithm 1.
Select Scheduler Configuration tab. See Figure 19.2.
2.
From the Mode column, select all Queues to change scheduling algorithm (DWRR or SP). See Figure 19.3.
Note: The background of modified parameters is shown in yellow.
3.
If Mode selection is DWRR, from the Weight column select queue weight (1 to 32). See Figure 19.3. Figure 19.3 — Provision Queue Scheduler algorithm
4.
Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. The Scheduler Configuration tab updates. See Figure 19.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
141
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.4 — Provisioned Queue Scheduler algorithm
b.
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Scheduling algorithm values.
To restore Queue Scheduling algorithm default values 1.
Click Defaults. See Figure 19.5.
Note: The background of modified parameters is shown in yellow.
Figure 19.5 — Restore Queue Scheduler algorithm default values
2.
Save changes to NE? a.
142
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. The Scheduler Configuration tab updates. See Figure 19.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.6 — Provisioned Queue Scheduler algorithm
To restore Saved Queue Scheduling algorithm values 1.
Click Restore. See Figure 19.5. Scheduler Configuration tab restores the saved values.
To provision Queue Size 1.
Select Queue Size Configuration tab. See Figure 19.7. Figure 19.7 — Queue Size Configuration Tab
2.
3.
Queue sizes to provision? a.
If individual queue sizes, go to step 3.
b.
If copy all queue sizes from one radio direction to another radio direction, go to step 7.
For the queue size to provision, double-click on the queue size cell to provision. See Figure 19.8. The queue size selected will display the provisioned queue size in bytes.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
143
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The background of modified parameters is shown in yellow.
4.
Update the queue size value in bytes (ed range: 2480 to 4034836 bytes). See Figure 19.8. Figure 19.8 — Provision Queue Size
5.
Repeat the two previous steps to provision additional queue size values.
6.
Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. Queue Size Configuration tab updates. See Figure 19.9. Figure 19.9 — Provisioned Queue Size
b. 7. 144
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Size values.
Select the Radio Direction to copy queue sizes from. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 8.
Click Copy.
9.
Select the Radio Direction to copy queue sizes to.
10. Click Paste. The queue sizes for radio direction are updated. See Figure 19.10. Figure 19.10 — Copied Radio Direction queue sizes
11. Repeat the two previous steps to provision additional radio direction queue sizes with the copied values. 12. Repeat steps 7 through 11 to provision additional radio direction with a different radio direction’s queue size values. 13. Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window.
b.
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Size values.
To restore Queue Size default values 1.
Click Defaults. See Figure 19.11.
Note: The background of modified parameters is shown in yellow.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
145
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.11 — Restore Queue Size default values
2.
Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. The Queue Size Configuration tab updates. See Figure 19.7.
b.
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Size values.
To restore saved Queue Size values 1.
Click Restore. See Figure 19.11. Queue Size Configuration tab restores the saved values. See Figure 19.7.
To open the Qos Classification tool to ister QoS Classification 1.
Select QoS Classification tab. See Figure 19.12. Figure 19.12 — QoS Classification Tab
To provision QoS Classification Criterion 1.
146
From the QoS Classification Criterion drop-down menu, select: Disabled, 802.1p, or DiffServ. See Figure 19.13. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.13 — Select QoS Classification Criterion
Note: The background of modified QoS Classification Criterion value is displayed in yellow.
2.
Click Apply. Apply Data to NE window displays.
3.
Click Yes. QoS Classification tab updates. See Figure 19.14. Figure 19.14 — Provisioned QoS Classification Criterion
To provision 802.1p P to Internal Forwarding Class values 1.
From the IEEE 802.1p to Forwarding Class Mapping pane, select new P to Forwarding Class value. See Figure 19.15.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
147
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.15 — Provision 802.1p P to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping
Note: The background of modified IEEE 802.1p P to Forwarding Class field is displayed in yellow.
2.
Repeat the previous step to provision additional IEEE 802.1p P to Forwarding Class Mapping.
3.
Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. The QoS Classification tab updates. See Figure 19.16.
Figure 19.16 — Provisioned 802.1p P to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping
b.
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Size values.
To provision DiffServ DS to Internal Forwarding Class Values 1.
148
From the DiffServ to Forwarding Class Mapping pane, select new DS to Forwarding Class value. See Figure 19.17.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 19.17 — Provision DiffServ DS to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping
Note: The background of modified DiffServ DS to Forwarding Class field is displayed in yellow.
2.
Repeat the previous step to provision additional DiffServ DS to Forwarding Class Mapping.
3.
Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. The QoS Classification tab updates. See Figure 19.18
Figure 19.18 — Provisioned DiffServ DS to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping
b.
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Size values.
To restore 802.1p or DiffServ to Forwarding Class Default Values 1.
Click Defaults. See Figure 19.15 or Figure 19.17.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
149
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The background of modified parameters is shown in yellow.
2.
Save changes to NE? a.
If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window. The QoS Classification tab updates.
b.
If no, see To restore Saved Queue Size values.
To restore Saved Queue Size values 1.
Click Restore. See Figure 19.16 or Figure 19.18. QoS Classification tab restores the saved values.
150
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
20 — ister software license
20.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view and update the Software License for the 9500 MPR.
20.2 — General In the SW License window the following fields are present: •
RMU Serial Number: The Serial Number of the Flash Card is displayed. This is a read-only field.
•
License String: The license string stored in the Flash Card is displayed. The license string displays the set of key features ed by the NE. This is a read-only field.
•
License Key: This field is used to upgrade the license string. To upgrade the license string, copy the code of the new license and click on Apply.
The Refresh button activates a new reading of the read-only fields. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for more information about license key management.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
151
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
20.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To view SW license using JUSM
•
To view SW License using Web Server
•
To update SW License
To view SW license using JUSM 1.
From the main menu bar, select Supervision>SW License. See Figure 20.1. Figure 20.1 — SW License main menu bar path
The SW License window opens. See Figure 20.2. Figure 20.2 — SW License window
2.
View software License Key, License String, and RMU Serial Number.
3.
Click Close.
To view SW License using Web Server 1.
152
to NE to View SW License using web browser. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The 9500MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server page. 2.
From the Main Menu pane, select License Info. The License Info page displays. See Figure 20.3. Figure 20.3 — 9500 MPR Web Server - License Info
3.
View software License String and RMU Serial Number.
To update SW License 1.
From the main menu bar, select Supervision>SW License. See Figure 20.1. The SW License window opens. See Figure 20.2.
2.
Open new software license text file.
3.
Select new software License Key from text file and copy.
4.
Select old software License Key in the SW License window and paste new software License Key.
5.
Click Apply.
6.
Click Close.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
153
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
154
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
21 — ister system date and time
21.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to ister NE Date and Time.
21.2 — General The system NE Time can be provisioned either to the PC/laptop operating system time, manually, or to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. System NE Time is used for time and date stamping functions. It is recommended that NTP be used to maintain consistent NE times within the network. This allows for easy correlation of alarm/event/PM timestamps with actual time and with a NMS. To minimize NTP traffic within the TMN network, each NE should use the next NE toward the NMS as its primary time server. When the NE is configured with NTP, NE time can not be provisioned manually. The date format is yyyy/mm/dd, where yyyy equals the four-digit year, mm equals the twodigit month, and dd equals the two-digit day. The time format is hh:mm:ss, where hh equals the two-digit hour (00 to 23), mm equals the two-digit minute (00 to 59), and ss equals the two-digit second (00 to59). System NE Time can be provisioned from the craft terminal and Web Server. Using the Web Server, System NE Time can be provisioned manually or to the PC/laptop operating system time. The NTP server can only be provisioned through the craft terminal. Only NTP status is available through the Web Server. Note: After an NE time change, PM history data must be cleared to prevent reporting erroneous PM data.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
155
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
21.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To provision NE Time to PC operating system time using JUSM
•
To provision NE Time to PC operating system time using Web Server
•
To provision NE Time manually using JUSM
•
To provision NE time manually using Web Server
•
To provision NE Time to NTP Server using JUSM
•
To view NTP Server Status using Web Server
To provision NE Time to PC operating system time using JUSM 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>NE Time. See Figure 21.1. Figure 21.1 — NE Time main menu bar path
The NE Time Configuration window opens. See Figure 21.2.
156
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 21.2 — NE Time Configuration window
2.
Select Set NE Time with OS Time check box (checked).
3.
Click Apply. The Information ‘Set NE time success!’ window opens.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Close.
To provision NE Time to PC operating system time using Web Server 1.
to NE to view NE alarms. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
From the web server Main Menu pane, select Date & Time Setting. The Date & Time Setting window displays. See Figure 21.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
157
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 21.3 — 9500 MPR Web Server date & time setting window
3.
From the NE Time Setting with OS Time field, click Apply to NE.
To provision NE Time manually using JUSM 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>NE Time. See Figure 21.1. The NE Time Configuration window opens. See Figure 21.4. Figure 21.4 — NE Time Configuration window
2.
158
Select date and time element to set in the Network Element Time field and perform one or more of the following: a.
Select four-digit year yyyy, and enter the new four-digit value.
b.
Select two-digit month mm, and enter the new two-digit value.
c.
Select two-digit day dd, and enter the new two-digit value. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
3.
d.
Select two-digit hour hh, and enter the new two-digit value.
e.
Select two-digit minute mm, and enter the new two-digit value.
f.
Select two-digit second ss, and enter the new two-digit value.
Click Apply. The Information ‘Set NE time success!’ window opens.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Close.
To provision NE time manually using Web Server 1.
to NE to view NE alarms. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
From the web server Main Menu pane, select Date & Time Setting. The Date & Time Setting window displays. See Figure 21.3.
3.
4.
Select date and time element to set in the Network Element Time field and perform one or more of the following: a.
Select four-digit year yyyy, and enter the new four-digit value.
b.
Select two-digit month mm, and enter the new two-digit value.
c.
Select two-digit day dd, and enter the new two-digit value.
d.
Select two-digit hour hh, and enter the new two-digit value.
e.
Select two-digit minute mm, and enter the new two-digit value.
f.
Select two-digit second ss, and enter the new two-digit value.
From the GMT Time Setting field, click Apply to NE.
To provision NE Time to NTP Server using JUSM 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration> NTP Configuration. See Figure 21.5. Figure 21.5 — NTP Configuration drop-down menu
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
159
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The NTP Configuration window opens. See Figure 21.6. Figure 21.6 — NTP Configuration window
2.
Select Enabled check box (checked) in the NTP Protocol area.
3.
Enter IP address of the Main NTP Server in the Main Server address field.
4.
Enter IP address of the Spare Server in the Spare Server address field.
5.
Click Apply. The Information ‘Set NTP Server success!’ window opens.
6.
Click OK.
7.
Click Close.
To view NTP Server Status using Web Server 1.
to NE to view NE alarms. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
From the web server Main Menu pane, select Date & Time Setting. The Date & Time Setting window displays. See Figure 21.3.
3.
160
From Date & Time Setting window, view NTP Status: Enabled or Disabled.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
22 — ister system settings
22.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to ister system settings.
22.2 — General The Systems Settings/NE Configuration screen is used to configure the DH Server , Ethernet LOS Criteria, Static Lag Criteria, System Priority Parameter, event and alarm logging, SNMP mode, and retrieve the NE MAC Address/Bridge Address.
22.2.1 — Tributary Port Configuration (ETSI market only) This field allows to set the suitable impedance of the E1 stream.
22.2.2 — DH server The default setting for DH server is enabled. In most configurations this is the recommended provisioning value. The DH should be disabled when using the local TMN port for a network connection. This enables the alarm reporting on the port. The DH should be enabled when using the local TMN port for a temporary CT port that will be left disconnected during normal operation. This disables the alarm reporting on the port. DH provisioning is ed from both the craft terminal and the Web Server.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
161
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
22.2.3 — Ethernet LOS criteria Ethernet LOS Criteria feature adds the following condition types to the Core protection switching criteria: •
LOS of Optical Ethernet interface
•
Card Fail of SFP optical module
•
Card Missing of SFP optical module
•
LOS of any Electrical Ethernet interfaces, including the LOS of the forth Ethernet interface working as TMN Local Ethernet interface.
Note: The following are the default Core protection switching criteria: • Core Card Missing • Core Card Fail Card Not Ready and Flash Card Realignment In Progress conditions represent inhibition of the Core protection switching with respect to Operator Commands and the additional criteria listed above.
22.2.4 — Static LAG criteria Static LAG Criteria feature is only available when the spare Core unit has been installed. By enabling Static LAG Criteria feature, the Ethernet ports of the Core unit in standby are in the ON state (same as the ports of the Active Core unit), but the Ethernet traffic is not forwarded. This behavior reduces the out of service time of traffic ing through the Ethernet interfaces when Core protection switching occurs. Static LAG Criteria must be provisioned “Disabled” when the NE is connected to equipment performing Link Aggregation and not ing the Active/Standby management of aggregated links.
22.2.5 — System priority parameter The System Priority Parameter is the System Priority (2 bytes) associated to the NE. This parameter, together with the System ID (the NE MAC address), determines the System Aggregation Priority (8 bytes). The range for the System Priority parameter is: 0 to 65,535 (default: 32,768). System Aggregation Priority:
162
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
•
[0 - 1 bytes] System Priority
•
[2 - 7 bytes] NE MAC address
The System Aggregation Priority of each System is an eight octet binary number. The System with the numerically lower value of System Aggregation Priority has the higher priority. A LAG system ing LA, dynamically assigns the member ports of the LAG group. Starting with the highest priority port to the lowest priority ports. At the remote end of the same LAG link, there is another system that wants also to assign the ports to the LAG group according to its own port priorities. And here two systems propose two different port assignments for the same LAG group. And it’s the system with the highest system priority that overrides the link and imposes its port assignment.
22.2.6 — AIS insertion for LOF detection on DS1 (ANSI market only) The AIS insertion for Loss Of Frame (LOF) detection on DS1 provisions NE behavior upon detection of LOF on DS1 inputs and outputs. This provisioning is applicable for all DS1 ports enabled on the MSS-4/8 shelf. By enabling AIS insertion for LOF detection on DS1 feature, AIS is inserted for the following conditions: •
Loss Of Frame detection on DS1 facilities incoming from the demarcation
•
Loss Of CESoETH Frame detection on DS1 facilities from the switch matrix
By disabling AIS insertion for LOF detection on DS1 feature, AIS is not inserted for the following conditions •
Loss Of Frame detection on DS1 facilities incoming from the demarcation
•
Loss Of CESoETH Frame detection on DS1 facilities from the switch matrix
22.2.7 — Event and alarm log To enable event and alarm logging, select enabled in the Event and Alarm Log Logging drop-down menu.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
163
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
22.2.8 — NE MAC Address/Bridge Address The NE MAC Address/Bridge Address value is displayed in the NE MAC Address/Bridge Address field.
22.2.9 — SNMP Mode The 9500 MPR s access from SNMP managers implementing both SNMPv2/v1 and SNMPv3 protocols. The ed SNMP operating modes are the following: •
SNMPv2: This is the default mode. Only SNMPv2/v1 managers are allowed access to the NE for both reading and writing.
•
SNMPv3: Only SNMPv3 managers are allowed access to the NE.
SNMPv3 addresses security problems by adding two new features on top of the existing SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 network management protocols: •
Authentication using hashing and time stamps.
•
Confidentiality using encryption.
SNMPv3 is based on the following: •
The based Security Model (USM), which provides strong authentication, data integrity, privacy (encryption) and time stamp management (timeliness),
•
The View base Access Control Model (VACM), which provides a mechanism for managing what information is available to s.
Authentication is provided using the HMAC-MD5-96 standard authentication protocol. The SNMP operating mode is stored in permanent memory on a Flash card. Caution: Changing the SNMP mode requires the NE to restart in the new mode.
Caution: When the NE has been configured to operate in SNMPv3 mode, the database must be cleared for the NE to be returned to SNMPv2 mode.
164
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
22.2.10 — Latitude and Longitude The Latitude and Longitude values, if available, are displayed in the Latitude and Longitude fields. The fields are read-only.
22.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the System Settings menu
•
To provision Tributary Port Configuration (ETSI market only)
•
To provision DH server using JUSM/CT 9500 MPR
•
To Provision DH server using the Web Server
•
To provision Ethernet LOS Criteria
•
To provision Static LAG Criteria
•
To provision the System Priority parameter
•
To provision AIS Insertion for LOF on DS1
•
To provision the Event and Alarm Log
•
To retrieve the NE MAC Address/Bridge Address
•
To provision SNMP mode using JUSM
•
To provision SNMP mode using the Web Server
•
To retrieve Latitude and Longitude
To open the System Settings menu •
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>System Settings. The System Settings tab opens. See Figure 22.1 for the ANSI market and Figure 22.2 for the ETSI market.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
165
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 22.1 — System Settings tab (ANSI market)
166
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 22.2 — System Settings menu (ETSI market)
To provision Tributary Port Configuration (ETSI market only) 1.
From the Impedance drop-down menu, select a value: Unbalanced 75 ohm or Balanced 120 ohm.
2.
Click on the Apply button.
3.
Click on the Close button.
To provision DH server using JUSM/CT 9500 MPR 1.
From the DH Server drop-down menu, select DH Server provisioning: Disabled or Enabled.
2.
Click on the Apply button.
3.
Click on the Close button.
To Provision DH server using the Web Server 1.
to NE to provision DH Server using web browser. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
167
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The 9500MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window. 2.
On Main Menu pane, select DH Setting. The DH Setting window displays. Figure 22.3 — 9500 MPR Web Server - DH Setting
3.
Click on the Refresh button.
4.
Determine Current DH Status.
5.
To change the DH provisioning, click on the Enable DH/Disable DH button.
To provision Ethernet LOS Criteria 1.
From the Ethernet Criteria drop-down menu, select Ethernet LOS Criteria provisioning: Disabled or Enabled.
2.
Click on the Apply button.
3.
Click on the Close button.
To provision Static LAG Criteria 1.
From the Static Log drop-down menu, select Static Log Criteria provisioning: Disabled or Enabled.
2.
Click on the Apply button.
3.
Click on the Close button.
To provision the System Priority parameter
168
1.
From the System Priority field, enter System Priority Parameter value: 0 to 65535 (default: 32,768).
2.
Click on the Apply button.
3.
Click on the Close button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision AIS Insertion for LOF on DS1 1.
From the AIS Insertion for LOF detection on DS1 drop-down menu, select: Disabled or Enabled.
2.
Click on the Apply button.
3.
Click on the Close button.
To provision the Event and Alarm Log 1.
From the Logging drop-down menu, select Event and Alarm Log provisioning: Disabled or Enabled.
2.
Click Apply.
3.
Click on the Close button.
To retrieve the NE MAC Address/Bridge Address 1.
From the NE MAC Address/Bridge Address field, record the Bridge Address.
2.
Click on the Close button.
To provision SNMP mode using JUSM Caution: Changing the SNMP Mode will cause the NE to restart.
Caution: When the NE has been configured to operate in SNMPv3 mode, it is not possible to return it to SNMPv2 mode without clearing the database.
1.
In the SNMP Mode Migration field, choose SNMPv2 or SNMPv3. SNMPv2 is chosen by default.
2.
Click Apply.
3.
Click on the Close button. The NE restarts.
To provision SNMP mode using the Web Server Caution: Changing the SNMP Mode will cause the NE to restart.
Caution: When the NE has been configured to operate in SNMPv3 mode, it is not possible to return it to SNMPv2 mode without clearing the database.
1.
to NE to provision SNMP Mode using web browser. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
On Main Menu pane, select Snmp Version.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
169
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The Snmp version window displays, showing the current version. Figure 22.4 — 9500 MPR Web Server - Snmp Version
3.
Click Refresh button.
4.
To change SNMP Mode, click on the Set Snmp version 3 or Set Snmp version 2 button. The NE restarts.
To retrieve Latitude and Longitude 1.
Retrieve Latitude and Longitude From the Latitude and Longitude fields, record the information.
2.
170
Click on the Close button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
23 — ister VLAN configuration
23.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to ister the VLAN configuration.
23.2 — Overview When a Core-E card is in use, three protocols are ed to manage Ethernet traffic: 802.1D (MAC Address Bridge), 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge), and 802.1ad (Provider Bridge). When a CorEvo card is in use, 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge), and 802.1ad (Provider Bridge) are ed. The default VLAN configuration is 802.1Q. Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
23.2.1 — 802.1D (MAC address bridge) When the NE is configured with 802.1D, Ethernet traffic is switched according to the destination MAC address without regards to VLAN ID. ed VLAN IDs are 0 and 2-4080. VLAN IDs outside the ed range of 0 and 2-4080 are dropped. VLAN IDs configured for TDM traffic flows are accepted.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
171
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
23.2.2 — 802.1Q (virtual bridge) When the NE is configured with 802.1Q, Ethernet traffic is switched according to VLAN IDs. In 802.1Q mode all Ethernet frames inside the 9500 MPR network are assigned a VLAN ID. VLAN 1 is automatically defined by the NE when 802.1Q is selected. All Ethernet ports (enabled and disabled) and all radio ports are of VLAN 1. VLAN 1 can’t be modified or deleted by the operator. In egress VLAN ID 1 is always removed from the ports. VLAN IDs 2-4080 are configurable. VLAN IDs associated with TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH cross-connections can not be used for 802.1Q VLAN IDs. VLAN IDs associated with future E1/DS1/DS3 tributary cross-connections should not be used for 802.1Q VLAN IDs. The management system prohibits the definition of VLAN IDs already provisioned. Ethernet ports provisioned as ‘Untagged Ports’, remove the VLAN ID from the Ethernet frame on egress. Only Ethernet ports are manageable. VLAN IDs cannot be removed from radio ports. The management system denies an attempt to disable any radio port (MPT-HC/MPT-HCHQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM) which is a member of a static VLAN. To disable the radio port, the must first remove the radio port as a member of a static VLAN. If a VLAN rate limiter is set on a port, the VLAN cannot be modified. The rate limiting must be removed before making any change to the VLAN.
23.2.3 — 802.1ad (Provider Bridge) When the NE is configured in Provider Bridge mode, the forwarding of Ethernet traffic is managed according to Service VLAN. Each Service VLAN (S-VLAN) represents a service instance that Ethernet traffic from a customer network is mapped to. In Provider Bridge mode, an S-VLAN is assigned to all Ethernet frames managed by the NE. The assignment of an S-VLAN to an Ethernet frame ingressing the NE shall be done according to the type of the Provider Bridge port: •
172
NNI: this is an interface internal to the Provider Bridged Network. S-VLAN is assigned based on S-VLAN ID carried by S-VLAN Tag or based on the ingress interface in case of S-VLAN untagged frames 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
•
UNI (port based): this is an interface at the edge of the Provider Bridged Network. SVLAN is assigned based on Ethernet port (Port-based service interface) regardless of the type of customer traffic (C-VLAN tagged or untagged)
•
UNI (VLAN based): this is an interface at the edge of the Provider Bridged Network. S-VLAN is assigned based on C-VLAN ID carried by C-VLAN Tag or based on Ethernet port in case of untagged frames (C-tagged service interface)
You can change the type of a Provider Bridge port. The following rules apply: •
An NNI can be changed to a port-based UNI only if the NNI was in the member set and untagged set of only one S-VLAN.
•
An NNI can be changed to a VLAN-based UNI only if the NNI was in the untagged set of all S-VLANs it belonged to.
•
A port-based UNI can be changed to an NNI or a VLAN-based UNI with no restrictions about its S-VLAN hip. The new port type inherits the S-VLAN hip and untagged set hip from the port-based UNI.
•
A VLAN-based UNI can be changed to an NNI with no restrictions about its S-VLAN hip. The NNI inherits the S-VLAN hip and untagged set hip from the VLAN-based UNI. Any C-VLAN to S-VLAN assignments must be removed from the VLAN-based UNI before changing it to an NNI.
•
A VLAN-based UNI can be changed to a port-based UNI only if it was in the member set and untagged set of only one S-VLAN. Any C-VLAN to S-VLAN assignments must be removed from the VLAN-based UNI before changing it to a port-based UNI.
23.2.3.1 — Ethernet frames processing When the NE is working in Provider Bridge mode, all the switches process Ethernet frames according to S-VLAN Tag. The tag of a single tagged Ethernet frame or the outer tag of a double tagged frame is recognized as an S-VLAN Tag according to the port S-VLAN TPID.
23.2.3.2 — Cross-connected flows processing When the NE is working in Provider Bridge mode, cross-connected flows are managed as single S-VLAN tagged frames. This implies that Ethernet ports being end-point of a cross-connection must be NNIs. The NE does not allow the set of a cross-connection not having a NNI as end-point. You cannot change a NNI to a UNI (port based) when cross-connections are present that use the NNI as an end-point.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
173
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
23.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the VLAN configuration window
•
To provision VLAN Configuration
•
To create a VLAN or S-VLAN
•
To edit a VLAN or S-VLAN
•
To delete a VLAN or S-VLAN
•
To filter by VLAN name
•
To export the VLAN list
To open the VLAN configuration window 1.
Open the VLAN configuration window Select either Configuration/VLAN Configuration from the main menu bar or VLAN Configuration icon from the main toolbar. See Figure 23.1. Figure 23.1 — VLAN Configuration icon
The VLAN Configuration window opens. See Figure 23.2.
174
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 23.2 — VLAN Configuration window with Core-E card in use
Figure 23.3 — VLAN Configuration window with CorEvo card in use
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
175
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision VLAN Configuration 1.
Provision which VLAN management protocol? a.
To provision 802.1D MAC select the 802.1D (MAC bridge) radio button and click on the Apply button. The VLAN Configuration window updates. See Figure 23.4. Figure 23.4 — VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1D
b.
To provision 802.1Q virtual bridge, select the 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge) radio button and click on the Apply button. VLAN Configuration window updates, the default VLAN 1 is displayed. See Figure 23.5.
176
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 23.5 — VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1Q
c.
To provision 802.1ad provider bridge, select the 802.1ad (Provider Bridge) radio button and click on the Apply button. The VLAN Configuration window updates, the default VLAN 1 is displayed. See Figure 23.6.
Figure 23.6 — VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1ad
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
177
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To create a VLAN or S-VLAN 1.
Select New... button. See Figure 23.5. The Create VLAN window opens. See Figure 23.7.
Note: In Provider Bridge mode, the window is called Create S-VLAN.
Figure 23.7 — Create VLAN window
2.
Enter VLAN ID number [2-4080].
3.
Enter VLAN Name (text string up to 32 character).
4.
From the VLAN Ports area, select the VLAN Ports to be of the VLAN.
5.
From the Untagged Ports area, select the Ethernet ports to remove VLAN ID from the egress Ethernet frame.
6.
Click OK. The Create VLAN window closes. Information window opens.
7.
Click OK. The new VLAN is added to the VLAN Configuration table. See Figure 23.8.
178
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 23.8 — New VLAN created
To edit a VLAN or S-VLAN 1.
From the VLAN Configuration window, select the VLAN to edit.
2.
Click Edit. See Figure 23.5. The Edit VLAN window opens. See Figure 23.9.
Note: In Provider Bridge mode, the window is called Edit S-VLAN.
Figure 23.9 — Edit VLAN window
3.
Modify VLAN parameters to update.
4.
Click OK. The Edit VLAN window closes.
5.
Information window opens, Click OK. The VLAN is updated in the VLAN Configuration table.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
179
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To delete a VLAN or S-VLAN 1.
From the VLAN Configuration window, select the VLAN to delete. Click Delete. See Figure 23.5. The Delete VLAN confirmation window opens.
2.
Click Yes to delete selected VLAN or click No to cancel delete VLAN operation. Information window opens.
3.
Click OK. The VLAN is removed from the VLAN Configuration table.
To filter by VLAN name 1.
From the VLAN Configuration window enter the text string to filter VLAN names with in the Filter by Name: field. See Figure 23.10. Figure 23.10 — Filter VLAN configuration table
2.
Click Filter. The VLAN configuration table is filtered using the text string entered in the Filter by Name field. See Figure 23.11.
180
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 23.11 — VLAN Configuration table filtered
3.
To restore full VLAN Configuration table, click Clear Filter.
To export the VLAN list 1.
From the VLAN Configuration window, click Export. See Figure 23.5.
2.
Navigate to the directory to save VLANList.csv file.
3.
Click Save.
4.
Message window opens, click OK.
5.
Close the VLAN Configuration window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
181
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
182
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
24 — Local access control management
24.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to manage Local Access Control (LAC).
24.2 — Overview NE control can be managed by an Operating System (OS) using the LAC feature. LAC management provides a mechanism to prevent multiple s sending write commands to the NE simultaneously. The OS manages the NE until a request to manage the NE is received from a craft terminal (CT) and granted. The request is initiated by the CT . The OS answering yes to the request transfers management of the NE to the CT. The LAC request can be denied by the OS (if for example the OS is in a state of recovery from a temporary loss of communication with the NE). The request to manage starts a timer. If the OS doesn't answer a CT request to manage in a predefined time, the CT automatically becomes the NE manager. The predefined time is provisionable. The manager currently managing the NE is indicated on the CT screen by the Lock control status (Local Access) granted icon. See Figure 24.4. When local access is denied on the CT is indicated by the Lock control status denied icon. See Figure 24.2.
24.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To enable local access control
•
To request local access control
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
183
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To enable local access control 1.
From the main menu bar, select Supervision > Access State > OS. See Figure 24.1. Figure 24.1 — Local Access Control - main menu bar path
LAC is enabled. In the status control area, the lock status icon updates to the access denied icon on CTs without LAC NE manager control. See Figure 24.2. Figure 24.2 — Lock (Local Access) Status Denied icon
To request local access control 1.
From the main menu bar, select Supervision > Access State > Requested. See Figure 24.3. Figure 24.3 — Local Access Control - main menu bar path
When LAC is granted by the OS the status control area lock status icon updates to the access granted icon, indicating the local CT is the NE manager. See Figure 24.4. Figure 24.4 — Lock (Local Access) Status Granted icon
184
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
25 — MIB database management (backup and restore)
25.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to perform MIB Database Management (backup and restore) on the 9500 MPR. A MIB database restore should be performed for catastrophic recovery ONLY.
25.2 — Overview Caution: All traffic will be interrupted during the activate database phase.
The backup operation provides the ability to save a copy of NE configurations parameters stored on the flash memory on the NE Core cards. Database backup file name s a , free-form string name, up to twenty-five characters. Only alphanumeric characters, the hyphen “-” character, and the underscore “_” character are ed. The file name is prefixed with the software version number as follows: “V
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
185
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
On NE configured with Core protection, the spare Core card must be either disabled or physically unseated from the shelf, prior to Database Restore. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for information about the parameters that are stored and excluded from the backup file. It is recommended that excluded parameters be saved by running an NE Inventory report, so these parameters may be reprovisioned in the event that the system needs to be restored from scratch. After completing the restore operation, the restored database must be activated to apply the ed parameters to the NE. Upon activation of the restored database, the NE will automatically restart. Database backup should be performed with no forced protection switches active. A system restored with a backup database that was saved while forced protection switches are active, may result in the system being restored to an unknown state. If this occurs, communications with the system may be difficult to reestablish and may result in the loss of traffic.
25.3 — Procedure This section provides the following procedures: •
To backup the MIB management database
•
To restore the MIB management database
•
To activate the MIB management database
To backup the MIB management database 1.
Select Protection Schemes tab.
2.
that no forced protection switches are active.
3.
Are forced protection switches active?
4.
a.
If yes, go to step 4.
b.
If no, go to step 5.
Determine if the active forced protection switches can be released. Release all forced protection switches prior to proceeding with this procedure.
Caution: Failure to release all protection switches prior to performing a MIB Management database backup may result in the system being restored to an unknown state. If this occurs, communications with the system may be difficult to reestablish and may result in the loss of traffic.
5.
186
Save NE Inventory data. See View NE Inventory data for detailed instructions to view and save NE Inventory data.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 6.
From the main menu bar, select Supervision>MIB Management>Backup. See Figure 25.1.
Figure 25.1 — Backup MIB Management database main menu bar path
7.
The Protocol Selection window opens, see Figure 25.2. Figure 25.2 — Protocol Selection window
8.
Choose the protocol that you need to use to transfer the data. If you need to use SFTP, enter the name and to access the NE.
9.
Click on the OK button. The Backup dialog box appears. See Figure 25.3. Figure 25.3 — Backup MIB Management database dialog box
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
187
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 10. Navigate to the directory to save the MIB Management Database. Note: Database backup file name s a thirty-six character free-form string name. To aid in tracking database backup files, it is recommended to use the NE Name and Date in the backup file name (ex. V020200_Chicago-1120_2010-04-30.bar) or follow local practices and procedures to construct backup file names.
11. Enter the file name of the MIB Management Database backup file in the File Name field. 12. Click Save. Backup confirmation window opens. 13. Click Yes. MIB Management window opens. 14. Click OK. To restore the MIB management database 1.
Select Protection Schemes tab.
2.
that no forced protection switches are active.
3.
Are forced protection switches active?
4.
a.
If yes, go to step 4.
b.
If no, go to step 5.
Determine if the active forced protection switch(es) can be released. Release all forced protection switch(es) prior to proceeding with this procedure.
Caution: Failure to release all protection switches prior to performing a MIB Management database backup, may result in the system being restored to an unknown state. If this occurs, communications with the system may be difficult to reestablish and may result in the loss of traffic.
5.
6.
188
Perform one of the following: a.
Disable the spare Core card. For detailed instruction, see Disable equipment.
b.
Physically unseat the spare Core card.
From the main menu bar, select Supervision>MIB Management>Restore / Activate. See Figure 25.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 25.4 — Restore / Activate MIB Management Database main menu bar path
The Protocol Selection window opens, see Figure 25.2. 7.
Choose the protocol that you need to use to transfer the data. If you need to use SFTP, enter the name and to access the NE.
8.
Click on the OK button. The Restore window opens. See Figure 25.5. Figure 25.5 — Restore MIB Management Database window
9.
Navigate to the directory where the MIB Management Database backup file is saved.
10. Select MIB Management Database backup file. 11. Click Open. Restore confirmation window opens. 12. Click Yes. MIB Management window opens. 13. Activate restored MIB Management Database? a.
If yes, Click Yes and see the next procedure.
b.
If no, click No.
To activate the MIB management database 1.
The Activate confirmation window opens.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
189
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
Note: All traffic will be interrupted during activate database.
2.
Click Yes. MIB Management window opens.
3.
Click OK.
4.
Close the WebEML window. The NE will activate the restored MIB Management database. There may be a delay of 60 to 90 seconds before the Activate process begins. The NE will automatically restart. A loss of communication with the NE will occur. Do not attempt any WebEML activities until the NE has completed restarting. Once the craft realigns with the NE, it is OK to to the system. Restarting the NE can take up to 10 minutes to complete.
Note: Because MIB database restore affects local IP address provisioning, it will be necessary to connect to the MSS shelf using the same IP address provisioned at the time of the database backup. If no IP address provisioning was performed prior to MIB database restore it will be necessary to connect to the MSS shelf using the default IP address (10.0.1.2) and the main TMN port.
5.
Wait until the NE realigns with the craft, then to the system using the craft terminal.
6.
Communication with the NE has been established and the NE has been restored as expected?
7.
8.
9.
a.
If yes, go to step 8.
b.
If no, go to step 7
Has a minimum of 15 minutes elapsed since the database activation was started? a.
If yes, next level of .
b.
If no, wait at least 15 minutes to allow the NE time to reboot and realign with the craft. Once the NE realigns with the craft, go to step 5.
Is the NE configured with a spare Core card? a.
If yes, go to step 9.
b.
If no, go to step 10.
Perform either a or b: a.
Enable the spare Core card.
b.
Physically seat the spare Core card removed in step 5 b.
10. system provisioning. Refer to the saved NE Inventory, saved during the MIB backup procedure.
190
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 11. Provision any required settings that are not restored as part of the backup/ restore process (for example, IP address).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
191
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
192
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
26 — Use the Ethernet Features Shell
26.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures for using the Ethernet Features Shell from the JUSM interface. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for more information.
26.2 — Introduction Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (ECFM) (IEEE802.1ag) is performed using the Ethernet Features Shell. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for more information about the following types of commands that can be run from the Ethernet Features Shell: •
Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management
•
Ethernet CFM
•
Protocols
•
TACACS+
26.3 — Procedure To open the tool 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration > Ethernet Features Shell.
2.
A warning window opens, advising that starting a CLI session will shut down the CT. Click on the Yes button to continue.
3.
The Protocol Selection window opens. Select the protocol you need to use to transfer data. If you need to use SFTP, enter the name and to connect to the NE.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
193
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
194
4.
Click on the OK button. The Ethernet Features Shell window opens and the CT closes.
5.
Enter the commands as needed. See the Product Information Manual for more information.
6.
Close the Ethernet Features Shell window.
7.
Click on Show in the NEtO to reopen the CT.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
27 — Perform a software reset
27.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures for restarting the NE or an MPT. The Restart operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions.
27.2 — Procedure This section provides the following procedures: •
To restart an NE
•
To restart an MPT
To restart an NE 1.
From the Supervision cascading menu, select the Restart NE option. A dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Yes button to confirm the restart NE operation.
Warning: After the activation of the Restart NE Command (or after the pressing of the HW reset push-button) the supervision of the local NE and the remote NEs is lost.
To restart an MPT 1.
From the Supervision cascading menu, select the Restart MPT option. A dialog box appears.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
195
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 27.1 — Restart MPT
Select the MPT to be restarted and click the Restart button.
196
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
28 — Configure EFM OAM
28.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision Ethernet First Mile Operations, istration, and Maintenance.
28.2 — Overview EFM OAM can be enabled on any Ethernet interface on the Core or EAS cards or the MSS-1 or MSS-O units. The interface must be enabled to enable the EFM OAM. If EFM OAM is enabled, the port cannot be disabled unless the interface is configured as a Ring port. If the interface belongs to an Ethernet LAG, enabling the EFM OAM is on a per interface basis. EFM OAM can be enabled on the Ethernet interfaces of a Core belonging to a TMN In-Band networking interface. EFM OAM must be disabled before performing any of the following: •
provisioning an MPT on the interface
•
provisioning PFoE on EASv2, MSS-1 or MSS-O
•
configuring the TMN Local Ethernet interface on Ethernet Port 4
28.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To enable an OAM link
•
To disable an OAM link
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
197
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To enable an OAM link 1.
From the Main Menu Bar, select Configuration >ETH OAM Configuration. The ETH OAM window opens. See Figure 28.1. Figure 28.1 — ETH OAM window
2.
Choose the Ethernet interface from the list.
3.
Choose the Active or ive radio button in the Link OAM Mode field.
4.
In the Link OAM Parameter pane, choose the Enable radio button in the Link OAM field.
5.
Click on the Apply button. The link is enabled.
To disable an OAM link
198
1.
In the ETH OAM Configuration window, select the interface from the list.
2.
In the Link OAM Parameter pane, choose the Disable radio button in the Link OAM field.
3.
Click on the Apply button. The link is disabled.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
istration
•
ister NE list
•
ister profiles
•
Change
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
199
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
200
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
29 — ister NE list
29.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to create an NE list, add NEs to the NE list, and how to to an NE using the NE list.
29.2 — Prerequisite The name and current must be known before can be accomplished. The 9500 MPR craft terminal (CT) software must be installed on the PC. The must know the IP address of the NE to to the system or be locally connected.
29.3 — General The 9500 MPR provides for the craft terminal (CT) or WebEML (JUSM/CT) function, allowing NE management through a web-enabled PC. The NE is accessed using the Network Element Overview (NEtO) application.
29.4 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To create an NE list
•
To add an NE to a List by first logging in to the NE
•
To add an NE to a list by entering NE IP address
•
To open an NE from a saved list of NEs
•
To open an NE from the current list of NEs
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
201
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To create an NE list 1.
From the NEtO Overview window, select Creates a new list of favorite NEs icon. See Figure 29.1. Figure 29.1 — New icon
The Network Element List window opens. See Figure 29.2. Figure 29.2 — Network Elements List window
2.
Click Save. The Save window opens. See Figure 29.3.
202
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.3 — NE List Save window
3.
In the File Name field, type the desired name for the NE list:
4.
Click Save. The File Saved window opens.
5.
Click OK. The Network Elements List window opens. See Figure 29.4. Figure 29.4 — Network Elements List window
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
203
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To add an NE to a List by first logging in to the NE 1.
From the NEtO Overview window, to the NE to add to the NE list.
2.
From the Network Elements List window, click Get Current. See Figure 29.5. The NE currently logged in to is added to the NEs table. Figure 29.5 — Network Elements List window: Current NE added
3.
Click Save. Save window opens.
4.
Click Save. File already existing. Overwrite? window opens.
5.
Click Yes. File saved window opens.
6.
Click OK.
Note: The NE Table data is not automatically updated. If the NE details are updated (Site Name, Site Location, Version, or IP Address) the NE Table data must be manually updated or deleted and reloaded. The NE Table data is used for reference purposes only, the operator must keep the data current.
To add an NE to a list by entering NE IP address
204
1.
Click New. See Figure 29.6.
2.
In the table row just added, enter the NE IP address in the IP/DNS column.
3.
Press Enter.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.6 — Network Elements List window
4.
Click Save. Save window opens. File already existing. Overwrite? window opens.
5.
Click Yes. File saved window opens.
6.
Click OK.
Note: The NE Table data is not automatically updated. If the NE details are updated (Site Name, Site Location, Version, or IP Address) the NE Table data must be manually updated or deleted and reloaded. The NE Table data is used for reference purposes only, the operator must keep the data current.
To open an NE from a saved list of NEs 1.
From the NEtO Overview window, click the Opens a file containing a list of favorite NEs. icon. See Figure 29.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
205
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.7 — Open icon
Open window opens. See Figure 29.8. Figure 29.8 — Open window
2.
Select NE List file name
206
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.9 — Network ElemenT List window
3.
Select NE from the NEs table and click Set Current. The NEtO Overview window opens. See Figure 29.10. Figure 29.10 — NEtO Overview window
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Show.
6.
In the window, enter Name “name” and “”.
7.
Click Apply. JUSM 9500MPR window launches. See Figure 29.11.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
207
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.11 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen
To open an NE from the current list of NEs 1.
From the NEtO Overview window, click the Opens the current list of favorite NEs icon. See Figure 29.12. Figure 29.12 — Favorite icon
Network Elements List window opens. See Figure 29.13.
208
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.13 — Network ElemenT List window
2.
Select NE from the NEs Table and click Set Current. The NEtO Overview window opens. See Figure 29.14. Figure 29.14 — NEtO Overview window
3.
Click OK.
4.
Click Show.
5.
In the window, enter Name “name” and “”.
6.
Click Apply. JUSM 9500MPR window launches. See Figure 29.15.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
209
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 29.15 — JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen
210
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
30 — ister profiles
30.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to Create, Delete, and Change of a system for a specified name.
30.2 — General Only a with system privileges can create, delete and change another ’s . The system s up to ten active dynamically ed management sessions (such as NEtO and TSM-8000). The system s up to five Trusted Manager sessions (such as 5620SAM or 3rd party). The system s up to twenty-three provisioned s in addition to the two default s. If the NE is configured in SNMPv3 mode, the NE uses the -based Security Model (USM) for authentication. There are four profile classes, or groups. The responsibilities are as follows: •
- Full access including security parameters
•
CraftPerson - Local access to radio without security parameters at the radio site. Typical is responsible for installation and maintenance at the radio site.
•
Operator - Remote access to radio without security parameters. Typical is responsible for operation at the network level and not at the radio site.
•
Viewer - Only view access allowed.
Name length must not exceed 20 characters. s must meet the following complexity parameters:
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
211
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
•
Minimum Length - must be at least eight characters in length
•
Maximum Length - shall not exceed twenty characters in length
•
Composition - s must be composed of full ASCII characters (UPPER case, lower case, numeric, and special characters).
Two default s are available on the NE. These default s can not be deleted. For security reasons the for the default s should be changed. See Table 30.1 for default details. Table 30.1 — Default profiles Name
Profile
initial
Craftperson
craftcraft
CraftPerson
ed operations by the profiles: •
profile: All the NE parameters are accessible both in writing and reading mode. Also the management of s is allowed (create/delete s and change of all s).
•
Operator profile: Full reading access to NE parameters. For writing mode the following parameters are allowed to change: •
ATPC configuration (enabled, disabled)
•
Performance Monitoring management → start/stop CD → threshold tables configuration → reset → archiving (only for NMS system) ed for all the types of Performance Monitoring (Radio Hop/Link, E1, Received Power Levels, ....)
•
NTP protocol: → Enabled/Disabled → NTP main server address configuration → NTP spare server address configuration
212
•
CraftPerson profile: This operator has the same privileges of the , but cannot manage the s
•
Viewer profile: This operator can only read and can change his own .
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
30.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To add a new in SNMPv2 mode
•
To add a new in SNMPv3 mode
•
To delete a in SNMPv2 mode
•
To delete a in SNMPv3 mode
•
To change a ’s in SNMPv2 mode
•
To change a ’s in SNMPv3 mode
To add a new in SNMPv2 mode 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>s Management. See Figure 30.1. Figure 30.1 — management main menu bar path
The Profiles Management window opens. See Figure 30.2. Figure 30.2 — Profile management window
2.
Click Create.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
213
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The Create window opens. See Figure 30.3. Figure 30.3 — Create window
3.
Enter the .
4.
Enter the new Name.
5.
From the Profile drop-down menu, select new profile: , CraftPerson, Operator, or Viewer.
6.
Enter the new .
7.
Enter the Confirm .
8.
Click Apply. Creation Success window opens.
9.
Click OK. Creation Success window closes. Profile Management window updates with new added. See Figure 30.4.
214
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 30.4 — Profile management window - with added
10. Click Cancel to close the window. To add a new in SNMPv3 mode 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>USM s Management. See Figure 30.5. Figure 30.5 — USM management main menu bar path
The USM s Management window opens. See Figure 30.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
215
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 30.6 — USM s Management window
2.
Click Create. The Usm cloning opens. The Authentication Protocol and Privacy Protocol attributes are read-only. See Figure 30.7.
216
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 30.7 — USM cloning
3.
From the Group drop-down menu, select the group: , craftPerson, operator, or viewer.
4.
Enter the name of the to be cloned in the Cloned field. The new ’s profile will be based on the cloned .
5.
Enter the of the cloned in the Cloned field.
6.
Enter the New Name
7.
Enter the New .
8.
Confirm the New .
9.
Click Apply. The Create New window opens.
10. Click OK. The Create New window closes. The USM s Management window updates with the new added. See Figure 30.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
217
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 30.8 — USM s Management window - with added
11. Click Close to close the window. To delete a in SNMPv2 mode 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>s Management. See Figure 30.1. The Profiles Management window opens. See Figure 30.9. Figure 30.9 — Profile management window
2. 218
Select Name to delete. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 3.
Click Delete. The Deletion Confirm window opens.
4.
Click Yes. The Delete window opens. Figure 30.10 — Delete window
5.
Enter the .
6.
Click Apply. Deletion Success window opens.
7.
Click OK. The Delete window closes. Profile Management window opens with deleted. Figure 30.11 — Profile management window - with deleted
8.
Click Cancel.
To delete a in SNMPv3 mode 1.
To delete a in SNMPv3 mode From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>USM s Management. See Figure 30.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
219
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The USM s Management window opens. See Figure 30.8. 2.
Select Name to delete.
3.
Click Delete. The Deletion Message window opens.
4.
Click Yes. The Operation Completed window opens.
5.
Click OK. The Operation Completed window closes. The USM s Management window opens with the deleted.
6.
Click Close.
To change a ’s in SNMPv2 mode 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>s Management. See Figure 30.1. The Profiles Management window opens. See Figure 30.12. Figure 30.12 — Profile management window
2.
Select Name to change .
3.
Click Change PW. The Change window opens. See Figure 30.13.
220
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 30.13 — Change window
4.
Enter the .
5.
Enter the New .
6.
Enter the Confirm New .
7.
Click Apply. Changing Success window opens.
8.
Click OK.
9.
Click Cancel.
To change a ’s in SNMPv3 mode 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>USM s Management. See Figure 30.5. The USM s Management window opens. See Figure 30.8.
2.
Select Name to change .
3.
Click Change PW. The Usm Change opens. See Figure 30.14.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
221
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 30.14 — USM Change
4.
Enter the ’s Old .
5.
Enter the New .
6.
Confirm the New .
7.
Click Apply. The Change window opens.
222
8.
Click Yes. The Operation Completed window opens.
9.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
31 — Change
31.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure for a to change their own .
31.2 — General The system allows a to change their own . Only a with system privileges can change another person’s . s must meet the following complexity parameters: •
Minimum Length - must be at least eight characters in length
•
Maximum Length - must not exceed twenty characters in length
•
Composition - s must be composed of full ASCII characters (UPPER case, lower case, numeric, and special characters).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
223
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
31.3 — Procedure To change a 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>Change . See Figure 31.1. Figure 31.1 — Change main menu bar path
The Change window opens. See Figure 31.2. Figure 31.2 — Changing window
2.
Enter the Old .
3.
Enter the New .
4.
Confirm the New .
5.
Click Apply. Changing Success window opens.
6.
224
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
System information
•
View alarms
•
View abnormal condition list
•
View NE Inventory data
•
I&C parameter data
•
View Remote Inventory
•
View Event Log
•
Perform debug functions using the Web Server
•
Retrieve RSL information using the Web Server
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
225
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
226
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
32 — View alarms
32.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view alarms for the 9500 MPR.
32.2 — General 32.2.1 — Alarm manager The 9500 MPR Alarm Monitor allows the to view current alarms and a log of alarm activity on multiple NEs at the same time. Both the current alarms and the alarm logs may be sorted by alarm severity. The following is a list of alarm filtering available: •
•
CURRENT ALARMS: •
Global
•
Critical (CRI)
•
Major (MAJ)
•
Minor (MIN)
•
Warning (WRG)
•
Indeterminate (IND) Not operative
ALARM LOG: •
Global
•
Critical (CRI)
•
Major (MAJ)
•
Minor (MIN)
•
Warning (WRG)
•
Indeterminate (IND) Not operative
•
Cleared (CLR)
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
227
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
For each list and for each filter, the number of active alarms is shown inside brackets. The alarms have a different color according to their severity and their state. •
Critical: Red
•
Major: Orange
•
Minor: Yellow
•
Warning: Blue
•
Indeterminate: White
•
Cleared: Green
Within the tab , each alarm is provided with the following information: •
Time & Date: date and time of the alarm. The format of date and time is yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss.
•
Probable cause: name of the probable cause of the alarm.
•
Alarm Type: alarm class (TRS = Transmission Alarm – alarm not created inside the equipment, but generated by a connected equipment or due to transmission/ propagation problems; EQUIPMENT: alarm inside of the equipment).
•
Friendly Name: object of the equipment where the alarm occurred.
•
Severity: alarm severity.
•
Add Text: for some alarms, additional text regarding the alarm.
•
Specific problem: for some alarms, additional information is provided about the involved resource (for instance, when a threshold alarm is raised, it states the specific threshold exceeded)
The Alarm Monitor menu bar has the following options available: •
File
•
Filters
•
Help
The File Menu has the following options available:
228
•
Save Log for selected NE: This option saves a file with one of the two global lists of each NE. Select the global list of a specific NE, open the Save History menu for the selected NE and enter filename and relevant directory in the opening window.
•
Load Log to selected NE: This option displays the global list of a certain NE previously saved.
•
Remove selected NE: This option removes the selected NE from the list of NEs monitor by the Alarm Monitor.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
a.
Export Alarms: This option exports the selected Log to a file. Select the log, select "Export Alarms" menu, choose the file format (CSV, HTML, HML or PDF) and then assign the name of the file.
b.
Exit: This option closes the Alarm Monitor.
The Filters menu has the following options available: •
Close Filter: The Filter, currently open, is closed.
•
Add a Filter: Create customized logs adding new specific filters.
•
Edit Selected Filter: A filter, previously created, can be modified.
•
Delete Selected Filter: A filter, previously created, can be deleted.
•
Delete Filters: The Delete Filters window opens providing the ability to delete multiple filters at one time.
•
Save Filters As: A filter previously created by the Add a Filter menu, can be saved to be used in the future. Unsaved filters are lost when the Alarm manager is closed.
•
Load Filters From: A filter previously saved can be loaded to an NE.
The Help menu displays the Product Version.
32.2.2 — Web Server The 9500 MPR Web Server allows the to view current alarms using a web browser. The Web Server can be refreshed manually or automatically. When the Web Server is configured for automatic refresh the display is refreshed every ten seconds. The Web Server Active Alarms provide the following details for each alarm: •
Perceived Severity: alarm severity.
•
Event Date & Time: date and time of the alarm. The format of date and time is yyyy/ mm/dd hh:mm:ss.
•
Entity: location of the equipment where the alarm is active.
•
Probable cause (name): name of the probable cause of the alarm.
•
Specific problem: for some alarms, additional information is provided about the involved resource (for instance, when a threshold alarm is raised, it states the specific threshold exceeded)
32.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
229
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To view NE alarms using Alarm Monitor
•
To add an Alarm Manager filter
•
To delete Alarm Manager filters
•
To save Alarm Manager Filters
•
To load Alarm Manager Filters
•
To view NE Alarms using Web Server
•
To manually refresh the Web Server
•
To automatically refresh the Web Server
•
To stop automatic refresh of the Web Server
To view NE alarms using Alarm Monitor 1.
From the Main Menu Bar, Select Diagnosis>Alarms>NE Alarms. See Figure 32.1. Figure 32.1 — NE Alarms Main Menu Bar path
The Alarm Monitor window opens. See Figure 32.2.
230
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 32.2 — Alarm Monitor window
The Alarm Monitor allows the to view alarms by severity. 2.
Select desired alarm severity from the Alarm Manager resource tree area. For this example, select CURRENT_ALARMS: MAJ. The Synthesis pane displays the CURRENT_ALARMS: MAJ tab. See Figure 32.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
231
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 32.3 — Alarm Manager: Current Alarms major tab
3.
To select another alarm severity, either select from the Alarm Manager resource tree area or the Synthesis pane alarm severity tabs.
To add an Alarm Manager filter 1.
From the Alarm Manager Main Menu Bar, select Filters>Add a Filter. The New Filter window opens. See Figure 32.4. Figure 32.4 — Alarm Manager New Filter window
232
2.
In the Filter Name field, enter the name of the new filter.
3.
From the scope partition, select the NE to apply the new filter or select the All check box to select all NEs currently being monitored.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 4.
From the scope partition select alarms to filter. •
Current: Select current to filter current alarms only.
•
Log: Select log to filter current and cleared alarms.
Filters can be created selecting one or more of the following parameters: a.
b.
c.
5.
Alarm Type: Select Alarm Type check box to create a filter using alarm type to filter alarms. Select all desired alarm types to include in the filter. •
TRS: Transmission Alarm
•
Equipment: Equipment Alarm
•
EXT: External Alarm
Perceived Severity: Select Perceived Severity check box to create a filter using alarm severities to filter alarms. Select all desired alarm severities to include in the filter. •
Critical
•
Major
•
Minor
•
Warning
•
Cleared
•
Indeterminate
Event Time: Select Event Time check box to create a filter for a specific time period. •
Select From check box and enter the start date (dd/mm/ yyyy:hh:mm:ss)
•
Select To check box and enter the end date (dd/mm/ yyyy:hh:mm:ss)
d.
Probable Cause: Select Probable Cause check box to create a filter for specific alarms. Select one or more probable cause to filter for the selected alarms only.
e.
Resource: Select Resource check box to create a filter for specific friendly name parameters. Example; to filter for all alarms associated with direction #5 channel#1, enter “dir*5*ch*1”. The “*” character is the wildcard for resource string entry.
Click Done to save the filter. Click Cancel to close Add Filter window and discard all selections. Figure 32.4 shows an example of a timed filter for major transmission alarms for slot 5 direction 1 alarms only.
To delete Alarm Manager filters 1.
From the Alarm Manager Main Menu Bar, select Filters>Delete Filters. The Delete Filters window opens. See Figure 32.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
233
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 32.5 — Alarm Manager Delete Filters window
2.
From the scope pane, select one or more NEs to delete their filters.
3.
From the Filters pane, select one or more filters to delete.
4.
Click Done to delete the filters. Click Cancel to close Delete Filters window and discard all selections.
To save Alarm Manager Filters 1.
From the Alarm Manager Main Menu Bar, select Filters>Save Filters As. The Save Filters As window opens. See Figure 32.6.
234
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 32.6 — Alarm Manager Save Filters As window
2.
From the scope pane, select the NE on which the filter to save resides.
3.
From the Filters pane, select the filter to save.
4.
Click Browse and navigate to the folder to save the filter.
5.
Enter file name to save filter.
6.
Click Save.
7.
Click Done to save the filter. Click Cancel to close Save Filters As window and discard the selections.
To load Alarm Manager Filters 1.
From the Alarm Manager Main Menu Bar, select Filters>Load Filters From. The Load Filters From window opens. See Figure 32.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
235
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 32.7 — Alarm Manager Load Filters From window
2.
Click Browse and navigate to the folder where the filter file is located.
3.
Select the filter file to load.
4.
Click Open.
5.
From the scope pane, select NE to load filter.
6.
From the Loaded Filters pane, select filter to load.
7.
Optionally, enter a prefix in the Filters Name Prefix field to prefix the characters to the filter name. Example, enter
8.
Click Done to load filter to selected NE. Click Cancel to close Load Filters From window and discard all selections.
To view NE Alarms using Web Server 1.
to NE to view NE alarms. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window. See Figure 32.8.
2.
236
To navigate from another web server window, select Active Alarms from the Main Menu pane.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 32.8 — Web Server Active Alarms webpage
The Active Alarms window has two methods to refresh the display, manual and automatic refresh. To manually refresh the Web Server 1.
Click Refresh button. The Active Alarms window refreshes.
To automatically refresh the Web Server 1.
To automatically refresh the Web Server Click Enable Automatic Refresh button. The Active Alarms window automatically refreshes every ten seconds.
To stop automatic refresh of the Web Server 1.
Click Stop Automatic Refresh button. The Active Alarms window stops automatically refreshing.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
237
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
238
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
33 — View abnormal condition list
33.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view abnormal condition list for the 9500 MPR.
33.2 — General The Abnormal Condition List is a read-only screen that lists non-usual conditions present in the NE. Events that cause an abnormal condition are as follows: •
Forced switch (EPS, RPS, TPS)
•
Lockout (EPS, RPS, TPS)
•
Loopback activation
•
Local radio Tx mute (manual)
•
Local radio Tx mute (automatic)
•
Remote radio Tx mute (manual)
33.3 — Procedure 1.
View abnormal condition list From The Main Menu Bar, select Diagnosis>Abnormal Condition List.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
239
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 33.1 — Abnormal Condition List main menu bar path
The Abnormal Condition List window opens. Figure 33.2 — Abnormal Condition List window
2.
240
Click Close.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
34 — View NE Inventory data
34.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view, save, and print NE Inventory data for the radio.
34.2 — General A report file is created automatically by radio software and available through the craft terminal or on the web for customer approval of provisioning. On the web, the report can be opened by using the following URL: http://Radio IP Address or by entering the rack name. The report is protected. Enter the assigned to the radio at provisioning. On the main web server screen, type in the rack name or the URL (shown below): http://Radio IP Address. screen displays. Enter NE ID and (same as ID and entered on CT). On the Main menu, select Configuration Info.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
241
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
The configuration report includes Remote Inventory data. The Remote Inventory List is a read-only screen that lists remote inventory data present in the NE. Remote inventory data available is as follows: •
Status
•
Company Identifier
•
Mnemonic
•
CLEI Code
•
Part Number
•
Software Part Number
•
Factory Identifier
•
Serial Number
•
Date Identifier
•
Date
•
Customer Field
34.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To provisioning data using JUSM
•
To save NE Inventory data
•
To print NE Inventory data
•
To provisioning data using Web Server
To provisioning data using JUSM 1.
From the main menu bar, select Diagnosis > NE Inventory. See Figure 34.1. Figure 34.1 — NE Inventory main menu bar path
The NE Inventory window opens. See Figure 34.2.
242
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 34.2 — Diagnosis / NE Inventory window
To save NE Inventory data 1.
Select File/Save As.
2.
Navigate to the directory to save 9500 MPR NE Inventory data file.
3.
In the File Name field, enter the file name.
4.
Click Save.
To print NE Inventory data 1.
Select File/Print.
2.
Select Printer to print 9500 MPR NE Inventory data.
3.
Click OK.
4.
Select File/Exit.
To provisioning data using Web Server 1.
to NE to provisioning data using web browser. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default webpage.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
243
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 34.3 — Web Server main webpage
2.
On the Main Menu pane, select Configuration Info. Depending on your browser settings, a dialog box appears. Figure 34.4 — NE Inventory File window
3.
Click Save in the dialog box.
4.
Navigate to the directory to save 9500 MPR NE Inventory data.
5.
In the File Name field, enter the desired file name.
6.
Click Save.
7.
Open the NE Inventory data file just saved
8.
Print NE Inventory data from the web server Print the report. Shortened example Configuration file output: beginning of the file: **********************
244
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures * CONFIGURATION INFO * ********************** Site Name: SVT-169 Site Location: SVT-lab-mickey Latitude: Longitude: QUALITY OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION ================================ Classification Criterion: Disabled Scheduler Configuration ----------------------Queue Mode
Weight
5
DWRR
16
4
DWRR
8
3
DWRR
4
2
DWRR
2
1
DWRR
1
Bridge Address: 00:00:00:00:01:69 Current SNMP Version: V3 IP STACK VERSION: IPv4 MSS Subrack Fans: equipped AIS insertion for LOF detection on incoming DS1: Disabled System Priority: 32768 TRUSTED MANAGERS ================ None CORE CONFIGURATION ================== Type: MSS-8, Enhanced, Not Protected, Not Revertive ETHERNET PORT ------------** Ep 1 - MPT ** Port: 1.1 - MPT Not Protected MPT TYPE: MPT-HC LINK IDENTIFIER: Status: Enabled 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
245
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Value expected: 130 Value transmitted: 169 TMN RF MANAGEMENT: Status: Disabled Preset Mode: Channel Spacing: 50 MHz Modulation: 256 QAM Capacity: 315.101 Mb/s Option: std Channel 1: Shifter
: 1560000
TX Frequency : 17800000 Min TX Freq. : 17700000 Max TX Freq. : 18140000 RX Frequency : 19360000 ------ Preset Mode -----ATPC: Disabled TX Power : 18.0 dBm Power Mode : Standard SSM STATUS: Disabled PKT THROUGHPUT BOOSTER STATUS: Enabled ENCRYPTION STATUS: Disabled PHRASE: NOT CONFIGURED QUEUE SIZES: Queue 1: 4034836 bytes (default value) Queue 2: 4034836 bytes (default value) Queue 3: 4034836 bytes (default value) Queue 4: 4034836 bytes (default value) Queue 5: 4034836 bytes (default value) RADIO LABEL: to 130-1.1 MPT in LAG: false MPT in RING: true XPIC Polarization: Disabled [HOP/ANALOG PM ENABLED] ** Ep 4 ** TMN mode TMN ipAddress: 143.209.225.169 246
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures TMN netMask: 255.255.252.0 Static routing protocol LAGS CONFIGURATION ================== ** LAG ID 1 ** Key:
1
Type:
L1 RADIO
Name: istrative Status: DISABLED istrative Size: 2 LA:
DISABLED
Timeout:
N.A.
Hashing:
Layer1
Wait Time To Restore: 1 sec LAG in RING:
false
SSM STATUS: Disabled TMN RF MANAGEMENT: Status: Disabled SLOTS CONFIGURATION =================== ** Slot 3 Unprotect SDHACC ** Port: 1 - SFP-O Label: loopback ALS: disabled forced on J0 Mode: disable XC-ECIDRx: 161 XC-ECIDTx: 161 XC-FlowID: 161 XC-JitterBuffer: LOW XC-PayLoadSize: 2382 XC-Clock source: Differential Port: 2 - Empty or disabled Label: MPTSUBRACKS CONFIGURATION ========================= ** Top SR-MPT-HLS EMPTY ** ** Bottom SR-MPT-HLS EMPTY ** XPIC ASSOCIATION INTERFACE 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
247
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ========================== NONE OSPF AREAS ========== Ospf Area 0: IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Stub Flag: FALSE NTP Configuration ================= Status: Enabled Main Server: 143.209.225.135 Spare Server: 143.209.225.135 DH Configuration ================== Status: Enabled TMN ETHERNET INTERFACE ====================== Local Ip Address: 143.209.225.169 TMN Ethernet: Status: Enabled ipAddress: 10.0.1.2 netMask: 255.255.255.0 Static Routing TMN INBAND PROFILES =================== TMN InBand Profile: 1 Status: Disabled ipAddress: 10.0.3.2 netMask: 255.255.255.0 vLanId: DS: 34 P: 7 Static Routing Ethernet Member Ports: TMN InBand Profile: 2 Status: Disabled 248
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ipAddress: 10.0.4.2 netMask: 255.255.255.0 vLanId: DS: 34 P: 7 Static Routing Ethernet Member Ports: CROSS CONNECTIONS ================= E1-Radio Connections -------------------DS1-Radio Connections --------------------DS3-Radio Connections -------------------E1-Ethernet Connections ----------------------DS1-Ethernet Connections -----------------------DS3-Ethernet Connections -----------------------Radio-Radio Connections ----------------------Radio-Ethernet Connections -------------------------OC-3 transparent-Radio Connections ---------------------------------E1-SDHCHAN Connections ---------------------SDHCHAN-Radio Connections -----------------------SDHCHAN-Ethernet Connections ---------------------------OC-3 transparent-Ethernet Connections ------------------------------------Radio-Ring Connections 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
249
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ---------------------Ring-Ethernet Connections ------------------------* Ring(1) - Ethernet(3): flowId="2432" serviceProfile="TdmToEth" clockSource="differential" macaddress="00:11:3F:CA:EF:C1" E1-Ring Connections ------------------DS1-Ring Connections -------------------DS3-Ring Connections -------------------* DS3(5) - Ring(1): flowId="182" Ring-Ring Connections --------------------* Radio(11) - Radio(72): flowId="131" serviceProfile="TdmToTdm" clockSource="differential" SDHCHAN-Ring Connections -----------------------RING ==== TOPOLOGY: 'HC Ring’ ------------------eastPort : s1p1 westPort : s7p2 ** INSTANCE: 'Ring 1' ** Enabled : true [R-APS] VLAN Id : 130 MEG level : 7 MEG Id East : 2 MEG Id West : 3 Guard Time : 120 [VLAN ] VLAN Id : 1 VLAN Id : 131 VLAN Id : 161
250
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures [SWITCH CRITERIA] Ethernet Link OAM alarm disabled as switch criteria RING FIBER CHAIN DESCRIPTION: -----------------------------None BRIDGE ====== Type: 802.1ad VLAN ---- Vlan ID: 1 Vlan Name: "Default Vlan" SEGREGATED PORTS ---------------** Segregated ports set ** - MPTACC plugin Slot 7 SYNCHRONIZATION =============== Synchronization Role: Slave Restoration Mode: Revertive Primary Source: MPT-HC Radio Dir 7 Port 2 Ch 1 Secondary Source: Radio Dir 4 Ch 1 External Signal: DISABLED SSM Wait To Restore: 5 min 0 sec SOFTWARE PACKAGE STATUS ======================= Name:
R95M
Version:
V05.02.0K
Operational Status:
Enabled
Current Status:
Committed
Software Unit:
Label
-----
Version
Size
--------- --------
MDPAR
V04.12.03 39835 F
Name:
R95M
Version:
V05.00.0I
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
251
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Operational Status:
Enabled
Current Status:
Standby
Software Unit:
Label
----BOMPT
Version
Size
--------- -------V05.01.01 492956
SECURE SETTINGS =============== |===================| | Protocol | Status | |-------------------| | FTP
| ON |
|-------------------| | Telnet | ON | |-------------------| | SSH
| ON |
|-------------------| | SFTP | ON | |-------------------| | HTTP | ON | |===================| ***************************** * END OF CONFIGURATION INFO * ***************************** ************************* * REMOTE INVENTORY INFO * ************************* NE 9500MPR-A 5.2 Site Name: SVT-169 remoteInventoryStatus: Unavailable MSS-8 remoteInventoryStatus: Available remoteInventoryCompanyIdentifier: CIT remoteInventoryMnemonic: BACK2U remoteInventoryCLEICode: ---------remoteInventoryPartNumber: 3DB18008BAAA01 remoteInventorySoftwarePartNumber: -------------252
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures remoteInventoryFactoryIdentifier: EU remoteInventorySerialNumber: BS0813UE0HB remoteInventoryDateIdentifier: 00 remoteInventoryDate: 080421 remoteInventoryCustomerField: ---------------------------------------------******************************** * END OF REMOTE INVENTORY INFO * ********************************
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
253
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
254
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
35 — I&C parameter data
35.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedures to Installation and Commissioning (I&C) parameter data for the radio.
35.2 — General The I&C Parameters include the following: •
an NE Inventory file
•
a .csv file for each MPT connected to the NE, showing the RSL information
The files can be loaded to the TRDS; see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Turn-up Manual.
35.3 — Procedures This section provides the procedure to the I&C parameters data. To I&C parameters data 1.
From the main menu bar, select Diagnosis > I&C Parameters; see Figure 35.1. Figure 35.1 — I&C Parameters main menu bar path
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
255
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures A Save dialog box appears. 2.
Choose a directory to save the files and click Save. The files are ed.
256
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
36 — View Remote Inventory
36.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view remote inventory list for the 9500 MPR.
36.2 — General The Remote Inventory List is a read-only screen that lists remote inventory data present in the NE. Remote inventory data available is as follows: •
Status
•
Company Identifier
•
Mnemonic
•
CLEI Code
•
Part Number
•
Software Part Number
•
Factory Identifier
•
Serial Number
•
Date Identifier
•
Date
•
Customer Field Note: The Remote Inventory is also included in the NE Inventory; see View NE Inventory data.
36.3 — Procedure To view Remote Inventory 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
257
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 1.
From the Main Menu Bar, select Diagnosis>Remote Inventory. Figure 36.1 — Remote Inventory main menu bar path
The Remote Inventory View window opens. Figure 36.2 — Remote Inventory View window
2.
258
Close view, click x.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
37 — View Event Log
37.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view event log for the 9500 MPR.
37.2 — General The event log allows the to capture a sequence of events which occurred over time, which may be helpful in diagnosing problems occurring within the NE and/or network. The event log browser provides the capability to print the event log. The event log browser provides the capability to export the event HTML, CSV, PDF, or XML formats. Event log browser provides the capability to export the entire log or only selected entries.
37.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Event Log
•
To Export an Event Log
•
To Print an Event Log
To open the Event Log •
From the main menu bar, select Diagnosis>Log Browsing>Event Log. See Figure 37.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
259
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 37.1 — Event Log Main Menu Bar Path
The Event Log Browser window opens. See Figure 37.2. Figure 37.2 — Event Log Browser Window
To Export an Event Log 1.
Select File>Export>Export Event. Export Events window opens.
260
2.
Select Output Format: HTML, CSV, PDF, or XML.
3.
Select which export entries to export: All Entries, or Selection.
4.
Click OK. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The Save window opens. 5.
Navigate to the directory to save the Event Log.
6.
In the File Name field, type the desired name of the Event Log: <Event Log Name>
7.
Click Save. The Message window opens.
8.
Click OK.
To Print an Event Log 1.
Select File>Print. The Print window opens.
2.
Select Printer Name.
3.
Select desired print parameters.
4.
Click Print. The Print window closes.
5.
Select File>Exit.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
261
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
262
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
38 — Perform debug functions using the Web Server
38.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures for performing debug functions using the Web Server interface.
38.2 — General The Debug Info menu allows the operator to analyze Ethernet traffic using a web browser. The following commands are available: •
ping: tries to establish a connection to an IPv4 address. When this command is selected, a window opens: enter the IP address to ping.
•
ping6: tries to establish a connection to an IPv6 address. When this command is selected, a window opens: enter the IP address to ping.
•
Database scratch web page: provides information on scratching the NE database. This command is available with MSS-1 only.
•
General Debug: creates a set of trace logs for the system and displays the location of the log files.
•
General Debug -r: removes the saved log files from the last General Debug.
•
Networking Debug: lists the configured links with IP address and Tx and Rx formation.
•
ConfigFile List: shows the file names of the configuration files that were used to configure the NE.
•
Ring Debug: shows interoperability information, alarm status and BCM STG information for each Ring configured
•
Switch Buffers debug: shows the buffer configuration and utilization per chip, per port and per QoS queue.
•
Bridge debug: provides configuration information for Provider Bridge ports.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
263
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
•
Vlan Show: lists the configured VLANs inside the NE with the ports member of VLAN (VLAN member set) and ports where VLAN Tag is removed in egress (VLAN untagged set).
•
L2 show: lists all the MAC addresses and associated VLANs learned by the NE (the list includes static entries self-defined by NE).
•
active SW package checksum: displays checksum information for each file component of the active software package.
•
standby SW package checksum: displays checksum information for each file component of the standby software package.
•
all SW package checksum: displays checksum information for each file component of both the active and the standby software package.
•
SFP signal level: displays optical received signal level and optical transmitted signal level from the SFPs equipped in the optical Ethernet interfaces of the Core-E and EAS cards.
•
Discovery debug: displays the stored information used for the NE Autodiscovery protocol.
•
MPT Alarms Debug: displays the active alarms for a specified MPT and the active alarms on the board. A window opens: enter the slot and port of the MPT.
•
get MPT Logs: displays the formation for a specified MPT. A window opens: enter the slot and port of the MPT.
•
get EFMOAM port info: displays state machine information for a specified MPT. A window opens: enter the slot and port of the MPT.
•
get EFMOAM port counters: displays state machine statistics for a specified MPT. A window opens: enter the slot and port of the MPT.
•
1588 TC status: displays the status of the 1588 Transparent Clock operation for the NE and for each port and radio.
The following table provides the association of the GExx in the command output and the NE port. Table 38.1 — Association of the GExx in the command output and the NE port
264
GE
Port n°
HW connection
GE05
06
SFP 2 (port #6 of the Core)
GE06
07
SFP 1 (port #5 of the Core)
GE07
08
Internal port
GE10
11
Slot 1
GE11
12
Slot 3
GE12
13
Slot 5
GE13
14
Slot 7 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Table 38.1 — Association of the GExx in the command output and the NE port GE
Port n°
HW connection
GE14
15
Slot 2
GE15
16
Slot 4
GE16
17
Slot 6
GE17
18
Eth. #1
GE18
19
Eth. #2
GE19
20
Eth. #3
GE20
21
Eth. #4
38.3 — Procedure 1.
to NE. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
Select istration → Debug Info and select a command from the pull down list. Figure 38.1 — Debug info
3.
Select either “Run command” or “Run command to File”. “Run command” provides the output on the web page. “Run command to file” provides the output on the web page and also saves the output on a file.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
265
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
266
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
39 — Retrieve RSL information using the Web Server
39.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures for retrieving Radio Signal Level information using the Web Server interface.
39.2 — General You can and save a .csv file of RSL information for any configured MPT.
39.3 — Procedure 1.
to NE. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
Select istration → Retrieve RSL Info. The Radio Signal Level Retrieval screen opens.
3.
Choose an MPT from the Configured MPTs: drop-down menu.
4.
Click on the Save File button. A Microsoft dialog box appears.
5.
Choose to open or save the file and click on the OK button.
6.
A .csv file showing the RSL information is ed.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
267
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
268
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Equipment provisioning and deprovisioning
Note: Performance monitoring on affected equipment should be disabled before making configuration changes.
•
ister Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
•
ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports
•
ister synchronization
•
Provision cross connections
•
Deprovision cross connections
•
Provision port segregation/connectivity
•
Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only)
•
Provision Ethernet ports
•
Provision Ethernet Features
•
Provision equipment port
•
Deprovision equipment ports
•
Enable equipment
•
Disable equipment
•
Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
•
Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software
•
Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring
•
Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool
•
Provision Fiber Microwave Protection
•
Provision protection scheme parameters
•
Provision Protection Type
•
Configure radio parameters
•
Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning
•
Use the Provisioning Tool
•
Apply a configuration using the Web Server
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
269
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
270
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
40 — ister Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
40.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to ister Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP).
40.2 — General Use the procedures in this chapter to modify ERP provisioning parameters. For detailed instruction to provision an Ethernet Ring, see Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP). For detailed instruction to create a Fiber Microwave Protection Ring, see Provision Fiber Microwave Protection.
40.2.1 — Modify ERP provisioning The following ERP parameters can be modified ONLY when the istrative status of the ERP Instance is disabled: •
R-APS VLAN ID: [2 to 4080];R-APS VLAN ID must meet the following requirements: •
must be different from any VLAN ID configured in the network, either 802.1Q, 802.1ad, or PDH Cross-Connections
•
must be different from any R-APS VLAN ID associated to other ERP Instances in the network
•
must be different from any VLAN ID configured for TMN In-Band
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
271
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
•
R-APS MEG Level: [0 to 7], default equals 7; R-APS MEG Level must be provisioned to the same value on all Ethernet Ring Nodes belonging to the ERP Topology on which the ERP Instance is created.
•
R-APS MEG ID East: [1 to 16]; R-APS MEG ID East identifier is the ID of the east end of the ring link and must be configured to the same value as the corresponding RAPS MEG ID West value for the west end of the ring link (ex. Ring Node 1 east port R-APS MEG ID East and Ring Node 2 west port R-APS MEG ID West must be provisioned with the same value).
•
R-APS MEG ID West: [1 to 16]; R-APS MEG ID West identifier is the ID of the west end of the ring link and must be configured to the same value as the corresponding RAPS MEG ID East value for the east end of the ring link (ex. Ring Node 4 west port R-APS MEG ID West and Ring Node 3 east port R-APS MEG ID East must be provisioned with the same value).
•
RPL Owner: Checked (Yes) or unchecked (No); One RPL Owner is required for each ERP Instance belonging to the Ring Topology. Only One RPL Owner is allowed for each ERP Instance belonging to the Ring Topology. If the Ring Node is configured as RPL Owner, the RPL Port (East or West) must also be configured.
•
RPL Port: East or West; (RPL Port is only configured if RPL Owner is yes)
The following ERP parameters can be modified when the istrative status of the ERP Instance is either enabled or disabled:
272
•
ERP Instance Label
•
Add VLAN: VLAN IDs associated to the ERP Instance. VLAN IDs associated to the ERP Instance must satisfy the following system checks: •
must be in the range from 1 to 4080
•
must be different from any VLAN ID associated to any other ERP Instance
•
must be different from R-APS VLAN ID configured in the ERP Instance
•
must be different from R-APS VLAN ID configured in any other ERP Instance
•
must be different from any VLAN ID configured for TMN In-Band
•
Wait-to-Restore Time: [1 to 12]; (Wait-to-Restore Time is only configured if RPL Owner is yes). Time period the RPL Owner waits to restore normal operation after a fault condition on the ring is corrected. Wait-to-restore is configured from 1 to 12 minutes with a default value of 5 minutes. Applicable only if ring’s node is RPL Owner for at least one instance.
•
Guard Timer: [10 to 2000]; (Guard Timer prevents Ethernet Ring Nodes from receiving outdated R-APS messages. During the duration of Guard Timer, all received R-APS messages are ignored by ERPS control process. Guard Timer is configured from 10 to 2000 ms with a default value of 500 ms.)
•
Hold Off timer on Ethernet ports: the hold off timer triggers the Ethernet Loss of Signal alarm. The timer is fixed at 500 ms.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
40.2.2 — Delete ring topology Ring topology can be deleted only when the following conditions exist: •
If no cross-connections are configured on either ERP Instance associated with the Ring Topology.
•
No ERP Instances are associated with the ERP Topology.
40.2.3 — Delete ERP Instance An ERP Instance can be deleted when the ERP Instance is either enabled or disabled. An ERP Instance can be deleted only when no cross-connections are associated with the ERP Instance. ERP Instance deletion automatically removes the VLAN ID associated with the ERP Instance from the VLAN Configuration. This removal does not modify VLAN port hip of VLANs associated to the ERP Instance. To avoid loops, the operator should first remove Ring Ports from the VLAN hip and then delete the ERP Instance. For a detailed description of the Ethernet Ring Protection feature, refer to theAlcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual.
40.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Ethernet Ring Configuration View
•
To enable an ERP Instance
•
To disable an ERP Instance
•
To modify ERP Instance parameters with ERP Instance enabled
•
To modify ERP Instance parameters which require the ERP Instance disabled
•
To delete an ERP Instance
•
To delete a Ring topology
•
To add PDH, Radio, ETH, OR -Through VLAN IDs to an ERP Instance
•
To delete PDH, Radio, ETH, OR -Through VLAN IDs from an ERP Instance
•
To add a VLAN to an ERP Instance
•
To provision the Hold off timer
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
273
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To delete VLAN IDs from an ERP Instance
•
To provision the Hold off timer
•
To force a Ring protection switch
To open the Ethernet Ring Configuration View 1.
Select Ethernet Ring Configuration View icon from the main toolbar. See Figure 40.1. Figure 40.1 — Ethernet Ring Configuration View icon
Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration window displays. See Figure 40.2. Figure 40.2 — Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration View
To enable an ERP Instance
274
1.
From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to enable. See Figure 40.2.
2.
Select ERP Enabled check box (checked).
3.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To disable an ERP Instance 1.
From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to disable. See Figure 40.2.
2.
Select ERP Enabled check box (unchecked).
3.
Click Apply.
To modify ERP Instance parameters with ERP Instance enabled 1.
From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to modify. See Figure 40.2.
2.
Modify one or more of the following ERP Instance parameters using the following procedure: See Figure 40.3 for the following steps: a.
Modify ERP Label in the Label field, if applicable.
b.
Is Ring Node RPL Owner? a.
If yes, go to step c.
b.
If no, go to step d.
c.
From the Wait-to Restore Time drop-down menu, select 1 to 12 minutes, if applicable.
d.
In the Guard Timer field, enter Guard Timer duration; 10 to 2000 ms, if applicable.
e.
Click Apply.
Figure 40.3 — Modify ERP Instance with ERP Instance enabled
To modify ERP Instance parameters which require the ERP Instance disabled 1.
From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to modify. See Figure 40.2.
2.
Disable the ERP instance; see To disable an ERP Instance.
3.
Modify one or more of the following ERP Instance parameters using the following procedure: See Figure 40.4 for the following steps: a.
Modify R-APS VLAN ID in the R-APS VLAN ID field, if applicable.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
275
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: R-APS VLAN ID must be provisioned to the same value on all Ethernet Ring Nodes belonging to the ERP Instance.
b.
From the R-APS MEG Level drop-down menu, modify R-APS MEG Level for the ERP Topology, if applicable.
Note: R-APS MEG Level must be provisioned to the same value on all Ethernet Ring Nodes belonging to the ERP Instance.
c.
From the R-APS MEG ID East drop-down menu, select new ring link east port ID#, if applicable.
d.
From the R-APS MEG ID West drop-down menu, select new ring link west port ID#, if applicable.
e.
For Ring Node which is RPL Owner, select RPL Owner check box (checked), for Ring Nodes which are not RPL Owner, RPL Owner check box (unchecked), if applicable. Is RPL Owner selected? a.
If yes, go to step f.
b.
If no, go to step g.
f.
Select RPL Owner Port, East Port or West Port, if applicable.
g.
Click Apply.
Figure 40.4 — Modify ERP Instance with ERP Instance disabled
Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration window updates. 4.
Enable the ERP instance; see To enable an ERP Instance.
To delete an ERP Instance 1.
276
An ERP Instance can be deleted when the ERP Instance is either enabled or disabled.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures An ERP Instance can be deleted only when no cross-connections are associated with the ERP Instance. ERP Instance deletion automatically removes the VLAN ID associated with the ERP Instance from the VLAN Configuration. This removal does not modify VLAN port hip of VLANs associated to the ERP Instance. To avoid loops, the operator should first remove Ring Ports from the VLAN hip and then delete the ERP Instance. Caution: To avoid loops, the operator must first remove Ring Ports from the VLAN hip of VLANs associated to the ERP Instance and then delete the ERP Instance.
2.
Modify or Delete Ethernet Flow from VLAN Configuration. For detailed steps to modify or delete VLAN Ethernet Flow, see ister VLAN configuration.
3.
Delete VLAN IDs from Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to delete PDH, Radio, Eth, and -Through to Ring cross-connections, see Deprovision cross connections.
4.
From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to delete. See Figure 40.2.
5.
Click Delete. Confirm Operation window opens.
6.
Click Yes.
To delete a Ring topology Note: Ring topology can be deleted only when the following conditions exist: If no cross-connections are configured on either ERP Instance associated with the Ring Topology No ERP Instances are associated with the ERP Topology.
1.
From the Ring Topology area, select Ring Topology to delete. See Figure 40.2.
2.
Click Delete. Confirm Operation window opens.
3.
Click Yes.
To add PDH, Radio, ETH, OR -Through VLAN IDs to an ERP Instance 1.
Add PDH, Radio, Eth, and -Through VLAN IDs to ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 40.5 for the following steps: a.
Select ERP instance to add VLAN IDs.
b.
Enter VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
277
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures e.
Click Apply. Figure 40.5 — Add VLAN IDs to ERP Instance
2.
Add VLAN IDs to Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to add PDH, Radio, Eth, and -Through to Ring cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To delete PDH, Radio, ETH, OR -Through VLAN IDs from an ERP Instance 1.
Delete VLAN IDs from Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to delete PDH, Radio, Eth, and -Through to Ring cross-connections, see Deprovision cross connections.
2.
Delete PDH, Radio, Eth, and -Through VLAN IDs from ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 40.6 for the following steps:
278
a.
Select ERP instance to delete Radio flows.
b.
Select VLAN IDs in VLAN ID table.
c.
Click Delete.
d.
VLAN IDs are removed from the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 40.6 — Delete VLAN IDs from ERP Instance
To add a VLAN to an ERP Instance 1.
Add VLAN Ethernet flows to ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 40.5 for the following steps:
2.
a.
Select ERP instance to add VLAN flows.
b.
Enter VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
Add Ethernet Flow to VLAN Configuration. For detailed steps to add VLAN Ethernet Flow, see ister VLAN configuration.
To delete VLAN IDs from an ERP Instance 1.
Delete or modify Ethernet Flow from VLAN Configuration. For detailed steps to delete or modify VLAN Ethernet Flow, see ister VLAN configuration.
2.
Delete VLAN Ethernet flows from ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 40.6 for the following steps: a.
Select ERP instance to delete VLAN flows.
b.
Select VLAN IDs in VLAN ID table.
c.
Click Delete.
d.
VLAN IDs are removed from the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
To provision the Hold off timer 1.
Provision the Hold Off timer for any Ethernet ports in the ERP Instance. For detailed steps, see Provision Ethernet ports.
To force a Ring protection switch 1.
To force a ring protection switch, perform one of the following:
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
279
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
280
•
Disable the SFP port for an optical Ethernet interface
•
Disable an L1 LAG
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
41 — ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports
41.1 — Purpose This chapter provides detailed procedures to provision and ister L1/L2 Radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports. Note: Some graphics may not match the current release.
Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
41.2 — General L1/L2 Radio and L2 Ethernet LAG port provisioning is performed using the craft terminal. Ethernet and Radio ports must be configured prior to provisioning LAG ports. If the NE is in Provider Bridge mode, the LAG port can be assigned a Provider Bridge port type and added to an S-VLAN. For a detailed description of LAG, including port hip rules, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual.
41.2.1 — Provider bridge parameters If the NE is in Provider Bridge mode, LAG ports can be configured as NNI, UNI (portbased) or UNI (VLAN-based). Parameters apply for each port type: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
281
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
NNI - S-VLAN TPID •
The S-VLAN TPID selects the service instance associated to the port for untagged and C-VLAN priority-tagged frames. The port must be in the untagged set of the SVLAN.
UNI (port-based)- Port Priority or C-VLAN Priority •
The port priority represents the priority assigned to untagged frames ingressing the port.
UNI (VLAN-based)- C-VLAN/S-VLAN mapping and egress settings Ingress settings: •
The list of C-VLAN IDs represents the list of C-VLANs to be managed by the port. By default, the list is empty. 1.
Each C-VLAN ID must be mapped to an S-VLAN which represents the service instance used to carry the C-VLAN in the network. The S-VLAN must have the port in its untagged set. More than one C-VLAN can be associated to the same S-VLAN.
2.
The Remove C-VLAN parameter can be set for each C-VLAN ID. This allows only the S-VLAN tag to be carried over the network when the association between the C-VLAN and the VLAN-based service instance is one-to-one. The Remove C-VLAN parameter can only be set for one C-VLAN mapped to an SVLAN ID.
3.
The S-VLAN priority defines the priority of the tagged Ethernet frames ingressing the port. The priority can be inherited from the P of the C-VLAN tag or configured by the . The default is inherited.
Egress settings:
282
•
The C-VLAN tag of Ethernet frames egressing the port can be removed, which declares the port as untagged. The default Untag C-VLAN parameter is false. When the port is disabled, the parameter returns to the default value.
•
For each S-VLAN ID having the port in its member set, the C-VLAN ID of the CVLAN tag to be added to Ethernet frames egressing the port can be configured. This allows a C-VLAN tag to be added to Ethernet frames carried over the network with only the S-VLAN tag, when the association between the C-VLAN and the VLANbased service instance is one-to-one. The default value is 0, which means that no association to an S-VLAN is in place and no C-VLAN tag will be added. When the port is disabled, the parameter returns to the default value.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
41.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To launch the LAG Configuration tool
•
To provision an L1 Radio LAG port
•
To provision an L2 radio LAG port (not available with a CorEvo card)
•
To create an L1/L2 Radio or L2 Ethernet LAG port
•
To add Ethernet or radio ports to LAG port
•
To remove Ethernet or radio ports from a LAG port
•
To enable a LAG port
•
To destroy an L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG port
•
To ister PPP RF configuration
•
To provision hashing level for L2 Ethernet/radio LAG port
•
To enable SSM for L1 radio LAG port
•
To enable PTB for L1 radio LAG port
•
To provision Wait-To-Restore (WTR) value
To launch the LAG Configuration tool 1.
Launch Link Aggregation L1/L2 Configuration (LAG Configuration) tool from the craft terminal. Click the LAG Configuration Icon, see Figure 41.1, or from the main menu bar, select Configuration > LAG Configuration. Figure 41.1 — LAG Configuration icon
LAG Configuration tool opens. See Figure 41.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
283
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.2 — LAG Configuration tool
To provision an L1 Radio LAG port 1.
Using the craft terminal, all radio ports, to be of the L1 Radio LAG port, are provisioned correctly. Correct any radio port provisioning that does not correspond to the desired radio performance characteristics. the following parameters: •
modulation type (mode)
•
reference channel spacing
•
modulation
•
option (presetting or adaptive modulation)
•
Synchronization SSM disabled
Radio ports with XPIC profiles can be part of the same LAG as radio ports with non-XPIC profiles. All other radio parameters must be the same. 2.
Using the craft terminal, all radio ports, to be of the L1 Radio LAG port, are not associated with the following: a.
284
Cross-Connection
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
3.
b.
VLAN
c.
Port Segregation
d.
PPP RF enabled on the radio channel
e.
Synchronization reference
f.
SSM
g.
Pkt throughput booster enabled (except MPT-HL on EASv2)
h.
MPT-HL radio connected to a Core card
i.
MPT-HLC radio connected to a Core or P8ETH card
Create L1 Radio LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to create L1 Radio LAG port, see To create an L1/L2 Radio or L2 Ethernet LAG port.
4.
Add Radio ports to L1 Radio LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to add radio ports to an L1 Radio LAG port, see To add Ethernet or radio ports to LAG port.
5.
Provision WTR parameter.
Note: For a detailed procedure to provision WTR parameter, see To provision Wait-ToRestore (WTR) value.
6.
Provision PPP RF Configuration.The Remote IP Address field shows the IP address of the remote connected NE.
Note: For a detailed procedure to provision PPP RF Configuration, see To ister PPP RF configuration.
7.
Click Apply.
8.
From the LAG Information pane, select the Enabled check box (checked).
9.
Click Apply.
10. Provision SSM . Note: For a detailed procedure to provision SSM , see To enable SSM for L1 radio LAG port and To disable SSM for L1 radio LAG port.
11. Provision packet throughput booster (PTB) if available. Note: For a detailed procedure to provision PTB, see To enable PTB for L1 radio LAG port and To disable PTB for L1 radio LAG port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
285
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 12. Click Apply. 13. L1 Radio LAG port provisioning. To provision an L2 radio LAG port (not available with a CorEvo card) 1.
2.
3.
Using the craft terminal, all radio ports, to be of the L2 Radio LAG port, are provisioned correctly. Correct any radio port provisioning that does not correspond to the desired radio performance characteristics. the following parameters: •
Tx and Rx Frequency
•
Shifter
•
Synchronization SSM enabled/disabled
Using the craft terminal, all radio ports, to be of the L2 Radio LAG port, are not associated with the following: •
Cross-Connection
•
Port Segregation
•
VLAN
•
PPP RF enabled on the radio channel
•
MPT-HL radio connected to a Core-E card
•
MPT-HLC radio connected to a Core-E or P8ETH card
Create L2 Radio LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to create L2 Radio LAG port, see To create an L1/L2 Radio or L2 Ethernet LAG port.
4.
Add Radio ports to L2 Radio LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to add radio ports to an L2 Radio LAG port, see To add Ethernet or radio ports to LAG port.
5.
Provision PPP RF Configuration. The Remote IP Address field shows the IP address of the remote connected NE.
Note: For a detailed procedure to provision PPP RF Configuration, see To ister PPP RF configuration.
286
6.
From the LAG Information pane Hash drop-down menu, select hashing level: (L2 or L3).
7.
From the LAG Information pane, select Enabled check box (checked).
8.
Click Apply.
9.
L2 Radio LAG port provisioning.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision an L2 Ethernet LAG port 1.
2.
Using the craft terminal, all Ethernet ports to be of the L2 Ethernet LAG port are provisioned the same. Correct any Ethernet provisioning that does not correspond to the desired LAG performance characteristics. the following parameters: •
d Capability (only Full Duplex ed)
•
Auto Negotiation: Enable or Disabled (All either enabled or disabled)
•
Synchronous Ethernet Operation Mode
Using the craft terminal, all Ethernet ports, to be of the LAG port, are not associated with the following: •
Cross-Connection
•
Port Segregation
•
VLAN
3.
If the Ethernet ports that will be of the L2 Ethernet LAG port will be used as TMN in-band interfaces, that the TMN in-band has been configured and that the Ethernet ports that will be included in the LAG have been selected. See ister In-Band TMN VLAN port.
4.
Create L2 Ethernet LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to create L2 Ethernet LAG port, see To create an L1/L2 Radio or L2 Ethernet LAG port.
5.
Add Ethernet ports to L2 Ethernet LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to add Ethernet ports to a LAG port, see To add Ethernet or radio ports to LAG port, step 1.
6.
Provision VLAN Configuration.
Note: For a detailed procedure to provision VLAN Configuration, see ister VLAN configuration, step 5.
7.
From the LAG Information pane Hash drop-down menu, select hashing level: (L2 or L3).
8.
From the LAG Information pane, select Enabled check box (checked).
9.
Click Apply.
10. L2 Ethernet LAG port provisioning. To create an L1/L2 Radio or L2 Ethernet LAG port
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
287
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Caution: Adding the first radio port, which is carrying traffic, to a L1 Radio LAG port has an impact to traffic.
Note: When adding the first radio (Lowest Index Port) to L1 Radio LAG, the following port add restrictions do not apply. For this case, the following parameters will be reassigned to the LAG port. L2 Radio LAG is not available if a CorEvo card is in use.
1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, in the configured LAGs pane, click Create. See Figure 41.2. The LAG Creation window displays. See Figure 41.3. Figure 41.3 — LAG Creation window
L1 Radio LAG Create
L2 Radio LAG Create
L2 Ethernet LAG Create
i ii iii iv
i ii iii iv v
i ii iii iv v vi vii
v
vi
viii 22900
2.
Create a LAG port using the following procedure: See Figure 41.3. i.
From the ID drop-down menu, select LAG ID number (1 - 14 if a CoreE, MSS-1 or MSS-O is in use, or 1-12 if a CorEvo card is in use).
ii.
Enter the LAG name, optional (up to 32 characters).
iii.
From the Type drop-down menu, select (L1 Radio, L2 Radio, or L2 Ethernet).
iv.
From the Size drop-down menu, select LAG size
v.
If Type is provisioned L2 Ethernet/Radio, then from the Key drop-down menu, select the Key value (1 - 32).
vi.
If Type is provisioned L2 Ethernet, then from the LA drop-down menu, select LA (Active, ive, or Disabled).
vii. If LA is provisioned Active or ive, then from the Timeout field, select time-out period (Short or Long). viii. Click Create. The LAG Creation window closes. The L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG is added to the LAG Configuration Tool. See Figure 41.4. 288
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.4 — L2 Ethernet LAG created
To add Ethernet or radio ports to LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, add Ethernet/Radio ports to LAG port using the following procedure: To add L1 Radio port to LAG port, see Figure 41.5. To add L2 Radio port to LAG port, see Figure 41.6. To add L2 Ethernet port to LAG port, see Figure 41.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
289
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.5 — Add radio ports to L1 radio LAG
i
ii
iii 25223
290
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.6 — Add radio ports to L2 radio LAG
i
iii iv
ii
vii 22903
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
291
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.7 — Add Ethernet ports to Ethernet LAG
i
iii iv
vii
v 22901
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to add port.
ii.
If LAG Type is provisioned L2 Radio, then from the Available Ports pane, select Radio port type (MPT).
iii.
From Available Ports pane, select port to add to LAG.
iv.
Click >.
v.
If Type is provisioned L2 Ethernet, then from the Added Ports pane, select priority (0 or 65535). Note: default priority value is 128.
vi.
Repeat steps i through v to add additional ports to the LAG.
vii. Click Apply. To remove Ethernet or radio ports from a LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, remove Ethernet/Radio ports from LAG port using the following procedure: To remove L1 Radio port from LAG port, see Figure 41.8. To remove L2 Radio port from LAG port, see Figure 41.9. To remove L2 Ethernet port from LAG port, see Figure 41.10.
292
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: To remove the last port member of a LAG, the LAG port must first be disabled.
Figure 41.8 — Remove L1 radio ports from LAG port
i
ii
iii iv
v vi
viii 22908
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
293
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.9 — Remove L2 radio ports from LAG port
i
iii iv
ii
vii 22903
294
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.10 — Remove Ethernet ports from LAG port
i
v vi
viii 22909
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to remove ports.
ii.
If last L1/L2 Radio LAG port and PPP RF is enabled, then from the PPP RF pane, select the Enabled check box (unchecked).
iii.
If last L1 Radio LAG port and SSM is enabled, then from the SSM pane, select the Enabled check box (unchecked).
iv.
If last L1 Radio LAG port and PTB is enabled, then from the PTB pane, select the Enabled check box (unchecked).
v.
From the Added Ports pane, select the Port to remove from LAG.
vi.
Click <.
vii. Repeat this procedure to remove additional ports from the LAG. Note: In Provider Bridge mode, a port removed from an L2 Ethernet LAG will be managed as an NNI port.
viii. Click Apply. To enable a LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, enable LAG port using the following procedure: See Figure 41.11.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
295
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.11 — Enable/disable LAG port
i
ii
iii 22905
2.
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select the LAG to enable.
ii.
From the LAG Information pane, select the Enabled check box (checked).
iii.
Click Apply.
Disable LAG port Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, disable LAG port using the following procedure: See Figure 41.11.
Note: To disable a LAG port, all cross-connections, VLANs, and Port segregation, synchronization reference provisioning must be removed from the LAG port. If the L2 Ethernet LAG port is configured as UNI (VLAN-Based) in Provider Bridge mode, to disable a LAG port, Ingress C-VLAN / S-VLAN Mappings must be removed.
3.
296
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to disable.
ii.
From the LAG Information pane, select the Enabled check box (unchecked).
iii.
Click Apply.
Configure Provider Bridge port type of an L2 Ethernet LAG port
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The NE must be in Provider Bridge mode.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, configure the port type using the following procedure: See Figure 41.12. 4.
that the LAG port is enabled. To enable it, go to step 1. i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select the L2 Ethernet LAG.
ii.
Select the Provider Bridge tab.
iii.
Choose the port type: NNI, UNI (port-based), or UNI (VLAN-based). Figure 41.12 — Provider bridge tab
i
ii
iii iv
v 23656
iv.
v.
Configure port type parameters: •
for NNI, choose the S-VLAN TPID from the drop-down menu
•
for UNI (port-based), choose Port Priority or C-VLAN Priority
•
for UNI (VLAN-based), configure C-VLAN/S-VLAN mapping and egress settings
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
297
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 5.
ister VLAN configuration Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, ister VLAN Configuration using the following procedure: See Figure 41.13.
Note: To assign a Port VLAN other than VLAN 1, the Port VLAN must be created and assigned using the VLAN configuration tool. See ister VLAN configuration for detailed instruction to create and assign VLAN. Figure 41.13 — ister Ethernet LAG VLAN configuration
i
ii ii iv
v 22902
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to ister VLAN Configuration.
ii.
From the VLAN Configuration pane, in the Acceptable Frame Types field, select: (it all or it tagged only).
iii.
If it all is selected, then provision Port VLAN ID (1 to 4080). Note: VLAN ID must be provisioned with the VLAN Configuration tool prior to provisioning VLAN Configuration.
298
iv.
If it all is selected, then provision Priority (0 to 7).
v.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To destroy an L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG port 1.
2.
Using the craft terminal, L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG port, to be destroyed, is not associated with any of the following: •
Cross-Connections
•
Port Segregation
•
VLANs
•
If L1 radio LAG port, synchronization reference
•
If L1 radio LAG port, PPP RF enabled
•
If L1 radio LAG port, SSM enabled
To disable an L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG port.
Note: For a detailed procedure to disable L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG port, see Disable LAG port, step 2.
3.
Remove Ethernet or Radio ports from LAG.
Note: For a detailed procedure to remove Ethernet or Radio ports from a LAG port, see To remove Ethernet or radio ports from a LAG port, step 1.
4.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to destroy. See Figure 41.2.
5.
From the Configured LAGs pane, click Destroy. The Confirm operation window displays.
6.
Click Yes. The L2 Ethernet or L1/L2 Radio LAG port is removed from the Configured LAGs pane.
To ister PPP RF configuration 1.
2.
Select action. a.
To Enable PPP RF on radio LAG port, go to step 2.
b.
To Disable PPP RF on radio LAG port, go to step 3.
Enable PPP RF on radio LAG port Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, enable PPP RF configuration using the following procedure: See Figure 41.14.
Note: The PPP RF channel for TMN is managed at LAG level and not at ODU level.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
299
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: In applications with two parallel LAG groups, the PPP rules are the same as for Nx(1+0) and Nx(1+1). The PPP RF option must be disabled on all links except one. The PPP traffic may us the other links for protection, when the enabled link is failed. This protection may require waiting for the destination MAC address to age out of the forwarding table before recovering. Figure 41.14 — Enable PPP RF on L1/L2 radio LAG configuration
i
ii iii iv
v 22904
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to enable PPP RF channel.
ii.
From the PPP RF pane, select Enabled check box (checked).
iii.
Select Routing IP Protocol: (OSPF or None).
iv.
If OSPF is selected, then select OSPF Area: (0 to 4). Note: OSPF Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning PPP RF channel.
v. 3.
Click Apply.
Disable PPP RF on radio LAG port Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, disable PPP RF configuration using the following procedure: See Figure 41.14. i.
300
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to disable PPP RF channel. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ii.
From the PPP RF pane, select Enabled check box (unchecked).
iii.
Click Apply.
To provision hashing level for L2 Ethernet/radio LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, provision Hashing level using the following procedure: See Figure 41.15.
Figure 41.15 — Provision hashing level for L2 Ethernet/radio LAG port
i
ii
iii 22910
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to provision hashing level.
ii.
From the LAG Information pane, in the Hash drop-down menu, select (L2 or L3).
iii.
Click Apply.
To enable SSM for L1 radio LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, enable SSM using the following procedure: See Figure 41.16.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
301
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 41.16 — L1 radio LAG configuration
i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to enable SSM .
ii.
From the SSM pane, select Enabled check box (checked).
iii.
Click Apply.
To disable SSM for L1 radio LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, disable SSM using the following procedure: See Figure 41.16. i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to disable SSM .
ii.
From the SSM pane, select Enabled check box (unchecked).
iii.
Click Apply.
To enable PTB for L1 radio LAG port 1.
302
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, enable PTB using the following procedure: See Figure 41.16. i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select the LAG to enable PTB.
ii.
From the PTB pane, select the Enabled check box (checked).
iii.
Click Apply. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To disable PTB for L1 radio LAG port 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, disable PTB using the following procedure: See Figure 41.16. i.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select the LAG to disable PTB.
ii.
From the PTB pane, select the Enabled check box (unchecked).
iii.
Click Apply.
To provision Wait-To-Restore (WTR) value 1.
Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, provision WTR value using the following procedure: See Figure 41.16. a.
From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to provision WTR value.
b.
From the WTR drop-down menu, select WTR period (100 ms to 8 sec).
c.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
303
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
304
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
42 — ister synchronization
42.1 — Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to ister NE synchronization.
42.2 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To view synchronization provisioning
•
To view Synchronization Protection Scheme
•
To enable 1588 Transparent Clock
•
To provision Synchronization — Master
•
To provision Synchronization — Slave
•
To view Radio Channel SSM summary
•
To provision Radio Channel SSM
To view synchronization provisioning 1.
To view synchronization provisioning Select Synchronization tab.
2.
Select Synchronization Source in the resource tree area.
3.
Select Settings tab in the resource detail area. Synchronization Settings tab displays. See Figure 42.1 and Figure 42.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
305
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 42.1 — Synchronization settings tab with Core-E (1588TC license present)
Figure 42.2 — Synchronization settings tab with CorEvo (1588TC license and Sync In/Out SFP not present)
306
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To view Synchronization Protection Scheme 1.
Select Protection Schemes tab.
2.
Select Synchronization Protection in the resource tree area. Synchronization Protection tab displays. See Figure 42.3. The Primary/Secondary row displays details regarding the synchronization source. The Status column displays the synchronization source status, either Active or Standby. Figure 42.3 — Synchronization Protection tab
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
307
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To enable 1588 Transparent Clock 1.
Select Synchronization tab.
2.
Select Synchronization Source in the resource tree area.
3.
Select the 1588 tab in the resource detail area. The 1588 tab displays. See Figure 42.4. Figure 42.4 — 1588 tab
4.
Select the Enabled check box.
5.
Click on the Apply button. The 1588 Transparent Clock is enabled.
To provision Synchronization — Master 1.
Select the Synchronization tab.
2.
Select Synchronization Source in the resource tree area.
3.
Select the Settings tab in the resource detail area. Synchronization Settings tab displays. See Figure 42.1.
308
4.
Select the Master radio button in the Role partition.
5.
Select a Restoration mode radio button: Revertive or Not Revertive.
6.
Select a Primary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Sync-In Port, Eth Port, or STM-1/OC-3 Port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: If an MSS-1 is in use, the E1/T1 option is displayed instead of E1/DS1.
7.
8.
Which primary source was selected? a.
If Sync-In Port, go to step 8.
b.
If E1/DS1 Port, go to step 11.
c.
If Eth Port, go to step 14.
d.
If STM-1/OC3 Port, go to step 17.
e.
If Free Run Local Oscillator, go to step 29.
In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync In Port drop-down menu, select Sync In Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs. The Sync In Port appears as NOT USED. The SFP is displayed as Sync In Port #5, #6, #7, #8, depending on where the SFP is placed; see Figure 42.5.
9.
Select Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Eth Port, STM-1/OC-3 port, or None.
10. Go to step 20. 11. From the E1/DS1 Port drop-down menu, select the E1/DS1 Port. 12. Select Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Sync-In Port, Eth Port, STM-1/OC-3 port, or None. 13. Go to step 20. 14. From the Eth Port drop-down menu, select the Eth Port. 15. Select Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Sync-In Port, Eth Port, STM-1/OC-3 port, or None. 16. Go to step 20. 17. From the STM-1/OC-3 Port drop-down menu, select the STM-1OC-3. 18. Select Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Sync-In Port, Eth Port, STM-1/OC-3 port, L1 Radio LAG port, or None. 19. Go to step 20. 20. Which secondary source was selected? a.
If Sync-In Port, go to step 21.
b.
If E1/DS1 Port, go to step 23.
c.
If Eth Port, go to step 25.
d.
If STM-1/OC-3 Port, go to step 27.
e.
If Free Run Local Oscillator, go to step 29.
f.
If None, go to step 29.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
309
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 21. In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync In port drop-down menu, select the Sync In Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs. The Sync In Port appears as NOT USED. The SFP is displayed as Sync In Port #5, #6, #7, #8, depending on where the SFP is placed; see Figure 42.5. Figure 42.5 — Sync Ports with Sync-In/Out SFP
22. Go to step 29. 23. From the E1/DS1 Port drop-down menu, select the E1/DS1 Port. 24. Go to step 29. 25. From the Eth Port drop-down menu, select the Eth Port. 26. Go to step 29. 27. From the STM-1/OC-3 Port drop-down menu, select the STM-1/OC-3 Port. 28. Go to step 29. 29. Provision Sync Out Port? a.
If yes, go to step 30.
b.
If no, go to step 31.
30. In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync Out Port drop-down menu, select the Sync Out Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs. The Sync Out Port appears as NOT USED. The SFP is displayed as Sync Out Port #5, #6, #7, #8, depending on where the SFP is placed; see Figure 42.5.
31. In the Wait-To-Restore time entry boxes select the wait to restore time in minutes (min.) [0-12] and seconds (sec.) [0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50]. 32. Click Apply.
310
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 42.6 — Synchronization - Master / Revertive
To provision Synchronization — Slave 1.
Select the Synchronization tab.
2.
Click the Synchronization Source in the resource tree area.
3.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. Synchronization Settings tab displays. See Figure 42.1.
4.
Select the Slave radio button in the Role partition.
5.
Select a Primary Source radio button: Sync-In Port, Radio/MPT Port, or Eth Port.
6.
Which primary source was selected?
7.
a.
If Sync-In Port, go to step 7.
b.
If Radio/MPT Port, go to step 10.
c.
If Eth Port, go to step 13.
In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync In port drop-down menu, select the Sync-In Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs. The Sync In Port appears as NOT USED. The SFP is displayed as Sync In Port #5, #6, #7, #8, depending on where the SFP is placed; see Figure 42.5.
8.
Select a Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Radio/MPT Port, Eth Port, STM-1/OC-3 port, or None.
9.
Go to step 15.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
311
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 10. From the Radio/MPT Port drop-down menu, select the Radio Port. The port can be a radio channel or an L1 Radio LAG. 11. Select Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Sync-In Port, Radio/MPT Port, Eth Port, OC-3 port, L1 Radio LAG port, or None. 12. Go to step 15. 13. From the Eth Port drop-down menu, select the Eth Port. 14. Select Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Sync-In Port, Radio/MPT Port, Eth Port, STM-1/OC-3 port, or None. 15. Which secondary source was selected? a.
If Sync-In Port, go to step 16.
b.
If E1/DS1 Port, go to step 18.
c.
If Radio Port, go to step 20.
d.
If Eth Port, go to step 22.
e.
If STM-1/OC-3 Port, go to step 24.
f.
If Free Run Local Oscillator, go to step 26.
g.
If None, go to step 26.
16. In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync In port drop-down menu, select the Sync-In Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs. The Sync In Port appears as NOT USED. The SFP is displayed as Sync In Port #5, #6, #7, #8, depending on where the SFP is placed; see Figure 42.5.
17. Go to step 26. 18. From the E1/DS1 Port drop-down menu, select the E1/DS1 Port. 19. Go to step 26. 20. From the Radio/MPT Port drop-down menu, select the Radio Port. The port can be a radio channel or an L1 Radio LAG. 21. Go to step 26. 22. From the Eth Port drop-down menu, select the Eth Port. 23. Go to step 26. 24. From the STM1 (OC-3) Port drop-down menu, select the STM1/OC-3 Port. 25. Go to step 26. 26. Provision Sync Out Port? a.
If yes, go to step 27.
b.
If no, go to step 28.
27. In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync Out port drop-down menu, select the Sync Out Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz.
312
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs. The Sync Out Port appears as NOT USED. The SFP is displayed as Sync Out Port #5, #6, #7, #8, depending on where the SFP is placed; see Figure 42.5.
28. In the Wait-To-Restore time entry boxes select the wait to restore time in minutes (min.) [0-12] and seconds (sec.) [0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50]. 29. Click Apply. Figure 42.7 — Synchronization - Slave / Revertive
To view Radio Channel SSM summary 1.
Select Synchronization tab.
2.
Select Synchronization Source in the resource tree area.
3.
Select Settings tab in the resource detail area. Synchronization Settings tab displays. See Figure 42.1.
4.
Select SSM Summary button in the resource detail area. SSM Summary Table displays. See Figure 42.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
313
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 42.8 — SSM Summary table
5.
View SSM provisioning status.
6.
Close SSM Summary Table.
To provision Radio Channel SSM 1.
Select Equipment tab.
2.
Select Radio Direction to provision SSM in the resource tree area. For MPT-HL radio direction, select MPT-HL Dir#-Ch#. For MPT-HLC radio direction, select MPT-HLC Dir#-Ch#. For MPT-HC/XP radio direction, select MPT-HC Dir#-Ch#. For MPT-HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM radio direction, select MPTHQAM Dir#-Ch#. The selected name will be highlighted in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/XP/XP-HQAM icon in blue in the resource list area.
3.
Double click the blue radio icon.
4.
Select the Additional Settings tab in the resource detail area. The radio direction Additional Settings tab displays. See Figure 42.9 for an example.
314
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 42.9 — MPT-HL Radio Channel Additional Settings tab
5.
Provision radio channel SSM? a.
To enable SSM, go to step 6.
b.
To disable SSM, go to step 8.
c.
To leave SSM provisioning unchanged, go to step 10.
6.
Select the SSM check box: Enabled (checked).
7.
Go to step 9.
8.
Select the SSM check box: Enabled (unchecked).
9.
Click Apply.
10. Close the radio channel window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
315
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
316
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
43 — Provision cross connections
43.1 — Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to provision cross connections from the Cross Connections screen. For AUX cross-connections, see Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only).
43.2 — General Cross connection is only required for TDM traffic. Generic Ethernet traffic is handled automatically via MAC Address learning in the Ethernet switch. Cross connections can also be used with point-to-point VLAN Ethernet traffic to direct traffic based on a VLAN tag rather than MAC address. The cross connections screen (MSS-4/8) is used to configure switching of packetized data through the MSS-4/8 Core card. See Figure 43.1 for an example of the MSS-4/8 Cross Connections screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
317
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General Figure 43.1 — MSS-4/8 Cross-Connections screen
The cross connections screen (MSS-1) is used to configure switching of packetized data through the MSS-1 Core ports. See Figure 43.2 for an example of the MSS-1 Cross Connections screen.
318
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 PDH to radio: Figure 43.2 — MSS-1 Cross-Connections screen
43.3 — PDH to radio: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering E1/DS1 cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing E1/DS1 cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision E1/DS1 cross-connections while the main Core card is Active. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.3.1 — Prerequisites Each E1/DS1/DS3 port and radio port must be enabled on the respective E1/DS1/DS3 card and Core/MPTACC/P8ETH/EASv2 card or Radio LAG port provisioning screens. The Service Profile on each E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen must be set to TDM2TDM for each E1/DS1/DS3 cross connect when both termination points of the E1/DS1/DS3 circuit are terminated on 9500 MPR equipment. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
319
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 SDH to radio:
The Service Profile on each E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen must be set to TDM2ETH for each E1/DS1/DS3 cross connect when one of the termination points of the E1/DS1/DS3 circuit are terminated on non-9500 MPR equipment, and the other equipment is MEF-8 compliant. Each E1/DS1/DS3 line to be cross connected must have a unique Flow ID number assigned to it on the respective E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
43.4 — SDH to radio: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering SDH cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing SDH cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision SDH cross-connections while the main Core card is Active. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.4.1 — Prerequisites Each SDH port and radio port must be enabled on the respective SDH card and Core/ MPTACC/P8ETH/EASv2 card or MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Radio L1 LAG port provisioning screens. The Service Profile on all SDH card Settings screen must be set to SDH2SDH for each SDH cross connect. Each SDH line to be cross connected must have a unique Flow ID number assigned to it on the respective SDH card Settings screen. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
320
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 SDH to Ring:
43.5 — SDH to Ring: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering SDH cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing SDH cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision SDH cross-connections while the main Core card is Active. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.5.1 — Prerequisites Each SDH port and Ring port must be enabled on the respective SDH card and Ethernet Ring Protection Configuration provisioning screens. The Service Profile on all SDH card Settings screen must be set to SDH2SDH for each SDH cross connect. Each SDH line to be cross connected must have a unique Flow ID number assigned to it on the respective SDH card Settings screen. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. For information about Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring, see Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring.
43.6 — SDH to LAG: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering SDH cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing SDH cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision SDH cross-connections while the main Core card is Active. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
321
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 PDH to Ethernet:
43.6.1 — Prerequisites Each SDH port and LAG port must be enabled on the respective provisioning screens. The LAG must be a Layer1 LAG on an EASv2 card. In the ANSI market, the LAG must be composed of MPT-HLC radios. The Service Profile on all SDH card Settings screen must be set to SDH2SDH for each SDH cross connect. Each SDH line to be cross connected must have a unique Flow ID number assigned to it on the respective SDH card Settings screen. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
43.7 — PDH to Ethernet: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering E1/DS1 cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing E1/DS1 cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision E1/DS1 cross-connections while the main Core card is Active. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.7.1 — Prerequisites The E1/DS1/DS3 card (source) and Core, P8ETH or EASv2 card (destination) must be enabled on the respective E1/DS1/DS3 card, and Core, P8ETH or EASv2 card or Ethernet LAG port provisioning screens. The Service Profile on the E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen must be set to TDM2ETH for each E1/DS1/DS3 cross connected. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
322
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Ethernet to radio:
43.8 — Ethernet to radio: Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.8.1 — Prerequisites The Ethernet port (source) and radio port (destination) must be enabled on the respective Core, MPTACC, EAS card, or Ethernet/Radio LAG port provisioning screens. Ranging Flow ID entry is ed. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet port and all other parallel radio ports. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet and radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
43.9 — Radio to radio: Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.9.1 — Prerequisites Both radios and/or Radio LAG ports must be enabled on the respective card or Ethernet LAG port provisioning screens. When making a cross connection between two radio cards: •
Use the TDM2TDM service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured TDM2TDM.
•
Use the TDM2ETH service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured TDM2ETH.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
323
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 PDH to Ring:
•
Use the SDH2SDH service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured SDH2SDH.
Ranging Flow ID entry is ed. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and all other parallel radio ports. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
43.10 — PDH to Ring: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering E1/DS1 cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing E1/DS1 cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision E1/DS1 cross-connections while the main Core card is Active. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.10.1 — Prerequisites Each E1/DS1/DS3 port and Ring port must be enabled on the respective E1/DS1/DS3 card and Ethernet Ring Protection Configuration provisioning screens. The Service Profile on each E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen must be set to TDM2TDM for each E1/DS1/DS3 cross connect when both termination points of the E1/DS1/DS3 circuit are terminated on 9500 MPR equipment. The Service Profile on each E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen must be set to TDM2ETH for each E1/DS1/DS3 cross connect when one of the termination points of the E1/DS1/DS3 circuit are terminated on non-9500 MPR equipment, and the other equipment is MEF-8 compliant. Each E1/DS1/DS3 line to be cross connected must have a unique Flow ID number assigned to it on the respective E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen. Each E1/DS1/DS3 Flow ID must be added and applied to the ERP Instance on the Ethernet Ring Protection Configuration provisioning screen.
324
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Radio to Ring:
appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. For information about Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring, see Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring.
43.11 — Radio to Ring: Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.11.1 — Prerequisites Radio interfaces and Ring ports must be enabled on the respective card and Ethernet Ring Protection Configuration provisioning screens. When making a cross connection between radio card and Ethernet Ring port: •
Use the TDM2TDM service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured TDM2TDM.
•
Use the TDM2ETH service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured TDM2ETH.
appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and all other parallel radio ports. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. For information about Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring, see Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
325
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Ethernet to Ring:
43.12 — Ethernet to Ring: Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
43.12.1 — Prerequisites The Ethernet port (Core) and Ring port (destination) must be enabled on the respective Core card and Ethernet Ring Protection Configuration provisioning screens. appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet port and all other parallel radio ports. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet and radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
43.13 — Ring to Ring: Ring to Ring cross-connections are required at all -through Ring nodes. Traffic flows (PDH to Ring, Radio to Ring, and ETH to Ring) which enter and exit the Ring, at nodes other than the node being provisioned, require Ring to Ring cross connection provisioned.
43.13.1 — Prerequisites Ring ports must be enabled on the Ethernet Ring Protection Configuration provisioning screens. When making a cross connection between Ethernet Ring port and Ethernet Ring port:
326
•
Use the TDM2TDM service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured TDM2TDM.
•
Use the TDM2ETH service profile if the termination points of the circuit are configured TDM2ETH.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Ring to Ring:
appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and all other parallel radio ports. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. For information about Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring, see Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring.
43.13.1.1 — Icon shapes The shape of the icon identifies the port types available in the slot as follows: RADIO (Core/MPT-HC/MPT-HC-HQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM/ MSS-CORE), PDH (P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 cards), ETH (Ethernet) one of six connectors on the Core-E card, one of eight connectors on the EAS or CorEvo card, ETH LAG (Ethernet LAG), RADIO LAG (Radio LAG), or Ethernet Ring (Ring). Ethernet port involved in an Ethernet LAG are only present in the LAG/RING area (not in the Core, P8ETH or EASv2 area). Radio ports involved in an Ethernet Ring are not available for cross-connection. Crossconnections to these radio ports are made through the Ring icon in the LAG/RING area (not in the Radio area). Figure 43.3 — Cross-Connection port icons
43.13.2 — Icon colors The colors of the icons on the cross connections screen can be used to quickly determine the current state of the source and destination. The icon colors are defined as follows: •
White icon indicates the ports are enabled but are not currently cross connected.
•
Blue icon on RADIO and PDH (P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3) ports indicates the ports are disabled or fully cross connected.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
327
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Ring to Ring:
•
Blue icon on ETH (Ethernet) ports indicates the ports are disabled.
•
Green icon indicates the ports are cross connected.
•
Gray icon indicates the port is a spare port of a protection pair.
43.13.3 — Line colors The drag and drop line, the operator inserts, between icons indicates an electrical connection. The color of the line indicates type of data and direction. The line colors are defined as follows: •
Black Line - PDH (P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3) and SDH (SDHACC) to RADIO (Core/ MPT-HC/MPT-HC-HQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM/ Radio LAG), and SDH to LAG.
•
Blue Line - PDH (P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3) to ETH (Ethernet)
•
Red Line - RADIO (Core/MPT-HC/MPT-HC-HQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/ MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM/Radio LAG) to RADIO (Core/MPT-HC/MPT-HCHQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM/Radio LAG)
•
Green Line - RADIO (Core/MPT-HC/MPT-HC-HQAM/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/ MPT-XP/MPT-XP-HQAM/Radio LAG) to ETH (Ethernet)
•
Cyan Line - Ring cross-connections Figure 43.4 — Cross Connection: Line Color detail
328
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Mouse operation
43.14 — Mouse operation 43.14.1 — Single right-click icon A single right button click on an icon highlights (selects) the resource and opens up an information window. Figure 43.5 — Cross Connection: single right-click icon detail
43.14.2 — Double-click on the line A double-click on a line selects the resource and opens up an information window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
329
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Mouse operation Figure 43.6 — Cross Connection: double left-click line detail
43.14.3 — Double right-click on the line A double right button click on a line selects the resource and opens up an information window. Figure 43.7 — Cross Connection: Double right-click line detail
330
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
43.15 — Procedures Caution: Entering E1/DS1 cross-connections while the spare Core card is Active may affect existing E1/DS1 cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision E1/DS1 cross-connections while the main Core is Active.
This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Cross Connections screen
•
To provision a PDH to Radio Cross connection
•
To provision a PDH to Ethernet Cross Connection
•
To provision an SDH to Radio Cross connection
•
To provision an SDH to Ring Cross connection
•
To provision an SDH to LAG Cross connection
•
To provision an Ethernet to Radio Cross Connection
•
To provision Radio to Radio Cross Connection
•
To provision a PDH to Ring Cross Connection
•
To provision a Radio to Ring Cross Connection
•
To provision an Ethernet to Ring Cross Connection
•
To provision a Ring to Ring Cross Connection
To open the Cross Connections screen 1.
From the Main Menu Bar, select Configuration>Cross Connections. The Cross Connections window opens. See Figure 43.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
331
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.8 — Configuration Cross Connection window
2. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. To provision a PDH to Radio Cross connection 1.
Select PDH port and drag to draw line to RADIO port. PDH-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 43.9.
332
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.9 — PDH-RADIO Cross Connection
2.
On the PDH_RADIO pop-up, select check box for all Flow ID numbers to be cross connected.
3.
On the PDH_RADIO pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
5.
From the Connections tab, the PDH_RADIO cross-connection was entered correctly.
To provision a PDH to Ethernet Cross Connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the Ethernet port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select PDH port and drag to draw line to ETH port. PDH-ETH pop-up displays. See Figure 43.10.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
333
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.10 — PDH to Ethernet Cross Connection
3.
On the PDH-Eth pop-up, select Flow ID number from Flow ID drop-down list.
4.
Enter the destination MAC address where the PDH will be terminated in the MAC Address field.
Note: The first two digits of the destination MAC address for unprotected ports must be set to ‘unicast’ or ‘00’. The first two digits of the destination MAC address for 1+1 protected ports must be set to ‘multicast’ or ‘01’.
5.
On the PDH-ETH pop-up, click OK.
6.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
7.
From the Connections tab, the PDH-ETH cross-connection was entered correctly.
To provision an SDH to Radio Cross connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
1.
334
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
Select SDH port and drag to draw line to RADIO port. SDH-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 43.11. Figure 43.11 — SDH-RADIO Cross Connection
3.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RADIO pop-up, the Flow ID number to be cross connected.
4.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RADIO pop-up, click OK.
5.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
6.
From the Connections tab, the SDH_RADIO cross-connection was entered correctly.
To provision an SDH to Ring Cross connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
335
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select SDH port and drag to draw line to RING port. SDH-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 43.12. Figure 43.12 — SDH-RING Cross Connection
336
3.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RING pop-up, the ERP instance to be cross connected.
4.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RING pop-up, the Flow Id to be cross connected.
5.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RING pop-up, click OK.
6.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
7.
From the Connections tab, the SDH_RING cross-connection was entered correctly.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision an SDH to LAG Cross connection 1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. Select SDH port and drag to draw line to an L1 LAG on an EASv2 card. SDH-RADIO LAG pop-up displays. See Figure 43.13. Figure 43.13 — SDH to LAG configuration dialog
2.
On the STM-1_RADIO LAG pop-up, the Flow Id to be cross connected.
3.
On the STM-1_RADIO LAG pop-up, click OK. The completed cross-connection appears (see Figure 43.14). The priority of the SDH flows must be configured in the LAG; see ister SDH LAG.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
337
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.14 — Completed SDH to LAG cross-connection
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
5.
From the Connections tab, the SDH_RADIO LAG cross-connection was entered correctly.
To provision an Ethernet to Radio Cross Connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet port and all other parallel radio ports. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the Ethernet and radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select ETH port and drag to draw line to Radio port. RADIO-ETH pop-up displays. See Figure 43.15.
338
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.15 — Ethernet to Radio Cross Connection
3.
On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, enter Flow ID number in the Flow ID field.
Note: Ranging is ed for RADIO-ETH cross-connection entry.
4.
From the Profile drop-down menu, select TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH.
5.
Is the Profile configured with TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step 6.
b.
If no, go to step 7.
6.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select ADAPTIVE or DIFFERENTIAL.
7.
Enter the destination MAC address where the RADIO will be terminated in the MAC Address field.
Note: The first two digits of the destination MAC address for unprotected ports must be set to ‘unicast’ or ‘00’. The first two digits of the destination MAC address for 1+1 protected ports must be set to ‘multicast’ or ‘01’.
8.
On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, click OK.
9.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
10. From the Connections tab, the RADIO-ETH cross-connections were entered correctly.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
339
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision Radio to Radio Cross Connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and all other parallel radio ports. Additionally, port segregation should be provisioned between the radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select Radio port and drag and draw line to Radio port. RADIO-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 43.16.
Figure 43.16 — Radio (P8ETH) to Radio (P8ETH) Cross Connection
340
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.17 — Radio (P8ETH) to Radio (MPTACC) Cross Connection
3.
On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, enter Flow ID number for the far-end in the Flow ID field.
Note: Ranging is ed for RADIO-RADIO cross-connection entry.
4.
From the Profile drop-down menu, select TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH.
5.
Is the Profile configured with TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step 6.
b.
If no, go to step 7.
6.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select ADAPTIVE or DIFFERENTIAL.
7.
On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, click OK.
8.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
9.
From the Connections tab, the RADIO-RADIO cross-connections were entered correctly.
To provision a PDH to Ring Cross Connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
341
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select a PDH port and drag to draw a line to the RING port. PDH-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 43.18. Figure 43.18 — PDH to RING Cross Connection
3.
On the PDH-RING pop-up, select the ERP Instance to be cross connected.
4.
On the PDH-RING pop-up, select the check boxes for all Flow ID numbers to be cross-connected.
5.
On the PDH-RING pop-up, click OK.
6.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
7.
From the Connections tab, the PDH-RING cross-connection was entered correctly.
To provision a Radio to Ring Cross Connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
342
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and all other parallel radio ports. Additionally, port segregation should be provisioned between the radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select Radio port and drag and draw line to RING port. RADIO-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 43.19. Figure 43.19 — Radio to Ring Cross Connection
3.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to be cross connected.
4.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, select VLAN ID number from the Available VLANs field.
Note: Ranging is ed for RADIO-RING cross-connection entry.
5.
From the Service Profile drop-down menu, select TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH.
6.
Is the Profile configured with TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step 7.
b.
If no, go to step 8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
343
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 7.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select ADAPTIVE or DIFFERENTIAL.
8.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, click >>.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8 to provision additional Radio to Ring crossconnections on this ERP Instance.
10. Click OK. 11. On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply. 12. From the Connections tab, the RADIO-RING cross-connections were entered correctly. To provision an Ethernet to Ring Cross Connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
1.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet port and all other parallel radio ports. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the Ethernet and radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
2.
Select ETH port and drag to draw line to Ring port. ETH-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 43.20.
344
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 43.20 — Ethernet to Ring Cross Connection
3.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to be cross connected.
4.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, select VLAN ID number in the Available VLANs field.
Note: Ranging is ed for ETH-RING cross-connection entry.
5.
From the Service Profile drop-down menu, select TDM2ETH.
6.
From the Clock Source drop-down menu, select ADAPTIVE or DIFFERENTIAL.
7.
Enter the destination MAC address where the Ethernet flow will be terminated in the MAC Address field.
Note: The first two digits of the destination MAC address for unprotected ports must be set to ‘unicast’ or ‘00’. The first two digits of the destination MAC address for 1+1 protected ports must be set to ‘multicast’ or ‘01’.
8.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, click >>.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8 to provision additional ETH to Ring crossconnections on this ERP Instance.
10. On the ETH-RING pop-up, click OK. 11. On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
345
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 12. From the Connections tab, the ETH-RING cross-connections were entered correctly. To provision a Ring to Ring Cross Connection 1.
Double left-click Ring port icon. RING-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 43.21. Figure 43.21 — Ring to Ring Cross Connection
2.
On the RING-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to be cross connected.
3.
On the RING-RING pop-up, select Flow ID number in the Available VLANs field.
Note: Ranging is ed for RADIO-RADIO cross-connection entry.
346
4.
From the Service Profile drop-down menu, select TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH.
5.
Is the Profile configured with TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step 6.
b.
If no, go to step 7.
6.
From the Clock Source drop-down menu, select ADAPTIVE or DIFFERENTIAL.
7.
On the RING-RING pop-up, click >>.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 8.
Repeat steps 3 through 7 to provision additional Ring to Ring crossconnections on this ERP Instance.
9.
On the RING-RING pop-up, click OK.
10. On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply. 11. From the Connections tab, the RING-RING cross-connections were entered correctly.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
347
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
348
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
44 — Deprovision cross connections
44.1 — Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to deprovision cross connections. Note: The figures in this chapter show the MSS-8 cross-connection screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
44.2 — General None.
44.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Cross Connections menu
•
To deprovision a PDH to Radio cross connect
•
To deprovision a PDH to Ethernet cross connection
•
To deprovision an SDH to Radio cross connect
•
To deprovision an SDH to LAG cross connection
•
To deprovision an Ethernet to Radio cross connection
•
To deprovision a Radio to Radio cross connection
•
To deprovision PDH to Ring cross connection
•
To deprovision a Radio to Ring cross connection
•
To deprovision an Ethernet to Ring cross connection
•
To deprovision a Ring to Ring cross connection
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
349
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To open the Cross Connections menu •
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Cross Connections. The Cross Connections window opens. See Figure 44.1. Figure 44.1 — Cross Connection window
To deprovision a PDH to Radio cross connect 1.
Double-click on the PDH to RADIO line. PDH-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 44.2.
350
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.2 — PDH-RADIO cross connection
2.
On the PDH_RADIO pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned.
3.
On the PDH_RADIO pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision a PDH to Ethernet cross connection 1.
Double-click on the PDH port to Eth port line. PDH-Eth pop-up displays. See Figure 44.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
351
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.3 — PDH to Ethernet cross connection
2.
On the PDH-Eth pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned.
3.
On the PDH-ETH pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision an SDH to Radio cross connect 1.
Double-click on the SDH to RADIO line. STM-1(OC-3)-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 44.4.
352
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.4 — STM-1(OC-3)-RADIO cross connection
2.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RADIO pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for the cross connect to be deprovisioned.
3.
On the STM-1(OC-3)_RADIO pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision an SDH to LAG cross connection 1.
Double-click on the SDH to RADIO LAG line. STM-1-Radio LAG pop-up displays.
2.
On the STM-1-Radio LAG pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for the cross connect to be deprovisioned.
3.
On the STM-1-Radio LAG pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision an Ethernet to Radio cross connection 1.
Double-click on the ETH port to Radio port line. RADIO-ETH pop-up displays. See Figure 44.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
353
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.5 — Ethernet to Radio cross connection
2.
On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned.
3.
On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision a Radio to Radio cross connection 1.
Double-click on the Radio port to Radio port line. RADIO-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 44.6. Figure 44.6 — Radio to Radio cross connection
354
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned.
3.
On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, click OK.
4.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision PDH to Ring cross connection 1.
Double-click on the PDH to RING port line. PDH-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 44.7. Figure 44.7 — PDH to RING cross connection
2.
On the PDH-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to deprovision cross connection.
3.
On the PDH-RING pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned.
4.
On the PDH-RING pop-up, click OK.
5.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision a Radio to Ring cross connection 1.
Double-click on the Radio to RING port line. RADIO-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 44.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
355
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.8 — Radio to Ring cross connection
2.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to deprovision cross connection.
3.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, select Crossconnected VLANs to be deprovisioned.
4.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, click <<.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to deprovision additional Radio to Ring crossconnections on this ERP Instance.
6.
On the RADIO-RING pop-up, click OK.
7.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision an Ethernet to Ring cross connection 1.
Double-click on the ETH to RING port line. ETH-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 44.9.
356
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.9 — Ethernet to Ring cross connection
2.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to deprovision cross connection.
3.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, select Crossconnected VLANs to be deprovisioned.
4.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, click <<.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to deprovision additional ETH to Ring crossconnections on this ERP Instance.
6.
On the ETH-RING pop-up, click OK.
7.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
To deprovision a Ring to Ring cross connection 1.
Double-click on the RING to RING port line. RING-RING pop-up displays. See Figure 44.10.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
357
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 44.10 — Ring to Ring cross connection
358
2.
On the RING-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to deprovision cross connection.
3.
On the RING-RING pop-up, select Crossconnected VLANs to be deprovisioned.
4.
On the RING-RING pop-up, click <<.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to deprovision additional Ring to Ring crossconnections on this ERP Instance.
6.
On the RING-RING pop-up, click OK.
7.
On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
45 — Provision port segregation/ connectivity
45.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision port segregation/connectivity and to view segregated ports for the 9500 MPR. Note: The Core graphics in this chapter show the Core-E card. The procedure is similar for a CorEvo card.
45.2 — General Port based VLAN connectivity allows the to manage which Ethernet ports (Core, EAS, MSS-O) and radio ports (EAS, MPTACC, and MSS-O) exchange Ethernet traffic among them. This capability allows the to establish virtual private domains. All port segregation/connectivity is bidirectional. Port segregation is provisioned by deselecting the appropriate connection check box. Default port connectivity is as follows: •
Every Core Ethernet port is connected to every other Core Ethernet port
•
Every Core Ethernet port is connected to all EAS Ethernet/radio ports
•
Every Core Ethernet port is connected to all MPTACC radio ports
•
Every P8ETH Ethernet/radio port is connected to every other P8ETH Ethernet/radio port
•
Every P8ETH Ethernet/radio port is connected to all MPTACC radio ports
•
Every EASv2 Ethernet/radio port is connected to every other EASv2 Ethernet/radio port
•
Every EASv2 Ethernet/radio port is connected to all MPTACC radio ports
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
359
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
•
Every MSS-O Ethernet/radio port is connected to every other MSS-O Ethernet/radio port
•
Every MPTACC radio port is connected to every other MPTACC radio port
Provisioning port segregation/connectivity between a Core card Ethernet port and P8ETH or EASv2 card is limited to all Ethernet ports on the P8ETH or EASv2 card. Provisioning port segregation/connectivity from a specific Core card Ethernet port to a specific P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port is not ed. Provisioning port segregation/connectivity between a P8ETH or EASv2 card Ethernet port is limited to the remaining Ethernet ports on the P8ETH or EASv2 card. Provisioning segregation/connectivity from a specific P8ETH or EASv2 port to a specific Core Ethernet port is not ed. Provisioning port segregation/connectivity between an MSS-O Ethernet port is limited to the remaining Ethernet ports on the MSS-O. When parallel radio paths are ed by the same MSS shelf, provision port segregation between the radio paths at both NEs to prevent traffic from one radio path being transmitted back to the originating site on one of the other parallel radio paths. When parallel radio paths are created using P8ETH MPT-HL/MPT-HLC or EASv2 MPT-HL/MPT-HLC ports, provision port segregation between the parallel MPT-HL/ MPT-HLC radio ports. For an example of the port segregation dialog box provisioned between P8ETH port 3.5 and port 3.8 (connectivity check box unchecked), see Figure 45.1. For an example of port segregation window with P8ETH port 3.5 and port 3.8 provisioned for port segregation, see Figure 45.2. When parallel radio paths are created using Core MPT-HL/MPT-HLC/HLS ports, provision port segregation between the parallel MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio ports. Example of the port segregation dialog box provisioned between Core-E port 1.5 and port 1.6 (connectivity check box unchecked), see Figure 45.3. Example of port segregation window with Core-E port 1.5 and port 1.6 provisioned for port segregation, see Figure 45.4. When parallel radio paths are created using MPTACC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XPHQAM ports, provision port segregation between the parallel MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/ XP-HQAM radio ports. Example of port segregation window with port 6.1 and port 6.2 provisioned for port segregation, see Figure 45.5. When making Ethernet cross connections to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should be provisioned between the Ethernet port and all other parallel radio ports. When making a radio cross connections to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should be provisioned between the radio port and all other parallel radio ports. Port segregation should be provisioned between Ethernet ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
360
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
Port segregation should be provisioned between radio ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned on both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
Figure 45.1 — Port Segregation dialog box, P8ETH port 3.5
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
361
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General Figure 45.2 — Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel P8ETH MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio ports
Figure 45.3 — Port Segregation dialog box, Core-E port 1.5
362
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 45.4 — Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel Core-E MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio ports
Figure 45.5 — Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel MPTACC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio ports
45.3 — Procedure 1.
Select Segregated Ports Icon. See Figure 45.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
363
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 45.6 — Segregated Ports icon
The Segregated Ports window opens. See Figure 45.7. Figure 45.7 — Segregated Ports window
2.
Port Segregation When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
3.
Double-click on the port icon to provision the port connectivity. Port window displays. See Figure 45.8 and Figure 45.9.
364
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 45.8 — Segregated Port - Port Provisioning pop-up
Figure 45.9 — Segregated port - Slot Provisioning dialog box
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
365
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 4.
Deselect all ports/slots which should be segregated from the selected port/ slot.
5.
Click OK. Segregated ports view updates, a dot-dash line is drawn between all ports/ slots that are segregated from the provisioned port/slot. See Figure 45.10 and Figure 45.11.
6.
Click Apply to save the changes.
Figure 45.10 — Segregated Port Window W/Slot 3 Port 2 segregated from Slot 4 ports
366
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 45.11 — Segregated Port Window W/Slot 4 segregated From Core-E port 5
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
367
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
368
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
46 — Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only)
46.1 — Purpose This chapter provides instructions and sequence for configuring AUX cross connections.
46.2 — General Two types of AUX Cross-Connections can be implemented: •
Local Service Channel Cross-Connection
•
Service Channels Cross-connection in -through
Note: Cross-Connection towards MPT In this release cross-connection of Service Channels towards a radio direction with MPT is not ed. The operator therefore will not have the possibility to select a radio direction with MPT for such cross-connection.
46.2.1 — Service Channels Cross-connection in -through Independently of the presence of the Auxiliary peripheral unit, it is always possible to cross-connect each individual radio Service Channel with a radio Service Channel of another radio direction, without any local termination.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
369
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
46.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To create an AUX Cross connection
•
To delete an AUX Cross connection
To create an AUX Cross connection 1.
Select in the New Cross-Connection area the first Termination Point (this can be a local service channel or a service channel in a radio link). Note: the local service channel must be first enabled in the AUX unit setting menu.
2.
Select the second Termination Point as shown in the example in Figure 46.1.
Note: The cross-connections are bi-directional.
Figure 46.1 — Auxiliary Cross Connections menu
3.
Click on Add. The new cross-connection will appear in the list (upper part of the screen as shown in Figure 46.2).
Note: The Apply button has not been implemented.
370
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 46.2 — New AUX Cross Connection
To delete an AUX Cross connection 1.
Select one Cross-Connection to be deleted from the list (as shown in Figure 46.3). Figure 46.3 — Delete an AUX Cross Connection
2.
Click on Delete.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
371
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The multiple deletion of the Cross-Connection is not possible.
Note: The Apply button has not been implemented.
372
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
47 — Provision Ethernet ports
47.1 — Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to provision physical Ethernet ports to interface external Ethernet equipment.
47.2 — General Core card provisioning requirements depend on how the Ethernet ports on the front of the Core-E, CorEvo, P8ETH, or EASv2 card are to be used. If Core Ethernet port #4 is being used to interface external Ethernet equipment and TMN (SNMP) will not be used to monitor and control the NE, then only the Ethernet Physical Interfaces needs to be provisioned. Port#4 TMN Interface must be disabled. If Core Ethernet port #4 is being used to transport TMN data, then Core Ethernet port #4 must be disabled.
47.2.1 — electrical Ethernet ports Electrical Ethernet ports on Core, P8ETH, and EASv2 cards and MSS-O Auto Negotiation, Flow Control, three data rates (10, 100, 1000 Mb/s), and half and full duplex port capabilities. Half duplex is not ed by CorEvo. Auto Negotiation can be provisioned: either ON (Enabled) or OFF (Disabled). Off is the default value. When Auto Negotiation is provisioned ON (Enabled), up to five speed and capabilities are ed simultaneously depending on the card and SFP in use. When Auto Negotiation is provisioned OFF (Disabled), only ONE speed and capability is ed. When Auto Negotiation is provisioned OFF, 1000 Mb/s full duplex is not ed. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
373
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
Flow Control can be provisioned: either ON (Enabled) or OFF (Disabled). Off is the default value. Only Asymmetric Flow Control (Tx only) is ed. PAUSE frames received on any port will be ignored and will not slow down egress traffic.
47.2.2 — optical Ethernet ports Optical Ethernet ports on Core, P8ETH, and EASv2 cards and MSS-O Auto Negotiation, Flow Control, 1000 Mb/s data rate, and full duplex port capability. Auto Negotiation can be provisioned: either ON (Enabled) or OFF (Disabled). On is the default value. Flow Control can be provisioned: either ON (Enabled) or OFF (Disabled). Off is the default value. Only Asymmetric Flow Control (Tx only) is ed. PAUSE frames received on any port will be ignored and will not slow down egress traffic.
47.2.3 — Provider bridge parameters If the NE is in Provider Bridge mode, Ethernet ports can be configured as NNI, UNI (portbased) or UNI (VLAN-based). Parameters apply for each port type: NNI - S-VLAN TPID •
The S-VLAN TPID selects the service instance associated to the port for untagged and C-VLAN priority-tagged frames. The port must be in the untagged set of the SVLAN.
UNI (port-based)- Port Priority or C-VLAN Priority •
The port priority represents the priority assigned to untagged frames ingressing the port.
UNI (VLAN-based)- C-VLAN/S-VLAN mapping and egress settings Ingress settings: •
374
The list of C-VLAN IDs represents the list of C-VLANs to be managed by the port. By default, the list is empty.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
Each C-VLAN ID must be mapped to an S-VLAN which represents the service instance used to carry the C-VLAN in the network. The S-VLAN must have the port in its untagged set. More than one C-VLAN can be associated to the same S-VLAN.
•
The Remove C-VLAN parameter can be set for each C-VLAN ID. This allows only the S-VLAN tag to be carried over the network when the association between the CVLAN and the VLAN-based service instance is one-to-one. The Remove C-VLAN parameter can only be set for one C-VLAN mapped to an S-VLAN ID.
•
The S-VLAN priority defines the priority of the tagged Ethernet frames ingressing the port. The priority can be inherited from the P of the C-VLAN tag or configured by the . The default is inherited.
Egress settings: •
The C-VLAN tag of Ethernet frames egressing the port can be removed, which declares the port as untagged. This parameter can only be set when the list of CVLAN IDs is not empty. The default Untag C-VLAN parameter is false. When the port is disabled, the parameter returns to the default value.
•
For each S-VLAN ID having the port in its member set, the C-VLAN ID of the CVLAN tag to be added to Ethernet frames egressing the port can be configured. This allows a C-VLAN tag to be added to Ethernet frames carried over the network with only the S-VLAN tag, when the association between the C-VLAN and the VLANbased service instance is one-to-one. The default value is 0, which means that no association to an S-VLAN is in place and no C-VLAN tag will be added. When the port is disabled, the parameter returns to the default value.
Note: Some graphics may not match the current release.
Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
47.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To select the card to provision Ethernet port
•
To enable an Ethernet port
•
To disable an Ethernet port
•
To provision Ethernet port capabilities parameters
•
To provision Ethernet port VLAN configuration parameters
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
375
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To provision synchronous Ethernet operation mode parameters
•
To provision Hold off timer for Core Ethernet ports in a Ring
•
To provision provider bridge parameters
•
To provision rate limiting by port
•
To provision Ethernet port storm control
•
To provision rate limiting by VLAN
•
To provision Per-VLAN Per-CoS (Class of Service) rate limiting
•
To delete Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiting
To select the card to provision Ethernet port 1.
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1, MSS/P8ETH slot #n, MSS/EASv2 slot #n or MSS/CORE slot #1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the card in blue on the graphical representation of the shelf in the resource list area. The radios connected to the card are displayed in the resource list area. For an example of the Core-E card, see Figure 47.1.
376
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.1 — 9500 MPR equipment tab: Core-E card selected
2.
Double-click on the blue CORE-Main (Core-E), P8ETH (EAS) or EASv2 Card or on the MSS-O. The Core-E, EAS, or MSS CORE Main View displays.
3.
Select the Ethernet Physical Settings tab. For an example of the Core-E Main View, see Figure 47.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
377
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.2 — Core-E main view: Ethernet Physical Interface Settings tab (ports 1 to 4)
To enable an Ethernet port 1.
378
Enable Ethernet port (electrical or optical) using the following procedure. See Figure 47.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.3 — Enable/disable Core-E/P8ETH/EASv2/MSS-O Ethernet port
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to enable (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Settings tab.
c.
Enable Port Status, select Enabled check box (checked).
d.
Click on the Port Status Apply button.
To disable an Ethernet port 1.
Disable Ethernet port (electrical or optical) using the following procedure. See Figure 47.3. a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to disable (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Settings tab.
c.
Disable Port Status, select Enabled check box (not checked).
d.
Click on the Port Status Apply button.
To provision Ethernet port capabilities parameters 1.
Provision Ethernet port capabilities parameters to correspond to the link partner using the following procedure. See Figure 47.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
379
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.4 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet physical interface
a
b
c f d e
g 22914
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Settings tab.
c.
Configure a port label if needed.
d.
Select Auto Negotiation Status: enabled (checked) or disabled (unchecked). For 10 Gb/s on CorEvo-10G, Auto Negotiation must be disabled.
e.
Select Flow Control Enabled: enabled (checked) or disabled (unchecked). Note: For electrical Ethernet Ports, available d capabilities for the port are dependent upon the Auto Negotiation Status selected. When Auto Negotiation is disabled, only one speed and capability is allowed. Additionally, only 10 or 100 Mb/s, half or full duplex, speed and capability are ed. Half duplex is not available with the CorEvo card. When Auto Negotiation is enabled, all five speed and capabilities are ed (10 and 100 Mb/s, half or full duplex, and/or 1000 Mb/s full duplex).
380
f.
For electrical Ethernet ports, select all d Capability that apply.
g.
Click on the Apply button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision Ethernet port VLAN configuration parameters 1.
Provision Ethernet port VLAN Configuration parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.5.
Figure 47.5 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet port VLAN configuration parameters
a
b
c
d
f
g
h 22915
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Settings tab.
c.
Configure a port label if needed.
d.
Provision VLAN Configuration, select Acceptable Frame Types: it all or it tagged only.
e.
Acceptable frame type selected? a.
If it all, go to step b.
b.
If it tagged only, go to step h.
f.
From the Port VLAN ID drop-down menu, select Port VLAN ID: 1 - 4080.
g.
From the Priority drop-down menu, select Priority: 0 - 7.
h.
Click on the Apply button.
To provision synchronous Ethernet operation mode parameters 1.
Provision Ethernet port Synchronous Ethernet Operation Mode parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
381
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: Synchronous Ethernet Operation Mode is ed by Ethernet ports configured on the Core-E card, CorEvo card, EASv2 card, or MSS-O.
Figure 47.6 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O synchronous Ethernet operation mode
a
b
c
d f
g
h 22916
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#6).
b.
Select Settings tab.
c.
Configure a port label if needed.
d.
Provision Synchronous Ethernet Operation Mode: select Synchronous or Not-Synchronous.
e.
Synchronous Ethernet Operation Mode selected? a.
If Synchronous and electrical port, go to step f.
b.
If Synchronous and optical port, go to step g.
c.
If Not-Synchronous, go to step h.
f.
Provision Synch-E role, select Synch-E Master or Synch-E Slave.
g.
Provision SSM reception and transmission, select enabled (checked) or disabled (unchecked).
h.
Click on the Apply button.
To provision Hold off timer for Core Ethernet ports in a Ring
382
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
To provision Hold off timer for Core Ethernet ports in a Ring Provision the Hold Off timer parameter using the following procedure. See Figure 47.7.
Note: The Hold Off parameter is ed by optical Ethernet ports configured on the Core card that are part of a Ring. The timer is fixed to 500 ms.
Figure 47.7 — Provision the Hold Off parameter
a b
c
d
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #5/#6).
b.
Select Settings tab.
c.
Select Hold Off Enabled: enabled (checked) or disabled (unchecked).
d.
Click on the Apply button.
To provision provider bridge parameters 1.
Provision Provider Bridge parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
383
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.8 — Provision provider bridge
a
b
c d c d c d
e 23193
384
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#6).
b.
Select Provider Bridge tab.
c.
Choose the port type: NNI, UNI (port-based), or UNI (VLAN-based).
d.
Configure port type parameters: •
for NNI, choose the S-VLAN TPID from the drop-down menu:
•
for UNI (port-based), choose Port Priority or C-VLAN Priority:
•
for UNI (VLAN-based), configure C-VLAN/S-VLAN mapping and egress settings, see Figure 47.9.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.9 — Provisioned UNI (VLAN-based) port
e.
Click on the Apply button.
To provision rate limiting by port 1.
Provision Ethernet Port Rate Limiter parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.10.
Caution: When a Port Rate Limiter is activated in conjunction with a VLAN Rate Limiter, the VLAN Rate Limiter applies to Ethernet frames that meet the Port Rate Limiter parameters. Caution: If the port is involved in a mixed fiber-microwave Ring, the rate limiter may have traffic impact.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
385
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 47.10 — Provision Core/EAS rate limiting by port
a
b c d e g h i
f
j 22917
386
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Policy & Translation tab.
c.
Provision Ingress Port Rate Limiter mode? a.
To enable, select Ingress Enabled (checked), then go to step d.
b.
To disable, select Ingress Enabled (unchecked), then go to step f.
c.
If no, go to step g.
d.
Select the Ingress CIR value (Kbit/s).
e.
Select the Ingress Max Burst size (Kbytes).
f.
Click on the Apply button.
g.
Provision Egress Port Rate Limiter mode? a.
To enable, select Egress Enabled (checked), then go to step h.
b.
To disable, select Egress Enabled (unchecked), then go to step j.
h.
Select the Egress CIR value (Kbit/s).
i.
Select the Egress Max Burst size (Kbit/s).
j.
Click on the Apply button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision Ethernet port storm control 1.
Provision Ethernet Port Storm Control parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.11.
Figure 47.11 — Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet port storm control
a
b
c d e f
g 22918
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Policy & Translation tab.
c.
Provision Storm Control Ingress mode? a.
To enable, select Enabled (checked), then go to step d.
b.
To disable, select Enabled (unchecked), then go to step g.
d.
Select maximum Unknown Unicast Rate (Frames/s).
e.
Select maximum Multicast Rate (Frames/s).
f.
Select maximum Broadcast Rate (Frames/s).
g.
Click on the Apply button.
To provision rate limiting by VLAN 1.
Provision Rate Limiting by VLAN parameters using the following procedure.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
387
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Caution: When a VLAN Rate Limiter is activated in conjunction with a Port Rate Limiter, the VLAN Rate Limiter applies to Ethernet frames that meet the Port Rate Limiter parameters. Caution: If the port is involved in a mixed fiber-microwave Ring, the rate limiter may have traffic impact.
See Figure 47.12 for the following procedure: Figure 47.12 — Provision ingress rate limiting by VLAN
a
b
c d
e
f 22919
388
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Policy & Translation tab.
c.
Provision VLAN Rate Limiter - Ingress mode? a.
To enable, select VLAN Enabled (checked), then go to step d.
b.
To disable, select VLAN Enabled (unchecked), then go to step f.
d.
VLAN Select the Ingress CIR value (Kbit/s).
e.
Select the Ingress Max Burst size (Kbit/s).
f.
Click on the Apply button. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To provision Per-VLAN Per-CoS (Class of Service) rate limiting 1.
Provision Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.13.
Caution: When a Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter is activated in conjunction with a Port Rate Limiter, the Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter must apply to Ethernet frames that meet the Port Rate Limiter parameters. Figure 47.13 — Provision Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiting
a
b
e
f
d
g
c
h 23045
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter tab.
c.
Click on the Create button.
d.
Select the VLAN ID from the VLAN drop-down menu.To identify the rate limiter by the P only, select Any.
e.
Select the P from the P drop-down menu.
f.
Select the Ingress CIR size (Kbit/s) [0 Kbit/s to 1Gbit/s].
Select the Ingress Max Burst (KByte) [4 KBytes to 16 KBytes, in steps of powers of 2]. Click on the Apply button. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
389
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To delete Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiting 1.
Delete Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 47.14. Figure 47.14 — Delete Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiting
a
b
c
d
e 23044
390
a.
Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8).
b.
Select Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter tab.
c.
Select a Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiter.
d.
Click on the Delete button. The rate limiter is deleted.
e.
Click on the Apply button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
48 — Provision Ethernet Features
48.1 — Overview To provision Ethernet Features, Alcatel-Lucent. The following Ethernet features are available: •
Access Control List
•
Out of Range VLAN swap
•
VLAN remarking
•
VLAN swap
48.1.1 — Access Control List Access Control List allows a to restrict MAC addresses allowed in the network. Access Control List is configured via configuration file. Enabling Access Control List feature automatically drops all MAC addresses which are not specifically provisioned by the .
48.1.2 — Out of Range VLAN swap Out of Range VLAN swap allows transport of VLANs outside the ed range (40814094). The out of range VLAN ID is swapped to one ed by the system on ingress and vice versa. Out of Range VLAN swap is configured via configuration file. VLAN swapping is ed on all P8ETH, EASv2 and Core Ethernet ports and all radio ports except MPT-HL/HLC radio ports.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
391
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Overview
48.1.3 — VLAN remarking VLAN remarking allows packets to be remarked specifying a different priority level in the packet header. VLAN remarking is configured via configuration file. ed on all P8ETH, EASv2 and Core Ethernet ports and all radio ports except MPT-HL/HLC radio ports.
48.1.4 — VLAN swap VLAN swap allows the inner and outer tags to be swapped on double tagged packets. The inner tag becomes the outer tag and vice versa. VLAN swap is configured via configuration file. VLAN swapping is ed on all P8ETH, EASv2 and Core Ethernet ports and all radio ports except MPT-HL/HLC radio ports.
392
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
49 — Provision equipment port
49.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision equipment ports.
49.2 — General While provisioning PDH circuits (E1, DS1 or DS3) the service profile must be provisioned either TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH. Provision the PDH circuit TDM2TDM when both termination points of the PDH circuit are terminated on 9500 MPR equipment. Provision the PDH circuit TDM2ETH when one of the termination points of the PDH circuit is terminated on non-9500 MPR equipment, and the other equipment is MEF-8 compliant. TDM clock source for E1/DS1 and DS3 ports provisioned TDM2TDM differential clock recovery. TDM clock source for E1/DS1 and DS3 ports provisioned TDM2ETH either adaptive or differential clock recovery. All ports on a E1/DS1 and DS3 card must be provisioned to the same type of clock recovery, either adaptive or differential. While provisioning SDH circuits (SDHACC) the service profile must be provisioned SDH2SDH. 10 G/bit SFPs can be provisioned in CorEvo-10G ports 5 and 6 if a license is present. Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
393
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Prerequisites
49.3 — Prerequisites Core, P32E1DS1, DS3 (P2E3DS3), STM-1/OC-3 (SDHACC), EASv2, or P8ETH cards must be enabled on the MSS shelf slots prior to provisioning equipment ports.
49.4 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To provision Core SFP port
•
To provision Sync-In/Out SFP on CorEvo
•
To provision Sync-In/Out SFP on MSS-1
•
To provision an EAS card SFP port
•
To provision MSS-O SFP port
•
To provision an E1 P32E1DS1 port
•
To provision E1 node timing
•
To provision a DS1 P32E1DS1 port
•
To provision DS3 P2E3DS3 port
•
Provision SDH port
To provision Core SFP port
394
1.
Select Slot #1 MSS/CORE-Main in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MSS/CORE card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 49.1 for Core-E or Figure 49.4 for CorEvo.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.1 — Resource list area: Core-E SFP slot selected
3.
From the Port Usage drop-down menu, select SFP. See Figure 49.2. Figure 49.2 — Provision Core-E SFP port
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
395
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The Core SFP port will populate selected Port #. See Figure 49.3. Note: Core Ports 1-4 and ports selected SFP are ready for provisioning.
Figure 49.3 — Provisioned Core-E SFP port
5.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the Core SFP Ethernet port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/ connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
To provision Sync-In/Out SFP on CorEvo
396
1.
Select Slot #1 MSS/CORE-Main in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MSS/CORE card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 49.4 for an example showing CorEvo.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.4 — Resource list area: CorEvo SFP slot selected
3.
From the Port Usage drop-down menu in port 7 or 8, select SYNC-IO. See Figure 49.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
397
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.5 — Provision CorEvo Sync-In/Out SFP port
4.
Click Apply. The SFP is ready to be configured as Sync-In and Sync-Out ports. See ister synchronization.
To provision Sync-In/Out SFP on MSS-1
398
1.
Select Slot #1 MSS/CORE in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MSS-1 in blue in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 49.6 for an example.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.6 — Resource list area: MSS-1 selected
3.
From the Port Usage drop-down menu in port 5 or 6, select SYNC-IO. See Figure 49.7. Figure 49.7 — Provision MSS-1 Sync-In/Out SFP port
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
399
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The SFP is ready to be configured as Sync-In and Sync-Out ports. See ister synchronization. To provision an EAS card SFP port 1.
Select the slot where the card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the P8ETH or EASv2 card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-4/MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 49.8. Figure 49.8 — Resource list area: P8ETH selected
3.
400
From the Port # (5-8) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type SFP. See Figure 49.9 for P8ETH and Figure 49.10 for EASv2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.9 — Provision P8ETH SFP ports
Figure 49.10 — Provision EASv2 SFP ports
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
401
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The SFP port will populate the selected port #. See Figure 49.11. Note: Ports 1-4 and ports selected SFP are ready for provisioning.
Figure 49.11 — Provisioned P8ETH SFP port
5.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the SFP Ethernet port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desired. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
To provision MSS-O SFP port 1.
Select the MSS/CORE slot in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Port # 4 Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type SFP.
4.
Click Apply. The SFP port will populate port 4.
5.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the SFP Ethernet port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desired. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
To provision an E1 P32E1DS1 port
402
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
Click on the P32E1DS1 card or MSS/E1 in the resource list area. The PDH Main View displays. See Figure 49.12. Figure 49.12 — PDH main view (ETSI market)
Resource Tree Area: displays the tributary ports sorted by the channel number
Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in the tree area
Resource Detail Area: displays through tab windows, the selected object’s properties in list area. This area performs the available functions for involved resource
22998
2.
Provision E1 port using the following procedure: a.
Select Settings tab. The Settings tab displays.
b.
Select E1 port#n to provision: 01 to 32 for a P32E1DS1 card or 01 to 16 for an MSS-1.
c.
Configure a label if needed.
d.
From the Signal Mode drop-down menu, select signal mode type: Unframed, Framed, or Disabled.
e.
Enter the unique Flow ID number.
f.
From the Service Profile drop-down menu, select service profile type, TDM2TDM or TDM2Eth.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
403
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures g.
E1 port service profile TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step h.
b.
If no, go to step k. All ports on an E1 card must be provisioned to the same method of clock recovery, either adaptive or differential. After the first port on a card is provisioned, all remaining ports on the card will default to the clock recovery method selected on the first port.
h.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select TDM Clock Source: Adaptive or Differential.
i.
Enter the unique ECID Tx value.
j.
Enter the unique ECID Rx value.
k.
Click Apply. The PDH Main View updates adding the provisioned E1 port to the resource list area.
To provision E1 node timing 1.
From the PDH main view, click on the Slot icon (as shown in Figure 0.1) to access the Node Timing menu. Node Timing: timing from the network clock as defined in G.8261. The enabling of the Node Timing is applied to all E1s of the PDH unit. By enabling the Node Timing the E1 streams in Rx side are retimed at the output with the network element clock.
To provision a DS1 P32E1DS1 port 1.
404
Click on the P32E1DS1 DS1 card or MSS/DS1 in the resource list area. See Figure 49.13.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.13 — Resource list area: P32E1DS1 selected
The PDH Main View displays. See Figure 49.14. 2.
Provision DS1 port using the following procedure: a.
Select Settings tab. The Settings tab displays.
b.
Select DS1 port#n to provision: 01 to 32 for a P32E1DS1 card or 01 to 16 for an MSS-1.
c.
Configure a label if needed.
d.
From the Signal Mode drop-down menu, select signal mode type: Unframed, Framed SF, or Framed ESF.
e.
Select appropriate Line Coding radio button: AMI or B8ZS.
f.
Enter the Line Length (distance to cross-connect): 0 to 655.
g.
Enter the unique Flow ID number.
h.
From the Service Profile drop-down menu, select service profile type, TDM2TDM or TDM2Eth.
i.
DS1 port service profile TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step j.
b.
If no, go to step m. All ports on a DS1 card must be provisioned to the same method of clock recovery, either adaptive or differential. After the first port on a card is provisioned, all remaining ports on the card will
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
405
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures default to the clock recovery method selected on the first port. j.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select TDM Clock Source: Adaptive or Differential.
k.
Enter the unique ECID Tx value.
l.
Enter the unique ECID Rx value.
m.
Click Apply. Figure 49.14 — Provision P32E1DS1 port
b
a d c f
j h k
g
l
e
m 23047
The PDH Main View updates adding the provisioned DS1 port to the resource list area. See Figures Figure 49.15 and Figure 49.16.
406
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.15 — Provisioned P32E1DS1 TDM2TDM DS1 port
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
407
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.16 — Provisioned P32E1DS1 DS1 TDM2ETH port
To provision DS3 P2E3DS3 port 1.
408
Click on the P2E3DS3 DS3 card in the resource list area. See Figure 49.17.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.17 — Resource list area: P2E3DS3 selected
The PDH Main View displays. See Figure 49.18. 2.
Provision DS3 port using the following procedure: See Figure 49.18 for the following steps: a.
Select Settings tab. The Settings tab displays.
b.
Select DS3 port#n to provision: 01 to 02.
c.
Configure a label if needed.
d.
From the Signal Mode drop-down menu, select signal mode type: Unframed or Framed.
e.
From the Service Profile drop-down menu, select service profile type, TDM2TDM or TDM2Eth.
f.
Enter the Line Length (distance to cross-connect): 0 to 450.
g.
From the AIS Signal Type drop-down menu, select AIS signal type: AllOnes or BlueSignal.
h.
Enter the unique Flow ID number.
i.
DS3 port service profile TDM2ETH? a.
If yes, go to step j
b.
If no, go to step m All ports on a DS3 card must be provisioned to the same method of clock recovery, either adaptive or differential. After the first
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
409
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures port on a card is provisioned, all remaining ports on the card will default to the clock recovery method selected on the first port. j.
From the Payload Size drop-down menu, select payload size: 1024.
k.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select TDM Clock Source: Adaptive or Differential.
l.
Enter the unique ECID Tx value.
m.
Enter the unique ECID Rx value.
n.
Click Apply. Figure 49.18 — Provision P2E3DS3 DS3 port
b
a d c
j
f g
k e l
h
m
n 23046
The PDH Main View updates adding the provisioned DS3 port to the resource list area. See Figure 49.19 and Figure 49.20.
410
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.19 — Provisioned P2E3DS3 TDM2TDM DS3 port
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
411
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.20 — Provisioned P2E3DS3 TDM2ETH DS3 port
Provision SDH port
412
1.
Click on the SDHACC OC-3 card in the resource list area.
2.
Select the Settings tab. See Figure 49.21.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.21 — Resource list area: SDHACC selected
3.
From the SFP # (1-2) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type SFP-O or SFP-E. See Figure 49.21.
4.
Click Apply. The SDHACC SFP port will populate selected port #. See Figure 49.22.
Note: SDHACC Ports 1-2 and ports selected SFP are ready for provisioning.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
413
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.22 — Provisioned SDHACC SFP port
5.
Click on the SDHACC OC-3 card in the resource detail area. The SDH Main View displays. See Figure 49.23.
414
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.23 — Provision SDHACC OC-3 port
b a e
c d i f
g h
k
j
n
l
m
23063
6.
Provision OC-3 port using the following procedure: See Figure 49.23 for the following steps:
Note: When provisioning OC-3 ports for 1+1 EPS Protection, provision the main ports. Then only enable the spare ports. Then re-provision 1+1 EPS protection.
Note: It is not possible to enable a port while 1+1 EPS protection is enabled. To enable an OC-3 port after 1+1 EPS protection is provisioned, the operator must disable 1+1 EPS protection. Enable the new port. Then re-provision 1+1 EPS protection.
a.
Select the Settings tab. The Settings tab displays.
b.
Select Port#s.n to provision: Port#s.1 or Port#s.2.
c.
From the Port Status, select Enabled check box (checked).
d.
Click on the Apply button.
e.
From the Label field, enter the Label, up to fifteen characters.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
415
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures f.
For optical SFP, From the Auto Laser Shutdown drop-down menu, select Enabled, Disabled Forced On, or Disabled Forced Off.
g.
From the J0 Configuration pane, from the Mode drop-down menu, select Disabled, SixteenBytesFrame, or OneRepeatedByte.
h.
For SixteenBytesFrame, or OneRepeatedByte, from the Expected Receiving Value field, enter the expected J0 value.
i.
Click on the Apply button.
j.
Enter the unique Flow ID number (2-4080).
k.
From the Buffer Depth drop-down menu, select Low or High. Note: If the port will be part of a cross-connection to a LAG, select High buffer depth.
l.
From the TDM Clock Source drop-down menu, select Differential or Node Timing.
m.
From the Service Profile field, SDH2SDH.
n.
Click on the Apply button.
The SDH Main View updates adding the provisioned OC-3 port to the resource list area. See Figure 49.24 and Figure 49.25.
416
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.24 — Provisioned SDHACC optical OC-3 port
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
417
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.25 — Provisioned SDHACC electrical OC-3 port
7.
Provision STM-1 SDHCHANN port Click on the SDHCHANN OC-3 card in the resource detail area. The SDH Main View displays. See Figure 49.26.
418
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 49.26 — SDHCHANN main view
8.
Provision the STM-1 port using the following procedure: a.
Put a check mark in the Port Status box to enable the STM-1.
b.
Set the Auto Laser Shutdown: Enabled/Disabled ForcedOn/Disabled ForcedOff. This field will appear only if the Settings tab- of the STM-1 unit the optical SFP has been selected.
c.
Select the Clock Source.
d.
Enable the J0, if required, by selecting one of the two modes (SixteenBytesFrame/OneRepeatedByte) in the Expected Receiving Value field and enter the expected value and in the Sending J0 field select one of the two modes and enter the value to be transmitted. Note: byte J0 is only read, no Regeneration section Termination is done.
e.
Click on Apply.
f.
Enable, if required, the E1 Node Timing Configuration. The Node Timing is the timing from the network clock as defined in G.8261. The enabling of the Node Timing is applied to all E1s of the unit. By enabling the Node Timing the E1 streams in Rx side are retimed at the output with the network element clock.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
419
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures g.
420
Configure all the E1s to be mapped/unmapped in the STM-1. The E1s are identified by a progressive number from #1 to #63, but also by the standard SDH identification (x-y-z).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
50 — Deprovision equipment ports
50.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to deprovision equipment ports. Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves. The Core graphics in this chapter show the Core-E card. The procedure is similar for a CorEvo card.
50.2 — Prerequisites Cross-connections associated with the equipment port must be disabled prior to deprovisioning the equipment port.
50.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To deprovision a Core SFP port
•
To deprovision a P8ETH or EASv2 card SFP port
•
To deprovision an E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 port
•
To deprovision a DS3 P2E3DS3 port
•
To deprovision an SDH port
To deprovision a Core SFP port 1.
Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1/2 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MSS/Core card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
421
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 50.1. Figure 50.1 — Resource list area: Core-E SFP slot selected
3.
422
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 50.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.2 — Provisioned Core-E SFP Port #5
4.
Click Apply. The selected Core slot SFP port will display empty. See Figure 50.3.
Note: Core Port will not deprovision if the port has any cross-connections associated with the port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
423
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.3 — Deprovisioned Core-E SFP Port#5
To deprovision a P8ETH or EASv2 card SFP port
424
1.
Select the slot where the card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the P8ETH or EASv2 card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 50.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.4 — Resource list area: P8ETH selected
3.
From the Port # (5-8) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type Empty. See Figure 50.5 for P8ETH and Figure 50.6 for EASv2. Figure 50.5 — Provisioned P8ETH ports
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
425
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.6 — Provisioned EASv2 ports
4.
Click Apply. The SFP port will display Empty. See Figure 50.7.
Note: Ports 5-8 will not deprovision if the port has any cross-connections associated with the port.
426
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.7 — Deprovisioned P8ETH SFP port
5.
Deprovision MSS-O SFP port Select the MSS/CORE slot in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue.
6.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
7.
From the Port # 4 Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type Empty.
8.
Click Apply. The SFP port will display Empty.
To deprovision an E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 port 1.
Click on the P32E1DS1 card in the resource list area. See Figure 50.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
427
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.8 — Resource list area: P32E1DS1 selected
The PDH Main View displays. 2.
428
Select the Settings tab. See Figure 50.9.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.9 — Provisioned P32E1DS1 DS1
See Figure 50.10 for the following steps: 3.
Deprovision E1/DS1 port using the following procedure: a.
Select DS1 port number to deprovision: 01 to 32.
b.
From the Signal Mode drop-down menu, select signal mode type: Disabled.
c.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
429
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.10 — Deprovision P32E1DS1 DS1 port
Deprovisioned port will display Disabled. See Figure 50.11. Note: P32E1DS1 Ports will not deprovision if the port has a cross-connection associated with the port.
430
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.11 — Deprovisioned P32E1DS1 DS1 port
To deprovision a DS3 P2E3DS3 port 1.
Click on the P2E3DS3 DS3 card in the resource list area. See Figure 50.12.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
431
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.12 — Resource list area: P2E3DS3 selected
The Alarms&Settings screen displays. 2.
432
Select Settings tab. See Figure 50.13.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.13 — Provisioned P2E3DS3
3.
Deprovision DS3 port using the following procedure: See Figure 50.14 for the following steps: a.
Select DS3 port number to deprovision, 01 or 02.
b.
From the Signal Mode drop-down menu, select signal mode type: Disabled.
c.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
433
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.14 — Deprovision P2E3DS3 port
Deprovisioned port will display Disabled. See Figure 50.15. Note: P2E3DS3 Ports will not deprovision if the port has a cross-connection associated with the port.
434
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.15 — Deprovisioned P2E3DS3 ports
To deprovision an SDH port Note: When an SDH port with performance monitoring active is disabled, the elapsed time of the performance monitoring will be stopped until the port is enabled again.
1.
Click on the SDHACC OC-3 card in the resource list area. See Figure 50.16.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
435
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.16 — Resource list area: SDHACC selected
The SDH Main View window displays. 2.
436
Select Settings tab. See Figure 50.17.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.17 — Provisioned SDHACC
3.
Deprovision OC-3 port using the following procedure: See Figure 50.17 for the following steps: a.
Select OC-3 port number to deprovision, Port#n.1 or Port#n.2.
b.
From the Port Status field, select Enabled check box (unchecked).
c.
Click on the Apply button.
Deprovisioned port will display Disabled. See Figure 50.18. Note: SDHACC Ports will not deprovision if the port has a cross-connection associated with the port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
437
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 50.18 — Deprovisioned SDHACC ports
438
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
51 — Enable equipment
51.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to enable cards into the system. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for information about ed equipment. See the Release Notice for information about ed radios by interface type. Note: The Core graphics in this chapter show the Core-E card. The procedure is similar for a CorEvo card.
51.2 — Prerequisites Communication with the MSS shelf using the craft terminal must be established.
51.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To enable a spare Core card
•
To enable a P8ETH card
•
To enable an EASv2 card
•
To enable an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver card on P8ETH or EASv2 card
•
To enable an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver on Core
•
To enable an E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 card
•
To enable a DS3 P2E3DS3 card
•
To enable an SDH card
•
To enable an MPT access card
•
To enable MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on MPTACC card
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
439
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To enable an MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on Core
•
To enable an MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on P8ETH or EASv2 card
•
To enable an auxiliary card
•
To enable an MPT-HLS radio
•
To enable an MPT-HLS fan
•
To enable a Fan Unit
To enable a spare Core card 1.
To enable a spare Core card Select MSS-n/Slot#2 in the resource tree area. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights slot #2 in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.1. Figure 51.1 — Select slot 2 to enable spare Core-E
440
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select CORE-ENH or CorEvo. See Figure 51.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.2 — Select spare Core-E equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The spare Core-E card will populate slot #2. See Figure 51.3. Protection informations updating window opens.
5.
Click OK.
6.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the Core Ethernet ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/ connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
441
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.3 — Spare Core-E enabled
7.
Click on the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
To enable a P8ETH card 1.
442
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P8ETH card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.4 — Select slot to enable P8ETH
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select P8ETH. See Figure 51.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
443
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.5 — Select P8ETH equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The P8ETH card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 51.6. Figure 51.6 — P8ETH enabled
444
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 5.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the P8ETH Ethernet ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/ connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
To enable an EASv2 card 1.
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the EASv2 card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.7. Figure 51.7 — Select slot to enable EASv2
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EASv2. See Figure 51.8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
445
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.8 — Select EASv2 equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The EASv2 card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 51.6.
446
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.9 — EASv2 enabled
5.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the EASv2 Ethernet ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/ connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
To enable an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver card on P8ETH or EASv2 card 1.
Select the slot where the card is equipped to MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 51.10.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
447
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.10 — Select slot associated with MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver to enable
3.
From the Port # (5-8) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HL/MPT-HLC. See Figure 51.11. Figure 51.11 — Select MPT-HL/MPT-HLC equipment type
4. 448
Click Apply. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The MPT-HL/MPT-HLC port will populate selected port #. See Figure 51.12. Figure 51.12 — Enabled MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver
5. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should be provisioned between the P8ETH or EASv2 MPT-HL/MPT-HLC port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. To enable an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver on Core 1.
Select the slot where the MSS/CORE card is equipped to the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the Core card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 51.13.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
449
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.13 — Resource list area: Core-E selected
3.
From the Port # (5-6) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HL/MPT-HLC. See Figure 51.14. Figure 51.14 — Provision Core-E MPT-HL/MPT-HLC ports
450
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 4.
Click Apply. The Core MPT-HL/MPT-HLC port will populate the selected port #. See Figure 51.15. Figure 51.15 — Enabled MPT-HL/MPT-HLC on Core-E
5. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should be provisioned between the Core MPT-HL/MPT-HLC port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. To enable an E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 card 1.
To enable an E1/DS1 P32E1DS1 card Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P32E1DS1 card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.16.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
451
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.16 — Select slot to enable P32E1DS1
452
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select P32E1DS1 or P32E1DS1_A. See Figure 51.17.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.17 — Select P32EDS1 equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The P32E1DS1 card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 51.18. Figure 51.18 — P32E1DS1 enabled
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
453
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To enable a DS3 P2E3DS3 card 1.
To enable a DS3 P2E3DS3 card Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P2E3DS3 card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.19. Figure 51.19 — Select slot to enable P2E3DS3
454
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select P2E3DS3_A. See Figure 51.20.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.20 — Select P2E3DS3 equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The P2E3DS3 card will populate selected slot #. See Figure P2E3DS3 enabled.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
455
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.21 — P2E3DS3 enabled
To enable an SDH card 1.
456
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the SDHACC or SDHCHANN card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.22.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.22 — Select slot to enable SDHACC or SDHCHANN
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select SDHACC (shown in the examples) or SDHCHANN (ETSI market only). See Figure 51.23.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
457
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.23 — Select SDHACC equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 51.24.
458
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.24 — SDHACC enabled
To enable an MPT access card 1.
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the MPT Access card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.25.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
459
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.25 — Select slot to enable MPTACC
460
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select MPTACC. See Figure 51.26.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.26 — Select MPTACC equipment type
4.
Click Apply. The MPT Access card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 51.27. Figure 51.27 — MPTACC enabled
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
461
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To enable MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on MPTACC card 1.
Select slot the MSS/MPTACC (MPT Access) card is equipped to MPTHC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPTACC card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Note: MPT-HC and MPT-XP are functionally similar and appear in the GUI as MPT-HC. Likewise, MPT-HC-HQAM and MPT-XP-HQAM are functionally similar and appear in the GUI as MPT-HQAM
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 51.28. Figure 51.28 — Resource list area: MPTACC selected
Note: MPTACC Ports 1 and 2 optical SFP interfaces. Ports 3 and 4 electrical GigE Ethernet Interfaces. Up to two ports are ed. Either one or two optical, one or two electrical, or one electrical and one optical ports are ed simultaneously. Note: MPTACC Ports 1 and 3 are not ed simultaneously. MPTACC Ports 2 and 4 are not ed simultaneously.
3.
462
From the Port # (1-4) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM. See Figure 51.29.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.29 — Provision MPTACC port
4.
Click Apply. The MPTACC MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM port will populate selected port #. See Figure 51.30.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
463
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.30 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on MPTACC
5. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should be provisioned between the MPTACC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM port and other Ethernet and/ or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. To enable an MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on Core
464
1.
Select a slot that is equipped to MSS/CORE card and the MPT-HC/ MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the Core card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 51.28.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.31 — Resource list area: Core-E selected
3.
Provision MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM connected to electrical or optical SFP Ethernet port? a.
If electrical Ethernet port, go to step 7.
b.
If optical SFP Ethernet port, go to step 4. Note: MPTs can be provisioned on optical ports 5 and 6 on a Core-E card or optical ports 7 and 8 on a CorEvo card.
4.
From the Port Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM. See Figure 51.32.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
465
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.32 — Provision Core-E MPT-HC/XP optical SFP Ethernet port
5.
Click Apply. The Core MPT card will populate selected port #. See Figure 51.33.
466
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.33 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port
6.
Go to step 9.
7.
From the Port # (1-4) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HC, MPT-MC or MPT-HQAM. See Figure 51.34.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
467
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.34 — Provision Core-E MPT-HC electrical Ethernet port
8.
Click Apply. The Core MPT card will populate the selected port #. See Figure 51.35.
468
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.35 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E electrical Ethernet port
9. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should be provisioned between the Core MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. To enable an MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on P8ETH or EASv2 card 1.
Select a slot that is equipped to P8ETH or EASv2 card and the MPTHC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 51.36.
3.
From the Port Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HC, MPT-MC, or MPT-HQAM.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
469
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.36 — Resource list area: P8ETH selected
4.
470
Click Apply. The P8ETH card will populate the selected port #. See Figure 51.37.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.37 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH optical Ethernet port
5. Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should be provisioned between the MPT-HC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desired. See Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. To enable an auxiliary card 1.
Select MSS-8/Slot#8 or MSS-4/Slot#4 in the resource tree area where the Auxiliary card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 51.38.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
471
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.38 — Select Slot#8 to enable auxiliary card
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select AUX. See Figure 51.39. Figure 51.39 — Select AUX equipment type
472
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 4.
Click Apply. The Auxiliary card will populate slot #8. See Figure 51.40. Figure 51.40 — Auxiliary card enabled
To enable an MPT-HLS radio 1.
See Figure 51.41 and Figure 51.42 and follow the steps to enable the MPTHLS radio card.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
473
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.41 — Enable the subrack for an MPT-HLS radio
1
3 2
23757
To enable the radio card:
474
1.
Click on the top level element in the Equipment view.
2.
In the Settings , choose SR-MPT-HLS from the Top Rack or Bottom Rack drop-down.
3.
Click Apply. The top or bottom subrack appears in the Equipment view.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.42 — Enable the MPT-HLS radio
4
5
6
7 23758
4.
Click on one of the vertical slots of the subrack.
5.
In the Settings , choose MPT-HLS from the Equipment Type dropdown.
6.
Choose one of the ports on the EASv2 card from the Interface dropdown.
7.
Click on the Apply button. An SD check box is displayed.
8.
If the diversity combiner is in use, select the SD check box and click on the Apply button.
9.
The card is enabled. The fan slot is outlined in red.
To enable an MPT-HLS fan 1.
See Figure 51.43 and follow the steps to enable the fan. To enable the fan:
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
475
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 51.43 — Enable the MPT-HLS fan
1
2
4
3 23759
1.
Click on the horizontal slot above the radio slots.
2.
In the settings , choose SR-FAN4 from the Equipment Type dropdown.
3.
Choose an EAS channel from the Fan Handler MPTs drop-down.
4.
Click Apply.
To enable a Fan Unit 476
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
See Figure 51.44. Follow the steps to enable the Fan, A-FAN, or E-FAN Unit. Figure 51.44 — Enabling Fan Unit
1
3
2
To enable the fan: i.
Click on Slot 9.
ii.
In the settings , choose the fan type from the Equipment Type drop-down.
iii.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
477
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
478
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
52 — Disable equipment
52.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to Disable cards in the system. Note: The Core graphics in this chapter show the Core-E card. The procedure is similar for a CorEvo card.
52.2 — Prerequisite Associated facilities and equipment ports must be deprovisioned before a card may be disabled.
52.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To disable the spare Core card
•
To disable a radio
•
To disable an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver card on Core
•
To disable a P8ETH card
•
To disable an EASv2 card
•
To disable a P32E1DS1 card
•
To disable a DS3 P2E3DS3 card
•
Disable an SDH card
•
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on MPTACC
•
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on Core
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
479
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on P8ETH or EASv2
•
To disable an MPT access card
•
To disable an auxiliary card
To disable the spare Core card 1.
Select MSS-n/Slot#2 in the resource tree area. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights spare Core card in slot #2 in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.1. Figure 52.1 — Enabled spare Core-E
480
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.2 — Disable spare Core-E
4.
Click Apply. The spare Core card is removed from slot #2. See Figure 52.3.
Note: Spare Core Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
481
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.3 — Spare Core-E disabled
To disable a radio 1.
Disable MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver card on P8ETH or EASv2 Select the slot where the card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the P8ETH or EASv2 card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
482
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 52.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.4 — Enabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver
3.
From the Port # (5-8) Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty. See Figure 52.5. Figure 52.5 — Disable MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
483
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The port # will display Empty and the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 52.6. Note: MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver card will not disable if the port has any cross-connections associated with the card.
Figure 52.6 — Disabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver
To disable an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver card on Core
484
1.
Select the slot where the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the main Core-E card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 52.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.7 — Enabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver
3.
From the Port # (5-6) Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty. See Figure 52.8. Figure 52.8 — Disable MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
485
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures The Core port # will display Empty and the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC will be removed from the resource list area. See Figure 52.9. Note: MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver card will not disable if the port has any cross-connections associated with the card.
Figure 52.9 — Disabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver
To disable a P8ETH card 1.
486
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P8ETH card is enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.10.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.10 — Enabled P8ETH
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.11. Figure 52.11 — Disable P8ETH
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
487
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 4.
Click Apply. The P8ETH card is removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 52.12.
Note: P8ETH Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects, MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver cards, and/or equipment ports associated.
Figure 52.12 — P8ETH disabled
To disable an EASv2 card 1.
488
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the EASv2 card is enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.13.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.13 — Enabled EASv2
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.14.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
489
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.14 — Disable EASv2
4.
Click Apply. The EASv2 card is removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 52.15.
Note: The EASv2 card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects, MPT-HL/MPTHLC Transceiver cards, and/or equipment ports associated.
490
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.15 — EASv2 disabled
To disable a P32E1DS1 card 1.
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P32E1DS1 card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.16.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
491
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.16 — Enabled P32E1DS1
492
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.17.
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.17 — Disable P32E1DS1
The P32E1DS1 card is removed from selected slot #. See Figure 52.18. Note: P32E1DS1 Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
493
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.18 — Disabled P32E1DS1
To disable a DS3 P2E3DS3 card 1.
494
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P2E3DS3 card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.19.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.19 — Enabled P2E3DS3
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.20.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
495
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.20 — Disable P2E3DS3
4.
Click Apply. The P2E3DS3 card disabled will be removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 52.21.
Note: P2E3DS3 Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
496
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.21 — Disabled P2E3DS3
Disable an SDH card 1.
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the SDH card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.22.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
497
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.22 — Enabled SDHACC
498
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.23.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.23 — Disable SDHACC
4.
Click Apply. The card disabled will be removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 52.24.
Note: The SDH Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
499
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.24 — Disabled SDHACC
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on MPTACC 1.
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on MPTACC Select slot the MSS/MPTACC (MPT Access) card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPTACC (MPT Access) card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area.
2.
500
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 52.25, which shows an enabled MPT-HC.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.25 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU
3.
From the Port # (1-4) Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty. See Figure 52.26. Figure 52.26 — Disable MPT-HC ODU
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
501
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 4.
Click Apply. The MPTACC port # will display Empty and the MPT ODU is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 52.27.
Note: MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU card will not disable if the port has any cross-connections associated with the port.
Figure 52.27 — Disabled MPT-HC ODU
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on Core
502
1.
Select slot the MSS/CORE card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the Core card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 52.28, which shows an enabled MPT-HC.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.28 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E
3.
Deprovision MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM connected to electrical or optical SFP Ethernet port? a.
If electrical Ethernet port, go to step 6.
b.
If optical SFP Ethernet port, go to step 4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
503
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.29 — Disable MPT-HC ODU from Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port
4.
From the Port # (5-6) Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty.
5.
Click Apply. The MPTACC port # will display Empty and the MPT ODU is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 52.30.
Note: MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU card will not disable if the port has any cross-connections associated with the port.
504
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.30 — Disabled MPT-HC ODU from Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port
6.
From the Port # (1-4) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type Empty. See Figure 52.31.
Figure 52.31 — Deprovision MPT-HC from Core-E electrical Ethernet port
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
505
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 7.
Click Apply. The Core MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM port will display empty and the MPT ODU is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 52.32.
Figure 52.32 — Disabled MPT-HC ODU from Core-E electrical Ethernet port
To disable an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU on P8ETH or EASv2
506
1.
Select slot where the card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the P8ETH or EASv2 card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 52.33.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.33 — Enabled MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH
3.
From the Port Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty. See Figure 52.34. Figure 52.34 — Disable MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
507
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 4.
Click Apply. The port # will display Empty and the MPT ODU is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 52.35. Figure 52.35 — Disabled MPT ODU from P8ETH
To disable an MPT access card 1.
508
Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the MPT Access card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.36.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.36 — Enabled MPTACC
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.37.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
509
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.37 — Disable MPTACC
4.
Click Apply. The MPT Access card disabled will be removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 52.38.
Note: MPT Access Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
510
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.38 — Disabled MPTACC
To disable an auxiliary card 1.
Select MSS-n/Slot#8 in the resource tree area where the Auxiliary card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 52.39.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
511
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.39 — Enabled auxiliary card
512
2.
Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area.
3.
From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 52.40.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.40 — Disable auxiliary card
4.
Click Apply. The Auxiliary card disabled will be removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 52.41.
Note: Auxiliary Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
513
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 52.41 — Disabled auxiliary card
514
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
53 — Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
53.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP). See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for information about ed configurations.
53.2 — Prerequisites MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio ports must be provisioned prior to ERP provisioning. For optical Ethernet ports on the Core to be included in a Ring, the SFP must be provisioned. If the NE is in Provider Bridge mode, the Ethernet port must be configured as NNI. The TPID parameter of both ports in the Ring link must be the same. For L1 LAG ports, the LAG must meet the following rules: •
the LAG must be in intra plug-in link configuration on a P8ETH or EASv2 card
•
only one LAG can be present on the card
•
no other optical or electrical ports should be configured or enabled on the card, that is, the LAG must be the only item configured on the card
•
at least one master port must be defined
•
the LAG must be composed of either 1+0 unprotected MPT-HC/MPT-XP, with or without XPIC, or 1+0 MPT-HL radio interfaces
•
LAG size must be between 1 and 4
P2E3DS3 and P32E1DS1 PDH ports must be provisioned prior to provisioning PDH to Ring cross connections.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
515
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
53.3 — General Use the procedures in this chapter to configure ERP on every node in the ring. The procedures are arranged in the sequence to correctly provision ERP Caution: For radios to be associated with a new ERP topology which have existing crossconnections and/or VLAN traffic provisioned, ERP topology provisioning is traffic affecting.
To provision a new ERP topology on ports with existing cross-connections and VLANs, the cross-connections and VLANs must be deleted before creating the ERP topology and re-entered according to this chapter. During this period of time all traffic associated with these cross-connections and VLANs will be lost. Schedule appropriate maintenance window prior to starting ERP provisioning on traffic barring systems. It is recommended to establish correct communication throughout the ring: Protection Status is ‘Idle,’ Port Current statuses are ‘Normal,’ and Port Forward status is Blocked for RPL Owner and Unblocked for all other ports prior to adding traffic flows to the ring. This chapter does not cover all aspects of Ethernet Ring design and assumes the operator has a valid Ethernet Ring design. ERP Switching is implemented according to ITU-T G.8032 recommendations.
53.4 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To provision an Ethernet ring topology
•
To enable an ERP Instance
•
To add a PDH Flow to an ERP Instance
•
To add a radio flow to an ERP instance
•
To add an Ethernet flow to an ERP instance
•
Add VLAN flow to ERP instance
•
To provision ETH OAM switching criteria (optional)
To provision an Ethernet ring topology 1.
516
Select Ethernet Ring Configuration View icon from the main toolbar. See Figure 53.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 53.1 — Ethernet Ring Configuration view icon
Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration window displays. See Figure 53.2. Figure 53.2 — Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration view
2.
For networks with traffic bearing radio ports to be added to the ERP topology, perform the following steps before provisioning ERP topology. For non-traffic bearing radio ports to be added to the ERP topology, go to step 3. cross-connections and VLAN traffic provisioned against radio ports to be provisioned into ERP topology.
Caution: For radios to be associated with a new ERP topology which have existing crossconnections and/or VLAN traffic provisioned, ERP topology provisioning is traffic affecting.
i.
Save the configuration file to be used to re-provision any deleted crossconnections and/or VLANs. For a detailed procedure, see View NE Inventory data.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
517
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ii.
Open the cross-connection window. For a detailed procedure see Deprovision cross connections.
iii.
Delete all existing cross-connections associated with the radio ports to be added to the ERP topology.
iv.
Open the VLAN configuration window. For a detailed procedure, see ister VLAN configuration.
v.
Delete all existing VLANs associated with the radio ports to be added to the ERP topology.
These cross-connections and VLANs will be re-provisioned to the new ERP according to this procedure. 3.
Provision ERP Topology using the following procedure: See Figure 53.3 for the following steps: a.
Enter the ERP Topology Label in the Label field.
b.
From the East Port drop-down menu, select east radio direction
c.
From the West Port drop-down menu, select west radio direction
d.
Click Create. Figure 53.3 — ERP Topology creation
Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration window updates. Ring Topology is added to the Ring Topologies table. See Figure ERP Topology created.
518
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 53.4 — ERP Topology created
4.
Provision Ethernet Ring Instance From the ERP Instance area, click Create. See Figure 53.4.
5.
Provision ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 53.5 for the following steps: a.
Enter ERP Label in the New ERP Label field.
b.
Enter R-APS VLAN ID in the R-APS VLAN ID field.
Note: R-APS VLAN ID must be provisioned to the same value on all Ethernet Ring Nodes belonging to the ERP Instance.
c.
From the R-APS MEG Level drop-down menu, select R-APS MEG Level for the ERP Topology.
Note: R-APS MEG Level must be provisioned to the same value on all Ethernet Ring Nodes belonging to the ERP Instance.
d.
From the R-APS MEG ID East drop-down menu, select ring link east port ID#.
e.
From the R-APS MEG ID West drop-down menu, select ring link west port ID#.
f.
For Ring Node which is RPL Owner, select RPL Owner check box (checked), for Ring Node which is not RPL Owner, RPL Owner check box (unchecked).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
519
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures RPL Owner selected? a.
If yes, go to step g.
b.
If no, go to step h.
g.
Select RPL Owner Port, East Port or West Port.
h.
Click Create. Figure 53.5 — ERP Instance creation
Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration window updates. ERP Instance is added to ERP Instances table. See Figure 53.6.
520
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 53.6 — ERP Instance created
6.
Create second ERP Instance? a.
If yes, repeat steps 4 and 5 to create a second ERP Instance. See Figure 53.6 for an example of two ERP Instances provisioned.
b.
If no, go to step 7. Figure 53.7 — Two ERP Instances created
7.
Select ERP Instance to provision Wait-to-Restore Time and Guard Timer.
8.
Ring Node RPL Owner?
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
521
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
9.
a.
If yes, go to step 9.
b.
If no, go to step 10.
From the Wait-to Restore Time drop-down menu, select 1 to 12 minutes.
10. In the Guard Timer field, enter Guard Timer duration; 10 to 2000 ms. 11. Click Apply. 12. Repeat steps 7 and 11 to provision Wait-to-Restore Time and Guard Timer on second ERP Instance if applicable. Note: To provision an Ethernet Ring, it is recommended to Create Ring Topology and ERP Instances on all ring nodes prior to enabling the ERP Instance. To provision additional Ethernet ring nodes repeat steps 1 through 12 on each ring node.
To enable an ERP Instance 1.
From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to enable. See Figure 53.7.
2.
Select ERP Enabled check box (checked).
3.
Click Apply.
4.
Perform To enable an ERP Instance on all Ring Nodes. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to enable ERP Instance on all Ring Nodes.
5.
Port and Protection Statuses around the ring. i.
East Port Current Status is Normal.
ii.
West Port Current Status is Normal.
iii.
RPL Owner/RPL Port status is Blocked.
iv.
all other East and West Port Forward Statuses are Unblocked.
v.
all Protection Statuses are Idle.
To add a PDH Flow to an ERP Instance 1.
To add a PDH Flow to an ERP Instance
2.
Add PDH flows to ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 53.8 for the following steps:
522
a.
Select ERP instance to add PDH flows.
b.
Enter PHD flow VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 53.8 — Add PDH VLAN IDs to ERP Instance
3.
Add PDH VLAN IDs to Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to add PDH to Ring cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To add a radio flow to an ERP instance 1.
Add Radio flows to ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 53.8 for the following steps:
2.
a.
Select ERP instance to add Radio flows.
b.
Enter Radio flow VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
Add Radio VLAN IDs to Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to add Radio to Ring cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To add an Ethernet flow to an ERP instance 1.
To add an Ethernet flow to an ERP instance Add MEF8 Ethernet flows to ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 53.8 for the following steps:
2.
a.
Select ERP instance to add Ethernet flows.
b.
Enter MEF8 Ethernet flow VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
Add MEF8 Ethernet VLAN IDs to Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to add ETH to Ring cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
523
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 3.
Add -through flow to ERP instance
Note: Ring to Ring cross-connections are required at all -through ring nodes. Traffic flows (PDH to Ring, Radio to Ring, and ETH to Ring) which enter and exit the Ring, at nodes other than the node being provisioned, require Ring to Ring cross connection provisioned.
Add -through flows to ERP Instance using the following procedure: See Figure 53.8 for the following steps:
4.
a.
Select ERP instance to add -through flows.
b.
Enter -through flow VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
Add -through VLAN IDs to Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to add Ring to Ring cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
Add VLAN flow to ERP instance 1.
Add Ethernet flows to ERP Instance using the following procedure:
2.
See Figure 53.8 for the following steps: a.
Select ERP instance to add Ethernet flows.
b.
Enter Ethernet flow VLAN IDs in Add VLANS text field.
c.
Click >>.
d.
VLAN IDs are added to the VLAN ID table.
e.
Click Apply.
3.
Add Ethernet Flow to VLAN Configuration. For detailed steps to add Ethernet Flow, see ister VLAN configuration.
4.
Provision Hold off timer
Note: In Ring configurations, mixed or fiber ring, using optical Ethernet ports configured on node and Core-E protection is also configured. The “Hold Off Timer” must be configured on the NE that is facing the NE with Core-E protection configured.
Provision the Hold Off timer for any Ethernet ports in the ERP Instance. For detailed steps, see Provision Ethernet ports. To provision ETH OAM switching criteria (optional) 1.
To provision ETH OAM switching criteria (optional) To enable ETH OAM switching criteria, select the OAM Switch Criteria check box, see Figure 53.9.
524
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 53.9 — OAM switching criteria
Note: The OAM Switch Criteria check box only appears if Ethernet ports are part of the Ring.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
525
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
526
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
54 — Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software
54.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to activate R5.1.0 software on Ring nodes when ERPS is in use. This procedure must be performed when upgrading from a release earlier than R5.0.0 to ensure that the Ring status is maintained during the software upgrade.
54.2 — General The first node on which the software is activated must be a neighbor to the RPL owner. This procedure will use Node B as an example, as shown in Figure 54.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
527
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.1 — Ring example for upgrade
54.3 — Procedure
528
1.
the R5.1.0 software to all Ring Nodes.
2.
that no fault condition exists on the Ring.
3.
Activate a Tx mute on Ring Node B toward Node C, see Figure 54.2. This will cause the Ring to enter protection state.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.2 — Activate Tx mute to Node C
4.
Activate the R5.1.0 software on Node B, see Figure 54.3. The activation of R5.1.0 on Node B does not impact the Ring status, which prevents any dependency on the time sequence of the upgrade of the East and West radio interfaces. TDM and Ethernet traffic entering Node B is lost when the interface toward Node A goes down due to radio interface upgrade, and is restored when it is back up.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
529
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.3 — Activate software on Node B
5.
530
Remove the Tx mute toward Node C, see Figure 54.4. After the WTR time has expired, the RPL owner puts the Ring in idle state.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.4 — Remove Tx mute to Node C
6.
Activate a Tx mute on Node C toward Node D and activate the R5.1.0 software on Node C, see Figure 54.5. The activation of R5.1.0 on Node C does not impact the Ring status, which prevents any dependency on the time sequence of the upgrade of the East and West radio interfaces. TDM and Ethernet traffic entering Node C is lost when the interface toward Node B goes down due to radio interface upgrade, and is restored when it is back up.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
531
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.5 — Activate Tx mute and activate SW on Node C
7.
532
Remove the Tx mute toward Node D, see Figure 54.6. After the WTR time has expired, the RPL owner puts the Ring in idle state.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.6 — Remove Tx mute to Node D
8.
Activate a Tx mute on Node D toward Node A and activate the R5.1.0 software on Node D, see Figure 54.7. The activation of R5.1.0 on Node B does not impact the Ring status, which prevents any dependency on the time sequence of the upgrade of the East and West radio interfaces. TDM and Ethernet traffic entering Node B is lost when the interface toward Node C goes down due to radio interface upgrade, and is restored when it is back up.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
533
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.7 — Activate Tx mute and activate SW on Node D
9.
534
Remove the Tx mute toward Node A, see Figure 54.8. If the NE MAC Address of Node A (used as Node ID by ERPS) is higher than NE MAC Address of Node D, after the WTR time has expired, the RPL owner puts the Ring in Idle state, otherwise all Ring Nodes other than RPL Owner go in Pending state. Node A remains in Protection state.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.8 — Remove Tx mute to Node A
10. Activate the R5.1.0 software on Node A, the RPL owner, see Figure 54.9. TDM and Ethernet traffic entering Node A is protected by the Ring when the radio interfaces toward Nodes B and D go down. When the upgrade is completed, and after the WTR time has expired, the RPL owner puts the Ring in Idle state.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
535
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 54.9 — Remove Tx mute to Node A
536
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
55 — Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring
55.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to provision cross connections in an Ethernet Ring that contains both fiber and microwave ports.
55.2 — General Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring require MAC address parameters which depend on the following factors: •
position of the TDM traffic end point nodes in the Ring: member or non-member of the Ring’s fiber chain
•
protection status of the end point NE if it is outside the Ring
The term fiber chain refers to the portion of the Ring where all the Ring nodes are connected using optical fiber. This chapter provides a series of examples of Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring. All examples are based on the sample Ring shown in Figure 55.1. For information on how to create cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
537
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.1 — Sample mixed fiber/microwave Ring
The sample Ring consists of nodes A, B, C, D, I, J and K. Nodes A, B, C and D are of the Ring’s fiber chain. NEs E, F, G, and H connect to the Ring’s fiber chain using Ethernet connections.
55.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures. All examples are based on the sample Ring shown in Figure 55.1.
538
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node J and Node K
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node J and Node D
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node J and Node D (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node K and Node B
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node K and Node B (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE G
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE G (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE E
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE E (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node D 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node D (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node A (protected) and Node D (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node C
•
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node C (protected)
•
To configure a -through cross-connection on Node D
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE E and Node C
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE F and Node C
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE F and Node C (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE F (protected) and Node C (protected)
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE E and NE H
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE E and NE G
•
To provision a cross-connection between NE F and NE G
To provision a cross-connection between Node J and Node K 1.
Neither traffic end point belongs to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.2. Figure 55.2 — Cross-connection between Node J and Node K
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
539
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.3 — Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node A
2.
540
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.4 — Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
541
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.5 — Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
542
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.6 — Node J to Node K: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node J and Node D 1.
One traffic end point belongs to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
543
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.7 — Cross-connection between Node J and Node D
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.8. Figure 55.8 — Node J to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node A
a.
544
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.9.
Figure 55.9 — Node J to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.10.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
545
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.10 — Node J to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
546
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.10 and Figure 55.11.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.11 — Node J to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D
Figure 55.12 — Node J to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
547
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node J and Node D (protected) 1.
One traffic end point belongs to the fiber chain. This end point (on Node D) is protected, see Figure 55.13.
Figure 55.13 — Cross-connection between Node J and Node D (protected)
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.14.
548
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.14 — Node J to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A
2.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.15.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
549
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.15 — Node J to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
550
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.16.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.16 — Node J to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.17 and Figure 55.18.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
551
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.17 — Node J to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D
Figure 55.18 — Node J to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a. 552
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node K and Node B 1.
One traffic end point belongs to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.19. Figure 55.19 — Cross-connection between Node K and Node B
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.20 and Figure 55.21.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
553
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.20 — Node K to Node B: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B
Figure 55.21 — Node K to Node B: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B
a. 554
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Note: The Ring Destination MAC address on Node B can be either the Unicast MAC address of Node D or that of Node A. However, the configuration on Node B affects the configuration on other nodes in the fiber chain.
2.
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.22.
Figure 55.22 — Node K to Node B: -through cross-connection on Node A
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node B Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.23.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
555
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.23 — Node K to Node B: -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
556
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node B Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.24.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.24 — Node K to Node B: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node B Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node K and Node B (protected) 1.
One traffic end point belongs to the fiber chain. This end point (on Node B) is protected, see Figure 55.25.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
557
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.25 — Cross-connection between Node K and Node B (protected)
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.10 and Figure 55.11. Figure 55.26 — Node K to Node B (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B
558
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.27 — Node K to Node B (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Note: The Ring Destination MAC address on Node B can be either the Unicast MAC address of Node D or that of Node A. However, the configuration on Node B affects the configuration on other nodes in the fiber chain.
2.
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.28.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
559
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.28 — Node K to Node B (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A
3.
560
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node B Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.29.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.29 — Node K to Node B (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node B Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.30.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
561
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.30 — Node K to Node B (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node B Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE G 1.
562
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.31.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.31 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE G
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G, see Figure 55.32 and Figure 55.33.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
563
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.32 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G
564
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.33 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G
2.
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.34.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
565
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.34 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C
3.
566
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.35.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.35 — Node I to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node A
4.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.36.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
567
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.36 — Node I to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node B
5.
568
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.37.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.37 — Node I to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE G (protected) 1.
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain. This end point (on NE G) is protected, see Figure 55.38.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
569
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.38 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE G (protected)
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G, see Figure 55.39 and Figure 55.40.
570
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.39 — Node I to NE G (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Note: The Destination MAC address on NE G can be either the Unicast MAC address of Node A or that of Node D. However, the configuration on NE G affects the configuration on other nodes in the fiber chain.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
571
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.40 — Node I to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Note: The Destination MAC address on NE G can be either the Unicast MAC address of Node A or that of Node D. However, the configuration on NE G affects the configuration on other nodes in the fiber chain.
2.
572
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.41.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.41 — Node I to NE G (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE G Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.42.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
573
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.42 — Node I to NE G (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A
4.
574
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.43.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.43 — Node I to NE G (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B
5.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: NE G Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.44.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
575
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.44 — Node I to NE G (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE E 1.
576
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.45.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.45 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE E
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 55.46 and Figure 55.47.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
577
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.46 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
578
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.47 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E
2.
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.48.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
579
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.48 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A
3.
580
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.49.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.49 — Node I to NE E: -through cross-connection on Node B
4.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.50.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
581
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.50 — Node I to NE E: -through cross-connection on Node C
5.
582
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.51.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.51 — Node I to NE E: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node I and NE E (protected) •
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain. That end point (on NE E), is protected, see Figure 55.52.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
583
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.52 — Cross-connection between Node I and NE E (protected)
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 55.53 and Figure 55.54.
584
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.53 — Node I to NE E (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
585
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.54 — Node I to NE E (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E
•
586
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.55.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.55 — Node I to NE E: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A
•
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE E Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.56.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
587
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.56 — Node I to NE E (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B
•
588
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.57 — Node I to NE E (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C
•
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.6.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
589
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.58 — Node I to NE E (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE E Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node D •
590
Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.59.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.59 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node D
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.60 and Figure 55.61. Figure 55.60 — Node A to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
591
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.61 — Node A to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A
•
592
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.62.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.62 — Node A to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node B
•
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.63.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
593
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.63 — Node A to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node C
•
594
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.64 and Figure 55.65.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.64 — Node A to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D
Figure 55.65 — Node A to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
595
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node D (protected) 1.
Both traffic end points belongs to the fiber chain. The end point at Node D is protected; see Figure 55.66.
Figure 55.66 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node D (protected)
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.67 and Figure 55.68.
596
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.67 — Node A to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A
Figure 55.68 — Node A to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
597
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.69.
Figure 55.69 — Node A to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
598
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.70.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.70 — Node A to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.71 and Figure 55.72.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
599
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.71 — Node A to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D
Figure 55.72 — Node A to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a. 600
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node A (protected) and Node D (protected) 1.
Both traffic end points belongs to the fiber chain. Both end points are protected; see Figure 55.73.
Figure 55.73 — Cross-connection between Node A (protected) and Node D (protected)
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.74 and Figure 55.75.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
601
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.74 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A
Figure 55.75 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A
a. 602
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.76.
Figure 55.76 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.77.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
603
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.77 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): -through cross-connection on Node C
4.
604
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Multicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.78 and Figure 55.79.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.78 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D
Figure 55.79 — Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
605
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Multicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node C 1.
Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.80. Figure 55.80 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node C
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.81 and Figure 55.82.
606
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.81 — Node A to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A
Figure 55.82 — Node A to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
607
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.83.
Figure 55.83 — Node A to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
608
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.84 and Figure 55.84.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.84 — Node A to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.85 — Node A to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
609
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
4.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.86.
Figure 55.86 — Node A to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node C (protected) 1.
610
Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain. The end point at Node C is protected; see Figure 55.87.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.87 — Cross-connection between Node A and Node C (protected)
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.88 and Figure 55.89. Figure 55.88 — Node A to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node A
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
611
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.89 — Node A to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A
2.
612
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.90.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.90 — Node A to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node B
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.91 and Figure 55.92.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
613
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.91 — Node A to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.92 — Node A to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a. 614
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
To configure a -through cross-connection on Node D 1.
See Figure 55.93.
Figure 55.93 — Node A to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D
2.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node A Unicast MAC address
Provision a cross-connection between Node B and Node C Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.94.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
615
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.94 — Cross-connection between Node B and Node C
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.95 and Figure 55.96. Figure 55.95 — Node B to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B
616
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.96 — Node B to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.97 and Figure 55.98.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
617
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.97 — Node B to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.98 — Node B to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a. 618
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
4.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node B Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.99.
Figure 55.99 — Node B to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node A
5.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node B Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.100.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
619
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.100 — Node B to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D
6.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node B Unicast MAC address
Provision a cross-connection between NE E and Node D One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.101.
620
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.101 — Cross-connection between NE E and Node D
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 55.102 and Figure 55.103. Figure 55.102 — NE E to Node D: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
621
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Figure 55.103 — NE E to Node D: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G
7.
622
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.104.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.104 — NE E to Node D: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A
8.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.105.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
623
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.105 — NE E to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node A
9.
624
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.106.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.106 — NE E to Node D: -through cross-connection on Node C
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node D Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
10. Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.107 and Figure 55.108.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
625
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.107 — NE E to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D
Figure 55.108 — NE E to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a. 626
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE E and Node C •
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.109. Figure 55.109 — Cross-connection between NE E and Node C
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 55.110 and Figure 55.111.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
627
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.110 — NE E to Node C: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
628
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.111 — NE E to Node C: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E
•
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.112.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
629
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.112 — NE E to Node C: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A
•
630
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.113.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.113 — NE E to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node B
•
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.114 and Figure 55.115.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
631
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.114 — NE E to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.115 — NE E to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a. 632
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.116.
Figure 55.116 — NE E to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE F and Node C 1.
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain, see Figure 55.117.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
633
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.117 — Cross-connection between NE F and Node C
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F, see Figure 55.118 and Figure 55.119. Figure 55.118 — NE F to Node C: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F
634
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Figure 55.119 — NE F to Node C: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F
2.
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.120.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
635
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.120 — NE F to Node C: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B
3.
636
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.121 and Figure 55.122.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.121 — NE F to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.122 — NE F to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
637
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
4.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.123.
Figure 55.123 — NE F to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node A
5.
638
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.124.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.124 — NE F to Node C: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE F and Node C (protected) 1.
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain. This end point, at Node C, is protected, see Figure 55.125.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
639
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.125 — Cross-connection between NE F and Node C (protected)
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F, see Figure 55.126 and Figure 55.127.
640
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.126 — NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
641
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.127 — NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F
2.
642
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.128.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.128 — NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B
3.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.129 and Figure 55.130.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
643
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.129 — NE F to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.130 — NE F to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a. 644
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
4.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.131.
Figure 55.131 — NE F to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A
5.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.132.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
645
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.132 — NE F to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE F (protected) and Node C (protected) 1.
646
One traffic end point is connected using Ethernet to the fiber chain. Both end points are protected, see Figure 55.133.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.133 — Cross-connection between NE F (protected) and Node C (protected)
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F, see Figure 55.134 and Figure 55.135.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
647
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.134 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F
648
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.135 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F
2.
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.136.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
649
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.136 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B
3.
650
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE F Multicast MAC address
Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.137 and Figure 55.138.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.137 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C
Figure 55.138 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
651
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
4.
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Multicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.139.
Figure 55.139 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node A
5.
652
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: Node C Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.140.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.140 — NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: Node C Multicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE E and NE H 1.
Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.141.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
653
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.141 — Cross-connection between NE E and NE H
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 55.142 and Figure 55.143.
654
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.142 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
655
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.143 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E
2.
656
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE H, see Figure 55.144 and Figure 55.145.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.144 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
657
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.145 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E
3.
658
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE H, see Figure 55.146 and Figure 55.147.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.146 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE H
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
659
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.147 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE H
4.
660
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.148.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.148 — NE E to NE H: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A
5.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.149.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
661
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.149 — NE E to NE H: -through cross-connection on Node B
6.
662
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.150.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.150 — NE E to NE H: -through cross-connection on Node C
7.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.151.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
663
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.151 — NE to NE H: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE H Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE E and NE G 1.
664
Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.152.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.152 — Cross-connection between NE E and NE G
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 55.153 and Figure 55.154. Figure 55.153 — NE E to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
665
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Figure 55.154 — NE E to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E
2.
666
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G, see Figure 55.155 and Figure 55.156.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.155 — NE E to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
667
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.156 — NE E to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G
3.
668
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.157.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.157 — NE E to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A
4.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.158.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
669
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.158 — NE E to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node B
5.
670
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring East MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring West MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.159.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.159 — NE E to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C
6.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.160.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
671
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.160 — NE E to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE E Unicast MAC address
To provision a cross-connection between NE F and NE G 1.
672
Both traffic end points belong to the fiber chain; see Figure 55.161.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.161 — Cross-connection between NE F and NE G
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F, see Figure 55.162 and Figure 55.163.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
673
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.162 — NE F to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F
674
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.163 — NE F to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F
2.
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G, see Figure 55.164 and Figure 55.165.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
675
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.164 — NE F to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G
676
a.
Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the DA MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.165 — NE F to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G
3.
e.
Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down
f.
Configure the payload size, ECID Tx, and ECID Rx parameters
g.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
h.
Choose the TDM clock source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
i.
Enter the MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 55.166.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
677
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.166 — NE F to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B
4.
678
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
Configure an Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C, see Figure 55.166.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.167 — NE F to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C
5.
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 55.168.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
679
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.168 — NE F to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node A
6.
680
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
Configure a -through cross-connection on Node D, see Figure 55.169.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 55.169 — NE F to NE G: -through cross-connection on Node D
a.
Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list
b.
Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH
c.
Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH
d.
Enter the Ring Destination MAC address: NE G Unicast MAC address
e.
Enter the Ring Source MAC address: NE F Unicast MAC address
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
681
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
682
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
56 — Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool
56.1 — Purpose The aided cross-connection tool is a smart tool to help the to select the correct MAC address for cross-connections on nodes that are of the fiber chain of a mixed fibermicrowave Ring. The term fiber chain refers to a portion of the Ring where all the Ring nodes are connected using optical fiber.
56.2 — General The procedure is completed in two phases:
56.2.1 — Ring’s Fiber Chain Description The describes the fiber chain, specifying the required information about the nodes of the Ring portion plus the NEs adding traffic to the Ring using Ethernet connections. A specific Pre-provisioning Tool is provided. The data loaded in the tool is stored in the MIB or exported to an XML file. An existing file can also be imported. The maximum number of entries is 32. that an imported file contains no more than 32 entries. This chapter will use the same example ring as Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring, as shown in Figure 56.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
683
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General Figure 56.1 — Sample mixed fiber/microwave Ring
The sample Ring consists of nodes A, B, C, D, I, J and K. Nodes A, B, C and D are of the Ring’s fiber chain. NEs E, F, G, and H connect to the Ring’s fiber chain using Ethernet connections. The list of Ring nodes belonging to the fiber chain in the description tool must follow the exact sequence of nodes along the chain: •
The First Node must be the one which has the Radio interface (L1 LAG) as West Ring Port and the optical Ethernet interface as East Ring Port (Node A).
•
The Last Node must be the one which has the Radio interface (L1 LAG) as East Ring Port and the optical Ethernet interface as West Ring Port (Node D).
The presence of a Cross-connection Gateway, a Ring Node where all TDM flows are aggregated, can be selected as:
684
•
No Gateway, when there is no node in the whole Ring that aggregates TDM flows
•
Outside Ring’s Fiber Chain, when there is a Ring node that aggregates TDM flows but it is outside the Ring’s Fiber Chain
•
Specific Ring node, when there is a Ring Node which aggregates TDM flows and this node is inside the Ring’s Fiber Chain
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
56.2.2 — Aided Cross-connection in Cross-connections At the cross-connection creation, each MAC address parameter requested is automatically selected by the tool, or a short list of MAC address options is provided. Additional information, according to the type of cross-connection, is requested by the GUI to determine the MAC addresses. You can also create cross-connections without using the tool: select the Manual radio button to enter the MAC address.
56.3 — Procedure 1.
Pre-provisioning tool From the Configuration menu, choose Ring’s Fiber Chain Description to launch the pre-provisioning tool, see Figure 56.2. Figure 56.2 — Ring’s Fiber Chain Description
The Ring’s Fiber Chain for Aided Cross-connections window opens, see Figure 56.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
685
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 56.3 — Ring’s Fiber Chain for Aided Cross-connections window
2.
In the Ring Nodes of Fiber Chain , click on the button to add Ring nodes. Enter the label, topology type and NE MAC address for each node in the fiber chain. that the correct nodes are entered as the first and last node.
3.
In the External Network Elements , click on the button to add external NEs. For each external NE, enter the label, NE MAC address, and the label of the Ring Node to which the external NE is connected.
4.
In the Cross-Connection Gateway , select either No Gateway, Outside Ring’s Fiber Chain, or, if applicable, a node inside the fiber chain that aggregates TDM flows.
5.
Click on the Apply button.
6.
Cross-connections window Provision the cross-connections for the nodes in the fiber chain, as outlined in Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring. The Aided radio button is selected in the MAC Address Selection . The correct MAC address is automatically selected, or a list of possible MAC addresses is provided. Figure 56.4 through Figure 56.10 provide examples.
686
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 56.4 — Add&Drop cross-connection: Other end point is outside the fiber chain
Figure 56.5 — Add&Drop cross-connection: Other end point is inside the fiber chain
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
687
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 56.6 — -through cross-connection: Both end points are inside the fiber chain (1)
Figure 56.7 — -through cross-connection: Both end points are inside the fiber chain (2)
688
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 56.8 — -through cross-connection: One end point is inside the fiber chain (1)
Figure 56.9 — -through cross-connection: One end point is inside the fiber chain (2)
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
689
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 56.10 — -through cross-connection: Both end points are outside the fiber chain
7.
690
See Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring to provision the remaining cross-connections in the Ring.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
57 — Provision protection scheme parameters
57.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision Protection Schemes for the 9500 MPR. Note: If an RF loopback is in place with MPT-HLC, you need to remove it before configuring protection.
57.2 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To view protection schemes
•
To provision the Equipment Protection Schemes parameter
•
To provision the Hot StandBy Protection Schemes parameter
•
To provision Rx Radio Protection Schemes parameters
To view protection schemes 1.
Select Protection Schemes Tab. The Protection Schemes tab opens. See Figure 57.1. All the protection schemes provisioned for the 9500 MPR radio are displayed in the main window pane.
2.
Expand Protection Schemes in the resource tree area.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
691
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.1 — Protection Schemes resource tree expanded
3.
Protection scheme Select action.
4.
a.
To View Core Protection Scheme parameters, go to step 4.
b.
To View Synchronization Protection Scheme parameters, go to step 6.
c.
To View Radio Channel Protection Schemes parameters, go to step 7
View Core Protection Scheme parameters Select Protection Schemes/Slot#1-2/Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. The Protection Schemes Parameter tab displays Core protection scheme parameters in the main window. See Figure 57.2.
692
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.2 — Core-E Protection Scheme Parameter tab
5.
6.
From the Restoration Criteria partition, restoration criteria selection and provision if required: a.
Select restoration criteria radio button, Not Revertive or Revertive.
b.
Click Apply.
View Synchronization Protection Scheme parameters Select Protection Schemes/Synchronization Protection in the resource tree area. The synchronization Protection Schemes Parameter tab displays in the main window. See Figure 57.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
693
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.3 — Synchronization Protection Scheme Parameter tab
The Synchronization switching scheme is provisioned on the Synchronization tab. For detailed procedure to provision Synchronization switching parameters see ister synchronization. 7.
View Radio Channel Protection Schemes parameters Select Protection Schemes/Radio channel (Dir#x.y) in the resource tree area. The Protection Scheme Parameters tab displays in the main window. See Figure 57.4.
694
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.4 — Radio Channel Protection Scheme Parameter tab
8.
To view EPS protection scheme parameter, select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area.
9.
To view HSB protection scheme parameter, select HSB Protection in the resource tree area.
10. To view EPS protection scheme parameter, select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. To provision the Equipment Protection Schemes parameter 1.
Select Protection Schemes/Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. The Protection Scheme Parameters tab displays in the main window. See Figure 57.5.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
695
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.5 — Equipment Protection Scheme Parameter tab
2.
Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area.
Note: For 1+1 HSB/SD protection type, EPS restoration criteria is always dimmed. The restoration criteria selected for HSB protection is applied to EPS automatically.
3.
From the Restoration Criteria partition, restoration criteria selection and provision if required: a.
Select restoration criteria radio button, Not Revertive or Revertive.
b.
Click Apply.
To provision the Hot StandBy Protection Schemes parameter 1.
Select Protection Schemes/HSB Protection in the resource tree area. The HSB Protection Scheme Parameters tab displays in the main window. See Figure 57.6.
696
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.6 — HSB Protection Scheme Parameter tab
2.
Select HSB Protection in the resource tree area.
Note: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available.
3.
From the Restoration Criteria partition, restoration criteria selection and provision if required: a.
Select restoration criteria radio button, Not Revertive or Revertive.
b.
Click Apply.
To provision Rx Radio Protection Schemes parameters 1.
Select Protection Schemes/Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. The Rx Radio Protection Scheme Parameters tab displays in the main window. See Figure 57.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
697
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 57.7 — Rx Radio Protection Scheme Parameter tab
2.
Select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area.
3.
Select Protection Scheme Parameters Tab.
4.
From the Restoration Criteria partition, restoration criteria selection and provision if required: a.
Select restoration criteria radio button, Not Revertive or Revertive.
b.
Select Physical Cable in the RPS configuration pane if an RPS cable is in use. If the Physical cable check box is not checked, a warning is displayed. Figure 57.8 — Physical Cable warning example
698
c.
Click Yes to proceed, or No to return to the Protection Scheme Parameters Tab
d.
Click Apply in the Protection Scheme Parameters Tab.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
58 — Provision Protection Type
58.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision protection type on a pair of Core-E or CorEvo cards, transponder cards, and radio transceivers in the system.
58.2 — Prerequisites Both Core cards, transponder cards, and radio transceivers must be enabled before 1+1 EPS protection can be provisioned.
58.3 — General Transponder cards MPTACC (MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio), P2E3DS3, P32E1DS1 and/or SDHACC can be installed in any of the universal slots 3 through 8. The MSS-8 can be configured with a maximum of three protected pairs. The MSS-4 can be configured with a maximum of one protected pair. In 1+1 EPS protected configuration, the main transponder card is resident in slots 3, 5, and/ or 7. The spare transponder card is resident in slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively. The main and spare cards must be plugged in side-by-side. MPTACC radio cards 1+1 EPS traffic/services protection switching when main (slots 3, 5, and/or 7) and spare (slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively) are correctly equipped and configured. Up to two 1+1 EPS protection pairs can be configured in this configuration. Two MPTACC radio ports on the same MPTACC card 1+1 EPS traffic/services protection switching when both MPT Access ports are correctly equipped and configured on the same MPTACC radio card. One 1+1 EPS protection pair can be configured per MPTACC card.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
699
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
58.4 — Procedure This section provides the following procedures: •
To provision MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Transceiver Protection Type
•
To provision E1/DS1 Protection Type
•
To provision DS3 Protection Type
•
To provision SDH Protection Type
•
To provision MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU Protection Type
To provision MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Transceiver Protection Type Note: Spare MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver must be enabled prior to provisioning MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver protection type.
1.
Select MPT-HL Dir#-Ch# or MPT-HLC Dir#-Ch# in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver icon in blue in the resource list area.
2.
Select Settings tab. See Figure 58.1. Figure 58.1 — MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Transceiver Settings tab
700
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 3.
From the Protection Type drop-down menu, select: no Protection, 1+1 HSB/SD, or 1+1 FD protection type.
4.
Click Apply. Protection information updating window opens.
5.
Click OK. Figure 58.2 — MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Protection Type provisioned
To provision E1/DS1 Protection Type 1.
Select the MSS/DS1 or MSS/E1 card to provision with protection in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the MSS/P32E1DS1 card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 58.3.
2.
From the Protection Type drop-down menu, select no Protection or 1+1 EPS.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
701
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.3 — Provision P32E1DS1 Protection Type
3.
Click Apply. Protection information updating window opens.
4.
702
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.4 — P32E1DS1 Protection Type provisioned
To provision DS3 Protection Type 1.
Select MSS/DS3 card to provision with protection in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the MSS/P2E3DS3 (DS3) card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 58.5.
2.
From the Protection Type drop-down menu, select no Protection or 1+1 EPS.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
703
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.5 — Provision P2E3DS3 Protection Type
3.
Click Apply. Protection information updating window opens.
4.
704
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.6 — P2E3DS3 Protection Type provisioned
To provision SDH Protection Type Note: When provisioning ports for 1+1 EPS Protection, provision the main ports. Then only enable the spare ports. Then re-provision 1+1 EPS protection.
Note: It is not possible to enable a port while 1+1 EPS protection is enabled. To grow an SDH port after 1+1 EPS protection is provisioned, the operator must disable 1+1 EPS protection. Enable the new port. Then re-provision 1+1 EPS protection.
1.
Select the card to provision with protection in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area. See Figure 58.5.
2.
From the Protection Type drop-down menu, select no Protection or 1+1 EPS.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
705
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.7 — Provision SDH Protection Type
3.
Click Apply. Protection information updating window opens.
4.
706
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.8 — SDH Protection Type provisioned
To provision MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU Protection Type Caution: RPS cable is mandatory with MPT-HC-HQAM or MPT-XP-HQAM in 1+1 configuration when channel spacing is higher than 30 MHz and the HQAM radio is not MPT-HC compatible. A warning dialog box appears when this configuration is set up. Note: Spare MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU must be enabled prior to provisioning MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU protection type.
Note: MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM 1+1 radio protection is not ed on Transceiver enabled on Core-E Ethernet ports.
Note: MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM 1+1 radio protection is ed on Transceivers enabled on MPTACC cards when main (slots 3, 5, and/or 7) and spare (slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively) are correctly equipped and configured. Up to two 1+1 EPS protection pairs can be configured per pair of MPTACC cards in this configuration.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
707
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
Note: MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM 1+1 radio protection is ed on Transceivers enabled on a MPTACC radio card when two MPTACC ports on the same MPTACC card are correctly equipped and configured on the same MPTACC card. One 1+1 EPS protection pair can be configured per MPTACC card.
1.
Select MPT-HC Dir#-Ch# or MPT-HQAM Dir#-Ch# in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM ODU icon in blue in the resource list area. See Figure 58.9.
Figure 58.9 — Provision MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Protection Type
708
2.
From the Protection Type drop-down menu, select: no Protection, 1+1 HSB/SD, or 1+1 FD protection type.
3.
From the Protect Port drop-down menu, select Slot#n Port#m.
4.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.10 — MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Protection Type selection
Protection information updating window opens. 5.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
709
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 58.11 — MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Protection Type provisioned
710
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
59 — Configure radio parameters
59.1 — Purpose This chapter describes the radio parameters and provides procedures to configure radio parameters.
59.2 — General To aid in correct provisioning of the radio parameters, establish communication with the radio (MPT-HC, MPT-HC-HQAM, MPT-XP, MPT-XP-HQAM, 9558HC, MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT-HLS). To provision an MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM/9558HC (MPT ODU) radio ports, one of the following must be provisioned for each MPT ODU: •
Ethernet port on an enabled Core card
•
Radio ports on an enabled MPTACC (MPT Access) card
•
SFP ports on an enabled P8ETH card
•
SFP ports on an enabled EASv2 card
•
Ethernet ports on an MSS-1 unit: communication with the MSS-1 unit must be established.
•
Ethernet ports on an MSS-O unit: communication with the MSS-O must be established.
To provision the MPT-HL/HLC/HLS radio parameters, one of the following must be provisioned for the MPT-HLx: •
SFP port on an enabled Core card
•
SFP ports on an enabled P8ETH card
•
SFP ports on an enabled EASv2 card
•
SFP ports on an MSS-1 unit: communication with the MSS-1 unit must be established
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
711
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
Provision the radio protection scheme before provisioning MPT-HLx/MPT ODU radio channel parameters. If MPT-HLx/MPT ODU radio parameters are provisioned before the protection scheme, unexpected radio alarms may be reported on the radio channel. To clear these unexpected radio alarms, a system restart is required. Note: Most procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen. However, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
Note: All ed channel plans do not all possible radio profile combinations. For a table of ed profiles per radio channel plan, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual Engineering Specifications section.
59.2.1 — Monodirectional links For the management of monodirectional radio links, different configurations are needed on each side of the link. Table 59.1describes the configuration requirements. Table 59.1 — Configurations in monodirectional links Parameter
Tx only node
Rx only node
ATPC
Should not be enabled; cannot work
Should not be enabled; cannot work
ACM
Should not be enabled; cannot work
Should not be enabled; cannot work
L1 LAG
Should not be enabled; cannot work
Should not be enabled; cannot work
Ring
Should not be enabled; cannot work
Should not be enabled; cannot work
Radio PM
Should not be enabled; it works on the Rx side
Can be enabled
Link identifier
Should not be enabled; it works on the Rx side
Can be enabled
PPP
Must be disabled (otherwise a PPP Failure alarm will be raised)
Must be disabled (otherwise a PPP Failure alarm will be raised)
No Rx Radio Alarms alarm profile
Must be configured in the radio (otherwise all the Rx Radio alarms will be raised)
—
712
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Prerequisites Table 59.1 — Configurations in monodirectional links (Continued) Parameter
Tx only node
Rx only node
No Tx Radio Alarms alarm profile
—
Must be configured in the radio (otherwise all the Tx Radio alarms will be raised)
Tx Mute
—
Transmitter must be muted with Tx Mute command
Space diversity combiner for MPT-HLS
Should not be equipped on the Tx side
Can be equipped only on the receiver side
RF switch for MPT-HLS
Should be mounted and connected
Should be mounted and connected
59.3 — Prerequisites To provision a radio, the ing radio port (card, or card plus port) must be provisioned before beginning the procedures in this chapter.
59.4 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Radio Main View
•
To ister the MPT-HL transceiver
•
To provision the MPT-HLC transceiver
•
To ister the MPT-HLS transceiver
•
To ister the MPT ODU
•
To provision the radio for fixed modulation using data help
•
To provision the radio for adaptive modulation using data help
•
To ister the Tx Mute settings
•
To ister the ACM Manual settings
•
To remove XPIC
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
713
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures To open the Radio Main View 1.
From the Equipment tab, select the radio in the resource tree: MSS/RADIO, MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT ODU Dir#-Ch#. The selected radio type in the resource list will be highlighted in blue. See Figure 59.1 for an example of selecting an MPT-HC radio. Figure 59.1 — MPT-HC radio selected
2.
Double-click on the radio type icon. See Figure 59.1 for an example of selecting an MPT-HC radio. The corresponding radio Main View displays:
3.
714
•
MPT Main View (MPT ODU)
•
CORE Main View (MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT ODU)
•
EAS Main View (MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT ODU)
•
MSS CORE Main View (MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT ODU)
Click on the Settings tab; see Figure 59.2 for an example of selecting an MPT ODU radio.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.2 — MPT ODU Radio Main View Settings tab
To ister the MPT-HL transceiver 1.
Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio protection type, go to step 2.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio for fixed modulation, go to step 6.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 9.
d.
To Provision the MPT-HL 1+1 spare radio channel, go to step 12.
e.
To Provision the MPT-HL manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 15
f.
To Provision the spare MPT-HL RTPC, go to step 18.
g.
To Provision the MPT-HL Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 20.
h.
To Provision the spare MPT-HL ATPC, go to step 23
i.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio protection scheme, go to step 25.
j.
To Provision the MPT-HL link identifier, go to step 32
k.
To Provision the MPT-HL Synchronization Status Messaging, go to step 34
l.
To Provision the MPT-HL Point to Point Protocol settings, go to step 35.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
715
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
m.
To Provision the PKT throughput booster setting, go to step 36.
n.
To ister the MPT-HL Alarm Profile settings, go to step 37.
Provision the MPT-HL radio protection type
Note: Any spare MPT-HL transceiver must be enabled prior to provisioning MPT-HL transceiver protection scheme.
From the Equipment tab, select the MPT-HL Dir#-Ch1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will be highlighted in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT-HL transceiver icon in blue in the resource list area. 3. Note: Before changing the protection type provisioning, you must first apply the No Protection option to the protection type. For example: If 1+1 HSB is provisioned and 1+1 FD is needed, first select No Protection and click Apply, then select 1+1 FD and click Apply.
From the Protection Type drop-down menu, choose No Protection, 1+1 HSB/ SD, or 1+1 FD. See Figure 59.3. 4.
Click Apply. Figure 59.3 — MPT-HL transceiver protection type provisioning
716
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 5.
6.
Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio for fixed modulation, go to step 6.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 9.
Provision the MPT-HL radio for fixed modulation Open the appropriate radio main view tab; depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.4. Figure 59.4 — MPT-HL Settings tab for fixed modulation
7.
Provision MPT-HL radio port:
Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one ed by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
i.
In the Mode field, select the Preset radio button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired channel spacing (5 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz, or 40 MHz), modulation scheme (4 QAM, 16 QAM, 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128 QAM, or 256 QAM), and option (Std or High Gain).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
717
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures iv.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The Data Help window opens.
v.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value.
vi.
When the MPT-HL is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq (KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT-HL is not connected, enter the TX Radio Frequency within the allowed range.
vii. If the MPT-HL is not connected, enter the Rx Radio Frequency within the allowed range. Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx Radio Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
viii. Enter the MPT-HL radio channel Label, if applicable. ix.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HL configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HL cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen are the same as the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
8.
9.
Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HL 1+1 spare radio channel, go to step 13.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 16.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HL Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 19.
Provision the MPT-HL radio for adaptive modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.5.
718
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.5 — MPT-HL Settings tab for adaptive modulation
10. Provision MPT-HL radio port: Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one ed by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
i.
In the Mode field, select the Adaptive radio button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired reference modulation scheme (4 QAM, 16 QAM, 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128 QAM, or 256 QAM), and option (Std or High Gain). The reference modulation will be the lowest available modulation scheme in the ed modulation range.
iv.
In 1+1 HSB configurations, from the Driving MSE drop-down menu, choose Lowest or Highest MSE.
v.
In the ed Modulation , choose all the modulation schemes to be used by the adaptive modulation. The schemes must be contiguous.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
719
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures vi.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The MPT-HL Shifter Data Help window opens.
vii. In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value. viii. When the MPT-HL is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT-HL is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range. ix.
If the MPT-HL is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
x.
Enter the MPT-HL radio channel Label, if applicable.
xi.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HL configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HL cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen is a mirror image of the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
11. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HL 1+1 spare radio channel, go to step 13.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 16.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HL Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 19.
d.
To perform additional procedures To ister the MPT-HL transceiver, go to step 1.
12. Provision the MPT-HL 1+1 spare radio channel Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.5.
720
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.6 — MPT-HL 1+1 settings tab
13. Provision the MPT-HL 1+1 spare radio channel: i.
Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range. The Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency +/- Shifter Frequency (based on the high or low channel selected)
ii.
Click Apply.
14. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HL manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 16.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 19.
15. Provision the MPT-HL manual transmit power level (RTPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.4. 16. Provision the MPT-HL radio channel transmit power level: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
721
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Choose the TxPower (dBm) level for the lowest modulation scheme in the range. Power levels for the other modulation schemes will be set automatically.
ii.
Click Apply.
17. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT-HL RTPC, go to step 18.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio protection scheme, go to step 25.
18. Provision the spare MPT-HL RTPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.6. 19. Provision the Spare MPT-HL radio channel transmit power level: i.
Choose the TxPower (dBm) level for the lowest modulation scheme in the range. Power levels for the other modulation schemes will be set automatically.
ii.
Click Apply.
20. Provision the MPT-HL Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.7.
722
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.7 — MPT-HL settings with ATPC
21. Provision the MPT-HL radio channel ATPC: i.
Select ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-min / -max dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
22. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT-HL RTPC, go to step 18.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HL radio protection scheme, go to step 25.
23. Provision the spare MPT-HL ATPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.7 for an example of the ATPC parameters. 24. Provision the spare MPT-HL radio channel ATPC: i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-90.0 / -20.0 dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
723
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 25. Provision the MPT-HL radio protection scheme Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Protection Schemes tab; see Figure 59.8. Note: Revertive restoration criteria is the default value.
Figure 59.8 — MPT-HL transceiver protection criteria provisioning
Note: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available.
26. Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. 27. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
28. Select HSB Protection in the resource tree area. 29. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required:
724
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
30. Select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. 31. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
32. Provision the MPT-HL link identifier Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.9. Figure 59.9 — MPT-HL Additional Settings tab
33. Provision MPT-HL radio link identifier: i.
Select the Link Identifier Configuration Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Expected Identifier value (0 to 255).
iii.
Enter the Sent Identifier value (0 to 255).
iv.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
725
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: If the MPT-HL is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM, PKT throughput booster, or PPP settings on an individual radio. Go to ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to ister LAG ports.
34. Provision the MPT-HL Synchronization Status Messaging i.
Select the Synchronization SSM Enabled check box; see Figure 59.9.
ii.
Click Apply.
35. Provision the MPT-HL Point to Point Protocol settings i.
From the PPP RF , select the Enabled check box; see Figure 59.9.
ii.
Select the Routing IP Protocol radio button: (OSPF or None).
iii.
If OSPF is selected, then select OSPF Area: (0 to 4).
Note: OSPF Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning the PPP RF channel.
iv.
Click Apply.
36. Provision the PKT throughput booster setting See Figure 59.9 for the following steps: i.
From the Pkt Throughput Booster , select the Enabled check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
37. ister the MPT-HL Alarm Profile settings See Figure 59.9 for the following steps: a.
In the Alarm Profile , click on the Alarm Severity Profile icon. The Alarm Severity Profile window opens.
b.
Choose an alarm severity profile. Click on the Show details button for more information if needed.
c.
Click Apply.
To provision the MPT-HLC transceiver 1.
726
Select an action. a.
To Configure the MPT-HLC co-channel XPIC, go to step 2.
b.
To Configure the MPT-HLC 1+1 XPIC, go to step 13.
c.
To Configure the MPT-HLC radio protection type, go to step 24.
d.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29.
e.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 32.
f.
To Provision the MPT-HLC 1+1 spare radio channel, go to step 35.
g.
To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
h.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLC RTPC, go to step 41. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
i.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
j.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLC ATPC, go to step 47.
k.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio protection scheme, go to step 48.
l.
To Provision the MPT-HLC link identifier, go to step 54.
m.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Synchronization Status Messaging, go to step 56.
n.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Point to Point Protocol settings, go to step 58.
o.
To Provision the PKT throughput booster setting, go to step 59.
p.
To ister the MPT-HLC Alarm Profile settings, go to step 61.
q.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio channel encryption, go to step 65.
r.
To ister the RX squelch settings, go to step 68.
s.
To Configure the branching loss, go to step 71.
Configure the MPT-HLC co-channel XPIC Open the appropriate radio main view and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.20.
3.
4.
Provision MPT-HLC 1+0 Horizontal XPIC Configuration: i.
Provision 1+0 Horizontal radio channel. See step 29 or 32 for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
ii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/ XPIC.
iii.
Click Apply.
iv.
Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal.
v.
Click Apply.
Provision MPT-HLC 1+0 Vertical XPIC Configuration: i.
Provision 1+0 Vertical radio channel. Provision the Vertical radio channel using the following radio parameters identical to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 3 i). •
Mode
•
Reference Channel Spacing
•
Modulation
•
Shifter
•
TX Freq
•
Rx Freq
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
727
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
5.
ii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 3 ii).
iii.
Click Apply.
iv.
Provision Vertical radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Vertical.
v.
Click Apply.
Open the XPIC Configuration tool. See Figure 59.10. Figure 59.10 — XPIC icon
XPIC Configuration tool displays. See Figure 59.11. Figure 59.11 — XPIC configuration window
6.
Select Horizontal Radio port and drag to draw line to Vertical RADIO port. XPIC Association pop-up displays. See Figure 59.12.
728
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.12 — Provision MPT-HLC co-channel XPIC association
7.
Click OK.
8.
Click Apply.
9.
Click Close.
10. From the MPT Main View, select the 1+0 Horizontal radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel. See Figure 59.13 for an example of a Provisioned Horizontal XPIC radio channel.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
729
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.13 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
11. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical 1+0 radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel. See Figure 59.14 for an example of a Provisioned Vertical XPIC radio channel.
730
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.14 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
12. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 42.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 44.
13. Configure the MPT-HLC 1+1 XPIC Open the appropriate radio main view. 14. Provision MPT-HLC Horizontal 1+1 HSB Configuration: See Figure 59.15 for the following steps: a.
Provision 1+1 HSB protection group. See step 24 for detailed steps to provision radio channel protection type.
b.
Provision main radio channel. See step 29 or 32 for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
c.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/ XPIC).
d.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
731
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures e.
Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal.
f.
Click Apply.
Figure 59.15 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
15. Configure MPT-HLC Vertical XPIC 1+1 HSB:
732
i.
Provision 1+1 HSB protection group. See step 24 for detailed steps to provision radio channel protection type.
ii.
Provision main Vertical radio channel. Provision the Vertical radio channel using the following radio parameters identical to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 14 i). •
Mode
•
Reference Channel Spacing
•
Modulation
•
Shifter
•
TX Freq
•
Rx Freq
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures iii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 14 iii).
iv.
Click Apply.
v.
Provision Vertical radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Vertical.
vi.
Click Apply.
16. Open XPIC Configuration tool. See Figure 59.10. XPIC Configuration tool displays. See Figure 59.11. 17. Select Horizontal Radio port and drag to draw line to Vertical RADIO port. XPIC Association pop-up displays. See Figure 59.16. Figure 59.16 — Provision MPT-HLC 1+1 XPIC association
18. Click OK. 19. Click Apply. 20. Click Close. 21. From the MPT Main View, select the Horizontal radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel. See Figure 59.17 for an example of a Provisioned Horizontal XPIC radio channel.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
733
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.17 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
22. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel. See Figure 59.18 for an example of a Provisioned Vertical XPIC radio channel.
734
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.18 — Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel
23. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 42.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 44.
24. Configure the MPT-HLC radio protection type Note: Spare MPT-HLC transceiver must be enabled prior to provisioning MPT-HLC transceiver protection scheme.
From the Equipment tab, select the MPT-HLC Dir#-Ch1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT-HLC transceiver icon in blue in the resource list area. Note: Before changing the protection type provisioning, you must first apply the No Protection option to the protection type. For example: If 1+1 HSB is provisioned and 1+1 FD is needed, first select No Protection and click Apply, then select 1+1 FD and click Apply.
25. From the Protection Type drop-down menu, choose: No Protection, 1+1 HSB (SD), or 1+1 FD protection scheme; see Figure 59.19. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
735
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The diversity receiver is ed on MPT-HLC version equipped with the combiner feature. The diversity receiver is ed on the following radio configurations: 1+0 no protection, 1+1 HSB (SD), 1+1 FD, with and without XPIC.
26. If a diversity receiver is in use, select the SD check box. 27. Click Apply. Figure 59.19 — MPT-HLC transceiver protection type provisioning
28. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 32.
29. Provision the MPT-HLC radio for fixed modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.20.
736
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.20 — MPT-HLC Settings tab for fixed modulation
30. Provision MPT-HLC radio port: Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one ed by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
i.
In the Mode field, select the Preset button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired channel spacing, modulation scheme, and option.
iv.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The Data Help window opens.
v.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value.
vi.
When the MPT-HLC is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT-HLC is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range.
vii. If the MPT-HLC is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
737
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
viii. Enter the MPT-HLC radio channel Label, if applicable. ix.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HLC configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HLC cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen are the same as the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
31. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio for fixed modulation, go to step 36.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 42.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 44.
32. Provision the MPT-HLC radio for adaptive modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.21.
738
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.21 — MPT-HLC Settings tab for adaptive modulation
33. Provision MPT-HLC radio port: Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one ed by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
i.
In the Mode field, select the Adaptive radio button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode drop-down menu. The Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired reference modulation scheme, and option. The reference modulation will be the lowest available modulation scheme in the ed modulation range.
iv.
In 1+1 HSB configurations, from the Driving MSE drop-down menu, choose Lowest or Highest MSE.
v.
In the ed Modulation , choose all the modulation schemes to be used by the adaptive modulation. The schemes must be contiguous.
vi.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The MPT-HLC Shifter Data Help window opens.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
739
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures vii. In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value. viii. When the MPT-HLC is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT-HLC is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range. ix.
If the MPT-HLC is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
x.
Enter the MPT-HLC radio channel Label, if applicable.
xi.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HLC configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HLC cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen is a mirror image of the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
34. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLC 1+1 spare radio channel, go to step 35.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 42.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 44.
35. Provision the MPT-HLC 1+1 spare radio channel Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.22.
740
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.22 — MPT-HLC 1+1 settings tab
36. Provision MPT-HLC 1+1 spare radio channel: a.
Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range.
b.
The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency +/- Shifter Frequency (based on the high or low channel selected)
c.
Click Apply.
37. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 39.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 44.
38. Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.20. 39. Provision MPT-HLC radio channel transmit power level: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
741
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Choose the TxPower (dBm) level for the lowest modulation scheme in the range. Power levels for the other modulation schemes will be set automatically.
ii.
Click Apply.
40. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLC RTPC, go to step 42.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio protection scheme, go to step 48.
41. Provision the spare MPT-HLC RTPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.22. 42. Provision Spare MPT-HLC radio channel transmit power level: i.
Choose the TxPower (dBm) level for the lowest modulation scheme in the range. Power levels for the other modulation schemes will be set automatically.
ii.
Click Apply.
43. Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.23.
742
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.23 — MPT-HLC settings with ATPC
44. Provision MPT-HLC radio channel ATPC: i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-min / -max dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
45. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLC ATPC, go to step 47.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLC radio protection scheme, go to step 48.
46. Provision the spare MPT-HLC ATPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.23 for an example of the ATPC parameters. 47. Provision Spare MPT-HLC radio channel ATPC: i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-90.0 / -20.0 dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
743
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 48. Provision the MPT-HLC radio protection scheme Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select Protection Schemes tab; see Figure 59.24. Note: Revertive restoration criteria is the default value.
Figure 59.24 — MPT-HLC transceiver protection criteria provisioning
Danger: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available.
49. Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. i.
From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required:
ii.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
iii.
Click Apply.
50. Select HSB Protection in the resource tree area. 51. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: 744
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
52. Select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. 53. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
54. Provision the MPT-HLC link identifier Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.25. Figure 59.25 — MPT-HLC Additional Settings tab
55. Provision MPT-HLC radio link identifier: i.
Select Link Identifier Configuration Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Expected Identifier value (0 to 255).
iii.
Enter the Sent Identifier value (0 to 255).
iv.
Click Apply.
56. Provision the MPT-HLC Synchronization Status Messaging
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
745
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: If the MPT-HLC is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM or PPP settings on an individual radio. Go to ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to ister LAG ports.
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.25. 57. Provision MPT-HLC radio channel Synchronization SSM: i.
Select the Synchronization SSM Enabled check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
58. Provision the MPT-HLC Point to Point Protocol settings Note: If the MPT-HLC is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM or PPP settings on an individual radio. Go to ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to ister LAG ports.
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.25. i.
Provision MPT-HLC radio channel PPP:
ii.
From the PPP RF , select the Enabled check box.
iii.
Select the Routing IP Protocol: (OSPF or None).
iv.
If OSPF is selected, then select OSPF Area: (0 to 4).
Note: OSPF Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning the PPP RF channel.
v.
Click Apply.
59. Provision the PKT throughput booster setting Open the appropriate radio main view and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.25. 60. Provision MPT-HLC radio PKT throughput booster: See Figure 59.25 for the following steps: i.
From the Pkt Throughput Booster , select the Enabled check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
61. ister the MPT-HLC Alarm Profile settings Open the appropriate radio main view and click on the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.25. 62. In the Alarm Profile , click on the icon. The Alarm Severity Profile window opens. 63. Choose an alarm severity profile. Select the Show details button for more information if needed. 64. Click Apply. 746
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 65. Provision the MPT-HLC radio channel encryption Note: Before provisioning radio channel encryption, the radio channel is running error free and operating correctly.
If the radio is remotely managed, the encryption should be configured on the remote radio before the local one. The configuration change will cause the remote radio to become temporarily unreachable until the local radio is also configured. Encryption mismatch is not part of the switching criteria for L1 LAG or ERPS. To avoid traffic or supervision interruption if the radio is part of an L1 LAG or ERPS topology, execute a mute procedure of the radio link before configuring encryption. Proceed radio link by radio link. Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.25. 66. If the radio is part of an L1 LAG or ERPS topology, mute the transmitter; see To ister the Tx Mute settings. 67. Provision the radio channel Encryption: i.
Click on the Edit phrase button.The Edit phrase window opens.
ii.
Enter and confirm the new phrase.
iii.
Click Apply in the Edit phrase window.
68. ister the RX squelch settings Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your configuration and select the Maintenance tab.See Figure 59.26.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
747
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.26 — MPT-HLC Maintenance tab
69. Squelch the main or diversity receiver: i.
Select the Rx Main or Rx Diversity check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
70. Release squelch on the main or diversity receiver: i.
Select the Rx Main or Rx Diversity check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
71. Configure the branching loss Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your configuration and select the Measurements tab; see Figure 59.27.
748
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.27 — Measurements tab for MPT-HLC
72. Enter the measured Tx and Rx Branching Loss values. The Diversity Rx Branching Loss can also be configured if the diversity combiner is in use. If measured values are not available, see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A MPT-HL/HLC Engineering Specifications for information. 73. Click Apply. To ister the MPT-HLS transceiver 1.
Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS co-channel XPIC configuration, go to step 2.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS 1+1 XPIC configuration, go to step 13.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio protection type, go to step 24.
d.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29.
e.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 32.
f.
To Provision the MPT-HLS 1+1 spare radio channel, go to step 35.
g.
To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
h.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLS RTPC, go to step 41.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
749
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
i.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
j.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLS ATPC, go to step 46.
k.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio protection scheme, go to step 48.
l.
To Provision the MPT-HLS link identifier, go to step 54.
m.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Synchronization Status Messaging, go to step 56.
n.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Point to Point Protocol settings, go to step 58.
o.
To Provision the PKT throughput booster setting, go to step 59.
p.
To ister the MPT-HLS Alarm Profile settings, go to step 61.
q.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio channel encryption, go to step 65.
r.
To ister the RX squelch settings, go to step 68.
Provision the MPT-HLS co-channel XPIC configuration Open the appropriate radio main view click on the Settings tab; see Figure 59.33.
3.
4.
Provision MPT-HLS 1+0 Horizontal XPIC Configuration: i.
Provision 1+0 Horizontal radio channel. See step 29 or 32 for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
ii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/ XPIC.
iii.
Click Apply.
iv.
Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal.
v.
Click Apply.
Provision MPT-HLS 1+0 Vertical XPIC Configuration: i.
ii.
750
Provision 1+0 Vertical radio channel. Provision the Vertical radio channel using the following radio parameters identical to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 3 i). •
Mode
•
Reference Channel Spacing
•
Modulation
•
Shifter
•
TX Freq
•
Rx Freq
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 3 ii).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
5.
iii.
Click Apply.
iv.
Provision Vertical radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Vertical.
v.
Click Apply.
Open the XPIC Configuration tool. See Figure 59.10. XPIC Configuration tool displays. See Figure 59.11.
6.
Select Horizontal Radio port and drag to draw line to Vertical RADIO port. XPIC Association pop-up displays. See Figure 59.12.
7.
Click OK.
8.
Click Apply.
9.
Click Close.
10. From the MPT Main View, select the 1+0 Horizontal radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel. See Figure 59.13 for an example of a Provisioned Horizontal XPIC radio channel. Figure 59.28 — Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
751
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 11. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical 1+0 radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel. 12. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
13. Provision the MPT-HLS 1+1 XPIC configuration Open the appropriate radio main view. 14. Provision MPT-HLS Horizontal 1+1 HSB Configuration: See Figure 59.29 for the following steps:
752
i.
Provision 1+1 HSB protection group. See step 24 for detailed steps to provision radio channel protection type.
ii.
Provision main radio channel. See step 29 or 32 for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
iii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/ XPIC).
iv.
Click Apply.
v.
Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal.
vi.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.29 — Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
15. Provision MPT-HLS Vertical XPIC 1+1 HSB Configuration: i.
Provision 1+1 HSB protection group. See step 24 for detailed steps to provision radio channel protection type.
ii.
Provision main Vertical radio channel. Provision the Vertical radio channel using the following radio parameters identical to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 14 i). •
Mode
•
Reference Channel Spacing
•
Modulation
•
Shifter
•
TX Freq
•
Rx Freq
iii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 14 iii).
iv.
Click Apply.
v.
Provision Vertical radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Vertical.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
753
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures vi.
Click Apply.
16. Open XPIC Configuration tool. XPIC Configuration tool displays. 17. Select Horizontal Radio port and drag to draw line to Vertical RADIO port. XPIC Association pop-up displays. See Figure 59.30. Figure 59.30 — Provision MPT-HLS 1+1 XPIC association
18. Click OK. 19. Click Apply. 20. Click Close. 21. From the MPT Main View, select the Horizontal radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel. See Figure 59.29 for an example of a Provisioned Horizontal XPIC radio channel. 22. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel. See Figure 59.31 for an example of a Provisioned Vertical XPIC radio channel.
754
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.31 — Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel
23. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
24. Provision the MPT-HLS radio protection type Note: Spare MPT-HLS transceiver must be enabled prior to provisioning MPT-HLS transceiver protection scheme.
From the Equipment tab, select the MPT-HLS Dir#-Ch1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT-HLS transceiver icon in blue in the resource list area. Note: Before changing the protection type provisioning, you must first apply the No Protection option to the protection type. For example: If 1+1 HSB is provisioned and 1+1 FD is needed, first select No Protection and click Apply, then select 1+1 FD and click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
755
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 25. From the Protection Type drop-down menu, choose: No Protection, 1+1 HSB (SD), or 1+1 FD protection scheme. Figure 59.3. Note: The diversity receiver is ed on MPT-HLC version equipped with the combiner feature. The diversity receiver is ed on the following radio configurations: 1+0 no protection, 1+1 HSB (SD), 1+1 FD, with and without XPIC.
26. If a diversity receiver is in use, select the SD check box. 27. Click Apply. Figure 59.32 — MPT-HLS transceiver protection type provisioning
28. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 32.
29. Provision the MPT-HLS radio for fixed modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.33.
756
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.33 — MPT-HLS Settings tab for fixed modulation
30. Provision MPT-HLS radio port: Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one ed by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
i.
In the Mode field, select the Preset button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired channel spacing, modulation scheme, and option.
iv.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The Data Help window opens.
v.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value.
vi.
When the MPT-HLS is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT-HLS is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range.
vii. If the MPT-HLS is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
757
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
viii. Enter the MPT-HLS radio channel Label, if applicable. ix.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HLS configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HLS cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen are the same as the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
31. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
32. Provision the MPT-HLS radio for adaptive modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.34.
758
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.34 — MPT-HLS Settings tab for adaptive modulation
33. Provision MPT-HLS radio port: Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one ed by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
i.
In the Mode field, select the Adaptive radio button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode drop-down menu. The Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired reference modulation scheme, and option. The reference modulation will be the lowest available modulation scheme in the ed modulation range.
iv.
In 1+1 HSB or FD configurations, from the Driving MSE drop-down menu, choose Lowest or Highest MSE.
v.
In the ed Modulation , choose all the modulation schemes to be used by the adaptive modulation. The schemes must be contiguous.
vi.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The MPT-HLS Shifter Data Help window opens.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
759
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures vii. In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value. viii. When the MPT-HLS is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT-HLS is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range. ix.
If the MPT-HLS is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
x.
Enter the MPT-HLS radio channel Label, if applicable.
xi.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HLS configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HLS cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen is a mirror image of the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
34. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
c.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
35. Provision the MPT-HLS 1+1 spare radio channel Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.35.
760
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.35 — MPT-HLS 1+1 settings tab
36. Provision MPT-HLS 1+1 spare radio channel: a.
Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range.
b.
The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency +/- Shifter Frequency (based on the high or low channel selected)
c.
Click Apply.
37. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
38. Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.33. 39. Provision MPT-HLS radio channel transmit power level: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
761
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Choose the TxPower (dBm) level for the lowest modulation scheme in the range. Power levels for the other modulation schemes will be set automatically.
ii.
Click Apply.
40. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLS RTPC, go to step 41.
b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio protection scheme, go to step 48.
41. Provision the spare MPT-HLS RTPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.35. 42. Provision Spare MPT-HLS radio channel transmit power level: i.
Choose the TxPower (dBm) level for the lowest modulation scheme in the range. Power levels for the other modulation schemes will be set automatically.
ii.
Click Apply.
43. Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.36.
762
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.36 — MPT-HLS settings with ATPC
44. Provision MPT-HLS radio channel ATPC: i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm). If the ATPC Range is over 15 dBm, a warning window appears; see Figure 59.37. Figure 59.37 — ATPC warning
Click on the OK button in the warning window to proceed. iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-min / -max dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
45. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT-HLS ATPC, go to step 46.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
763
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures b.
To Provision the MPT-HLS radio protection scheme, go to step 48.
46. Provision the spare MPT-HLS ATPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.36 for an example of the ATPC parameters. 47. Provision Spare MPT-HLS radio channel ATPC: i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold.
iv.
Click Apply.
48. Provision the MPT-HLS radio protection scheme Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select Protection Schemes tab; see Figure 59.38. Note: Revertive restoration criteria is the default value.
Figure 59.38 — MPT-HLS transceiver protection criteria provisioning
Danger: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available.
764
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 49. Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. i.
From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required:
ii.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
iii.
Click Apply.
50. Select HSB Protection in the resource tree area. 51. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
52. Select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. 53. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Select the Physical Cable check box in the RPS Configuration area if an RPS cable is in use.
iii.
Click Apply.
54. Provision the MPT-HLS link identifier Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.39.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
765
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.39 — MPT-HLS Additional Settings tab
55. Provision MPT-HLS radio link identifier: i.
Select the Link Identifier Configuration Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Expected Identifier value (0 to 255).
iii.
Enter the Sent Identifier value (0 to 255).
iv.
Click Apply.
56. Provision the MPT-HLS Synchronization Status Messaging Note: If the MPT-HLS is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM or PPP settings on an individual radio. Go to ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to ister LAG ports.
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.39. 57. Provision MPT-HLS radio channel Synchronization SSM: i.
Select the Synchronization SSM Enabled check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
58. Provision the MPT-HLS Point to Point Protocol settings
766
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: If the MPT-HLS is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM or PPP settings on an individual radio. Go to ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to ister LAG ports.
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.39. Provision MPT-HLS radio channel PPP: i.
From the PPP RF , select the Enabled check box.
ii.
Select the Routing IP Protocol: (OSPF or None).
iii.
If OSPF is selected, then select OSPF Area: (0 to 4).
Note: OSPF Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning the PPP RF channel.
iv.
Click Apply.
59. Provision the PKT throughput booster setting Open the appropriate radio main view and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.39. 60. Provision MPT-HLC radio PKT throughput booster: See Figure 59.39 for the following steps: i.
From the Pkt Throughput Booster , select the Enabled check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
61. ister the MPT-HLS Alarm Profile settings Open the appropriate radio main view and click on the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.39. 62. In the Alarm Profile , click on the icon. The Alarm Severity Profile window opens. 63. Choose an alarm severity profile. Select the Show details button for more information if needed. 64. Click Apply. 65. Provision the MPT-HLS radio channel encryption Note: Before provisioning radio channel encryption, the radio channel is running error free and operating correctly.
If the radio is remotely managed, the encryption should be configured on the remote radio before the local one. The configuration change will cause the remote radio to become temporarily unreachable until the local radio is also configured.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
767
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Encryption mismatch is not part of the switching criteria for L1 LAG or ERPS. To avoid traffic or supervision interruption if the radio is part of an L1 LAG or ERPS topology, execute a mute procedure of the radio link before configuring encryption. Proceed radio link by radio link. Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.39. 66. If the radio is part of an L1 LAG or ERPS topology, mute the transmitter; see To ister the Tx Mute settings. 67. Provision the radio channel Encryption: i.
Click on the Edit phrase button.The Edit phrase window opens.
ii.
Enter and confirm the new phrase.
iii.
Click Apply in the Edit phrase window.
68. ister the RX squelch settings Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your configuration and select the Maintenance tab.See Figure 59.40. Figure 59.40 — MPT-HLS Maintenance tab
69. Squelch the main or diversity receiver:
768
i.
Select the Rx Main or Rx Diversity check box.
ii.
Click Apply. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 70. Release squelch on the main or diversity receiver: i.
Select the Rx Main or Rx Diversity check box.
ii.
Click Apply.
To ister the MPT ODU 1.
2.
Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU power scheme, go to step 2.
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU co-channel XPIC configuration, go to step 7.
c.
To Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 XPIC configuration, go to step 18.
d.
To Provision the MPT ODU radio protection type, go to step 29.
e.
To Provision the radio for fixed modulation, go to step 39.
f.
To Provision the radio for Adaptive Modulation, go to step 42.
g.
To Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 FD spare radio channel, go to step 45.
h.
To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step 48.
i.
To Provision the spare MPT ODU RTPC, go to step 51.
j.
To Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 53.
k.
To Provision the spare MPT ODU ATPC, go to step 56.
l.
To Provision the MPT ODU radio protection scheme, go to step 58.
m.
To Provision the MPT ODU link identifier, go to step 66.
n.
To Provision the MPT ODU Synchronization Status Messaging, go to step 68.
o.
To Provision the MPT ODU Point to Point Protocol settings, go to step 69.
p.
To Provision the PKT throughput booster setting, go to step 70.
q.
To ister the MPT ODU Alarm Profile settings, go to step 71.
r.
To Provision the MPT ODU radio channel encryption, go to step 72.
s.
To Configure the Low Voltage Alarm for the MPT-HQAM, go to step 73.
Provision the MPT ODU power scheme Provision MPT ODU power scheme
Note: MPT ODU power scheme provisioning applies to MPT ODUs enabled on the MPTACC card, MSS-1 Core with PFoE , EASv2 with PFoE , or MSS-O with PFoE .
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
769
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures For MPT ODU enabled on a Core Ethernet port, P8ETH Ethernet port, EASv2 without PFoE , or an MSS-1 Core without PFoE , an external source of power is required. The external source may be either a Power Injector card/Box. MPT Power Unit, MPT Extended Power Unit, or direct connection to an external battery source. In these applications no power scheme provisioning is required. 3.
Which card s MPT ODU radio port? a.
If MPTACC, MSS-1 port with PFoE , EASv2 with PFoE , or MSS-O with PFoE , go to step 4.
b.
If Core-E, CorEvo, P8ETH, EASv2without PFoE , or MSS-1 port without PFoE , MPT ODU power scheme provisioning is not required. Go to step 6.
4.
Open the appropriate radio main view.
5.
Provision MPT ODU power source: See Figure 59.41 for the following steps: i.
Select Power Source.
ii.
Select the Source # in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the Source Number in blue in the resource list area.
iii.
Choose the Settings tab.
iv.
From the Source x area, select Power Source 1/2 Type radio button: QMA, PFoE, or Disabled.
Note: QMA is available with MPTACC only.
v.
770
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.41 — MPT ODU Power Source Settings tab (MPTACC card)
6.
7.
Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU co-channel XPIC configuration, go to step 7.
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 XPIC configuration, go to step 18.
c.
To Provision the MPT ODU radio protection type, go to step 29
d.
To Provision the radio for fixed modulation, go to step 39.
e.
To Provision the radio for Adaptive Modulation, go to step 42.
Provision the MPT ODU co-channel XPIC configuration Open the appropriate radio main view click on the Settings tab; see Figure 59.54.
8.
Provision MPT ODU 1+0 Horizontal XPIC Configuration: i.
Provision 1+0 Horizontal radio channel. See step 39 or 42 detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
ii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/ XPIC.
iii.
Click Apply.
iv.
Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
771
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures v. 9.
Click Apply.
Provision MPT ODU 1+0 Vertical XPIC Configuration: i.
Provision 1+0 Vertical radio channel. Provision the Vertical radio channel using the following radio parameters identical to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 8 i). •
Mode
•
Reference Channel Spacing
•
Modulation
•
Shifter
•
TX Freq
•
Rx Freq
ii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 8 ii).
iii.
Click Apply.
iv.
Provision Vertical radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Vertical.
v.
Click Apply.
10. Open the XPIC Configuration tool. See Figure 59.42. Figure 59.42 — XPIC icon
XPIC Configuration tool displays. See Figure 59.43.
772
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.43 — XPIC configuration window
11. Select Horizontal Radio port and drag to draw line to Vertical RADIO port. XPIC Association pop-up displays. See Figure 59.44.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
773
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.44 — Provision MPT ODU co-channel XPIC association
12. Click OK. 13. Click Apply. 14. Click Close. 15. From the MPT Main View, select the 1+0 Horizontal radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel. See Figure 59.45 for an example of a Provisioned Horizontal XPIC radio channel.
774
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.45 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
16. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical 1+0 radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel. See Figure 59.46 for an example of a Provisioned Vertical XPIC radio channel.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
775
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.46 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
17. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step 48
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 53.
18. Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 XPIC configuration Open the appropriate radio main view. 19. Provision MPT ODU Horizontal 1+1 HSB Configuration: See Figure 59.47 for the following steps:
776
i.
Provision 1+1 HSB protection group. See Provision the MPT ODU radio protection type for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
ii.
Provision main radio channel. See step 39 or 42 for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
iii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/ XPIC).
iv.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures v.
Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal.
vi.
Click Apply.
Figure 59.47 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
20. Provision MPT ODU Vertical XPIC 1+1 HSB Configuration: i.
Provision 1+1 HSB protection group. See step 29 for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
ii.
Provision main Vertical radio channel. Provision the Vertical radio channel using the following radio parameters identical to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 8 i). a.
Mode
b.
Reference Channel Spacing
c.
Modulation
d.
Shifter
e.
TX Freq
f.
Rx Freq
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
777
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures iii.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step 19 iii).
iv.
Click Apply.
v.
Provision Vertical radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Vertical.
vi.
Click Apply.
21. Open XPIC Configuration tool. See Figure 59.42. XPIC Configuration tool displays. See Figure 59.43. 22. Select Horizontal Radio port and drag to draw line to Vertical RADIO port. XPIC Association pop-up displays. See Figure 59.48. Figure 59.48 — Provision MPT ODU 1+1 XPIC association
23. Click OK. 24. Click Apply. 25. Click Close. 26. From the MPT Main View, select the Horizontal radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel. See Figure 59.49 for an example of a Provisioned Horizontal XPIC radio channel.
778
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.49 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel
27. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical radio channel and the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel. See Figure 59.50 for an example of a Provisioned Vertical XPIC radio channel.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
779
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.50 — Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel
28. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step 48
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 53.
29. Provision the MPT ODU radio protection type Note: Spare MPT ODU transceiver must be enabled prior to provisioning MPT ODU transceiver protection scheme.
From the Equipment tab, select the MPT ODU Dir#-Ch# in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPT ODU transceiver icon in blue in the resource list area. 30. Select the Settings tab. Note: Before changing the protection type provisioning, you must first apply the No Protection option to the protection type. For example: If 1+1 HSB is provisioned and 1+1 FD is needed, first select No Protection and click Apply, then select 1+1 FD and click Apply.
780
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 31. From the Protection Type drop-down menu, choose: No Protection, 1+1 HSB (SD), or 1+1 FD protection scheme. See Figure 59.51. 32. From the Protection Port drop-down menu, choose Slot# Port# of protection port. 33. Click Apply. Figure 59.51 — MPT ODU transceiver Protection Type provisioning
34. Select Protection Schemes tab. 35. Select Protection Scheme Parameters tab. 36. Provision RPS Cable Configuration: •
Select the Physical Cable check box for Physical Cable or leave it unselected for Virtual Cable. Virtual cable is the default. If Virtual Cable is configured with MPT-HQAM and channel spacing is greater than 30 MHz a dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 59.52.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
781
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.52 — Dialog box with virtual cable and HQAM
37. Click Apply. Figure 59.53 — MPT ODU Protection Scheme parameters RPS Cable configuration
38. Select an action. a.
To Provision the radio for fixed modulation, go to step 39.
b.
To Provision the radio for Adaptive Modulation, go to step 42.
39. Provision the radio for fixed modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.54 for MPT-HC and Figure 59.55 for MPT-HQAM.
782
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.54 — MPT-HC Settings tab for fixed modulation
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
783
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.55 — MPT-HQAM Settings tab for fixed modulation
40. Provision the radio port: i.
In the Mode field, select the Preset radio button.
ii.
For MPT-HQAM transceivers only, select the MPT-HC Compatibility check box to configure the MPT-HQAM with a profile that is compatible with an MPT-HC, if required. See Figure 59.55.
iii.
From the Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, choose the desired channel spacing (5 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz, 40 MHz, or 50 MHz).
iv.
From the Modulation drop-down menu, choose modulation scheme (32 QAM, 128 QAM, or 256 QAM).
v.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std or Std/XPIC).
vi.
From the Channel #1 Shifter (MHz) drop-down menu, choose the shifter value.
vii. Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range. viii. The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency. Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
784
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ix.
Enter the MPT-HC/HQAM radio channel Label, if applicable.
x.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected radio configuration, the Main and Protect radio channels use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen are the same as the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1.
41. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 FD spare radio channel, go to step 45.
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step 48.
c.
To Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 53.
42. Provision the radio for Adaptive Modulation Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.56. Figure 59.56 — MPT-HC Settings tab for adaptive modulation
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
785
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.57 — MPT-HQAM Settings tab for adaptive modulation
43. Provision the radio port: i.
In the Mode field, choose the Adaptive radio button.
ii.
For MPT-HQAM transceivers only, select the MPT-HC Compatibility check box to configure the MPT-HQAM with a profile that is compatible with an MPT-HC, if required. See Figure 59.57.
iii.
From the Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, choose the desired channel spacing (30, 40, or 50 MHz).
iv.
From the Modulation drop-down menu, choose lowest ed modulation scheme.
v.
From the ed Modulation , select all the ed modulation schemes.
vi.
From the Option drop-down menu, choose the gain configuration (Std).
vii. Select the Channel #1 shifter frequency, from the channel #1 Shifter (MHz) drop-down menu, choose the TX (Go) and RX (Return) Separation Frequency. viii. When the radio is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the radio is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range.
786
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ix.
The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
x.
Enter the radio channel Label, if applicable.
xi.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT-HC/HQAM configuration, the Main and Protect MPT-HC/HQAM cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen is a mirror image of the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1.
44. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 FD spare radio channel, go to step 45
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step 48.
c.
To Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 53.
45. Provision the MPT ODU 1+1 FD spare radio channel Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.58.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
787
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.58 — MPT-HC 1+1 Settings tab
46. Provision MPT ODU 1+1 spare radio channel: i.
Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range.
ii.
The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency +/- Shifter Frequency (based on the high or low channel selected)
iii.
Click Apply.
47. Select an action. a.
To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step 48.
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 53.
48. Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.54. 49. Provision MPT ODU radio channel transmit power level: 788
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Enter the TxPower (dBm) level (ed power levels are band and modulation specific).
ii.
Click Apply.
50. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT ODU RTPC, go to step 51.
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU radio protection scheme, go to step 58.
51. Provision the spare MPT ODU RTPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.58. 52. Provision Spare MPT ODU radio channel transmit power level: i.
Enter the TxPower (dBm) level (ed power levels are band and modulation specific).
ii.
Click Apply.
53. Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.59. Figure 59.59 — MPT-HC Settings tab with ATPC
54. Provision MPT ODU radio channel ATPC: 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
789
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min and Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-min / -max dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
55. Select an action. a.
To Provision the spare MPT ODU ATPC, go to step 56.
b.
To Provision the MPT ODU radio protection scheme, go to step 58.
56. Provision the spare MPT ODU ATPC Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.59 for an example of the ATPC settings. 57. Provision the spare MPT ODU radio channel ATPC: i.
Select the ATPC Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm).
iii.
Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-min / -max dBm).
iv.
Click Apply.
58. Provision the MPT ODU radio protection scheme Select Protection Schemes tab. Note: Revertive restoration criteria is the default value.
790
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.60 — MPT ODU transceiver Protection Criteria provisioning
Note: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available.
59. Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. 60. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
61. Select HSB Protection in the resource tree area. 62. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
ii.
Click Apply.
63. Select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. 64. From the Restoration Criteria , the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
791
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures ii.
Click Apply.
Figure 59.61 — MPT ODU Protection Restoration Criteria provisioning Rx radio
65. Select the Equipment tab. 66. Provision the MPT ODU link identifier Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.62.
792
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.62 — MPT-HC Additional Settings tab
67. Provision MPT ODU radio link identifier: i.
Select the Link Identifier Configuration Enabled check box.
ii.
Enter the Expected Identifier value (0 to 255).
iii.
Enter the Sent Identifier value (0 to 255).
iv.
Click Apply.
Note: If the MPT ODU is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM or PPP settings on an individual radio. Go to ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to ister LAG ports.
68. Provision the MPT ODU Synchronization Status Messaging i.
Select the Synchronization SSM Enabled check box see Figure 59.9.
ii.
Click Apply.
69. Provision the MPT ODU Point to Point Protocol settings i.
From the PPP RF , select the Enabled check box; see Figure 59.62.
ii.
Select Routing IP Protocol: (OSPF or None).
iii.
If OSPF is selected, then select OSPF Area: (0 to 4).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
793
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures NOTE: OSPF Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning PPP RF channel. iv.
Click Apply.
70. Provision the PKT throughput booster setting i.
From the Pkt Throughput Booster , select the Enabled check box; see Figure 59.62.
ii.
Click Apply.
71. ister the MPT ODU Alarm Profile settings i.
In the Alarm Profile , click on the icon; see Figure 59.62. The Alarm Severity Profile window opens.
ii.
Choose an alarm severity profile. Select the Show details button for more information if needed.
iii.
Click Apply.
72. Provision the MPT ODU radio channel encryption Note: Before provisioning radio channel encryption, the radio channel is running error free and operating correctly.
If the radio is remotely managed, the encryption should be configured on the remote radio before the local one. The configuration change will cause the remote radio to become temporarily unreachable until the local radio is also configured. Encryption mismatch is not part of the switching criteria for L1 LAG or ERPS. To avoid traffic interruption if the radio is part of an L1 LAG or ERPS topology, mute the transmitter before configuring encryption. Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 59.62. If the radio is part of an L1 LAG or ERPS topology, mute the transmitter; see To ister the Tx Mute settings. i.
Click on the Edit phrase button.The Edit phrase window opens.
ii.
Enter and confirm the new phrase.
iii.
Click Apply in the Edit phrase window.
73. Configure the Low Voltage Alarm for the MPT-HQAM Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Maintenance tab; see Figure 59.63.
794
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.63 — MPT-HQAM Maintenance tab
74. Configure the Low Voltage alarm: i.
Select the Enabled check box.
ii.
In the Threshold field, configure the threshold voltage for the alarm using the arrows. The threshold can be configured in 0.5 V increments.
iii.
Click Apply.
The clear alarm hysteresis is 3V from the set threshold value. The operator should take care in the configuration of the Low Voltage Alarm Threshold of the nominal voltage of the equipment. When the alarm is raised, the alarm is cleared when the measurement of the voltage, automatically done by the MPT, reaches the threshold value configured plus 3 V. The operator should ensure that this voltage can be operatively reached. Once raised, the alarm can be implicitly cleared by reducing the Low Voltage Alarm Threshold, reducing the voltage needed to clear the alarm. If the Low Voltage Alarm Threshold cannot be decreased (threshold set to 28V), the alarm can be cleared disabling the Low Voltage Alarm. To provision the radio for fixed modulation using data help
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
795
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.54.
Note: When communications have not been established with the radio, the radio parameters may still be provisioned using the data help. The following procedure is written based upon MPT ODUs. The other radio types can be provisioned using a similar procedure.
2.
Provision MPT ODU radio port: i.
In the Mode field, select the Preset radio button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The 9500MPR MPT ODU FCM Modem Profiles Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the 9500MPR MPT ODU FCM Modem Profiles Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired channel spacing (10 MHz, 30 MHz, 40 MHz, or 50MHz), modulation scheme (64 QAM, 128 QAM, or 256 QAM), and option (Std or Std/XPIC).
iv.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The 9500MPR MPT ODU Shifter Data Help window opens.
v.
In the 9500MPR MPT ODU Shifter Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value.
vi.
When the MPT ODU is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT ODU is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range.
vii. If the MPT ODU is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range. Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
viii. Enter the MPT ODU radio channel Label, if applicable. ix.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT ODU configuration, the Main and Protect MPT ODU cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen are the same as the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
To provision the radio for adaptive modulation using data help 1.
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 59.56.
Note: When communications have not been established with the radio, the radio parameters may be provisioned using the data help. The following procedure is written based upon MPT ODUs. The other radio types can be provisioned using a similar procedure. 796
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
Provision MPT ODU radio port: i.
In the Mode field, choose the Adaptive radio button.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The 9500MPR MPT ODU ACM Modem Profiles Data Help window opens.
iii.
In the 9500MPR MPT ODU ACM Modem Profiles Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired channel spacing (5 MHz, 30 MHz, 40 MHz, or 50MHz), reference modulation, and option (Std or Std//XPIC). The reference modulation will be the lowest available modulation scheme in the ed modulation range.
iv.
In 1+1 FD and HSB configurations, from the Driving MSE drop-down menu, choose Lowest or Highest MSE.
v.
In the ed Modulation , choose all the modulation schemes to be used by the adaptive modulation. The schemes must be contiguous.
vi.
Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter . The 9500MPR MPT ODU Shifter Data Help window opens.
vii. In the 9500MPR MPT ODU Shifter Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value. viii. When the MPT ODU is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the MPT ODU is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range. 3.
If the MPT ODU is not connected, enter the Rx RF Frequency within the allowed range.
Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency
4.
Enter the MPT ODU radio channel Label, if applicable.
5.
Click Apply.
Note: In a Protected MPT ODU configuration, the Main and Protect MPT ODU cards use the same CT screen. The parameters on the Spare (Channel #0) part of the screen are the same as the Main (Channel #1) part of the screen. Most Channel #0 fields will be automatically populated to match Channel #1, except the transmit power. The transmit power must be configured independently.
To ister the Tx Mute settings 1.
Open the appropriate radio main view and click on the Maintenance tab; see Figure 59.64.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
797
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.64 — MPT ODU Maintenance tab
2.
Select an action. a.
To mute the transmitter indefinitely, choose the On radio button.
b.
To provide a duration that the transmitter will be muted, go to step 3.
Note: It is not possible to configure a timed Tx mute and a non-timed Tx mute at the same time.
3.
Choose the Timed radio button. The default duration is 30 minutes.
4.
Configure the Timeout parameter. The maximum duration is 2 days, 0 hours, 0 minutes.
Note: If the NE is still reachable after the transmitter is muted, you can change the timeout parameter. The new value will overwrite the previous timeout and the timer starts from the current timestamp.
5.
Click Apply.
To ister the ACM Manual settings 1.
798
Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your configuration and select the Maintenance tab.See Figure 59.65. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 59.65 — MPT ODU Maintenance tab
2.
Force a modulation scheme: i.
Select the Manual Operation check box.
ii.
Choose the scheme from the Forced Tx Modulation drop-down.
Note: The modulation scheme must be forced contiguously.For example, if the current Modulation scheme is 4 QAM, it not possible to force to 64 QAM. The modulation first must be forced to 16 QAM and then to 64 QAM. Also, if the current modulation is 64 QAM, to to 4 QAM it first must be forced to 16 QAM and then to 4 QAM.
To remove XPIC 1.
Clear any alarms causing an automatic Tx Mute on the radios; see the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Alarm Clearing Manual. Caution: If an XPIC association is removed while an automatic Tx Mute is active, the Tx Mute may remain on the system after the removal.
2.
Remove the XPIC association in the XPIC Configuration screen.
3.
Re-provision the radio parameters; see one of the following: •
To provision the MPT-HLC transceiver
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
799
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
800
•
To ister the MPT-HLS transceiver
•
To ister the MPT ODU
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
60 — Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning
60.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to provision the system to use IPv6. Use this procedure to set IPv6 parameters before activating IPv6 on the NE. If you activate IPv6 without performing pre-provisioning, default IP and OSPFv3 settings will be applied.
60.2 — General The 9500 MPR s IPv6 addressing. The NE Local IPv6 address is a Global Unicast address which identifies the NE in the DCN. The default address is FEC0:0:0:1::1. The prefix length is fixed to 128. The NE Local IPv6 address must be configured according to the following rules: •
IPv6 addresses having the Interface ID portion equal to all 0 are not allowed
•
IPv6 address::/128 (Unspecified address) is not allowed
•
IPv6 address::1/128 (Loopback Address) is not allowed
•
IPv6 addresses having FF00::/8 as high-order bits (Multicast addresses) are not allowed
•
IPv6 addresses having FE80::/10 as high-order bits (Link Local Addresses) are not allowed
Caution: Mixed configuration of IPv4 and IPv6 NEs is not ed. Before activating IPv6, ensure that all NEs in the network are IPv6 capable, that is, running R4.1.0 or higher software. A controlled activation is required; see local guidelines.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
801
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
60.3 — Procedure 1.
From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration> IP Configuration>IPv6 Pre-provisioning. See Figure 60.1. Figure 60.1 — IPv6 Pre-provisioning main menu bar path
2.
The first IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting window opens. See Figure 60.2. Figure 60.2 — IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 1 of 3 window
3.
802
In the Local Configuration , enter the local IP address of the NE in the Local IPv6 Address field.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure 4.
In the TMN Ethernet Configuration , enter the IPv6 address of the TMN Ethernet port in the IPv6 Address field, and the prefix length in the Prefix Length field.
5.
In the TMN In-Band #1 Configuration , enter the IPv6 address of the TMN In-Band #1 port in the IPv6 Address field, and the prefix length in the Prefix Length field.
6.
In the TMN In-Band #2 Configuration , enter the IPv6 address of the TMN In-Band #2 port in the IPv6 Address field, and the prefix length in the Prefix Length field.
7.
In the Port#4 TMN Ethernet Configuration , enter the IPv6 address of the Port#4 TMN port in the IPv6 Address field, and the prefix length in the Prefix Length field.
8.
Click Next. The second IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting window opens. See Figure 60.3. Figure 60.3 — IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 2 of 3 window
9.
Click on the Add button. The Create IPv6 Static Route window opens. See Figure 60.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
803
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 60.4 — Create IPv6 Static Route window
10. Select desired Host or Network Address Choice radio button: Host or Network. 11. Which IP Static Routing Configuration was selected? a.
If Network, go to step 12.
b.
If Host, go to step 13.
12. Enter the Subnet prefix length of the radio in the Subnet prefix length text field. 13. Enter the IP Address of the radio in the IPv6 Address text field. 14. Select desired Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice radio button: Gateway IPv6 Address or Point To Point Interface Index. 15. Which Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice was selected? a.
If Default Gateway IP Address, go to step 16.
b.
If Point To Point Interface Index, go to step 18.
16. Enter the Gateway IP Address in the Gateway IPv6 Address text field. 17. Go to step 19. 18. From the Point to Point Interface drop-down menu, select an interface Id. 19. Click Ok. Add additional IPv6 static routes as necessary. 20. Click Next. The third IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting window opens, summarizing the settings. See Figure 60.5.
804
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 60.5 — IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 3 of 3 window
21. Click on the Close button.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
805
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
806
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
61 — Use the Provisioning Tool
61.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures for provisioning 9500 MPR equipment using the Provisioning Tool. Some equipment and parameters must be provisioned using WebEML. See the Product Information Guide for more information.
61.2 — General The Provisioning can be performed by using the Provisioning Tool or WebEML. The Provisioning Tool provides an option to create and modify a provisioning file and apply it to an NE. The Provisioning Tool allows you to prepare the provisioning in the back office, minimizing time on field and potential for error. Note: Graphics in this chapter are examples.
61.2.1 — Provisioning tool screens The provisioning tool presents screens that reflect the provisioning selections previously made. Different screens will appear as you proceed depending on the selections made. The MSS Subrack appears on every screen, showing the units configured for each slot and the MPTs configured, if any. The slot currently being configured is shaded blue. The screens are presented in slot order: the Core-E configuration screen is always first, followed by the configuration screen for the unit configured in slot 3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
807
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Eight slots will appear in the tool. If you are provisioning an MSS-4, do not provision anything in slots 5 to 8. The following buttons appear on every screen: •
Restore: allows to restore in the screen the initial data without any change
•
Prev: the procedure goes back to the previous screen (the changed data may be lost after the Warning message)
•
Next: the procedure goes on to the next screen (some checks and data storage is done)
•
Cancel: the procedure goes back to the opening screen
•
Help: click on this button to open the help on line.
61.3 — Procedures Warning: The Provisioning Tool does not the CorEvo, MSS-O, MSS-1, P8ETH unit, P2E3DS3, or AUX unit. In the ANSI market the MP-HL and SDHACC are also not ed. In the ETSI market, the MOD300 and ODU300 are ed but not documented. For information, see the documentation from R60.0.0 or an earlier release. These units must be configured with WebEML. To configure an MSS-4 or MSS-8 extract the AUX units, if any.
This section provides the following procedures:
808
•
To open the Provisioning tool
•
To configure the MPT Access peripheral configuration screen
•
To configure the MPT Configuration screen
•
To configure the P32E1DS1 unit configuration screen for the ANSI market
•
To configure the P32E1DS1 unit configuration screen for the ETSI market
•
To configure the SDH unit configuration screen (ETSI market only)
•
To configure the EASv2 unit configuration screen
•
To configure the LAG configuration screen
•
To configure the XPIC configuration screen
•
To configure the Synchronization configuration screen
•
To configure the QoS configuration screen
•
To configure the Bridge configuration screen
•
To configure the Port VLAN configuration screen 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
To configure the Network configuration screen
•
To configure the Trusted managers screen
•
To view and save the configuration
•
To open the Provisioning tool
To open the Provisioning tool 1.
Double click on the TCO Provisioning tool icon on the Desktop (for the local copy on the PC see the Software Installation Guide). The screen in Figure 61.1 will display. Figure 61.1 — Provisioning Tool Screen
2.
Perform one of the following: a.
Click on the Open button to open a previously created configuration file. After a configuration file is opened, a Report displays for the existing file, see Figure 61.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
809
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.2 — Report for opened configuration file
If the file is correct, click on the Next button to start the provisioning. b.
Click on the Create button to create a file in R5.2.0. The MSS Configuration screen opens.
3.
Select the card to be configured and protection options for each slot from the drop-down menu. See Figure 61.3 for an example.
Note: Protection can be configured for the Core-E and P32E1DS1 units (the drop-down box is not dimmed), but not for the MPT-ACC or EASv2 units. Protection for MPT-HC, MPT-HQAM, or MPT-XP units on the Core-E must be configured with WebEML.
810
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.3 — MSS Configuration screen example
4.
Click on the Next button. The Core Configuration screen opens.
5.
In the Core Configuration screen, perform the following for each Ethernet port. See Figure 61.4. i.
Choose the working mode from the drop-down menu: •
Transport: to be used as GigaEthernet interface for Ethernet traffic (Note: for port#5 and port#6 the optional SFP must be installed);
•
MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM: to be used to connect an MPT-HC to port#1 to port#4; an MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM to port#5 and port#6.
•
Ethernet port #4, if enabled, has three different Working modes: TMN, Transport or MPT-HC/MPT-HQAM.
ii.
If the working mode is set to Transport, enable or disable autonegotiation and flow control.
iii.
If autonegotiation is disabled, select a fixed speed and direction pair in the “Speed - Duplex” area.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
811
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures iv.
If autonegotiation is enabled, Synch-E can be configured: choose Synchronous and select the operating mode: Master or Slave. The SSM (Synchronization Status Message) message can also be enabled. Note: The Provisioning Tool does not distinguish between MPT-HC or MPT-HCHQAM and their -XP variants. For example, to configure an MPT-XP-HQAM choose MPT-HQAM.
Note: MPT-MC appears in the drop-down menu. The MPT-MC unit is not used in North America.
Figure 61.4 — Core Configuration screen example
6.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the MPT Access peripheral configuration screen
812
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
In the MPT Access area enable the port to be used to interface the MPT. Port#1 and port#2 are electrical Ethernet ports; port#3 and port#4 are optical Ethernet ports. One or two ports can be enabled. See Figure 61.5. Figure 61.5 — MPTACC configuration with two units in the row
2.
Set the power type: •
PFoE (Power Feed over Ethernet) (one cable for Ethernet traffic + power supply) or
•
QMA (one cable for Power Supply and one cable for Ethernet traffic)
MPT-HC and MPT-HQAM can use PFoE or QMA. 3.
Configure the protection if needed: In the MPT Protection Configuration area select the Main port and the MPT Spare port (in the example of the following figure s5p1 means Slot #5 Port #1) and in the Port Type field select the protection configuration: 1+1 HSB or 1+1 FD.
4.
After the selection click on the ADD button. The screen shown in Figure 61.6 will appear.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
813
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.6 — 1+1 configuration with MPTACC units
5.
For the 1+1 configuration the ports must be both electrical or optical (no mixed configuration is allowed). The 1+1 configuration can be set up with two ports on the same unit or on two different units.
6.
Click on the Next button. The MPT configuration screen opens.
To configure the MPT Configuration screen 1.
814
Configure the following parameters as needed: •
Label
•
SSM checkbox
•
PPP RF in band management: choose OSPF or Static Routing
•
RPS Configuration: In a protection configuration, select the Physical Cable check box if a physical RPS cable is in use
•
Revertive Restoration Criteria: enable the checkbox for revertive restoration in a protection configuration.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures •
XPIC: in the Polarization field select the polarization to be used by the radio channel (Vertical or Horizontal). The configuration will be completed on the XPIC configuration screen. Figure 61.7 — XPIC polarization selection
•
2.
Link Identifier: select the checkbox to enable Link Identifier •
Enter a number from 1 to 255 for Expected. The number must match the associated Transmitter ID at the other end of the hop.
•
Enter a number from 1 to 255 for Transmitted. The number must match the associated Receiver ID at the other end of the hop.
See Figure 61.8 for 1+0 configuration with fixed modulation.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
815
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.8 — MPT configuration showing MPT-HQAM (1+0 with fixed modulation)
To perform the configuration:
816
i.
Do not put a check mark in the “Use Adaptive Modulation” check box.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button in the Profile area. The Data Help window opens, see Figure 61.9 for an example.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.9 — Data Help window for Profile area (fixed modulation)
3.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double-click on the row showing the correct Channel Spacing, Modulation and Option.
iv.
In the case of MPT-HQAM transceivers, the Profiles area includes an MPT-HC Compatibility checkbox, as shown in Figure 61.8. Select the checkbox to enable the MPT-HCv2 modem profile for the HQAM transceiver.
See Figure 61.10 for 1+0 configuration with adaptive modulation.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
817
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.10 — MPT configuration screen (1+0 with adaptive modulation)
818
i.
Put a check mark in the Use Adaptive Modulation check box.
ii.
Click on the Data Help button in the Profile area. The Data Help window opens, see Figure 61.11 for an example.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.11 — Data Help window for Profile area (adaptive modulation)
4.
iii.
In the Data Help window, double click on the row showing the correct Channel Spacing, Modulation and Option.
iv.
In the ed Modulation field, select all the modulation schemes to be used with the Adaptive Modulation.
v.
If the MPT is protected, in the MSE Driving Criteria field, select Lowest or Highest.
Configure the Channel area: •
Click on the Data Help button to open an information dialog window containing the shifter list according to MPT types. See Figure 61.12 for an example.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
819
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.12 — Data Help window for the Channel area
•
820
In a 1+1 configuration, Channel 0 is also available. In HSB configuration the shifter value is the same for both channels, see Figure 61.13. In FD configuration the two channels can have different shifter values, see Figure 61.14.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.13 — 1+1 HSB Configuration
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
821
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.14 — 1+1 FD Configuration
5.
Configure ATPC or Manual Transmit Power Control.
6.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the P32E1DS1 unit configuration screen for the ANSI market 1.
822
Figure 61.15 shows the DS1 configuration screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.15 — DS1 configuration screen
Configure the tributaries individually, or use the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to configure the following for all tributaries: •
Signal Mode: Disabled, Framed, Unframed, Framed SF or Framed ESF
•
Service Profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2Eth
•
Flow ID: is unique in the network. Enter a flow ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the Flow ID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered.
•
Payload size: the payload size is fixed at 192 bytes.
•
ECID TX: Tx Over-the-hop ID. Must match the Rx ID at the other end. Enter an ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the ECID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered.
•
ECID RX: Rx Over-the-hop ID. Must match the Tx ID at the other end.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
823
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Enter an ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the ECID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered.
2.
3.
•
TDM Clock Source: Adaptive or Differential.
•
Line Length
•
Line Coding
Configure the parameters that apply to all ports: •
AIS Insertion for LOF detection on DS1: select Enabled or Disabled. This setting is applied to all DS1 modules according to the value of the field for the module with the highest slot value: it is not applied on a per tributary basis.
•
Restoration Criteria: for 1+1 EPS are fixed to “Not Revertive” and cannot be changed.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the P32E1DS1 unit configuration screen for the ETSI market 1.
824
Figure 61.16 shows the E1 configuration screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.16 — E1 configuration
Configure the tributaries individually, or use the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to configure the following for all tributaries: •
Signal Mode: Disabled, Framed, Unframed, Framed SF or Framed ESF
•
Service Profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2Eth
•
Flow ID: is unique in the network. Enter a flow ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the Flow ID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered.
•
Payload size: the payload size is fixed at 256 bytes.
•
ECID TX: Tx Over-the-hop ID. Must match the Rx ID at the other end. Enter an ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the ECID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered.
•
ECID RX: Rx Over-the-hop ID. Must match the Tx ID at the other end.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
825
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Enter an ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the ECID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered.
2.
3.
•
TDM Clock Source: Adaptive or Differential.
•
Line Length
•
Line Coding
Configure the parameters that apply to all ports: •
Impedance: select the impedance to be used for the E1 streams (Unbalanced 75 ohm or Balanced 120 ohm).
•
Restoration Criteria: for 1+1 EPS are fixed to “Not Revertive” and cannot be changed.
•
Node Timing: timing from the network element clock as defined in G.8261. The enabling of the Node Timing is applied to all E1s of the PDH unit. By enabling the Node Timing the E1 streams in Rx side are retimed at the output with the network element clock.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the SDH unit configuration screen (ETSI market only) 1. 2.
Perform step 2 to configure SDHACC or step 3 for SDHCHANN. Figure 61.17 shows the configuration screen for SDHACC. Select the Port type: SFP-O (Optical) or SFE-E (Electrical)
826
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.17 — SDHACC configuration screen
i.
Put a check mark in the Port Status box to enable the STM-1.
ii.
Set the Auto Laser Shutdown: Enabled/Disabled ForcedOn/Disabled ForcedOff. This field will appear only if the Settings tab- of the STM-1 unit the optical SFP has been selected.
iii.
Enable the J0, if required, by selecting one of the two modes (SixteenBytesFrame/OneRepeatedByte) and in the Expected Receiving Value field enter the expected value. Note: byte J0 is only read, no Regeneration section Termination is done.
iv.
Enter the Flow ID (range: 2 to 4080). Warning: the flow id must be unique in the MPR network.
v.
Select the Jitter Buffer Depth: High/Low.
vi.
Service profile: fixed to SDH2SDHClock Source: The purpose of TMN Clock Source provisioning is to select the mode, that will be used to sync STM-1 data to the node Synchronization source.
vii. Differential: to sync the output to NE Synchronization source.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
827
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures viii. Node Timing: timing from the network element clock as defined in G.8261. The enabling of the Node Timing is applied to both the STM-1. By enabling the Node Timing the SMT-1 streams in Rx side are retimed at the output with the network element clock. 3.
Figure 61.18 shows the configuration screen for SDHCHAN. Figure 61.18 — SDHCHAN configuration screen
828
i.
Select the Port type: SFP-O (Optical) or SFE-E (Electrical)
ii.
Put a check mark in the Port Status box to enable the STM-1.
iii.
Set the Auto Laser Shutdown: Enabled/Disabled ForcedOn/Disabled ForcedOff. This field will appear only if the Settings tab- of the STM-1 unit the optical SFP has been selected.
iv.
Select the Clock Source.
v.
Enable the J0, if required, by selecting one of the two modes (SixteenBytesFrame/OneRepeatedByte) in the Expected Receiving Value field and enter the expected value and in the Sending J0 field select one of the two modes and enter the value to be transmitted.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: Byte J0 is only read, no Regeneration section Termination is done.
vi.
Enable, if required, the E1 Node Timing Configuration. The Node Timing is the timing from the network clock as defined in G.8261. The enabling of the Node Timing is applied to all E1s of the unit. By enabling the Node Timing the E1 streams in Rx side are retimed at the output with the network element clock.
vii. In the Single Tributary Configuration area configure all the E1s to be mapped/demapped in the STM-1. The E1s are identified by a progressive number from #1 to #63. viii. Use the “One Shot” Tributaries Configuration to configure the following parameters for the E1s: •
Service Profile The available profiles are: TDM2TDM, TDM2Eth
4.
•
Flow Id: To implement cross-connections between line side and radio side each E1 tributary must be associated to an identifier. Enter the Flow identifier value in the relevant field (possible values: 2 to 4080).
•
The ECID Tx, ECID Rx, Payload Size and TDM Clock Source fields can be written only if the Service Profile is TDM2Eth.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the EASv2 unit configuration screen 1.
Perform step 2 to configure ports and step 3 to configure protection.
2.
In the EASv2 Configuration screen, perform the following for each Ethernet port. See Figure 61.19 for electrical ports or Figure 61.20 for optical ports. i.
Choose the working mode from the drop-down menu: •
Transport: to be used as GigaEthernet interface for Ethernet traffic (Note: for port#5 and port#6 the optional SFP must be installed);
•
MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM: to be used to connect an MPT-HC to port#1 to port#4; an MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM to port#5 and port#6.
ii.
If the working mode is set to Transport, enable or disable autonegotiation and flow control.
iii.
If autonegotiation is disabled, select a fixed speed and direction pair in the “Speed - Duplex” area.
iv.
If autonegotiation is enabled, Synch-E can be configured: choose Synchronous and select the operating mode: Master or Slave. The SSM (Synchronization Status Message) message can also be enabled.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
829
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The Provisioning Tool does not distinguish between MPT-HC or MPT-HCHQAM and their -XP variants. For example, to configure an MPT-XP-HQAM choose MPT-HQAM. Note: MPT-MC appears in the drop-down menu. The MPT-MC unit is not used in North America.
Figure 61.19 — EASv2 configuration screen: electrical ports
830
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.20 — EASv2 configuration screen: optical ports
3.
Figure 61.21 shows EASv2 units in slots 7 and 8.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
831
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.21 — EASv2 protection configuration
In the MPT Protection Configuration area select the MPT Main port and the MPT Spare port (in the example figure s7p5 means Slot #7 Port #5) and in the Prot Type field select the protection configuration: 1+1 HSB or 1+1 FD. 4.
832
After the selection click on ADD to set up the protection; see Figure 61.22.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.22 — EASv2 protection
After one port is enabled the screen for MPT configuration appears. 5.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the LAG configuration screen 1.
The procedure to configure a LAG using the provisioning tool is the same as the procedure to create a LAG using WebEML. Figure 61.23 shows the LAG configuration screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
833
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.23 — LAG configuration screen
Perform the following to create an L1 Radio LAG: 1.
Press the Create button. The LAG Creation window opens; see Figure 61.24. Figure 61.24 — LAG creation window
834
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
3.
Enter: •
ID: LAG identification (from 1 to 14)
•
Name: optional field (max. 32 characters). You can name the ports in the LAG and the LAG itself separately.
•
Type: L1 Radio
•
Size: number of ports involved in the LAG (max. 4)
•
Key: the key automatically changes according to the ID entered in the ID field.
•
LA (Link Aggregation Control Protocol): fixed to “Disabled” for Radio LAGs
•
Timeout: this field is disabled for Radio LAGs.
Click on Create. The LAG appears in the top of the LAG Configuration screen; see Figure 61.25. Figure 61.25 — Created L1 Radio LAG
4.
Select the new LAG.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
835
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 5.
Select a port in the Available Ports area and click on the Right Arrow button to move the selected port in the Added Ports area. The Available Ports field shows only the ports which can be configured as Lowest index port (MPTs with odd numbers). Figure 61.26 — Available ports
The first selected port inserted in the Added Ports field, on the right side, will be the Lowest index port (Slot #3 - Port #5). The Available Ports field shows all the remaining ports (also the ports with the even number: example Slot #4 - Port #8). Figure 61.27 — Lowest index port selected
Note: The Available Ports field shows only the ports with a number higher than the number of the Lowest index port (as example, if the Lowest index port is 4.7, the port will be only 4.8; if the Lowest index port is 3.5, the ports will be 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7 and 4.8).
836
6.
Add additional ports to the LAG as required.
7.
Choose the suitable WTR (Wait To Restore) time using the WTR toggle switch.
8.
Select the Enabled check box.
9.
If required, enable the PPP RF channel and select the OSPF Area.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: The PPP RF channel for TMN is managed here at LAG level and not at radio level. In case of 2 parallel LAG groups, the PPP rules are the same as for Nx(1+0) and Nx(1+1). The TMN RF option must be disabled on all links except one. The TMN PPP traffic may use the other links for protection, when the enabled link is failed. This protection may require waiting for the destination MAC address to age out of the forwarding table before recovering.
10. If required, enable the SSM. Note: The SSM is managed here at LAG level and not at radio level.
11. Click on the Apply button. The Apply button saves the configuration. 12. Repeat the previous steps to configure another LAG or click on the Next button. When the LAG is configured, the radio icons for the radios in the LAG show an L symbol in the MSS Subrack : ( )
2.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the XPIC configuration screen 1.
Perform step 2 to configure 1+0 XPIC or step 3 to configure 1+1 XPIC. Note: The MPT polarization must be configured on the MPT configuration screen.
2.
To configure 1+0 XPIC: i.
Drag with the mouse from an MPT icon to another MPT icon. The letter V means MPT set with Vertical polarization; the letter H means MPT set with Horizontal polarization. The two MPT must have different polarization.
ii.
Put a check mark and click on OK. See Figure 61.28.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
837
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.28 — To configure 1+0 XPIC
Figure 61.29 shows two MPT-HC in XPIC configuration.
838
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.29 — 1+0 XPIC
To remove the association, double click on the connection line, remove the check mark, click on OK and Next. 3.
To configure 1+1 in the TRDS: i.
Drag with the mouse from the icon of the Main of one 1+1 HSB to the Main of another 1+1 HSB. The 1+1 HSB groups must have different polarization.
ii.
Put a check mark and click on OK. See Figure 61.30.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
839
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.30 — To configure 1+1 XPIC
Figure 61.31 shows two MPT-HC in the XPIC configuration.
840
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.31 — 1+1 XPIC
To remove the association, double click on the connection line, remove the check mark, click on OK and Next. 4.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the Synchronization configuration screen 1.
Figure 61.32 shows the synchronization configuration screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
841
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.32 — Synchronization Configuration screen
Perform the following:
2.
842
i.
Select the primary or secondary source from the Sources drop-down menus; for example, Any available DS1. The list of sources in the dropdown menu is pre-defined: it does not change based on the configuration.
ii.
Choose the interface in the Source Configuration drop-down menus. The list of interfaces in the drop-down menu is created based on the interfaces configured. For example, if Any available DS1 has been selected, the menu displays the configured DS1 ports.
Configure a dedicated Sync-Out port configurable according to the following options: •
2.048 MHz, electrical levels according G.703, clause 13
•
5 MHz, + 6 dBm into 50 ohm, sine-wave
•
10 MHz, + 6 dBm into 50 ohm, sine-wave
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures •
1.024 MHz, electrical levels according to G.703, clause 13 with the following exception: timing correctly scaled from 2.048 MHz to 1.024 MHz
3.
Configure a Wait-to-Restore time as needed.
4.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the QoS configuration screen 1.
The QoS Configuration only refers to queues Q1-Q5. The QoS Configuration menu has 3 screens. Perform the following:
2.
•
For Scheduler Configuration, go to step 2.
•
For Queue Size Configuration, go to step 3.
•
For QoS Classification, go to step 4.
Figure 61.33 shows the Scheduler Configuration screen, showing the default configuration. Figure 61.33 — Scheduler Configuration screen
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
843
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures For each queue, click in the cell to change the setting.
3.
i.
Choose the Mode: SP (Strict Priority) or DWRR (Deficit Weighted Round Robin)
ii.
Choose the Weight (in the 1-32 range)
iii.
Click on Restore to go back to the previous configuration or on Defaults to go back to the default settings.
iv.
Click on the Next button to complete the configuration.
Figure 61.34 shows the Queue Size configuration screen. Figure 61.34 — Queue size configuration screen
For each queue and for each radio direction, perform the following as needed:
844
•
Double click on the relevant field to change the buffer size (in Bytes).
•
Click on Restore to go back to the previous saved configuration or on Defaults to clear the settings for the selected radio direction.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures •
Highlight a radio direction and click on Copy to copy the settings in the row. Highlight another radio direction and click on Paste to apply the copied settings to the highlighted radio direction.
•
Click on the Next button to complete the configuration.
For each buffer size the max delay in ms is automatically calculated. 4.
Select the classification in the QoS Classification Criterion field; see Figure 61.35. Figure 61.35 — QoS classification screen
For IEEE 802.1p, see step 5. For DiffServ, see step 6. 5.
Figure 61.36 shows the IEEE 802.1p configuration screen, with default settings.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
845
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.36 — IEEE 802.1p
Perform the following to classify the Priority Code Point to a specific queue: i.
Change the classification on the left area clicking on a radio button. The modification will appear in yellow. Click on Restore to go back to the previous configuration or on Defaults to go back to the default settings.
ii. 6.
846
Click on Next to complete the configuration.
Figure 61.37 shows the DiffServ configuration screen, with the default settings.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.37 — DiffServ
Perform the following to complete the classification of the DiffServ Code Point to a specific queue: i.
Change the classification on the left area by clicking on the radio buttons. The modifications will appear in yellow. Click on Restore to go back to the previous configuration or on Defaults to go back to the default settings.
ii.
Click on the Switch to Per Range view button (
)to open a read-
only table with the current association “DiffServ to Forwarding Class Mapping”, as shown in Figure 61.38.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
847
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.38 — Read-only table
Click on the Table form (per point) button to close the table. iii. 7.
Click on Next to complete the configuration.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the Bridge configuration screen 1.
Choose the way to manage the Ethernet traffic using the provisioning tool: •
802.1D (MAC Address Bridge), see Figure 61.39.
•
802.1Q (Virtual Bridge), see Figure 61.40. This is the default in the ANSI market.
Note: 802.1ad (Provider Bridge) must be configured using WebEML. The MSS Subrack does not appear in the Bridge configuration screen by default. Click on the MSS Summary button to view it.
848
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.39 — 802.1D VLAN management
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
849
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.40 — 802.1Q VLAN management (default VLAN only)
2.
Perform the following to create a VLAN: i.
Click on the ADD VLan button. The Create VLAN window opens.
ii.
In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID (the configurable values must be in the range 2 - 4080) The VLAN IDs already defined to cross-connect internal flows (that is, TDM2TDM, TDM2ETH) cannot be used.
iii.
In the VLAN Name field, enter the VLAN Name: a text string of up to 32 characters. There is no check on whether the name is in use for multiple VLANs.
iv.
850
In the VLAN Ports field, select the ports of this VLAN by putting a check mark on the relevant check box.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures All the Ethernet ports and all the Radio directions can be considered. Both enabled and disabled Ethernet ports (radio ports when declared are implicitly enabled) can be member of a VLAN. This means that a disabled port can be configured as a member of a VLAN and a port already member of a VLAN can be disabled continuing to be a member of the same VLAN. v.
In the Untagged Ports field, select, among the ports belonging to this VLAN (), the untagged ports (in egress the VLAN will be removed from the frames). Only the Ethernet ports, enabled and disabled, are manageable. The VLAN cannot be removed from the radio ports (with the exception of VLAN 1). The VLAN-ID values allowed are in the range 2 - 4080. By default, for the VLAN IDs defined, all the ports are and the Untag flag is set to False, which means all the frames are transmitted with a tag.
Note: If one tagged packet with VLAN-ID X is received on a port which is not member of the VLAN-ID X, the packet is dropped.
3.
In Figure 61.41 two VLANs have been created. Click on the EDIT VLan or DEL VLan buttons to modify or delete a VLAN.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
851
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.41 — Example of created VLANs
Note: When a board on which there is at least one port member of a VLAN is removed from the MSS configuration screen, the management system advises the operator that there are ports on the board that are of a VLAN, asking confirmation of the operation. If confirmed, the ports are automatically removed by the NE from the list of member ports of the VLAN and from the list of the untagged ports in egress.
4.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the Port VLAN configuration screen 1.
Figure 61.42 shows the configuration tab for the six ports of the Core-E card. Figure 61.43 shows the configuration tab for the eight ports of the EASv2 card. Configure the following as needed for each Ethernet port: •
852
Untagged frames on Ethernet ports: Accepted or Discarded.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures •
If the untagged frames are accepted, the VLAN-ID and Priority fields must be configured. Only VLAN-ID values already defined (in the VLAN management menu) can be configured for this purpose. The Priority values allowed are in the range 0 - 7. Figure 61.42 — Port VLAN configuration - Core-E ports
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
853
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.43 — Port VLAN configuration - EASv2 ports
2.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the Network configuration screen 1.
854
Figure 61.44 shows the Network Configuration screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.44 — Network Configuration screen
Configure the following IP addresses: •
Local IP Address: it is the Controller IP address (default IP address = 10.0.1.2 with fixed mask 255.255.255.255) The NE Local IP Address can be reused on one of the other TMN interfaces. These interfaces must have different IP subnets.
•
NMS Ethernet Port IP address: it is the IP address relevant to the Ethernet TMN port (default IP address = 10.0.1.2 with mask 255.255.255.0) The NMS Eth port cannot be disabled.
•
NMS Ethernet Port 4 IP address: the Ethernet Port 4 can be used for traffic or TMN depending on the configuration on the Core Configuration screen. Port 4 area is configurable if ETH4 area in Core configuration screen is set in “TMN” Working Mode. If the area is enabled, it behaves the same as for Ethernet Configuration.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
855
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures •
TMN In-Band interface #1, IP/subnet;TMN In-Band interface #2, IP/ subnet
Warning: If remote NEs have to be reached from this NE, you need to configure the Routing Protocol of the TMN-RF channel, if the remote NE is connected through the radio link or of the NMS Ethernet Port, if the remote NE is connected through the Ethernet cable.
2.
Configure the following parameters for each TMN In-Band interface: •
IP address and subnet: default 10.0.3.2/24 for interface #1 and 10.0.4.2/24 for interface #2
•
VLAN ID: no default ID for interface #1 and interface #2 (Note: if the two interfaces are disabled, the VLAN ID will appear in the final report as undefined).
•
List of Ethernet interfaces where transmit/receive TMN In-Band traffic: default None (multiple selection with the mouse can be done)
•
Routing Protocol: Static Routing or OSPF. The default is Static Routing.
•
Area ID in case of OSPF protocol enabled: from 0 to 3
Configuration of the P and DS fields of the VLAN tag is not ed by the Provisioning Tool. Default values are applied. 3.
Configure the Static Routing. Click on the Add Route button to add a static route.
4.
Configure the OSPF Areas. Click on the Add Area button to add an OSPF area.
5.
Configure NTP servers:
6.
•
Put a check mark in the NTP protocol field to enable the protocol.
•
In the Main Server address field enter the IP address of the server, which is in charge to distribute the time to all the NEs in the network.
•
In the Spare Server address field enter the IP address of the Spare Server, if any.
Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration.
To configure the Trusted managers screen 1.
856
Figure 61.45 shows the trusted managers screen.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.45 — Trusted Managers screen
To activate a trusted manager: i.
Click on Add Manager
ii.
Double-click on the IP Address column and enter the IP address of the SNMP manager. The default UDP Port is 5010. Double-click on this column to configure another port. The Manager Type cannot be changed (it is fixed to 5620 SAM).
2.
iii.
To confirm the selection click Enter.
iv.
To remove a manager, select one or more manager from the list and click on Remove Managers.
Click on the Next button.
To view and save the configuration 1.
The Report shows the configuration created; see Figure 61.46.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
857
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 61.46 — Configuration report
Click on the Save button to save the configuration as shown or click on the Prev button to return to a previous screen. Configuration information is saved in MCML (XML-based) format. Note: Since MCML configuration files are XML-based, they contain simple text characters with specific tags to identify information. This allows the to possibly modify the file manually. However, configuration files not strictly fulfilling XML and MCML grammar and structure cannot be considered correct and used by TCO Tools management. Such manual modification is strongly discouraged.
858
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
62 — Apply a configuration using the Web Server
62.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures for applying a configuration file using the Web Server interface. The configuration file must be created using the Provisioning Tool: see Use the Provisioning Tool.
62.2 — General The Provisioning Tool allows you to prepare a file with the provisioning information in the back office, minimizing time on field and potential for error. The same file can be applied to multiple NEs using the Configuration Setting menu in the Web Server interface.
62.3 — Procedure 1.
to NE. For detailed steps to to an NE using a web browser, see to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window.
2.
Select Configuration → Configuration Setting. The Configuration Setting screen opens.
3.
Select action: a.
To clear an existing database and apply a configuration file, go to step 4.
b.
To apply a configuration file to an unconfigured NE, go to step 7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
859
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
4. Caution: Clearing the NE database will reset the local IP address.
If the NE is already configured, the DB CLEAR and NE RESTART button appears on the Configuration Setting screen. Click on the button to clear the database. A confirmation dialog box appears. 5.
Click on the OK button to proceed. The NE restarts.
6.
Log back in to the Web Server and select Configuration → Configuration Setting. The Configuration Setting screen opens, see Figure 62.1. Figure 62.1 — Configuration Settings screen
7.
Click on the Browse button and navigate to the configuration file. The Configuration button appears.
8.
Click on the Configuration button. The Web Server checks the configuration parameters. When the check is ed the View Parameters and Apply to NE buttons become available.
9.
Click on the View Parameters button if necessary to check the information provided in the configuration file. Click on the Apply to NE button to apply the configuration.
10.
860
When the configuration setting is complete, a summary appears on the screen. Figure 62.2 provides an example.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 62.2 — Configuration Setting confirmation summary
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
861
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
862
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Equipment functions
Note: Performance monitoring on affected equipment should be disabled before making configuration changes.
•
Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
•
Digital Core Facing Loopback
•
IF Cable loopback
•
Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
•
OAM Remote Loopback
•
Open and run performance monitoring
•
Perform protection switching
•
Perform radio power measurements
•
Radio Facing Circuit Loopback
•
RF Core Facing Loopback
•
ister SDH LAG
•
Upgrade and downgrade protection
•
Upgrade and downgrade radio profile
•
Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port
•
Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port
•
Perform Tx Diversity Antenna operations
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
863
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
864
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
63 — Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
63.1 — Purpose This chapter provides instructions to perform Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback for the 9500 MPR.
63.2 — General Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback mode uses the signal from the CORE switch matrix to be transmitted by the PDH/SDH transponder card and replaces the signal received by the PDH/SDH transponder and sends the signal back to the CORE switch matrix. See Figure 63.1 for a block diagram of Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback. See Figure 63.2 for a block diagram of Core Facing SDH Tributary Loopback. Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is an internal loopback. Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is a drop-and-continue loopback. Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback can be activated on a per tributary basis independent of the other PDH/SDH tributaries. Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is ed on E1/DS1 tributaries (P32E1DS1 card), DS3 tributaries (P2E3DS3 card), and STM-1/OC-3 tributaries (SDHACC card).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
865
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.1 — Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback block diagram
Figure 63.2 — Core Facing SDH Tributary Loopback block diagram
63.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To activate a Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
•
To deactivate a Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
To activate a Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
866
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click the PDH/SDH Transponder Card associated with the tributary to perform Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback. For E1/DS1 loopback, see Figure 63.3. For DS3 loopback, see Figure 63.4. For SDH loopback, see Figure 63.5.
Figure 63.3 — Main Equipment Window: PDH E1/DS1 Transponder Card highlighted
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
867
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.4 — Main Equipment Window: PDH DS3 Transponder Card highlighted
868
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.5 — Main Equipment Window: PDH OC-3 Transponder Card highlighted
2.
The PDH/SDH Main View for the selected PDH/SDH transponder opens.
3.
Select Loopback tab. For E1, DS1 or DS3 loopback, see Figure 63.6. For SDH loopback, see Figure 63.7.
4.
For SDH loopback, select Port#s.n. See Figure 63.7.
5.
For PDH loopback, select Port#nn Internal from the resource tree area; DS1 Port#1-32 Internal or DS3 Port#1-2 Internal. See Figure 63.6. For SDH loopback, select COREFACING from the resource tree area. See Figure 63.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
869
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.6 — PDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port selected
870
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.7 — SDH main view, Loopback tab OC-3 Port#3.1 selected
6.
Select the Active radio button in the Activation area.
7.
Enter time out period (days, hours, minutes) in the Timeout Period (max 4 days) fields.
8.
Click Apply. Loopback Setting window opens.
9.
Click Yes.
10. Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is established (Active). For an example of an active DS1 core facing loopback see Figure 63.8. For an example of an active SDH core facing loopback see Figure 63.9.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
871
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.8 — Core Facing PDH DS1 Tributary Loopback active
872
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 63.9 — Core Facing SDH Tributary Loopback active
To deactivate a Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click the PDH/SDH Transponder Card associated with the tributary to perform Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback. For DS1 loopback, see Figure 63.3. For DS3 loopback, see Figure 63.4. For SDH loopback, see Figure 63.5. The PDH/SDH Main View for the selected PDH/SDH transponder opens.
2.
Select Loopback tab. For DS1 or DS3 loopback, see Figure 63.8. For SDH loopback, see Figure 63.9.
3.
For SDH loopback, select Port#s.n. See Figure 63.9.
4.
For PDH loopback, select Port#nn Internal from the resource tree area; DS1 Port#1-32 Internal or DS3 Port#1-2 Internal. See Figure 63.8.
5.
For SDH loopback, select COREFACING from the resource tree area. See Figure 63.9.
6.
Select Not Active radio-button in the Activation area.
7.
Click Apply. Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is deactivated (Not Active). For PDH loopback, see Figure 63.6. For SDH loopback, see Figure 63.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
873
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
874
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
64 — Digital Core Facing Loopback
64.1 — Purpose This chapter provides instructions to perform Digital Core Facing Loopback for the 9500 MPR.
64.2 — General Digital Core Facing Loopback mode uses the signal to be transmitted by the MPT-HL/ HLC/HC/XP Transceiver and replaces the signal received by the MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver and sends the transmit signal back to the P8ETH/EASv2/MPTACC card. This is an internal loopback. Digital Core Facing Loopback can only be enabled on the aggregate traffic. This loopback is a Loop and Continue. MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver receive traffic will be dropped. When this loopback is activated the expected behavior is as follows: •
•
TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH flows are forwarded back to Core card with source and destination MAC addresses swapped. •
For TDM2ETH flows, where the ECID Tx and ECID Rx are the same value, the loopback works.
•
For TDM2ETH flows, where the ECID Tx is different form ECID Rx, the loopback fails.
Generic Ethernet flows are dropped.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
875
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
64.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To activate a Digital Core Facing Loopback
•
To deactivate a Digital Core Facing Loopback
To activate a Digital Core Facing Loopback 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click on the Transceiver radio icon to perform Digital Core Facing Loopback. See Figure 64.1. Figure 64.1 — Main Equipment window: Radio icon highlighted
The main view for the selected radio direction opens. 2.
876
Select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 64.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 64.2 — Radio Maintenance tab
3.
Select the Core Facing - Internal radio button in the Loopback area.
4.
Select Active radio button in the Activation area.
5.
Enter the Timeout (days, hours, minutes) in the Timeout fields.
6.
Click on the Apply button.
7.
Core facing Loopback is established.
To deactivate a Digital Core Facing Loopback 1.
In the main equipment window, open the appropriate radio main view and select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 64.2.
2.
Select Core Facing - Internal in the Loopback area.
3.
Select the Not Active radio button in the Activation area.
4.
Click on the Apply button.
5.
Core facing Loopback is deactivated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
877
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
878
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
65 — Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
65.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to perform Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback for the 9500 MPR.
65.2 — General Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback mode uses the received line tributary input signal to the PDH/SDH transponder card and sends the signal back to the transmit line tributary output signal. See Figure 65.1 for a block diagram of Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback. See Figure 65.2 for a block diagram of Line Facing SDH Tributary Loopback. Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is a line external loopback. Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is a drop-and-continue loopback. Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback can be activated on a per tributary basis independent of the other PDH/SDH tributaries. Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is ed on E1/DS1 tributaries (P32E1DS1 card) and DS3 tributaries (P2E3DS3 card).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
879
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.1 — Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback block diagram
Figure 65.2 — Line Facing SDH Tributary Loopback block diagram
65.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To activate a Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
•
To deactivate a Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
To activate a Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback
880
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click the PDH/SDH Transponder Card associated with the tributary to perform Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback. For E1/DS1 loopback, see Figure 65.3. For DS3 loopback, see Figure 65.4. For SDH loopback, see Figure 65.5.
Figure 65.3 — Main Equipment window: PDH E1/DS1 Transponder Card highlighted
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
881
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.4 — Main Equipment window: PDH DS3 Transponder Card highlighted
882
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.5 — Main Equipment window: SDH Transponder Card highlighted
i.
The PDH/SDH Main View for the selected PDH/SDH transponder opens.
ii.
Select Loopback tab. For E1/DS1 or DS3 loopback, see Figure 65.6. For SDH loopback, see Figure 65.7.
iii.
For SDH loopback, select Port#s.n. See Figure 65.7.
iv.
For PDH loopback, select Port#nn External Line from the resource tree area; DS1 Port#1-32 External Line or DS3 Port#1-2 External Line. See Figure 65.6 For SDH loopback, select LINEFACING from the resource tree area. See Figure 65.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
883
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.6 — PDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port selected
884
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.7 — SDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port#07 selected
v.
Select the Active radio button in the Activation area.
vi.
Enter time out period (days, hours, minutes) in the Timeout Period (max 4 days) fields.
vii. Click Apply. Loopback Setting window opens. viii. Click Yes. Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is established (Active). See Figure 65.8. Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is established (Active). For an example of an active DS1 line facing loopback see Figure 65.8. For an example of an active SDH Line facing loopback see Figure 65.9.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
885
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.8 — Line Facing PDH DS1 Tributary Loopback Active
886
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 65.9 — Line Facing SDH Tributary Loopback Active
To deactivate a Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click the PDH/SDH Transponder Card associated with the tributary to perform Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback. For E1/DS1 loopback, see Figure 65.3. For DS3 loopback, see Figure 65.4. For SDH loopback, see Figure 65.5. The PDH/SDH Main View for the selected PDH/SDH transponder opens.
2.
Select Loopback tab. For E1/DS1 or DS3 loopback, see Figure 65.8. For SDH loopback, see Figure 65.9.
3.
For SDH loopback, select Port#s.n. See Figure 65.9.
4.
For PDH loopback, select Port#nn External Line from the resource tree area; DS1 Port#1-32 External Line or DS3 Port#1-2 External Line. See Figure 65.8. For SDH loopback, select LINEFACING from the resource tree area. See Figure 65.9.
5.
Select Not Active radio-button in the Activation area.
6.
Click Apply.
7.
Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is deactivated (Not Active). For PDH loopback, see Figure 65.6. For SDH loopback, see Figure 65.7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
887
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
888
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
66 — OAM Remote Loopback
66.1 — Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to perform an EFM OAM remote loopback.
66.2 — General A loopback can be performed on an operational EFM OAM link. The following conditions must be satisfied in order to activate remote loopback: •
Local DTE in Active mode
•
Operational Status value is Operational
•
Remote DTE s Remote Loopback function
•
Local DTE not in loopback mode Note: OAM Remote loopbacks do not generate an Abnormal Condition.
66.3 — Procedure This section provides the following procedures: •
To activate OAM Remote Loopback
•
To activate OAM Remote Loopback
To activate OAM Remote Loopback 1.
From the Main Menu Bar, select Configuration >ETH OAM Configuration. The ETH OAM Configuration window opens. See Figure 66.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
889
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 66.1 — ETH OAM Configuration window with operational link
2.
From the list, choose the interface that you need to create the loopback on.
3.
In the Link OAM Loopback pane, choose the Start check box in the OAM Remote Loopback field.
4.
Click on the Apply button. The loopback is enabled. The Link OAM Loopback Status is updated to Remote Loopback, see Figure 66.2.
To deactivate OAM Remote Loopback 1.
From the Main Menu Bar, select Configuration >ETH OAM Configuration. The ETH OAM Configuration window opens. See Figure 66.2.
890
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 66.2 — ETH OAM Configuration window with OAM Remote Loopback
2.
In the Link OAM Loopback pane, choose the Stop check box in the OAM Remote Loopback field.
3.
Click on the Apply button. The loopback is disabled. The Link OAM Loopback Status is updated to No Loopback.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
891
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
892
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
67 — Open and run performance monitoring
67.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedures to open and run performance monitoring (PM) for the 9500 MPR.
67.2 — General The Performance Monitoring Suite provides the ability to gather statistical data on Ethernet or Radio ports and RSL History to determine the quality level of ports over time. PM counters are arranged in the following s: •
Ethernet Statistics
•
Radio PM
•
Adaptive Modulation PM
•
PDH PM
•
SDH PM
•
RSL History
PM data is collected for 15-min and 24-h time periods. One current and ninety-six history reports are available for a 15-min period. One current and eight history reports are available for a 24-h time period. PM data is considered suspect when one or more of the following conditions occurs during the collection period. When data is suspect, it is flagged in the PM view. •
The elapsed time deviates more than 10/900 s from the nominal time for the 15-min or 24-h collection period.
•
There was loss of PM data in equipment, including PDH/SDH Access Board missing.
•
Performance counters were reset during collection period.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
893
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
•
PM was activated during the collection period.
The 15-min PM data is stored in the History Data report only when errors are recorded. The 24-h PM data is always stored in the History Data report. Default and Elaborated PM counters are available. Default counters are collected on the NE. Elaborated counters are calculated on the PC.
67.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the PM tool
•
To run PM on an Ethernet port
•
To run PM for compression gain statistics
•
To run PM on a radio Ethernet port
•
To run PM on an L1 radio LAG port
•
To run PM on a radio port
•
To run Adaptive Modulation PM on a radio port
•
To run PM on a PDH port
•
To run PM on an SDH port
•
To run RSL History PM
•
To create a TCA threshold
•
To modify a TCA threshold
•
To delete a TCA Threshold
•
To assign TCA Alarm thresholds to Radio Channels/Link
•
To view PM data
•
To export PM history data
To open the PM tool 1.
From the main toolbar, select the PM Tool icon (see Figure 67.1) or from the main menu bar, select Diagnosis>Performance Monitoring. Figure 67.1 — PM Tool icon
The Acknowledgement of Authorization dialog box opens; see Figure 67.2. 894
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 67.2 — Acknowledgement of Authorization dialog box
2.
Click on the Accept button. The Performance Monitoring Tool opens; see Figure 67.3. Figure 67.3 — Performance Monitoring Tool window
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
895
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM on an Ethernet port 1.
From the resource tree area, select the Ethernet Statistics pane.
2.
From the Ethernet Statistics pane, expand the card tree and select the Ethernet port on which to run Ethernet PM.
3.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.4 shows PM on an Ethernet port. Figure 67.4 — Ethernet port PM
896
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM for compression gain statistics 1.
From the resource tree area, select the Ethernet Statistics pane.
2.
Click on the Bird’s Eye View icon in the toolbar to switch to Bird’s Eye View.
3.
From the Ethernet Statistics pane, expand the card tree and select the Ethernet or L1 LAG port on which to run Ethernet PM.
4.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.5 shows compression gain statistics. Figure 67.5 — Compression gain statistics PM
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
897
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM on a radio Ethernet port 1.
From the resource tree area, select the Ethernet Statistics pane.
2.
From the Ethernet Statistics pane, select the radio card on which to run radio Ethernet PM.
3.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.6 shows radio QoS Ethernet port PM. Figure 67.6 — Radio QoS Ethernet port PM
898
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: If the Ethernet throughput percentage over the radio interface (for aggregate and QoS queues) is above 100% and the TDF (Total Discarded Frames) counter is clear, check whether the TDM2TDM/TDM2ETH/SDH2SDH data flows cross-connected to the radio interface are experiencing any of the following: • Loss of CES alarm at both or either side of the TDM2TDM/TDM2ETH/SDH2SDH data flow path • RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing) alarm on PDH, SDHACC, or SDHCHAN card • STM-1/OC3 LOS alarm at both or either side of the SDH2SDH data flow path In these cases, the Ethernet traffic can exploit the radio bandwidth left available by TDM2TDM/TDM2ETH/SDH2SDH data flows, resulting in an Ethernet throughput higher than the available bandwidth computed by the NE, based on the provisioned cross-connections.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
899
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM on an L1 radio LAG port Note: Measured throughput on an L1 LAG includes both TDM2TDM/TDM2ETH/ SDH2SDH data flow and Ethernet traffic.
1.
From the resource tree area, select the Ethernet Statistics pane.
2.
From the Ethernet Statistics pane, select the L1 radio LAG to on which to run radio Ethernet PM.
3.
To configure the Ethernet counters for an L1 radio LAG with EASv2, choose TDM+ETHERNET or ETHERNET from the Aggregation Type drop-down menu in the Configuration . Figure 67.3 shows the configuration.
Figure 67.7 — Configure Ethernet counters for L1 radio LAG PM with EASv2
4.
900
Click Stopped to start the monitoring.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM on a radio port 1.
From the resource tree area, select the Radio PM pane.
2.
From the Radio PM pane, select radio port on which to run radio PM.
3.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.8 shows PM on a radio port. Figure 67.8 — Radio port PM
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
901
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run Adaptive Modulation PM on a radio port Note: In case of usage of analog measurement the maximum suggested number of Analog measurement windows that can be opened at the same time is 12.
1.
From the resource tree area, select the Adaptive Modulation PM pane.
2.
From the Adaptive Modulation pane, select the radio port to on which to run Adaptive Modulation PM.
3.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.9 shows adaptive modulation PM. Figure 67.9 — Adaptive Modulation PM
902
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM on a PDH port 1.
From the resource tree area, select the PDH PM pane.
2.
From the PDH PM pane, expand the PDH card on which to run PDH PM.
3.
From the PDH PM pane, select the PDH ports on which to run PDH PM.
4.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.10 shows PM on a PDH port. Figure 67.10 — PDH port PM
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
903
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run PM on an SDH port 1.
From the resource tree area, select the SDH PM pane.
2.
From the SDH PM pane, expand the SDHACC card.
3.
Select the SDH ports on which to run SDH PM.
4.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.11 shows PM on an SDH port. Figure 67.11 — SDH port PM
904
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To run RSL History PM 1.
From the resource tree area, select RSL History.
2.
From the RSL History pane, select a radio port on which to run RSL History PM.
3.
Click Stopped to start the monitoring. Figure 67.12 shows RSL History PM. Figure 67.12 — RSL History PM
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
905
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To create a TCA threshold 1.
From the Toolbar Area, select the Threshold Editor icon. The Threshold Editor window opens; see Figure 67.13. Figure 67.13 — Threshold Editor window
2.
From the Available Thresholds , select the radio PM type tab: SDH PM, PDH PM, Radio PM Hop, or Radio PM Link.
3.
From the Editing Section , select the Measurement Type radio button: 15min (15 min) or 24h (24 h).
4.
From the Editing Section , click Add. A new threshold index is added to the Index Editor .
5.
Update the values for the new threshold index in the Index Editor .
6.
From the NE Commands , click Apply. The new threshold is added to the Available Thresholds .
7.
906
Close the Threshold Editor window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To modify a TCA threshold 1.
Open the Threshold Editor. The Thresholds Editor window opens.
2.
From the Available Thresholds , select the radio PM type tab: SDH PM, PDH PM, Radio PM Hop, or Radio PM Link.
3.
Select the threshold index to modify.
Note: In the SDH PM, E1/DS1 PM and Radio PM Hop threshold tabs, thresholds #1 and #4 are default thresholds. In the Radio PM Link threshold tab, thresholds #1 and #3 are default thresholds. These default thresholds are not editable.
4.
From the Editing Section , click Modify. The threshold index to modify is copied to the Index Editor .
5.
Update the threshold index values in the Index Editor .
6.
From the NE Commands , click Apply. The threshold values are updated in the Available Thresholds .
7.
Close the Thresholds Editor window.
To delete a TCA Threshold 1.
Open the Threshold Editor. The Thresholds Editor window opens.
2.
From the Available Thresholds , select the radio PM tab: Radio PM Hop, or Radio PM Link.
3.
Select the Threshold index to delete.
Note: In the Hop threshold table, thresholds #1 and #4 are default thresholds. In the Link threshold table, thresholds #1 and #3 are default thresholds. These default thresholds cannot be deleted.
4.
From the NE Commands , click Destroy. The threshold is removed from the Available Thresholds .
5.
Close the Threshold Editor window.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
907
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To assign TCA Alarm thresholds to Radio Channels/Link 1.
From the resource tree area, select the Radio PM pane.
2.
From the Radio PM pane, select the radio port to assign a TCA threshold.
3.
In the resource tree area Configuration section, select the following settings in the Assign PM threshold Configuration window; see Figure 67.14. Figure 67.14 — Assign PM threshold Configuration window
908
i.
From the Monitor Point drop-down menu, select Hop Channel#0, Hop Channel#1, or Link.
ii.
From the Collection Period drop-down menu, select 15min or 24h.
iii.
From the Threshold instance drop-down menu, select threshold table # [1/6].
iv.
Click Apply.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
To view PM data 1.
In the resource tree area, select the PM type to view: Ethernet Statistics, Radio PM, Adaptive Modulation PM, PDH PM, SDH PM, or RSL History.
2.
In the resource tree area, select the slot or slot/port for PM to view.
3.
Click Refresh.
To export PM history data 1.
In the resource tree area, select the unit for which to export PM data.
2.
Click Export. The Save dialog box appears.
3.
Navigate to the directory to save PM history data.
4.
Click Open. The Export dialog box appears.
5.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
909
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
910
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
68 — Perform protection switching
68.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the instructions to perform Protection Switching for the 9500 MPR. Protection switching is available for equipment/radio channel entities when correctly equipped and configured.
68.2 — Equipment Protection Switching Equipment Protection Switching (EPS) is used to provide protection for services implemented on equipment. EPS protection is ed on Core card, P32E1DS1 card, P2E3DS3 card, and SDHACC card. Core 1+1 EPS protection s three different types of protection, control platform protection, external synchronization interface protection, and traffic/services protection. Core 1+1 EPS traffic/services protection is ed when the following two conditions are satisfied: •
Both Core cards, main (slot 1) and spare (slot 2), send their signals to all peripherals
•
Each peripheral selects the signal coming from the Active Core card and ignores the signal from the Standby Core card.
P32E1DS1 card, P2E3DS3 card, SDHACC, and P8ETH and EASv2 radio 1+1 EPS traffic/ services protection switching is ed when main (slots 3, 5, and/or 7) and spare (slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively) are correctly equipped and configured. Note: The PDH 1+1 EPS protection type is not-revertive and can’t be changed.
Note: The SDH 1+1 EPS protection type is not-revertive and can’t be changed.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
911
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Rx Radio Protection Switching
Note: For radios configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, EPS protection switching criteria provisioning is not ed. the restoration criteria selected for HSB-TPS is applied to EPS automatically.
MPTACC radio cards 1+1 EPS traffic/services protection switching when main (slots 3, 5, and/or 7) and spare (slots 4, 6, and/or 8 respectively) are correctly equipped and configured. Up to two 1+1 EPS protection pairs can be configured in this configuration. Two MPTACC radio ports on the same MPTACC card 1+1 EPS traffic/services protection switching when both MPT Access ports are correctly equipped and configured on the same MPTACC radio card. One 1+1 EPS protection pair can be configured per MPTACC card. The system behavior for the Transmit flow (traffic flow from traffic/services cards to Core card) on a local access traffic/services card is as follows: •
Both traffic/services cards (main and spare) receives the signal from patch . The Active traffic/services card sends its own signals to both Core cards (main and spare).
•
The Standby traffic/services card does not send traffic (that is, link is up but active traffic/packets are not carried).
•
Each Core (main and spare) selects the signal coming from the traffic/services card declared Active. Each Core ignores anything coming from the Standby traffic/ services card
The system behavior for the Receive flow (traffic flow from Core card to traffic/services cards) on a local access traffic/services card is as follows: •
Both Core cards (Active and Standby) sends its own signal to the traffic/services cards (main and spare). The Active traffic/services card sends its own signals to both Core cards (main and spare).
•
The traffic/services cards (main and spare) selects the signal declared as Active.
•
Each traffic/services card (main and spare) ignores anything coming from the Standby Core
68.3 — Rx Radio Protection Switching Rx Radio Protection Switching (RPS) provides protection for a working radio channel. This type of protection is performed by switching a working channel to a protection section when the working section fails or when its performance falls below the required level.
912
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Hot StandBy protection switching
RPS is available in all 1+1 radio direction configurations in single-ended mode (the switching is complete when the working channel in the failed direction is switched to the protection section). When the protection type is 1+1 at the source end, the normal traffic signal is transmitted simultaneously on both working and protection channels and the receiving end monitors the condition of the two traffic signals received and selects the better (connected to the appropriate signal). For RPS, the Active Radio Channel signal is sent to both MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceivers frame managers.
68.4 — Hot StandBy protection switching Transmission protection switching (HSB) provides protection to a radio transmission channel where transmission is implemented on two MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceivers. This protection is performed by switching the main radio transmission MPT-HL/HLC/HC/ XP Transceiver cards ing the protected radio transmission channel to spare (protecting) radio transmission MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver cards capable of ing the same service when a failure is present (equipment failure).
68.5 — Protection switching schemes per configurations The following configurations the listed protection switching types: •
1+1 Frequency Diversity: s RPS and EPS protection switching. Radio Protection Configuration, two MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver cards, two different frequencies, no coupler/relay
•
1+1 HSB: s RPS, HSB, and EPS protection switching. Radio Protection Configuration, two MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver cards, same frequency, one coupler/relay
•
1+1 HSB s RPS, HSB and EPS protection switching. Radio Protection Configuration with Space Diversity, two MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver cards, same frequency, one coupler/relay
•
1+0 Unprotected Radio Configuration s no protection switching protection. Radio configuration, single MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver card
•
For the local traffic/services cards P32E1DS1 (DS1), P2E3DS3 (DS3), SDHACC (OC-3), Core-E (Ethernet) s 1+1 EPS protection switching
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
913
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Protection switching commands
68.6 — Protection switching commands To enter the Commands menu, click on either the Spare #0 element in the Tree view or on the Main #1 element. On the Main#1 channel, the available commands are Manual and Forced (only Forced for Core protection). On the Spare#0 channel the available commands are Manual and Lockout (only Lockout for Core protection). See Table 68.1 for a list of protection switch commands and their priority. Table 68.1 — Command priority list Command
Priority
ed Channel
Lockout
1 (highest)
Spare (Channel #0)
Forced
2
Main (Channel #1)
Automatic Switch
3
Main (Channel #1) Spare (Channels #0
Manual
4 (lowest)
Lockout has a higher priority than Forced and automatic switch commands: the activation of this command forces in service Channel 1, independent of the possible active alarms or standing Forced switch command. This command activates signaling ABN. Forced has a higher priority than an automatic switch command: the activation of this command forces in service Channel 0, independent of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN. Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commands generated by the logic. Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling ABN. Table 68.1 Command priority list, The “Forced” command for channel 1 is equivalent to the “Lockout” command for channel 0. In both cases, the result is that the relevant channel protection path is forced to standby status.
914
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Caution: Protection switching traffic will cause a hit to traffic.
68.7 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Protection Schemes tab
•
To perform a Forced Switch on the Main Core card
•
To perform a Lockout on the Spare Core Card
•
To release a Switch on a Core Card
•
To perform a Forced EPS Switch on the Main card
•
To perform a Manual EPS Switch from Main to Spare
•
To perform a Manual EPS Switch from Spare to Main
•
To perform a Lockout on the EPS Spare
•
To release an EPS Switch
•
To perform a Forced HSB Switch on the Main Radio Channel
•
To perform a Manual HSB Switch from the Main to Spare Radio Channel
•
To perform a Manual HSB Switch from the Spare to Main Radio Channel
•
To perform a Lockout on the HSB Spare Radio Channel
•
To Release an HSB Switch
•
To perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch on the Main Radio Channel
•
To perform a Manual Rx Radio Switch from the Main to the Spare Radio Channel
•
To perform a Manual Rx Radio Switch from the Spare to the Main Radio Channel
•
To perform a Lockout on the Rx Radio Spare Radio Channel
•
To release an Rx Radio Switch
To open the Protection Schemes tab 1.
From the Main View, select Protection Schemes Tab. The Protection Schemes tab displays. See Figure 68.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
915
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.1 — Protection Schemes tab
To perform a Forced Switch on the Main Core card Caution: Forced switching the Core will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Main Core card in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.2.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Forced.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
916
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.2 — Forced Switch Main Core-E to Spare Core-E
To perform a Lockout on the Spare Core Card 1.
Select Spare Core card in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.3.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Lockout.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
917
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.3 — Lockout Spare Core-E Card
To release a Switch on a Core Card Caution: Releasing Forced switch Core will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Main or Spare Core card in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.4.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select None.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
918
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.4 — Release Switch Core-E
To perform a Forced EPS Switch on the Main card Caution: Forced EPS switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Equipment Protection/Main#1 in the resource tree area. Figure 68.5.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Forced.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
919
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.5 — Forced Equipment Switch Main to Spare
To perform a Manual EPS Switch from Main to Spare Caution: Manual EPS switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Equipment Protection/Main#1 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.6.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Manual.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
920
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.6 — Manual Equipment Switch: Main to Spare
To perform a Manual EPS Switch from Spare to Main Caution: Manual EPS switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Equipment Protection/Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.7.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Manual.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
921
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.7 — Manual Equipment Switch: Spare to Main
To perform a Lockout on the EPS Spare 1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Equipment Protection/Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.8.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Lockout.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
922
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.8 — Lockout Equipment Switch: Lockout Switch to Spare
To release an EPS Switch Caution: Forced EPS switch equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Equipment Protection/Main#1 or Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.9.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select None.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
923
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.9 — Release EPS Switch
To perform a Forced HSB Switch on the Main Radio Channel Caution: Forced HSB switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/HSB Protection/Main#1 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.10.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Forced.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
924
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.10 — Forced HSB Switch Main Radio Channel
To perform a Manual HSB Switch from the Main to Spare Radio Channel Caution: Forced HSB switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/HSB Protection/Main#1 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.11.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Manual.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
925
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.11 — Manual HSB Switch: Main Radio Channel to Spare Radio Channel
To perform a Manual HSB Switch from the Spare to Main Radio Channel Caution: Manual HSB switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/HSB Protection/Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.12.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Manual.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
926
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.12 — Manual HSB Switch: Spare Radio Channel to Main Radio Channel
To perform a Lockout on the HSB Spare Radio Channel 1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/HSB Protection/Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.13.
2.
On the Commands tab, select Lockout in the New Value drop-down menu.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
927
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.13 — Lockout HSB Switch: Lockout Spare Radio Channel
To Release an HSB Switch Caution: Releasing Forced HSB switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/HSB Protection/Main#1 or Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.14.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select None.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
928
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.14 — Release HSB Switch
To perform a Forced Rx Radio Switch on the Main Radio Channel Caution: Forced Rx Radio switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Rx Radio Protection/Main#1 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.15.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Forced.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
929
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.15 — Forced Rx Radio Switch: Main Radio Channel
To perform a Manual Rx Radio Switch from the Main to the Spare Radio Channel Caution: Manual Rx Radio switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Rx Radio Protection/Main#1 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.16.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Manual.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
930
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.16 — Manual Rx Radio Switch: Main Radio Channel to Spare Radio Channel
To perform a Manual Rx Radio Switch from the Spare to the Main Radio Channel Caution: Manual Rx Radio switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Rx Radio Protection/Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.17.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Manual.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
931
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.17 — Manual Rx Radio Switch: Spare Radio Channel to Main Radio Channel
To perform a Lockout on the Rx Radio Spare Radio Channel 1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Rx Radio Protection/Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.18.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select Lockout.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
932
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.18 — Lockout Rx Radio Switch Spare Radio Channel
To release an Rx Radio Switch Caution: Releasing Rx Radio switching equipment will cause a hit to traffic.
1.
Select Protection Schemes/Slot#/Rx Radio Protection/Main#1 or Spare#0 in the resource tree area. See Figure 68.19.
2.
On the Commands tab, from the New Value drop-down menu, select None.
3.
Click Apply. The Switch confirmation window displays.
4.
Click OK.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
933
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 68.19 — Release Rx Radio Switch
934
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
69 — Perform radio power measurements
69.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to perform Radio Power Measurements for the 9500 MPR.
69.2 — Procedure To perform radio power measurements 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click on the MPT-HC, MPT-MC, MPT-HC-HQAM, MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, MPT-HLS, MPT-XP, or MPT-XPHQAM Transceiver to perform radio power measurements. The main view for the selected radio direction opens.
2.
Select Measurements tab. See Figure 69.1 and Figure 69.2.
3.
Select Channel # to perform radio power measurements.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
935
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 69.1 — Radio Power Measurement window
936
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 69.2 — Radio Power Measurement window for MPT-HLC
4.
In the Measurement Interval area, enter the measurement duration in Days, Hours, and Minutes.
5.
From the Sample Time (sec) drop-down menu, select sample time.
6.
Click Start. The radio power measurement graphical view opens. See Figure 69.3. The radio power measurement tabular view opens. See Figure 69.4. Note: The following figures show an MPT-HLC with a combiner and branching loss values set. Not all fields will be displayed with a different radio or configuration.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
937
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 69.3 — Radio Power Measurement: graphical view
Figure 69.4 — Radio Power Measurement: tabular view
7.
938
Click Close.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
70 — Radio Facing Circuit Loopback
70.1 — Purpose This chapter provides instructions to perform Radio Facing Circuit Loopback for the 9500 MPR.
70.1.1 — General Radio Facing Circuit Loopback mode uses the receive data interface signal on the MPTHC/MC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM Transceiver and replaces the signal to be transmitted by the MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM or MPT-HLC/HLS Transceiver and sends the receive signal back to the far-end Transceiver. This is an external loopback. Radio Facing Circuit Loopback is only possible to enable on the aggregate traffic. This loopback is a Loop and Continue. Transmit traffic will be dropped. When this loopback is activated the expected behavior is as follows: •
•
TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH flows are forwarded back to Core card with source and destination MAC addresses swapped. •
For TDM2ETH flows, where the ECID Tx and ECID Rx are the same value, the loopback works.
•
For TDM2ETH flows, where the ECID Tx is different form ECID Rx, the loopback fails.
Generic Ethernet flows are dropped.
Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
939
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
70.2 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To activate a Radio Facing Circuit Loopback
•
To deactivate a Radio Facing Circuit Loopback
To activate a Radio Facing Circuit Loopback 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click the Transceiver radio icon to perform Radio Facing Circuit Loopback. See Figure 70.1. Figure 70.1 — Main Equipment Window: Radio icon highlighted
The main view for the selected radio direction opens. 2.
940
Select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 70.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 70.2 — Radio Maintenance tab
3.
Select the Radio Facing - External radio button in the Loopback area.
4.
Select the Active radio button in the Activation area.
5.
Enter the Timeout (days, hours, minutes) in the Timeout fields.
6.
Click on the Apply button. Radio Facing Circuit Loopback is established.
To deactivate a Radio Facing Circuit Loopback 1.
In the main equipment window, open the appropriate radio main view and select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 70.2.
2.
Select Radio Facing - External in the Loopback area.
3.
Select the Not Active radio-button in the Activation area.
4.
Click on the Apply button. Radio Facing Circuit Loopback is deactivated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
941
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
942
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
71 — RF Core Facing Loopback
71.1 — Purpose This chapter provides procedures to perform RF Core Facing Loopback for the MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT-HLS Transceiver.
71.2 — General An RF Core Facing loopback is used to help isolate a problem on the RF path. With the MPT-HL, two methods are available, transmit and receive. The transmit RF Core Facing loopback is used at the transmit site of the path to isolate the transmitter from possible path and receiver problems. The receive RF Core Facing loopback is used at the receive site of the path to isolate the receiver from possible transmitter and path problems. With the MPT-HLC/HLS, only the receive loopback is available. A transmit RF Core Facing loopback is enabled by the configuring the RX frequency to the same value as the TX frequency, allowing the receiver at the transmit site to use the TX RF signal of the path. Transmit RF Core Facing loopback is only ed at TX frequencies that are within the allowed RX frequency range of the transceiver. This loopback routes the TX RF signal to the Rx RF. Receive RF Core Facing loopback is only ed at RX frequencies that are within the allowed TX frequency range of the transceiver. It is possible to enable this loopback only on the aggregate traffic. This loopback will be a Loop and Continue with the MPT-HLC/HLS. It is not a Loop and Continue with the MPTHL. With both radios, the loopback will block the normal receive traffic.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
943
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
A RF Core Facing loopback may require an external connection for some modem profiles. Without an external connection, the RF loopback is dependent on internal leakage in the transceiver. This leakage varies between units and also with operating frequency. The leakage is sufficient that the loopback will work with the lowest capacity profiles without an external connection. It may be sufficient to work with other profiles, but this is not guaranteed. If an external connection is required, an attenuator is required as part of the external connection, typically 60 dB. Due to the unlimited number of combinations of system configurations possible, the basic RF diplexer filter is shown. See Figure 71.1. The RF diplexer filter can be mounted with the antenna port facing up or down. The TX port facing up or down. The main RX port facing up or down. The spare RX port facing up, down, or on the side. The TX port and RX port are always centered on the RF filter. The spare RX port is always off-set. The RF filter shown in Figure 71.1 has the antenna port, TX port, and main RX port facing up and the spare RX port facing down. For additional information on RF filter configurations, refer to Diplexer Filter Positions contained in 9500 MPR-A MSS and MPT-HL Shelf Assembly Manufacturing Drawing, found in Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR-A Engineering Documentation. To system functionality, insert a test signal (E1, DS1 or DS3) into one of the provisioned ports (for example, slot 5, DS1 port 22) and monitor the same port (for example, slot 5, DS1 port 22) for error-free operation. The following constraints apply to all loopbacks: •
Link Identifier must be disabled before a loopback is activated
•
ECID Tx = ECID Rx for TDM2ETH
The following additional constraints apply to Core Facing @RF - Internal loopbacks for MPT-HLC/HLS: •
The loopback is guaranteed in RTPC only
•
With a diversity combiner active, squelch the diversity receiver
•
With XPIC enabled, mute the remote XPIC transmitter in order to avoid interference on the associated XPIC polarization
•
In 1+1HSB configuration, apply an RPS Lockout/forced switch to the same channel where the loopback will be activated
RF Core Facing loopback is not ed on the 11 GHz Transceivers. The 11 GHz Transceiver variants do not currently an overlap of the TX and RX ranges. This prevents being able to perform an RF Core Facing loopback. •
944
3EM23888AB: Tx Frequency (10,700 - 11,200 MHz), Rx Frequency (11,200 11,700 MHz)
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
•
3EM23888AC: Tx Frequency (11,200 - 11,700 MHz), Rx Frequency (10,700 11,200 MHz)
Caution: Possibility of Service interruption. RF Core Facing loopback is an out of service procedure. Schedule a maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
Figure 71.1 — RF Filter Port detail
71.3 — Procedure This section provides the following procedures: •
To open the Radio Maintenance view
•
To activate a Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback
•
To deactivate a Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback
•
To activate a Receive RF Core Facing Loopback
•
To deactivate a Receive RF Core Facing Loopback
•
To activate an MPT-HLC/HLS Core Facing @RF - Internal Loopback
•
To deactivate an MPT-HLC/HLS Core Facing @RF - Internal Loopback Caution: RF Core Facing loopback is an out of service procedure. Schedule a maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
Note: RF Core Facing loopback is not ed on the 11 GHz Transceivers (Alcatel-Lucent P/N: 3EM23888AB and 3EM23888AC).
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
945
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure To open the Radio Maintenance view 1.
In the main equipment window, double-click on the radio icon to perform Core Facing Loopback. See Figure 71.2. Figure 71.2 — Main Equipment Window: Radio icon highlighted
The main view for the selected radio direction opens. 2.
946
Select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 71.3.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure Figure 71.3 — Maintenance tab (MPT-HLC shown)
To activate a Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback 1.
Activate Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback using the following procedure. See Figure 71.3. a.
Record the current Shifter (MHz) value.
b.
Record the current RX Freq(KHz) value.
c.
TXMute the local MPT-HL Transceiver cards, position the TXMute switch to the OFF position (PA switch set to ‘0’).
d.
Using the craft terminal, TXMute the far-end MPT-HL Transceiver cards.
e.
Select Custom as the new Shifter (MHz) value.
f.
Click on the Apply button.
g.
Set the RX Freq(KHz) to the same value as the TX Freq(KHz) value.
h.
Click on the Apply button.
i.
Release TXMute on the local MPT-HL Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the ON position (PA switch set to ‘1’).
The loopback should be active. If no loopback is active, error-free operation on the test signal, then an external connection on the filter will be required. 2.
Is RF Core Facing loopback active?
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
947
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
a.
If yes, the procedure is complete.
b.
If no, then go to step 3.
Note: For transceivers ing the 11 GHz channel plan, the RF filter must be removed and the connections must be made directly to the MPT-HL shelf connectors.
3.
TXMute the local MPT-HL Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the OFF position (PA switch set to ‘0’).
4.
Install external RF loopback connection on the RF filter. See Figure 71.1.
5.
a.
Connect a coaxial cable to the main antenna connector.
b.
Connect the other end of the coaxial cable to a 60 dB attenuator.
c.
Connect a second coaxial cable to the other end of the attenuator.
d.
Connect the other end of the second coaxial cable to the main or spare Rx connector.
Release TXMute on the local MPT-HL Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the ON position (PA switch set to ‘1’). The loopback should be active, error-free operation on the test signal. When the loopback is not active is an indication a problem exists on the transmit portion of the path.
To deactivate a Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback 1.
Set the RX Freq(KHz) to the value recorded in To activate a Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback.
2.
Click Apply.
3.
Set the Shifter (MHz) to the value recorded in To activate a Transmit RF Core Facing Loopback.
4.
Click Apply.
5.
Was external RF loopback connection installed? a.
If yes, then go to step 6.
b.
If no, then go to step 9.
6.
TXMute the local MPT-HL Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the OFF position (PA switch set to ‘0’).
7.
Remove external RF loopback connection on the RF filter. See Figure 71.1.
8.
Connect the coaxial connections removed during step 4.
9.
Release TXMute on the local MPT-HL Transceiver cards, position the TXMute switch to the ON position (PA switch set to ‘1’).
10.
Using the craft terminal, release TXMute the far-end MPT-HL Transceiver cards.
To activate a Receive RF Core Facing Loopback 1.
948
Activate Receive RF Core Facing Loopback using the following procedure. See Figure 71.3. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
a.
Record the current Shifter (MHz) value.
b.
Record the current TX Freq(KHz) value.
c.
TXMute the local MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver cards, position the TXMute switch to the OFF position (PA switch set to ‘0’).
d.
Using the craft terminal, TXMute the far-end MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver cards.
e.
Select Custom as the new Shifter (MHz) value.
f.
Click Apply.
g.
Set the TX Freq(KHz) to the same value as the RX Freq(KHz) value.
h.
Click Apply.
i.
Release TXMute on the local MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the ON position (PA switch set to ‘1’).
The loopback should be active. If no loopback is active, error-free operation on the test signal, an external connection on the filter will be required. 2.
Is RF Core Facing loopback active? a.
If yes, the procedure is complete.
b.
If no, then go to step 3.
Note: For transceivers ing the 11 GHz channel plan, the RF filter must be removed and the connections must be made directly to the MPT-HL/HLC/ shelf connectors.
3.
TXMute the local MPT-HL/HLC Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the OFF position (PA switch set to ‘0’).
4.
Install external RF loopback connection on the RF filter. See Figure 71.1.
5.
a.
Connect a coaxial cable to the main antenna connector.
b.
Connect the other end of the coaxial cable to a 60 dB attenuator.
c.
Connect a second coaxial cable to the other end of the attenuator.
d.
Connect the other end of the second coaxial cable to the main or spare Tx connector.
Release TXMute on the local MPT-HL/HLC/ Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the ON position (PA switch set to ‘1’). The loopback should be active, error-free operation on the test signal. When the loopback is not active, it is an indication a problem exists on the receive portion of the path.
To deactivate a Receive RF Core Facing Loopback 1.
Set the TX Freq(KHz) to the value recorded in To activate a Receive RF Core Facing Loopback.
2.
Click Apply.
3.
Set the Shifter (MHz) to the value recorded in To activate a Receive RF Core Facing Loopback.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
949
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
4.
Click Apply.
5.
Was external RF loopback connection installed? a.
If yes, then go to step 6.
b.
If no, then go to step 9.
6.
TXMute the local MPT-HL/HLC/ Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the OFF position (PA switch set to ‘0’).
7.
Remove external RF loopback connection on the RF filter. See Figure 71.1.
8.
Connect the coaxial connections removed during step 3.
9.
Release TXMute on the local MPT-HL/HLC/ Transceiver card under test, position the TXMute switch to the ON position (PA switch set to ‘1’).
10.
Using the craft terminal, release TXMute the far-end MPT-HL/HLC/ Transceiver cards.
To activate an MPT-HLC/HLS Core Facing @RF - Internal Loopback 1.
Open the appropriate main view for the configuration and select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 71.4. Figure 71.4 — Radio Maintenance tab
2.
Activate Core Facing@RF - Internal Loopback using the following procedure: a.
950
Open the appropriate main view for the configuration and select the Settings tab. See Figure 71.4.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
b.
Record the current Tx Power value.
c.
Set the Tx Power value to the maximum level.
d.
In 1+1 HSB configuration, apply an RPS Lockout/forced switch to the channel where the loopback will be activated.
e.
If XPIC is active, mute the remote transmitter.
f.
Select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 71.3.
g.
If the diversity combiner is active, squelch the diversity receiver.
h.
Select the Core Facing@RF - Internal radio button.
i.
Select the Active radio-button in the Activation area.
j.
Enter time out period (days, hours, minutes) in the Timeout Period (max 4 days) fields. At the end of this period the loopback will automatically be deactivated.
k.
Click on the Apply button.
The loopback should be active. To deactivate an MPT-HLC/HLS Core Facing @RF - Internal Loopback 1.
Open the appropriate main view for the configuration and select the Settings tab. See Figure 71.4.
2.
Set the Tx Power to the value recorded in step 2 b.
3.
Click on the Apply button.
4.
Select the Maintenance tab. See Figure 71.3.
5.
Select the Not Active radio button in the Activation field.
6.
Click on the Apply button. The Loopback is now deactivated.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
951
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
952
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
72 — ister SDH LAG
72.1 — Purpose This chapter provides detailed procedures to ister drop priority of SDH crossconnections on L1 Radio LAG ports. For more information about SDH2SDH flows with L1 LAG on EASv2, see the AlcatelLucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual. For information about configuring crossconnections, see Provision cross connections. In the ANSI market, this feature is only available with the MPT-HLC.
72.2 — General If the LAG rate has dropped to less than the bandwidth required by the SDH flows, all the cross-connected SDH flows could be affected by congestion and frame loss. To avoid this, a subset of the SDH2SDH flows cross-connected to the LAG is dropped. The drop priority value of a flow defines the minimum LAG bandwidth required to the flow. An SDH flow with a drop priority of 255 will be the first to be subject to the selective drop, as soon as the LAG rate is not enough to transmit all the SDH flows connected to the LAG. An SDH flow with a drop priority of 1 will be the last to be subject to the selective drop. When a cross-connection is created, the default drop priority of the flow is 255. It is possible to configure different drop priority values for each flow. This will allow the available LAG bandwidth to be used to transport as many cross-connected SDH flows as possible. If the same drop priority value is assigned to more than one SDH flow, the drop priority defines the minimum LAG bandwidth required to transport all SDH flows with that drop priority. If the same flow is cross-connected on the other side of the LAG or in a forwarding path, the drop priority should be configured the same in each NE.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
953
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
72.3 — Procedure 1.
Click on the SDH LAG button in the LAG Configuration screen. The SDH LAG screen opens; see Figure 72.1. Figure 72.1 — SDH LAG screen
954
2.
Select the LAG from the SDH LAG List .
3.
In the SDH Flows priority management , double click on the Drop Priority cell.
4.
Enter the new value and press Enter. The required bandwidth for the drop priority appears in the SDH Flows Threshold pane.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
73 — Upgrade and downgrade protection
73.1 — Purpose These procedures describe how to upgrade and downgrade protection configuration on the 9500 MPR system.
73.2 — General The protection upgrade and downgrade procedures provide the general steps and sequence required to change protection scheme. The number of possible configuration scenarios prevents covering all upgrade and downgrade possibilities.
73.2.1 — PDH protection PDH protection upgrade applies when converting from 1+0 not protected to 1+1 EPS protection configuration. PDH protection downgrade applies when converting from 1+1 EPS protection to 1+0 not protected configuration.
73.2.2 — Radio protection Radio protection upgrade applies when converting from 1+0 not protected to 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or FD radio protection configuration. Note: With MPT-MC only the 1+1 HSB configuration is available.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
955
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
Radio protection downgrade applies when converting from 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or FD protection to 1+0 not protected radio configuration. Radio protection downgrade requires a power cycle of the NE. There are no steps included to for the required changes to the MPT-HL shelf diplexer configuration or outside plant configuration, such as ODU/antenna configuration, RF coupler, waveguide, and grounding. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual for information about installation and cabling for radio protection.
73.2.3 — Modulation scheme The modulation scheme conversion applies when converting from static to adaptive radio profile and the reverse. To change modulation scheme, ATPC must be disabled, radio configuration must be 1+0 not protected, and license key must adaptive modulation. Converting from static to adaptive radio profile, all existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections must be ed by the lowest adaptive modulation profile (4 QAM). When all existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are ed by the lowest adaptive modulation profile (4 QAM), all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are kept and the residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM and TEM2ETH cross-connections will be recomputed. When all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections can not be ed by the lowest adaptive modulation profile (4 QAM), the request to change modulation scheme is rejected. Some existing TDM2TDM and/or TEM2ETH cross-connections must be deleted to achieve a bandwidth which is ed by the lowest adaptive modulation profile. Converting from adaptive to static radio profile, the new static radio profile is the one that corresponds to the largest ed radio profile configured (16 QAM or 64 QAM). all existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are preserved and the residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM or TEM2ETH cross-connections are recalculated. All cards can be removed and installed with power applied. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual to determine card location and type.
956
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
73.3 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To upgrade Core 1+0 to 1+1 EPS protection configuration
•
To downgrade Core 1+1 EPS to 1+0 not protected configuration
•
To upgrade PDH 1+0 to 1+1 EPS protection configuration
•
To downgrade PDH 1+1 EPS to 1+0 not protected configuration
•
To upgrade 1+0 to 1+1 protected radio configuration
•
To downgrade 1+1 to 1+0 not protected radio configuration
•
To upgrade fixed modulation to adaptive modulation configuration
•
To downgrade adaptive modulation to fixed modulation configuration Danger: Circuit packs can be installed or removed with bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use extreme care when installing or removing circuit packs with power on. Warning: The following warnings apply: • Circuit packs contain static-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by static discharge. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual for special handling instructions. • When installing a plug-in, ensure its backplane connector is correctly engaged before applying sufficient pressure to bring the plug-in flush with the front . Improper alignment can result in damaged pins on the backplane connector and/or damage to the plug-in connector. • Plug-ins must be withdrawn and inserted using their finger-grip fastener pulls. Never withdraw or insert using attached cables. Pulling on the cables may damage the cable, plug-in connector, and/or plug-in card connector attachment.
To upgrade Core 1+0 to 1+1 EPS protection configuration 1.
If a CorEvo card is in use, that the card has a μSD version with CorEvo protection available. Perform the following for each CorEvo card: •
to WebCT and run the Show Genesys Version command from the Debug Info page. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR WebCT Manual for details.
•
that the version is V1.0.14 or greater. If the version number is not V1.0.14 or greater, the μSD must be replaced with a new R6.1.0 μSD before CorEvo protection can be configured. See the Release Notice for R6.1.0 for μSD card part numbers, and the AlcatelLucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual for the procedure to replace flash cards.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
957
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Caution: If Core protection is set up with a version before V1.0.14, the card may become corrupted after a protection switch.
2.
On the CT settings window, enable the spare Core card in slot 2.
3.
Install the spare Core card in spare slot 2.
4.
Connect the necessary cables to spare the card that you installed in step 3.
5.
Wait 30 minutes for the Core cards to align and for the Status LED on the spare card to turn yellow.
6.
Provision the Equipment Protection Schemes parameter; see Provision protection scheme parameters.
To downgrade Core 1+1 EPS to 1+0 not protected configuration 1.
that the main Core card is active. If needed, perform a forced switch to the main Core card; see Perform protection switching.
2.
On the CT settings window, set the spare Core card equipment type to Empty.
3.
Disconnect the cables from the spare Core card.
4.
Remove the spare Core card from slot 2.
To upgrade PDH 1+0 to 1+1 EPS protection configuration 1.
Install spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card in spare slot 4, 6, or 8 associated with main P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card. An Unconfigured Equipment Present alarm displays.
2.
Connect the DS1 or DS3 cables to spare the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card that you installed in step 1.
3.
On CT settings window, enable the spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card that you installed in step 1.
4.
On CT settings window, configure the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 cards for 1+1 EPS protection type.
Note: To complete the 1+1 EPS protection, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address affected by this system upgrade, must be changed from ‘unicast’ to ‘multicast’ at the remote NEs.
5.
Reprovision all of the TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address from ‘unicast’ to ‘multicast’ at the remote NEs. For more information about how to configure cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To downgrade PDH 1+1 EPS to 1+0 not protected configuration Caution: Downgrading from 1+1 EPS to 1+0 Not protected configuration is an In-Service procedure. all traffic including sync source must be Active on the main PDH card before starting this procedure.
1.
958
On CT settings window, set the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 cards protection type to No Protection. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
2.
On CT settings window, set the spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card equipment type to Empty.
3.
Disconnect the DS1 or DS3 cables from spare the P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card.
4.
Remove the spare P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 card in spare slot 4, 6, or 8.
Note: To complete the downgrade to 1+0 Not Protected configuration, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address affected by this system downgrade, must be changed from ‘multicast’ to ‘unicast’ at the remote NEs.
5.
Reprovision all of the affected TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address from ‘multicast’ to ‘unicast’ at the remote NEs. For more information about how to configure cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To upgrade 1+0 to 1+1 protected radio configuration Caution: This is an In-Service but not a hitless procedure.
Caution: RPS cable is mandatory with MPT-HC-HQAM or MPT-XP-HQAM in 1+1 configuration when channel spacing is higher than 30 MHz and the HQAM radio is not MPT-HC compatible. A warning dialog box appears when this configuration is set up. Note: To achieve expected radio operation the upgrade from 1+0 not protected to 1+1 protected radio configuration must be performed at both ends of the radio hop.
1.
For a MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver radio connected to an EASv2 or P8ETH card, a second EASv2 or P8ETH card must be installed in the adjacent slot if not already equipped. Install the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver in slot 2 of the MPT-HL shelf. For a MPT-HLC/HLS transceiver radio connected to a Core-E card port 5 or MSS-1 shelf port 5, port 6 must be available to the spare transceiver. For MPT-HLC, install the spare transceiver in slot 2 of the MPT-HL/HLC shelf. For a MPT-HLC/HLS transceiver radio connected to a CorEvo card port 7, port 8 must be available to the spare transceiver. For MPT-HLC, install the transceiver in slot 2 of the MPT-HL/HLC shelf. For MPT ODU radio that is equipped with a MPTACC card, the spare radio hop is ed on port 2 of the same MPTACC card or from an MPTACC card installed in adjacent slot to the main MPTACC card, slots 4, 6, or 8. Install the MPTACC as required, as described in the site documentation. For MPT ODU radio connected to an EASv2 optical port equipped in slot 3, 5, or 7, a second EASv2 card must be installed in the adjacent slot 4, 6, or 8 if not already equipped.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
959
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
For MPT ODU radio connected to a Core-E card port 5 or MSS-1 shelf port 5, port 6 must be available to the spare MPT ODU radio. For MPT ODU radio connected to a CorEvo card port 7, port 8 must be available to the spare MPT ODU radio. 2.
Install the appropriate radio/transport card in adjacent slot 4, 6, or 8 that is associated with main radio direction. An Unconfigured Equipment Present condition is raised.
3.
On the CT settings window, enable the card as required. Enable the appropriate radio, MPT ODU/MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver that you installed in step 2.
4.
On the CT settings window, configure the radio direction protection type as 1+1 HSB(SD) or 1+1 FD. Local station and remote station observes 2 second sync loss.
5.
Connect the new radio direction cables to the spare radio card that you installed in step 2, as described in the site documentation.
6.
a.
For a radio that is equipped with MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver, install the SFP into the appropriate Core-E/EASv2/P8ETH/MSS-1 SFP port and the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver SFP port. Connect the fiber optic cable between the SFP port and MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver SFP port. Connect the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver power cable, as described in the site documentation.
b.
For a MPT ODU radio that is equipped with a Core-E/EASv2/MPTACC/ MSS-1, connect the radio cables, as described in the site documentation (optical Ethernet and power coaxial cable, electrical Ethernet and power coaxial cable, or electrical Ethernet W/PFoE connectivity).
If radio protection is configured as 1+1 FD, configure the spare radio direction.
Caution: If unexpected radio alarms are present on the radio channel associated with protection upgrade, a system restart is required to clear the alarms.
Caution: Performing a system restart to clear unexpected radio alarms causes disruption to traffic.
Note: To complete the 1+1 radio protection, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address affected by this system upgrade, must be changed from ‘unicast’ to ‘multicast’ at the remote NEs.
7.
Reprovision all of the affected TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address from ‘unicast’ to ‘multicast’ at the remote NEs. For more information about how to configure cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To downgrade 1+1 to 1+0 not protected radio configuration Caution: Downgrading from 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or FD to 1+0 configuration is an Out-Of-Service procedure. All traffic including sync source must be Active on the main channel before starting this procedure.
960
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Caution: Downgrading from 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or FD to 1+0 configuration is an Out-Of-Service procedure. To complete the downgrade procedure, the NE must be power cycled off and back on again. The power cycle takes approximately 15 minutes complete. Note: To achieve expected radio operation the downgrade from 1+1 protected to 1+0 not protected radio configuration must be performed at both ends of the radio hop.
1.
On CT settings window for radio channel, enable the Local Tx Mute for channel #1 and #0.
2.
On CT settings window, set the radio channel protection type to No Protection.
3.
On CT settings window for radio channel, disable the Local Tx Mute for channel #1 only.
4.
Disconnect the channel#0 radio direction cables to the spare radio cards. a.
For a radio that is equipped with a MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver, disconnect the fiber optic cable between the SFP port and MPT-HL transceiver, as described in the site documentation.
b.
For a MPT ODU radio that is equipped with a Core-E/EASv2/MPTACC/ MSS-1, disconnect the radio cables, as described in the site documentation (optical Ethernet and power coaxial cable, electrical Ethernet and power coaxial cable, or electrical Ethernet W/PFoE connectivity).
Note: In the case of 1+1 FD configuration, local AIS will remain active throughout remainder of the procedure.
5.
On CT settings window, set the radio direction equipment type to Empty.
6.
Remove the appropriate radio/transport card as described in the site documentation. a.
For an MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver radio, remove the appropriate Core-E/ EASv2/P8ETH/MSS-1 SFP port as described in the site documentation. Remove the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver SFP. Remove the MPT-HL/ MPT-HLC transceiver in slot 2 of the MPT-HL shelf.
b.
For an MPT ODU radio direction that was ed with a EASv2/MPTACC, remove the EASv2/MPTACC ONLY if described in the site documentation.
7. Caution: Downgrading from 1+1 HSB, HSB SD, or FD to 1+0 configuration is an Out-Of-Service procedure. To complete the downgrade procedure the NE must be power cycled off and back on again. The power cycle takes approximately 15 minutes complete.
Power down and then power up the NE. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Alarm Clearing Manual for information about the power cycles of the NE.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
961
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
Note: To complete the downgrade to 1+0 radio configuration, all TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address affected by this system downgrade, must be changed from ‘multicast’ to ‘unicast’ at the remote NEs.
8.
Reprovision all of the affected TDM2ETH and TDM2TDM cross-connections MAC address from ‘multicast’ to ‘unicast’ at the remote NEs. For more information about how configure cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
To upgrade fixed modulation to adaptive modulation configuration Caution: This is an Out-of-Service procedure. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
1.
that the system license key s adaptive modulation. For more information about how to display and update the system license key, see the ister software license.
2.
Open the radio channel view. Take a screen capture to save all radio channel provisioning information.
3.
Which type of radio direction configuration? a.
If 1+0 Not protected, go to step 6.
b.
If 1+1 protected, go to step 4.
4.
Mute the spare radio channel (channel #0).
5.
Set the radio direction Protection Type to No Protection.
6.
Is the ATPC enabled? a.
If yes, go to step 7.
b.
If no, go to step 8.
7.
Disable the ATPC (unchecked) and click on the Apply button.
8.
From the radio direction Mode drop-down menu, choose Adaptive Modulation and click on the Apply button. Note: If the sum of all TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections exceed the ed capacity for the reference channel at 4 QAM, the request to change modulation mode is rejected.
9.
Which type of radio direction configuration? a.
If 1+0 Not protected, go to step 10.
b.
If 1+1 protected, go to step 12.
10.
Set the radio direction Protection Type to 1+1 HSB(SD) or 1+1 FD.
11.
Unmute the spare radio channel (channel #0). Note: To complete the upgrade from fixed modulation to adaptive modulation both ends of the radio hop must be upgraded.
962
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
12.
that the radio direction is alarm free.
13.
that the radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
To downgrade adaptive modulation to fixed modulation configuration Caution: This is an Out-of-Service procedure. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
1.
Open the radio channel view. Take a screen capture to save all radio channel provisioning information.
2.
Which type of radio direction configuration? a.
If 1+0 Not protected, go to step 5.
b.
If 1+1 protected, go to step 3.
3.
Mute the spare radio channel (channel #0).
4.
Set the radio direction Protection Type to No Protection.
5.
From the radio direction Mode drop-down menu, choose Presetting and click on the Apply button.
6.
Which type of radio direction configuration? a.
If 1+0 Not protected, go to step 10.
b.
If 1+1 protected, go to step 12.
7.
Set the radio direction Protection Type to 1+1 HSB(SD) or 1+1 FD.
8.
Unmute the spare radio channel (channel #0).
9.
Provision the ATPC? a.
If yes, go to step 10.
b.
If no, go to step 12.
10.
Enable the ATPC (checked) and click on the Apply button.
11.
Configure the local ATPC Tx range, remote ATPC Rx threshold, and click on the Apply button. Note: To complete the upgrade from adaptive modulation to fixed modulation both ends of the radio hop must be downgraded.
12.
that the radio direction is alarm free.
13.
that they radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
963
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
964
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
74 — Upgrade and downgrade radio profile
74.1 — Purpose These procedures describe how to upgrade and downgrade radio profile on the 9500 MPR system.
74.2 — General The radio profile upgrade and downgrade procedures provide the general steps and sequence required to change protection scheme. The number of possible radio profile scenarios prevents covering all upgrade and downgrade possibilities.
74.3 — Radio profile Radio profile upgrade applies when the new radio profile has a capacity which is larger than the existing profile. In this case all the existing TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH cross-connections are kept and the residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM or TEM2ETH cross-connections are calculated. Radio profile downgrade applies when the new radio profile has a capacity which is smaller than the existing profile. When all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are ed by the new profile, all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections are kept and the residual bandwidth for new TDM2TDM and TEM2ETH cross-connections will be recomputed. When all the existing TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections can not be ed by the new profile, the request to change radio profile are rejected. Some existing TDM2TDM and/or TEM2ETH cross-connections must be deleted to achieve a bandwidth which is ed by the new radio profile.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
965
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual to determine card location and type.
74.4 — Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •
To upgrade a radio profile
•
To downgrade a radio profile
To upgrade a radio profile Caution: This is an Out-of-Service procedure. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
1.
that the system license key s the new radio profile. For information about how to display and upgrade the system license key, see ister software license.
2.
From the radio direction Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, select new channel bandwidth.
3.
From the radio direction Modulation drop-down menu, select the new modulation value.
4.
Click on the Apply button.
5.
the Tx power provisioning and adjust, as described in the site documentation. Note: To complete an upgrade of a radio profile, both ends of the radio hop must be upgraded.
6.
that the radio direction is alarm free.
7.
that the radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
To downgrade a radio profile Caution: This is an Out-of-Service procedure. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
966
1.
Open the radio channel view. Take a screen capture to save all radio channel provisioning information.
2.
From the radio direction Reference Channel Spacing drop-down menu, select the new channel bandwidth.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
3.
From the radio direction Modulation drop-down menu, select the new modulation value.
4.
Click on the Apply button. Note: If the sum of all TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH cross-connections exceed the ed capacity for the new radio channel, the request to change radio profile will be rejected.
5.
the Tx power provisioning and adjust, as described in the site documentation. Note: To complete downgrade of radio profile both ends of the radio hop must be downgraded.
6.
that the radio direction is alarm free.
7.
that the radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
967
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
968
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
75 — Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port
75.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to upgrade an In-Service MPT-HL radio hop to an MPT-HL configured as an L1 LAG Lowest Index Port. This procedure is not available if a CorEvo card is in use.
75.2 — General This upgrade procedure provides general steps and the sequence required to upgrade an MPT-HL radio port In-Service to an MPT-HL configured as an L1 LAG Lowest Index Port. ed configurations are as follows: •
1+0 to 1+0 L1 LAG Port
•
1+1 HSB to 1+1 HSB L1 LAG Port
•
1+1 FD to 1+1 L1 LAG Ports
Upgrade from an 1+1 FD to 2+0 L1 LAG Ports is not ed. To accomplish this upgrade perform the following steps: •
Down grade the 1+1 FD to 1+0 not protected, see Upgrade and downgrade protection for a detailed procedure.
•
Perform this procedure in its entirety
•
Add the second MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port
The MPT-HL radio ports to be upgraded to L1 LAG ports must reside in P8ETH card Ethernet port 5 or 7 to be a candidate for this upgrade procedure. The L1 LAG Lowest Index Port must be located in P8ETH card Ethernet port 5 or 7.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
969
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 General
During this procedure the following parameters are re-provisioned to the L1 LAG port: •
Cross-Connections
•
VLANs
•
Port Segregation
•
PPP-RF
•
Synchronization
The Max Bandwidth available for a radio port configured as an L1 LAG port member is ninety-five percent of the pre-migration MPT-HL radio port capacity. The reduction in Max Bandwidth must be ed for prior to migration to an L1 LAG port. Failure to for this reduction in Max Bandwidth may result in a loss of all cross-connected traffic after the migration to the L1 LAG port. TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH services ed by the L1 LAG port require a different amount of bandwidth then when ed by an MPT-HL radio port. The required bandwidth for cross-connected services must be recalculated to ensure that the cross-connected services do not exceed the Max Bandwidth of the new L1 LAG port. Failure to confirm that all services are ed by the new L1 LAG port may result in a loss of all cross-connected traffic after the migration to the L1 LAG port. For information regarding bandwidth required based upon type of service, see Table 75.1. To calculate the required bandwidth for cross-connected services, use the following equation: Required Bandwidth = (# DS1 TDM2TDM x 2080) + (# DS1 TDM2ETH x 1882) + (# DS3 TDM2TDM x 60264) + (# DS3 TDM2ETH x 46571) Table 75.1 — MPT-HL L1 LAG bandwidth per service type Type of service
L1 LAG bandwidth used [Kbps]
MPT-HL bandwidth used [Kbps]
DS1 TDM2TDM
2080
1683
DS1 TDM2Eth
1882
1694
DS3 TDM2TDM
60264
48756
DS3 TDM2Eth
46571
45574
Caution: Migration to L1 LAG port impacts TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH traffic on a per flowid basis. Typical impact to traffic is less than 10 seconds for each cross-connection. The time required for the system to migrate the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port is dependent upon radio port provisioning (synchronization, PPP RF, number of; port segregations, VLANs, and cross-connections). Typical migration duration is less than two minutes. Allow up to five minutes for the system to migrate all services from the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port. 970
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
The number of possible radio configurations precludes covering all possible radio configurations. A site survey and site documentation must be provided to ensure that facilities that are not associated with the upgrade MPT-HL radio direction are not impacted by this upgrade procedure. To complete the migration to an L1 LAG port, both ends of the MPT-HL radio direction must be migrated. Before starting this procedure, read and fully understand this procedure and all referenced procedures in their entirety. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for a detailed description of the L1 LAG feature and to determine card location and type.
75.3 — Procedure Danger: Circuit packs can be installed or removed with bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use extreme care when installing or removing circuit packs with power on. Warning: The following Warnings apply: • Circuit packs contain static-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by static discharge. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual for special handling instructions. • When installing a plug-in, ensure its backplane connector is correctly engaged before applying sufficient pressure to bring the plug-in flush with the front . Improper alignment can result in damaged pins on the backplane connector and/or damage to the plug-in connector. • Plug-ins must be withdrawn and inserted using their finger-grip fastener pulls. Never withdraw or insert using attached cables. Pulling on the cables may damage the cable, plug-in connector, and/or plug-in card connector attachment. • Failure to start both screws prior to tightening may cause screws to be cross threaded and possibly resulting in broken retaining screws.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
971
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
Caution: The following Cautions apply: • This is an In-Service procedure. • Upgrading an MPT-HL radio port to a L1 LAG port with cross-connections in excess of the ed Max Bandwidth will result in a loss of services on all cross-connected services associated with the L1 LAG port. • Migration to L1 LAG port impacts TDM2TDM and TDM2ETH traffic on a per flow-id basis. Typical impact to traffic is less than 10 seconds for each cross-connection. Note: To complete the MPT-HL L1 LAG Port, this procedure must be performed on both ends of the radio direction.
1.
that the NE is running R3.4.0 or higher software version.
2.
the MPT-HL radio channel is alarm/condition free and error free on both the near and far ends of the radio hop.
3.
there are no unexpected and unexplained alarm/abnormal conditions declared on the MSS-4/8 shelf ing both the near and far ends of the radio direction.
4.
that ninety-five percent of the MPT-HL radio channel bandwidth is sufficient to the existing cross-connected services when configured in an L1 LAG port.
5.
Perform a database backup. See MIB database management (backup and restore) for a detailed procedure to perform a database backup.
6.
If radio channel is configured in 1+1 HSB/FD configuration, that the radio link is active on the main radio hop on both the near and far ends of the radio link for the following:
7.
972
•
Equipment Protection Switching (EPS)
•
Hot StandBy (HSB)
•
Rx Radio (RPS)
If radio channel is configured in 1+1 HSB/FD configuration, perform Lockout protection switch for the following: •
Equipment Protection Switching (EPS)
•
Hot StandBy (HSB)
•
Rx Radio (RPS)
8.
If MPT-HL radio interface is configured for 1+1 FD, and the desired configuration is 2+0 L1 LAG port, downgrade radio protection to 1+0. See Upgrade and downgrade protection for a detailed procedure.
9.
and save the Current Configuration file. See View NE Inventory data for a detailed procedure to and save the current configuration file.
10.
Create L1 LAG port. See ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
11.
Add MPT-HL radio interface to L1 LAG port. See ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port. When you add the radio port to the L1 LAG port, the following message will display. Figure 75.1 — MPT-HL to L1 LAG information message
12.
Click on the OK button. After you click on the OK button, the following warning message will display. Figure 75.2 — MPT-HL to L1 LAG warning message
13.
Click on the Yes button.
14.
Wait for the system to migrate services to the L1 LAG port. The time required for the system to migrate the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port is dependent upon radio port provisioning (synchronization, PPP RF, number of; port segregations, VLANs, and cross-connections provisioned). Typical migration duration is two minutes or less. Allow up to five minutes for the system to migrate all services from the MPT-HL radio port to the L1 LAG port. When the system has completed migrating to the L1 LAG port you will be prompted to close the craft terminal.
15.
Close the craft terminal.
16.
Reopen the craft terminal and to the NE.
17.
that the radio direction is alarm free.
18.
that the radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
19.
and save the Current Configuration file.
20.
Using the Current Configuration files ed in steps 9 and 19, that the following provisioning parameters were re-provisioned correctly: •
Cross-Connections
•
VLANs
•
Port Segregation
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
973
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
21.
974
•
PPP-RF
•
Synchronization
If radio channel is configured in 1+1 HSB/FD configuration, release Lockout protection switch for the following: •
Equipment Protection Switching (EPS)
•
Hot StandBy (HSB)
•
Rx Radio (RPS)
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
76 — Upgrade MPT ODU to MPT ODU L1 LAG port
76.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to upgrade an Out-of-Service MPT-HC/MPT-XP/ 9558HC (MPT ODU) radio hop to an MPT ODU configured as the L1 LAG Master Port. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual for information about connecting fiber cable and installing SFPs.
76.2 — General This upgrade procedure provides general steps and the sequence required to upgrade an MPT ODU radio interface ed on an MPTACC card to an MPT ODU radio interface ed on an P8ETH card and configured as the L1 LAG Master Port. The L1 LAG Master Port must be located in P8ETH card Ethernet port 5 or 7. The number of possible radio configurations precludes covering all possible radio configurations. MPT ODU connected to an P8ETH card requires power provided by one of the following methods: •
MPT Power Unit
•
MPT Extended Power Unit (required for MPT-XP)
•
Power Injector Card
•
Power Injector Box
•
Direct connection to office power
•
MPTACC card
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
975
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
A site survey and site documentation must be provided to ensure that facilities that are not associated with the upgrade MPT ODU radio direction are not impacted by this upgrade procedure. Before the L1 LAG port is ready to carry traffic, this procedure must be performed at both ends of the radio hop. Before starting this procedure, read and fully understand this procedure and all referenced procedures in their entirety. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Product Information Manual to determine card location and type.
76.3 — Procedure Danger: Circuit packs can be installed or removed with bay power on. Hazardous electrical potentials are present; use extreme care when installing or removing circuit packs with power on. Warning: The following warnings apply: • Circuit packs contain static-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by static discharge. See the Alcatel-Lucent 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual for special handling instructions. • When installing a plug-in, ensure its backplane connector is correctly engaged before applying sufficient pressure to bring the plug-in flush with the front . Improper alignment can result in damaged pins on the backplane connector and/or damage to the plug-in connector. • Plug-ins must be withdrawn and inserted using their finger-grip fastener pulls. Never withdraw or insert using attached cables. Pulling on the cables may damage the cable, plug-in connector, and/or plug-in card connector attachment. • Failure to start both screws prior to tightening may cause screws to be cross threaded and possibly resulting in broken retaining screws. Caution: This is an Out-of-Service procedure. The radio direction being upgraded must be taken Out-of Service to complete this procedure. All remaining facilities that are not associated with the radio direction scheduled for upgrade, should not be impacted by this upgrade procedure. Schedule appropriate maintenance window per local practices and procedures.
976
1.
that the NE is running R3.4.0 or higher software version.
2.
Install power source as required per site documentation including running any new cabling between the power source and the MPT ODU. 9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
3.
Install optical Ethernet fiber from MSS-4/8 shelf to MPT ODU as required per site documentation.
4.
that the MPT ODU radio interface is not associated with the following: a.
Cross-Connection
b.
VLAN
c.
Port Segregation
d.
PPP RF enabled
e.
Synchronization reference
f.
SSM
5.
Perform a database backup. See MIB database management (backup and restore) for a detailed procedure to perform a database backup.
6.
If MPT ODU radio interface is configured for 1+1 HSB/FD/SD, downgrade radio protection to 1+0. See Upgrade and downgrade protection for a detailed procedure.
7.
Disable MPT ODU radio port from MPTACC card. See Disable equipment for a detailed procedure.
8.
If MPTACC PFoE is the power source for the MPT ODU, the power source is still configured for PFoE.
9.
If MPTACC card is to be replaced with P8ETH card to L1 LAG port. Perform the following actions:
10.
a.
no radio interfaces are ed on the remaining MPTACC radio interface. If there is a radio interface connected to the remaining MPTACC radio port, STOP this procedure immediately and the next level of !
b.
Disable MPTACC card. See Disable equipment for a detailed procedure.
c.
Remove the MPTACC card from the MSS-4/8 shelf.
d.
Install the P8ETH card into the MSS-4/8 shelf.
/enable P8ETH card to L1 LAG port.
Note: Electrical SFPs are not ed for interconnection between P8ETH SFP port and MPT ODU.
11.
Install SFP into the P8ETH radio port and connect fiber cable to SFP. L1 LAG Master port must reside in P8ETH Ethernet port 5 or 7.
12.
Install SFP into the MPT ODU data port and connect the fiber cable to the SFP per site documentation.
13.
Provision MPT ODU radio interface.
14.
If MPTACC PFoE/SMA connector is the power source for the MPT ODU, the Ethernet/coax cable remains connected and will be used to power the MPT ODU.
15.
If MPTACC PFoE is the power source for the MPT ODU, perform one of the following:
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
977
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedure
a.
Disable the power source. Then provision the power source for PFoE. See Configure radio parameters for a detailed procedure to provision MPT ODU power scheme.
b.
Unplug and reinsert the PFoE Ethernet cable on the MPTACC card.
16.
Create L1 LAG port. See ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port.
17.
Add MPT ODU radio interface to L1 LAG port. See ister L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports for a detailed procedure to create L1 LAG port. Note: To complete the MPT ODU L1 LAG Port, this procedure must be performed on both ends of the radio hop.
978
18.
that the radio direction is alarm free.
19.
that the radio direction is error free and operating as expected.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
77 — Perform Tx Diversity Antenna operations
77.1 — Purpose This chapter provides the procedures to perform transmit antenna diversity operations in Web Server. Transmit Diversity Antenna is only available in the ANSI market, with MPTHLC in 1+1 HSB configuration. The Tx Diversity Antenna (TDA) webpage displays a list of configured 1+1 HSB radio directions with MPT-HLC. Note: All MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB radio directions are displayed on the Tx Diversity Antenna webpage, however, the TDA feature is operational only if the radio is equipped with the dual relay switch assembly and connected to a diversity antenna.
The Tx Diversity Antenna webpage allows you to enable or disable TDA, view TDA status, and perform manual force operations.
77.2 — Procedures This section provides the procedures to perform Tx Diversity Antenna operations. 1.
From the istration menu, select Tx Diversity Antenna. The Tx Diversity Antenna webpage appears; see Figure 77.1.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
979
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 77.1 — Tx Diversity Antenna webpage
2.
Perform any of the following procedures, as required: •
To enable TDA
•
To disable TDA
•
To view TDA status
•
To force transmission to the main antenna
•
To force transmission to the diversity antenna
•
To clear forced transmission
To enable TDA
980
1.
Select a radio direction in the Available MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB .
2.
Click Enable TDA. A confirmation message is displayed; see Figure 77.2.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures Figure 77.2 — Tx Diversity Antenna enabled
TDA is enabled. To disable TDA 1.
Select a radio direction in the Available MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB .
2.
Click Disable TDA. A confirmation message is displayed; see Figure 77.3. Figure 77.3 — Tx Diversity Antenna disabled
TDA is disabled. To view TDA status 1.
Select a radio direction in the Available MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB .
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
981
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures 2.
Click Get TDA Status. Information is displayed, showing whether TDA is enabled, the active antenna and whether the antenna has been forced; see Figure 77.4. Figure 77.4 — Tx Diversity Antenna Status
To force transmission to the main antenna 1.
Select a radio direction in the Available MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB .
2.
Click Force Main. A confirmation message is displayed; see Figure 77.5. Figure 77.5 — Tx Diversity: Force Main
982
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures If TDA is disabled, an error message is displayed: Error: cannot apply command. To force transmission to the diversity antenna 1.
Select a radio direction in the Available MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB .
2.
Click Force Diversity. A confirmation message is displayed; see Figure 77.5. If TDA is disabled, an error message is displayed: Error: cannot apply command. If the antenna RF switch is not detected prior to the command, switching is blocked and the TDA status continues to show the main antenna as active.
To clear forced transmission 1.
Select a radio direction in the Available MPT-HLC 1+1 HSB .
2.
Click Clear Force. A confirmation message is displayed; see Figure 77.6. Figure 77.6 — Tx Diversity: Clear Force
If TDA is disabled, an error message is displayed: Error: cannot apply command.
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
983
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01 Procedures
984
9500 MPR WebEML Manual
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
Customer documentation and product Customer documentation http://documentation.alcatel-lucent.com
Technical http://.alcatel-lucent.com
Documentation [email protected]
Release 6.1.0 3DB 19286 ABAA Edition 01
© 2016 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Related Documents 3m3m1z
9500 Mpr Webeml Manual 3t1tj
February 2021 0
9500 Mpr Webeml Manual 3t1tj
November 2019 182
9500 Mpr Datasheet 5hk12
November 2019 39
9500 Mpr Mpt-gc R4.0.0 Manual 3db19025aaaa_02.pdf 581gs
December 2019 41
9500 Mpr Installation Test And Turn Up_r4.2 75s6k
December 2019 56
Rm-9500 6q6d43
December 2019 52More Documents from "Leo" 5x6w3h
Bee Gees - Lonely Days Cifra 291ns
November 2019 79
Linde Hpr 02 Datasheet 573a4v
December 2019 132
Como Introducir Texto E Imagenes En Una Hp50g 2d6751
January 2021 0
The American Legacy To The Philippines - Research Paper (philhis) 6r6n6n
August 2021 0
Aula 10-08 b5w6z
July 2022 0